PROJECT M ANUAL Project No.: 11-0122
I ssue Date: January 15, 2013
ARCHITECT: Cuningham Group Architecture, I nc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414
Farmington Elementary School Additions and Remodeling 500 MapleStreet Farmington, Minnesota55024
Volume I : General Construction
OWNER: Farmington Area Public Schools I SD 192 421 Walnut Street Farmington, Minnesota 55024
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE DATE:
January 15, 2013
PROJECT:
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING 500 MAPLE STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
PROJECT NO.:
11-0122 - Volumes One and Two Volume One - General Construction Specifications Volume Two - Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
BID DATE:
February 6, 2013
BID TIME:
11:00 A.M., Local Time
OWNER:
FARMINGTON AREA PUBLIC SCHOOLS ISD 192 421 WALNUT STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
ARCHITECT:
Cuningham Group Architecture, Inc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414 Telephone: (612) 379-3400 Facsimile: (612) 379-4400
CONSULTING CIVIL/ STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS:
BKBM 5930 Brooklyn Boulevard Minneapolis, Minnesota 55429 Telephone: (763) 843-0420 Facsimile: (763) 843-0421
CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS:
Hallberg Engineering 1750 Commerce Court White Bear Lake, Minnesota 55110 Telephone: (651) 748-1100 Facsimile: (651) 748-9370
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
S:\11\0122\frontend\000101CGA.doc
000101 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
HARDWARE CONSULTANT: (ARCHITECT’S CONSULTANT)
INGERSOLL-RAND 6230 Bury Drive Eden Prairie, MN 55346 Telephone: (952) 674-4942 Facsimilie: (952) 674-4962 Cell: (612) 749-4125
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONSULTANT:
Robert Rippe & Associates 6117 Blue Circle Drive, Suite 100 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55343 Telephone: (952) 933-0313 Facsimile: ((52) 933-9661
END OF DOCUMENT
000101 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
S:\11\0122\frontend\000101CGA.doc
Addition and Remodeling
CIVIL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
Farmington Elementary School
I hereby certify that Sections From Division 1, 2, 10, 31, and 32 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: BKBM.
Engineer’s Signature: Thomas J. Cesare, P.E. Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 27031
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
I hereby certify that Sections From Divisions 1, 3, 4, and 5 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: BKBM.
Engineer’s Signature: Tina Wyffels, P.E. Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 42758
000105 2 of 4 Printed on 1/15/2013
CERTIFICATIONS AND SEALS F:\11\11377\Specifications\000105CGA.BKBM FES 2013 01 15.doc
Farmington Elementary School
MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
Addition and Remodeling
I hereby certify that Divisions 21-25 of this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: Hallberg Engineering. Engineer’s Signature: Brian W. Gibson, P.E. ______________________________________ Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 45868
I hereby certify that Divisions 26-28 of this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: Hallberg Engineering. Engineer’s Signature: Paul J. Fettinger, P.E. ______________________________________ Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 43079
CERTIFICATIONS AND SEALS I:\Projects\Cuningham\R11-1142.000\Spec\Front End\000105CGA.doc
000105 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Note: Items Written in Italics are intended to indicate author of Specification section ONLY and are NOT intended to exclude work from Contractors Scope of Work.
VOLUME ONE: INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION ***** 000101 000105 000110 000115
Cover Sheet Project Title Page Certifications and Seals Table of Contents List of Drawing Sheets
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 001113
Advertisement for Bids
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROCUREMENT 002100 002213 002513 003100
Instructions to Bidders (AIA Doc. A701-97) Supplementary Instructions to Bidders Pre-Bid Meeting Information Available to Bidders Attachment: Geotechnical Report Attachment: ACM report
PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 004113 004325 004343
Bid Proposal Form (Stipulated Sum) Substitution Request Form Prevailing Wage Rates Attachment: Dakota County Wage Rates
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 006000
007200 007313 007350
Project Forms Bonds Release of Liens Certificates (Contractor’s Affidavits) Certificate of Substantial Completion Certificate or Final Completion General Conditions (AIA Document A201-2007) Supplementary General Conditions (Stipulated Sum-2007) Project Labor Agreement Attachment: A, B and C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\000110CGA.doc
007380
Special Conditions of the Contract, Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages
SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011100 012100 012200 012300 013113 014100 014200 014300 014400 014500 014523 014533 015000 015713 016000 017123 017300 017400 017500 017700 017800 017823 017836 017839 017900
Summary of Work Allowances Unit Prices Alternates Project Coordination Regulatory Requirements Reference Quality Assurance Existing Utilities Quality Control Testing and Inspection Services Structural Testing and Special Inspection Attachment: Testing and Inspection Schedule Temporary Facilities and Controls Erosion and Sediment Controls Product Requirements Field Engineering Execution Requirements Cleaning Starting and Adjusting Closeout Procedures Closeout Submittals Operation and Maintenance Data Warranties and Bonds Project Record Documents Demonstrations and Training
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 024113 024119
Selective Site Demolition Minor Demolition for Remodeling
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 031000 031510 032000 033000 034113
Concrete Forming and Accessories Post-Installed Anchors Concrete Reinforcing Cast-in-Place Concrete Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 042000 042731
Unit Masonry Systems Reinforced Unit Masonry
000110 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/17/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
DIVISION 5 - METALS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
051200 052100 053100 054000 055000 055100
101100 Visual Display Boards 101400 Identifying Devices 102113.19 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 102600 Wall and Corner Guards 102810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties
Structural Steel Framing Steel Joist Framing Steel Decking Cold-Formed Metal Framing Metal Fabrications Metal Stairs and Railings
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
061000 061600 061643 062000 064000
111300 114000
Rough Carpentry Sheathing ( Plywood, etc.) Exterior Sheathing Board (Dens-Glas) Finish Carpentry Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071050 072100 072726 074616 07520 075310 075320 076200 078400 079200
Preparation for Re-Roofing Building Insulation Weather Resistant Barriers Preformed Metal Siding Modified Bituminous Roof and Restoration Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Fire-Stopping Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 081100 081416 083300 084100 085113 086250 087100 088100 089100
Steel Doors and Frames Wood Doors Coiling Doors and Grilles Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Aluminum Windows Tubular Skylights Door Hardware Glass and Glazing Wall Louvers
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Systems 093000 Tiling 095100 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 096500 Resilient Flooring and Base 096800 Carpeting 097750 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 098000 Acoustical Treatment 099000 Paints and Coatings 000110 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/17/2013
Loading Dock Equipment Food Service Equipment (by consultant)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122000
Window Treatment
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 310000 311000
Earthwork (Broad Scope) Site Clearing
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 321313 329200
Asphalt Concrete Paving Exterior Concrete Paving Lawns and Grasses
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (Not used)
VOLUME TWO: DIVISIONS 21-29 – Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical Table of Contents will be included in each division. END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\000110CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
The Drawing Sheets on G-001 are included as part of the Contract Documents. See Drawings.
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
S:\11\0122\frontend\000115CGA.doc
000115 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. The FARMINGTON AREA P UBLIC S CHOOLS will receive sealed B ids for a Stipulated S um Single Prime C ontract f or G eneral C onstruction; including Mech anical Air H andling U nit S ystem Replacement an d U pgrades; Cafeteria/Kitchen and Loading D ock A ddition; Remodeling; R eroof a nd New R oofing; an d I nfrastructure Updates for t he FARMINGTON E LEMENTARY S CHOOL ADDITION A ND R EMODELING at 11:00 a.m. local time, on Wednesday, February 6, 2013, at the DISTRICT SERVICE C ENTER, 4 21 W ALNUT STREET, F ARMINGTON, M INNESOTA, 55024 at w hich tim e B ids w ill b e opened publicly and read al oud. P roposals s hall b e m ade i n d uplicate on t he B id P roposal F orm ( Document 004113) furnished in the Project Manual w ith t he B idder's signature i n l onghand. N o o ral o r electronically transmitted p roposals o r m odifications w ill be considered.
1.2
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. A cer tified check o r acceptable Bidder's Bond payable t o t he P ROJECT O WNER i n an amount equal to f ive p ercent ( 5%) o f t he T otal B ase B id shall b e s ubmitted w ith each B id i n acco rdance with th e I nstructions to B idders. The successful Bidder[s] will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond (Document 006100). B. Bids m ust b e ty pewritten o r written legibly in ink on forms provided herein, and all applicable spaces on the forms shall be filled out. Unsigned bids will not be considered. C. The P ROJECT O WNER r eserves t he right to accept or to reject any o r al l B ids, an d w aive formalities or irregularities in Bidding. No Bidder may withdraw h is Bid within sixty ( 60) d ays a fter the scheduled tim e o f B id O pening, w ithout th e written consent of the OWNER. D. Mandatory P re-bid M eeting: R efer to S ection 002513.
1.3
BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Bidding D ocuments w ill be a vailable f or examination a nd d istribution o n or after January 16, 2013. Documents may be examined at: St. Paul Builder’s Exchange
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS S:\11\0122\frontend\001113CGA.doc
445 Farrington Street St. Paul, Minnesota 55103 Telephone: (651) 224-7545 Minneapolis Builder’s Exchange 1123 Glenwood Avenue Minneapolis, Minnesota 55405 Telephone: (612) 381-2620 Reed Construction www.reedplans.com Telephone: (800) 424 -3996 McGraw-Hill Construction 1401 Glenwood Avenue North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55405 Telephone: (612) 381-2290 National Council of Minority Contractors Plan Room 4801 Fourth Avenue South Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 Telephone: (612) 827-2211 Albert Lea Builder’s Exchange 701 Marshall Albert Lea, Minnesota 56007 Telephone: (507) 373-0344 Austin Builder’s Exchange 329 North Main Street, Suite 102 Austin, Minnesota 55912 Telephone: (507) 437-4561 Builders Exchange of Rochester 108 Elton Hills Lane NW Rochester, Minnesota 55901 Telephone: (507) 282-6531 St. Cloud Builders Exchange 1106th Avenue South St. Cloud, Minnesota 56301-3621 Telephone: (320) 251-0081 Mankato Builders Exchange 75 Navaho Avenue, Suite 1 Mankato, Minnesota 56001 Telephone: (507) 387-3001 B. Bidders may o btain co pies o f t he Contract Documents at: ARC 3005 Ranchview Lane North 001113 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/14/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Plymouth, Minnesota 55447 Phone: 763-694-5900 Fax: 763-694-0216 Email:
[email protected] . C. If complete s ets o f B idding D ocuments ar e t o b e delivered by mail or U PS, B idders s hall in clude a separate, n on-refundable check i n t he a mount o f twenty-five dol lars ( $25.00) pe r c omplete s et to cover cost of shipping and handling. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be made available. D. Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor a nd s ubcontractors to maintain policies of e mployment u nder pr ovisions of a pplicable Federal a nd S tate la ws against discrimination, including, but n ot lim ited to , C ivil R ights A ct o f 1964 and Minnesota Statue 363 (These documents may be reviewed at the Office of the Architect). E. The accepted Bidder will be required to enter into a Contract w ith th e P ROJECT O WNER o n th e Standard F orm o f Agreement B etween O wner and Contractor (005200). 1.4
Farmington Elementary School D. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF THE BIDDER’S MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OF WORK INVOLVED, THE CONTRACTORS OWN ERROR OR NEGLIGENCE, OR FAILURE TO EXAMINE THE SITE. Lack of knowledge of the conditions pertaining to t he W ork s hall no t r elieve t he Contractor from performing a ll t he W ork re quired to complete performance of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF DOCUMENT
SITE REVIEW A. Prior to s ubmitting a B id f or the Work, the Contractor i s r equired an d ex pected t o h ave examined the project site an d p remises, an d b e thoroughly familiarized with the existing conditions under which t he C ontractor w ill be obl igated t o operate or which will in any way affect the Work under this Contract. B. Bidders a nd s ub-bidders ar e f urther cau tioned to familiarize themselves with the contents, alternates, revisions, addenda, General Conditions, Special Conditions, t echnical provisions o f th e Specifications, Drawings and t he W ork o f o ther Contractors. Should the Bidder find discrepancies, or o missions i n t he B idding D ocuments, or should there be doubt as to the intent, the Architect should be n otified at o nce, w ho m ay, i f necessary, i ssue written instructions to all Bidders. C. Any apparent variance in Bidding Documents from conditions as they exist at the site shall be called to the at tention o f t he A rchitect b efore b ids ar e received. Failure to comply with the above shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
001113 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/14/2013
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
S:\11\0122\frontend\001113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 002100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Instructions to B idders - AIA D ocument A701, 1997 Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS S:\11\0122\frontend\002100CGA.doc
002100 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The following supplements modify, change, delete, from or a dd t o t he " Instructions t o B idders", A IA D ocument A701, 1997 E dition. W here Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause is modified o r d eleted b y t hese supplements, th e u naltered p rovisions of the A rticle, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS
3.3.6. Substitution requests shall be submitted on a duplicate o f th e f orm p rovided in the Contract Documents. 3.4
Subparagraph 3.4.3. in the first line; delete “four days” and substitute “seven (7) days”.
Add the following new Subparagraph 1.10 as follows: 1.10 "Sub-subbidder i s a pe rson or entity who submits a bid to a sub-bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work."
ADDENDA
ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1
FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS
Delete all of Subparagraph 4.1.1 and substitute the following:
ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS
4.1.1 “Bids s hall b e s ubmitted o n a duplicate of the Bid Proposal Form (Document 004113) bound in the P roject M anual. A ny m odification of the Bid Form except pr oviding t he r equested i nformation shall be grounds for rejection of the Bid.”
3.2
INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS Add the following new Subparagraph: 3.2.4 Architect will not be responsible in any way for verbal answers t o i nquiries r egarding meaning of Drawings and Project Manual. 3.3
Add to Subparagraph 4.1.5 the following: “Failure to bid an Alternate may result in rejection of the Bid.”
SUBSTITUTIONS
Delete Subparagraph 4.1.6 in its entirety, and substitute: Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.2.1: 4.1.6 “Where separate P rime C ontract B ids h ave been requested for two or more portions of the Work, a B idder may s ubmit a C ombined B id for several of the designated portions of the Work. The Bidder is not required to s ubmit in dividual B ids o n th ose portions of work contained within the Combined Bid.”
3.3.2.1 The Architect’s review shall be based on the Drawings a nd S pecifications. W ith r egard to products e xposed t o v iew a t c ompletion of t he Project, t he ae sthetics of t he pr oposed pr oduct substitution s hall b e a “ salient f eature” of the Architects review. Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.5: 3.3.5 Substitution of materials, e quipment a nd systems indicated in the Project Manual as “NO SUBSTITUTIONS A LLOWED” w ill n ot b e considered by the Architect. Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.6: SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS S:\11\0122\frontend\002213CGA.doc
4.2
BID SECURITY
Delete the first and second sentences of Subparagraph 4.2.1. and substitute the following: 4.2.1 "Each B id s hall be acco mpanied b y a bid security in the form of a certified check or acceptable 002213 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
Bid Bond payable without conditions to the Owner in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Total Bid (Base Bid and Alternates). The certified check or Bid Bond i s a gu arantee that the B idder will e nter into a Contract with the O wner for t he W ork de scribed i n the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor will furnish a P erformance B ond a nd P ayment B ond (Document 006100), and Certificates of Insurance as specified." Add subparagraph 4.2.3.1 as follows: 4.2.3.1 The Bid S ecurity of the two (2) lowest Bidders w ill b e r etained u ntil th e Contract has been awarded and executed, but not longer than sixty (60) days. O ther deposits will be returned within ten (10) days after the Bid opening. 4.4
MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
6.1.1 "Bidders t o w hom a ward of C ontract i s under c onsideration shall submit to the Architect upon request, ev idence s atisfactory t o t he A rchitect that C ontractor h as, t he ex perience n ecessary t o perform t he W ork as i ndicated in the Contract Documents. Failure to p rovide s atisfactory ev idence shall be cause for disqualification of the Bidder."
Add new Article 9 as follows:
ARTICLE 9 - ALTERNATES 9.1
REINSTATEMENT OF ALTERNATE BID PROPOSAL 9.1.1 "The Owner reserves t he r ight t o r einstate any Alternate, rejected or accep ted, at t ime o f Contract award at the sum proposed by the successful Contractor, provided s uch r einstatement i s m ade within sixty (60) days after the Bid Opening."
Delete Subparagraph 4.4.1 and substitute the following: 4.4.1 "A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder for a period of sixty (60) days following the time and date designated for the receipt of B ids, a nd e ach B idder s o a grees i n submitting his Bid."
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: 5.3
ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)
Add the following new Subparagraph: 5.3.3 "The Owner reserves the right to award Contracts for a period of sixty (60) days after receipt of the Bids."
ARTICLE 6 - POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1
CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT
QUALIFICATION
Delete Subparagraph 6.1.1and substitute the following:
002213 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
S:\11\0122\frontend\002213CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 002513 - PRE-BID MEETING 1.1
PURPOSE A. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting will be held prior to the date required for th e submission of Bids. All General Contractors an d First-Tier M echanical Subcontractors are required to a ttend one meeting in o rder t o b etter u nderstand t he Project, and for the dissemination of in formation a nd c larification of the intent of the Bidding Documents. Responses to questions that result in a change in the Contract Documents will be published in an Addendum following the conference.
1.2
PRE-BID MEETING-MANDATORY A. The Mandatory Pre-Bid M eetings will b e conducted b y t he A rchitect at FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL, 5 00 M APLE STREET, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024. The Owner w ill h ave a r epresentative at t he meeting. B. The Pre-Bid Meetings will be held on: January 21, 2013 at 1 0:00 a.m. and J anuary 28, 2013 a t 10:00 a.m.
1.3
SITE VISITATION A. Bidders may visit th e P roject s ite to f amiliarize themselves with the local conditions. T he Owner shall ha ve c ontinuous o ccupancy, a nd Contractors shall c heck in w ith O wner a t th e Administration Office prior to visiting site.
END OF SECTION
PRE-BID MEETING
S:\11\0122\frontend\002513CGA.doc
002513 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 003100 - INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 2. If, i n t he c ourse o f t he W ork, the Contractors are r equired t o d emolish ar eas w here they suspects t he p resence o f l ead p aint materials (LPM), they shall immediately notify the Owner. T he O wner will ve rify the p resence of LPM, and if present, will remove it.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Information That is Made A vailable to B idders, But T hat is N ot I ntended to b e I ncluded in th e Contract.
C. If any q uestions ar ise r egarding h ow to r ecognize lead paint materials (LPM), or what steps to take in its removal or clean-up, please contact:
1. Possible Existing Conditions. 2. Geotechnical Data.
Minnesota Department of Health Lead Program 925 Delaware Street SE Minneapolis, MN 55459-0040 Telephone: (612) 627-5498
3. Site Survey. 1.2
USE OF INFORMATION PROVIDED A. Bidders ar e ex pected t o r eview in formation available to Bidders prior to submitting a Bid, and obtain additional information if they desire.
1.4
A. Owner supplied information is pr ovided on ly f or information and co nvenience t o the Bidders. The Owner and A rchitect d isclaim a ny r esponsibility for accuracy of information that has been prepared by others. T hey further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that information by Bidders.
B. The Owner will not consider requests for additional compensation f or e xtra w ork du e t o conditions which reasonably could have been anticipated from the information provided. C. The b uilding kno wn as FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL may have been constructed with a sbestos c ontaining m aterials (ACM) and lead paint materials (LPM). 1.3
1.5
1. Geotechnical Data Prepared By:
A. Asbestos Abatement:
a. Gregory J . B ialon, P .E., License Number 24017, of
1. It is th e intent o f th e Owner to r emove kno wn ACM from s elected ar eas o f t he b uildings effected by construction. T he O wner w ill n ot warrant t hat al l A CM h ave b een i dentified o r removed.
B. Lead Paint Materials: 1. It is the intent of t he Owner t o remove known LPM f rom s elected ar eas o f t he b uildings affected by construction. T he O wner w ill n ot warrant that all LPM h ave b een i dentified o r removed.
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS S:\11\0122\frontend\003100CGA.doc
GEOTECHNICAL DATA A. A copy o f t he G eotechnical D ata ( Soil B oring Report) is bound directly behind this Section.
POSSIBLE EXISTING CONDITIONS
2. If in the course o f t he W ork, t he C ontractors suspects t he p resence o f A CM, t hey shall immediately notify the Owner,. The Owner will verify the presence of ACM, and if present, will remove it.
INTERPRETATION
b. Braun Intertec C orporation, 6801 Washington A venue S outh, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55439, (612) 941-5600, c. Dated September 7, 2012 1.6
EXISTING SITE SURVEY A. The E xisting S ite S urvey i s reproduced on the Drawings. 1. Existing Site Survey Prepared By: a. Mark E. S evertson, P .S., L icense N umber 18887, of b. McGhie & B etts, I nc., 1 648 Third Avenue S.E., Rochester, MN 55904 c.
Dated December 18, 2012.
003100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
END OF DOCUMENT
003100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
S:\11\0122\frontend\003100CGA.doc
Table of Contents Description A.
B.
C.
D.
Page
Introduction......................................................................................................................................1 A.1. Project Description..............................................................................................................1 A.2. Purpose................................................................................................................................1 A.3. Background Information and Reference Documents..........................................................1 A.4. Site Conditions.....................................................................................................................1 A.5. Scope of Services.................................................................................................................2 Results ..............................................................................................................................................2 B.1. Boring Locations ..................................................................................................................2 B.2. Exploration Logs ..................................................................................................................3 B.2.a. Log of Boring Sheets...............................................................................................3 B.2.b. Geologic Origins .....................................................................................................3 B.3. Geologic Profile ...................................................................................................................3 B.3.a. Topsoil Fill...............................................................................................................3 B.3.b. Pavement Section...................................................................................................3 B.3.c. Fill and Possible Fill.................................................................................................4 B.3.d. Glacial Deposits ......................................................................................................4 B.3.e. Groundwater ..........................................................................................................4 B.4. Laboratory Test Results.......................................................................................................5 Basis for Recommendations.............................................................................................................5 C.1. Building Construction ..........................................................................................................5 C.2. Grade Changes ....................................................................................................................5 C.3. Precautions Regarding Changed Information .....................................................................5 C.4. Design Considerations.........................................................................................................6 Recommendations ...........................................................................................................................6 D.1. Site Grading and Building Subgrade Preparation................................................................6 D.1.a. Excavations.............................................................................................................6 D.1.b. Excavation Support.................................................................................................8 D.1.c. Placement and Compaction of Backfill and Fill ......................................................8 D.2. Spread Footings...................................................................................................................9 D.2.a. Embedment Depth .................................................................................................9 D.2.b. Net Allowable Bearing Pressure.............................................................................9 D.2.c. Settlement..............................................................................................................9 D.3. Interior Slabs .....................................................................................................................10 D.3.a. Subgrade Modulus ...............................................................................................10 D.3.b. Moisture Vapor Protection ..................................................................................10 D.4. Pavements.........................................................................................................................10 D.4.a. Pavement Subgrade Preparation .........................................................................10 D.4.b. Pavement Reclamation ........................................................................................11
Table of Contents (continued) Description
E.
F.
Page
D.4.c. Subgrade Proofroll ...............................................................................................11 D.4.d. Bituminous Design Sections .................................................................................12 D.4.e. Materials and Compaction ...................................................................................12 D.4.f. Subgrade Drainage ...............................................................................................13 D.5. Frost Protection.................................................................................................................13 D.5.a. Exterior Slabs........................................................................................................13 D.5.b. Bituminous Pavements.........................................................................................13 D.6. Utilities ..............................................................................................................................13 D.6.a. Excavation ............................................................................................................13 D.6.b. Backfill ..................................................................................................................14 D.7. Construction Quality Control ............................................................................................14 D.7.a. Excavation Observations ......................................................................................14 D.7.b. Materials Testing..................................................................................................14 D.7.c. Pavement Subgrade Proof-Roll ............................................................................14 Procedures......................................................................................................................................15 E.1. Penetration Test Borings...................................................................................................15 E.2. Material Classification and Testing ...................................................................................15 E.2.a. Visual and Manual Classification..........................................................................15 E.2.b. Laboratory Testing ...............................................................................................15 E.3. Groundwater Measurements............................................................................................15 Qualifications..................................................................................................................................15 F.1. Variations in Subsurface Conditions..................................................................................15 F.1.a. Material Strata .....................................................................................................15 F.1.b. Groundwater Levels .............................................................................................16 F.2. Continuity of Professional Responsibility..........................................................................16 F.2.a. Plan Review ..........................................................................................................16 F.2.b. Construction Observations and Testing ...............................................................16 F.3. Use of Report.....................................................................................................................16 F.4. Standard of Care................................................................................................................17
Appendix Boring Location Sketch Log of Boring Sheets ST-1 to ST- 10 Grain Size Accumulation Curve for Aggregate Base Sample Descriptive Terminology
A.
Introduction
A.1. Project Description We understand the project will include an expansion to the northeast corner of the existing building in the cafeteria area, remodeling of several classrooms throughout the building, as well as pavement reconstruction of the bus loop located on the south end of the parcel and a small section of bituminous on the west end of the building.
A.2. Purpose The purpose of this geotechnical evaluation is to assist ISD #192 and their design team in evaluating the soil and groundwater conditions in the area of the proposed development and to provide recommendations for design and construction of foundations, slabs on grade, utilities, and pavements.
A.3. Background Information and Reference Documents To facilitate our evaluation, we were provided with or reviewed the following information or documents:
Site map provided by ISD #192 titled “Site and Grading Plan” containing pavement boring locations.
Remodeling plan by Cunningham Group titled “Recommended Soil Boring Locations” dated August 15, 2012.
Discussions with Greg Hultman of Hultman Group regarding project scope.
A.4. Site Conditions Currently the site is occupied by the Farmington Elementary School. The area on the northeast corner that is will be occupied by the cafeteria expansion is currently a green space with some tree cover. The bus loop and drive lanes are located on the south end of the site. There are several spots of pavement that have settled, causing ponding to occur.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 2
A.5. Scope of Services Our scope of services for this project was originally submitted as a Proposal to ISD #192 dated August 17, 2012. Tasks completed in accordance with our authorized scope of services are described below.
Staking the boring locations at the locations selected by ISD #192 and determining ground surface elevations at the boring locations.
Coordinating the locating of underground public and private utilities near the boring locations.
Conducting 2 standard penetration borings in the proposed building areas to a nominal depth of 25 feet below existing grade and 8 standard penetration borings in the proposed parking and drive lane areas to a nominal depth of 5 feet below existing grade feet below existing grade.
Classifying the samples and preparing boring logs.
Conducting a limited laboratory testing program.
Analyzing the results of the field and laboratory tests.
Formulating recommendations and submitting a geotechnical evaluation report containing logs of the borings, our analysis of the field and laboratory tests, and recommendations for design of foundations, slabs on grade, utilities, and pavements.
B.
Results
B.1. Boring Locations The soil boring locations and surface elevations were determined using GPS (Global Positioning System) technology that uses the Minnesota Department of Transportation's permanent GPS Virtual Reference Network (VRN). The boring locations are shown on the attached sketch. Prior to commencing with our subsurface exploration activities, we coordinated the clearing of the soil boring locations of public utilities through Gopher State One Call. Private utilities were located with the assistance of Kole Hance.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 3
B.2. Exploration Logs B.2.a. Log of Boring Sheets Log of Boring sheets for our penetration test borings are included in the Appendix. The logs identify and describe the geologic materials that were penetrated, the results of penetration resistance and laboratory tests performed on penetration test samples retrieved from them, and groundwater observations. Strata boundaries were inferred from changes in the penetration test samples and the drill auger cuttings. Because sampling was not performed continuously, the strata boundary depths are only approximate. The boundary depths likely vary away from the boring locations, and the boundaries themselves may also occur as gradual rather than abrupt transitions.
B.2.b. Geologic Origins Geologic origins presented for each stratum on the Log of Boring sheets are based on the soil types, blows per foot, and available common knowledge of the geological history of the site. Because of the complex glacial and post-glacial depositional environments, geologic origins can be difficult to ascertain. A detailed investigation of the geologic history of the site was not performed.
B.3. Geologic Profile The types of soils encountered in the borings are described below. The soils are generally described in the order they were encountered; i.e., beginning at the ground surface. Please see the soil boring logs in the appendix for a more in depth summary of the observed soils.
B.3.a. Topsoil Fill Topsoil fill was encountered at Borings ST-09 and ST-10 with thicknesses of about 1 ½ feet. The topsoil fill encountered by our soil borings consisted of silty sand and sandy lean clay.
B.3.b. Pavement Section Borings ST-01 through ST-08 were performed through the existing pavement and encountered a bituminous pavement thickness ranging from 4 to 6 ½ inches. An apparent aggregate base layer was observed in 6 of the 8 pavements borings below the bituminous pavement with thicknesses ranging from 1 to 10 inches. Borings ST-02 and ST-04 did not encounter an apparent aggregate base layer. The total pavement section thicknesses encountered ranged from 4 to 14 ½ inches.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 4
B.3.c. Fill and Possible Fill Beneath the topsoil fill and pavement section, the borings encountered fill to depths of 4 to 6 feet below the surface. The fill encountered by the borings consisted of poorly graded sand with silt, silty sand, clayey sand, sandy lean clay, lean clay and organic clay. The penetration resistances recorded in the fill varied from 4 to 21 blows per foot (BPF). While most of the fill appeared to have been placed with some compactive effort, there are some areas where the fill was loose.
B.3.d. Glacial Deposits Beneath the pavement, topsoil and fill, the borings encountered glacial deposits consisting of poorly graded sand and poorly graded sand with silt. The penetration resistances recorded in the cohesionless (sand) soils varied from 6 to 19 BPF, indicating a loose to medium dense relative density.
B.3.e. Groundwater Groundwater was encountered in Borings ST-09 and ST-10 and was measured to be located at the depths shown below in Table 1. Corresponding groundwater elevations were determined from comparisons of the measured/estimated depths to groundwater and surface elevations, and were rounded to the highest ½-foot. Table 1. Groundwater Summary
Location
Surface Elevation
Measured or Estimated Depth to Groundwater (ft)
Corresponding Groundwater Elevation (ft)
ST-09 ST-10
905.5 905.8
11 ½ 13 ½
894 892 ½
Based on the groundwater measurements during our subsurface exploration, we assume groundwater will be encountered near elevation 894. Perched water may occur at higher elevations across the site especially in fill. Seasonal and annual fluctuations of groundwater, however, should be anticipated.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 5
B.4. Laboratory Test Results Selected soil samples were submitted to our laboratory for testing. The laboratory tests were completed in general accordance with current ASTM procedures. The test results can be found on the Log of Boring sheets opposite the soil sample tested. Moisture content tests on selected granular soil samples generally ranged from 4 to 7 percent, indicating that the majority of the sandy soils tested were likely below their estimated optimum moisture content. Our mechanical analyses (through a number 200 sieve only) indicated that the granular fill contained about 5 to 18 percent silt and clay by weight. A full gradation was performed on a sample of the aggregate base from ST-05. The grain size accumulation curve for the aggregate base is attached in the Appendix of this report.
C.
Basis for Recommendations
C.1.
Building Construction
We understand the project will include an expansion to the northeast corner of the building in the cafeteria area, remodeling of several classrooms throughout the building, the removal of a bituminous walkway and replacement with concrete stoops on the west side of the building as well as pavement reconstruction of the bus loop located on the south end of the parcel and a small section of bituminous on the west end of the building. We are assuming that vertical loads on walls will be under 4 kips (4,000 pounds) per linear foot and column loads, will be under 150 kips.
C.2.
Grade Changes
We assume the slab on grade addition will have a finished floor slab elevation similar to that of the existing building of approximately 906. We understand there will not be significant grade changes (2 feet or more) on this site from existing topography for the building additions and pavement reconstruction.
C.3.
Precautions Regarding Changed Information
We have attempted to describe our understanding of the proposed construction to the extent it was reported to us by others. Depending on the extent of available information, assumptions may have been
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 6
made based on our experience with similar projects. If we have not correctly recorded or interpreted the project details, we should be notified. New or changed information could require additional evaluation, analyses and/or recommendations.
C.4.
Design Considerations
In our opinion, the site is suited for development of a lightly loaded structure. We recommend that topsoil and fill below footings and slabs on grade be removed. In most of the borings, standard depths of frost depth footings should penetrate through the expected depth of fill. Much of the existing fill (excluding the topsoil fill) appears to be reusable for structural fill. Encountered soft clay fills and organic clay fills are not considered reusable for fill. Because the native sands were noted as being locally loose at estimated footing depth, however, provisions should be made to surface compact foundation, slab and pavement subgrades to densify the soils, enhancing subgrade uniformity and strength, and limiting the potential for the building and pavements to settle. Some fill was noted below the topsoil in the building addition area. A conservative approach would be to remove and replace these soils. As an alternative, the fill soils could be further evaluated during construction. If these soils are left in place, we recommend the upper 1 ½ feet be re engineered. The owner needs to accept the additional risk of uneven settlement of leaving these soils in place, in return for the cost savings.
D.
Recommendations
D.1. Site Grading and Building Subgrade Preparation D.1.a. Excavations We recommend the building be supported on conventional spread footings. We recommend that the fill, topsoil, soft clays and organic clays be excavated beneath the footings and slabs on grade. The unsuitable soils should be replaced with compacted fill in a standard excavate/refill approach.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 7
A tabulation of our recommended minimum excavation depth at the boring locations follows: Table 2. Anticipated Excavation Depths in Building Pad
A
Anticipated Depth of
Anticipated Bottom
Anticipated
Approximate Surface
Excavation
of Excavation
Groundwater
Boring
(Elevation)
(Feet)
(Elevation)
(Elevation )A
ST-07
906.5
6
900 ½
N.O.
ST-08
906.4
6
900 ½
N.O.
ST-09
905.5
4
901 ½
894
ST-10
905.8
4
902
892 ½
Groundwater observations were made during a relatively short period of time on the dates we were onsite. Observations in
other seasons or if long term monitoring is performed, these elevations may be higher. Note: N.O. not observed.
The excavation depths indicated in the above tabulation are approximate and will vary. The actual depth of excavation needs to be determined in the field at the time of construction. An experienced geotechnical engineering technician should work closely with the excavating contractor during excavation to make the necessary field judgments regarding the suitability of the exposed soils and to determine the extent of fill and soft soils. To provide lateral support to the structural loads they will support, we recommend oversizing (widening) the excavations 1 foot horizontally beyond the footings for each foot the excavations extend below bottom-of-footing elevations. Prior to the placement of engineered fill or footings, we recommend the exposed soils in the bottoms of the excavations be surface compacted using a minimum of 5 passes over an area with a large (minimum 3 1/2-foot-diameter drum), self-propelled vibratory smooth -drum compactor. If it is judged not to be practical to get a drum type compactor into the excavation then a large plate compactor may be used with a minimum of 5 passes. Areas of soils which yield or pump during surface compaction may require additional subcutting. This will further densify the underlying natural soils and provide a more uniformly compacted base to support additional fill or footings.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 8
D.1.b. Excavation Support The fill soils are Type B and C Soil under OSHA guidelines. Unsupported excavations should therefore be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 1 ½ to 1 (horizontal: vertical). Slopes constructed in this manner may still exhibit surface sloughing. If site constraints do not allow the construction of temporary slopes with these dimensions, then temporary shoring may be required, and we should be consulted for additional recommendations. An OSHA approved competent person should review this soil classification in the field. Excavations must comply with the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR, Part 2926, Subpart P, “Excavations and Trenches.” This document states that excavation safety is the responsibility of the contractor. Reference to these OSHA requirements should be included in the project specifications.
D.1.c. Placement and Compaction of Backfill and Fill On-site soils free of organic soil and debris can be considered for reuse as backfill and fill. The clays being fine-grained, will be more difficult to compact if wet or allowed to become wet, or if spread and compacted over wet surfaces. We do not recommend that these soils be reused for wall backfill or as fill below foundations. Imported material needed to replace excavation spoils or balance cut and fill quantities, may consist of non organic sand having less than 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. We recommend spreading backfill and fill in loose lifts no thicker than 12 inches. Smaller equipment may require thinner lifts to meet specified density. We recommend compacting backfill and fill in accordance with the criteria presented below in Table 3. The relative compaction of utility backfill should be evaluated based on the requirements of the structures or pavement above the utility line, and vertical proximity to that structure. If site grading and construction is anticipated during cold weather, snow and ice should be removed from cut and fill areas prior to additional grading. No fill should be placed on frozen subgrades. No frozen soils should be used as fill. If winter excavation and filling activities are planned, we recommend that material selected for backfill and fill (to achieve design grades) consist of clean, coarse sand with no more than 12 percent passing a 200 sieve (Mn/DOT Specification 3149.2B for Select Granular Borrow).
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 9
Table 3. Compaction Recommendations Summary
Recommended Soil types for fill
Reference
Relative Compaction, minimum percent (ASTM D 698 – standard Proctor)
Moisture Content Variance from Optimum, percentage points
Below foundations
Granular soils with less than 20 percent fines
100
-1 to +3
Below interior slabs
Granular soils with less than 20 percent fines
95
-1 to +3
Below pavements, within 3 feet of subgrade elevations
Non-Organic Mineral soils, Ideally Granular
100
+/- 1
Below pavements, more than 3 feet below subgrade elevations
Non-Organic Mineral soils
95
+/- 3
Below landscaped surfaces
Mineral soils or topsoil
90
+/- 4
D.2. Spread Footings D.2.a. Embedment Depth For frost protection, we recommend embedding perimeter footings at least 42 inches below the lowest exterior grade in heated portions of the building. Interior footings may be placed directly below floor slabs. We recommend embedding building footings not heated during construction, and footings in unheated areas at least 60 inches below the lowest exterior grade.
D.2.b. Net Allowable Bearing Pressure We recommend sizing spread footings to exert a net allowable bearing pressure of up to 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf), including all transient loads. This value includes a safety factor of at least 3 with regard to bearing capacity failure.
D.2.c. Settlement We estimate that total and differential settlements among the footings will amount to less than ½ and ½ inch, respectively, under the reported (or assumed) loads. Because the existing building will not likely settle along with the proposed addition, approximately ½ inch of differential settlement could occur between the existing building and the addition. To accommodate
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 10
this settlement, we recommend installing expansion joints between the existing building and the addition or designing the structure to accommodate this movement.
D.3. Interior Slabs D.3.a. Subgrade Modulus We recommend using a modulus of subgrade reaction, k, of 200 pounds per square inch per inch of deflection (pci) to design the slabs with a clean sand subgrade.
D.3.b. Moisture Vapor Protection Excess transmission of water vapor could cause floor dampness, certain types of floor bonding agents to separate, or mold to form under floor coverings. If floor coverings or coatings less permeable than the concrete slab will be used, we recommend that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be place immediately beneath the slab. Regardless of where the vapor retarder or barrier is placed, we recommend consulting with floor covering manufacturers regarding the appropriate type, use and installation of the vapor retarder or barrier to preserve warranty assurances. We recommend that the vapor retarder or barrier be observed prior to concrete placement so that holes, tears or gaps in the vapor retarder or barrier can be identified and patched or realigned as needed. We further recommend performing moisture vapor transmission tests after the concrete slabs have cured, but before flooring is installed. Flooring manufacturers typically recommend upper limits of moisture vapor transmission that can be used to set schedules for flooring installation but, more importantly, may impact warranties.
D.4. Pavements D.4.a. Pavement Subgrade Preparation We understand that consideration is being given to reclaim the existing bituminous and aggregate base. Based on the results of the borings, it is our opinion that the bituminous can be reclaimed and used as part of the new pavement section. However, it is our opinion that the existing aggregate base is too variable in thickness to effectively reclaim it. It would likely become mixed with the underlying soils and would no longer meet the requirements for an aggregate base.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 11
Prior to the placement of engineered fill or pavements, we recommend the exposed soils in the bottoms of the excavations be thoroughly compacted by a minimum of 5 passes with a large (3 1/2-footdiameter drum minimum), self-propelled sheepsfoot -drum compactor. This is recommended to further densify the underlying fill soils and to provide a more uniform base to place additional fill or pavement. If areas are encountered which won’t compact or become unstable, they should be subcut and replaced with a compactable material. We recommend that imported material needed to attain design subgrade elevations consist of sand having less than 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. We recommend compacting excavation backfill (including utility backfill) and additional required fill placed within 3 feet of pavement subgrade elevations to at least 100 percent of their maximum standard Proctor dry densities (ASTM D 698) and within 1 percentage point of optimum moisture. Backfill and fill placed more than 3 feet below pavement subgrade elevations should be compacted to at least 95 percent and within 3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content.
D.4.b. Pavement Reclamation If the decision is made to mill and reuse the existing bituminous pavement section as aggregate base, we recommend the following:
The existing subgrade soils are not mixed in as the material is collected
The aggregate base is not weathered or other wise unsuitable for reuse
The resulting milled bituminous and the existing aggregate base can used as aggregate base under the new pavement if it meets the requirements above. If it does not meet all of the conditions above, pavement reclamation should not be performed.
D.4.c. Subgrade Proofroll Prior to the placement of the aggregate base, we recommend the subgrade soils be proofrolled with a fully loaded tandem-axle truck and that the proofroll be observed by a geotechnical engineer. This will assist in identifying soft or weak areas that will require additional soil correction work. Areas that display excessive yielding or rutting during the proofroll should be corrected. In areas where subgrade correction is deemed necessary, unsuitable soils should be removed to soils of adequate density or to a maximum depth of 3 feet. Failed areas should be compacted, or if too wet, subcut and replaced with suitable soil or additional aggregate base and compacted as previously specified.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 12
D.4.d. Bituminous Design Sections Laboratory tests to determine an R-value for pavement design were not included in the scope of this project. Based on our experience with similar soil conditions, however, it is our opinion that an R-value of 50 can be assumed for design purposes with a sand subgrade. This R value is based on a pavement section directly supported on a subgrade consisting of engineered granular fill. Based on the anticipated traffic load information we have modeled the traffic by the AASHTO method. We understand that this facility will be used 5 days a week and the pavement life designs desired are 10 and 20 years. For modeling we assumed daily traffic of 25 school buses. Based upon the assumed traffic loads and subgrade conditions, we recommend the pavement sections shown in table 4 below. Table 4. Bituminous Design Sections 10 Year Life Thickness
20 Year Life Thickness
Material
Specification
(inches)
(inches)
Wear Course Bituminous
SPWEB240E
1½
2
SPNWB230B
2
2
Class 5
6
8
Non-Wear Course Bituminous Aggregate Base
The 10 and 20 year life spans are the amount of time before major reconstruction is anticipated. This performance life assumes maintenance, such as seal coating and crack sealing, is routinely performed. The actual pavement life will vary depending on variations in weather, traffic conditions and maintenance.
D.4.e. Materials and Compaction We recommend that the aggregate base be compacted to a minimum of 100 percent of its maximum standard Proctor dry density. We recommend that the bituminous pavement be compacted to at least 92 percent of the maximum theoretical density.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 13
D.4.f. Subgrade Drainage We recommend installing perforated drainpipes throughout pavement areas at low points and about catch basins. The drainpipes should be placed in small trenches extended at least 8 inches below the granular subbase layer, or below the aggregate base material where no subbase is present.
D.5. Frost Protection D.5.a. Exterior Slabs Even small amounts of frost-related differential movement at walkway joints or cracks can create tripping hazards. Several subgrade improvement options can be explored to address this condition. A conservative subgrade improvement option to help limit the potential for heaving, but not eliminate it, would be to remove any frost-susceptible soils present below the exterior slabs’ “footprint” down to the bottom-of-footing grades or to a maximum depth of 5 feet below subgrade elevations, whichever is less. We recommend the resulting excavation then be refilled with sand or sandy gravel having less than 50 percent of the particles by weight passing the #40 sieve and less than 5 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve.
D.5.b. Bituminous Pavements The on-going performance of bituminous pavements is impacted by conditions under which the pavement is asked to perform in. These conditions include the environmental conditions, the actual use conditions and the level of ongoing maintenance preformed. Because of normal expansion and contraction, it is not unusual to have cracking develop within the first few years of placement and for the cracking to continue throughout the life of the pavement. A regular maintenance plan should be developed for filling cracks to lessen the potential impacts for cold weather distress due to frost heave or warm weather distress due to wetting and softening of the subgrade. It is also not unusual for the pavement to require a seal coat within the first 5 to 10 years to increase the long-term performance of the bituminous pavement.
D.6. Utilities D.6.a. Excavation Based on the borings, we anticipate the soils at typical invert elevations should be suitable for utility support. However, if unfavorable conditions such as soft clay, organic soils or perched water are encountered at invert grades, the unsuitable soils may require some additional subcutting and replacement with sand or crushed rock to prepare a proper subgrade for pipe support. Utilities should
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 14
not be placed within the 1:1 oversizing of foundations. If it is necessary to place utilities within the oversizing of the footings, we should review the documents prior to construction as it may be necessary to backfill with lean concrete or lower the footing elevations near the utility trenches.
D.6.b. Backfill We recommend that the utility trench backfill be compacted to the specifications outlined in Section D.1.c. Within landscaped areas, soils should be compacted to at least 90 percent of standard Proctor density. If settlement at or around utilities is a concern, we recommend for fill at depths of 8 feet or more, that sand with less than 12 percent fines passing the 200 sieve be used for lower portions of the fill unless subsidence equal to 1 to 2 percent of the fill depth can be tolerated. We recommend around pipes, adjacent to manhole structures or in areas of limited access that gravel or sand be used for bedding and backfill.
D.7. Construction Quality Control D.7.a. Excavation Observations We recommend having a geotechnical engineer observe the excavations related to subgrade preparation and spread footing, slab-on-grade and pavement construction. The purpose of the observations is to evaluate the competence of the geologic materials exposed in the excavations, and the adequacy of required excavation oversizing.
D.7.b. Materials Testing We recommend density tests be taken in excavation backfill and additional required fill placed below spread footings, slab-on-grade construction and below pavements.
D.7.c. Pavement Subgrade Proof-Roll We recommend that proof-rolling of the pavement subgrades be observed by a geotechnical engineer to determine if the results of the procedure meet project specifications, or delineate the extent of additional pavement subgrade preparation work.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 15
E.
Procedures
E.1.
Penetration Test Borings
The penetration test borings were drilled with a truck -mounted core and auger drill equipped with hollow-stem auger. The borings were performed in accordance with ASTM D 1586. Penetration test samples were taken at 2 ½- or 5-foot intervals. Actual sample intervals and corresponding depths are shown on the boring logs.
E.2.
Material Classification and Testing
E.2.a. Visual and Manual Classification The geologic materials encountered were visually and manually classified in accordance with ASTM Test Method D 2488. A chart explaining the classification system is attached. Samples were sealed in jars and returned to our facility for review and storage.
E.2.b. Laboratory Testing The results of the laboratory tests performed on geologic material samples are noted on or follow the appropriate attached exploration logs. The tests were performed in accordance with ASTM procedures.
E.3.
Groundwater Measurements
The drillers checked for groundwater as the penetration test borings were advanced, and again after auger withdrawal. The boreholes were then backfilled as noted on the boring logs.
F.
Qualifications
F.1.
Variations in Subsurface Conditions
F.1.a. Material Strata Our evaluation, analyses and recommendations were developed from a limited amount of site and subsurface information. It is not standard engineering practice to retrieve material samples from exploration locations continuously with depth, and therefore strata boundaries and thicknesses must be
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 16
inferred to some extent. Strata boundaries may also be gradual transitions, and can be expected to vary in depth, elevation and thickness away from the exploration locations. Variations in subsurface conditions present between exploration locations may not be revealed until additional exploration work is completed, or construction commences. If any such variations are revealed, our recommendations should be re-evaluated. Such variations could increase construction costs, and a contingency should be provided to accommodate them.
F.1.b. Groundwater Levels Groundwater measurements were made under the conditions reported herein and shown on the exploration logs, and interpreted in the text of this report. It should be noted that the observation period was relatively short, and groundwater can be expected to fluctuate in response to rainfall, flooding, irrigation, seasonal freezing and thawing, surface drainage modifications and other seasonal and annual factors.
F.2.
Continuity of Professional Responsibility
F.2.a. Plan Review This report is based on a limited amount of information, and a number of assumptions were necessary to help us develop our recommendations. It is recommended that our firm review the geotechnical aspects of the designs and specifications, and evaluate whether the design is as expected, if any design changes have affected the validity of our recommendations, and if our recommendations have been correctly interpreted and implemented in the designs and specifications.
F.2.b. Construction Observations and Testing It is recommended that we be retained to perform observations and tests during construction. This will allow correlation of the subsurface conditions encountered during construction with those encountered by the borings, and provide continuity of professional responsibility.
F.3.
Use of Report
This report is for the exclusive use of the parties to which it has been addressed. Without written approval, we assume no responsibility to other parties regarding this report. Our evaluation, analyses and recommendations may not be appropriate for other parties or projects.
Independent School District #192 Project BL-12-04810 September 7, 2012 Page 17
F.4.
Standard of Care
In performing its services, Braun Intertec used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar circumstances by reputable members of its profession currently practicing in the same locality. No warranty, express or implied, is made.
Appendix
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER:
S. McLean
Elev. feet 904.6
Depth feet 0.0
903.5
1.1
902.6
2.0
FILL FILL
900.6
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
8/23/12 BPF WL
SCALE:
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
4 1/2 inches of bituminous over 9 inches of apparent aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine-grained, trace Gravel, dark brown, moist. FILL: Clayey Sand, brown, moist.
11
POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, loose. (Glacial Outwash)
10
4.0 SP
898.6
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
Description of Materials Symbol PAV
ST-01
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
6.0
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-01
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 904.8 904.4 902.8
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0 Symbol 0.4 PAV FILL 2.0 FILL
900.8
4.0 SP
898.8
6.0
ST-02
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials
8/23/12 BPF WL
SCALE:
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
4 inches of bituminous with no apparent aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, trace Gravel, dark brown, moist. FILL: Silty Sand, Clayey Sand inclusions, dark brown, moist. POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
19
12
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-02
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER:
S. McLean
Elev. feet 905.0
Depth feet 0.0
903.8
1.2
903.0
2.0 FILL FILL
901.0
4.0 SPSM
899.0
6.0
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials Symbol PAV
ST-03
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
4 1/2 inches of bituminous over 10 inches of apparent aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, trace Gravel, dark brown, moist. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist. POORLY GRADED SAND with SILT, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
SCALE:
8/23/12
BPF WL MC P200 % %
21
4
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
4.7
17
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-03
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 905.2 904.8 903.2
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0 Symbol 0.4 PAV FILL 2.0 FILL
901.2
4.0 SPSM
899.2
6.0
ST-04
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials
8/23/12 BPF WL
SCALE:
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
4 1/2 inches of bituminous with no apparent aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, trace Gravel, dark brown, moist. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, brown and dark brown, moist. POORLY GRADED SAND with SILT, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
12
17
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-04
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER:
S. McLean
Elev. feet 905.8
Depth feet 0.0
904.9
0.9
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials Symbol PAV FILL
ST-05
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
SCALE:
8/23/12
BPF WL MC P200 % %
6 inches of bituminous over 4 inches of aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist.
4
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
11
14 901.8
4.0 SP
899.8
6.0
POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
15
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-05
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 905.8 905.1
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials
Symbol PAV 0.7 FILL
ST-06
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
BPF WL MC P200 % %
Tests or Notes
5
5.2
4.0 SPSM
899.8
1" = 4'
6 1/2 inches of bituminous over 1 inch of apparent aggregate base. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist.
20 901.8
SCALE:
8/23/12
6.0
POORLY GRADED SAND with SILT, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
13
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-06
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 906.5 905.7
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials
Symbol PAV 0.8 FILL
ST-07
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
8/23/12 BPF WL
SCALE:
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
4 1/2 inches of bituminous over 4 1/2 inches of apparent aggregate base. FILL: Organic Clay, black.
5 902.5
4.0 FILL
900.5
6.0
FILL: Lean Clay, brown, moist. Poorly Graded Sand lenses at 5 feet.
6
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-07
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 906.4 905.6 904.4
902.4
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
8/23/12 BPF WL
SCALE:
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
5 1/2 inches of bituminous over 3 1/2 inches of apparent aggregate base. FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, dark brownish black, moist. FILL: Lean Clay, brown and dark brown, moist.
4
4.0 FILL
900.4
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
Description of Materials
Symbol PAV 0.8 FILL 2.0 FILL
ST-08
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist.
6.0
4
END OF BORING. Water not observed while drilling. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 4 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger.
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-08
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 905.5 904.0
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0 1.5
FILL
901.5
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials Symbol FILL
ST-09
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
SCALE:
8/23/12
BPF WL MC P200 % %
FILL: Silty Sand, fine-grained, with roots and fibers, dark brown, moist. (Topsoil Fill) FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, with Clayey Sand seams, brown, moist.
6
POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist, loose to medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
6
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
4.0 SP
4
4
19 896.5
9.0 SPSM
POORLY GRADED SAND with SILT, fine- to coarse-grained, brown, wet to waterbearing, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
15
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
12
15
12
879.5
13
26.0 END OF BORING. Water observed at a depth of 11 1/2 feet with 25 feet of hollow-stem auger in the ground. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 9 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger. Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-09
page 1 of 1
LOG OF BORING
(See Descriptive Terminology sheet for explanation of abbreviations)
Braun Project BL-12-04810
DRILLER: Elev. feet 905.8 904.3 903.8
901.8
S. McLean
Depth feet 0.0
LOCATION: See attached sketch.
METHOD:
3 1/4" HSA, Autohammer
DATE:
Description of Materials Symbol FILL
1.5 2.0 FILL FILL 4.0 SP
ST-10
BORING:
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Farmington School Addition 500 Maple St Farmington, Minnesota
(Soil-ASTM D2488 or D2487, Rock-USACE EM1110-1-2908)
FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, with roots and fibers, dark brown, moist. (Topsoil Fill) FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, brown, moist. FILL: Poorly Graded Sand with Silt, fine- to medium-grained, brown, moist. POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained,brown, moist, loose to medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
SCALE:
8/23/12
BPF WL MC P200 % %
6
7
8
5
1" = 4'
Tests or Notes
18
17 896.8
9.0 SPSM
POORLY GRADED SAND with SILT, fine- to coarse-grained, brown, wet to waterbearing, medium dense. (Glacial Outwash)
11
LOG OF BORING N:\GINT\PROJECTS\MINNEAPOLIS\2012\04810.GPJ BRAUN_V8_CURRENT.GDT 9/7/12 11:46
16
15
13
879.8
14
26.0 END OF BORING. Water observed at a depth of 13 1/2 feet with 25 feet of hollow-stem auger in the ground. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 10 feet immediately after withdrawal of auger. Boring immediately backfilled.
BL-12-04810
Braun Intertec Corporation
ST-10
page 1 of 1
Farmington School Addition 500 Maple Street Farmington, MN
Descriptive Terminology of Soil Standard D 2487 - 00 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) Soils Classification Group Symbol Group Name b
Fine-grained Soils Coarse-grained Soils 50% or more passed the more than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve No. 200 sieve
Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests a Gravels More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieve
Clean Gravels 5% or less fines e Gravels with Fines More than 12% fines e
Sands 50% or more of coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve Silts and Clays Liquid limit less than 50 Silts and clays Liquid limit 50 or more
Highly Organic Soils
Clean Sands 5% or less fines
i
Inorganic
4 and 1
Cu
4 and/or 1
Cc
3C
GW
Well-graded gravel d
Cc 3 C
GP
Poorly graded gravel d
GM
Silty gravel
GC
Clayey gravel d f g
Cu
6 and 1
SW
Well-graded sand h
Cu
6 and/or 1
Cc
3C
SP
Poorly graded sand h
SM
Silty sand f g h
Fines classify as CL or CH
SC
Clayey sand f g h
7 and plots on or above “A” line j
CL ML OL OL
Lean clay k
CC
3
C
PI 4 or plots below “A” line Liquid limit - oven dried Organic 0.75 Liquid limit - not dried PI plots on or above “A” line Inorganic PI plots below “A” line Liquid limit - oven dried Organic 0.75 Liquid limit - not dried Primarily organic matter, dark in color and organic odor j
CH MH OH OH PT
a. Based on the material passing the 3-in (75mm) sieve. b. If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add “with cobbles or boulders or both” to group name. c. Cu = D60 / D10 Cc = (D30)2 D10 x D60 d. If soil contains 15% sand, add “with sand” to group name. e. Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded gravel with silt GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay GP-GM poorly graded gravel with silt GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay f. If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM or SC-SM. g. If fines are organic, add “with organic fines” to group name. h. If soil contains 15% gravel, add “with gravel” to group name. i. Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded sand with silt SW-SC well-graded sand with clay SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay j. If Atterberg limits plot in hatched area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay. k. If soil contains 10 to 29% plus No. 200, add “with sand” or “with gravel” whichever is predominant. l. If soil contains 30% plus No. 200, predominantly sand, add “sandy” to group name. m. If soil contains 30% plus No. 200 predominantly gravel, add “gravelly” to group name. n. PI 4 and plots on or above “A” line. o. PI 4 or plots below “A” line. p. PI plots on or above “A” line. q. PI plots below “A” line.
Plasticity Index (PI)
50 L U”
40
CH
30
20
CL 10 7 4 0
10 16
OH
20
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
Laboratory Tests Dry density, pcf Wet density, pcf Natural moisture content, % Liqiuid limit, % Plastic limit, % Plasticity index, % % passing 200 sieve
OC S SG C qu qp
0 to 4 BPF 5 to 10 BPF 11 to 30 BPF 31 to 50 BPF over 50 BPF
Consistency of Cohesive Soils Very soft ................................... Soft ....................................... Rather soft ............................... Medium .................................... Rather stiff ............................... Stiff ....................................... Very stiff ................................... Hard .......................................
0 to 1 BPF 2 to 3 BPF 4 to 5 BPF 6 to 8 BPF 9 to 12 BPF 13 to 16 BPF 17 to 30 BPF over 30 BPF
WH: WH indicates the sampler penetrated soil under weight of hammer and rods alone; driving not required.
Liquid Limit (LL)
DD WD MC LL PL PI P200
Elastic silt k l m Organic clay k l m p Organic silt k l m q Peat
Very loose ................................ Loose ....................................... Medium dense ......................... Dense ...................................... Very dense ...............................
BPF: Numbers indicate blows per foot recorded in standard penetration test, also known as “N” value. The sampler was set 6” into undisturbed soil below the hollow-stem auger. Driving resistances were then counted for second and third 6” increments and added to get BPF. Where they differed significantly, they are reported in the following form: 2/12 for the second and third 6” increments, respectively.
MH or OH
40
m o
l m
Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils
Hand auger borings were advanced manually with a 1 1/2” or 3 1/4” diameter auger and were limited to the depth from which the auger could be manually withdrawn. Hand auger borings are indicated by the prefix “H.”
e in ”L A “
OL
or
Fat clay k
l m n
Power auger borings were advanced by 4” or 6” diameter continuousflight, solid-stem augers. Soil classifications and strata depths were inferred from disturbed samples augered to the surface and are, therefore, somewhat approximate. Power auger borings are designated by the prefix “B.”
e
or
Silt Organic clay k Organic silt k l
Drilling Notes
ML or OL
CL - ML
0
in
l m
k l m
Standard penetration test borings were advanced by 3 1/4” or 6 1/4” ID hollow-stem augers unless noted otherwise, Jetting water was used to clean out auger prior to sampling only where indicated on logs. Standard penetration test borings are designated by the prefix “ST” (Split Tube). All samples were taken with the standard 2” OD split-tube sampler, except where noted.
60
“
dfg
Fines classify as ML or MH Fines classify as CL or CH
Fines classify as ML or MH
Sands with Fines More than 12% i PI
Cu
Particle Size Identification Boulders ............................... over 12” Cobbles ............................... 3” to 12” Gravel Coarse ............................ 3/4” to 3” Fine ................................. No. 4 to 3/4” Sand Coarse ............................ No. 4 to No. 10 Medium ........................... No. 10 to No. 40 Fine ................................. No. 40 to No. 200 Silt ....................................... No. 200, PI 4 or below “A” line Clay ..................................... No. 200, PI 4 and on or above “A” line
Organic content, % Percent of saturation, % Specific gravity Cohesion, psf Angle of internal friction Unconfined compressive strength, psf Pocket penetrometer strength, tsf
110
WR: WR indicates the sampler penetrated soil under weight of rods alone; hammer weight and driving not required. TW indicates thin-walled (undisturbed) tube sample. Note: All tests were run in general accordance with applicable ASTM standards.
Rev. 7/07
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
1A P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0001
1A P-01-Plaster 351206898-0001A
1B P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0002
1B P-01-Plaster 351206898-0002A
1C P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0003
1C P-01-Plaster 351206898-0003A
1D P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0004
1D P-01-Plaster 351206898-0004A
Appearance
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 12Storage Rm
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 12Storage Rm
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 10Storage Rm
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 10Storage Rm
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 14Storage Rm
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 Rm 14Storage Rm
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster CeilingWhite 1954 Kitchen-West Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster CeilingGray 1954 Kitchen-West Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
1
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
1E P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0005
1E P-01-Plaster 351206898-0005A
1F P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0006
1F P-01-Plaster 351206898-0006A
1G P-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0007
Appearance
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
Plaster Ceiling1954 W. Ent. Vestibule Door #2
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Ceiling1954 W. Ent. Vestibule Door #2
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster CeilingWhite 1954 Kitchen-S.W. Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster CeilingGray 1954 Kitchen-S.W. Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster CeilingWhite 1954 Fan Room by Non-Fibrous Kitchen Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
`
1G P-01-Plaster 351206898-0007A
Plaster CeilingGray 1954 Fan Room by Non-Fibrous Kitchen Heterogeneous `
2A CWT-01Ceramic Tile 351206898-0008
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile,grout & bedding-Pink Rm 10
White/Pink Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
2
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
2A CWT-01-Grout 351206898-0008A
2A CWT-01Adhesive 351206898-0008B
3A SUC-01 351206898-0009
4A P-02-Skim Coat 351206898-0010
4A P-02-Plaster 351206898-0010A
4B P-02-Skim Coat 351206898-0011
4B P-02-Plaster 351206898-0011A
4C P-02-Skim Coat 351206898-0012
Appearance
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile,grout & bedding-Pink Rm 10
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile,grout & bedding-Pink Rm 10
Brown Non-Fibrous
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
100% Non-fibrous (other)
97% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
3% Chrysotile
Heterogeneous
Sink Undercoating- Gray Gray Rm-16 Fibrous Homogeneous
10% Cellulose
90% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm-10-Storage Rm. Wall
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm-10-Storage Rm. Wall
Gray Fibrous Heterogeneous
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 10-S.E. Corner Wall
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 10-S.E. Corner Wall
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 12-Storage Rm Wall
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
<1% Cellulose
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
3
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
4C P-02-Plaster 351206898-0012A
4D P-02-Skim Coat
351206898-0013A
4E P-02-Skim Coat 351206898-0014
4E P-02-Plaster 351206898-0014A
4F P-02 351206898-0015
4G P-02-Skim Coat 351206898-0016
4G P-02-Plaster
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 12-Storage Rm Wall
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 12-North Wall
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 12-North Wall
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 14-Storage Rm Wall
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Rm 14-Storage Rm Wall
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 W. Ent. Vestibule Door #2
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Kitchen Restroom
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Plaster Wall-1954 Kitchen Restroom
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
351206898-0013
4D P-02-Plaster
Appearance
351206898-0016A
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
4
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
5A CT-01-Ceiling Tile 351206898-0017
5A CT-01-Mastic 351206898-0017A
5B CT-01 351206898-0018
12"x12" Ceiling Tile & Associated Mastic-Brown Mas
Appearance Brown/White Fibrous
%
Fibrous
90% Cellulose
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
10% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 12"x12" Ceiling Tile & Associated Mastic-Brown Mas
Brown Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
12"x12" Ceiling Tile & Associated Mastic Only Rm 1
Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Analyzed Mastic Only
6A T-01 351206898-0019
7A CT-02 351206898-0020
8A T-02 351206898-0021
9A VB-01-Black Layer 351206898-0022
Cementitious Panels- Under Window by doorPainted
Gray Fibrous Heterogeneous
2'x4' Ceiling TileWide Width Fissures & Pinholes
White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous
Cementitious Panels-Radiator Shields Rm 10S.E. Co
Gray Fibrous Heterogeneous
Vapor BarrierBehind Radiator Shields Rm 10S.E. C
Black Non-Fibrous
75% Non-fibrous (other)
60% Cellulose
10% Non-fibrous (other)
25% Chrysotile
None Detected
30% Perlite
65% Non-fibrous (other)
10% Min. Wool
90% Non-fibrous (other)
35% Chrysotile
None Detected
Homogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
5
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
9A VB-01-White Layer 351206898-0022A
10A T-03 351206898-0023
11A CFT-01Ceramic Tile 351206898-0024
11A CFT-01-Grout 351206898-0024A
11A CFT-01Bedding 351206898-0024B
11A CFT-01Adhesive 351206898-0024C
11A CFT-01Fibrous Layer 351206898-0024D
Appearance
Vapor BarrierBehind Radiator Shields Rm 10S.E. C
White Non-Fibrous
Cementitious Panels-Under Casework Rm 10S.E. Corn
Gray Fibrous Heterogeneous
1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Cream &
Gray/W hite Non-Fibrous
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
65% Non-fibrous (other)
35% Chrysotile
65% Non-fibrous (other)
35% Chrysotile
Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Cream &
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Cream &
Gray Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Cream &
Tan Non-Fibrous
95% Non-fibrous (other)
5% Chrysotile
Heterogeneous 1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Cream &
White Fibrous
90% Synthetic
10% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
6
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
12A FT-01Green/White Layer 351206898-0025
12A FT-01-Gray Floor Tile 351206898-0025A
12A FT-01-Black Mastic 351206898-0025B
13A LB-01 351206898-0026
14A CFT-02Ceramic Tile 351206898-0027
14A CFT-02-Grout 351206898-0027A
14A CFT-02Bedding 351206898-0027B
9"x9" Vinyl Floor Tile/Mastic-Gray & White, Black
Appearance
%
Fibrous
White/Green Non-Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 9"x9" Vinyl Floor Tile/Mastic-Gray & White, Black
90% Non-fibrous (other)
Gray Non-Fibrous
10% Chrysotile
Heterogeneous 9"x9" Vinyl Floor Tile/Mastic-Gray & White, Black
Black Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous Light Pad Insulation-W hite Rm 1-across from lunch
White Fibrous Homogeneous
20% Cellulose
10% Non-fibrous (other)
70% Chrysotile
1"x1" Ceramic Brown Floor Tile, grout & Non-Fibrous bedding-Brown-W. Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
1"x1" Ceramic Gray Floor Tile, grout & Non-Fibrous bedding-Brown-W. Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
1"x1" Ceramic Gray Floor Tile, grout & Non-Fibrous bedding-Brown-W. Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
7
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
15A CWT-02Ceramic Tile 351206898-0028
15A CWT-02-Grout 351206898-0028A
16A CFT-03Ceramic Tile 351206898-0029
16A CFT-03-Grout 351206898-0029A
17A CFT-04Ceramic Tile 351206898-0030
17A CFT-04-Grout 351206898-0030A
17A CFT-04Bedding 351206898-0030B
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile, grout & bedding-White-Kit
Appearance
%
White Non-Fibrous
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile, grout & bedding-White-Kit
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Gray-Kit
Gray Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 1"x1" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Gray-Kit
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
6"x6" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Red-Kitc
Red Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 6"x6" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Red-Kitc
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
6"x6" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Red-Kitc
Gray Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
8
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
18A CWT-03Ceramic Tile 351206898-0031
18A CWT-03-Grout 351206898-0031A
18A CWT-03Adhesive 351206898-0031B
19A CWT-04Ceramic Tile 351206898-0032
19A CWT-04-Block 351206898-0032A
20A CT-03 351206898-0033
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile, grout & Adhesive-White w/
Appearance
%
Fibrous
White Non-Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile, grout & Adhesive-White w/
White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
4"x4" Ceramic Wall Tile, grout & Adhesive-White w/
Tan Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
80% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Heterogeneous 6"x12" Ceramic Block & grout-Teal Kitchen-North
Gray/Tan Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
6"x12" Ceramic Block & grout-Teal Kitchen-North
Gray Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
2'x4' Ceiling TileSheetrock-Vinyl Covered-Kitchen
Brown/White Fibrous Heterogeneous
21A FT-02-Floor Tile 12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile, Beige w/tan & 351206898-0034 gray strea
20% Cellulose
Green Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
9
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
21A FT-02-Mastic
Appearance
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile, Beige w/tan & gray strea
Tan Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Interior Window Glazing-White-W. ent. Vestibule by
White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Exterior Window Glazing-tan-W. ent. Vestibule by K
Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Exterior Window Caulking-tan-W. ent. Vestibule by
Gray/Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
97% Non-fibrous (other)
25A FT-03-Floor Tile 12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile-Beige w/tan & 351206898-0038 gray streak
Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
25A FT-03-Mastic
12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile-Beige w/tan & gray streak
Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
1 1/2"x2" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Teal
Green Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
351206898-0034A
22A WG-01 351206898-0035
23A WG-02 351206898-0036
24A WC-01 351206898-0037
351206898-0038A
26A CFT-05Ceramic Tile 351206898-0039
26A CFT-05-Gray Layer 351206898-0039A
3% Chrysotile
Homogeneous 1 1/2"x2" Ceramic Floor Tile, grout & bedding-Teal
Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
10
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
27A T-04 351206898-0040
28A CT-04 351206898-0041
29A CT-05 351206898-0042
Appearance
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
Window SillsBlack-(1965 Addition)Classroom W ing
Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
<1% Min. Wool
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
2'x4' Ceiling TileMedium Pocks & Pinholes-Rm 50
Gray/W hite Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Cellulose
30% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
30% Min. Wool
10% Perlite
2'x4' Ceiling Tile Fissures & Pinholes-Rm 50
Gray/W hite Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
30% Non-fibrous (other)
30% Cellulose
10% Perlite
None Detected
30A FT-04-Floor Tile 12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile-Beige w/gray 351206898-0043 & Tan Streak
Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
30A FT-04-Mastic
12"x12" Vinyl Floor Tile-Beige w/gray & Tan Streak
Clear Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
351206898-0043A
31A TC-01-Texture 351206898-0044
31A TC-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0044A
Homogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
11
EMSL Analytical, Inc. 14375 23rd Avenue North, Minneapolis, Mn 55447
Stephen Field Field Environmental Consulting Inc. 8612 Eagle Creek Parkway Savage, MN 55378-1284
Project:
351206898
CustomerID:
FIEL62
CustomerPO:
Phone/Fax: (763) 449-4922 / (763) 449-4924 http://www.emsl.com
[email protected]
Attn:
EMSL Order:
ProjectID:
Phone:
(952) 746-5880
Fax:
(952) 746-5882
Received:
10/24/12 8:00 AM
Analysis Date:
10/25/2012
Collected:
FEC-13022 - Farmington Elem.
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA 600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample
Description
31A TC-01-Plaster 351206898-0044B
31B TC-01-Texture 351206898-0045
31B TC-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0045A
31C TC-01-Texture 351206898-0046
31C TC-01-Skim Coat 351206898-0046A
32A M-01 351206898-0047
Appearance
%
Fibrous
Asbestos
% Non-Fibrous
% Type
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
Grayish Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Textured Plaster Ceiling-WhiteBoy's restroomacro
White Non-Fibrous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Wall Puck-Light Brown Computer Lab-across From boi
Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
100% Non-fibrous (other)
None Detected
Homogeneous
Homogeneous
Analyst(s) Kaitlyn Kubokawa (69) Lance Kalaus (18)
Rachel Travis, Laboratory Manager or other approved signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Minneapolis, Mn NVLAP Lab Code 200019-0
Initial report from 10/25/2012 17:24:08 Test Report PLM-7.16.0 Printed: 10/25/2012 5:24:08 PM
THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.
12
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 004113 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Proposal Form of ____________________________________________________________ hereafter called “Bidder” a* _______________________________________________________ organized and existing under the Laws of the State of [____________________]. and doing business as ____________________________________________________________ (* Insert Corporation, Partnership, or Individual as applicable) To:
FARMINGTON AREA PUBLIC SCHOOLS DISTRICT SERVICE CENTER 421 WALNUT STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
Project:
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING 500 MAPLE STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024 Project Number: 11-0122
Date:
________________________
Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for the FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING, 500 MAPLE STREET, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024, having examined the Contract Documents, issued on JANUARY 15, 2013, within the Project Manuals, the Drawings and all Addenda prepared by Cuningham Group Architecture, Inc., the Architect, and being familiar with the site of the proposed Project and the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, machinery, equipment rental, transportation, superintendence, perform all work, provide all services, and to construct all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the Sum stated below.
BASE BID The Bidder agrees to perform all of the Work for the amount shown in both words and figures. Bidder agrees that this Base Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the receipt of the Bid. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Bids shall be submitted in duplicate. The envelope containing a Bid shall be identified on the front with the Bidder’s name and address. BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
004113 - 1 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
Base Bid for the Sum of: ______________________________________________________ ($___________________)
ALTERNATES AND UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees to modify the Contract for the Alternates stated below, if accepted by the Owner, and as described in Section 012300 - Alternates. 1.
Alternate No. 1: Exterior Site Paving and Improvements
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 2.
Alternate No. 2: Bus Loop Paving
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 3.
Alternate No. 3: DDC Controls Upgrade to Existing Equipment
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 4.
Alternate No. 4: EPDM Roof in Lieu of Built-Up Roof
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 5. Alternate No. 5: Delete one Chiller (ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 6. Alternate No. 6: Replacement fo Roof system on North Canopy with Fully Adhered EPDM (ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars.
The Bidder agrees to modify the Contract for the Unit Prices stated below, if accepted by the Owner, and as described in Section 012200 - Unit Prices. 1.
Unit Price #1: Remove/Dispose of Bituminous Pavement (in place volume) Per Cubic Foot Cost: _____________________ Dollars.
004113 - 2 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.
Addition and Remodeling
Unit Price #2: Remove/Dispose of Aggregate Base (in place volume) Per Cubic Foot Cost: _____________________ Dollars.
3.
Unit Price #3: Remove/ Dispose of Unsuitable Soils (in place volume) Per Cubic Foot Cost: _____________________ Dollars.
4. Unit Price #4: Import Aggregate Base (in place volume) Per Cubic Foot Cost: _____________________ Dollars. 5. Unit Price #5: Rework and Place Aggregate Base (in place volume) Per Cubic Foot Cost: _____________________ Dollars. 6. Unit Price #E1: Type D-1 Light Fixture Per Each Cost: ________________________Dollars. 7. Unit Price #E2: Normal Power Receptacle Per Each Cost: ________________________Dolllars 8. Unit Price #E3: Voice/Data Outlet 0-150 Feet Per Each Cost: _______________________Dollars 9. Unit Price #E4: Voice/Data Outlet 150-250 Feet Per Each Cost: _______________________Dollars ACCEPTANCE If this Bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated, Bidder will furnish the required bonds and insurance coverage and execute the Contract within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of acceptance of this Bid by the Owner. A cashier’s check, certified check or Bid Bond (AIA A310) payable to the Owner as a Bid Security, in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Total Base Bid shall be submitted with each Bid in accordance with the Instruction to Bidders (AIA Document A701). If this Bid is accepted within the time stated, and Bidder fails to commence the Work or Bidder fails to provide the required Bond(s), the Bid Security shall be forfeited as damages to the Owner by reason of
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
004113 - 3 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
Bidder’s failure, limited in amount to the lesser of the face value of the Bid Security or the difference between this Bid and the Bid upon which the Contract is signed. In the event our Bid is not accepted within the time stated, the required Bid Security shall be returned to the undersigned, in accordance with the provisions of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. CONTRACT TIME The Work of this Contract shall commence upon execution of the Contract, and is to be Substantially Complete no later than the following dates: PHASE 1: August 23, 2013 PHASE 2: December 13, 2013 PHASE 3: August 22, 2014. ADDENDA The Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Base Bid Sum. Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Bidder, in submitting this Bid, certifies that the Bid is based upon careful examination of the Project Manual and Drawings and waives all rights to plead any misunderstanding. The Bidder, in submitting this Bid, understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received, and to accept any Alternate (s) in any order or combination. The Bidder acknowledges that he has executed and included the Affidavit of Non-Collusion Form (004519) with this Bid Form and that the Equal Opportunity Employment Form (007336) shall be executed and submitted within 10 days of award of the contract.
THE UNDERSIGNED operates as a: ___
Sole Owner
___
Partnership
004113 - 4 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
___
Corporation, incorporated in the State of -________________
___
Other (Specify) _______________________________________
LEGAL NAME OF PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION Legal Name: _______________________________________________________________ Address: __________________________________________________________________ Telephone: ________________________________ Facsimile: _______________________ By: _________________________________________ Title: ________________________ (Signature of Authorized Signing Officer) Corporate Seal: END OF DOCUMENT
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
004113 - 5 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
004113 - 6 of 6 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 004325 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO:
CUNINGHAM GROUP ARCHITECTURE, Inc, 201 Main Street SE, Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota, 55414
DATE: __________________
PROJECT: _____________________________________________________ Project No.________________ We hereby submit for your consideration the following product in lieu of the specified item for the above-mentioned Project. Submitting party shall verify substitutions are allowed for the product in the Construction Documents. Section: _____________________________________ Paragraph: Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: (Attach complete technical data, including laboratory test, if applicable.) Include complete information, including changes to Drawings and/or Specification, which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Fill in blanks below: A.
Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?
B.
Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?
C.
What affect does substitution have on other trades?
D.
Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?
E.
Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (explain on attachment)
The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by:
_____________________________________________________Date: _____________ (Signature)
Name/Title (print) Firm Name Address Phone No./FAX No. ************************************************************ For use by CGA, PA only: Accepted; Date:
Accepted as noted; By
Not Accepted;
Received too late
Remarks: END OF DOCUMENT
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM S:\11\0122\frontend\004325CGA.doc
004325 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 004343 - WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Modifications to the General C onditions for requirements unique to a specific project. 1. Wage R ate R equirements projects.
1.2
for M innesota
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 007 200 - General C onditions ( AIA Document A201).
1.3
WAGE RATE MINNESOTA
REQUIREMENTS-
A. Current r ates t o b e f ound at www.doli.state.mn.us for Dakota County, a co py o f w hich i s at tached following this section. 1.4
POSTING OF WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall post and maintain at least one copy o f t he s chedule o f P revailing Wage Determination Schedule in a co nspicuous l ocation on th e c onstruction s ite u ntil Substantial Completion of the Project.
1.5
ENFORCEMENT AND COMPLIANCE A. Contractor is solely responsible for enforcement of, and compliance with, the Wage Rate Determination Schedule for pe rsons e mployed di rectly by Contractor a nd pe rsons i n t he e mploy of its subcontractors, including s ettlement o f c laims made b y p ersons f ound t o h ave received wages lower t han r ate cl assification included in s aid schedule. B. Provide, up on request by O wner, written documentation verifying compliance with Wage Rate r equirements. Documentation may be i n the form of a certified payroll o r an other f orm as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\004343CGA.doc
004343 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
004343 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\004343CGA.doc
MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRY PREVAILING WAGES FOR STATE FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
THIS NOTICE MUST BE POSTED ON THE JOBSITE IN A CONSPICUOUS PLACE
Construction Type: Commercial County Number: 19 County Name: DAKOTA Effective: 2012-12-24 This project is covered by Minnesota prevailing wage statutes. Wage rates listed below are the minimum hourly rates to be paid on this project. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at a rate of one and one half (1 1/2) times the basic hourly rate. Violations should be reported to: Department of Labor and Industry Prevailing Wage Section 443 Lafayette Road N St Paul, MN 55155 (651) 284-5091
[email protected] * Indicates that adjacent county rates were used for the labor class listed. County: DAKOTA (19)
LABOR CODE AND CLASS
EFFECT DATE
BASIC FRINGE TOTAL RATE RATE RATE
LABORERS (101 - 112) (SPECIAL CRAFTS 701 - 730)
101
LABORER, COMMON (GENERAL LABOR WORK)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
102
LABORER, SKILLED (ASSISTING SKILLED CRAFT JOURNEYMAN)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
01/16/13
1
103* LABORER, LANDSCAPING (GARDENER, SOD LAYER AND NURSERY OPERATOR)
2012-12-24
17.49
12.04
29.53
2013-05-01
18.00
12.43
30.43
104* FLAG PERSON
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
105
WATCH PERSON
2012-12-24
24.83
15.47
40.30
106
BLASTER
2012-12-24
29.46
15.82
45.28
107
PIPELAYER (WATER, SEWER AND GAS)
2012-12-24
28.82
15.72
44.54
2013-05-01
28.77
16.02
44.79
2012-12-24
27.52
15.72
43.24
2013-05-01
27.47
16.02
43.49
2012-12-24
27.52
15.72
43.24
2013-05-01
27.47
16.02
43.49
SURVEY FIELD TECHNICIAN (OPERATE TOTAL STATION, GPS RECEIVER, LEVEL, ROD OR RANGE POLES, STEEL TAPE MEASUREMENT; MARK AND DRIVE STAKES; HAND OR POWER DIGGING FOR AND IDENTIFICATION OF MARKERS OR MONUMENTS; PERFORM AND CHECK CALCULATIONS; REVIEW AND UNDERSTAND CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND LAND SURVEY MATERIALS). THIS CLASSIFICATION DOES NOT APPLY TO THE WORK PERFORMED ON A PREVAILING WAGE PROJECT BY A LAND SURVEYOR WHO IS LICENSED PURSUANT TO MINNESOTA STATUTES, SECTIONS 326.02 TO 326.15.
2012-12-24
20.25
0.00
20.25
111* TRAFFIC CONTROL PERSON (TEMPORARY SIGNAGE)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
108
109
110
TUNNEL MINER
UNDERGROUND AND OPEN DITCH LABORER (EIGHT FEET BELOW STARTING GRADE LEVEL)
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT (201 - 204)
201
01/16/13
ARTICULATED HAULER
FOR RATE CALL 651-284-5091 OR EMAIL
[email protected]
2
202* BOOM TRUCK
2012-12-24
32.38
16.34
48.72
203* LANDSCAPING EQUIPMENT, INCLUDES HYDRO SEEDER OR MULCHER, SOD ROLLER, FARM TRACTOR WITH ATTACHMENT SPECIFICALLY SEEDING, SODDING, OR PLANT, AND TWO-FRAMED FORKLIFT (EXCLUDING FRONT, POSIT-TRACK, AND SKID STEER LOADERS), NO EARTHWORK OR GRADING FOR ELEVATIONS
2012-12-24
17.49
12.04
29.53
2013-05-01
18.00
12.43
30.43
204
OFF-ROAD TRUCK
205* PAVEMENT MARKING OR MARKING REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (ONE OR TWO PERSON OPERATORS); SELF-PROPELLED TRUCK OR TRAILER MOUNTED UNITS.
FOR RATE CALL 651-284-5091 OR EMAIL
[email protected]
2012-12-24
31.45
17.95
49.40
2012-12-24
31.27
15.85
47.12
HIGHWAY/HEAVY POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 2 * 306
GRADER OR MOTOR PATROL
308
TUGBOAT 100 H.P. AND OVER WHEN LICENSE REQUIRED (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
GROUP 3 *
2012-12-24
31.42
16.70
48.12
2013-05-01
31.67
16.70
48.37
309
ASPHALT BITUMINOUS STABILIZER PLANT
310
CABLEWAY
312
DERRICK (GUY OR STIFFLEG)(POWER)(SKIDS OR STATIONARY) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
314
DREDGE OR ENGINEERS, DREDGE (POWER) AND ENGINEER
316
LOCOMOTIVE CRANE OPERATOR
320
TANDEM SCRAPER
322
TUGBOAT 100 H.P AND OVER (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
01/16/13
3
GROUP 4
2012-12-24
31.12
16.70
47.82
2013-05-01
31.37
16.70
48.07
323
AIR TRACK ROCK DRILL
324
AUTOMATIC ROAD MACHINE (CMI OR SIMILAR) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
327
BITUMINOUS ROLLERS, RUBBER TIRED OR STEEL DRUMMED (EIGHT TONS AND OVER)
328
BITUMINOUS SPREADER AND FINISHING MACHINES (POWER), INCLUDING PAVERS, MACRO SURFACING AND MICRO SURFACING, OR SIMILAR TYPES (OPERATOR AND SCREED PERSON)
329
BROKK OR R.T.C. REMOTE CONTROL OR SIMILAR TYPE WITH ALL ATTACHMENTS
330
CAT CHALLENGER TRACTORS OR SIMILAR TYPES PULLING ROCK WAGONS, BULLDOZERS AND SCRAPERS
331
CHIP HARVESTER AND TREE CUTTER
332
CONCRETE DISTRIBUTOR AND SPREADER FINISHING MACHINE, LONGITUDINAL FLOAT, JOINT MACHINE, AND SPRAY MACHINE
334
CONCRETE MOBIL (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
335
CRUSHING PLANT (GRAVEL AND STONE) OR GRAVEL WASHING, CRUSHING AND SCREENING PLANT
336
CURB MACHINE
337
DIRECTIONAL BORING MACHINE
338
DOPE MACHINE (PIPELINE)
340
DUAL TRACTOR
341
ELEVATING GRADER
345
GPS REMOTE OPERATING OF EQUIPMENT
347
HYDRAULIC TREE PLANTER
348
LAUNCHER PERSON (TANKER PERSON OR PILOT LICENSE)
349
LOCOMOTIVE (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
350
MILLING, GRINDING, PLANNING, FINE GRADE, OR TRIMMER MACHINE
352
PAVEMENT BREAKER OR TAMPING MACHINE (POWER DRIVEN) MIGHTY MITE OR SIMILAR TYPE
354
PIPELINE WRAPPING, CLEANING OR BENDING MACHINE
356
POWER ACTUATED HORIZONTAL BORING MACHINE, OVER SIX INCHES
357
PUGMILL
359
RUBBER-TIRED FARM TRACTOR WITH BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
360
SCRAPER
361
SELF-PROPELLED SOIL STABILIZER
362
SLIP FORM (POWER DRIVEN) (PAVING)
363
TIE TAMPER AND BALLAST MACHINE
367
TUB GRINDER, MORBARK, OR SIMILAR TYPE
01/16/13
4
GROUP 5 *
2012-12-24
13.50
2.39
15.89
370
BITUMINOUS ROLLER (UNDER EIGHT TONS)
371
CONCRETE SAW (MULTIPLE BLADE) (POWER OPERATED)
372
FORM TRENCH DIGGER (POWER)
375
HYDRAULIC LOG SPLITTER
376
LOADER (BARBER GREENE OR SIMILAR TYPE)
377
POST HOLE DRIVING MACHINE/POST HOLE AUGER
379
POWER ACTUATED JACK
381
SELF-PROPELLED CHIP SPREADER (FLAHERTY OR SIMILAR)
382
SHEEP FOOT COMPACTOR WITH BLADE . 200 H.P. AND OVER
383
SHOULDERING MACHINE (POWER) APSCO OR SIMILAR TYPE INCLUDING SELF-PROPELLED SAND AND CHIP SPREADER
384
STUMP CHIPPER AND TREE CHIPPER
385
TREE FARMER (MACHINE)
GROUP 6 *
2012-12-24
26.87
16.70
43.57
2013-05-01
27.12
16.70
43.82
387
CAT, CHALLENGER, OR SIMILAR TYPE OF TRACTORS, WHEN PULLING DISK OR ROLLER
389
DREDGE DECK HAND
391
GRAVEL SCREENING PLANT (PORTABLE NOT CRUSHING OR WASHING)
393
LEVER PERSON
395
POWER SWEEPER
396
SHEEP FOOT ROLLER AND ROLLERS ON GRAVEL COMPACTION, INCLUDING VIBRATING ROLLERS
COMMERCIAL POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 1
2012-12-24
35.19
501
HELICOPTER PILOT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
502
TOWER CRANE 250 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
503
TRUCK CRAWLER CRANE WITH 200 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 2 504
01/16/13
2012-12-24
34.85
15.95
51.14
15.95
50.80
CONCRETE PUMP WITH 50 METERS/164 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 5
505
PILE DRIVING WHEN THREE DRUMS IN USE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
506
TOWER CRANE 200 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
507
TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE WITH 150 FEET OF BOOM UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 200 FEET, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 3
2012-12-24
33.44
15.95
49.39
508
ALL-TERRAIN VEHICLE CRANES (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
509
CONCRETE PUMP 32-49 METERS/102-164 FEET (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
510
DERRICK (GUY & STIFFLEG) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
511
STATIONARY TOWER CRANE 200 FEET AND OVER MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
512
SELF-ERECTING TOWER CRANE 100 FEET AND OVER MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
513
TRAVELING TOWER CRANE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
514
TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 150 FEET OF BOOM, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 4 *
2012-12-24
33.10
15.95
49.05
515
CRAWLER BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
516
FIREPERSON, CHIEF BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
517
HOIST ENGINEER (THREE DRUMS OR MORE) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
518
LOCOMOTIVE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
519
OVERHEAD CRANE ( INSIDE BUILDING PERIMETER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
520
TRACTOR . BOOM TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 5
2012-12-24
32.93
15.95
48.88
521
AIR COMPRESSOR 450 CFM OR OVER (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
522
CONCRETE MIXER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
523
CONCRETE PUMP UP TO 31 METERS/101 FEET OF BOOM
524
DRILL RIGS, HEAVY ROTARY OR CHURN OR CABLE DRILL WHEN USED FOR CAISSON FOR ELEVATOR OR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
525
FORKLIFT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
526
FRONT END, SKID STEER 1 C YD AND OVER
527
HOIST ENGINEER ( ONE OR TWO DRUMS) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
528
MECHANIC-WELDER (ON POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
529
POWER PLANT (100 KW AND OVER OR MULTIPLES EQUAL TO 100KW AND OVER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
01/16/13
6
530
PUMP OPERATOR AND/OR CONVEYOR (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
531
SELF-ERECTING TOWER CRANE UNDER 100 FEET MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
532
STRADDLE CARRIER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
533
TRACTOR OVER D2 (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
534
WELL POINT PUMP (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 6
2012-12-24
31.42
15.95
535
CONCRETE BATCH PLANT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
536
FIREPERSON, FIRST CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
537
FRONT END, SKID STEER UP TO 1 C YD
538
GUNITE MACHINE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
539
TRACTOR OPERATOR D2 OR SIMILAR SIZE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
540
TRENCHING MACHINE (SEWER, WATER, GAS) EXCLUDES WALK BEHIND TRENCHER
GROUP 7
2012-12-24
30.30
15.95
47.37
46.25
541
AIR COMPRESSOR 600 CFM OR OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
542
BRAKEPERSON (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
543
CONCRETE PUMP/PUMPCRETE OR COMPLACO TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
544
FIREPERSON, TEMPORARY HEAT SECOND CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
545
OILER (POWER SHOVEL, CRANE, TRUCK CRANE, DRAGLINE, CRUSHERS AND MILLING MACHINES, OR OTHER SIMILAR POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
546
PICK UP SWEEPER (ONE CUBIC YARD HOPPER CAPACITY) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
547
PUMP AND/OR CONVEYOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 8 *
2012-12-24
28.29
15.95
548
ELEVATOR OPERATOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
549
GREASER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
550
MECHANICAL SPACE HEATER (TEMPORARY HEAT NO BOILER LICENSE REQUIRED) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
44.24
TRUCK DRIVERS
GROUP 1 *
01/16/13
2012-12-24
25.50
1.84
27.34
7
601
MECHANIC . WELDER
602
TRACTOR TRAILER DRIVER
603
TRUCK DRIVER (HAULING MACHINERY INCLUDING OPERATION OF HAND AND POWER OPERATED WINCHES)
GROUP 2 * 604
2012-12-24
22.00
5.85
27.85
2012-12-24
25.00
0.00
25.00
2012-12-24
35.82
8.18
44.00
2012-12-24
41.17
18.59
59.76
2013-06-01
41.67
18.59
60.26
2012-12-24
31.87
24.40
56.27
2013-01-01
33.52
24.40
57.92
FOUR OR MORE AXLE UNIT, STRAIGHT BODY TRUCK
GROUP 3 * 605
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR DRIVER
606
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR (ONE PERSON OPERATION)
607
THREE AXLE UNITS
GROUP 4 608
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR SPRAY OPERATOR (REAR AND OILER)
609
DUMP PERSON
610
GREASER
611
PILOT CAR DRIVER
612
RUBBER-TIRED, SELF-PROPELLED PACKER UNDER 8 TONS
613
TWO AXLE UNIT
614
SLURRY OPERATOR
615
TANK TRUCK HELPER (GAS, OIL, ROAD OIL, AND WATER)
616
TRACTOR OPERATOR, UNDER 50 H.P.
SPECIAL CRAFTS 701
702
HEATING AND FROST INSULATORS
BOILERMAKERS
703
BRICKLAYERS
2012-12-24
32.20
17.96
50.16
704
CARPENTERS
2012-12-24
31.69
17.45
49.14
705
CARPET LAYERS (LINOLEUM)
2012-12-24
33.27
14.15
47.42
01/16/13
8
706
CEMENT MASONS
2012-12-24
32.39
16.60
48.99
707
ELECTRICIANS
2012-12-24
35.79
23.92
59.71
2013-05-01
37.19
23.92
61.11
2012-12-24
43.21
28.33
71.54
2013-01-01
43.21
29.98
73.19
2012-12-24
35.69
14.55
50.24
710* LATHERS
2012-12-24
31.89
17.27
49.16
712
IRONWORKERS
2012-12-24
34.15
21.20
55.35
714
MILLWRIGHT
2012-12-24
30.18
20.24
50.42
715
PAINTERS (INCLUDING HAND BRUSHED, HAND SPRAYED, AND THE TAPING OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS)
2012-12-24
31.45
17.95
49.40
716
PILEDRIVER (INCLUDING VIBRATORY DRIVER OR EXTRACTOR FOR PILING AND SHEETING OPERATIONS)
2012-12-24
32.29
17.78
50.07
2013-05-01
32.79
17.78
50.57
708
709
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
GLAZIERS
717
PIPEFITTERS . STEAMFITTERS
2012-12-24
39.70
22.99
62.69
718
PLASTERERS
2012-12-24
34.40
14.62
49.02
719
PLUMBERS
2012-12-24
39.63
20.71
60.34
720
ROOFER
2012-12-24
34.12
14.91
49.03
721
SHEET METAL WORKERS
2012-12-24
39.37
20.56
59.93
2013-06-01
40.29
20.21
60.50
01/16/13
9
722
2012-12-24
39.74
20.79
60.53
723* TERRAZZO WORKERS
2012-12-24
31.58
17.53
49.11
724
TILE SETTERS
2012-12-24
27.91
18.63
46.54
725
TILE FINISHERS
2012-12-24
22.87
14.98
37.85
726
DRYWALL TAPER
2012-12-24
30.17
19.12
49.29
727
WIRING SYSTEM TECHNICIAN
2012-12-24
32.09
12.39
44.48
728
WIRING SYSTEMS INSTALLER
2012-12-24
22.46
10.61
33.07
729
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKER
2012-12-24
27.33
14.94
42.27
2013-01-01
27.53
15.34
42.87
2012-12-24
25.39
10.78
36.17
730
01/16/13
SPRINKLER FITTERS
SIGN ERECTOR
10
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 006000 - PROJECT FORMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Bond Forms: 1. Bid Bond (AIA Document A310). 2. Performance Bond (AIA Document A312). 3. Payment Bond AIA Document A312). B. Certificates and Other Forms: 1. Application a nd C ertificate f or Payment (AIA Document G702-1992). C. Closeout Forms: 1. Statutory Declaration Forms Used With Application f or P ayments o r W ith Final Payment. a. Contractor’s A ffidavit o f P ayment of Debts and Claims (AIA Document G706-1994). b. Contractor’s A ffidavit o f R elease o f Liens (AIA Document G706A-1994). c. Consent o f S urety to F inal P ayment ( AIA Document G707-1994). d. Consent of Surety to Reduction in/or Partial Release o f R etainage ( AIA D ocument G707A-1994). e. Certification of S ubstantial C ompletion (AIA Document G704-1992).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
PROJECT FORMS
S:\11\0122\frontend\006000CGA.doc
006000 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 007200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Single P rime Contract G eneral Conditions to a Construction C ontract ( AIA D ocument A201-2007).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0122\frontend\007200CGA.doc
007200 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 007313 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The f ollowing s upplements m odify, ch ange, d elete from or a dd t o t he " General C onditions of t he C ontract f or Construction", AIA D ocument A 201, 2007 Edition. Where a ny Article o f the G eneral Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof i s modified o r d eleted b y t hese s upplements, t he unaltered provisions of t he A rticle, P aragraph, S ubparagraph, o r Clause of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
2.2
Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety, and substitute: 2.2.5 “Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. Contractor may procure additional complete sets from the Architect at the cost of reproduction, shipping and handling.”
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1
BASIC DEFINITIONS
Add the following New Subparagraphs, 1.1.9 and 1.1.10 as follows: 1.1.9 ADDENDA Addenda shall be either written and/or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract that modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. Addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. 1.1.10 WRITING A writing shall include any communication reduced to a written form, including letters, facsimiles, e-mails, text messages, memorandums, meeting minutes, Project website postings, or other written forms generally accepted for communication purposes on the Project and transmitted electronically or delivered hardcopy. 1.2
CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Add the following New Subparagraphs, 1.2.4 and 1.2.5: 1.2.4. “Subject to the requirements of Section 01110 – Summary of Work, paragraph, In case of discrepancy, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, and the greater quantity or greater quality shall be provided.” 1.2.5. “Unless otherwise noted, where a reference in the Contract Documents is made to a standard, the edition of the standard current as of the date of this Project Manual with amendments shall apply.”
ARTICLE 2 - OWNER SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.2
REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.1.1 “The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. If the Contractor fails to designate a Representative, the Contractor’s Project superintendent shall serve as the Contractor’s Representative. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.” Add the following New Subparagraph 3.2.1.1: 3.2.1.1 “The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agent or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages or delay resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. If the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work, performs any construction activity without knowing it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, their sole remedy shall be the procedures 007313 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
and terms for Contractor’s claims against the Owner provided under Article 15.”
shall not pay sales or use taxes on materials and equipment which are affixed and made part of the real estate or which are purchased for the project and become the property of the Owner. The Owner’s sales and use tax exemption certificate number, which the Contractors shall use as agent of the Owner, shall be provided at the appropriate time. Contractors shall pay all other taxes required by law.”
Add the following New Subparagraph 3.2.5: 3.2.5 “The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum, amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor’s requests for information, where such information was available to the Contractor from a reasonably careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.”
Delete Subparagraph 3.7.5 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.7.5 “If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. Claims under 15.1.2, shall be initiated within 21 days of occurrence of the event giving rise to a claim, however, as claims may be ongoing past 21 days, final determination of the claim will be suspended and any time restrictions tolled pending completion of such event and resumption of work in the affected area.”
Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.4 and subordinate Clauses: 3.3.4 “The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.12, and general design intent reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.” .1 “The Contractor shall review specified construction and installation procedures (including those recommended by manufacturers) prior to implementation and shall advise the Architect in writing if the Contractor should have knowledge of any of the following: (1) the specified products deviate from good construction practice, (2) following the procedures will affect warranties, and (3) objections the Contractor may have to the procedures.” 3.5
WARRANTY
In the third sentence of Subparagraph 3.5.1, substitute the words "shall at Owner's option" for the word "may". Add the following new Subparagraph 3.5.2: 3.5.2 “Manufacturer’s product warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of general warranty obligations.” 3.6
TAXES
3.9
SUPERINTENDENT
Add new sentence at end of 3.9.1, as follows: “…Where no other Contractors Representative has been appointed per 3.1.1, the superintendent shall serve in the capacity of Project Representative capacity with corresponding authority.”
3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Add the following New Subparagraph 3.6.1: 3.6.1 “The Owner is a public school district which is exempt from the payment of Minnesota sales and use taxes in accordance with State Statute. The Contractors may be appointed by the Owner as its purchasing agent. If the Owner elects, Contractors 007313 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Delete the first sentence in Subparagraph 3.10.2 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.10.2 “The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and shall update it thereafter as necessary to maintain SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Farmington Elementary School a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Add Subparagraph 3.12.11 as follows: 3.12.11 “The Architect’s review of Contractor’s submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and one re-submittal. The Architect’s review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum, amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional re-submittals.” 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION Delete Subparagraph 3.18.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.18.1 “To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and any other person or entity designated in the Contract Documents, and the officers, directors, shareholders, partners, representatives, agents and employees of each of them (collectively, the "Indemnitees") from and against all claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses and expenses, including, without limitation, attorney's and consultants' fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work or the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its Subcontractors, subsubcontractors, suppliers or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, demand, cause of action, damage, liability, loss or expense is caused in part by an Indemnitee. Such obligation shall not extend to claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses or expenses to the extent they result from the gross or sole negligence or willful misconduct of an Indemnitee. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18” Add the following new Subparagraphs 3.18.3, 3.18.4, 3.18.5 and 3.18.6: 3.18.3 “The Contractor shall defend each Indemnitee in any action, proceeding or arbitration brought against the Indemnitee by reason of any such claim SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Addition and Remodeling described in this Paragraph 3.18. The Contractor's obligation to defend an Indemnitee shall not extend to any action, proceeding or arbitration that asserts or alleges only that the injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnitee and from no other cause or to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitee provided that a final judgment is obtained establishing that injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnitee or to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct, in which latter event Contractor's obligation to defend the Indemnitee shall cease upon the date the judgment becomes final, and the Indemnitee shall thereupon reimburse Contractor for its reasonable attorney's fees and court costs in so defending the gross or sole negligence or willful misconduct of an Indemnitee.” 3.18.4 “If any claim of lien or stop-notice or any other demand for payment or security thereof, including claims or demands upon performance and payment bond sureties for this Contract, is made or filed with the Owner or the Project by any person claiming that Contractor or any Subcontractor or supplier or any other person claiming under any of them has failed to perform its contractual obligations or to make payment for any labor, services, trust fund contributions, materials, equipment, taxes or other item furnished or obligation incurred for, or in connection with, the Work, or if at any time there should be evidence of such nonperformance or nonpayment of any claim or lien or stop-notice or other demand for which, if established, the Owner or the Project might become liable, then the Owner shall have the right to retain from any payment then or thereafter due under the Contract or to be reimbursed by Contractor for an amount sufficient to (i) satisfy, discharge and defend against any such claim of lien or stop-notice or other demand, or any action or proceeding therein that may be brought to judgment or award; (ii) make good any such nonpayment, nonperformance, damage, failure or default; and (iii) compensate the Owner for, and indemnify it against, any and all loss, liability, damage, cost and expense (including attorneys' and consultants' fees and costs) sustained or incurred in connection therewith.” 3.18.5 “If any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or Contractor or any of them makes, records or files, or maintains any action on or respecting a claim of mechanic's lien, stop-notice, equitable lien, or claim against any Project, payment or performance bond or a lis pendens, relating to the Work, the Contractor shall immediately at its own expense 007313 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling procure, furnish and record appropriate statutory release bonds, which will extinguish or expunge said claim, stop-notice, or lis pendens or immediately take such actions to contest the claims as shall be acceptable to Owner.” 3.18.6 “Contractor shall, at its own cost, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Architect, Owner, its officers, agents, employees, assigns, and successors in interest, from and against any and all liability, damages, losses, claims, demands, actions, causes of action, and costs including attorney's fees and expenses, or any of them, arising from or attributable to a lien or stop notice filed and/or severed in connection with the Work.”
Farmington Elementary School
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3
SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
Add New Subparagraph 5.3.1 as follows: 5.3.1 “If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly supply copies of each subcontract agreement to the Owner.” 5.4
CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
Delete from Clause 5.4.1.1 the words "for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2". ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1
Delete Subparagraph 5.4.2 in its entirety and substitute the following:
ARCHITECT
“ If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days and the subcontract is re-assigned under Article 5.4, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increase in costs resulting from the suspension.”
Add New Subparagraph 4.1.4 as follows: 4.1.4. “The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages resulting from delays, defects or deficiencies in the Work.”
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2
4.2
ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
CHANGE ORDERS
Add New Subparagraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 “The Architect’s signature on a Change Order indicates only that the Architect acknowledges the Owner’s and Contractor’s mutual acceptance of the items outlined in Subparagraph 7.2.1 and its subsequent Clauses.”
Add to the end of first sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.1 as follows: “…Payment, or until 60 days after substantial completion, whichever occurs later.” Add to the end of Subparagraph 4.2.2 as follows: 7.3 “The Contractor may not rely upon the Architect's site observations or related reports to the Owner as confirmation that the Work is being performed in accordance with the Contract Documents or for any other purpose.” Add to the end of Subparagraph 4.2.4 as follows: “To the extent they occur, any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the performance or administration of the obligations under this construction Contract shall be made or confirmed in writing, with copies to the Architect.” 007313 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
Delete Clause 7.3.3.3 in its entirety and substitute: .3
“cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and an allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, based on the following schedule: 1. For the Contractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost. 2. For the Contractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Contractor’s
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.
4.
5. 6.
Subcontractor’s, five (5) percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. For each Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor involved, for any portion of the Work performed by the Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost. For each Subcontractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractor, five (5) percent of the amount due the Subsubcontractor. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed in 7.3.3.2 above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $300 be approved without such itemization.”
Near the end of the first sentence in Subparagraph 7.3.6, delete the words “…a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.” and substitute “…an allowance for overhead and profit not to exceed that stated in Clause 7.3.3.3”.
Addition and Remodeling
8.1
DEFINITIONS
Add to the end of Subparagraph 8.1.2 the following: “If no date for commencement is established in the Agreement or by the Project Manual, the date of commencement is the date of the notice to proceed, if one is issued or if no notice to proceed is issued, the date of commencement is five (5) calendar days after the date of the Agreement.” 8.3
DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME
Add to the end of Subparagraph 8.3.1the following: “A time extension shall be Contractor's sole remedy and compensation for all such delays other than those resulting from the willful acts or gross negligence of Owner, the Architect, or Owner's separate contractors (collectively, "Owner-Caused Delays"). For such compensatory Owner-Caused Delays, Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement for its reasonable additional costs resulting from such delays in accordance with Article 7.3”. Delete Subparagraph 8.3.3 in its entirety:
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Delete Subparagraph 9.3.1 in its entirety, and substitute: Delete second to the last sentence in Subparagraph 7.3.7 in its entirety and substitute the following: “…In such case the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. …” Add New Clauses .6 and .7 to Subparagraph 7.3.7 as follows: “.6 An allowance for overhead and profit as determined in accordance with Section 7.3.3.3. .7 Other reasonable and proper cost items normally included in the cost of the Work as reasonably approved by the Architect.”
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
9.3.1 “No later than the 25th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect and the Owner an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values during the prior month. Such Application shall be notarized, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage as provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents”. Add new Clause 9.3.1.3 as follows: 9.3.1.3 “Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety-five percent (95%) of the amount of progress payments. The Owner, in making partial payments, will retain five percent (5%) of the duly approved value of the Work performed under the 007313 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling Contract as of the date of the Application for Payment until final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract.” Add Clauses 9.3.3.1, 9.3.3.2, 9.3.3.3 and 9.3.3.4 to Subparagraph 9.3.3: .1
.2
.3 .4
“Contractor shall observe provisions in the lien laws of the state where the Project is located and furnish papers, when necessary, for the protection of the interests of the Owner.” “Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, along with each progress Application for Payment conditional partial lien waiver covering the full current requested payment amount, and final (as the case may be) lien waivers or releases covering all material used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract through the date of the prior billing.” “Should the Contractor fail to submit required lien waivers or releases, the Application for Payment by the Contractor may not be certified.” Before final payment will be made, the Contractor shall furnish waivers of lien conditioned on final payment, covering all materials used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract. Show all conditional and final lien waivers or releases in actual amounts. No waivers for $1.00 or such token amounts will be accepted".
Add a new Subparagraph 9.3.4 as follows: 9.3.4 "Out-of-State Contractors and their subcontractors performing Work in the State of Minnesota shall be subject to withholding laws set forth in Minnesota Statutes 290.9705.” 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Farmington Elementary School
Add Clause 9.10.1.1 to Subparagraph 9.10.1: .1 “If the status of completion of the Work requires re-inspection by the Architect prior to issuance of final Certificate for Payment due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect’s compensation amount for re-inspection services from the final payment to the Contractor.” Insert at the end of the First sentence of Subparagraph 9.10.2 the following: “and (6) Construction Record Documents as described in the Division 1 of the Contract Documents.” ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add to the end of Subparagraph 10.2.4 the following sentence: “…and shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. The Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance written notice.” 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Add new Subparagraph 10.3.2.1 as follows: 10.3.2.1 “The Owner and Contractor agree that the Architect shall not have any obligation to discover, detect or investigate the presence of any Hazardous Materials at or near the site of the Project at any time.”
Add Clause 9.8.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.8.2: ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS .1
“If the status of completion of the Work requires re-inspection by the Architect prior to issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor’s claim of readiness for Substantial Completion on initial inspection, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect’s compensation amount for re-inspection services from progress or final payment to the Contractor.”
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
007313 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraph 11.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute the following: 11.1.1 “The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:” Insurance requirements for the Work of This Project shall be determined by the Owner at a later date. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner all insurance prior to beginning Work of the Project. Contractor shall NOT begin work on the Project until insurance requirements are fulfilled to the Owners satisfaction, including providing Owner requested documentation. .1
.2
.4
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY .1
Coverage A:
.2
Coverage B: $500
Each Accident.
$500
Disease - Each Employee
$500
Disease, Policy Limit
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY .1
$2,000,000
.2
$2,000,000 Products – Completed Operations Aggregate
.3
$500,000
Each Occurrence
.4
$500,000
Personal Injury
.5
General Aggregate
COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY .1 $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury and Property Damage.
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
UMBRELLA LIABILITY .1 $5,000,000 Each Occurrence $5,000,000 Annual Aggregate .2
State Statute
THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIBILITY SHALL PROVIDE AT A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING COVERAGES: .5 Operations of the Contractor. .6 Operations of Subcontractor. (Contingent Liability). .7 Products/Completed Operations (To be carried for one year after completion of Contract). .8 Personal injury, including employee related claims. .9 Employees as Additional insured. .10 Property Damage Hazards of Explosion, Collapse and Underground. .11 Contractual Liability (To insure the provisions of 3.18). .12 Owner, Architect and Architect’s Consultants shall be named as Additional insured. .3
THE COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIBILITY SHALL PROVIDE COVERAGE FOR THE FOLLOWING AUTOMOBILES: .2 All Owned Automobiles. .3 All Non-Owned Automobiles. .4 All Hired Automobiles. .5 Owner, A rchitect a nd A rchitect’s C onsultants shall be named as Additional insured.
THE UMBRELLA LIABILITY SHALL PROVIDE EXCESS LIMITS OVER AND ABOVE THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY, EMPLOYERS LIABILITY AND COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY LIMITS AS STATED IN THIS ARTICLE.
The insurance set forth in these documents is the minimum insurance required. Any additional coverage that may be necessary to further protect the Contractor is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Add to the end of 11.1.3 as follows: “The Contractor shall promptly furnish to the Owner copies of endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.” 11.3
PROPERTY INSURANCE
Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.1, and substitute the following: “This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Architect, and Architect’s Consultants, lower tier subcontractors and all suppliers at the job site.” Delete Clause 11.3.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 11.3.1.1 “Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, false-work, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, resultant damage from 007313 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling faulty work and faulty materials, resultant damage from errors and omissions in design, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.” ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK In Subparagraph 12.1.1, Insert “or the Owner” after “Architect” in all locations. In Subparagraph 12.1.2, Insert “or the Owner” after “Architect” in all locations.
ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Farmington Elementary School given to Contractor, specifying the extent of termination and the effective date.” Delete Subparagraph 14.4.2 in its entirety, and Substitute the following: 14.4.2 “Upon receipt of the notice of termination, Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with Owner's instructions proceed as follows: .1 Cease operations as specified; .2 Place no further orders and enter into no further subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities; .3 Unless otherwise specified, terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent that they relate to Work so terminated; .4 Complete the performance of Work not terminated; and .5 Take such other actions as may be necessary or requested by Owner for the protection and preservation of the terminated Work.
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Add the following new Clauses 14.2.1.5, 14.2.1.6 and 14.2.1.7 to Subparagraph 14.2.1:
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
“.5 If the Contractor fails to make satisfactory progress in performing the Work for a period of thirty (30) days. .6 If the Contractor becomes insolvent, files a petition in Bankruptcy, shall be adjudicated bankrupt, shall made a general assignment to the benefit of its creditors, or shall be unable to pay its debts as they generally become due. .7 The Contractor shall suspend its business operations or otherwise fail to operate its business in the ordinary course.” In Subparagraph 14.2.2 delete the words "upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action," 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Delete Subparagraph 14.4.1 in its entirety, and Substitute the following: 14.4.1 “Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for Owner's convenience and without cause. Termination by Owner under this Paragraph shall be by written notice of termination 007313 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0122\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 007350 PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SCOPE A.
1.2
REFERENCES A.
1.3
Articles I through XIII of the Project Labor Agreement along with its Attachments ”A”, “B”, and “C” are hereby made a part of this Project Manual and have been included in this Project Manual in their entirety for reference. The “Schedule A” referred to in the Project Labor Agreement is comprised of the Local Collective Bargaining Agreements. For copies of the individual agreements, contact the local collective bargaining groups directly, or the St. Paul Building and Trades Council at Labor Center, Room 206, 411 Main St. St. Paul, MN 55102, telephone (651) 224-9445.
ACCEPTANCE A.
The Contractor shall sign Attachment “A”, the Letter of Assent
B.
The Contractor shall sign Attachment “B”, the Health Reimbursement Account Employer Subscriber Agreement
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 Not Used
S:\11\0122\frontend\007350.DOC
007350 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
END OF SECTION
007350 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\frontend\007350.DOC
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT Independent School District No. 192 (Farmington Area Public Schools) Farmington Elementary School and Akin Road Elementary School Construction Projects
This Agreement is entered into this ________ day of _________________, 2013, by and between ____________ _____________________ ( herein r eferred t o a s “ Project Manager/General C ontractor”), t he ST. P AUL BUILDING AN D C ONSTRUCTION TRADES C OUNCIL, ( hereinafter r eferred t o a s “ Council”), a nd a ll B uilding T rades Unions affiliated with the Council. ARTICLE I PURPOSE Section 1 . The t erm "Contractor" s hall i nclude a ll c onstruction c ontractors a nd subcontractors of whatever tier engaged in onsite construction work within the scope of this A greement, including t he P roject M anager/General C ontractor when i t p erforms construction w ork w ithin t he s cope of t his Agreement. W here s pecific r eference t o alone i s i ntended, t he t erm [insert name of Project Manager/General Contractor] "Project Manager/General Contractor" is used. Section 2. The Parties to this Project Labor Agreement acknowledge that the construction of the Project is important to the development of Farmington Elementary and Akin Road Elementary S chools. The P arties recognize t he need f or t he t imely completion of t he Project w ithout i nterruption or de lay. T his A greement i s i ntended t o e nhance t his cooperative effort t hrough t he e stablishment of a f ramework f or l abor management cooperation and stability. Section 3 . The C ontractor(s) a nd t he U nions a gree t hat th e time ly construction o f th is Project will require substantial numbers of employees from construction and supporting crafts possessing skills and qualifications that are vital to its completion. They will work together to furnish skilled, efficient craftworkers for the construction of the Project. Section 4. Further, the parties desire to mutually establish and stabilize wages, hours and working conditions for the craftworkers on t his construction project, to encourage close cooperation be tween t he C ontractor(s) a nd t he U nions t o t he e nd t hat a s atisfactory, continuous and harmonious relationship will exist between the parties to this Agreement. Section 5. Therefore, in recognition of the special needs of this Project and to maintain a spirit o f h armony, l abor-management p eace, a nd s tability d uring th e te rm o f th is Agreement, the parties agree to abide by the terms and conditions in this Agreement, and to e stablish e ffective a nd bi nding m ethods f or t he s ettlement of a ll m isunderstandings, disputes or grievances which may arise. Further, the Contractor(s) and all contractors of PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 1
whatever tier, agree not to engage in any lockout, and the Unions agree not to engage in any strike, slowdown, or interruption or other disruption of or interference with the work covered by this Agreement. ARTICLE II SCOPE OF AGREEMENT Section 1. This Agreement shall apply and is limited to the recognized and accepted historical de finition of construction w ork und er the di rection o f a nd pe rformed b y t he Contractor(s), of w hatever t ier, w hich m ay i nclude t he P roject M anager/General Contractor, who h ave contracts awarded for s uch work on t he P roject. S uch work s hall include site preparation work and dedicated off-site work. The Project is defined as: Owner: Independent S chool D istrict N o. 192 ( Farmington A rea P ublic Schools). Project: T he 2005 Bond Referendum a nd Alternative Facility Health & Safety Funding, which involve general remodeling and additions to school buildings. There a re two buildings which will be undergoing renovation of va rious d egrees. T here will b e a t le ast t wo bid p ackages th at will include both single and multiple building sites. All projects will be bid as single p rime – general contractor p ackages. The p arties anticipate th e following work to be included in the projects: See ATTACHMENT C It is agreed that the Project Manager/General Contractor shall require all Contractors of whatever tier who have been awarded contracts for work covered by this Agreement, to accept a nd be bound b y t he t erms a nd c onditions o f th is A greement b y e xecuting th e Letter of A ssent ( Attachment A ) pr ior t o c ommencing w ork. T he P roject Manager/General C ontractor s hall as sure co mpliance w ith t his A greement b y t he Contractors. It is further agreed that, where there is a conflict, the terms and conditions of this A greement s hall s upersede a nd ov erride t erms a nd c onditions of a ny and a ll ot her national, ar ea, o r l ocal collective b argaining a greements, except t hat t he w ork o f t he International Union of Elevator Constructors on this Project shall be performed under the terms o f its N ational A greements, w ith th e e xception o f A rticle V III ( Work S toppages and Lockouts), IX (Disputes a nd G rievances), and X ( Jurisdictional D isputes) of t his Agreement, which shall apply to such work. It is understood that this is a self-contained, stand a lone A greement and t hat b y vi rtue o f ha ving be come bound t o t his A greement, neither the Project Manager/General Contractor nor Contractors will be obligated to sign any other local area, or national agreement. Section 2. Nothing c ontained he rein s hall be c onstrued to pr ohibit, r estrict or interfere with the performance of any other operation, work, or function which may occur at the Project site or be associated with the development of the Project. PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 2
Section 3. This Agreement shall only be binding on t he signatory parties hereto and shall not apply to their parents, affiliates or subsidiaries. Section 4. The O wner an d/or t he P roject M anager/General C ontractor h ave t he absolute r ight to s elect any qualified bi dder f or t he a ward of contracts on t his P roject without r eference t o t he ex istence o r n on-existence o f an y agreements b etween s uch bidder a nd a ny party t o t his A greement; pr ovided, how ever, onl y t hat such bi dder i s willing, ready and able to become a party to and comply with this Agreement, should it be designated the successful bidder. Section 5. Items specifically excluded from the scope of this Agreement include but are not limited to the following: The Project is defined as individual construction projects related s olely to th e 2 005 bond r eferendum and al ternative f acility health & s afety funding for the repair, renovation and remodeling of schools. See Article II, Section 1 for the de finition of t he P roject. A ll e mployees ( full/part-time) a nd v olunteers i nvolved i n normal s chool di strict ope rations, r epair and m aintenance a re e xempt f rom t his agreement. A ll c onsultants a nd c ontractors pr oviding on going s ervices and ope rations related to normal school district operations, repair and maintenance are also exempt from this agreement. The project scope exempts the following labor and services: • • • • • • •
Owners Representative and their personnel Design teams (architects, engineers, consultants, etc..) Surveyors, commissioning agents, and other testing services Fabricators and vendors producing materials off-site Job site security provided by the District Post-occupancy cleaning services Moving of existing or District provided furniture/equipment by employees
Section 6. The provisions of this Agreement shall not apply to ISD 192 (Owner), and nothing contained herein shall be construed to prohibit or restrict ISD 192 (Owner) or its employees from performing work not covered by this Agreement on the Project site. As areas an d s ystems o f t he P roject are i nspected and c onstruction t ested b y t he P roject Manager/General Contractor or Contractors and accepted b y the Owner, the A greement will not have further force or effect on such items or areas, except when the Contractors are d irected b y t he Owner t o en gage i n r epairs, modifications, c heck-out, a nd w arranty functions required by its contract with the Owner during the term of this Agreement. Section 7. It is u nderstood th at th e O wner, a t its s ole o ption, ma y t erminate, d elay and/or suspend any or all portions of the Project at any time. Section 8. It is understood that the liability o f any employer and the liability of th e separate unions under this Agreement shall be several and not joint. The unions agree that PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 3
this Agreement does not have the effect of creating any Joint employer status between or among the Owner, Contractor(s) or any employer. Section 9. It i s unde rstood a nd agreed t hat a ll pr oject w ork m ust be pe rformed b y employees of employers bound by the terms of this Agreement. Section 10. Nothing in this Agreement shall negate, abridge or alter any laws, rights or responsibilities of the Owner, including, but not limited to, laws relating to public bidding and laws relating to public construction involving school districts. Section 11 . The C ontractors a gree t o pa y contributions t o t he e stablished e mployee benefit funds in the amounts designated in the Local Area Labor Agreements identified in Schedule A. Contractors that are not signatory to a collective bargaining agreement beyond the scope of this Agreement (“PLA contractor”) may select to participate in the legally established Industry Health Reimbursement Arrangement ("HRA") plan, in lieu of contributing to the respective bona f ide be nefit f unds a s de signated i n S chedule A . T he amount of t he contribution is based on t he difference between the contribution amount of the bona fide Schedule A be nefit f unds a nd t he c ost of t he P LA contractors' b ona f ide non discretionary pl ans. C ontributions m ust be m ade on be half of na med e mployees. Participating contractors will submit to the Trustees of the HRA trust and plan a copy of their pl an, s ummary pl an de scription, a nd t he p remium s tructure f or w orkers c overed under t he P LA c ontractor's bon a f ide, non -discretionary pl ans. T he v alue of t he P LA contractor's benefit pl ans a re s ubject t o c onfirmation b y t he T rustees of t he H RA t rust and plan. This may include an independent audit according to a policy as established by the Trustees. Contractors are required to submit certified payroll reports to the Trustees or authorized administrator in order to confirm compliance with the terms of the HRA trust and plan. The C ontractors a dopt and a gree t o be bound b y the w ritten t erms of t he l egallyestablished Trust Agreements (or in lieu thereof, the aforementioned HRA plan and trust including any policies) s pecifying the detailed basis on w hich payments are to be made into, and benefits paid out of, such Trust Funds. The Contractors authorize the parties to such Trust Agreements to appoint trustees and successor trustees to administer the Trust funds a nd h ereby r atify and accept t he T rustees s o appointed as i f m ade b y the Contractors. ARTICLE III UNION RECOGNITION Section 1 . The C ontractors r ecognize t he s ignatory Unions a s t he s ole and e xclusive bargaining r epresentatives o f a ll c raft e mployees w ithin th eir r espective ju risdictions working on the Project within the scope of this Agreement.
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 4
Section 2. The hiring of employees shall be governed by the procedures set forth in the Agreements which form Schedule A, except that employers not party to any Agreements which f orm S chedule A w ill be e ntitled to r etain up t o 15% of the e mployer’s c ore employees when commencing work on the project. Section 3. All employees covered by this Agreement shall be subject to the union security provisions contained in the applicable Agreement in Schedule A. Section 4. Referral. Applicants for the various classifications covered by this Agreement required b y t he E mployer or C ontractors on the P roject s hall be r eferred t o t he Contractors b y t he U nions. T he U nions r epresent t hat i ts l ocal uni ons administer a nd control t heir r eferrals an d i t i s ag reed t hat t hese r eferrals w ill b e m ade i n a n ondiscriminatory manner and in full compliance with Federal and State laws. ARTICLE IV UNION REPRESENTATION Section 1. Authorized representatives of t he Union s hall ha ve a ccess t o t he P roject, provided they do not interfere with the work of employees and further provided that such representatives f ully comply with pos ted vi sitor a nd s ecurity a nd s afety rules o f t he Project. Section 2. Stewards. E ach signatory Local Union shall have the right to designate a working journeyman as a steward, and shall notify the Construction Manager in writing of t he i dentity o f t he d esignated s teward prior t o t he assumption of hi s or her dut ies as steward. S uch de signated s teward s hall not e xercise a ny s upervisory f unctions. T here will be no non -working stewards. S tewards will receive the regular rate of pay of their respective crafts. ARTICLE V WAGES AND BENEFITS Section 1 . All em ployees co vered b y t his A greement s hall b e cl assified i n acco rdance with w ork pe rformed a nd pa id t he ba se hour ly wage r ates f or t hose classifications a s specified in the attached Schedule A. ARTICLE VI HOURS OF WORK, OVERTIME, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS Section 1. The work week and work day shall be determined as set forth in the applicable Schedule A agreement. Section 2 . O vertime p ay s hall b e es tablished b y reference t o t he ap plicable S chedule A agreement.
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 5
Section 3 . It s hall n ot b e a v iolation o f t his A greement i f t he P roject M anager/General Contractor considers it necessary to suspend all or portion of the Project to protect the life and safety of an employee. In such cases, employees will be compensated onl y for the actual time worked; provided, however, that where the employer requests employees to remain a t t he s ite a nd a vailable f or work, t he employees will be c ompensated f or t he standby time at their base hourly rate of pay. Section 4 . Shift w ork will b e p erformed in accordance w ith th e c urrently existing Schedule A agreement. Section 5 . Recognized holidays on t his P roject s hall be t hose i n t he l ocal c ollective bargaining agreements i n existence for the appropriate Local Unions on the date of this Agreement as co ntained i n t he at tached Schedule A . T here s hall b e n o ch ange i n t he established hol iday s chedules a nd t he d ays upo n w hich t hose hol idays are celebrated, except by mutual agreement. ARTICLE VII MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS The P roject M anager/General C ontractor an d C ontractors o f w hatever tie r retain full and exclusive authority for the management of their operations. Except as otherwise limited by the terms of this Agreement, the Contractors shall direct their working forces at t heir pr erogative, i ncluding, but not l imited t o hi ring, pr omotion, t ransfer, l ay-off o r discharge f or j ust c ause. N o r ules, c ustoms, or pr actices s hall be pe rmitted or obs erved which limit o r r estrict p roduction, o r limit o r r estrict th e w orking e fforts o f e mployees. The C ontractors s hall u tilize th e mo st e fficient method or t echniques o f c onstruction, tools, or ot her l abor s aving de vices. T here s hall be no l imitations upon t he c hoice of materials or design, nor shall there be any limit on pr oduction by workers or restrictions on t he f ull us e of t ools or e quipment. T here s hall be no r estriction, ot her t han m ay b e required b y s afety r egulations, on t he num ber of e mployees a ssigned t o a ny c rew or t o any service. ARTICLE VIII WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS Section 1 . During the te rm of this A greement th ere shall be no strikes, p icketing, work stoppages, slow downs or other disruptive activity for any reason by the Council, a Local Union or by any employee, and there shall be no lockout by the Contractor. Failure of the Council, Local Union or employee to cross any picket line established at the Project site is a violation of this Article. Section 2 . The C ouncil and Local U nions s hall not s anction, a id or a bet, e ncourage o r continue a ny w ork s toppage, s trike, pi cketing or ot her di sruptive a ctivity at t he Contractor's pr oject s ite an d s hall u ndertake all r easonable m eans t o prevent o r t o terminate a ny s uch a ctivity. N o e mployee s hall e ngage in a ctivities w hich v iolate th is Article. A ny employee who p articipates i n o r e ncourages any activities w hich i nterfere with the normal operation of the Project shall be subject to disciplinary action, including PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 6
discharge, a nd i f j ustifiably di scharged f or t he a bove r easons, s hall not be e ligible f or rehire on the Project for a period of not less than ninety (90) days. Section 3. Neither t he C ouncil nor a ny Local U nion s hall be l iable f or a cts of employees f or w hom i t ha s no r esponsibility. The B uilding T rades C ouncil B usiness Manager will immediately instruct, order and use the best efforts of his office to cause the Local Union or Unions to cease any vi olations of t his Article. By complying with this obligation the Building Trades Council shall not be liable for unauthorized acts of a Local Union. The principal officer or officers of a Local Union will immediately instruct, order and use t he be st e fforts of hi s or he r of fice t o c ause t he e mployees t he Local U nion represents to c ease any violations o f th is A rticle. A Local U nion c omplying w ith th is obligation shall not be liable for unauthorized acts of employees it represents. The failure of the Contractor to exercise its right in any instance shall not be deemed a waiver of its right in any other instance. Section 4 . A ny p arty a lleging a b reach o f th is A rticle s hall h ave th e right to p etition a court for temporary and permanent injunctive relief. The moving party need not show the existence of irreparable harm, and shall be required to post bond onl y to secure payment of court costs and attorney fees as may be awarded by the Court. ARTICLE IX DISPUTES AND GRIEVANCES Section 1. This Agreement is intended to provide close cooperation between management and labor. Each of the Unions will assign a representative to this Project for the purpose of completing the construction of the Project economically, efficiently, continuously, and without interruptions, delays, or work stoppages. Section 2 . T he C ontractors, U nions, a nd t he e mployees, c ollectively and i ndividually, realize t he i mportance t o a ll pa rties t o m aintain c ontinuous a nd uni nterrupted performance of the work of the Project, and agree to resolve disputes in accordance with the grievance-arbitration provisions set forth in this Article. Section 3. Any question or dispute arising out of and during the term of this Agreement (other t han t rade j urisdictional di sputes) s hall be considered a grievance a nd s ubject t o resolution under the following procedures: Step 1. (a) When any employee subject to the provisions of this Agreement feels he or she is aggrieved by a violation of this Agreement, he or she, through his or her local union business representative or job steward, shall, within five (5) working days after the occurrence of t he vi olation, g ive not ice t o t he w ork-site r epresentative o f t he involved Contractor s tating t he pr ovision(s) alleged t o ha ve be en vi olated. T he bus iness representative of the local union or the job steward and the work-site representative of the involved Contractor and the Project Manager/General Contractor shall meet and endeavor to adjust the matter within three (3) working days after timely notice has been given. The representative of the Contractor shall keep the meeting minutes and shall respond to the PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 7
Union representative in writing (copying the Project Manager/General Contractor) at the conclusion of the meeting but not later than twenty-four (24) hours thereafter. If they fail to r esolve t he m atter w ithin t he pr escribed pe riod, t he g rieving pa rty m ay, w ithin forty-eight (48) hours thereafter, pursue Step 2 of the Grievance Procedure, provided the grievance is r educed to w riting, s etting f orth th e r elevant i nformation c oncerning t he alleged grievance, including a short description thereof, the date on w hich the grievance occurred, and the provision(s) of the Agreement alleged to have been violated. (b) Should the Local Union(s) or the Project Manager/General Contractor or any Contractor have a dispute with the other party and, if after conferring, a settlement is not reached within three (3) working days, the dispute may be reduced to writing and proceed t o S tep 2 i n t he s ame m anner a s out lined he rein for t he adjustment of a n employee complaint. Step 2. The Business M anager of t he C ouncil a nd t he i nvolved C ontractor s hall meet w ithin s even ( 7) w orking da ys of t he r eferral of a di spute t o t his s econd s tep t o arrive at a satisfactory s ettlement thereof. If the parties f ail to r each an agreement, t he dispute m ay b e a ppealed i n w riting i n a ccordance w ith t he pr ovisions of S tep 3 w ithin seven (7) calendar days thereafter. Step 3. (a) If t he grievance ha s be en s ubmitted but not a djusted unde r S tep 2, either party ma y request in w riting, w ithin s even ( 7) calendar d ays t hereafter, t hat t he grievance be submitted t o an Arbitrator m utually agreed upon b y t hem. The C ontractor and t he i nvolved U nion s hall a ttempt m utually t o s elect a n a rbitrator, but i f t hey a re unable t o do s o, t hey s hall r equest t he F ederal M ediation a nd C onciliation S ervice t o provide them with a list of seven (7) arbitrators residing in the state of Minnesota from which the Arbitrator shall be selected by the parties alternatively striking names from the list. T he f irst s trike s hall b e d etermined b y th e to ss o f a coin. T he d ecision o f th e Arbitrator s hall be final a nd bi nding on a ll p arties. T he f ee and e xpenses of s uch Arbitration shall be borne equally by the Contractor and the involved Local Union(s). (b) Failure o f th e grieving party to a dhere to th e time limits e stablished herein shall render the grievance null and void. The time limits established herein may be extended b y w ritten consent of t he pa rties i nvolved a t t he pa rticular s tep w here t he extension is agreed upon. T he Arbitrator shall have the authority to make decisions only on i ssues pr esented t o hi m or he r. a nd he or s he s hall not ha ve a uthority t o c hange, amend, add to or detract from any of the provisions of this Agreement. Section 4. The P roject M anager/General C ontractor a nd O wner s hall be not ified of all actions at Steps 2 and 3 and shall, upon their request, be permitted to participate in all proceedings at these steps. ARTICLE X JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 8
Section 1 . The as signment of w ork w ill be s olely t he r esponsibility of t he C ontractor performing the work involved; and such work assignments will be in accordance with the Plan f or t he S ettlement of Jurisdictional D isputes i n t he Construction Industry (the "Plan") or any successor Plan. Section 2 . All J urisdictional di sputes on t his P roject be tween or a mong B uilding a nd Construction Trades Unions and employees parties to this Agreement shall be settled and adjusted a ccording t o t he pr esent P lan e stablished b y t he B uilding and C onstruction Trades Department or any other plan or method of procedure that may be adopted in the future by the Building and Construction Trades Department. Decisions rendered shall be final, binding and conclusive on the Contractors and Unions parties to this Agreement. Section 3 . All j urisdictional di sputes s hall be r esolved w ithout t he oc currence of a ny strike, work stoppage, or slow-down of any nature, and the Contractor's assignment shall be a dhered t o unt il t he dispute i s r esolved. Individuals v iolating th is s ection s hall b e subject to immediate discharge. Section 4 . Each C ontractor w ill c onduct a pr e-job c onference with t he a ppropriate representative of t he C ouncil a nd l ocal uni on pr ior t o c ommencing w ork. T he P roject Manager/General C ontractor and t he O wner w ill be a dvised i n a dvance of a ll s uch conferences and may participate if they wish. ARTICLE XI SUBCONTRACTING The Project Manager/General Contractor agrees that neither it nor an y of its contractors or subcontractors will subcontract any work to be done on the Project except to a person, firm or corporation who is or agrees to become party to this Agreement. Any contractor or subcontractor working on t he Project shall, as a condition to working on said Project, become signatory to and perform all work under the terms of this Agreement. ARTICLE XII SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY It i s not t he i ntention of O wner, C ontractors, or t he U nion pa rties t o vi olate a ny l aws governing the subject matter of this Agreement. The parties hereto agree that in the event any pr ovisions of t he A greement a re f inally he ld or de termined t o be i llegal or voi d a s being i n c ontravention of a ny a pplicable l aw, the r emainder of t he A greement s hall remain i n f ull force a nd e ffect unl ess t he pa rt o r pa rts s o f ound t o b e v oid a re wholly inseparable from the remaining portions of this Agreement. Further, the Contractors and Union agree that if and when any and all provisions of this Agreement are finally held or determined t o b e i llegal or voi d b y C ourt o r c ompetent j urisdiction, th e p arties w ill promptly enter into negotiations concerning the s ubstance affected b y such decision for the purpose of achieving conformity with the requirements of an applicable law and the intent of the parties hereto. PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 9
ARTICLE XIII LABOR HARMONY Section 1 . T he Contractor s hall f urnish l abor t hat c an w ork i n ha rmony w ith a ll ot her elements of l abor e mployed on t he P roject a nd s hall s ubmit a l abor ha rmony pl an t o demonstrate how this will be done. "Harmony" s hall include the provision of labor that will not , e ither di rectly or i ndirectly, cause or give r ise t o a ny w ork di sruptions, s low downs, pi cketing, s toppages, o r a ny violence o r harm t o a ny p erson or p roperty w hile performing a ny w ork, or a ctivities i ncidental t hereto a t t he P roject. T he l abor h armony plan s hould i nclude t he c ompany's l abor m anagement pol icies, c ollective ba rgaining agreements i f a ny a nd t heir e xpiration da tes, pa st l abor r elations hi story, a l isting o f activities anticipated under this contract that ma y potentially cause f riction with on -site workers, and procedures the company will undertake to eliminate this friction. Section 2 . The C ontractor a grees t hat i t s hall require e very l ower-tier s ubcontractor t o provide labor that will work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed in the work, and will include the provisions contained in the paragraph above, in every lowertier subcontract let for work under this contract. Section 3 . The r equirement t o pr ovide l abor t hat c an w ork i n ha rmony with a ll ot her elements of labor employed in the work throughout the contract performance is a material element o f th is Agreement. F ailure b y t he contractor o r an y o f its l ower-tier subcontractors to comply with this requirement shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement which will s ubject th e Contractor t o a ll r ights a nd r emedies t he O wner or Project C ontractor ma y h ave, in cluding without limita tion th e r ight to te rminate th e contract. ARTICLE XIV NO DISCRIMINATION Section1. The Contractor a nd U nion a gree t hat they w ill not d iscriminate a gainst a ny employee or a pplicant for e mployment be cause of hi s or he r m embership or non membership in a Union or based upon race, color, religion, sex, national origin or age in any manner prohibited by law or regulation. Section 2. Any complaints regarding application of the provisions of Section 1, should be brought t o t he i mmediate a ttention of t he i nvolved C ontractor f or c onsideration a nd resolution. Section 3 . The us e of t he m asculine or f eminine gender i n t his A greement s hall be construed as including both gender. ARTICLE XV DURATION OF THE AGREEMENT
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 10
Section 1 . T his Agreement s hall be e ffective ______________ , a nd s hall c ontinue i n effect f or t he dur ation of t he P roject construction w ork de scribed i n A rticles I a nd II hereof. C onstruction of a ny ph ase, por tion, s ection or s egment o f t he P roject s hall b e deemed complete when such phase, portion, section or segment has been turned over to the Owner and has received the final acceptance from the Owner’s representative. Section 2. Schedule A attached to this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect until the Contractor and/or Union parties to the Collective Bargaining Agreements, which are t he b asis f or s uch Schedule A , n otify t he Project M anager/General C ontractor i n writing o f the m utually agreed upon c hanges i n t hose pr ovisions of s uch A greements which ar e applicable t o the P roject and t heir ef fective d ate(s), w hich s hall b ecome t he effective date(s) under this Agreement. Section 3 . T he U nion agrees th at th ere w ill b e n o s trikes, work s toppages, s ympathy actions, pi cketing, s lowdowns or ot her di sruptive a ctivity affecting t he P roject b y any Union involved in the negotiations of such Local Collective Bargaining Agreements and the resulting S chedule A’s, nor s hall t here be any lock-out on this P roject affecting the Union during the course of such negotiations. IN W ITNESS W HEREOF, the p arties h ave c aused t his A greement t o b e ex ecuted an d effective as of the day and year above written.
ST. PAUL BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL
PROJECT MANAGER CONTRACTOR
/
GENERAL
By:_________________________________ By:_________________________________ Its: ________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
Its: ________________________________
JANUARY 2013 11
SCHEDULE A LOCAL COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AGREEMENTS The Local Collective Bargaining Agreements are incorporated herein by reference. For copies of individual agreements, contact the Local Unions directly or the St. Paul Building and Construction Trades Council at Labor Centre, Room 206, 411 Main St., St. Paul, Minnesota 55102 (Telephone: 651-224-9445). SCHEDULE A TRADE AGREEMENT between THERMAL INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION and the INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS LOCAL NO. 34 of MINNEAPOLIS & ST. PAUL, MN Expiration May 31, 2015 GREAT LAKES ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT between the INTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD OF BOILERMAKERS, IRON SHIP BUILDERS, BLACKSMITHS, FORGERS and HELPERS, AFL-CIO, CFL and FIRMS LISTED HEREIN Expiration: December 31, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS of MINNESOTA and MINNESOTA CONCRETE & MASONRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION and BRICKLAYERS & ALLIED CRAFTWORKERS LOCAL UNION NO. 1 MINNESOTA / NORTH DAKOTA And INDEPENDENT EMPLOYERS MINNESOTA STATEWIDE AGREEMENT Chapters 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 11 and 15 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNESOTA TILE CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And MINNESOTA CONCRETE & MASONRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And BRICKLAYERS & ALLIED CRAFTWORKERS LOCAL UNION 1 MINNESOTA / NORTH DAKOTA TILE LAYERS AND FINISHERS, CHAPTER #18 Expiration April 30, 2013 ______________________________________________________________________________ _____
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 12
AGREEMENT BETWEEN BUILDERS DIVISION OF ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA and CARPENTRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (CCA) and GYPSUM DRYWALL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (GDCA) and NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN CARPET, LINOLEUM, RESILIENT TILE LAYERS LOCAL UNION #596 OF THE NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS AND MININESOTA FLOOR COVERING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expires May 31, 2011 METRO AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNEAPOLIS & ST. PAUL BUILDERS DIVISION OF ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA and MINNESOTA CEMENT MASONS, PLASTERERS, AND SHOPHANDS LOCAL NO. 633 AFFILIATED WITH O.P.&C.M.I.A. of U.S. Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN ST. PAUL CHAPTER OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And IINTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD of ELECTRICAL WORKERS LOCAL UNION 110, AFL-CIO Expiration April 30, 2012 MINNESOTA LIMITED ENERGY AGREEMENT (Statewide) Between NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA), Minneapolis, St. Paul, and Twin Ports-Arrowhead Chapters And INTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD of ELECTRICAL WORKERS (IBEW), AFL-CIO LOCAL UNIONS #110, #242, #292, #294, #343 Expiration June 30, 2012 ______________________________________________________________________________ ____ STANDARD AGREEMENT between the NATIONAL ELEVATOR BARGAINING ASSOCIATION And THYSSEN KRUPP ELEVATOR And ELEVATOR CONTRACTOS OF AMERICA (Independent Companies)
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 13
and th INTERNATIONAL UNION OF ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS Expiration 7/8/2012 ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN BROTHERHOOD OF PAINTERS AND ALLIED TRADES, AFL-CI0 DISTRICT CL 82 (LOCAL UNION NO. 1324) and IT’S INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTORS Expiration 6/03/2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN TWIN CITY IRON WORKERS LOCAL UNION 512 and ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA Expires April 30, 2013 MINNESOTA LABORERS METROPOLITAN BUILDERS AGREEMENT WITH ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA April 30, 2013 WORKING AGREEMENT NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS MINNESOTA INTERIOR SYSTEMS LOCAL 68 and MINNESOTA WALL & CEILING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN INDEPENDENT MILLWRIGHT CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHERN MINNESOTA, WESTERN WISCONSIN AND SOUTH DAKOTA and MILLWRIGHT & MACHINERY ERECTORS LOCAL UNION NO. 548 and NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS of MINNESOTA, BUILDERS DIVISION and INTERNATIONAL UNION of OPERATING ENGINEERS LOCAL NO. 49 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA HIGHWAY, RAILROAD & HEAVY CONSTRUCTION DIVISION
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 14
and INTERNATIONAL UNION OF OPERATING ENGINEERS LOCAL NO. 49 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNESOTA PAINTING & WALLCOVERING EMPLOYERS ASSOCIATION and PAINTERS & ALLIED TRADES UNION LOCAL NO. 61 Expiration 4/30/2013 WORKING AGREEMENT BETWEEN PIPEFITTERS LOCAL UNION NO. 455 and MINNESOTA MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration 4/30/2013 WORKING AGREEMENT PLASTERERS LOCAL UNION NO. 265 and MINNESOTA WALL & CEILING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration May 31, 2013 WORKING AGREEMENT BETWEEN PLUMBERS LOCAL UNION NO. 34 and MINNESOTA MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration 4/30/2015 ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE ROOFING CONTRACTORS OF THE TWIN CITIES METROPOLITAN AREA and the UNITED UNION OF ROOFERS, WATERPROOFERS AND ALLIED WORKERS LOCAL UNION NO. 96 Expiration April 30, 2015 LABOR AGREEMENT BETWEEN TWIN CITIES DIVISION SMARCA, INC. and SHEET METAL WORKERS LOCAL NO. 10, Maplewood, MN Expiration April 30, 2014 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MASTER SIGN INDUSTRY and INTERNATIONAL UNION OF PAINTERS & ALLIED TRADES DISTRICT COUNCIL 82/LOCAL UNION 880 SIGN, DISPLAY SCREEN PROCESS & ALLIED TRADES
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 15
Expiration April 30, 2014
AGREEMENT BETWEEN NATIONAL FIRE SPRINKLER ASSOCIATION, INC. and SPRINKLERFITTERS & APPRENTICES UNION NO. 417 MINNEAPOLIS-ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA OF THE UNITED ASSOCIATION OF JOURNEYMEN & APPRENTICES OF THE PLUMBING & PIPEFITTING INDUSTRY OF THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA Expiration May 31, 2015 HIGHWAY, RAILROAD & HEAVY CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA AND MN CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE OF TEAMSTERS LOCAL 120 Expiration 4/30/2014
________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 16
ATTACHMENT A
LETTER OF ASSENT _________________[Name of Contractor]________________ hereby agrees to accept and be bound by the terms and conditions of the Project Labor Agreement between _______________[Name of Project Manager/General Contractor]___________________ and the ST. PAUL BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL, dated and effective _________[Project Start Date]_______________, with respect to all construction work at the site of the construction and during the course of the construction as those terms are used or defined in the Project Labor Agreement.
_________[Contractor Name & Address]________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ By: ______________________________________ Its:_______________________________________ Dated:____________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 17
ATTACHMENT B HEALTH REIMBURSEMENT ARRANGEMENT EMPLOYER SUBSCRIBER AGREEMENT
The undersigned hereby adopt the Trust Agreement known as the Minnesota State Building Trades Health Reimbursement Trust Fund, hereinafter referred to as “Trust” and agree to be bound by the terms thereof. The undersigned Employer Subscriber and Unions hereby grant Powers of Attorney to the Board of Trustees now holding office, or to the successors, to administer the Trust as representatives of the Employer Subscriber and Unions respectively, with full power and authority to act for the Employer Subscriber and Unions in all matters of administration of the Trust. In no event shall the Unions or Employer Subscriber be responsible for any act or omission of the Trustees nor shall the Unions or Employer Subscriber have any liability for any debt or liability of the Trust or its Trustees. Commencing on the first day of work under the attached Project Labor Agreement, and payable not later than the 15th day of each month thereafter, the Employer Subscriber shall pay to the Trust the amount specified by the Project Labor Agreement for all hours worked under the Project Labor Agreement by the employees of the Employer Subscriber for which contributions to the Trust are required by the Project Labor Agreement. The undersigned Employer Subscriber acknowledges that the failure by the Employer Subscriber to timely remit required contributions will result in liquidated damages being payable under the Trust Agreement to which the Employer Subscriber is hereby bound. The undersigned represents and warrants that he/she/they is (are) authorized to execute this Employer Subscriber Agreement on behalf of the Employer Subscriber and that by he/she/their respective execution of this Subscriber Agreement his/her/their organization is fully bound hereto and the provisions of the Trust Agreement. ____________________________ Employer/Subscriber
_____________________ Date
By:____________________________ Name and Title
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 18
ATTACHMENT C
ISD 192 Farmington Elementary School and Akin Road Elementary School The projects include general remodeling and additions to school buildings. There will be two bid packages th at w ill in clude b oth single a nd m ultiple building s ites. All p rojects w ill b e b id a s single prime – general contractor packages. It is anticipated the following work to be included in the projects: DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 024113 Selective Site Demolition 024116 Building Demolition 024119 Minor Demolition for Remodeling DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 031000 Concrete Forms and Accessories 032000 Concrete Reinforcement 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 034113 Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks 035300 Concrete Toppiing DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry Systems DIVISION 5 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel 052100 Steel Joists 052500 Aluminum Joists 053100 Steel Deck 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055100 Metal Stairs and Railings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing ( Plywood, etc.) 061643 Exterior Sheathing Board (Dens-Glas) 062000 Finish Carpentry 064000 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071050 Preparation for Re-Roofing 072100 Building Insulation 072726 Weather Resistant Barriers 074616 Preformed Metal Siding 075100 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing (Polyiso) 075310 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered 075320 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076300 Manufactured Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077100 Manufactured Roof Specialties 077200 Roof Accessories 078100 Spray-Applied Fireproofing
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 19
078150 Replacement Fireproofing 078400 Fire-Stopping 078700 Smoke Containment Systems for Elevator Doors 079200 Joint Sealers 079513 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 081100 Steel Doors and Frames 081416 Wood Doors 083300 Coiling Doors and Grilles 083613 Sectional Doors 084100 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 086250 Tubular Skylights 087100 Door Hardware 088100 Glass and Glazing 089100 Wall Louvers DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Systems 092400 Portland Cement Plaster 093000 Tiling 095100 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 096500 Resilient Flooring and Base 096800 Carpeting 097750 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 099000 Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Boards 101400 Identifying Devices 102113.20 Phenolic Toilet Compartments 102600 Wall and Corner Guards 102810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 111300 Loading Dock Equipment 114000 Food Service Equipment (by consultant) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122000 Window Treatment 123500 Plastic Laminate Casework DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 21 – FIRE-SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 11 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING 21 13 00 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 19 GAGES AND METERS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 20
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 34 46 GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 20 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 20 19 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 22 13 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 23 22 19 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES 23 23 13 REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 23 25 31 WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 31 13 METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASINGS AND PLENUMS 23 33 13 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 34 13 FANS 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 51 16 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, STACKS AND ACCESSORIES 23 52 38 CONDENSING BOILERS 23 57 16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 64 23 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER 23 72 13 ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 73 13 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 21
23 82 16 AIR COILS 23 82 36 FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 10 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT 25 35 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC 25 95 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 01 05 SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRANING AND SPARE PARTS 26 01 10 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 01 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 19 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 05 24 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 33 RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND BOXES 26 05 50 FLOORBOXES AND POKETHRUS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 60 CONCRETE PADS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 26 09 21 CONTACTORS 26 09 23 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING CABINETS 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES 26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROL 26 43 13 TVSS 26 51 13 LIGHTING 26 52 00 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 53 00 EXIT SIGNS DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM SECTION NUMBER SECTION NAME 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 310000 Earthwork (Broad Scope) 311000 Site Clearing 312316 Excavation and Backfill for Structures DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Concrete Paving 321313 Exterior Concrete Paving 321723 Pavement Markings
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 22
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 007380 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. In the event that Substantial Completion of the Work for the Full Scope of Each Phase has not occurred on or before the following: Phase 1: August 23, 2013 Phase 2: December 13, 2013 Phase 3: August 22, 2014, then commencing for the following phases: Phase 1: August 24, 2013 Phase 2: December 14, 2013 Phase 3: August 23, 2014, and continuing for each day or fraction thereof until Substantial Completion of the Work is established, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, at the sole option of the Owner, the amount of One Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($1,000.00) per diem (“Damage Amount”). B. The Contractor and the Owner agree that in the event the Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to: Phase 1: August 23, 2013 Phase 2: December 13, 2013 Phase 3: August 22, 2014, the Owner will suffer damages in an amount which may, due to the special nature of the Project, the Owner’s business and the Owner’s reliance upon the Substantial Completion date, be impractical or extremely difficult to ascertain. The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Damage Amount is a reasonable estimate of the damages that the Owner will suffer in the event that Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to the Substantial Completion Date. C. Payment of liquidated damages shall be in the form of a Change Order reducing the Contractor’s Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the Contractor refuses to sign the Change Order for liquidated damages, the Owner reserves the right to unilaterally reduce the Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the amount of the liquidated damages exceeds the remaining unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the amount of the unpaid balance and the Contractor shall pay the Owner the difference between the liquidated damages and the unpaid balance. END OF SECTION
Special Conditions for the Contract for Construction Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages S:\11\0122\frontend\007380.doc
007380 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
007380 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Special Conditions for the Contract for Construction Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages S:\11\0122\frontend\007380.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY OF WORK D. It is r ecognized th at W ork o f th e C ontract, i s a lso unavoidably a ffected o r i nfluenced b y go verning regulations, natural phenomenon, including weather co nditions an d o ther f orces outside the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
1.3
A. The Owner shall aw ard a S tipulated S um S ingle Prime Contract (AIA Document A101 for the total Work of the Project.
B. Description of Construction D elivered Under a Single Prime Contract. 1. Work Covered by the Contract Documents.
1.4
COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK A. The Contractor s hall n either co mmence t he W ork, nor allow a ny S ubcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to commence the Work until:
2. Contract Method. 3. Commencement of the Work. 4. Sequence of Work.
1. The C ontract h as b een f ully ex ecuted; an d t he Owner has issued a Notice to Proceed.
5. Work by Owner. 6. Owner Furnished/ C Products.
CONTRACT METHOD
ontractor I
2. The Owner h as ap proved t he C ontractor's Performance Bond an d P ayment B ond ( AIA A312).
nstalled
7. Future Work.
3. The Owner has ap proved ev idence o f t he Contractor's L iability I nsurance, O wner's Protective Liability Insurance and any other required insurance t o b e purchased b y t he Contractor.
8. Contractor’s Duties. 9. Overlapping & Conflicting Requirements. 10. Contractor’s Use of Site and Premises. 11. Owner Occupancy. 1.5 1.2
WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project shall consist o f ADDITION AND REMODELING at th e FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL located at 500 MAPLE STREET, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024. B. Work o f t he C ontract s hall c onsist o f a ll G eneral Construction; including M echanical a nd E lectrical Work (Volumes One and Two). C. Work o f t he C ontract can b e summarized by references to the Contract, General C onditions, Supplementary Conditions, S pecification Sections, Drawings, A ddenda a nd m odifications t o t he Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this Project Manual, including, but not necessarily limited to, p rinted m aterial r eferenced by any of these.
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0122\frontend\011100CGA.doc
SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Definition: 1. Phase: W here t he W ork o f the Project is divided u p into parts and separate Contract Documents ar e i ssued t o co mplete each p art of the Project 2. Stage: T he W ork o f the Project i s established through one set of Contract Documents and the Work is divided up into separate components. B. Contractor shall construct Work of this Contract in phases t o acco mmodate O wner's o ccupancy requirements d uring t he c onstruction period, and shall c oordinate c onstruction schedules a nd operations with the Architect. C. Construction shall be p hased a s o utlined o n t he Drawings, a nd th ere s hall b e m ultiple start dates, and m ultiple S ubstantial C ompletion dates as follows:
011100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. Phase 1: S tart o f W ork f or th is p hase s hall commence u pon e xecution o f t he C ontract. Work o n t he s ite w ill b egin June 6, 2013 and shall be S ubstantially C omplete n o la ter th an August 23, 2013.
1. Toilet Accessories as d escribed i n S ection 102810. B. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for an d d eliver O wner r eviewed s hop drawings, product da ta a nd samples t o Contractor.
2. Phase 2: S tart o f W ork f or th is p hase s hall commence upon execution o f t he C ontract. Work on site will begin June 6, 2013, and shall be S ubstantially C omplete n o la ter than December 13, 2013.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site according to C ontractor’s C onstruction Schedule.
3. Phase 3: Start o f W ork f or th is p hase s hall commence June 4, 2014 , an d s hall b e Substantially Complete no later than August 22, 2014. 1.6
3. Upon delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit c laims f or tr ansportation d amage, and replace damaged, d efective o r d eficient products.
WORK BY OWNER
5. Arrange for m anufacturer’s w inspections and service.
A. The Owner will award a s eparate C ontract f or performance o f cer tain C onstruction o perations. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with W ork und er t his c ontract. W ork of the separate co ntract will co mmence o n or about June 6, 2013. Work by the Owner includes:
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Review O wner f urnished s hop drawings, product d ata an d s amples an d r eturn t hem t o Architect noting discrepancies o r anticipated problems in use of products.
1. Hazardous Materials Abatement: Provide access and coordinate with Abatement Contractor.
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner.
2. Owner’s Commissioning Agent for Work under this Contract.
3. Handle, s tore, p rotect, in stall and finish products.
B. Items n oted “ NIC” ( Not in Contract), including movable cabinets, furnishings, m inor e quipment, and technology e quipment will b e furnished a nd installed by Owner as the project nears completion. C. Cooperate fully with s eparate co ntractors so w ork on t hose co ntracts m ay b e car ried o ut s moothly, without interfering w ith o r d elaying w ork und er this Contract. D. Owner will remove an d r etain possession o f t he following items prior to start of Work: 1. Technology Equipment. 2. Soap and Towel Dispensers. E. Provide access and coordinate with the abatement. F. Items f urnished b y t he O wner f or final connection by the Contractor are: 1. Interactive whiteboards. 1.7
arranties,
4. Repair or r eplace i tems o r p roducts d amaged after receipt. 1.8
CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES A. The intent is for the Contractor to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Work shall cover all portions of the Contract Documents, and al l W ork n ecessary t o produce the intended results. B. Work I ncluded: Provide c onstruction administration and supervision, labor, materials, articles, equipment, in cidentals, ite ms, to ols, services, s upplies, m ethods, o perations, s kills in such quantities as may be necessary to complete the project within th e in tent o f th e C ontract Documents.
OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Products f urnished t o t he site a nd paid for by the Owner are:
011100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0122\frontend\011100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
1.9
OVERLAPPING REQUIREMENTS
Addition and Remodeling
AND
CONFLICTING
A. Where compliance with two or more s tandards or requirements is in dicated in th e d ocuments o r where overlapping r equirements establish d ifferent or conflicting levels o f q uantity o r q uality w ithin the d ocuments; th e m ost s tringent, ( and ge nerally the most ex pensive), r equirement i s i ntended, an d will be enforced unless written approval is granted otherwise by the Architect. B. Bidding Stage: Notify Architect in writing of overlapping and conflicting r equirements f or clarification by Addenda. C. Construction Stage: Refer to Architect for resolution c onflicting r equirements a nd uncertainties as to w hich le vel o f q uality is m ore stringent, and receive written clarification from Architect before proceeding with questioned Work. 1.10
CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE & PREMISES
A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by public. 3. Construction operations and activities. A. Confine t he W ork, i ncluding a ll construction operations and activities, w ithin the " Construction Limits" and lim it C ontractor a ctivities outside the areas under construction. B. Utility Outages a nd S hutdown: C ontractor s hall obtain written p ermission f rom th e Owner at least forty-eight (48) ho urs in advance o f an y such occurrence. Provide and m aintain proper s horing and b racing f or e xisting und erground ut ilities and sewers e ncountered d uring e xcavation work, protect them from collapse or movement, or other types of damage until s uch t ime as they ar e to be removed, incorporated into the new Work or can be properly backfilled upon completion of new Work. 1. All such disruptions of services shall be limited to a maximum of on e ( 1) hour. P rior t o beginning any excavation, contact Gopher State One (1-800-252-1166) and utility companies for the location of existing underground services. C. Protect pavements, cu rbs, t rees, l andscaping an d existing c onstruction d uring t he c ourse o f the Work, and repair or replace all parts of same which become damaged.
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0122\frontend\011100CGA.doc
D. Failing to a dequately cl ean v ehicles o r otherwise causing dirt or debris to be deposited on any public street or highway shall b e the r esponsibility o f the Contractor, a nd h e s hall b e lia ble for all costs levied by public a uthorities h aving j urisdiction in connection with the cleaning thereof. E. Assume full responsibility for the protection of and safekeeping o f p roducts an d m aterials u nder his contract, stored on the site. F. Provide an d maintain access r oads for d elivery o f all materials and services to the site. G. Keep driveways and entrances serving the site clear and available t o t he O wner an d t he O wner's employees an d ag ents at al l t imes. D o n ot u se these ar eas f or p arking o r s torage o f materials. Schedule d eliveries t o m inimize s pace an d time requirements for s torage of m aterials an d equipment on site. H. All employees shall b e p roperly an d co mpletely clothed while working; minimum attire is long pants, T-shirt and sturdy work shoes. Sneakers and tank tops are not permitted. The use of “hard hats” which m eet o r ex ceed Federal S tandards ar e required t o b e w orn at al l t imes b y ev ery person who works or visits the site. I. Schedule Work that will result in reduction of noise and disruption of normal classroom operations with the school Principal. Noisy and disruptive work of long d uration s hould b e s cheduled d uring nonschool hours. J. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking i s no t p ermitted within th e b uilding o r school pr operty, o perable windows, or outdoor air intakes. K. Contractor staff parking is not allowed in the street adjacent to residences. 1.11
OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Full Occupancy: T he Owner will occupy the site and existing facilities d uring e ntire p eriod o f construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's o perations; especially in th e Owner's use during normal school hours. C. Schedule t he W ork t o requirement.
accommodate
this
1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed f or t he W ork p rior t o Owner occupancy.
011100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
2. Contractor s hall o btain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. D. Partial Owner Occupancy: T he O wner r eserves the right to o ccupy, a nd to p lace a nd in stall equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial C ompletion p rovided th at s uch occupancy d oes n ot in terfere w ith c ompletion o f the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute accep tance o f t he total Work. 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each s pecific p ortion o f t he W ork to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Contractor s hall o btain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 3. Prior t o p artial O wner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required in spections a nd tests s hall h ave b een successfully co mpleted. U pon o ccupancy t he Owner will provide operation and m aintenance of mechanical an d el ectrical s ystems i n occupied portions of the building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
011100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0122\frontend\011100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES 2. Obtain p roposals f rom s uppliers and installers, and offer recommendations.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
3. On notification o f s election b y A rchitect, execute purchase agreement w ith d esignated supplier and installer.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly i nspect pr oducts u pon de livery f or completeness, damage an d d efects. S ubmit claims for transportation damage.
B. Allowance Adjusting P rocedures f or C ash an d Quantity A llowances f or P roducts, I nstallation, Testing, and Contingencies; I ncluding A llowance Amounts and Descriptions.
6. Install, adjust and finish products. 7. Provide r equired w arranties, bon ds a nd maintenance date for products and installation.
1. Cash Allowances. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
1.4
A. Funds will be drawn f rom C ash A llowances o nly by a Change Order, and a f inal Change Order will be executed at the end of the Project to account for any remaining amounts.
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Cash Allowance Schedule:
D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
CASH ALLOWANCE
1. Division 2 6: C ontractor is to p rovide an allowance for technology work in the 1965 Classroom W ing. A ll s um o f T en Thousand Dollars to tal ( $10,000) to revise existing technology systems (voice, video, and data) for new ductwork and piping. E xact c ost t o be submitted to the Engineer with detailed estimate and ba ckup pr ior t o W ork c ommencing. Contract sum ( allowance) will then b e ad justed by C hange O rder. A llowance or remaining balance t o b e d educted f rom t he C ontract by Change Order.
CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances: C ost of product to Contractor o r S ubcontractor, l ess ap plicable trade discounts; delivery to site and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in th e A llowance: P roduct handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, storage, protection of pr oducts f rom elements and from damage and l abor f or i nstallation an d finishing. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult w ith C ontractor in c onsideration and selection of products, suppliers and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.
1.5
UNUSED MATERIALS A. Contact Owner for instructions on what actions are to be ta ken with unused materials. I f no d irection is given, d isposal shall b e the r esponsibility o f the Contractor.
3. Prepare Change O rder f or each i ndividual withdraw from Allowance. 4. Prepare final Change Order at end of project for allowance monies unspent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist A rchitect in s election o f p roducts a nd suppliers.
ALLOWANCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012100CGA.doc
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
012100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
END OF SECTION
012100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ALLOWANCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at th e e nd o f th is S ection. S pecification S ections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures A ssociated W ith U nit P rices an d Measurement of P ayment; I ncluding L ists a nd Descriptions of Unit Price Items.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. D. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: P roduct substitutions and options. E. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements: F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. G. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. 1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4
PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for d elivery, in stallation, in surance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement an d P ayment: R efer to individual Specification S ections f or w ork th at r equires establishment o f u nit p rices. M ethods of measurement an d p ayment f or u nit p rices a re specified in those Sections. C. Owner r eserves the r ight to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established u nit p rices a nd to h ave this work measured, at Owner's ex pense, b y an i ndependent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
UNIT PRICES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012200CGA.doc
1.5
UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices quoted on the Bid Proposal Form shall be r eviewed, an d accep ted o r r ejected at the Owner’s option. Only the accepted unit prices will be identified in the O wner-Contractor A greement. The Prime Electrical Contractors b idding o n th e Work under this contract are requested to give unit price proposals on the following items: 1. Unit P rice N o. 1 : Remove/Dispose of Bituminous Pavement (in place volume): a. Unit Measurement: Cost per cubic yard. b. Refer to Section 321216. 2. Unit P rice N o. 2 : Remove/Dispose of Aggregate Base (in place volume): a. Unit Measurement: Cost per cubic yard. b. Refer to section 024113. 3. Unit Price No. 3 : R emove/Dispose o f Unsuitable Soils (in place volume): a. Unit Measurement: Cost per cubic yard. b. Refer to Section 311000. 4. Unit Price No. 4: I mport A ggregate B ase (in place volume): a. Unit Measurement: Cost per cubic yard. b. Refer to Section 310000. 5. Unit P rice No. 5 : Rework and Place Aggregate Base (in place volume): a. Unit Measurement: Cost per cubic yard. b. Refer to Section 310000. 6. Unit Price No. 3: Low Voltage Wiring. a. Unit Measurement: Per foot of cable. b. Refer to Section 086250. 7. Unit Price #E1: Type D-1 Light Fixture a. ADD or DEDUCT on a unit p rice b asis for each T ype D -1 Light Fixture to b e installed in addition to those shown on the Drawing. Unit p rice to in clude a ll la bor an d m aterial for branch ci rcuit ( 50’-0” r un), s witch,
012200 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
fixture, a nd all p arts a nd accessories required to energize the light fixture. b. Unit Measurement: Per D-2 Light Fixture. 8. Unit Price #E2: Normal Power Receptacle a. ADD or DEDUCT on a unit p rice b asis for each receptacle to be installed in addition to those shown on Drawings. Unit price to include all l abor an d m aterial f or each normal power r eceptacle ( 50’-0” r un), conduit, wire and all p arts an d acces sories required to energize the receptacle. b. Unit Measurement: Per power receptacle. 9. Unit Price #E-3: Voice/Data Outlet 0-150 Feet a. ADD on a u nit p rice b asis o ne V oice/Data Outlet c omplete w ith 0 to 1 50 feet of Category 6 cab le, C ategory 6 j acks, faceplate an d al l l abor r equired f or a complete voice/data location as described in Specification Section 271300. b. Unit Measurement: Per Voice/Data Outlet. 10. Unit P rice # E-4: V oice/Data O utlet 1 51-250 feet a. ADD on a u nit p rice b asis o ne V oice/Data Outlet c omplete w ith 151 t o 250 feet of Category 6 cab le, C ategory 6 j acks, faceplate an d al l l abor r equired f or a complete voice/data location as described in Specification Section 271300. b. Unit Measurement: Per Voice/Data Outlet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
012200 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
UNIT PRICES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Submission and Acceptance P rocedures f or Alternate Bids; Including Lists and Descriptions of Each Alternate.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on the Bid Proposal Form will be reviewed, and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted a lternates w ill b e id entified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Perform work r equired f or co mplete ex ecution o f each accep ted al ternate d esignated i n t he OwnerContractor Agreement. A mount of alternate prices shall include cost of modifications made necessary including overhead and profit. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents f or w ork o f al ternates, ex cept as otherwise specified. D. Definition: An Alternate is a n a mount p roposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Proposal Form for certain c onstruction a ctivities d efined in the Bidding Requirements that m ay be a dded t o or deducted f rom the Base B id amount i f the Owner decides to accept a co rresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the p roducts, m aterials, e quipment, s ystems o r installation m ethods d escribed in C ontract Documents. E. Coordination: C oordinate r elated W ork an d modify o r ad just ad jacent W ork as n ecessary to ensure that Work affected b y each accep ted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the
ALTERNATES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012300CGA.doc
project. C ost o f a lternate s hall in clude, c osts o f related coordination, modification or adjustment. F. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, Architect shall prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. I ndicate w hether A lternates h ave been accepted, rejected o r d eferred f or consideration at a l ater d ate. I nclude a complete description of n egotiated m odification to Alternates. G. Schedule: A “Schedule of Alternates” is included as part of this S ection. S pecification S ections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary t o ach ieve t he Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. H. Coordinate pe rtinent r elated w ork a nd modify surrounding w ork a s r equired t o c omplete t he project under each accepted alternate designated in the Owner-Contractor agreement. I. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1: Exterior Site Paving and Improvements Base Bid Items: No Work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to provide and install exterior improvements. 2. Alternate No. 2: Bus Loop Bituminous Replacement Base Bid Items: No work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to remove and replace the bus loop bituminous paving and base materials. 3. Alternate No. 3: DDC Controls Upgrade to Existing Equipment Base Bid Items: No work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to upgrade DDC controls to existing equipment as described in the Mechanical Documents. 012300 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
4. Alternate No. 4: EPDM Roofing Base Bid Items: BUR Roofing. Alternate Bid Items: DEDUCT the amount to deduct from the base Bid to provide and install EPDM Roofing in lieu of BUR roofing. 5. Alternate No. 5: Deduct one (1) Chiller Base Bid Items: Provide chillers as specified. Alternate B id I tems: DEDUCT the a mount from the Base Bid to provide one (1) less chiller as described in the Mechanical Documents. 6. Alternate No. 6: Replace Roof System on the North Canopy with fully Adhered EPDM Base Bid Items: No Work. Alternate Bid Items: Remove existing r oof a nd install new Fully Adhered EPDM Roof System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
012300 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ALTERNATES
S:\11\0122\frontend\012300CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Administration of Sub-Contractors, and Coordination W ith Other C ontractors an d O wner. Supervisory R equirements N ecessary f or P roject Coordination. 2. Openings, Blocking, Backing and Grounds. 3. Request for Information. C. Project Meetings. 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Coordination Meetings. 3. Progress Meetings. 4. Pre-Installation Conferences. D. Owner Installed Products. E. Contractor’s Daily Log. RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 011100 - Summary of Work. D. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. E. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.3
PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction o perations in cluded in various s ections o f t hese s pecifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. C oordinate c onstruction ope rations included under d ifferent s ections t hat d epend o n each o ther f or p roper i nstallation, co nnection an d operation.
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities.
1. Project Coordination.
1.2
B. Administrative P rocedures: C oordinate s cheduling and timing of r equired a dministrative p rocedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and e nsure o rderly p rogress o f t he W ork. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure t hat o perations ar e car ried o ut w ith consideration gi ven t o conservation o f e nergy, water and materials. 1. Salvage materials an d eq uipment i nvolved i n performance o f, b ut n ot act ually i ncorporated in, the W ork. R efer to o ther s ections f or disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner’s property. D. Verify that utility r equirements of operating equipment are compatible w ith b uilding u tilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent r esponsibilities f or in stalling, connecting to, and placing in service, s uch equipment. E. Coordinate s pace requirements and in stallation o f mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically o n D rawings. Follow routing shown f or pipes, du cts, and c onduit, as closely a s practicable; place r uns p arallel w ith lin e o f building. U tilize s paces efficiently to m aximize accessibility f or o ther in stallations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. Conceal p ipes, d ucts, a nd w iring w ithin the construction occurring in finished areas, except as otherwise indicated. C oordinate lo cations o f fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Where n ecessary, p repare m emoranda f or distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar m emoranda f or t he O wner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required.
013113 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
H. Coordinate c ompletion a nd c lean u p of W ork of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.
3. Submit schedules of pre-application conferences for portions of w ork t hat r equire s pecial coordination e fforts. P re-application conferences f or p ortions o f th e w ork th at will significantly impact the design should be specified in the applicable specification sections, in addition to the general requirements described in Division 1. R oofing pr eapplication conferences, for ex ample, b ring numerous trades together to h elp en sure a project’s success.
I. After O wner o ccupancy o f p remises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Coordination Drawings: S ubmit c oordination drawings w here cl ose an d ca reful c oordination is required for installation o f p roducts a nd m aterials fabricated o ff-site b y s eparate en tities, an d where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization o f s pace f or e fficient in stallation of different components.
E. Contractor prepared pr e-construction photographs of condition of in terior f inishes a nd e lements exposed to view of the building in areas affected by Work and access by the Contractor. Submit digital copies prior to commencement of the Work. 1.5
1. Show t he interrelationship o f c omponents shown on separate shop drawings.
A. Contractor shall be r esponsible f or pr oviding openings, blocking, b acking a nd gr ounds i n a ll walls an d ab ove cei lings n ecessary for the installation of all contracted Work.
2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section “Submittals”.
B. Make s uitable p reparations f or th e in stallation o f contracted w ork in cluding a ll piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds and supports that are to be embedded i n co ncrete, m asonry, f loors, precast co ncrete, p artitions o r structural members, or that are to pass through or be attached thereto. Receive an d i nstall p roper s leeves, boxes, receptacles or chases for all openings or recesses to receive w ork o ccurring i n o r p assing t hrough a ny such m embers, al l o f w hich s hall b e l ocated accurately an d s ecured f irmly i n p lace b efore an y such masonry has been erected, concrete poured or walls/ceilings enclosed.
4. Refer to Divisions 21-23 for “Basic Mechanical Requirements”, a nd D ivisions 25-29 for “Basic Electrical R equirements” f or s pecific coordination Drawing r equirements f or mechanical and electrical installations. C. Staff Names: Within fifteen (15) days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in a ttendance a t th e s ite; id entify individuals, their duties and responsibilities. D. Basic Coordination Schedules: 1. Submit project schedules s howing t he relationship of the va rious c ontractors a nd s ubcontractors in a c hronological sequence. Regular up dating a nd r eporting o n the project schedule will indicate th e le vel o f c oordination that t he P rime C ontractor h as achieved at critical stages in the Work. 2. Submit coordination meeting m inutes w hich will be held on a regular basis, the frequency of which should b e d etermined b y t he C ontractor, and as required for successful coordination.
013113 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
OPENINGS, BLOCKING, BACKING AND GROUNDS
1.6
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Request for Information (RFI) are encouraged as a documented means of co mmunication b etween Contractor and Architect. P lan, schedule, coordinate and sequence W ork s o R FI, i f necessary, m ay b e s ubmitted t o t he i n a timely manner so as not to de lay pr ogress of t he W ork. Submission of and responses to RFI, with copies to Owner, shall be transmitted via "FACSIMILE" equipment.
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School B. Limit RFI to one specific topic, question, or issue, and if a t a ll p ossible, lim ited to o ne o r two sentences. S ubmit R FI o n a s tandard f orm o n t he Contractor's letterhead, s equentially. RFI must be submitted through the Contractor. Include the following on each RFI: 1. RFI number, date of i ssue, A rchitect's p roject name and j ob n umber. A ttachments, i f an y (sketches, s ub-contractor d ocumentation, supporting in formation, e tc.), m ust a lso s how this information on each separate page. 2. Text on RFI. 3. Indication if th e t opic i n q uestion m ay h ave a possible i mpact on C ontract Amount or Contract Time. 4. Space for a h and-printed response (one-third to one-half of the page). 5. Space for respondent signature and date. C. Architect will have the same time period to respond to an RFI as "shop drawing review period". D. No damages for delay due to RFI response beyond allotted time will be allowed, unless Contractor can show t hat R FI w as n ot f oreseeable with proper planning, s cheduling, c oordination, a nd sequencing, an d t hat t he Architect's l ate r esponse delayed timely purchase or d elivery o f eq uipment or materials, or limited construction personnel from proceeding with th eir ta sk(s) w ithin p reviously listed "Progress Schedule" activity period(s). E. When t he A rchitect i s r equired t o r espond to a n RFI th at r equires th e A rchitect or Engineers to redesign o r re-engineer an aspect of the Work due to a d esire of the Contractor for an alternate means of construction, o r to a llow a d eviation f rom th e Work due t o C ontractor e rror, C ontractor s hall reimburse the Architect or Consultant. T ime spent in obtaining approvals from regulatory agencies for the change shall also be reimbursed in like manner. 1.7
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect s hall s chedule a pre-construction conference to be held within fifteen (15) days after the Owner has i ssued t he N otice t o P roceed. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
Addition and Remodeling B. Attendance R equired: O wner Representative, Architect and their Consultants, Contractor a nd its Superintendent, m ajor S ubcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers an d o ther concerned parties. C. All participants in attendance shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work D. Tentative Agenda: 1. Organizational ar rangement o f C ontractor's forces an d p ersonnel, an d those of Subcontractors, m aterials s uppliers and Architect. 2. Channels and procedures for communications. 3. Construction schedule, including s equence o f critical work. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Contract D ocuments, in cluding distribution o f required co pies o f o riginal D ocuments an d revisions. 6. Processing of s hop dr awings, a nd ot her data submitted to the Architect for review. 7. Preparation of Record Documents. 8. Contractor’s photo documentation of pr econstruction existing conditions. 9. Use o f p remises, eq uipment d eliveries and priorities. 10. Parking availability. 11. Responsibility for temporary f acilities and controls. 12. Processing of b ulletins, f ield d ecisions, R FI's, and Change Orders. 13. Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work. 14. Procedures f or s afety an d f irst aid, security, quality control, housekeeping an d r elated matters. 15. Procedures for processing pay applications. 16. Progress cleaning. 17. Other significant items that may affect progress of the Work. 18. Scheduling activities of Geotechnical Engineer.
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
013113 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.8
Farmington Elementary School 9. Planned p rogress d uring s ucceeding work period.
COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct project coordination meetings, in addition to specific meetings, at r egularly s cheduled t imes convenient for all parties involved.
10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
B. Request representation at each m eeting b y ev ery party c urrently in volved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Meeting Agenda may include, but is not limited to; review of Construction S chedule; a d etermination of whether work is on schedule; means to expedite work to get back on schedule, if behind; s chedule revision, if necessary; p resent an d future needs of contractors; an d o ther i ssues n ecessary t o ensure Project is completed within the Contract Time. D. Record m eeting r esults a nd d istribute c opies to everyone i n at tendance, an d t o others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.9
PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals. B. Make arrangements for m eetings, p repare ag enda with c opies f or p articipants, p reside a t meetings, record minutes, a nd d istribute c opies w ithin th ree (3) days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Attendance Required: Contractor's Superintendent, Major S ubcontractors an d s uppliers, Owner's Representative, Architect, I ndependent L aboratory representative and as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Tentative Agenda:
12. Review of C hange Orders and effect o f proposed changes on pr ogress s chedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to the Project. 1.10
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a p re-installation c onference a t w ork s ite prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of p arties d irectly affecting, o r affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect and affected parties a minimum of four (4) days in ad vance o f m eeting d ate, u nless specified in individual specification sections. D. Prepare ag enda, p reside at co nference, r ecord minutes, and distribute copies within two ( 2) d ays after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. A genda may include, b ut is not limited to, the following: 1. Contract Documents. 2. Options. 3. Related Change Orders. 4. Purchases. 5. Deliveries. 6. Submittals.
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
7. Review of mockups.
2. Review of W ork pr ogress a nd c oordination requirements.
8. Possible conflicts.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of p roblems w hich im pede planned progress. 5. Review o f s ubmittals s chedule a nd s tatus o f submittals.
9. Conditions of installation. 10. Preparation and installation procedures. 11. Coordination with related w ork a nd r elated trades. 12. Compatibility problems.
6. Review o f o ff-site f abrication a nd d elivery schedules.
13. Time schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
15. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
8. Corrective schedules.
013113 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
measures
to
regain
projected
14. Weather limitations. 16. Warranty requirements. 17. Compatibility of materials.
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
18. Acceptability of substrates. 19. Temporary facilities and controls. 20. Space and access limitations. 21. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 22. Testing and inspecting requirements. 23. Required performance results. 24. Protection of construction and personnel. 1.11
OWNER INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Provide access t o t he P roject s ite f or O wner’s construction forces. B. Coordination: C oordinate c onstruction a nd operations of t he W ork w ith w ork pe rformed by Owner's co nstruction f orces. I nclude Owner's construction f orces at p re-installation co nferences covering portions of the Work t hat ar e to r eceive Owner's work. 1.12
CONTRACTOR’S DAILY LOG
A. Prepare a nd d istribute to th e A rchitect d aily, a comprehensive daily log and maintain it during the entire Project. Take action to specifically alert the Architect to ite ms w hich c ould r esult in c laims. Include the following data: 1. Date. 2. Manpower by trade. 3. Weather. 4. List of Visitors. 5. Work being performed with locations. 6. Situations or ci rcumstances w hich co uld d elay work o r gi ve c ause for claims for e xtension of time or added costs. 7. Other information as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
013113 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
013113 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0122\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014100 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Familiarity with Pertinent C odes a nd S tandards: Verify that r equirements o f t he s pecifically n amed codes and standards as w ell as r equirements mandated by law, ordinance and authority. V erify that the items procured and installed in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
B. Rejection or Non-Complying Items: T he Architect reserves the right to r eject ite ms in corporated in to the Work w hich f ail t o m eet s uch m inimum requirements.
B. Throughout the Contract D ocuments, r eference i s made t o codes and standards w hich es tablish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and m ethods f or t esting a nd reporting on the pertinent characteristics. C. Provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard.
1.5
B. Contractors shall c onform to A mericans w ith Disabilities A ct ( ADA) R equirements for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to a nd U sable by Physically Disabled People. C. Asbestos Abatement: P rior to beginning building demolition work, including demolition work related to remodeling, it shall b e th e C ontractors responsibility to d etermine a ll j urisdiction requirements for inspection f or, pr oper r emove procedures and disposal of Asbestos and materials containing a sbestos. S ubmit c opy of a pplicable requirements for asbestos removal and handling to Owner for Owner’s review.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Specific naming of co des o r s tandards o ccurs o n the D rawings a nd i n o ther S ections o f these Specifications. Comply with laws, ordinances, and regulations o f a uthorities h aving jurisdiction. Proof of c ompliance s hall be s igned a pproval by the respective authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
1. Comply with requirements f or a sbestos inspection and handling.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submission o f m anufacturers' i nstructions a nd certificates. D. Section 014520 - Roofing Inspection Services. E. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. F. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. G. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. H. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\014100CGA.doc
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractors shall conform to procedures applicable when d iscovering ha zardous o r contaminating materials as outlined under p rovisions o f S ection 013500.
D. Deliver to th e A rchitect r equired p roof th at th e materials or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard. Such proof shall be in the form requested by the A rchitect and w ill g enerally b e r equired to be copies of the certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency acceptable for that purpose to the Architect. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6
APPLICABLE CODES A. Work of the Project shall conform to the following Codes, copies o f which shall be maintained at the job site by the Contractor throughout the duration of the Work: 1. Minnesota State B uilding C ode; S tandards a nd Regulations. 2. Life Safety Code, Latest Edition. 3. National Electrical Code, Latest Edition. 4. All o ther applicable co des an d r egulations attributable to fire and life safety conditions. 5. Local o rdinances an d r egulations af fecting Work of this project.
014100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.7
Farmington Elementary School
APPLICABLE REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standards referenced i n t he S pecifications ar e usually referred to b y t he ab breviation o f th e organization's name and the designation of the document (e.g., ASTM A 36). Documents in common use m ay b e r eferred t o b y t heir o wn designation ( e.g., th e N ational E lectrical C ode is published b y th e N ational Fire Protection Association as NFPA-70 but is referred to as NEC and i s p art o f a s eries of documents or standards referred to as the National Fire Code). B. References are to the latest issue of the publication available on t he d ate o f i ssue o f t he P roject Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\014100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. References; Including Lists of Reference Standards Cited i n t he C ontract D ocuments, The Organizations Whose Standards are Cited, or Both. 1. Reference Standards. 2. Definitions. 3. Industry Standards. 4. Jurisdictional Agencies.
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Where a reference in the Contract Documents to a Federal Specification, American National Standards I nstitute S tandard, A merican S ociety of Testing Materials Standard or other standard does not include the e dition o r d ate of the standard, the edition of the standard current as of the date of this Project Manual with amendments shall apply. B. Where a reference in t he C ontract D ocuments t o any i ndustry, t rade, o rganization, go verning or legal standard does not include the e dition o r d ate of the standard, the edition, including amendments, current as of the date of the Project Manual shall apply. C. Conform t o r eference s tandard b y d ate of issue current as of the date of Contract Documents. D. Obtain copies of reference standards when required by Contract Documents. E. Should specified r eference s tandards co nflict with Contract D ocuments, r equest c larification f rom Architect before proceeding. F. The c ontractual r elationship o f th e p arties to th e Contract s hall n ot b e a ltered f rom th e Contract Documents by mention or i nference o therwise i n any reference document.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. The D efinitions of this Section shall apply throughout the Contract Documents. B. : (Colon): Means the same as “shall be.”
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
C. Approved: When u sed t o co nvey A rchitect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and r esponsibilities a s s tated in th e C onditions o f the Contract. D. Directed: A c ommand o r i nstruction b y the Architect. Terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “ selected”, “ required”, an d “permitted” mean directed b y the A rchitect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. E. Furnish: The term “ furnish” m eans s upply a nd deliver to the Project s ite, r eady f or u nloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. F. Herein: The term “ Herein” s hall r efer t o t he contents of the Construction Documents including, but not limited to, any or all of th e parts of Specification sections, or the contents within any or all of the p arts a nd s ections o f C onditions o f th e Contract (General an d S upplementary C onditions) and Division One - General Requirements. G. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes or s chedules o n t he Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, a nd s imilar r equirements in th e Contract D ocuments. T erms s uch as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, an d “ specified” ar e u sed t o help t he r eader l ocate t he r eference. T here i s n o limitation on location. H. Install: The term “install” describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, proper storage, u npacking, as sembly, e rection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, c uring, p rotecting, c leaning, and similar operations. I. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, o r c ontractor of l ower tier, to perform a p articular c onstruction a ctivity, including installation, e rection, a pplication, a nd similar operations. Installers a re r equired to b e experienced in t he o perations they ar e engaged t o perform. J. Project Site: P roject site is the space available to the Contractor for p erforming c onstruction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The e xtent o f t he P roject s ite i s s hown o n t he Drawings and may or may not be identical with the
014200 - 1 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
K. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
B. Publication Dates: Comply w ith s tandards in effect as o f t he d ate o f t he C ontract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Regulations: The t erm “ regulations” i ncludes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having j urisdiction, a s well a s r ules, conventions, a nd a greements w ithin the construction in dustry th at c ontrol p erformance of the Work.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where co mpliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements t hat ar e d ifferent b ut apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
M. Trades: Using terms s uch a s c arpentry i s no t intended to im ply th at c ertain c onstruction activities must be p erformed b y accr edited o r unionized individuals o f a c orresponding ge neric name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply ex clusively t o tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.
D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the m inimum p rovided o r p erformed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it m ay e xceed th e minimum w ithin r easonable limits. T o c omply with t hese r equirements, i ndicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as ap propriate, f or t he context of the requirements. R efer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
N. Testing Agencies: A t esting a gency i s a n independent entity engaged t o perform specific inspections or tests, e ither a t th e P roject s ite o r elsewhere, and to report on an d, i f r equired, t o interpret results of those inspections or tests. O. Workmanship: The q uality o f w ork in manufacturing, as sembly, f abrication o f a product or materials either in the factory, on the job site or at a separate location. P. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name of a particular m anufacturer o r v endor, an d i t i s accompanied by t he t erm " or e qual" or " or approved equal", the specific item mentioned shall be und erstood a s e stablishing t ype, f unction, dimension, in -service p erformance, p hysical properties, including appearance an d o ther characteristics identified in th e s pecification sections are salient features against w hich t he Architect w ill e valuate th e e quivalents of any proposed s ubstitutions. Where ev er t he s pecified products ar e v iewable i n t he f inished work, the aesthetic q ualities o f th e p roduct a re s alient features of such products and the Architect will be the sole judge i n d etermining w hether t o a pprove the proposed s ubstitute pr oduct ba sed on s alient features, including the proposed products aesthetic equivalents. 1.4
INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except w here t he Contract Documents i nclude m ore s tringent requirements, a pplicable c onstruction in dustry standards h ave t he s ame f orce an d ef fect as i f bound or copied di rectly i nto t he C ontract
014200 - 2 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
E. Copies of Standards: Each en tity e ngaged i n construction o n th e P roject is r equired to b e familiar w ith in dustry s tandards a pplicable to its construction activity. C opies o f a pplicable standards a re no t b ound w ith the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards ar e n eeded t o perform a required construction a ctivity, th e Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. F. Abbreviations and Names: Trade as sociation names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms o r abbreviations, as r eferenced i n Contract Documents, ar e d efined t o m ean t he as sociated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and ar e b elieved, b ut n ot en sured, to be accurate and u p t o d ate as o f t he date of Contract Documents. 1.5
GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS ADAAG
STANDARDS
AND
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253/ (202) 272-5434
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (888) 293-6498/ (202) 512-1530
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org
FS
Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil (215) 697-6257 Available from General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800 Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International www.aci-int.org (248) 848-3700
ACIL
American Council of Independent Laboratories www.acil.org (202) 887-5872
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org (214) 506-7216
ADC
Air Diffusion Council www.flexibleduct.org (312) 201-0101
ADSC
International Association of Foundation Drilling www.adsc-iafd.com (214) 681-5994
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530
AF & PA
American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (800) 878-8878
AGA
American Gas Association (202) 8247000 www.aga.org
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org (703) 548-3118
AHA
American Hardboard Association www.hardboard.org (847) 934-8800
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955
AI
Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point (above)
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6
ORGANIZATIONS LISTED BY NAME AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. www.aluminum.org (202) 862-5100
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com (202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.aashto.org (202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 3 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
www.aia.org (800) 242-3837/ (202) 626-7300 AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org (800) 644-2400/ (312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org (202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org (303) 792-9559
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org (800) 395-2522/ (703) 736-9666
ALI
Associated Laboratories, Inc. www.associatedlabs.org (214) 565-0593
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee www.alsc.org (301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org (847) 394-0150
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association (Formerly: AAN American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org (202) 789-2900
ANSI
American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org (202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org (253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org (941) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute www.api.org (202)682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration
014200 - 4 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Institute www.ari.org (703) 524-8800 ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org
ARRA
Asphalt Recycling and Reclaiming Association www.arra.org (410) 267-0023
ASC
Adhesive and Sealant Council www.ascouncil.org (301) 986-9700
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters Association www.ascassoc.com (609) 848-6120
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org (800) 548-2723/ (703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (800) 527-4723/ (404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org (800) 843-2763/ (212) 591-7722
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org (440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org (610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org (703) 534-8300
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org (571) 323-3636/ (571) 323-3630
AWPA
American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com (205) 733-4077 REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
AWS
American Welding Society www.aws.org (800) 443-9353/ (305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association www.bia.org (703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com (616) 285-3963
BISSC
CCC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org
Addition and Remodeling CGSB
Canadian General Standards Board www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956-0425
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org (888) 881-2462/ (937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org (800) 510-2772/ (202) 462-9607
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute www.carpet-rug.com (800) 882-8846/ (706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200
CSA
CSA International (Formerly: IAS International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org (800) 463-6727/ (416) 747-4000
CCFSS
Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures www.ccfssonline.org (573) 341-4471
CDA
Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org (800) 232-3282/ (212) 251-7200
CSI
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca (613) 230-9263
Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CSI
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com (216) 241-7333
Construction Specifications Institute www.csinet.org (800) 689-2900/ (703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org (281) 583-4087
CGA
REFERENCES
Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 5 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling DASMA
Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International www.dasma.com (703) 241-7333
Farmington Elementary School (785) 271-0208 GS
Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org (703) 222-2010
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org (703) 907-7500
HI
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association www.eifsfacts.com (800) 294-3462/ (770) 968-7945
Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org (888) 786-7744/ (973) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org (908) 464-8200
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org (914) 332-0040
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900
ESD
ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org (216) 241-7333
ICC
International Code Council www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch
FMG
FRSA
FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com (401) 275-3000 Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org (212) 248-5000
GA
Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org (202) 289-5440
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org (315) 646-2234
GANA
Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510
014200 - 6 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426
ISO
International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org
Addition and Remodeling MIA
Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com (614) 228-6194
MPI
Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com (888) 674-8937
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com (703) 281-6613
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150
NAA
National Arborist Association www.natlarb.com (800) 733-2622/ (603) 673-3311
I3A
International Imaging Industry Association (Formerly: PIMA Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association) www.i3a.org (914) 698-7603
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org (312) 332-0405
NACE
NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org (281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association www.naima.org (703) 684-0084
NAMI
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. www.namicertification.com (304) 258-5100
NASFM
National Association for Retail Environments www.nasfm.org (954) 893-7300
ITS
Intertek Testing Services www.intertek.com (800) 345-3851/ (607) 753-6711
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org (703) 264-1690
LMA
Laminating Materials Association (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.lma.org (201) 664-2700
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864/(804) 314-8955 www.lightning.org
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com (216) 241-7333
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org (847) 480-9138
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com (800) 557-2848
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org (312) 644-6610
NCCA
National Coil Coating Association www.coilcoating.org
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org (414) 248-9094
MHIA
REFERENCES
Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org (800) 345-1815/ (704) 676-1190
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 7 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com (202) 775-3550
NPCA
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698
National Paint and Coatings Association www.paint.org (202) 462-6272
NPCA
National Precast Concrete Association www.precast.org (317) 571-9500
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org (301) 657-3110
NRCA
NEII
National Elevator Industry, Inc. www.neii.org (201) 944-3211
National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net (800) 323-9545/ (847) 299-9070
NRMCA
NELMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org (888) 846-7622/ (301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org (800) 673-6275/ (734) 769-8010
NSPI
National Spa and Pool Association www.nspi.org (703) 838-0083
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (Formerly: NSA - National Stone Association) www.nssga.org (800) 342-1415/ (703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com (800) 323-9736/ (703) 779-1022
NUCA
National Utility Contractors Association www.nuca.com (703) 358-9300
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) (800) 966-5253/ (210) 635-8100 www.opl.com
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200
NETA
International Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org (800) 344-3555/ (617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-6372
NGA
National Glass Association www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org (800) 933-0318/(901) 377-1818
NIBS
National Institute of Building Science www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800
NLA
National Lime Association www.lime.org (703) 243-5463
PCA
Portland Cement Assoc. www.portcement.org (847) 966-6200
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org (312) 786-0300
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
014200 - 8 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School www.pdca.com (800) 332-7322/ (703) 359-0826
Addition and Remodeling SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association www.sigmaonline.org (312) 664-6610
SJI
Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org (843) 626-1995 Screen Manufacturers Association www.smainfo.org (561) 533-0991
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org (800) 589-8956/ (508) 230-3516
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute www.pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu (217) 333-3929
SMA
PLANET
Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (703) 803-2980
PTI
Post Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org (602) 870-7540
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org (800) 644-2400/ (312) 670-2400
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD) www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Institute www.spri.org (781) 444-0242
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com
SSINA
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org (888) 225-7339/ (415) 382-0662
Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com (800) 982-0355/ (202) 342-8630
SSMA
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com (312) 456-5590
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org (877) 281-7772/ (412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com
SWI
Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333
SAE
SAE International www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org (847) 462-1930
SDI
Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabfurn.com (516) 294-5424
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org (315) 646-2234
SWRI
SIA
Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org
Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org (816) 472-7974
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc. www.tileusa.com (864) 646-8453
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 9 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
TIA/EIA
TMS
Farmington Elementary School www.wdma.com (800) 223-2301/ (847) 299-5200
Telecommunications Industry Association/ Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org (703) 907-7700 The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700
WH
Intertek Testing Services Warnock Hersey Listing Services www.intertek-etlsemko.com (916) 678-7820
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California www.wicnet.org (916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com (800) 550-7889/ (530) 661-9591
TPI
Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 www.tpinst.org
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org (800) 405-8873/ (847) 705-9898
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com (800) 704-4050/ (847) 272-8800
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org (972) 243-3902
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org (503) 224-3930
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.culturenet.ca/usitt (800) 938-7488/ (315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org (800) 424-2869/ (202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (800) 283-1486/ (503) 639-0651
WCSC
WDMA
014200 - 10 of 11 Printed on 1/16/2013
Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Assoc.) www.windowcoverings.org (800) 506-4636/ (212) 661-4261 Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
1.7
JURISDICTIONAL AGENCIES A. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of f ederal g overnment s tandard- or S pecificationproducing ag encies ar e o ften ab breviated. T he following acr onyms o r ab breviations r eferenced in the C ontract Documents i ndicate n ames o f standard- or S pecification-producing agencies o f the federal government. N ames and ad dresses ar e subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE
Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov (800) 638-2772/ (301) 504-0990
DOC
Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov
DOE
Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
www.energy.gov EPA
Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 260-2090
FCC
Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov
GSA
General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (202) 708-5082
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742 /(202) 693-1999
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 11 of 11 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014300 - QUALITY ASSURANCE complied w ith r equirements o f authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.4
A. When r equested b y t he O wner o r A rchitect o r indicated in s pecification s ection, th e qualifying party s hall p rovide w ritten in formation, including, but n ot lim ited to , p ast p roject lis ts, a ffidavits, certification or other evidence to verify the party’s qualifications.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Quality Assurance; I ncludes P rerequisites an d Procedures to A ssure the Q uality o f Construction, Field O bservations an d T ests P erformed by Manufacturer’s Representatives D uring Installation.
1.5
2. Installer Qualifications. 3. Professional Engineer Qualifications 1.6
6. Manufacturer’s Certificates. 7. Manufacturer’s Field Services. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specific naming of co des o r s tandards o ccurs o n the D rawings a nd i n o ther S ections o f these Specifications. C omply with laws, ordinances, and regulations o f a uthorities h aving jurisdiction. Proof of c ompliance s hall be s igned a pproval by the respective authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
1.3
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
S:\11\0122\frontend\014300CGA.doc
ENGINEER
MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Q ualifications: A f irm ex perienced in m anufacturing p roducts o r s ystems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: Except as o therwise defined i n individual specification s ections, " experienced" means an en tity h aving s uccessfully completed a minimum o f five (5) previous pr ojects s imilar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special r equirements i ndicated; an d having
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional e ngineer w ho is le gally q ualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced i n p roviding e ngineering services o f t he ki nd indicated. E ngineering services are defined as t hose p erformed f or installations o f th e s ystem, a ssembly, o r p roduct that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Familiarity with Pertinent C odes a nd S tandards: Verify t hat r equirements o f t he s pecifically n amed codes an d s tandards as w ell as r equirements mandated by law, ordinance and authority. V erify that the items procured and installed in this W ork meet or exceed the specified requirements. C. Rejection or Non-Complying Items: T he Architect reserves the right to r eject ite ms in corporated i nto the Work w hich f ail t o m eet s uch m inimum requirements.
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer Q ualifications: A f irm or individual experienced in in stalling, e recting, o r assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a r ecord o f s uccessful in service performance.
5. Manufacturer’s Instructions.
1.2
FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator Q ualifications: A f irm e xperienced in producing pr oducts s imilar t o t hose i ndicated for this P roject an d w ith a r ecord o f successful inservice performance, as w ell as s ufficient production capacity to produce required units.
1. Fabricator Qualifications.
4. Manufacturer Qualifications.
QUALIFICATIONS, GENERALLY
1.9
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. When s pecified in in dividual s pecification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for d elivery, s torage, a ssembly, in stallation, adjusting and f inishing in q uantities s pecified f or Product Data. 014300 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Identify conflicts b etween m anufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in in dividual s pecification Sections, submit m anufacturers' cer tificate t o Architect for review in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified r equirements. Submit s upporting reference d ate, af fidavits an d cer tifications as appropriate. C. Certificates m ay b e r ecent o r p revious t est r esults on material or P roduct, b ut must be accep table t o Architect. 1.11
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Submit qualifications of manufacturer’s observer to Architect th irty (30) days i n ad vance o f r equired observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect. B. When s pecified in in dividual s pecification Sections, require material or P roduct s uppliers o r manufacturers to p rovide q ualified s taff p ersonnel to o bserve s ite conditions, c onditions of s urfaces and in stallation, q uality o f workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to r eport o bservations a nd site decisions or instructions given to a pplicators o r installers that are supplemental o r c ontrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within thirty (30) days of observation to Architect for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014300 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALITY ASSURANCE
S:\11\0122\frontend\014300CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014400 - EXISTING UTILITIES known, Contractor s hall immediately notify the Owner thereof and the Architect/Engineer.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
D. Do not commence construction operations adjacent to utility property until arrangements satisfactory to the utility owner have been made for the protection of s aid pr operty a nd c ontinuation of s ervice. Contractor shall a ssume r esponsibility a nd p ay f or cost for which the Owner may be liable.
A. Conditions of th e C ontract ( General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Existing Utilities:
E. Should any of t he C ontractor's e quipment c ome i n contact with or damage utility property in any way, even though there may be no apparent evidence of breakage or h arm, pr omptly n otify t he pr oper authorities and cooperate with them in determining damage an d r estoring i nterrupted s ervices as may be n eeded. W here contact is m ade w ith a u tility, operations shall be suspended immediately, and the area v acated, u ntil i t h as b een d etermined b y t he utility owner that it is safe to resume operations.
1. Utility Location. 2. Notification of Utility. 3. Compensation. 4. Care and Responsibility. 1.2
UTILITY LOCATION A. Prior to beginning any excavation, contact Gopher State O ne ( 1-800-252-1166) a nd utility companies for the location of existing underground services.
F. The Contractor s hall lo cate a ll p rivate utilities (such as el ectric l ines, ir rigation, c onduits, fiber optic lin es, c able lin es, te lephone lin es, w ater pipes, sewers and tile lin es). The C ontractor will be r equired to c onfirm a ll u tilities w hich must be removed o r r elocated t o co mplete t he w ork. N o additional c ompensation w ill be pa id t o the Contractor f or u tilities s hown o n th e d rawings or which otherwise may have been anticipated prior to the co nstruction. T he C ontractor may request, [through the Construction Manager,] the assistance of Owner personal in locating existing private lines.
B. Private Utility Location: Prior to the start o f construction, th e C ontractor s hall e mploy a Utility Location Contractor to identify any private utilities on the site that a call to Gopher State One may not have identified. 1.3
NOTIFICATION OF UTILITY A. Notify public utility c ompanies a nd m unicipalities as to which of their p roperties ( such a s p ole lines, conduits, gas p ipes, w ater p ipes, s ewers, f iber optics lines, T V lines, cable lines, te lephone lines and t ile l ines) m ust b e r emoved o r r elocated to complete the W ork o f th is C ontract. T his n otice shall note the lo cations where the properties could be relocated. H owever, n o w arranty i s m ade o r implied that the utility owners will remove or relocate their properties prior to commencement of construction operations or in sufficient time or manner t o p revent i nterference w ith the Contractor's operations. B. Notify the O wner of pr oposed c onstruction activities a nd r equest in formation o n existing utilities that may be present on the site that are not shown on t he pl ans a nd/or i dentified by public utility companies and municipalities. C. Verify th e a mount o f tim e required to give sufficient notice to the Owner of all known utilities. The C ontractor s hall g ive s uch n otice before starting any o perations a ffecting th ose p roperties. If during t he c ourse o f o perations, th e C ontractor discovers u tility p roperty whose e xistence was not
EXISTING UTILITIES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014400CGA.doc
1.4
COMPENSATION A. It i s u nderstood an d ag reed t hat the Bidder has considered in h is b id th e relative locations of existing utilities, as shown on the Plans and that no additional c ompensation w ill b e a llowed f or a ny delays, inconveniences or damages sustained due to interference which may result from those utilities or the operations of moving them. B. If the Contractor is required to perform any special work o r us e s pecial c onstruction methods in prosecuting w ork a djacent t o underground utility property whose existence was not indicated in the Contract, equitable compensation will be made for the additional costs incurred. C. The C ontractor s hall co ntact t he O wner and Architect/Engineer prior to p erforming the s pecial work or special construction methods. Any special work or s pecial c onstruction m ethods pe rformed
014400 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
without the approval b y th e O wner s hall n ot b e compensated. 1.5
CARE AND RESPONSIBILITY A. Employ special equipment or construction methods (including hand labor, if necessary) t o accomplish the w ork a s p lanned a djacent to u tility p roperties without damage thereto. A t n o tim e s hall th e Contractor i nterfere w ith an y p ersons en gaged i n protecting or m oving u tility p roperty o r in th e operation of the utility. B. The Contractor shall a ssume full r esponsibility f or reimbursing the utility o wners f or a ny d amages caused t o u tility p roperties w hose ex istence and approximate locations w ere m ade k nown t o h im before the damage was d one. N othing i n t his Section s hall m ake th e C ontractor liable for damage to u tility p roperty l ocated b elow t he ground surface, in the absence of negligence, if the owner o f th e u tility, a fter r easonable n otice from the Contractor, fails to advise the Contractor of its location a nd a pproximate depth be low the ground surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014400 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
EXISTING UTILITIES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Monitor q uality c ontrol o ver suppliers, manufacturers, p roducts, s ervices, s ite co nditions and workmanship to produce W ork of s pecified quality.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
B. Comply fully w ith m anufacturers' in structions, including each step in sequence.
B. Quality C ontrol; I ncludes P rocedures t o M easure and R eport t he Q uality an d P erformance o f Construction.
C. Should manufacturers' in structions c onflict w ith Contract Documents, request cl arification f rom Architect before proceeding.
1. Quality Assurance and Control of Installation.
D. Comply w ith s pecified s tandards a s a minimum quality for t he W ork, ex cept w hen more s tringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
2. Field Samples. 3. Mock-Up Requirements. 1.2
E. Perform w ork by persons qu alified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
F. Secure p roducts i n p lace w ith positive anchorage devices d esigned an d s ized t o w ithstand s tresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures: Submission o f m anufacturers' i nstructions a nd certificates.
1.5
FIELD SAMPLES A. Install f ield s amples a t th e s ite a s r equired b y individual specifications Sections for review by the Architect.
D. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
C. Where f ield s ample is s pecified in individual Sections to be removed, cl ear ar ea af ter f ield sample has been accepted by Architect.
F. Individual S pecification S ections - Inspection a nd testing required and standards for testing. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
REFERENCES A. Conform t o r eference s tandard b y d ate of issue current on date of Contract Documents. B. Obtain copies of standards w hen r equired by Contract Documents. C. Should specified r eference s tandards co nflict w ith Contract Documents, r equest cl arification f or Architect before proceeding. D. The c ontractual r elationship o f th e p arties to th e Contract s hall n ot b e a ltered f rom th e Contract Documents b y m ention o r inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.6
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Mockups: B efore installing portions o f th e Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following r equirements, u sing m aterials indicated for the completed Work unless indicated otherwise in the relevant specification section: 1. Assemble an d er ect s pecified i tems with specified attachment an d an chorage d evices, flashings, s eals a nd f inishes i n l ocation a nd o f size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate t he p roposed r ange o f aes thetic effects and workmanship.
QUALITY CONTROL
S:\11\0122\frontend\014500CGA.doc
014500 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
4. Obtain Architect's approval o f mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups d uring c onstruction i n an undisturbed condition as a standard for j udging the completed Work. 6. Where m ock-up is s pecified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mockup has been accepted by Architect. B. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in the relevant specification section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014500 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALITY CONTROL
S:\11\0122\frontend\014500CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES H. Individual S pecification S ections: I nspection a nd testing required and standards for testing.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
A. ASTM C 1077-00 - Standard Practice for Laboratories T esting C oncrete an d C oncrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
B. Administrative and P rocedural R equirements f or Quality Control Testing and Inspection Services.
B. ASTM C 1093-95 - Standard Practice f or t he Accreditation of T esting A gencies f or U nit Masonry.
C. Conventional Testing and Inspection Services.
C. ASTM D3740-01 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of S oil a nd R ock a s U sed i n Engineering Design and Construction.
D. Special Structural Testing and Inspection. E. Testing Laboratory Services. 1. Selection and Payment.
D. ASTM E 329-00b - Standard S pecification f or Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.
2. Laboratory Responsibilities. 3. Laboratory Reports.
E. ASTM E543-99 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Agencies that Perform Nondestructive Testing.
4. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority. 5. Contractor’s Responsibilities.
F. ASTM E 548-94e1 - Standard Guide f or G eneral Criteria Used f or E valuating L aboratory Competence.
F. Conventional Inspections and Testing. 1. Testing Schedule Requirements. 2. Schedule of Conventional Inspections a nd Testing.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Special S tructural T esting a nd Inspection Schedule.
A. Testing a nd inspection shall c omply w ith th e requirements o f th e I nternational B uilding C ode (IBC), 2006 Edition, as a mended b y t he 2007 Minnesota State Building Code.
RELATED SECTIONS
B. Testing and inspection shall comply w ith requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740.
G. Special Structural Testing and Inspection.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Document 003100 - Information A vailable to Bidders: Geo-technical data (Soil Borings). B. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). C. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 014533 – Structural Testing a nd S pecial Inspections. F. Section 017700 - Closeout P rocedures: C loseout requirements. G. Section 017839 - Project R ecord D ocuments: Requirements for testing reports.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
C. Testing Laboratory: Must be authorized to operate in the S tate in which p roject is lo cated, a nd m ust maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. D. Testing a nd i nspection services are i ntended t o assist in d etermining p robable c ompliance o f th e Work with requirements specified. T hese services do not r elieve th e C ontractor o f r esponsibility f or compliance with the r equirements o f t he C ontract Documents. E. If in spection o f fabricators work i s r equired, t he Architect may require testing and inspection of the work at the p lant, b efore shipment. T he Architect reserves the right to reject materials not complying with the Contract Documents.
014523 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling F. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way p revent l ater r ejection i f defective work or materials a re d iscovered, n or s hall it o bligate Architect to accept such work. 1.5
DEFINITIONS A. Testing: E valuation o f s ystems, p rimarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: E valuation o f s ystems, p rimarily requiring observation and judgment. C. Conventional Testing and Inspection: Work herein d escribed as t hose i tems not specifically required by the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 Edition, as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. D. Special Structural Testing and Inspection: Work herein d escribed i nclude i tems r equired b y the International Building C ode ( IBC), 2 006 Edition, as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building C ode, and o ther i tems w hich i n t he professional j udgment o f t he Structural Engineer are critical to the integrity of the building structure.
1.6
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Selection and Payment: 1. Owner s hall employ an d p ay f or services of an Independent Testing L aboratory t o pe rform specified inspection and testing. 2. Employment of testing laboratory s hall in n o way r elieve th e C ontractor o f h is obligation to perform work in accordance with r equirements of Contract Documents. 3. The Owner shall submit, prior to start of Work, Independent T esting Laboratory name, address, telephone number and n ames o f f ull t ime registered Engineer and responsible officer. B. Laboratory Responsibilities: 1. Take field specimens an d s amples f or t esting according to provisions of paragraph 3.2 of this section and as otherwise i ndicated i n t he Contract Documents. 2. Provide q ualified p ersonnel a t s ite. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.
014523 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School 3. Perform specified inspection, s ampling an d testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of m aterials an d m ixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor in writing of observed irregularities or nonconformance of Work or Products. 6. Perform additional in spections a nd te sts required by Architect. 7. Attend p re-construction progress meetings.
conferences an
d
C. Laboratory Reports: 1. Testing ag ency an d/or s pecial i nspectors s hall submit a r eport i n acco rdance w ith the Special Structural T esting a nd I nspection Schedule and shall conduct and interpret tests and inspections and s tate i n each r eport w hether; (1) test specimens an d o bservations c omply w ith Contract Documents, and specifically state any deviations, (2) r ecord t ypes a nd l ocations of defects found in W ork, a nd ( 3) r ecord W ork required and performed, to correct deficiencies. 2. Reports f or c onventional te sting a nd inspection shall be submitted in a tim ely m anner to th e Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor. 3. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report as follows: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification o f p roduct a nd Specifications Section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of inspection or test. h. Date of test. i. Results of tests. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. 4. When r equested b y A rchitect, interpretation of test results.
provide
D. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority:
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 1. Laboratory m ay n ot r elease, r evoke, al ter o r enlarge o n r equirements o f C ontract Documents. 2. Laboratory m ay n ot ap prove o r accep t any portion of the Work. 3. Laboratory m ay n ot as sume an y d uties o f Contractor. 4. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. E. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Schedule o f T ests and I nspections: C oordinate scheduling o f r equired te sting w ith testing laboratory and p repare a s chedule o f t ests, inspections, and similar quality-control services according to provisions of Part 3 of this section and as o therwise i ndicated i n t he C ontract Documents. 2. Coordinate Work such that a ll specified te sting and inspections are accomplished. 3. Deliver as n eeded b y t he Testing Laboratory, materials an d construction r elated d ocuments necessary for the T esting L aboratory t o complete testing. 4. Cooperate w ith l aboratory pe rsonnel, a nd provide acces s t o t he W ork an d t o manufacturer's facilities. 5. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access t o W ork to be t ested, t o obt ain a nd handle samples at the s ite o r at s ource o f products to be tested, to f acilitate te sts a nd inspections, storage and curing of test samples. 6. Notify A rchitect a nd l aboratory 24 h ours pr ior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. 7. Upon c ompletion o f te sting, s ample ta king, or inspection, the Contractor shall r epair d amaged work an d r estore s ubstrates an d f inishes t o eliminate deficiencies, including d eficiencies in the visual qualities o f e xposed s urfaces, as judged solely by the Architect. 8. Protect work e xposed by or f or t esting a nd/or inspection and p rotect r epaired w ork. R epair and protection is the Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the a ssignment o f r esponsibility for testing and/or inspection.
Addition and Remodeling
1.7
CONVENTIONAL INSPECTION:
TESTING
AND
A. Provide c onventional i nspection a nd t esting as required by the I nternational B uilding C ode, Section 109, and as scheduled below. B. Independent T esting Agency s hall i ndicate compliance o r n on-compliance w ith C ontract Documents. C. Submit a f inal s igned r eport s tating w hether th e Work w as, to the best of their knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications and the ap plicable w orkmanship provisions of the code. D. Contractor s hall co operate w ith i ndependent f irm; furnish samples of m aterials, d esign m ixes, equipment, t ools, s torage an d as sistance as requested. E. Schedule of Conventional Inspections and Tests: 1. Schedule o f T ests: C ontractor shall p repare a Testing Schedule in t abular f orm a nd i nclude the following: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Identification of test designation and type. c. Test frequency required. d. Estimated to tal n umber o f te sts b y type required. e. Estimated tim e s chedule o r tim e span for tests. f. Entity responsible for performing tests if other than Owner’s Testing Agent. 2. Submit T esting S chedule und er provisions of Section 013300. 3. Schedule of C onventional Inspections a nd Tests, includes, but is not limited to: a. Section 031000 Accessories.
- Concrete Forming and
b. Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcing. c. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. d. Section 034113 - Precast C oncrete H ollow Core Plank. e. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems. f. Section 042731 – Reinforced Unit Masonry. g. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
014523 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
h. Section 052100 - Steel Joist Framing.
C. Deliver m aterial s pecimens to the O wner's te sting lab, which must by terms of the Contract be tested prior to in clusion in th e P roject, a t le ast f orty-five (45) days prior to scheduled delivery to the job site.
i. Section 053100 - Steel Decking. j. Section 054000 - Cold F ormed M etal Framing.
D. Materials shipped b y t he C ontractor f rom t he source of s upply pr ior to h aving s atisfactorily passed s uch te sting a nd in spection o r prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job.
k. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications. l. Section 055100 - Metal Stairs and Railings. m. Section 075100 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing. n. Section 07520 - Modified B ituminous Membrane Roofing and Restoration
3.2
A. Field specimens an d s amples f or t esting, unl ess otherwise provided in t hese C ontract D ocuments, shall be selected and taken by the testing laboratory or I nspector a nd n ot t he C ontractor. S ampling equipment a nd pe rsonnel w ill be pr ovided by the testing laboratory. D eliveries o f s pecimens an d samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory.
o. Section 0753 10 - Elastomeric M embrane Roofing - Fully Adhered p. Section 07532 0 - Elastomeric M embrane Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted q. Section 078400 - Firestopping. r. Section 310000 – Earhtwork. s. Section 311000 - Site Clearing. t. Section 312316 - Excavation an d B ackfill for Structures. 1.8
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION: 1. Refer to Section 014533.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
COORDINATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTORS A. Inspectors an d r epresentatives of th e te sting laboratory firm shall h ave acces s t o t he W ork. Contractor s hall p rovide f acilities f or s uch acces s in o rder th at th e te sting, in spection and the obtaining of samples may be done properly. B. Coordination: C ontractor s hall c oordinate a nd cooperate w ith T esting A gency t he sequence of activities n ecessary t o acco mmodate required testing and inspection with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity o f r emoving an d r eplacing construction t o acco mmodate t esting and inspecting.
014523 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
TAKING SPECIMENS
3.3
SCHEDULES FOR TESTING A. Establishing Schedule of Tests and Inspections: 1. By a dvance d iscussion w ith t he t esting laboratory selected by the Owner, determine the time r equired for t he l aboratory t o pe rform i ts tests and to issue each of its findings. 2. Provide r equired tim e w ithin th e c onstruction schedule. 3. Revising Schedule: W hen c hanges o f construction s chedule ar e n ecessary during construction, coordinate s uch c hanges o f schedule with the testing laboratory as required. 4. Numbers of Testing: D etermine w ith th e Testing L aboratory t he t otal n umber of each type o f t est r equired i n acco rdance w ith specification. Monitor p rogress o f te sting to ensure that proper number and types of testing required ar e b eing acco mplished. Provide copies o f s chedules d ocumenting t ypes an d numbers of t ests r equired w ith c orresponding information s howing t ypes a nd num bers of actual tests conducted m onthly af ter commencement o f t esting a nd within five (5 ) days of completion of testing under each section of the Work. 5. Submit Testing and I nspection s chedule, p rior to co mmencement o f t he W ork, t o the Owner, Architect/Engineer, Construction Man ager, testing agencies, and other parties who’s Work TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
may b e affected b y t he T esting an d Inspection Schedule. B. Adherence to Schedule: W hen t he t esting laboratory is r eady to te st a ccording to the determined schedules, but is prevented from testing or t aking s pecimens d ue t o i ncompleteness o f the work, ex tra ch arges for te sting a ttributable to the delay m ay b e b ack-charged to t he C ontractor an d will b e d educted b y t he O wner from the Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
014523 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
014523 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0122\frontend\014523CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
do not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications.
SECTION 014533 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
INTENT AND CONDITIONS
6. Testing agents and/or special inspectors may not waive or alter contract requirements, or approve or accept any portion of the work unless specifically authorized by the Architect or SER. They may not assume any duties of the Contractor, and they have no authority to stop or reject work.
A. Intent 1. Define and coordinate structural testing and special inspection services. 2. Provide a greater level of confidence that the specified work is constructed in compliance with the contract documents and the intent of applicable codes including Sections 106 and 1704 of the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) as adopted by the current Minnesota State Building Code. 3. Structural testing and special inspection services are intended to assist in determining probable compliance of the work with requirements specified. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the contract documents. B. Conditions 1. If inspection of a fabricator's work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant, before shipment. Owner and Architect reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 2. Refer to individual technical specification sections for specific qualifications, inspections, tests, frequency and standards required. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the referenced standard for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be performed in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 3. Work shall be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. 4. Structural testing, special inspection, and periodic inspections by the Building Official do not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by Architect or SER. 5. Structural testing, special inspection, and periodic inspections by the Building Official STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications apply to this section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring observation and judgment. C. Structural Special Inspections: Structural special inspections include inspections of structural items required by the 2006 IBC Section 1704, as adopted by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, and other items, which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record, are critical to the integrity of the building structure and are indicated to be performed under the requirements of this section. They do not include special inspections for non=structural items such as fireproofing, EIFS, and smoke control systems. D. Structural Testing: Structural testing includes those tests of structural items required by the 2006 IBC, as adopted by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, or its referenced standards, and other tests, which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record, are critical to the integrity of the building structure and are indicated to be performed under the requirements of this section. E. Architect of Record: The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. F. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The licensed professional engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project.
014533 $ 1 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4. Provide individuals performing tests and taking samples with appropriate certifications for work performed.
G. Licensed Structural Engineer: A professional engineer with education and experience in the design of structures similar to this project licensed to practice in Minnesota.
B. Special Inspector: Either an appropriately certified inspector or a civil/structural engineer performing under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer (as defined earlier in this section) and acceptable to the SER and Building Official. Unique special inspector requirements, for specific materials and systems, are noted in related technical specification sections.
H. Testing Agency (TA): The properly qualified firm performing testing services. I. Special Inspector (SI): A properly qualified individual or firm performing special inspections. J. Building Official: The officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the building code for the project. 1.4
REFERENCES A. ASTM C1077=02 – Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. B. ASTM C1093=95 = Practice for the Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. C. ASTM D3740=01 = Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. D. ASTM E329=02 = Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. E. ASTM E543=02 = Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. F. International Building Code (IBC), 2006. G. Minnesota State Building Code 2007.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS A. Testing Agency: An approved independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner, Architect, and SER and meeting the following: 1. Authorized to operate in the State in which the project is located and experienced with the requirements and testing methods specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Meet applicable requirements of references stated in paragraph 1.4. 3. Have available testing equipment that is calibrated, at reasonable intervals, by devices of accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards, or to accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.6
RESPONSIBILITIES A. Special Inspectors: 1. Inspect the work assigned for conformance with the building department approved plans, specifications, and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the code. Perform inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. 2. Bring nonconforming items to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction. If not corrected within 24 hours or if inspector will not be on site the following day, bring to the attention of the SER by the end of the business day. If uncorrected after a reasonable period of time, bring to the attention of the Building Official, and to the Architect. Notify SER immediately if non=conforming items are enclosed, embedded, or obscured prior to verification of correction. 3. Submit inspection reports to the Building Official, Contractor, the Architect, the SER, and other designated persons in accordance with the structural testing and special inspection schedule. 4. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his/her knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the code. 5. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties. 6. Attend preconstruction meeting to review scope of special inspection. B. Testing Agency: 1. Test the work assigned for conformance with
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 2 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencing construction.
the building department approved plans, specifications, and applicable material provisions of the documents. Perform tests in a timely manner to avoid delay of work.
D. Fabricator:
2. Submit test reports to the Building Official, Contractor, the Architect, the SER, and other designated persons in accordance with the structural testing and special inspection schedule.
1. Submit a Certificate of Compliance to the Building Official, Special Inspector, and SER that the work was performed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications.
3. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties.
2. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencing construction.
4. Attend a preconstruction meeting to review scope of structural testing.
E. Owner:
C. Contractor:
1. Establish direct funding to provide for cost of structural testing and special inspection services.
1. Attend a preconstruction meeting to review scope of structural testing and special inspection.
2. Provide special inspector with approved plans, specifications and approved shop drawings.
2. Post or make available the structural testing and special inspection schedule within its office at the job site. Also, provide adequate notification to those parties designated on the schedule so they may properly prepare for and schedule their work.
3. Provide special inspectors and testing agencies with full access to the site at all times. 4. Sign the Structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties.
3. Provide special inspectors access to the approved plans and specifications at the job site. 4. Review all reports issued by special inspectors. 5. Retain, at the job site, all reports submitted by the special inspectors for review on the Building Official's request. 6. Correct deficiencies identified in inspection or testing reports in a timely manner. 7. Provide safe access to the work requiring inspection or testing. 8. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to the work, to obtain, handle and deliver samples, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test samples. 9. Verify conformance of the work with specified construction tolerances. 10. Inspections by Building Official: Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by the building official, as required by IBC Section 109, the Minnesota State Building Code, and local ordinances.
1.7
PAYMENT A. Owner or Architect/SER, acting as the Owner's agent, will employ and pay for services of the special inspectors and testing agency to perform required structural testing and special inspection. B. Unless noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, samples, mock=ups, and assemblies required for testing and inspection and shall pay for shipping costs related to delivery of such items. Testing agency will pay for shipping costs of samples transported from site to lab. C. If items requiring testing or inspection are enclosed, embedded or obscured prior to testing or inspection or if such items are placed without tests or inspections, the Contractor shall pay for the costs of any exploratory work deemed necessary by the Architect/SER to verify compliance with the Contract Documents.
11. Sign the structural testing and special
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 3 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
D. Contractor shall pay for the costs of any retests or re=inspections caused by work that does not comply with the Contract Documents based on initial tests or inspections, or work that is later revised or replaced by the Contractor. This does not include revisions requested by the Owner. 1.8
INSPECTION NOTICE A. Provide minimum of 24 hours notice for all items requiring testing or inspection. Items requiring testing and inspection services prior to or during placement shall not be placed until testing and inspection services are available. Items requiring testing and inspection services after placement shall not be enclosed or obscured until testing and inspection services are performed.
1.9
REPORTS A. Testing agency and special inspectors shall submit reports for structural testing and special inspection in a timely manner to the Contractor, Building Official, SER, and Architect of Record. Provide reports of daily activities to the SER and Contractor. Submit reports to the Contractor on a daily basis and to the SER on a daily or weekly basis. Provide summary reports to the Building Official and Architect on a monthly basis unless they request otherwise. B. Provide reports for ongoing work, containing the following information: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Firm name and address. 4. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling, test, or inspection. 6. Identification of product and specification section. 7. Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 8. Type of test or inspection. 9. Whether test specimens, test results or observations indicate compliance with Contract Documents. Specifically state any discrepancies 10. Types and locations of discrepancies found in work 11. Work required performed to correct discrepancies and work performed to correct
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
previously noted discrepancies. Discrepancies corrected during an inspection need not be reported 12. Submit certified final special inspection report stating that, to the best of the special inspector's knowledge, the work requiring special inspection conformed to the Construction Documents. 1.10 FREQUENCY OF TESTING AND INSPECTION A. For detailed requirements, see individual technical specification sections and the structural testing and special inspection schedule. 1.11 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of testing, sample=taking, or inspection, the Contractor shall repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed surfaces, as judged solely by the Architect/SER. Protect work exposed by or for testing and/or inspection and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for testing and/or inspection. 1.12 TESTS TO DEMONSTRATE QUALIFICATION A. Any tests required to qualify the Contractor or the workers for any phase of the work, shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. B. If the Contractor proposes a product material, method, or other system that has not been pre=qualified, the Architect/SER may require applicable tests to establish a basis for acceptance or rejection. The Contractor shall pay for these tests. C. The Architect/Engineer of Record reserves the right to require certification or other proof that the system proposed is in compliance with specified tests, criteria or standards. A representative of an independent testing agency shall sign the certificate. 1.13 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE A. The parties involved shall complete and sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule. Schedule to be complete at time of permit issuance. B. The completed schedule is an element of the construction documents and after permit issuance, becomes part of the building
014533 $ 4 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
department approved plans and specifications
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 5 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE Project Name Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling Project No. Location 510 Maple Street, Farmington, MN Permit No. __________________________________________________________________________________________ STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION Specification Section/Article
Description (2)
Type of Inspector (3)
Report Frequency
031000
Concrete Formwork
SI1S
Each Visit
031510
Post1Installed Anchors
SI1T or SI1S
Each Visit
032000
Concrete Reinforcement
SI1S
Each Visit
033000
Cast1in1Place Concrete Tests
TA
Each Test
033000
Cast1in1Place Concrete Inspections
SI1S
Each Visit
042731
Masonry Tests
TA
Each Test
042731
Masonry Inspections
SI1S
Each Visit
051200
Structural Metal Framing
SI1T
Each Visit
052100
Steel Joist Framing
SI1T
Each Visit
053100
Steel Decking
SI1T
Each Visit
054000
Cold Formed Steel Framing Welding
SI1T
Each Visit
055000
Stair and Railing Welding
SI1T
Each Visit
310000
Earthwork
SI1T
Weekly
Note:
Assigned Firm (4)
This schedule is to be filled out when applying for a building permit.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Permit No. to be provided by the Building Official. Use descriptions per IBC Section 1704, as adopted by Minnesota State Building Code. Special Inspector 1 Technical, Special Inspector – Structural, Testing Agency. Firm contracted to perform services.
Each appropriate representative shall sign below: Owner:
Firm:
Contractor:
Firm:
Architect:
Firm:
Cuningham Group Architecture
Date:
SER:
Firm:
BKBM Engineers
Date:
SI1S:
Firm:
Date:
TA:
Firm:
Date:
SI1T:
Firm:
Date:
F:
Firm:
Date:
Legend:
SER = Structural Engineer of Record TA = Testing Agency
ISD #192
Date: Date:
SI1T = Special Inspector 1 Technical SI1S = Special Inspector – Structural
F = Fabricator
Accepted for the Building Department by: _____________________________________Date: ________________
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, the following:
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1. Building Code Requirements.
SECTION INCLUDES
2. Health and Safety Regulations.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
3. Utility Company Regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department an d R escue S quad Rules.
B. Temporary F acilities a nd C ontrols; Including Requirements f or I nstallation, M aintenance an d Removal of Temporary Facilities, and Construction Aids During Construction.
5. Environmental Protection Regulations. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. B. Standards: C omply w ith N FPA C ode 241, “Building Construction a nd Demolition Operations”, A NSI-A10 Series s tandards f or “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition”, and NECA Electrical Design Library, “Temporary Electrical Facilities”.
C. Project Conditions. D. Cold Weather Protection. E. Materials and Equipment. 1. Temporary U tilities: I nstallation, Electricity, Lighting, Heating and Cooling, Ventilation, Fire Protection, Protection of E xisting F acilities, Telephone/Facsimile, Water Service.
1. Refer to “Guidelines for B id C onditions f or Temporary Job Utilities and Service”, prepared jointly b y A GC a nd A SC, f or in dustry recommendations.
2. Construction Facilities: Sanitary Facilities, First Aid, C onstruction A ids, B arriers, B arricades, Fences, Field Offices an d S heds, Project Identification.
2. Electrical S ervice: C omply with NEMA, NECA and UL s tandards a nd r egulations f or temporary electrical service. I nstall s ervice i n compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70).
3. Temporary C ontrols: P ollution C ontrol, Surface Water Control, Access Roads, Parking, Traffic Control, and Snow Removal. 4. Temporary E nclosures: E xterior E nclosures, Interior Enclosures, Security Meas ures, Tree and Plant Protection, Protection of Installed Work,. F. Removal o f T emporary U tilities, F acilities and Controls. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013113 - Project Coordination. D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply w ith in dustry standards and applicable laws and r egulations o f a uthorities
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
C. Inspections: A rrange f or a uthorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility b efore u se. O btain r equired certifications and permits. 1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: P repare a schedule indicating dates f or im plementation a nd te rmination o f each temporary utility. A t th e e arliest f easible tim e, when acceptable to t he O wner, ch ange o ver f rom use o f t emporary s ervice t o use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: K eep t emporary s ervices an d facilities clean and neat in appearance. O perate in a s afe an d ef ficient m anner. T ake necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with p rogress. D o n ot allow ha zardous, d angerous o r unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances t o de velop or persist on the site. C. When disruption of the existing service is required, do not proceed without the Owner's and Architect's
015000 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
review. Provide alternate temporary service, when required. D. Environmental Requirements: P rovide a nd maintain heat, f uel, m aterials an d s ervices necessary to protect w ork an d m aterials ag ainst injury from e xtreme heat, c old, dr y winds, dust or dampness as follows:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. General: Provide n ew m aterials; i f accep table t o the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may b e u sed. P rovide materials suitable for the use intended.
1. During t he p lacing, s etting a nd curing of concrete an d cem ent w ork, provide sufficient heat to ensure the heating of spaces involved do not fall to less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2. Suspend operations on W ork w hen s ubject t o damage by c limatic c onditions, f looding o r because o f i nsufficient c uring o r d rying o f surfaces or materials. 3. Take necessary action to p rotect site and Work from wind, flood and storm damage. 1.5
COLD WEATHER PROTECTION A. Construction heating required during the construction period pr ior t o bu ilding e nclosure shall be classified as “Cold Weather Protection”. B. Provide temporary enclosures, fuel and equipment, in acc ordance w ith al l ap plicable co des an d ordinances, for heating m aterials i ncorporated i n the Work and for the protection of the Work before the building is enclosed and the temporary heating system described in t his S ection can b e o perated. Fuel, e quipment and method o f he ating s hall b e approved by the Architect. C. Heaters shall b e s mokeless U L approved p ortable units, using fuel of types and kinds approved by the Fire Mar shall. P rovide f uel, p ower, maintenance, and a ttendant r equired f or ope ration of portable heaters. W hen u sed i n en closed ar eas provide combustion ai r an d v ent d irect-fired u nits to the exterior. “ Salamander” an d s imilar t ype h eaters will not be permitted. D. In areas of the b uilding w here w ork is being performed, the temperature shall be maintained as specified under the “Project Conditions” paragraph in this Section. T emperatures shall not be allowed to r each a le vel ( high o r lo w) th at w ill cause damage t o a ny p ortion o f t he Work, including materials stored in the building.
MATERIALS
1. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. 2.2
EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide eq uipment s uitable f or t he u se intended and acceptable t o the Architect, undamaged p reviously us ed e quipment in serviceable co ndition m ay b e u sed. Provide equipment suitable for the use intended. B. Electrical O utlets: P rovide pr operly c onfigured NEMA polarized outlets to p revent in sertion o f 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide r eceptacle o utlets eq uipped w ith g roundfault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. C. Electrical P ower C ords: P rovide g rounded extension cords; us e “ hard-service” co rds w here exposed to a brasion a nd t raffic. P rovide waterproof co nnectors t o co nnect s eparate lengths of electric cords, if single le ngths w ill n ot r each areas where construction activities are in progress. D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of w attage r equired f or adequate i llumination. P rovide g uard cag es or tempered g lass en closures, w here exposed to breakage. P rovide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. E. Heating Units: Provide te mporary h eating u nits that have been tested an d l abeled b y U L, F M o r another r ecognized t rade as sociation r elated t o the type of fuel being consumed. F. Temporary Offices: P rovide p refabricated o r mobile units, or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable w indows an d serviceable finishes. P rovide h eated an d ai r conditioned units on f oundations a dequate f or normal loading. G. Temporary Toilet U nits: P rovide s elf-contained, single occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type, properly vented
015000 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
and fully enclosed with a g lass f iber r einforced polyester shell or similar non-absorbent material. H. First A id S upplies: C governing regulations.
omply with local and
I. Fire Extinguishers: P rovide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, C lass “ A” f ire ex tinguishers for temporary offices an d s imilar s paces. I n o ther locations, provide hand-carried portable, UL rated, Class “ ABC” d ry chemical ex tinguishers, o r a combination of extinguishers o f N FPA recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 a nd 241 for classifications, e xtinguishing a gent a nd s ize required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Locate f acilities w here t hey s erve t he p roject adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of t he W ork. R elocate an d m odify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid d elay. D o not r emove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: E ngage th e a ppropriate lo cal u tility company to i nstall t emporary s ervices, o r connect to e xisting s ervices. W here th e u tility c ompany provides on ly pa rt of t he s ervice, pr ovide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; c omply w ith th e u tility c ompany’s recommendations. 1. Arrange with the u tility c ompany a nd e xisting users for a time when service can be interrupted, where n ecessary, t o m ake co nnections f or temporary services. 2. Provide ad equate cap acity f or each s tage o f construction. P rior to te mporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities ar e n ot ch argeable t o t he O wner, o r Architect, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. B. Water Service: Install w ater s ervice an d distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
for construction until permanent water service is in use. 1. Sterilization: S terilize te mporary water piping prior to use. 3.3
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor may connect to Owner's existing power service. P ower c onsumption s hall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner shall pay for cost of energy used. E xercise measures to conserve energy. C. Electrical C ontractor s hall provide temporary electric feeder from existing service to locations as directed by the C onstruction M anager. P rovide temporary power to the Elevator for use during the construction period. 1. Owner shall pay f or t he co st o f en ergy u sed during the construction period. E xercise measures to conserve energy. 2. Electrical Contractor s hall p rovide p ower outlets for construction o perations, with b ranch wiring a nd d istribution b oxes lo cated at each floor. E ach C ontractor s hall p rovide flexible power cords as r equired f or h is ar ea o f operation. 3. Electrical Contractor shall provide main service disconnect an d o ver-current protection a t convenient locations and feeder switch at source distribution equipment. 4. Electrical C ontractor s hall p rovide ad equate distribution equipment, w iring a nd o utlets to provide single p hase b ranch ci rcuits f or p ower and lighting. D. Power D istribution S ystem: I nstall wiring overhead, and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where p ermitted, w iring c ircuits n ot exceeding 125 v olts, A C 2 0 am pere r ating, an d lighting circuits m ay b e n on-metallic s heathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. E. Provide power outlets for c onstruction operations, with branch w iring a nd d istribution b oxes lo cated at each f loor. Provide flexible pow er c ords a s required. F. Provide artificial lighting a dequate f or th e p roper execution of the Work in all areas of the project. G. Provide adequate distribution e quipment, w iring, and outlets to p rovide single p hase b ranch c ircuits for power and lighting. 015000 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
Farmington Elementary School C. Prior to b uilding enclosure, the source of heating, and t he co st o f en ergy s hall be solely the responsibility of the Contractors.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Wherever o verhead f loor o r r oof d eck h as b een installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching.
D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Contractors shall provide and pa y f or operation, m aintenance an d r egular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
1. Install and operate te mporary lig hting that will fulfill s ecurity a nd p rotection requirements, without o perating th e e ntire s ystem, a nd w ill provide adequate illu mination f or c onstruction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Clean f ilters, d ucts a nd m otors a s r equired to restore b uilding e quipment to th e operational condition equal t o t he c ondition pr ior t o u se f or temporary heating.
B. Provide a nd maintain a dequate lig hting to exterior staging and s torage ar eas af ter d ark for s ecurity purposes. C. Provide and m aintain a dequate lig hting to in terior work areas after dark for security purposes.
3.6
D. Provide branch w iring f rom pow er s ource t o distribution boxes with lig hting c onductors, pigtails, and lamps.
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
B. Contractor s hall pr ovide a nd the O wner shall pay for the cost of energy for the temporary ventilation devices. E nclose b uilding p rior to activating temporary ventilation in a ccordance w ith E xterior Enclosures in this Section.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. G. Electrical C ontractor s hall p rovide and maintain adequate lig hting f or c onstruction o perations, with minimum f oot-candle r eadings t o m eet or exceed OSHA r egulations a nd requirements, b ut as a minimum one light fixture per room. 1. Provide branch w iring f rom pow er s ource t o distribution boxes with lig hting c onductors, pigtails and lamps.
C. Upon completion of the project, return the existing ventilation system to operating conditions equal to pre-construction c onditions. C lean all d ucts, f ans and terminals as necessary. 3.7
3. Permanent building lighting may not be utilized during construction. If utilized, Contractor shall install a ll n ew la mps in fixtures prior to Substantial Completion.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 a nd 241 for classifications, e xtinguishing a gent a nd s ize required by location and class of fire exposure.
TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING A. Prior to enclosure of the building, Contractor shall keep the Work heated as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Contractor may utilize O wner’s e xisting h eating and cooling plant as a source for r emodeled ar eas only. T he O wner s hall p ay f or t he co st o f en ergy used from the Owner’s he ating a nd c ooling p lant during c onstruction o perations. C ontractors shall supplement w ith t emporary he ating a nd cooling devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
015000 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Fire Extinguishers: I nstall and maintain temporary fire p rotection o f t ypes n eeded t o p rotect ag ainst reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Locate fire extinguishers in a visible location where convenient and effective for their intended purpose.
2. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
3.5
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
3.8
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Contractor, s ubcontractors or an y employee under their jurisdiction will be responsible for damages to roofing, sheet m etal a nd r oof s tructure w hile performing work on the roof. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for carefully supervising all work to p revent i njury t o t rees and plants t hat ar e t o r emain o n t he p roperty, and t o r eplace t rees an d p lants which are damaged or destroyed du e t o c onstruction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
2. Provide construction a ids a nd e quipment required by personnel and to facilitate execution of t he W ork; pr ovide s taging, r unways, platforms, r ailings, tr ash c ontainers a nd other such equipment. 3.9
1. Construction Elevators, Hoists and C ranes: A temporary elevator or material hoist for the new structure will not be provided in this Contract. 2. Hoisting, c hutes o r c onveying equipment s hall be provided a s r equired by t he C ontractor, a nd placement and scheduling of equipment shall be coordinated with the Architect.
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE/FACSIMILE A. Contractor shall p rovide, m aintain, a nd p ay f or secure t elephone w ith v oice m ail s ystem, an d facsimile service t o f ield o ffice at t ime of Project mobilization. M aintain s ystems u ntil tim e f or Substantial Completion. 1. Record long distance telephone calls on job-site log, and pay for by person making the call.
3.10
B. Scaffolding and Platforms: 1. Contractor s hall p rovide a nd maintain scaffolding and platforms. T he p lacement and scheduling of equipment shall be coordinated by the Contractor. C. Temporary Stairs and Ladders: 1. Contractor s hall be r esponsible t o pr ovide a nd maintain all necessary t emporary s tairs an d ladders t o f acilitate co nveyance of workmen, materials, to ols, a nd equipment f or pr oper execution o f th e W ork. A ll protection and safety stair and ladder devices shall be provided as it relates to the s afe co nduct o f w ork i n accordance with O SHA r equirements an d regulations.
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Contractor may connect to e xisting b uilding water source required for construction operations. 1. Owner will pay cost o f w ater u sed. E xercise measures to conserve water. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is av ailable b y h oses w ith t hreaded co nnections. Provide te mporary p ipe in sulation to prevent freezing at areas where required. C. Drinking W ater: P rovide c ontainerized, tapdispenser bottled water type d rinking w ater u nits, including paper supply. 3.11
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
3.14
TEMPORARY BARRIERS
A. Provide temporary barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to c onstruction a reas, to a llow f or Owner’s use of site, and to p rotect e xisting f acilities a nd adjacent properties f rom d amage b y co nstruction operations and demolition.
A. Provide, m aintain an d p ay f or t emporary s anitary facilities, including temporary toilets, w ash facilities and drinking water fixtures.
B. Provide b arricades an d co vered w alkways as required by g overning authorities for public rightof-way and for public access to existing buildings.
B. Comply with regulations and h ealth c odes f or th e type, number, location, o peration and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
C. Provide protection for existing plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
C. Install where facilities will b est serve the project’s needs and as prior approved by the Owner. D. Existing building permanent f acilities m ay not be used during construction operations. 3.12
FIRST AID
A. Contractor s hall p rovide c omplete f irst a id k it and supplies for emergency p urposes, an d h ave a qualified person on staff capable of rendering basic first aid requirements. 3.13
D. Protect n on-owned v ehicular t raffic, stored materials and existing structures from damage. 3.15
BARRICADES
A. Temporary Barricades: C ontractor s hall b e responsible for providing a nd m aintaining a ll necessary temporary b arricades to facilitate proper execution of the Work. A ll protection and s afety barricades, devices, covers, et c. s hall be pr ovided as it relates to the s afe co nduct o f w ork i n accordance with O SHA r equirements an d regulations.
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Elevators, Hoists and Cranes: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
015000 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.16
TEMPORARY FENCES
A. Construction L imits: M inimum six ( 6) f oot hi gh temporary ch ain l ink f ence, n ew or used, commercial g rade, w ith lin e p osts a t 10 foot on center maximum. B. Provide a fence ar ound t he co nstruction s ite t o separate co nstruction o perations f rom s chool an d public functions; e quip w ith ve hicular a nd pedestrian gates with locks. C. Completely r emove f ence an d g ates f rom t he site on the date o f S ubstantial C ompletion, u nless Architect directs otherwise. 3.17
FIELD OFFICES AND STORAGE SHEDS
A. Field O ffices: P rovide, m aintain an d p ay f or a weather-tight f ield o ffice, w ith lig hting, e lectrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and e quipped with sturdy f urniture d rawing r ack and drawing display table. 1. Provide s pace f or p roject m eetings, with table and ch airs t o acco mmodate a m inimum of 10 persons. 2. Locate f ield o ffice a m inimum d istance of 40 feet from existing and new structures. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: I nstall storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate m aterials an d eq uipment involved, including te mporary utility service. S heds may be open s helters o r f ully en closed s paces w ithin the building or elsewhere on the site.
Farmington Elementary School B. Protect site f rom p uddling o r r unning w ater. Provide w ater b arriers as r equired t o p rotect site from soil erosion. 3.21
ACCESS ROADS, PARKING & TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas to withstand construction traffic. K eep roads clear of dust, dirt, mud, snow and other materials. B. Contractor s hall b e r esponsible f or maintaining all site access r oads w ithin th e “ construction lim its”; including al l ar eas t o r eceive hoists and cranes, scaffolds, p latforms, et c. I nclement w eather may require additional grading, fill, r ock b ase, o r o ther measures. 1. Coordinate location of temporary roads, storage areas and parking areas with the Owner. 2. Provide and maintain access t o f ire h ydrants, free of obstructions. 3. Provide m eans o f r emoving m ud from vehicle wheels before entering public streets. C. Provide temporary tr affic c ontrol a t j unction o f temporary r oads w ith pu blic r oads, including warning signs for public traffic and STOP signs at access to public roads. D. Maintain e xisting s idewalks o n school and public property; remove snow as r equired by l ocal ordinance.
A. Any pr oject s ign m ust be pr ior approved by the Owner.
E. Site parking may be utilized at locations as directed by t he O wner t o acco mmodate co nstruction personnel. Public street parking is available, but at no time shall the contractors park along the curb in front o f r esidential lo ts. When school is no t i s session, the bus drive may be used for parking.
B. No o ther s igns a re a llowed o n s ite without the Owner’s permission, except those required by law.
F. When site space is n ot ad equate, C ontractor s hall provide additional off-site parking.
3.18
3.19
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide m ethods, m eans a nd f acilities to prevent contamination o f soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious and t oxic substances and pollutants produced by construction operations. 3.20
SURFACE WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain and maintain excavations free of water. Provide, o perate an d maintain p umping equipment, if necessary.
015000 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
3.22
SNOW REMOVAL
A. Contractor performing w ork under exterior exposed conditions shall be r esponsible f or t he removal o f s now an d i ce f or t he p rotection an d execution o f t heir w ork as d etermined b y t he Owner. 1. The School D istrict will p erform snow and ice removal o f t hose es tablished access r oads as shown on the Site Utilization Plan.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.23
1. Schedule work and construct n oise b arriers s o as n ot t o adversely af fect t he d aily d elivery of school in struction and business operations. Immediate corrective action by the Contractor is required when a complaint i s m ade b y t he building Principal.
EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide t emporary i nsulated w eather-tight c losure of ex terior o penings t o accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for t emporary h eating an d m aintenance o f required a mbient te mperatures id entified in individual specification S ections, a nd to p revent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 3.24
Addition and Remodeling
INTERIOR ENCLOSURES:
A. Provide temporary in terior p artitions a nd c eilings as r equired t o s eparate w ork ar eas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Steel f ramed an d reinforced polyethylene, gypsum boa rd and plywood s heet materials w ith cl osed j oints an d s ealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1. Seal Spaces above ceilings t o prevent construction d ust f rom migrating t o no nconstruction areas. 2. Contractor i s r esponsible t o pr otect an d co ver existing finishes to r emain w ith p oly a nd hardboard where exposed t o c onstruction activities. E xisting m aterials a nd f inishes damaged in construction act ivities ar e t o b e repaired or replaced by the Contractor with new to match existing a t n o e xpense t o t he O wner. Demolition a nd c onstruction p rotection o f existing materials for the duration of the work to include but not limited to: • Protection o f e xisting doors-cover w ith cardboard. • Hollow m etal f rame j ambs-cover w ith cardboard • Carpet-cover i n l ayer o f p olyethylene sheeting and hardboard • Existing painted surfaces to remain. C. Isolate t he co nstruction ar eas f rom the occupied portions of the b uilding. T his is olation m ay include, but is not limited to, the construction, rerouting, capping-off, removal of, and exhausting of all construction contaminants into the occupied portions of the building.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
D. Correct temperature co ntrol p roblems as sociated with o ccupied s paces af fected b y co nstruction actions, such as the removal of an exterior wall, rerouting o r r emoval of he ating o r c ooling s ources. Provide auxiliary heating, cooling, ventilating, and construction of i nsulated b arriers, o r w hatever other act ion i s n ecessary t o co rrect t he deficiency. A f orty-eight ( 48) ho ur r esponse t ime f rom the Owner shall be given to the Contractor in writing to correct such deficiencies af ter w hich t ime t he Owner may choose to take his own corrective action. All associated materials and labor costs for such c orrective a ction will b e th e responsibility of the Contractor. 3.25
SECURITY MEASURES
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft. 1. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 3.26
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Protect t rees an d p lants from damage unless specifically noted to b e r emoved. P rotection shall be placed before any work is started at the site and shall be maintained in good repair until the Work is completed. T rees which are to remain shall not be used f or cr ane s tays, g uy anchors or other fastenings. Do not light fires, store materials, stock pile, pi le de bris, du mp or pou r w aste m aterial or park motorized equipment within 40 feet or within the spread of the branches, whichever is greater, of any tree. B. Protection s hall c onsist o f b oxing, a rmoring o r fencing as described herein and/or as designed on the Drawings: 1. Trees w ith l ow ha nging b ranches s hall be fenced around the outer perimeter of the spread of t he b ranches w ith s tandard f orty eight (48) inch hi gh s now f ence m ounted o n s teel posts spaced at six (6) feet on center. 2. Trees, either individual or in groups, where all branches occur ab ove co nstruction traffic, shall be boxed, using 4 x 4 pos ts ( or e quivalent) six (6) f eet o n cen ter m aximum s et t hree ( 3) feet 015000 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling into the ground and extending five (5) feet high above ground w ith t wo ( 2) - 2 x 6 h orizontal walers and 1 x 6 vertical boards not over six (6) inches apart. F or individual trees the box shall be square in plan, twenty f our ( 24) f eet o n a side, with the tr ee in the c enter. F or groups of trees, set posts n ot over s ix ( 6) f eet apart w ith boxing at l east t welve ( 12) f eet f rom any tree trunk.
Farmington Elementary School
3.27
A. Protect in stalled w ork a nd p rovide special protection w here s pecified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and r emovable pr otection f or installed p roducts. C ontrol a ctivity in immediate work areas to minimize damage. 1. Provide protective c overings a t w alls, projections, j ambs, s ills, c eilings a nd s offits of openings.
3. Where boxing is impractical and so approved by the Architect, or w here s o d esignated, t ree trunks shall be armored b y w rapping w ith burlap and applying vertical 2 x 4 planks spaced not over two (2) inches apart and securely wired in place to at least six (6) feet above ground. C. Shore or brace t rees ad jacent to open excavations to m aintain s oil a round th e r oot s ystem. R epair damage to crowns or root systems immediately by a qualified a nd a pproved t ree s urgeon. Roots exposed or damaged during grading shall be cut off cleanly inside the exposed or damaged area, paint cut s urfaces w ith an ap proved t ree p aint and recover all exposed roots with topsoil. Thoroughly water at ten day i ntervals d uring r emainder o f growing season. D. Replace trees that are s everely i njured o r s hould die because of contract operations, replace it with the same caliper and species. I f a r eplacement i s not a vailable, r eimburse th e Owner in a n a mount equal to $400.00 per caliper inch of diameter of the tree injured or lost. E. Verify with the Architect in the field that all existing trees and plants, to remain within the construction limits, are appropriately marked, identified, and protected. All existing trees to remain will be fenced not closer than fifteen (15) feet from the tree trunk or within the spread of branches, whichever is greater. All trees and other vegetation to be removed, including root crowns; and the root crowns of previously removed trees, will be removed and hauled, including debris to an appropriate approved landfill or burn site. Do not damage existing trees to remain.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
2. Protect finished floors, stairs and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage or movement of heavy o bjects b y p rotecting w ith d urable sheet materials. 3. Prohibit traffic or storage on w aterproofed or roofed s urfaces. I f t raffic o r act ivity is necessary, obtain r ecommendations f or protection from w aterproofing or r oofing material manufacturer. 4. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 3.28
REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities a nd m aterials p rior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove und erground i nstallations t o a minimum depth of two (2) feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and r epair d amage cau sed b y i nstallation o r use of temporary work. D. Restore e xisting facilities used d uring construction to original condition. R estore p ermanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION
F. Verify with the Architect in the field all trees and plants that will be removed, temporarily placed in other areas, then relocated to a new location at a later date. All such trees shall be appropriately marked, identified and protected. Once the trees have been relocated, they shall be protected as outlined in item E. above.
015000 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0122\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. MN/DOT 3733 - Geotextiles
SECTION 015713 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
3. MN/DOT 3876 - Seed
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
4. MN/DOT 3885 - Erosion Control Blankets
SECTION INCLUDES
B. ASTM D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
C. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2009).
B. Provide protection of the environment during the construction of this project to reduce soil erosion and siltation to meet all local, state and federal standards.
D. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
C. Erosion and sediment control; as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein; including, but not limited to, construction of permanent erosion checks and controls, sod, seeding, silt traps, barriers, silt fences, earthen berms, diversion ditches and slope and water course protection.
E. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2008. F. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2004.
D. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.
G. ASTM D 4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002(Reapproved 2009).
E. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities.
H. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; current edition.
F. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. G. Maintain, replace and remove all erosion control devices once vegetation has been established and all areas have been paved. H. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to noncompliance by Contractor. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 024113 - Selective Site Demolition
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all requirements of the City of Farmington for erosion and sedimentation control. B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits.
B. Section 311000 - Site Clearing C. Section 310000 - Earthwork 1.3
REFERENCES A. MN/DOT, Minnesota Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction 2005. Only applicable portions of construction methods and materials apply. References to methods of measurement or payment are not applicable. 1. MN/DOT 3137 - Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
C. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. D. Erosion On-site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. 015713 - 1 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. The Contractor is solely responsible for the cleanup of any rivers, streams, lakes, reservoirs, other water impoundments, ground or roadway surfaces or other property damaged by construction activity related to this project.
E. Erosion Off-site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.
C. Coordinate the placement of temporary turf establishment provisions with the placement of permanent turf establishment. 1.6
3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.
A. The Contractor shall assign one of their field personnel as the designated erosion control inspector. The inspector shall be knowledgeable and experienced in the application of erosion prevention and sediment control BMPs. The inspector shall review the effectiveness of the installed erosion and sediment control devices once every seven days and after each rainstorm event. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to repair breaches and replace deteriorated or missing items.
4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. F. Sedimentation of Waterways On-site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways and sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All inspections and maintenance conducted during construction must be recorded in writing and these records must be retained with the SWPPP in accordance with the permit. Records of each inspection and maintenance activity shall include:
G. Sedimentation of Waterways Off-site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways and storm sewers.
1. Date and time of inspections.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Name of person(s) conducting inspections. 3. Findings of inspections, including recommendations for corrective actions. 4. Corrective actions taken (including dates, times, and party completing maintenance activities).
H. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.
5. Date and amount of all rainfall events greater than 1/2 inch in 24 hours.
I. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.5
6. Documentation of changes made to the SWPPP.
GENERAL A. Exercise every precaution, throughout the life of the project, to prevent the eroding of soil and the silting of rivers, streams, lakes, reservoirs, other water impoundments, ground or roadway surfaces, or other property. Erosion control practices to be used for this project are as indicated on the Drawings and directed by the local governing agency.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
QUALITY CONTROL
C. The Architect/Engineer will make site visits to observe the placement and condition of all temporary and permanent erosion control devices. 1.7
REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with requirements of state, regional, and local erosion and sediment control authorities. 015713 - 2 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1.8
8. Wood Posts - 5' long and a maximum post spacing of 4 feet.
SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
2.2
A. Blankets are machine produced mats consisting of a uniform web of interlocking straw fibers with net backing. The blankets shall be a consistent thickness with the fiber evenly distributed over the entire area of the blanket. The top and bottom sides of each blanket are covered with a polypropylene plastic mesh. The blanket is smolder-resistant without the use of chemical additives. The Blanket shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT 3885 Category 2, Straw 2S. Provide erosion control blankets such as “American Excelsior Company Curlex I” “Contech Standard Excelsior”, “North American Green S-75” or approved equivalent by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for silt fence materials; including fabrics and posts. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete silt fence and erosion control layout, dimensions, and termination details prior to construction. D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SILT FENCE A. Fabric of non-woven plastic fibers of polypropylene or other plastics, with the following requirements. 1. A polyester nylon cord shall be sewn into a seam continuously along the top of the geotextile. Minimum cord diameter shall be 1/8 inch. Each post shall be securely fastened to the geotextile by a minimum of 5 gun staples, 1 inch long.
1. Erosion blankets shall be used at slopes and berms, ditches, and other “hard to hold” problem areas. 2.3
B. The Infrasafe sediment control barrier device consists of a reusable polyethylene product. The barrier and frame set inside of the access opening or hole of the top slab or cone section of the catch basin structure. The polyethylene barrier is manufactured with perforations in its sidewalls and is wrapped in a geotextile fabric to allow storm water runoff to drain into the structure. A larger opening near the top of the barrier allows greater amounts of water into the system during large rainfall events.
3. The geotextile shall be uniform in texture and appearance with no defects, flaws, or tears. 4. It shall contain sufficient ultraviolet ray inhibitor to provide two-year minimum service life from outdoor exposure. B. Silt Fence Standards (minimum):
2. Trapezoid Tear Strength - 60 pounds 3. Mullen Burst Strength - 275 pounds 4. Water Permeability Coefficient (K) 20gal/min/ft2
INFRASAFE SEDIMENT CONTROL BARRIER A. Infrasafe sediment barrier is manufactured by Royal Environmental Systems Inc. Stacy, MN.
2. Wood posts used on preassembled silt fence shall have a sharpened end and shall protrude the bottom of fabric to allow for a minimum of 18-inch embedment.
1. Grab Tensile Strength - 100 pounds
EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
2.4
WIMCO ROAD DRAIN PROTECTION DEVICES A. WIMCO Road Drain protection devices are manufactured by WIMCO Inc. Shakopee, MN. B. Material:
5. U.V. Stability (500 hours) - 70 percent
1. Model # RD23, Road Drain.
6. Grab Tensile Elongation - 10 percent
2. Model # CG23, Curb and Gutter Drain.
7. Fabric Height - 3'-0" when installed
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
015713 - 3 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3. The WIMCO road drain protection device consists of a reusable, open topped receptacle that sets inside the storm sewer grate. An incorporated rear deflector plate is connected to the receptacle directing the water into the basin for filtration.
2.8
A. MN/DOT Spec 3733, Type III. Type III fabric shall be used under Class I and Class II random riprap and rock construction entrance.
4. The filter media shall meet all local specifications for inlet protection. 2.5
B. Minimum grab tensile strength, ASTM D4632, 100 pounds Class III.
SILTSACK
C. Minimum elongation, ASTM D4632 15%.
A. Material:
D. Minimum seam breaking strength, ASTM D4632, 90 pounds Class III.
1. The SILTSACK or approved equal shall be manufactured from woven polypropylene fabric with all seams double stitched using nylon thread. 2. The seams shall have a certified average wide width strength per ASTM D-4884 as follows: a. Style Test Method Test Result b. Regular Flow ASTM D4884 165.0 lbs./in. c. Hi Flow ASTM D4884 114.60 lbs./in.
E. Apparent opening size ASTM D4751, 50 US Std. Sieve size. F. Minimum permittivity falling head ASTM D4491, 0.3. 2.9
2.10 STRAW LOGS (BIOLOGS) A. Straw logs consist of 100-percent straw fibers, free of noxious weeds, and are sewn to a light weight degradable net and densely rolled and bound with an outer high strength polyethylene netting with UV inhabitation. The logs shall be staked into the ground using one(1”)-inch by one(1”)-inch by two (2') foot wood stakes.
C. Substitutions: Under the provisions of Division One Specifications. TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SEED A. For temporary spring/summer cover, a MN/DOT 110 (oats) seed mix applied at a rate of 100 pounds per acre shall be used. For a fall cover, a MN/DOT 100 (winter wheat) seed mix applied at a rate of 100 pounds per acre shall be used. B. For permanent seeding, place a MN/DOT 260 seed mix applied at a rate of 100 pounds per acre. 2.7
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.
ROCK FOR TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. MN/DOT Spec 3137 CA-1 or CA-2 Coarse Aggregate.
STRAW MULCH A. Straw: Dry, rot free small grain cuttings free of seed bearing stalks of noxious grasses and weeds. The mulch shall be in an air-dried condition.
B. Procurement of the devices shall be obtained from ACF Environmental, Inc., 1801-A Willis Road, Richmond, Virginia, 23237, phone number 1-800-644-9223.
2.6
GEOTEXTILE FABRIC UNDER TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
3.3
GENERAL A. Construct and maintain all erosion control measures until the Substantial Completion of the project, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to site preparation.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
015713 - 4 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
C. Install erosion control items as detailed and in locations shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct their operations to minimize the erosion of soils, to prevent siltation, and to minimize the turbidity of storm sewer runoff entering storm sewers, streams, ditches and lakes. E. No work shall be started in the affected area until the applicable erosion control schedules and methods have been accepted by the designated erosion control inspector. F. The Contractor shall install adequate safeguards to minimize water pollution from haul roads, work platforms, temporary earthen fills and any other temporary construction that he uses to facilitate construction. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits form the regulatory agencies or Watershed District for temporary work not shown on the Drawings. 3.4
EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall install sediment traps at existing and proposed catch basins within the construction zone. Sediment traps shall remain in place until turf and pavement surfaces are established. Filter fabric between casting and frame will not be allowed. Contact Architect/Engineer prior to removal.
E. Where erosion is likely to be a problem and where potentials for water pollution exist, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance, their proposed schedules for accomplishment of the effected Work, including any temporary measures proposed. No work shall be started in the affected areas until the applicable erosion control schedules and the Architect/Engineer has accepted the proposed methods of operation. F. The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to limit the surface area of erodible soil that can be exposed to possible erosion at any time, without having the permanent erosion control features completed and operative. G. While operations are in progress and prior to suspension of grading operations for longer than fourteen (14) days, areas of bare soil exposed to erosion possibility shall be shaped to permit storm runoff with minimum erosion. Temporary berms, dikes, slope drains or sedimentation basins will be required where possibilities for water pollution exist and the permanent erosion controls are not completely operative. H. Erosion control devices shall remain in place until other means of permanent control such as turf establishment and paving has taken place.
B. Repair or replace any erosion control devices that have been disrupted during operations as required by local regulation. This work and material shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract and no additional compensation shall be made therefore.
I. Application of erosion control blanket: Where slopes are greater than three (3') feet horizontal to one (1') foot vertical and in areas as indicated on the Drawings, straw fiber blanket (regular type) per MN/DOT Specification Section 3885.2 shall be applied.
C. Silt fence and sediment control devices are to be installed and shall to remain in place until turf has been established. Contact the Architect/Engineer prior to removal.
J. Restoration:
D. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct their operations so as to minimize erosion of soils and to prevent silting and muddying of streams, irrigation systems and impoundments (lakes, reservoirs, etc.). Construction of drainage facilities, turf establishment items and other Contract Work that will contribute to the control of erosion and sedimentation shall be carried out concurrently with earthwork operations or as soon thereafter as practicable.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
1. Control of drainage and erosion shall include restoration work as the Architect/Engineer considers necessary in preventing siltation of public waters. Restoration shall include cleanup, shaping, and replacement of topsoil and establishment of vegetative cover on all disturbed areas where water pollution potentials have been increased due to the Contractor's operations.
015713 - 5 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. The spacing should be approximately ten (10') to twenty-five(25') feet apart depending on the site conditions. A closer spacing shall be used in areas with sandy soils and high storm water runoff areas of with heavy sediment loads. A wider spacing may be used in areas with dense soil, low storm water runoff or areas with light sediment load. Refer to the Drawings for the exact specified spacing.
K. Compensation: 1. All expenses incurred in complying with the provisions hereof and effectively preventing pollution of public waters shall be borne by the Contractor with no direct compensation being made therefore. L. Installation of Silt Fence: 1. Installation shall be as indicated on Drawing detail.
N. Maintenance:
2. Dig or scrape a minimum six (6") inch by six (6") inch trench where fence is to be installed or ensure sufficient fill material is available.
1. When silt fence and/or sediment traps have sedimentation built-up to one-third height, the Contractor is to remove the build-up. The soils are either to be taken off the site or to a location on the site where it can be used (contact the Soils Engineer prior to placement). The relocation and cleanup of sediments is part of the Base Bid Contract.
3. Unroll fence by section along the trench or the predetermined path. Position posts on the downstream side of the fence. 4. Drive posts into undisturbed soil until six (6") inches of fabric is in the trench or lying on ground.
2. The cost of installation, maintenance and removal shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract with no additional compensation granted.
5. Place fill material in the trench or on the fabric flap and tamp. 6. In areas where water build-up other than sheet flow is expected or experienced, provide additional metal or wooden posts between the fence posts for increased support. 7. Silt fence should be installed on the contour and constructed so that flow cannot bypass the ends. 8. If the silt fence is longer than 600 feet, it should be constructed in separate independent units. M. Installation of Straw Logs: 1. The straw logs shall be placed on slopes along the contour, perpendicular to the flow of water to help capture sediment. They may be placed within a channel or ditch along the contour to create mini dams within the ditch of trench. The hay bales should be installed on the contour with the ends flared upslope.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
3.5
WIMCO ROAD DRAIN PROTECTION DEVICES - INSTALLATION A. Remove the grate from the storm sewer casting. B. Clean all edges of the casting frame. C. Place filter media over the filter cartridge and install to unit. D. Insert the receptacle into the casting frame. E. Install casting grate on top of the model making sure the grate is secure for traffic. F. The maximum height change should be 1/8” of the casting cover to frame G. Installation, Maintenance and Removal: 1. The devices shall be sized to fit the catch basin opening and shall be fastened according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The sediment control device shall be removed, emptied and replaced when the level of silt rises above the midpoint.
015713 - 6 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
C. Construct drainage channels to carry water to a sediment trap or other suitable outlet.
3. The sediment control device shall be permanently removed only after permanent surfaces are established and all loose silt on the surface adjacent to the device has been removed. Removal shall be coordinated with the City Erosion Control Officer.
D. Install geotextile fabric under rock to improve the stability of the foundation. E. Maintain the gravel pad in a condition to prevent mud or sediment from leaving the construction site by periodic top dressing with two (2") inch stone.
H. The cost of installation, maintenance and removal shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract with no additional compensation granted. 3.6
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET INSTALLATION A. Properly prepare, fertilize and seed areas to be covered before blanket is applied. When the blanket is unrolled, netting should be on top and fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area.
3.7
F. After each rainfall, inspect any structure used to trap sediment and clean it out as necessary. G. Immediately remove objectionable materials spilled, washed or tracked onto public roadways. 3.8
TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SEEDING A. Seeding:
B. In ditches, apply blankets in the direction the water flows, butting them at the ends and sides and then stapling.
1. For temporary grass cover, apply a MN/DOT 100 seed mix at a rate of 100 pounds per acre for temporary seeding.
C. On slopes, apply blankets vertically to the slope, parallel to the direction of flow, butting ends and sides and then staple.
2. For permanent grass cover, apply a MN/DOT 260 seed mix at a rate of 100 pounds per acre for permanent turf lawns.
D. Use wire staples, ninety-one one-thousandths (0.091") inch in diameter or greater, “U” shaped with legs six (6") inches in length and a one (1") inch crown. Size and gauge of staples used will vary with soil conditions. Drive staples vertically into the ground. Use four (4) staples across at the start of each roll. For slope installation, continue to staple along the length of the roll at six (6') foot intervals. For ditch liner, staple along the length of the roll at four (4') foot intervals. Another row of staples in the center of each blanket should be alternately spaced between each side of either the slope or the ditch. Use a common row of staples on adjoining blankets.
3. The seedbed should be prepared to a depth of approximately 3 inches. In compacted or hard soils, use a disc or ripper to prepare the seedbed by loosening a minimum of the top three inches of soil. The seedbed preparation should not be prepared under excessively wet conditions.
CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Construct a gravel area or pad at points where vehicles enter and leave the construction site. The rock entrance shall be a minimum of 50 feet long. B. Clear the entrance and exit area of all vegetation, roots and other objectionable material and properly grade and place gravel to the grade and dimensions shown on the Plans.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
4. Apply a 24-0-24 fertilizer at the rate of 300 pounds per acre. 5. Seed should be evenly applied with a cyclone seeder, drill or cultipacker seeder at a seeding depth of ½ inch, ensuring good seed to soil contract. 6. The grass area shall be mulched with a MN/DOT 3882 Type 1 mulch at the rate of 2 tons per acre. Once the area is mulched, the mulch shall be disc-anchored into the soil. 7. Slopes that are 3:1 or steeper, the rain garden areas (including bottom) and hard to hold problem areas shall receive erosion control blankets as specified herein.
015713 - 7 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. Provide a temporary cover for erosion control on disturbed areas that will remain unstabilized for a period of more than fourteen (14) days. This practice applies to cleared areas, diversions, dams, temporary sediment basins, temporary road banks and topsoil stockpiles where vegetation is needed for less than one (1) year. C. Provide grass on slopes 5 percent or greater within fourteen (14) days of disturbance. D. Provide water if necessary to aid the establishment of the turf. E. After turf grasses reach a height of 6 inches, initially mow the area to a height of 2 to 3 inches. F. Long term maintenance of the grass area includes fertilizing and watering as needed and mow a minimum of once per every 2 weeks. 3.9
3.11 REMOVAL AND CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect/Engineer. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. 3.12 INSPECTION LOG A. An erosion and sediment control inspection log to aid the Erosion Control Contractor in determining when and what types of erosion control inspections are required is contained on the following page.
INLET PROTECTION A. Install WIMCO, Infrasafe or other approved sediment barrier devices around the storm drain inlets per manufacturer's specification and as detailed within the Drawings. B. Infrasafe sediment barriers shall be surrounded with 3/4-inch minus washed rock to filter the storm water runoff prior to it draining through the weep holes in the barrier device. C. Construct temporary sediment barriers around the storm drain curb inlets using block and gravel silt fence or interior sacks per City and Watershed District standards and specifications. Installation shall be as detailed on drawings. D. Inspect the structure after each rainfall and repair, clean or replace as required. E. Remove sediment when trap reaches one-third (1/3) capacity. F. Remove structure when protected areas have been stabilized.
3.10 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Utilize temporary sediment traps at the bottom of all disturbed slopes where run-off is parallel to the utility trench and draining into an existing ditch or stream, and where slopes are 5 percent or greater along the trench. B. Provide at intervals of seventy-five (75') feet. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
015713 - 8 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
Inspection Requirement (Weekly or within 24 hours of a 1/2 inch rainfall) Date Initials Have the silt fences been inspected and found to be properly installed and functioning? Have temporary and permanent sediment basins been inspected and found to be functioning properly? (drainage and removal of sediment required within 72 hours) Have surface waters (including drainage ditches) been inspected and found to be free of sediment deposited by erosion? (removal of deposits required within 7 days) Have the construction site vehicle exits been inspected and found to be free of off-site sediment tracking? removal required within 24 hours) Have all erosion prevention BMPs been inspected and found to be functioning properly? Examples include mats, mulch, blankets, or other temporary or permanent cover. Have all sediment control BMPs been inspected and found to be functioning properly? Examples include storm drain inlet protection, sediment traps, or drainage swales Has sediment escaped off-site? Have infiltration areas been inspected and found to be free of sediment and compaction due to construction activities? Were repairs needed for any of the above items? If so, provide details of what was done: Was the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) amended to account for changes made?
___/___ _______ YN N/A
___/___ _______ YN N/A
___/___ _______ YN N/A
___/___ _______ YN N/A
___/___ _______ YN N/A
___/___ _______ YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
YN N/A
END OF SECTION EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
015713 - 9 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2. Manufacture lik e p arts o f d uplicate u nits to standard sizes and gauges for interchangeability.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
3. Two or more i tems o f t he s ame k ind s hall b e identical and by the same manufacturer.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
C. Supplementary materials not specifically described in each S ection, b ut r equired f or a complete and proper installation o f the W ork, shall be new, first quality o f th eir respective k inds, an d s ubject to review and acceptance by the Architect.
B. Basic Product Requirements. C. Product Options.
1.4
D. Product Substitution Procedures. E. Owner Furnished Products. F. Product Transportation & Handling Requirements. G. Product Storage & Protection Requirements. H. Repair/Replacement of Damaged Work. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 004325 – Substitution Request Form. B. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). C. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 014500 assurance.
- Quality C ontrol: Q
uality
F. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements. G. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. H. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. I. Division 2 3 - Mechanical: T esting, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.3
GENERAL A. Material an d E quipment I ncorporated i nto t he Work: 1. Conform to standards.
applicable s
pecification an
d
2. Comply with s ize, make, t ype, an d q uality specified. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\016000CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS A. Products: are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, w hether p urchased f or t he P roject o r taken f rom p reviously p urchased s tock. The term “product” i ncludes t he terms m aterial, e quipment, system and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: are ite ms id entified by manufacturer’s product name, i ncluding make o r model d esignation, in dicated in th e manufacturer’s published product lite rature, th at is c urrent a s o f th e d ate o f t he C ontract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have no t p reviously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Materials: are p roducts t hat ar e s ubstantially shaped, cut, worked, m ixed, f inished, r efined o r otherwise fabricated, processed or installed to form a part of the Work. C. Equipment: is a p roduct w ith operational parts, whether motorized or m anually o perated, t hat requires service connections s uch as w iring or piping. D. Substitutions: Requests for changes in p roducts, materials, e quipment, a nd methods o f construction required by C ontract D ocuments pr oposed by t he Contractor during the bidding period or after award of the Contract are considered requests for “substitutions”. T he following a re n ot considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to C ontract D ocuments r equested b y the Owner or Architect. 2. Specified opt ions of pr oducts a nd c onstruction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. The C ontractor’s d etermination to c omply w ith governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 016000 - 1 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.5
Farmington Elementary School B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as s pecifically p ermitted by the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Include w ithin th e C ontractor's q uality a ssurance program such p rocedures as ar e r equired to assure full protection of materials and Work. B. Source Limitations: P rovide p roducts o f the same kind, from a single source, to th e f ullest e xtent possible.
C. Provide interchangeable components from the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.7
A. Products Specified by R eference S tandards o r b y Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.
C. Compatibility of Options: W hen the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on t he P roject, t he pr oduct selected s hall be compatible w ith p roducts previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
B. Products Specified by N aming O ne o r Mo re Manufacturers: P roducts o f manufacturers named and meeting specifications, n o o ptions o r substitutions allowed.
D. Nameplates: E xcept f or r equired labels and operating data, d o n ot a ttach o r im print manufacturer’s o r p roducer’s n ameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products, which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces, or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required p roduct l abels an d stamps on a co ncealed surface, or where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate o n each i tem o f s ervice-connected o r power-operated eq uipment. L ocate o n an easily accessible s urface, w hich i s i nconspicuous i n occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and o ther e ssential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial numbers. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. E. Prior to r equesting f inal te sting, adjusting and balancing, u se ad equate m eans t o as sure t hat t he Work is c ompleted in accordance with t he specified requirements and is ready for the requested testing, adjusting and balancing. 1.6
BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Products: Shall be “ new p roducts” u nless s tated otherwise in the Contract Documents. P roducts do not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.
016000 - 2 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
PRODUCT OPTIONS
C. Products Specified by N aming O ne o r Mo re Manufacturers W ith a P rovision f or S ubstitutions: Submit a r equest f or s ubstitution f or any manufacturer not named. 1.8
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitution Procedures During Bidding: 1. Comply w ith s ubstitution r equirements indicated in th e I nstructions to B idders ( AIA Document A701). 2. The aesthetics of t he pr oposed pr oduct substitutions exposed to v iew in th e c ompleted Work shall be a “salient feature” of the Architects review. Therefore, the Architect reserves the right to reject products that, in the opinion of the Architect, d o n ot m eet t he P roject aes thetic requirements. 3. Substitutions m ay b e c onsidered w hen allowed under the Contract Documents or when a product becomes una vailable t hrough no f ault o f the Contractor. 4. Document each r equest w ith co mplete d ata substantiating compliance of pr oposed Substitution with Contract Documents. 5. A substitution request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: a. Has investigated proposed product and determined that i t m eets o r ex ceeds t he quality level of the specified product. b. Will provide th e s ame w arranty f or th e Substitution as for the specified product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\016000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
c. Will coordinate installation a nd m ake changes to other W ork, w hich m ay b e required for the Work t o be c omplete w ith no additional cost to Owner.
11. Failure to place orders for specified equipment or material s ufficiently i n ad vance o f t he scheduled installation date will not b e c onsidered a v alid reason u pon w hich t he C ontractor may base his request for substitutions or for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications.
d. Waives claims for a dditional c osts o r tim e extension which may s ubsequently b ecome apparent.
12. Products lis ted “ No S ubstitutions A llowed” w ill not be c onsidered f or s ubstitution by t he Architect.
6. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without p rior w ritten a pproval from the Architect, or w hen accep tance w ill require revision to the Contract Documents.
B. Substitution Procedures During Construction: 1. Substitution p rocedures d uring c onstruction s hall be the same as d uring b idding ex cept t hat substitutions shall only be allowed when a product becomes una vailable t hrough no f ault o f the Contractor.
7. Substitution Submittal Procedure: a. All substitutions shall b e s ubmitted o n a completed A rchitect ap proved f orm, Document 004325 - Substitution Request Form. b. Submit three ( 3) c opies of r equest f or Substitution f or c onsideration. L imit e ach request to one proposed Substitution. c. Substitution r equests s hall in clude th e name of the materials or equipment for which it is being substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution.
1.9
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products f urnished b y t he O wner t o t he site and paid for by the Owner are: 1. Interactive White Boards. 2. Soap and Towel Dispensers. B. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for an d d eliver O wner r eviewed s hop drawings, product data and s amples t o t he Contractor.
d. Submit shop drawings, pr oduct da ta, a nd certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site.
1) Samples: I f r equested b y t he A rchitect, submit samples as indicated in the specification section o r i n a m anner as directed by the Architect. e. Provide additional in formation w hen directed by the Architect and as required by the Contract Documents. f. The A rchitect w ill n otify Contractor, in writing, of decision t o accep t o r r eject request.
3. Upon delivery to the site, inspect products jointly with the Contractor. 4. Submit c laims f or tr ansportation d amage, a nd replace damaged, defective or deficient products. 5. Arrange for m anufacturer’s w inspections and service. C. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner furnished s hop drawings, product data and samples.
8. The burden of proof of the merits of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 9. The Architect at t he C ontractor’s ex pense m ay require testing of a proposed substitute material to assure compliance with the Specifications. W hen so directed, submit samples for acceptance. 10. Equipment, material and articles installed or used without required acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\016000CGA.doc
arranties,
2. Receive an d u nload p roducts at s ite; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, protect, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items or products damaged after receipt. 1.10
PRODUCT TRANSPORTATION HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
AND
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 016000 - 3 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Before making a shipment of materials t o t he Project s ite, Contractor s hall ascertain that the project site is in a c ondition to r eceive t he shipment.
2. Materials exhibiting shelf lives in excess of those stipulated by the manufacturer. 3. Materials n ot b earing t he ap propriate label of Underwriters L aboratories ( UL), where applicable.
1. If m aterials ar e d elivered t o t he P roject s ite and the site is not in condition to receive the materials, the materials s hall be r emoved f rom the s ite and properly s tored o ffsite at t he ex pense o f t he Contractor or his Subcontractor. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply w ith r equirements, q uantities ar e co rrect, and products are undamaged. D. Provide e quipment a nd pe rsonnel t o handle products by m ethods t o prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. E. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules and in a mple tim e to facilitate inspection prior to installation. F. Coordinate deliveries to a void c onflict w ith w ork and conditions at site, taking into consideration: 1. Work of the Contractor or Owner. 2. Limitations of Storage Space 3. Availability o f e quipment a nd personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. G. Deliver products in undamaged condition in original containers or p ackaging, a nd w ith identifying labels intact and legible. H. Partial deliveries of component parts of equipment shall be c learly marked to id entify the equipment, to p ermit eas y accu mulation o f p arts, an d t o facilitate assembly. I. Immediately o n d elivery, in spect s hipment to ensure: 1. Product c omplies w ith r equirements o f Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. 4. Products are undamaged and properly protected. J. The Architect reserves the right to observe delivered materials, to r eview t he acco mpanying bills of lading, and to reject the following: 1. Materials not identifiable as accepted products of the accepted manufacturer. 016000 - 4 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
4. Materials in opened o r ex cessively d amaged containers. 5. Materials exhibiting evidence of moisture, organic matter, or other adulterants. K. In the event of damage or rejection by the Architect for stipulated cause, immediately make repairs and replacements n ecessary t o t he accep tance o f the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11
PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Store an d p rotect p roducts i n acco rdance with manufacturer's w ritten in structions, w ith seals an d labels intact a nd legible. S tore s ensitive p roducts in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For ex terior s torage o f f abricated p roducts, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide of f-site s torage a nd p rotection w hen s ite does n ot permit o n-site s torage o r protection. Provide Architect with complete in ventory o f a ll off-site stored items, and provide certificate of insurance for all stored items. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to p revent s oiling, d isfigurement o r damage. G. Arrange s torage o f p roducts t o p ermit acces s for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.12
REPAIR/REPLACEMENT PRODUCTS
OF
DAMAGED
A. Protection of products shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace any p roducts d amaged b y t he el ements o r b y an y subsequent construction operation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\016000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School B. The decision on w hether a d amaged product i s t o be repaired or replaced is b e b ased o n t he requirement th at A LL p roducts s hall m eet the requirements specified for the W ork as co vered in the applicable sections of the Contract Documents; i.e., i f a d amaged p roduct can not b e repaired so that it matches new, undamaged, products, then i t must be replaced.
Addition and Remodeling B. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure f reedom from damage an d d eterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
C. In REFINISHING re paired o r re placed products, refinish entire surfaces, as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION A. General P roduct R equirements: P rovide p roducts that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products co mplete w ith al l acces sories, trim, f inish, s afety g uards an d o ther d evices and details needed for a co mplete installation and for the intended use and effect. B. Standard P roducts: Provide s tandard pr oducts of types t hat h ave b een p roduced an d u sed successfully in s imilar s ituations o n o ther projects and f ully c omply w ith a ll r equirements o f th e Contract Documents. C. Visual Selection: W here s pecified p roduct requirements i nclude the phrase “as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, p atterns, t extures“ or a s imilar p hrase, s elect a p roduct an d manufacturer t hat co mply w ith o ther s pecified requirements. The A rchitect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. D. Allowances: Refer to in dividual S pecification Sections a nd “ Allowances” pr ovisions f or c ontrol product selection, a nd for pr ocedures r equired for processing such selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply w ith m anufacturer’s instructions a nd recommendations for installation of products in the applications i ndicated. A nchor each product securely in p lace, accu rately l ocated an d al igned with other Work.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\016000CGA.doc
016000 - 5 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017123 - FIELD ENGINEERING 3. Submit certified surveys a nd s urvey l ogs a s for the project record.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Basic R equirements f or D etermining C onditions and Preparing to Install, Erect or Apply Products. 1. Layout of the Work. 2. Field Engineering. 1.2
C. Submit e vidence o f L and S urveyor’s E & O insurance coverage in the f orm o f an I nsurance Certificate. 1.5
A. For f ield e ngineering or s urvey w ork e mploy a Land S urveyor or Professional E ngineer of t he discipline r equired f or s pecific s ervice o n project legally qualified to p ractice in Minnesota, a nd acceptable to the Architect.
RELATED SECTIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel w ho a re t horoughly trained and experienced i n o peration an d m aintenance o f t he described ite ms, c ompletely f amiliar w ith the requirements of th is S ection, a nd s killed in technical w riting to th e e xtent n eeded for communicating the essential data. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Survey W ork: S ubmit n ame, ad dress, telephone number and license or registration number of Land Surveyor or Engineer before s tarting a ny s urvey work. 1. On request by th e A rchitect, s ubmit documentation v erifying accu racy o f survey work. 2. Submit a co py o f s ite d rawing an d certificate signed b y t he Land S urveyor or Engineer that the elevations a nd locations o f the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. Field Engineering
S:\11\0122\frontend\017123CGA.doc
QUALIFICATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, a nd o ther construction indicated as ex isting ar e n ot g uaranteed. B efore beginning work, investigate a nd ve rify t he existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems, points of connection of utility services and other construction affecting the Work. 3.2
LAYOUT OF THE WORK
A. All la yout o f th e W ork w ill be provided by the Contractor as a part of the Work. B. The C ontractor s hall b e r esponsible for the accuracy w ith r espect t o l ayout o f its Work. Immediately report any p erceived d iscrepancies o r errors in the Contract Documents, o r the Work to the Architect. Mak e ad justments i n accordance with instructions given by the Architect. C. Verification: B efore p roceeding to la y o ut th e Work, ve rify l ayout information s hown o n Drawings, in relation to t he p roperty s urvey a nd existing benchmarks. I f d iscrepancies ar e discovered, notify Architect promptly. D. Verify lo cations o f s urvey control poi nts pr ior t o starting work. 017123 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
E. Locate and protect s urvey co ntrol an d reference points. F. 3.3
deliver t o t he C ontractor's Record Documents Recorder current, " as-built" d ata o f th e w ork, for in clusion in to th e P roject R ecord Documents. C learly i ndicate differences between o riginal d rawings and co mpleted work within specified tolerances.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Survey Reference Points:
2. Show a s-built lo cations b y c oordinates of utilities o n-site w ith to p o f p ipe e levations a t major grade and alignment changes.
1. Existing basic h orizontal a nd v ertical c ontrol points for t he P roject ar e t hose d esignated o n the Drawings. 2. Locate a nd pr otect c ontrol points prior to starting s ite w ork, an d p reserve p ermanent reference p oints d uring c onstruction. Identify and protect s urvey m onuments o n t he s ite discovered d uring c onstruction, w hich are not referenced o n t he p roject D rawings. T ie o ut such m onuments a nd no tify A rchitect p rior to allowing them to be disturbed. 3. Replace permanent boundary markers disturbed during construction with ne w p ermanent monuments and file the r equired R ecord of Survey or Corner Record i n acco rdance w ith applicable State and County laws, at no addition cost to the Owner. B. Maintain a co mplete, accu rate l og o f co ntrol an d survey work as it progresses. Submit one (1) copy to th e A rchitect o n a w eekly basis, with proper identification, including copies of all cut sheets and field notes. C. Prior to th e f irst A pplication f or P ayment, s ubmit name and address o f L icensed S urveyor o r C ivil Engineer to A rchitect, i ncluding c hanges a s t hey may occur. Obtain approval of any changes from the Architect. D. Upon request of the Architect, submit: 1. Data d emonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be e ngaged f or f ield e ngineering services. 2. Documentation t o v erify accu racy o f t he field engineering Work. 3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, c ertifying in w riting th at elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance o r n on-conformance w ith requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Clearly lo cate f inal lo cations o f p lumbing a nd electrical l ines w hich ar e o nly s hown o n the drawings in a diagrammatic way. 4. Completed as -built transparencies shall b e signed an d cer tified as co rrect b y t he l icensed Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer. 5. Furnish any r equired E ngineering S urvey information f or a ll u tility e asements f or a ny required document recording. ********************************************** Use Paragraphs below only if required by the Owner ********************************************** F.
[Certified Survey: O n c ompletion o f f oundation walls, major site im provements, a nd o ther w ork requiring f ield-engineering s ervices, p repare a certified survey showing d imensions, lo cations, angles, a nd e levations o f c onstruction a nd sitework.]
G. [Final Property Survey: P repare a f inal p roperty survey showing significant f eatures ( real p roperty) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed b y [ land surveyor] [ professional engineer], that principal metes, b ounds, lines, a nd levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.] 3.4
PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect work and provide special protection where required o r s pecified in in dividual s pecification sections. B. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent disruption of field survey work.
END OF SECTION
E. Project Record Drawings (Section 017839 - Project Record Documents) further requirements: 1. At the appropriate tim es d uring th e P roject, Licensed S urveyor or C ivil E ngineer s hall 017123 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Field Engineering
S:\11\0122\frontend\017123CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Basic R equirements f or D etermining C onditions and Preparing to Install, Erect or Apply Products.
C. Structural E lements: W here c utting a nd patching involve adding reinforcement t o s tructural elements, submit details and engineering calculations s howing in tegration o f r einforcement with original structure. D. Architect's Approval: O btain a pproval o f cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval d oes n ot w aive r ight to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1. Cutting and Patching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. Protection of Installed Work. 1.2
2.1
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017423 - Cleaning.
PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New M aterials: A s s pecified in p roduct sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. If s pecified m aterials ar e n o longer available, submit substitution p roposal to th e A rchitect f or approval. Propose materials similar to existing and that match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. F.
Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
G. Individual S pecification S ections: Specific requirements for contract closeout, product warranties and project maintenance data. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel w ho a re t horoughly trained and experienced i n o peration an d m aintenance o f t he described ite ms, c ompletely f amiliar w ith the requirements of t his S ection, a nd s killed in technical w riting to th e e xtent n eeded for communicating the essential data. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with th e s pecified r equirements and t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing p rocedures t hat w ill be performed. Include t he f ollowing i nformation: T he e xtent of the w ork, c hanges t o existing construction, products to be used, dates work will be performed, and utilities that will be affected. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\017300CGA.doc
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection will b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, a nd o ther construction indicated as ex isting ar e n ot g uaranteed. B efore beginning work, investigate a nd ve rify t he existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems, points of connection of utility services and other construction affecting the Work. 3.2
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Structural W ork R equirements: D o no t c ut a nd patch s tructural el ements i n a m anner t hat would reduce t heir l oad-carrying cap acity o r l oaddeflection ratio. B. Operational a nd S afety L imitations: D o n ot c ut and p atch o perating el ements o r safety related components i n a m anner t hat would result in reducing their capacity to perform as i ntended, or result i n i ncreased m aintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 017300 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling C. Visual Requirements: D o n ot c ut a nd p atch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a m anner that would, in the Architect’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities, or result i n vi sual e vidence o f c utting a nd patching. Remove and replace Work cu t an d p atched i n a visually unsatisfactory manner. D. Each trade will be responsible for cutting and patching required for their portion of the Work. E. Submit written request to Architect a minimum of forty-eight ( 48) ho urs i n a dvance o f c utting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of the Project. 2. Integrity o f w eather-exposed or m oisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, m aintenance o r s afety o f an y operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. F.
Execute cutting, f itting and patching, i ncluding excavation and backfill, to complete Work, and to:
1. Fit the several parts together, to in tegrate w ith o ther Work. 2. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. 3. Remove an d r eplace d efective an d non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. G. Inspect existing c onditions, in cluding e lements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. H. After uncovering, i nspect c onditions a ffecting performance of Work. I.
Beginning of cutting and patching means acceptance o f ex isting co nditions af fecting performance of the Work.
J.
Provide supports to a ssure s tructural in tegrity o f surroundings; and devices and m ethods t o pr otect other portions of Project from damage.
K. Provide p rotection f rom el ements f or ar eas which may b e e xposed b y unc overing W ork; maintain excavations free of water.
017300 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School L. Execute Work by m ethods t o a void da mage t o other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. M. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not a llowed w ithout p rior written approval. N. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. O. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. P. At penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings or floor construction, completely seal voids with firerated materials, full th ickness o f th e c onstruction element. 3.3
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect in stalled w ork a nd provide s pecial protection w here s pecified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and r emovable pr otection f or installed p roducts. C ontrol a ctivity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs an d o ther s urfaces from t raffic, d irt, w ear, d amage o r movement of heavy objects, by p rotecting w ith d urable s heet materials. E. Prohibit t raffic or s torage u pon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. I f t raffic o r act ivity i s n ecessary, obtain r ecommendations f or pr otection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. 3.4
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. REPAIR/REPLACEMENT WORK
OF
DAMAGED
A. Protection o f f inished w ork s hall n ot r elieve t he Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace any w ork d amaged b y t he el ements o r by any subsequent construction operation. B. Repair or r emove an d r eplace d efective an d damaged Work. C. Comply with requirements for cutting and patching. D. The decision on whether damaged w ork i s t o b e repaired or replaced i s t o b e b ased o n t he requirement that ALL finished work shall meet the requirements specified for the W ork as co vered in the applicable sections of the Contract Documents; EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\017300CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
i.e., i f d amaged work cannot b e r epaired so that it matches ne w, und amaged, w ork, t hen it must be replaced. E. In R EFINISHING re paired o r re placed work, refinish entire surfaces, as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For c ontinuous s urfaces intersection.
- refinish t o n earest
2. For an assembly - refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\017300CGA.doc
017300 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017400 - CLEANING 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. The A rchitect r eserves th e r ight to w ithhold certification o f p ayment r equests for failure on the part of the Contractor to regularly clean the Project in conformance with the R equirements o f t his Section.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Cleaning for Single Prime contracts 1. Quality Assurance.
2.1
2. Daily Clean-Up. 4. Final Cleaning. 5. Cleaning During Owner's Occupancy.
B. Subcontractors shall be r esponsible f or de positing their rubbish in t he c ontainers. I t s hall b e th e responsibility o f Subcontractors generating b ulky materials ( e.i.; cr ates, car tons, d uctwork, et c.) t o break th ese m aterials d own to m inimum v olume before depositing them in the trash containers. Segregate materials in acco rdance w ith t he requirements of the trash container service. I n the event that any Subcontractor fails to segregate their materials in accordance w ith t hose r equirements, then th e a dditional c ost o f th e n on-segregated containers w ill b e b ack-charged to t hat Subcontractor.
C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: In addition to standards s pecified h erein, co mply w ith requirements for cleaning up as d escribed in o ther sections of these Specifications. RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Document 007340 - Special Project Requirements.
C. Disposal of waste materials not permitted in trash containers, s uch as t ires, p aints, et c., shall be performed by the Subcontractor responsible for that waste an d s hall b e d one i n accordance with the applicable laws and regulations o f t he r egulatory agency having jurisdiction.
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 017419 Management:
-
Construction W
aste
F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. G. Individual S pecification S ections: requirements for cleaning and adjusting. 1.3
Specific
D. The burning o f r efuge o n t he s ite s hall no t b e permitted. E. Protruding na ils o r s crews i n b oards, planks, timbers, et c. s hall b e r emoved, h ammered i n or bent over flush.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: C ontractor s hall conduct daily inspections, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met. B. Codes and Standards: I n a ddition t o t he requirements specified herein, C ontractor s hall comply w ith p ertinent r equirements o f authorities having jurisdiction. C. Contractor shall use only a p rofessional cl eaning company experienced in co mmercial cl eaning f or final cleaning.
CLEANING
S:\11\0122\frontend\017400CGA.doc
TRASH CONTAINERS A. Contractor shall provide a trash container service to remove rubbish f rom th e s ite a t n o c ost to th e Subcontractors. The locations of th e tr ash containers will be determined by the Contractor.
3. Progress Cleaning.
1.2
PAYMENT WITHHELD
2.2
CLEANING UP A. All t rades, ev en t he s o cal led “ clean t rades”, contribute t o t he a ccumulation o f debris through the us e o f d rinking c ups, l unch w rappers, d irt or mud tracked into the Work site etc. T herefore, all trades will be required to participate in the clean-up procedures.
017400 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
2.3
Farmington Elementary School 2. Inspect storage ar rangement o f materials stored at site weekly, and more often if necessary. Restack, t idy o r o therwise service ar rangement to meet the requirements specified above.
CLEANING MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall pr ovide r equired pe rsonnel, equipment and materials n eeded t o m aintain t he specified standard of cleanliness.
2.4
3. Maintain the site in a n condition.
COMPATIBILITY A. Contractor shall use cl eaning m aterials an d equipment which are compatible with the surfaces being cleaned, as r ecommended b y t he manufacturer of the material to be cleaned.
C. Structures: 1. [Contractors] [Subcontractors] shall inspect th e structures and pickup weekly, and more often if necessary, scrap, debris an d w aste m aterial. Remove items t o the place designated for their storage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Sweep i nterior s paces cl ean w eekly, an d m ore often if necessary.
DAILY CLEANUP
a. "Clean", for t he pu rpose of t his subparagraph, m eans f ree f rom d ust a nd other material cap able o f b eing removed by use of reasonable ef fort an d a h andheld broom, i.e., "broom clean".
A. General: Clean work ar eas d aily, i ncluding common areas. Coordinate p rogress cl eaning f or joint-use ar eas w here m ore t han o ne i nstaller has worked. E nforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 3.2
3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, Subcontractors shall clean the structures of pertinent portions thereof to the degree o f cl eanliness r ecommended by the manufacturer of t he s ucceeding m aterial, u sing equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.
PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Subcontractors shall r etain s tored ite ms in a n orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not i mpeding d rainage o r t raffic, a nd p roviding the required protection of materials.
4. Following th e in stallation o f finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily, and more often i f n ecessary, an d w hile w ork i s being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed.
2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material and other items not r equired for construction of this work. 3. Weekly, and more o ften i f n ecessary, r emove scrap, d ebris an d w aste m aterial f rom t he j ob site.
a. "Clean", for t he pu rpose of t his subparagraph, means free from foreign material w hich, in th e o pinion o f the Architect, may be injurious to the f inish floor material, i.e., "vacuum clean".
4. Provide adequate storage for items awaiting removal from t he j ob s ite, o bserving requirements f or f ire p rotection a nd protection of the ecology. B. Site: 1. Inspect th e s ite d aily, a nd m ore o ften if necessary, an d p ick u p al l s crap, d ebris an d waste m aterial. R emove i tems to the place designated f or th eir s torage. C omply w ith requirements in N FPA 241 f or r emoval of combustible waste materials and debris from the site. S tore f lammable w aste i n s ealed m etal containers until removed from the site.
017400 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
eat an d o rderly
3.3
FINAL CLEANING A. Final cleaning o f t he p roject, s ite an d s tructure, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Definition: Except a s o therwise s pecifically provided, "clean", for the pu rpose of t he A rticle, means t he l evel o f cl eanliness generally provided by s killed c leaners u sing c ommercial q uality building maintenance equipment and materials, i.e., "scrub and polish clean".
CLEANING
S:\11\0122\frontend\017400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School C. General: Remove from the job site all tools, surplus m aterials, e quipment, scrap, de bris, a nd waste prior to completion of Work. Conduct final progress cleaning as described above. D. Site: Water and b room cl ean p aved ar eas o n t he site and public paved areas directly adjacent to the site, unless otherwise d irected b y th e A rchitect. Remove resultant debris. E. Structures: 1. Exterior: V isually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces o f soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by the Work o f t his C ontract. R emove t races of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. H ose down the exterior of the structure if necessary to achieve a u niform d egree o f exterior cleanliness. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require other cleaning at n o a dditional c ost to th e Owner.
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
CLEANING OCCUPANCY
DURING
OWNER’S
A. Should the Owner occupy the work or any portion thereof prior to its c ompletion b y th e C ontractor and accep tance b y t he O wner, r esponsibilities for interim a nd f inal cl eaning o f t he o ccupied s paces shall be the responsibility of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
2. Interior: V isually in spect in terior s urfaces and remove traces o f soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by the Work o f t his C ontract. R emove t races of splashed m aterials from ad jacent surfaces. Remove pa int dr ippings, s pots, stains, a nd d irt from finished surfaces. U se o nly t he cl eaning materials and equipment in structed b y th e manufacturer of the surface material. 3. Glass: Clean glass inside and outside. 4. Polished Surfaces: O n s urfaces r equiring t he routine a pplication of bu ffed pol ish, a pply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. G lossy s urfaces s hall be cleaned an d s hined as i ntended b y t he manufacturer. 5. Carpet: Use only dry-chemical method for cleaning carpeting. S team cl eaning o r w ater based cl eaning s hall n ot b e u sed o n car peting. Use only dr y-chemical m aterials an d m ethods fully ap proved b y t he car pet manufacturer, as instructed in t he m anufacturer's p ublished literature. F. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as accepted by the Architect to enable t he O wner t o accep t a completely clean project.
CLEANING
S:\11\0122\frontend\017400CGA.doc
017400 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017500 - STARTING AND ADJUSTING G. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer t o provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to s tart-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
H. Submit a written r eport to th e Engineer/Architect in accordance w ith t he r elevant S ection t hat equipment o r s ystem h as b een p roperly i nstalled and is functioning correctly.
B. Initial C heckout a nd S tart-Up Procedures, an d Initial A djusting t o e nsure S afe O peration During Acceptance Testing and Commissioning. 1. Start-Up Procedures.
1.4
A. Perform initial adjusting o f a ll e quipment a nd systems prior to the date of start-up.
2. Initial Adjusting. 3. Final Adjusting. 1.2
1. Verify w ith D ivisions 2 1-28 - Mechanical, f or all items requiring adjustment.
RELATED SECTIONS
B. Adjust all movable parts of equipment and systems to insure smooth and unhindered operation.
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 017823 Operations and Maintenance Data. D. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training. F. Divisions 2 1-28 - Mechanical: Sections related to start-up and adjusting of systems. 1.3
INITIAL ADJUSTING
1.5
FINAL ADJUSTING A. Perform f inal ad justing o f a ll e quipment a nd systems prior to the date of Substantial Completion. 1. Verify w ith D ivisions 2 1-28 - Mechanical, f or all items requiring adjustment. B. Adjust all movable parts of equipment and systems to insure smooth and unhindered operation.
START-UP PROCEDURES A. Coordinate s chedule f or s tart-up of va rious equipment and systems. B. Notify in w riting th e Architect and Owner a minimum of seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item of equipment or system. C. Verify that each p iece o f eq uipment o r system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt te nsion, c ontrol s equence o r o ther c onditions which may cause damage or malfunction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
D. Verify that tests, m eter r eadings an d s pecified electrical ch aracteristics ag ree w ith t hose required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring a nd s upport c omponents f or equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute s tart-up pr ocedures u nder s upervision of responsible [manufacturer’s r epresentative] [Contractor’s p ersonnel] in acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s instructions. STARTING AND ADJUSTING
S:\11\0122\frontend\017500CGA.doc
017500 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Administrative Procedures f or S ubstantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. 1. Contract Closeout Procedures. 2. Substantial Completion. a. Final Project Review and Acceptance. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017123 – Field Engineering. E. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements F.
Section 017423 - Cleaning.
G. Section 017500 - Starting and Adjusting. H. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. I. J.
Section 017823 Data.
- Operations an d Mai ntenance
Section 017836- Warranties and Bonds.
K. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. L. Individual S pecification S ections: requirements for contract closeout. 1.3
Specific
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prior to requesting inspection by the Architect, use adequate m eans t o as sure t hat t he Work is completed in acco rdance w ith t he s pecified requirements an d i s r eady f or t he r equested inspection. B. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel w ho a re t horoughly trained and experienced i n o peration an d m aintenance o f t he described ite ms, c ompletely f amiliar w ith the requirements of th is S ection, a nd s killed in technical w riting to th e e xtent n eeded for communicating the essential data. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
S:\11\0122\frontend\017700CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS
A. Contract Date: The Contract Date is the day established by the A greement, t he S pecial Conditions, an d t he N otice t o Proceed as the calendar date by which all Work must be completed i n acco rdance w ith t he C ontract Documents. O nce es tablished, t he C ontract D ate can only be adjusted by Change Order. If Work is not co mplete i n acco rdance w ith t he Contract Documents b y t he C ontract D ate, C ontractor i s obligated to pay liquidated damages to the Owner. B. Substantial C ompletion: T he D ate o f S ubstantial Completion is the d ate c ertified b y th e A rchitect upon which construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, that the Owner h as p rovided w ritten accep tance o f the portions of the Work o ver w hich t hey ha ve jurisdiction, and a C ertificate of Occupancy is issued. C. Final A cceptance: T he A rchitect will accept completion of the C ontract a fter th e e ntire W ork has b een co mpleted t o t he satisfaction of the Architect an d af ter i ssuance o f t he C ertificate o f Substantial Completion. Acceptance of the Project by the Architect establishes the formal and official Completion D ate f or t he P roject, t o b e co mpared against the Contract Date. Completion Date must occur prior to Contract Date to preclude assessment of Liquidated Damages. 1.5
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting inspection for certification o f S ubstantial Completion, complete th e f ollowing ( List exceptions in the request): 1. In the A pplication f or P ayment th at c oincides with, or first follows, th e d ate S ubstantial Completion i s c laimed, s howing 100% completion for the portion of the Work claimed as s ubstantially c omplete. I nclude supporting documentation f or c ompletion a s in dicated in these C ontract D ocuments an d a statement showing a n a ccounting o f c hanges to the Contract Sum. a. If 100% c ompletion cannot b e s hown, include a list o f incomplete ite ms, the value of incomplete construction, an d reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of p ending i nsurance c hangeover requirements. 017700 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 3. Obtain and s ubmit r eleases p ermitting th e Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to s ervices a nd u tilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates a nd s imilar releases. 4. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit k eys to th e O wner. A dvise th e Owner’s p ersonnel o f c hange-over i n s ecurity provisions. 5. Complete s tart-up t esting o f s ystems, a nd instruction o f the O wner’s operating and maintenance personnel. 6. Discontinue o r c hange-over and r emove temporary f acilities f rom th e s ite, a long with construction to ols, m ock-ups and s imilar elements. B. Contractor shall p repare a co mprehensive an d complete list of corrective items for himself and his subcontractors, and verify t hat t hese i tems h ave been corrected prior to n otifying th e A rchitect o f completion. C opies of the Contractor's list(s) shall be available to the Architect upon request. 1.6
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Submit w ritten c ertification to th e A rchitect th at Contract D ocuments h ave b een reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work, in the opinion of the Contractor, is 100% complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. Architect s hall t hen co mmence t he construction review and prepare a " Punch List", or list of minor corrective items to b e is sued to Contractor. F or co nvenience, reviews may b e phased f or v arious por tions o f t he W ork, as each distinct por tion be comes on e h undred pe rcent (100%) complete. B. Architect will arrange for E ngineering C onsultants to make their construction reviews, to be complete before A rchitect w ill m ake a co nstruction r eview. Contractor an d his p rincipal s uperintendent, authorized t o act i n b e h alf o f t he Contractor, as well a s principal s ubcontractors th at th e A rchitect may request to be p resent, s hall acco mpany t he Architect/Engineers d uring t he c onstruction reviews. C. Excessive amounts o f c orrective ( "punch lis t") items, as judged by the Architect, shall be grounds to terminate the construction review until such time as the C ontractor i s d eemed s ufficiently co mplete to once again start the review. A s a r ough rule of thumb, m ore t han f our m inor items p er ty pical room will be considered excessive. 017700 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School 1. After the C ontractor h as r eceived t he “ Punch List” from the Architect, h e h as th irty ( 30) calendar days in which to complete all items. D. After completion of "Punch List" work, Contractor shall notify Architect in w riting to p erform a n acceptance inspection. Issue n otification at l east seven (7) days in advance o f t he t ime t he acceptance inspection is to be performed. E. Contractor and h is p rincipal s uperintendent, authorized t o act o n b ehalf o f t he C ontractor, as well as principal subcontractors that Architect may request to be present, shall accompany Architect on acceptance inspection. 1. If work has been completed in accordance with Contract D ocuments, an d n o f urther co rrective measures ar e r equired, A rchitect w ill is sue a Certificate o f S ubstantial C ompletion, and recommend that Owner accept Project an d f ile Notice of Completion. F.
Contractor shall p rovide " Certificate o f Occupancy" from jurisdiction or municipality where p roject i s l ocated at t ime o f Substantial Completion Inspection.
G. Architect shall develop th e C ertificate of Substantial Completion Form ( AIA D ocument G704), f or th e s ignatures o f th e Architect, Contractor and O wner. T he d ate o f S ubstantial Completion starts the warranty period for the entire project. H. Owner shall occupy the entire project and premises on the date of Substantial Completion. I.
Final Project Review and Acceptance: 1. Comply with all requirements of the Substantial Completion Document, make f inal s ubmittals and n otify th e A rchitect i n w riting w hen all punch list items h ave b een co mpleted, an d a final inspection can be scheduled. 2. Architect s hall acco mpany C ontractor o n F inal Completion Inspection. 3. Complete a dditional W ork id entified in previous inspections and r equest r e-inspections as required by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
S:\11\0122\frontend\017700CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS B. As a part of the final Application for Payment, the Contractor s hall s ubmit a l ien waiver c overing t he total amount of the Contract.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures f or C loseout P rocedures, R evised Project Documents, and Delivery and Distribution of Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 1. Contract Closeout Submittals.
5. Extra Materials. SECTION INCLUDES
F. Contractor R equirements P reparatory t o Project Acceptance:
3. Spare Parts. 4. Maintenance Materials.
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
D. Section 014500 - Quality Control.
3. Thoroughly clean entire site o f a ll c onstruction debris as specified in Section 017423.
E. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. F. Section 017123 – Field Engineering.
4. Submit complete, signed Record Documents to Architect as specified in Section 017839.
G. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements.
5. Submit complete, signed O peration and Maintenance Data t o A rchitect as s pecified i n Section 017823.
H. Section 017423 - Cleaning. I. Section 017500 - Starting and Adjusting. J. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. K. Section 017823- Operation and Maintenance Data. L. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. M. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. N. Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training. O. Individual S pecification S ections: requirements for contract closeout.
Specific
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 013300.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
S:\11\0122\frontend\017800CGA.doc
1. Deliver c ertifications to A rchitect th at no ne w materials containing asbestos or other hazardous materials have been included in the Work. 2. Remove temporary facilities and materials from site and building as specified in Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
1.3
D. Contractor s hall e xecute " Contractor's A ffidavit of Payment of D ebts an d C laims" ( AIA D ocument G706), a nd " Contractor's A ffidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Document G706A). E. Contractor shall submit F inal A pplication f or Payment id entifying to tal a djusted C ontract S um, previous payments, a nd s um r emaining due. Contractor shall h ave ex ecuted t he " Consent o f Surety C ompany to F inal P ayment" ( AIA Document G707).
2. Final Site Survey.
1.2
C. Contractor s hall s ubmit lie n w aivers f rom every entity who may la wfully b e e ntitled to f ile a mechanics lie n a rising out of the Contract, including Suppliers, Subcontractors, a nd/or S ubsubcontractors.
6. Submit complete, signed Warranties and Bonds to Architect a s s pecified in G eneral C onditions and in Section 017836. 7. Upon Project completion, th e c ontractor s hall certify in w riting to th e O wner a nd A rchitect that the no “Hazardous Substances” have b een incorporated into or utilized in the construction of t he P roject, ex cept i n acco rdance w ith industry standards and ap plicable l aws an d regulations, i ncluding: (1) an y “ hazardous waste” as d efined b y t he Resource, Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 ( 42 U.S.C. S ection 6901 et seq.), as amended, and regulations promulgated t hereunder; ( 2) a ny “hazardous, toxic or dangerous waste, substance 017800 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling or material” specifically defined as such in ( or for t he pu rposes of ) the Comprehensive Environmental R esponse, C ompensation a nd Liability A ct of 1980 ( 42 U.S.C. Section 9601 et seq.), as am ended, an d r egulations promulgated t hereunder; ( 3) an y “ hazardous waste” or “hazardous s ubstance” as defined by applicable state law, as amended, and regulations p romulgated t hereunder; a nd (4) asbestos and asbestos co ntaining m aterials; ( 5) lead-based p aint; and ( 6) any “hazardous, toxic or dangerous w aste, s ubstance, p roduct, o r material as defined in any so-called “superfund” or “ superlien” l aw o r i n an y other federal or state l aw, o rdinance, code, r ule, r egulation, order or decree regulating, r elating t o o r imposing lia bility o r s tandards o f conduct concerning s uch w aste, s ubstance, product, or material. 1.4
FINAL SITE SURVEY A. As a p art o f t he F ield E ngineering r equirements, Section 017000, the registered Land Surveyor shall provide with Project R ecord D ocument ( Section 017839), the following information: 1. At appropriate times d uring th e P roject, th e Licensed Land S urveyor s hall d eliver t o t he Contractor’s R ecord D ocument Recorder current “ as-built” data of t he W ork, f or inclusion into the Project Record Documents. a. Clearly indicate the d ifferences b etween original Drawings and c ompleted W ork within specified tolerances. 2. Show “ as-built” lo cations o f s ite u tilities w ith top-of-pipe el evations at m ajor grade an d alignment changes.
Farmington Elementary School B. Deliver spare parts to the Owner’s designated area on or prior to the date of Substantial Completion. Provide t he O wner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered. 1.6
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide m aintenance m aterials t o t he O wner i n quantities s pecified in in dividual s pecification sections. B. Deliver m aintenance m aterials t o t he Owner’s designated area on o r p rior to th e d ate o f Substantial Completion. Provide th e O wner a nd Architect w ith a c omplete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra products and materials to the Owner in quantities specified in in dividual s pecification sections. B. Deliver extra products and materials to the Owner’s designated area on o r p rior t o t he d ate o f Substantial Completion. Provide th e O wner a nd Architect w ith a c omplete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION
3. Clearly lo cate f inal lo cations o f p lumbing a nd electrical l ines, w hich ar e o nly s hown o n the Drawings in a diagrammatic way. 4. Furnish any r equired E ngineering S urvey information f or a ll u tility e asements f or a ny required document recording. B. Either j ust p rior to o r o n th e d ate o f Substantial Completion, c omplete “ as-built” t ransparencies, signed and certified as correct by the licensed Land Surveyor. Provide the Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of information delivered. 1.5
SPARE PARTS A. Provide s pare p arts to th e O wner in quantities specified in individual specification sections.
017800 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
S:\11\0122\frontend\017800CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures for D eveloping a nd D elivering Operation and Maintenance Data. 1. Submittal Procedures. 2. Format and Content of Manuals. 3. Manual for Materials and Finishes. 4. Manual for Equipment and Systems. 5. Submittals.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. F. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. G. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. H. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. I. Individual S pecification S ections: Specific requirements for operations and maintenance data. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel w ho a re t horoughly trained and experienced i n o peration a nd m aintenance o f t he described ite ms, c ompletely f amiliar w ith the requirements of th is S ection, a nd s killed in technical w riting to th e e xtent n eeded for communicating the essential data.
1.4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Initial P rocedures: P rior to first Pay Application, submit a b lank, ta bbed b inder in the pr oper f ormat f or r eview a nd a pproval by the Architect. Approved binder will be returned for c ollection o f in formation during the course of construction. 2. Preliminary P rocedures: Submit on e ( 1) c opy of proposed manuals to Architect at least fifteen (15) days prior t o f inal i nspection f or acceptance. 3. Final P rocedures: F ollowing the indoctrination and instruction of t he O wner's o perating a nd maintenance personnel, r eview p roposed revisions to the manual with the Architect. a. Submit t wo ( 2) co pies o f accep ted data in final form ten ( 10) d ays a fter f inal inspection. Approval o f s ubmittal is a prerequisite at Substantial Completion. B. Format and Content of Manuals: 1. Binders: S ubmit tw o ( 2) Commercial q uality, 8-1/2 x 1 1 i nch s ize, t hree-ring b inders i n portfolio form, n eatly e dited, w ith s imilar equipment g rouped, t abbed a nd i ndexed. Materials shall be printed or typewritten. When multiple binders ar e u sed, co rrelate d ata i nto related consistent groupings. 2. Covers: Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND M AINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title o f p roject, identity of separate s tructures as ap plicable, an d s ubject matter o f b inder w hen m ultiple binders are required. 3. Internally s ubdivide th e b inder c ontents w ith permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 4. Contents: Prepare a T able of Contents for each volume, with each P roduct o r s ystem description identified, typed on 30 pou nd white paper. 5. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone n umbers o f A rchitect, C ontractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
A. Submittal Procedures:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0122\frontend\017823CGA.doc
017823 - 1 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 6. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged b y system a nd s ubdivided by specification section. For each category, identify n ames, ad dresses, an d t elephone numbers of S ubcontractors a nd s uppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance i nstructions f or eq uipment an d systems. f. Maintenance instructions f or s pecial finishes, i ncluding r ecommended c leaning methods and materials an d s pecial precautions identifying detrimental agents. 7. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 8. Submit to th e A rchitect, o ne ( 1) c opy of completed volumes in f inal f orm f ifteen ( 15) days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned a fter f inal in spection, w ith Architect comments. Revise co ntent o f d ocuments as required prior to final submittal. 9. Submit to th e Architect, f inal volumes revised, within ten (10) days after final inspection. C. Manual for Materials and Finishes: 1. Building Products, A pplied M aterials a nd Finishes: I nclude p roduct d ata w ith c atalog number, s ize, co mposition, co lor and texture designations. P rovide in formation f or r eordering custom manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer’s r ecommendations f or cl eaning agents and m ethods, p recautions ag ainst detrimental agents an d m ethods, an d recommended schedule for cl eaning an d maintenance.
Farmington Elementary School 3. Moisture Protection and W eather E xposed Products: I nclude p roduct d ata lis ting applicable r eference s tandards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for i nspections, m aintenance and repair. 4. Additional Requirements: A s s pecified in individual product specification sections. 5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, w ith t abbed f lysheet an d space for insertion of data. D. Manual for Equipment and Systems: 1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include d escription o f u nit o r s ystem, a nd component pa rts. I dentify f unction, no rmal operating characteristics, a nd lim iting conditions. Include p erformance cu rves, w ith engineering d ata an d t ests, and complete nomenclature and co mmercial n umber o f replaceable parts. 2. Panelboard C ircuit D irectories: Provide electrical service characteristics, co ntrols an d communications. a. Include co lor-coded wiring d iagrams as installed. 3. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, b reakin, a nd r outine no rmal o perating i nstructions and s equences. I nclude r egulation, control, stopping, s hut-down and em ergency instructions. I nclude s ummer, w inter, a nd a ny special operating instructions. 4. Maintenance R equirements: I nclude r outine procedures a nd g uide f or t rouble-shooting; disassembly, r epair an dr e-assembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions. 5. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 6. Provide m anufacturer’s p rinted o perations an d maintenance instructions. a. Include s equence o f o peration by controls manufacturer. 7. Provide original m anufacturer’s p arts lis t, illustrations, assembly drawings, a nd d iagrams required for maintenance. 8. Provide control di agrams by manufacturer as installed.
017823 - 2 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
c
ontrols
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0122\frontend\017823CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 9. Provide C ontractor’s c oordination dr awings, with color-coded piping diagrams as installed.
Addition and Remodeling
END OF SECTION
10. Provide charts of valve t ag num bers, w ith location and function o f each v alve, k eyed t o flow and control diagrams. 11. Provide list o f o riginal m anufacturer’s s pare parts, cu rrent p rices, an d recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Include test and balancing r eports as s pecified in Section 016000. 13. Additional Requirements: A s s pecified in individual p roduct specification sections and as recommended b y t he M anufacturer for the proper o peration an d m aintenance of the equipment or system. 14. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, w ith t abbed f lysheet an d space for insertion of data. E. Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. 2. Submit to th e A rchitect, tw o ( 2) c opies o f preliminary dr aft or pr oposed formats and outlines o f c ontents b efore s tart o f Work. Architect will review draft a nd r eturn o ne ( 1) copy with comments. 3. For e quipment, or c omponent pa rts of equipment, p ut i nto s ervice during construction and operated by O wner, s ubmit doc uments within ten (10) days after acceptance. 4. Submit to th e A rchitect, o ne ( 1) c opy of completed volumes in f inal f orm f ifteen ( 15) days prior to f inal in spection. C opy w ill b e returned a fter f inal in spection, w ith Architect comments. Revise co ntent o f d ocuments as required prior to final submittal. 5. Submit to th e A rchitect, tw o ( 2) c opies o f revised volumes of data in final form within ten (10) days after final inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0122\frontend\017823CGA.doc
017823 - 3 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017836 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS B. Section 006000 – Project Forms: Bonds.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
C. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201).
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section.
D. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
2. General cl oseout r equirements ar e i ncluded i n Section 017700 - “Closeout Procedures”.
F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. G. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. H. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. I. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. J. Individual S pecification S ections: requirements for warranties and bonds. 1.3
D. WHERE SPECIAL W ARRANTY REQUIREMENTS IN DICATED I N INDIVIDUAL S PECIFICATION S ECTIONS EXCEED SUPPLIER’S, M ANUFACTURER’S OR SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES, THE CONTRACTOR S HALL B E RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING THE SPECIAL WARRANTY COVERAGE THAT E XCEEDS T HE SUPPLIER’S, M ANUFACTURER’S O R SUBCONTRACTORS WARRANTY. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 002100 - Instructions to B idders (AIA A701): Bid Bonds.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0122\frontend\017836CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS
B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated i n t he C ontract Documents, either to e xtend tim e lim its provided by standard warranties, o r to p rovide g reater r ights f or th e Owner.
3. Specific requirements f or w arranties f or t he Work and p roducts a nd in stallations th at a re specified t o be warranted, ar e i ncluded i n the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 49.
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers a nd lim itations o n p roduct w arranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work t hat i ncorporates t he pr oducts, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required to c ountersign special warranties with the Contractor.
Specific
A. Standard P roduct W arranties: P re-printed w ritten warranties published b y i ndividual m anufacturers for p articular p roducts, an d ar e s pecifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
a. Closeout s ubmittals a re in cluded in S ection 017800.
4. Certifications and o ther c ommitments a nd agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Supplementary G eneral
E. Section 013300- Submittal Procedures.
B. General A dministrative an d Procedural Requirements f or Warranties and Bonds Required by the Contract Documents, Including Manufacturer’s Warranties on Products and Special Warranties. 1. Refer t o t he Owner/Contractor A greement an d General Conditions for te rms o f th e Contractor’s s pecial w arranty o f workmanship and materials.
-
1.4
WARRANTY AND BOND REQUIREMENTS A. Related D amages an d L osses: W hen c orrecting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other W ork t hat h as b een d amaged as a result of such failure, or that must be removed and replaced to provide acces s f or co rrection o f w arranted Work. B. Re-Instatement of Warranty: W hen Work covered by a w arranty h as f ailed an d b een corrected by replacements o r r ebuilding, r einstate t he warranty by written endorsement. T he r einstated w arranty shall b e e qual to th e o riginal w arranty w ith a n equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: U pon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the W ork t o an accep table co ndition co mplying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is r esponsible f or th e cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from u se o f t he W ork through a p ortion o f its a nticipated u seful s ervice life. 017836 - 1 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling D. Owner’s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner a re in a ddition to implied warranties, an d shall n ot lim it th e d uties, o bligations, r ights a nd remedies o therwise av ailable u nder t he law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights and remedies. 1. Rejection o f W arranties: T he O wner r eserves the right to r eject w arranties a nd to lim it selections to p roducts w ith w arranties n ot in conflict w ith r equirements o f the Contract Documents. E. The O wner r eserves t he r ight t o r efuse to accept Work f or t he P roject w here a s pecial warranty, certification o r similar c ommitment is required on such Work, or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entitles required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300. B. Where s pecial w arranties ar e r equired or where copies of warranties are i ndicated as a s ubmittal requirement, submit c opies o f w arranties to Architect for Architects review p rior to beginning Work of the specific section. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, o r t he C ontractor an d a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written d ocument th at c ontains a ppropriate terms and i dentification, r eady f or ex ecution b y the required p arties. S ubmit a d raft t o t he O wner through the A rchitect f or a pproval p rior to f inal execution. 1. Refer to in dividual S ections o f Division 2 through 49 f or s pecific c ontent r equirements, and p articular r equirements f or s ubmittal o f special warranties. D. Form of Submittals: 1. Bind in c ommercial q uality, 8 -1/2 x 11 i nch, three-ring side binders w ith ha rdback, cleanable, plastic covers. 2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", with title of Project; n ame, ad dress, an d telephone number o f C ontractor a nd e quipment s upplier; and name of responsible principal.
Farmington Elementary School 3. Table of Contents: Neatly ty ped, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item id entified w ith th e number, and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item. 4. Separate w arranties an d b onds w ith i ndex tab sheets keyed to th e T able o f C ontents lis ting. Provide co mplete i nformation, u sing s eparate typed sheets as necessary. List S ubcontractor, supplier, a nd manufacturer with n ame, ad dress, and telephone number of responsible principle. E. Preparation of Submittals: 1. Obtain w arranties an d b onds, ex ecuted i n duplicate by r esponsible S ubcontractors, suppliers, a nd m anufacturers, w ithin t en ( 10) days af ter co mpletion o f t he ap plicable i tem or work. Except for items p ut in to u se w ith Owner's p ermission, l eave d ate o f beginning of time of warranty u ntil th e D ate o f S ubstantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are i n p roper f orm, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co-Execute submittals when required. 4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. F. Time of Submittals: 1. Submit warranties and bonds for equipment, or component pa rts of e quipment pu t into service during construction w ith O wner's p ermission, within ten (10) days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten (10) days after Date of S ubstantial C ompletion, p rior to f inal Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work when accep tance is d elayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within t en ( 10) d ays af ter accep tance, l ist t he date o f acceptance as t he beginning o f t he warranty period. 4. Deliver t o t he A rchitect, m anufacturer's warranties, g uaranties an d b onds r equired b y Contract Documents, with the Owner named as beneficiary. W here manufacturer's warranty o r guarantee extends for a l onger time period than the C ontractor's w arranty o r g uarantee, d eliver manufacturer's w arranties and guaranties i n the same manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) 017836 - 2 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0122\frontend\017836CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0122\frontend\017836CGA.doc
017836 - 3 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS B. Accuracy o f R ecords: Thoroughly coordinate changes within t he R ecord D ocuments. Make adequate and proper en tries i n S pecifications an d Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to properly show the change. Include “asbuilt” lo cations o f s ite u tilities shown on the Drawings i n a d iagrammatic w ay. Accuracy of records shall be s uch t hat f uture s earch f or i tems shown in the C ontract D ocuments may r easonably rely o n in formation o btained f rom t he accepted Record Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Requirements for Project Record Documents: 1. Throughout p rogress of t he W ork o f t he Contract, Contractor shall maintain an accu rate record of ch anges an d m odifications i n t he Contract Documents, as described below.
C. Timing of Entries: Make entries onto a Job Set, as described below, within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of information. M ake en tries onto a Record Documents Set, as described below, at least weekly.
2. The pu rpose of t he R ecord D ocuments is to provide factual information regarding the Work, both c oncealed an d v isible, w hich w ill enable future modification of design to proceed without lengthy, and ex pensive s ite m easurement, investigation and examination. 1.2
D. The R ecord Documents will b e r eviewed b y t he Architect at the r egular w eekly j ob m eetings. Record Documents will be a regular agenda item. 1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Architect r eserves th e r ight to w ithhold certification of p ayment r equest f or f ailure o n t he part of the Contractor to maintain Record Drawing in the conformance with this Section.
A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
D. Section 017700 - Close-Out Procedures.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
E. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals.
B. General: The A rchitect's r eview an d ap proval o f the cu rrent s tatus o f R ecord D ocuments will be a prerequisite to the Architect's review of requests for progress payment and r equest f or f inal p ayment under the Contract.
F. Individual S pecification S ections: Specific requirements for project record documents. 1.3
PAYMENT WITHHELD
QUALITY ASSURANCE
C. Progress Submittals: S ecure the Architect's review and approval of the Record Documents as currently maintained p rior to s ubmitting e ach request for progress payment.
A. General: Delegate th e r esponsibility f or maintenance of Record D ocuments t o o ne p erson on the Contractor's staff, to b e d esignated as t he Record D ocuments R ecorder, as accepted in advance by the Architect. T he Record Documents Recorder m ay no t b e c hanged w ithout t he Architect's written approval.
D. Final Submittal: Submit th e f inal R ecord Documents to the Architect, and secure Architect’s acceptance prior to s ubmitting r equest f or f inal payment. 1.6
PRODUCT HANDLING A. Maintain Record D ocuments i n a s ecure p lace i n the C ontractor's j ob tr ailer. P rotect R ecord Documents from deterioration and f rom l oss a nd damage until completion of the Work.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\017839CGA.doc
017839 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. In t he ev ent o f l oss o f r ecorded d ata, u se m eans necessary to again secure the data to the Architect's acceptance; such means s hall i nclude, i f n ecessary in t he o pinion o f t he A rchitect, r emoval an d replacement of concealing m aterials an d, i n s uch case, r eplacements s hall b e t o the standards originally specified in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not use t he J ob S et for purposes other than entry o f n ew d ata an d f or review by the Architect upon request. 3. Allow o nly t he R ecord D ocuments Recorder and Architect to have acces s t o t he R ecord Documents. R ecord D ocument R ecorder s hall not remove t he R ecord D ocuments f rom the Contractor's trailer w ithout e xpressed w ritten permission of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
C. Making Entries on Drawings:
RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. Job Set: C ontractor shall record information in a clear and legible manner. M aintain t he J ob Set on an ongoing basis. R ecord p ertinent information and changes as t hey o ccur. Subcontractors shall b e responsible for making entries as may be required under the supervision of the Contractor. Subcontractors shall date and sign their entries.
A. Contractor's Job Set: Secure from the Architect at the beginning of t he W ork, a t no c harge t o t he Contractor, o ne ( 1) co mplete s et of Contract Documents. T his J ob S et s hall b e f or th e Contractor's own use to collect and record all pertinent information on a daily basis. B. Record Documents Set: S ecure from the Architect at the beginning of t he W ork, a t no charge to t he Contractor, o ne ( 1) co mplete s et of Contract Documents. T he C ontractor's R ecord D ocuments Recorder shall transfer all information to this set in final f orm o n a w eekly b asis. This Re cord Documents Set will also b e turned in as the Final Record Documents.
D. Making Entries on Other Documents: 1. Where changes are cau sed b y directives issued by the Architect, C ontractor shall clearly indicate t he ch ange b y n ote, an d reference approved addenda and change orders. 2. Where ch anges ar e cau sed by Contractororiginated proposals reviewed by the Architect, including i nadvertent e rrors b y t he C ontractor which have been accepted b y t he A rchitect, Contractor s hall cl early i ndicate t he ch ange by note.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET
3. Contractor shall make entries in th e p ertinent documents as reviewed by the Architect.
A. Identification: 1. Upon receipt of the J ob S et, C ontractor s hall identify th e d ocuments w ith th e title "TEMPORARY RECORD DOCUMENTS: CONTRACTOR'S JOB SET". 2. Upon r eceipt o f t he R ecord D ocuments S et, Contractor s hall id entify a ppropriate to mylar media with the title "RECORD DOCUMENTS" on each sheet of the drawings and on the cover sheet of other documents. B. Preservation: 1. Contractor s hall devise a suitable m ethod f or protecting th e J ob S et. C onsider th e C ontract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which the Job Set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions u nder w hich th ese a ctivities w ill be performed.
017839 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
E. Accuracy o f E ntries: C ontractor s hall u se p roper instruments or tools for measurement as necessary, to determine actual locations of the installed items. 3.2
FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall submit J ob S et D rawings a s supporting d ocumentation to th e Final Record Document drawings. If the Job Set drawings have been damaged during course of the Work, secure a new copy of the d ocument f rom t he A rchitect. Carefully transfer the change data to the new copy and obtain the acceptance o f t he A rchitect. Additional copies of Contract D ocuments w ill b e charged to the Contractor at the Architect’s cost of reproduction plus handling.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
S:\11\0122\frontend\017839CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. If t he d ocuments o ther t han d rawings ha ve b een kept c lean s uccessfully d uring p rogress of the Work, and if entries have been sufficiently orderly thereon and reviewed by the Architect, they will be accepted by the Architect as the final portion of the Record Documents. If any such document is not so accepted b y t he A rchitect, s ecure a n ew co py of that document from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge f or r eproduction, and car efully transfer the change data to the new copy and obtain the acceptance of the Architect. C. Review and Approval: C ontractor shall submit the completed t otal s et o f R ecord Documents to the Architect, as d escribed ab ove. Participate in review meetings as required by the Architect, make required changes in the R ecord D ocuments, an d promptly deliver the final Record Documents to the Architect. 3.3
CHANGES ACCEPTANCE
SUBSEQUENT
TO
A. The C ontractor i s n ot r esponsible for recording changes in the Work s ubsequent t o accep tance o f the Work by the A rchitect, ex cept f or ch anges resulting f rom r eplacements, r epairs, and alterations made b y the Contractor as a part of his guarantee. N o ad ditional ch anges will b e al lowed without approval of the Architect.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS S:\11\0122\frontend\017839CGA.doc
017839 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to this Section. B. General R equirements an d P rocedures f or Demonstration o f the P roducts and Systems o f the Facility, a nd T raining o f th e O wner’s O perating and Maintenance Personnel. 1. Demonstration and Training.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200 - General C onditions: G eneral Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 0073 13 Conditions.
-
Supplementary G eneral
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: S ubmit two copies of outline of instructional program f or demonstration and training, i ncluding a s chedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction tim e, a nd in structors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1.4
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Prior to C ompletion instruct O wner’s designated personnel i n o peration, a djustment, and maintenance o f p roducts, eq uipment an d s ystems on project site at agreed upon times. B. Provide 16 h ours of bu ilding systems controls training o n-site w ith th e O wner’s p ersonnel in multiple sessions. C. Demonstrate project equipment an d i nstruct i n a classroom environment located at t he p roject s ite and instructed by a qualified manufacturer’s representative w ho i s k nowledgeable about the project. 1. For eq uipment o r s ystems r equiring s easonal operation, perform de monstration f or o ther seasons within six (6) months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for in struction. R eview c ontents of manuals with Owner’s p ersonnel in d etail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate s tart-up, operation, c ontrol, adjustment, tr ouble-shooting, m aintenance, servicing and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at [equipment] [designated] location. F. Prepare and insert additional d ata i n “ Operations and Maintenance Manuals” w hen n eeded for additional data becomes apparent during instructions and demonstrations.
1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual for Owner's use. B. Qualification D ata: S ubmit q ualifications demonstrating a r ecord o f s uccessful learning performance o f in structors. I nclude lists of completed p rojects w ith p roject names and addresses, n ames an d ad dresses o f architects and owners. C. Attendance R ecord: F or each t raining module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
D. [Evaluations: F or each p articipant an d f or each training module, submit r esults a nd documentation of performance-based test.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING S:\11\0122\frontend\017900CGA.doc
017900 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
017900 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
S:\11\0122\frontend\017900CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 024113 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
1.4
A. Schedule: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items, location and construction of barricades, fences and temporary work.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Selective site demolition of designated items; including removal of materials from site, legal disposal off-site and salvage of items which are identified on the plan documents for Owner.
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities, subsurface construction and any other items relocated. 1.5
2. Asphalt paved areas, including saw cutting.
B. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements, as outlined under the provisions of Division One Specifications.
3. Concrete walks, slabs, curbs and concrete islands; including saw cutting.
C. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or hydrants without permits.
4. Concrete curb and gutter, including saw cutting.
D. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination.
5. Miscellaneous foundations in the entirety.
E. Conform to applicable building codes for dust control and run-off control.
6. Tree and landscape removal, including roots. 7. Fencing, light poles, bollards, fixtures and associated foundations. 8. Site signage, posts and bollards. 9. Designated work in City right-of-way. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 015713 - Erosion and Sediment Controls. B. Section 310000 - Earthwork C. Section 311000 - Site Clearing. 1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Minnesota State Building Code and all applicable codes for demolition of site structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, run-off control and disposal.
1. Selective demolition of existing structures including below grade foundations.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
REFERENCES A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004.
1.6
SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall visit the site and review all Drawings, Specifications and Geotechnical Report prior to bidding. No additional compensation will be allowed for items that could have been clarified prior to bidding. B. The Contractor shall review proposed and finished grade elevations as well as the proposed pavement thicknesses. Remove pavement and aggregate only as necessary to achieve proposed finished grade. Not all base aggregate under existing pavements may need to be removed. C. Provide traffic control per City requirements and meet all permit requirements. D. Coordinate all Work with General Contractor. E. Protection of Persons: The Owner's activities will continue in and about the site during construction. Install barricades as part of this Work and post with warning lights. F. Existing Utilities: Locate and mark all existing utilities that are on site where the Work is to be performed.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113 - 1 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
G. Benchmarks and Monuments: Maintain benchmarks and monuments that exist on the site. H. Protection of Existing Property to Remain: Protect existing plants, equipment and structures that are in areas where Work will be performed and which are to remain. Repair or replace existing property that is to remain that is damaged by the Work of this Contract, to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction and at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 310000 Earthwork.
2.2
EROSION CONTROL AND SILT FENCES A. Reference to Section 015713 - Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Follow all City of Farmington Standards and Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION A. Provide, erect and maintain temporary barriers, traffic control and security devices at locations as directed by the Architect/Engineer, City and Owner. B. Protect existing landscape materials, appurtenances, and structures that are not to be demolished. C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing or shoring. D. Mark location of utilities. E. All erosion control measures are to be installed and approved by the City of Farmington prior to start of construction.
3.2
GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public.
2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. a. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify the Architect/Engineer and do not resume operations until directed. 6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. 9. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
1. Obtain required permits.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113 - 2 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3.3
G. All materials removed under this section shall be removed from the site. The cost of legal disposal of the existing materials shall be included in the Bid Price, and no additional compensation will be allowed.
CLEARING AND REMOVAL A. General: Remove structures and facilities indicated on the Drawings. Remove and dispose of all structures, except for that which is permitted to remain upon determination being made by the Architect/Engineer that their existence does not interfere with, endanger or detract from the new construction in any way.
3.4
A. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface (ground) water from flowing into excavations and from flooding the site and surrounding area.
B. Removal Operations: Perform removal operations that may endanger new construction prior to construction of affected Work.
2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pump, well points, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
C. Compliance with Instructions, Ordinances and State Laws: Comply with all instructions and ordinances of the State of Minnesota, and all counties and municipalities regarding disposal, signs, advertising, traffic corners, danger signals, barricades, fire protection and all safety laws, ordinances and rulings.
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to legal collection or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
D. Disposal of Materials and Debris: Dispose of debris resulting from the removal and demolition operations in accordance with specific regulations imposed by laws, ordinances, orders and decrees. E. Removal of Existing Pavements: Where a portion of an existing pavement is to be retained for use, that portion shall not be damaged during removal operations. In removing concrete and bituminous pavements, sidewalks and similar structures, where the cut will be exposed in the finished Work, the structure shall, unless the removal is made to an existing joint and unless determined otherwise by the Architect/Engineer, be sawed along the removal lines with a concrete saw to a depth of not less than one-half (1/2) the thickness of the concrete or bituminous before breaking off the concrete or bituminous. In such cases, the use of wedges, driven into the saw cut to break off the portion to be removed, will not be permitted. Elsewhere, the structure shall be cut and chipped to true lines and vertical faces. F. Removal of Trees, Stumps, Brush and Vegetation: The clearing operations shall consist of the cutting and removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, windfalls and other vegetation in the designated areas. Grubbing operations shall consist of removing and disposing of the stumps, roots and other remains in their entirety. SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
4. The cost of dewatering shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract. 3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on information provided on the topographic survey. The Contractor shall call Gopher One for a field locate and field locate actual utility locations. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 024113 - 3 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.6
DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, trash and unused materials from site. B. Burning of debris is not permitted on the Owner's property. C. Remove all waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from the Owner's property. D. The cost of disposal of waste materials is considered part of the Base Bid Contract. E. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. F. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. G. Keep all public roadways free of mud, soil and debris to the satisfaction of regulatory agencies.
END OF SECTION
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113 - 4 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 024119 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING space. Demolish or remove all abandoned or unwanted electrical or mechanical materials, items or elements in the area.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
D. Use mechanics skilled in the trade to perform cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching and other restoration. If necessary, sublet the work to skilled contractors or subcontractors.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
E. Coordinate Work of this Section so Work progresses without interruption and minimum delays. Coordinate and schedule Work with the Owner where disturbance may occur and where relocations or other potential disruptions of the Owners functions and services may occur.
B. Unsalvageable Material. C. Salvageable Materials to be Reused in the Work. 1. Built-In Cafeteria Tables and Frames. 2. Exterior Aluminum Doors.
F. Maintain the safety of the existing buildings and personnel, as well as new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities of this Section.
3. Casework. D. Salvageable Materials to be Stored by Owner. 1. Interactive Whiteboards.
G. Exercise extreme care where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural consideration to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and all personnel. Utilize (employing if necessary) competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including for temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place permanent or temporary supports to meet all loads.
E. Minor Demolition for Remodeling; Including Cutting, Patching, Remodeling, Replacements and Restoration. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work. G. Work of Each Contract. 1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting or indicate conditions or details which might be encountered in performing the Work. Examine the spaces themselves to determine the actual conditions and requirements. Accomplish removals, demolition, cutting, restoration, new installations and other work as required to transform the existing spaces and conditions to the new conditions indicated on the Drawings, as well as to accomplish all tie-in work of new to existing. B. Except for general demolition of entire areas it is the intent that at each area, or space, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall make the removals, perform cutting or demolition and accomplish relocation of work normal to his trade (i.e., Electrical Subcontractor removes or relocates panelboards, conduit lighting and similar). C. At areas of general demolition of the entire spaces, the Mechanical and Electrical shall make removals or work normal to their trades or may be called for, for reuse or relocation, make any relocations and shut-off, terminate, cap or otherwise discontinue services that will be abandoned or removed in the
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
H. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage where the Work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves possible hazardous substances and/or harmful physical agents, such as asbestos fibers, PCB's or other EPA recognized health hazards. Notify Owner before making removals or cutting such material so that tests may be taken in order to ascertain whether materials exist. 1. Comply with jurisdictional requirements for the inspection, removal, handling and disposal of asbestos and asbestos containing materials. Confirm jurisdictional requirements prior to beginning demolition work. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Communications: 1. Communicate demolition schedule and on-going Work with school staff, students and parents, through the Construction Manager. The communications may include:
024119 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
a. Flyers or written notices explaining the process and the precautions being taken to minimize potential problems. Provide occasional update.
a. If moisture occurs, take measures to immediately dry out the areas. b. Anticipate mold problems if building materials are wet longer than twenty four (24) hours.
b. Being receptive to input and expressions of concern by others. c. Addressing the individual concerns of sensitive students or staff.
1.4
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
2. Respond quickly when problems occur and communicate to Owner explaining the problem and the proposed solution.
B. Schedule: Submit proposed sequence of operations for demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of Work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.
B. Isolate Construction Areas: 1. Use physical barriers to separate construction areas from occupied spaces.
1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2. Do not allow the central HVAC system to operate in the construction areas.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed work.
3. Maintain a positive pressure in the occupied areas. 4. Install separate heating/ventilating systems in the construction areas. Operate systems with a negative pressure, or use a temporary system of ducts and fans. 5. Locate air exhausted from the construction zones a significant distance from the building make-up air vents. a. Consider prevailing winds in planning this exhaust air system. b. Provide exhaust system with sorbents for VOC’s, and fabric filters to capture particulate matter. 6. Minimize the exhaust fumes associated with heavy equipment operating around existing building. C. Demolition and “Tying-In” to Existing Building: 1. Verify Owner’s asbestos abatement procedures, if any, have been carried out prior to any demolition. 2. Owner shall test to determine the presence of lead and take the necessary measures to avoid lead dust. 3. Be aware of the potential for mold in existing walls and roof systems.
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS 2.1
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE REUSED IN THE WORK A. Remove salvageable materials and items designated for reuse or relocation to the new location. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated item, store and protect the items from damage until incorporated into the new work or remodeled area. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation until other facilities are available to the Owner, make all preparations for the item and delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner. B. Carefully remove, salvage, clean and preserve materials, equipment and other items indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage or to make materials unsuitable to reuse. For materials shown or called for to be reused and which are damaged, replace with equivalent and matching work.
4. Take all necessary precautions to avoid moisture damage when “tying-in” the new additions to the existing walls and roofs.
024119 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.2
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS STORED BY THE OWNER
Addition and Remodeling
TO
C. Provide protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Coordinate Work and removals at exterior, including roof, by scheduling and performing Work in a manner to maintain watertight installation. Seal areas left temporarily unfinished to prevent damage to existing roof or other materials and furnishings of existing building.
BE
A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protect from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed by the Owner. B. Consult the Architect for any salvage the Owner may wish to retain and the salvagability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. Remove finish hardware from the item or material taken out of the building and turn over to Owner. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvage materials is not required.
D. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) separating areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building as well as temporary filters at duct work. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Completely seal temporary and permanent doors with tape or other suitable material during demolition work. Maintain seal until dust has settled.
C. Removal from the area and the site to the Owner's storage will be by the Contractor. 2.3
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
E. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project, which may be exposed by cutting and patching work.
A. Remove unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove materials and legally dispose away from the site.
F. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
TEMPORARY PROTECTION
DEMOLITION AND CUTTING A. Demolish and remove existing construction as indicated in the Contract Documents or as is required to be removed to accomplish the Work. Where new Work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or existing work is to be replaces, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the Work of the Project. B. Execute Work with care. Remove and replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of the Work and is unsuitable for intended use.
A. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, needling and support during demolition, cutting, remodeling and related new construction as necessary for the execution of the Work and protection of persons and property.
C. Transport debris from upper levels to ground in covered chute or other approved means. No freefall debris removal is permitted. Moisten debris with spray where practical. Take all precautions to minimize dust.
B. Perform Work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property of persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, with loads properly distributed, including to lower levels and sound bearing, if necessary.
D. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in such a manner so as to prevent spread of dust. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep walks and similar areas broom clean. E. Do not store or permit debris storage at site.
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
024119 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
Addition and Remodeling
F. Do not burn debris, rubbish, or waste at the site. 3.4
Farmington Elementary School
3.6
PATCHING, REMODELING, REPLACEMENTS AND RESTORATION
A. Where unknown mechanical piping, ductwork or electrical conduit is exposed during removal of partitions, walls or floors and ceilings, have Mechanical or Electrical Subcontractors accomplish the removal or rerouting, as applicable. Locate mechanical and electrical work where directed and connect to maintain all functions in proper operation. Abandoned piping may be left in place where it is concealed in the floors or walls, providing that it is disconnected from its source and capped. No "dead end" water, sewer, gas, or vent piping existing in the completed work are allowed.
A. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction as indicated on the drawings and schedules, or as otherwise required to restore the work and surfaces. Carry out patching or restoration to natural breaks (i.e., corners) wherever possible. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed by Work of the Project, patch defective and incomplete surfaces. Repair damage to existing construction which is to remain. B. Perform patching work using skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Perform patching work to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, where not specified, complete work to the highest standards of the trade. C. Patch existing construction to match existing work (unless otherwise called for) except provide new materials and accomplish as for new work. Examine existing surfaces to be patched before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched to the Architect and Owner, and do not proceed until instructions have been given. D. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work to an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction. E. Thoroughly clean and prepare all surfaces to receive new finish or covering. Completely remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, paint, loose materials and soil. Clean, etch where necessary, and place surfaces in most suitable condition for the finish. 3.5
ADJUSTMENTS A. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings, with materials to match existing.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED
B. Accomplish removals, capping or otherwise terminating services which are abandoned or need to be abandoned, and rerouting of mechanical and electrical work without addition cost to the Owner, whether shown or noted on drawings or otherwise encountered. 3.7
WORK OF EACH CONTRACT A. Carefully review the Contract Documents, including those primarily for other trades with respect to the coordination of the demolition, removal and remodeling work and perform such removals normal to their trades as may be shown, noted or otherwise required. B. Cutting and patching incidental to demolition, removal and /or remodeling of general construction work is included in the work of the Contractor when shown or indicated on the general construction drawings or schedules or specially noted or called for on documents primarily for other trades as being accomplished by the Contractor. 1. Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors are responsible for such other cutting, demolition, patching, replacement and restoration as may be required to accomplish their part of the Work.
1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 2. Where extreme change of plane to two inches or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. B. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors.
024119 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.8
Addition and Remodeling
PAINTING A. Major Subcontractors (Mechanical, Electrical) are responsible for painting or repainting of patched or remodeled areas where they have performed work, except for those areas shown or required to be remodeled under the General Construction Drawings, Specifications or Schedules, in which case, the new, patched and remodeled paintable surfaces shall be repainted by the Contractor. It is the intent that the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors are responsible for painting or repainting surfaces at locations where demolition, cutting and patching has been accomplished only for their work. B. Perform painting, including preparation, materials, workmanship and number of coats under Section 099000 - Painting. Extend painting of surfaces patched to natural breaks, such as corners, as approved by the Architect and Owner.
3.9
CLEANING A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 017400 - Cleaning. 1. Clean Owner-occupied areas daily. B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. C. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable for use by Owner.
END OF SECTION
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
024119 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
Addition and Remodeling
024119 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/17/2013
Farmington Elementary School
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\024119CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
1.7
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
1.2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Details of Construction, and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division ' 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2.1
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.
A. Formwork for cast'in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.
B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories.
1.3
2.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014533 ' Structural Testing and Special Inspection
2.3
D. Section 051200 ' Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast'in'place concrete. REFERENCE STANDARDS
B. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 051200.
A. ACI 117 ' Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2006.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
1.6
B. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Submit product data for form release agents.
EXAMINATION A. Establish a bench mark in an accessible location and use as a reference point for various construction levels. Maintain in an undisturbed condition until final completion.
C. ACI 318 ' Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. 1.5
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
C. Section 033000 ' Cast'in'Place Concrete.
B. ACI 301 ' Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2005.
WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
B. Section 032000 ' Concrete Reinforcing.
1.4
FORMWORK ' GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast'in'place concrete work.
SECTION INCLUDES
D. Form stripping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.2
EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are not permitted.
3.3
ERECTION ' FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
031000 1 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
overstressing by construction loads. C. Lay out all work and check general building lines and levels established. Coordinate layout and measurements and if discrepancies arise, report them to the Architect.
3.6
D. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage.
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
E. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean'out ports.
F. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de'icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
G. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. I. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
3.7
B. Tolerances given in ACI 117 are not cumulative. Maximum tolerance for any formed surface, except footings, shall be one inch.
APPLICATION ' FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.5
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117.
J. Protect work at all times against the elements and other hazards. Cover and secure work. 3.4
FORM CLEANING
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Formwork for slabs on grade, strip footings without transverse reinforcement, and topping slabs does not require inspection. Additional exceptions may be noted on the structural drawings. 3. Personnel Qualifications: Special Inspector – Structural I: ICBO certified concrete inspector or a graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the Structural Engineer of Record (SER), with the experience in the design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports.
031000 2 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4. The Owner will provide the following inspections: a. Verify formwork for all concrete, except as noted above, will result in member size, location, and configuration as described on the contract documents, only as it affects the structural integrity of the concrete elements to be placed. Verify removal of shoring conforms to this section. Qualifications: Structural I. 3.9
FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Forms for sides of piers, walls and footings shall remain in place for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Form Removal for Horizontal Members (Non'Post'Tensioned): 1. Do not remove horizontal member soffit forms until one of the following has been met: a. At least four cylinders field cured according to ASTM C31 reach 75% of the specified 28'day strength. b. Curing procedure (per Section 033000) are continued until laboratory cured cylinders reach 75% of the specified 28'day strength. 2. Provide reshores if members must support any superimposed loads. Place reshores the same day forms are removed. Do not remove reshores until concrete has reached its specified strength. a. Apply no construction loads to members being reshored during reshoring operations. D. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. E. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
031000 3 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
I. ASTM F 1554 $ Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105$ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.
SECTION 031510 POST INSTALLED ANCHORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
J. ICC$ES AC58 – Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2006
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings, Details of Construction, and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
L. ICC$ES AC193 – Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2008
SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements pertaining to post$installed anchors for materials and equipment. This section pertains to Divisions 3, 4, and 5 of these specifications that require post$installed anchors, unless specified otherwise.
1.3
K. ICC$ES AC106 – Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Concrete or Masonry Elements; 2006
M. ICC$ES AC308 – Acceptance Criteria for Post$Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2008 1.5
A. Post$Installed anchors and related materials shall be listed by one or more of the following agencies, as applicable:
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 1 – General Requirements B. Division 3 – Concrete
1. ICC Evaluation Service
C. Division 4 – Masonry
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM)
D. Division 5 – Metals 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REFERENCES
1.6
A. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials, manufacturer’s specifications (including finishes and/or materials), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and installation procedures.
A. ACI 355.2 – Standard for Evaluating the Performance of Post$Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete; 2005 B. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005 C. ASTM A 193 – Standard Specification for Alloy$Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High$Temperature Service
B. Test Reports: ICC$ES listings. 1.7
SUBSTITUTIONS A. Only manufacturers with an ICC$ES listing will be considered for substitution requests.
D. ASTM A 307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength; 2007b
B. The contractor shall submit for Engineer$of$Record’s review, calculations that are prepared & sealed by a registered Professional Engineer demonstrating that the substituted product is capable of achieving the pertinent equivalent performance values of the specified product using the appropriate design procedure and/or standard(s) as required by the Building Code. In addition, the calculations shall specify the diameter and embedment depth of the substituted product.
E. ASTM B 633 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2007 F. ASTM B 695 – Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel; 2004 G. ASTM C 881– Standard Specification Epoxy$Resin$Based Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002
C. Any increase in material costs for such submittal shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
H. ASTM F 593 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs; 2002
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
SUBMITTALS
MATERIALS
031510 1 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
(c)
A. Expansion Anchors 1. Concrete Wedge Anchors (expansion bolt): a. Carbon steel, ASTM B 633, Class SC1, Type I or III. b. Stainless steel anchors (where noted): ASTM F 593, Type 303, 304 or 316. c. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. d. Tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC$ES AC193 for all mandatory tests. e. Acceptable products include: 1) Simpson Strong$Tie: Strong$Bolt (ICC$ES ESR$1771). 2) Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ (ICC$ES ESR$1917). 3) Powers Fasteners: Power$Stud+SD2 (ICC$ES ESR$2502). 4) ITW Red Head: Trubolt+ (ICC$ES ESR$2427) B. Adhesive Anchors 1. Adhesive anchors consist of an insert and an adhesive. 2. Inserts a.
Threaded Rod Inserts: Provide preparation or configuration as recommended by manufacturer. 1) Interior Exposure: ASTM A 307, ASTM A 36, ASTM A 193 Grade B7, or ASTM F 1554.
3. Adhesives for Concrete: a. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. b. Tested and qualified for use in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ICC$ES AC308 for all mandatory and optional seismic tests including creep tests. c. Epoxy: ASTM C 881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C. 1) Acceptable products include: (a) Simpson Strong$Tie: SET XP (ICC$ES ESR$2508). (b) Hilti: RE$500$SD (ICC$ES ESR$2322).
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
d.
Powers Fasteners: PE1000+ (ICC$ES ESR$2583). (d) ITW Red Head: EPCON G5 (ICC$ES$ESR$1137). Acrylic: Cartridge type, two$component, acrylic based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Minimum physical requirements of ASTM C 881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class A, B and C. 1) Acceptable products include: (a) Hilti: HY$150 Max$SD (ICC$ES ER$3013).
4. Adhesives for Solid Concrete Masonry: a. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. b. Tested in accordance with ICC$ES AC58 for all mandatory tests and the following optional tests: 1) Seismic tests 2) Creep tests 3) Dampness tests 4) Freeze$thaw tests c. Epoxy: ASTM C 881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C. 1) Acceptable products include: (a) Simpson Strong$Tie: SET Epoxy$Tie High$Strength Adhesive (ICC$ES ESR$1772). (b) Powers Fasteners: Power$Fast+ Epoxy Adhesive, Standard Set Formulation (ICC$ES ESR$1531). d. Acrylic: Cartridge type, two$component, acrylic based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Minimum physical requirements of ASTM C 881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class A, B and C. 1) Acceptable products include: (a) Simpson Strong$Tie: Acrylic$Tie Adhesive (AT) (ICC$ES ER$5791). (b) Hilti: Hy$150 Max (ICC$ES ER$1967)
031510 2 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
D. Drill holes in concrete and masonry in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Concrete and Masonry Screw Anchors 1. Concrete Screw Anchors: a. Carbon steel heat$treated or hardened. b. Zinc$plated in accordance with ASTM B 633, Class SC1, Type I or equivalent coating. c. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. d. Tested per ICC$ES AC193 for all mandatory tests. e. Acceptable products include: 1) Simpson Strong$Tie: Titen HD (ICC$ES ESR$2713). 2) Powers Fasteners: Wedge$Bolt+ (ICC$ES ESR$2526). 2. Masonry Screw Anchors: (Grouted Masonry Only) a. Carbon steel heat$treated or hardened. b. Zinc$plated per ASTM B 633, Class SC1, Type I, mechanically galvanized per ASTM B 695, or equivalent coating. c. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. d. Tested per ICC$ES AC106 for all mandatory tests (and seismic tests): e. Acceptable products include: 1) Simpson Strong$Tie: Titen HD (ICC$ES ESR$1056). 2) Hilti: HUS$H (ICC$ES ESR$2369). 3) Powers Fasteners: Wedge$Bolt+ (ICC$ES ESR$1678). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and, where required, requirements of ICC$ES evaluation reports. B. Conform to manufacturer's requirements for, but not limited to, hole drilling methods, hole size, hole cleaning, substrate and adhesive temperatures, moisture presence in holes, and required edge distance and spacing. C. Use special tools when recommended by manufacturer for installation of anchors unless otherwise permitted specifically by the Engineer or Architect of Record.
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer shall, on request, provide the services of a field representative to demonstrate to and train installers in proper installation techniques. B. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Special Inspection, periodic or continuous, of post$installed anchors shall be provided as specified herein, but not less than as required by ICC$ES evaluation reports. 3. Definitions: ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing 4. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical I: ASNT Level I, employed by a testing agency and supervised by an ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Special Inspector Technical II: ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by an ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. c. Special Inspector – Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the SER, with experience in design of structural systems of the project type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. 5. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Continuous special inspection during installation to verify materials delivered to site comply with contract documents, bolt type and dimensions, concrete type and compressive strength, pre$drilled hole dimensions and cleaning, embedment, spacing,
031510 3 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
edge distances, slab thickness, tightening torque, and any other items requiring inspection by product's ICC approval report. Qualifications: Technical II or Structural I.
END OF SECTION
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
031510 4 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
I. ASTM A996/A996M $ Standard Specification for Rail$Steel and Axle$Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
SECTION 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
J. ASTM C881 $ Standard Specification for Epoxy$Resin$Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
K. ASTM D3963/D3963M $ Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
SECTION INCLUDES
L. CRSI (DA4) $ Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001.
A. Reinforcing steel for cast$in$place concrete. B. Reinforcing steel for masonry
M. CRSI (P1) $ Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; Eighth Edition.
C. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.5
A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.
A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspection
B. Shop Drawings: Follow recommended practices of ACI 315. Include size, length, bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, methods of supporting reinforcing, and location and length of splices. Provide details as necessary to show final position of reinforcement in elements.
B. Section 031000 $ Concrete Forming and Accessories. C. Section 031510 $ Post$Installed Anchors. D. Section 033000 $ Cast$in$Place Concrete. E. Section 042731 $ Reinforced Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for engineered masonry. 1.4
1.6
B. ACI 301 $ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 315 $ Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement; 1999 D. ACI 318 $ Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. E. ASTM A82/A82M $ Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. F. ASTM A185/A185M $ Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. G. ASTM A615/A615M $ Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet$Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. H. ASTM A706/A706M $ Standard Specification for Low$Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. CONCRETE REINFORCING
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 $ Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2007
SUBMITTALS
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all reinforcement to the Project site bundled, tagged, and marked. B. Store all reinforcing steel bars, ties, wire fabric, etc., on the site in a manner that will permit access for proper inspection and identification. C. Do not exceed design capacity of existing construction or formwork. D. Store reinforcing to avoid contact with mud, grease, or other materials that would affect bond. E. Special handling for epoxy coated reinforcing to include: 1. Support epoxy$coated bars or bundles of bars to prevent damage to coating during transit. 2. Store epoxy$coated bars on protective cribbing. 3. Lift bundles of epoxy$coated bars at multiple pickup points to minimize bar$to$bar abrasion due to sags in the bundles.
032000 1 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4. Do not drop or drag epoxy$coated bars or bundles of bars.
section 031510 2.2
5. Provide padded contact areas on equipment used for handling epoxy$coated bars.
A. Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
B. Splice reinforcing where indicated on drawings. Specifically note proposed splices not shown on the drawings on the shop drawings and highlight for reviewer's acceptance.
REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420).
C. Provide epoxy coated reinforcing for all concrete exposed to weather such as exterior walls, slabs, piers, landings, stoop slabs, loading docks, and stairs. Additional locations may be noted on the drawings. Building foundation walls do not require epoxy coated reinforcing unless shown on the drawings.
1. Deformed billet$steel bars. 2. Unfinished. 3. Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A 775/A 775M where noted. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed low$alloy steel bars. Required for welded reinforcing
D. Provide bar supports and other accessories sufficient to maintain reinforcing within specified placing tolerances. Consider requirements of CRSI MSP$1 to be a minimum.
1. Unfinished. C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 60 (420), Type A.
E. Provide bar supports for all reinforcing, including footings and slabs on grade.
D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: CRSI MSP$1 Chapter 3. Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. a. Class 1 for all surfaces exposed to weather. b. Class 1 or 2 for interior surfaces exposed to view. c. Class 3 for surfaces not exposed to view. 2. Bar Supports and Accessories for epoxy coated bars: CRSI MSP$1 Chapter 3, Class 1A epoxy, vinyl, or plastic coated, all plastic supports, or precast supports with epoxy or plastic coated wire. a. Use epoxy$coated reinforcing bars as support bars. b. Fasten epoxy$coated reinforcing bars to bar supports, accessories, and each other with nylon, epoxy or plastic coated tie wire.
DETAILING
F. Consider normal construction activities while detailing number and type of bar supports. G. Detail reinforcing to accommodate forming, fabricating, and placing tolerances and maintain a minimum cover as specified. 2.3
FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 301. B. Fabricate within tolerances given in ACI 117. C. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. D. Fabricate and handle epoxy$coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION $ PLAIN BARS A. Clean all reinforcement before placing. Remove oil, mill scale, pitting, mud, loose rust, strong alkali or organic matter.
3. Patching Materials for Epoxy Coated Bars: ASTM D3963 Annex A1, inert in concrete.
B. Remove all excessive rust with wire brush or by sandblasting.
4. Mechanical couplers: Develop 125% of yield strength, ICBO approved. Dayton/Richmond: Barlock Coupler System, Erico: Lenton Couplers, or approved equal.
C. Reinforcement with rust and/or mill scale shall be acceptable if a hand$brushed test specimen meets the applicable ASTM requirements for dimension, weight, and height of deformations.
5. Post$installed reinforcing adhesive: See
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000 2 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3.2
E. Repair coating damage due to heating, bending, cutting, welding or installation of mechanical connections, in accordance with ASTM D3963 and patching material manufacturer's recommendations.
PREPARATION $ EPOXY COATED BARS A. Repair coating damage larger than 0.1 square inch in accordance with patching material manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove oil, mud, strong alkali, or organic matter prior to placement in forms.
3.3
PLACEMENT A. Place reinforcing in accordance with approved shop drawings, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Place within maximum tolerances given in ACI 117. B. Splice reinforcing where indicated on drawings. C. Install mechanical connectors in accordance with connection manufacturer's recommendations. D. All bars must be placed before concrete is poured. E. Provide templates for all column dowels. F. Do not bend bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete without approval from the Architect/Engineer. If bending is permitted, conform to procedures of ACI 301. G. Support footing and slab on grade reinforcing. Do not lift or "step in" during placement of concrete. Use precast concrete, block, brick, or wire supports with earth bearing bases. H. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. I. Reinforcing shall have the minimum concrete cover as given on the drawings.
3.4
F. Do not use epoxy$coated bars with damage, repaired and unrepaired, exceeding 2 percent of the surface area of each bar.
INSTALLATION $ EPOXY COATED REINFORCING A. Do not field cut epoxy$coated reinforcing bars unless shown on Drawings or permitted by Engineer. B. Do not use welded splices of epoxy$coated reinforcing bars unless shown on Drawings or permitted by Engineer. When used, welded splices shall conform to AWS D1.4. Welding of crossing bars (tack welding) for assembly of epoxy$coated reinforcement is prohibited. C. Provide suitable ventilation when welding of epoxy$coated bars is required or permitted. D. Do not use mechanical connections for epoxy$coated reinforcing unless shown on drawings or permitted by Engineer.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
3.5
POST$INSTALLED REINFORCING A. See section 031510 for installation requirements.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Concrete reinforcing in slabs on grade, footings without transverse reinforcement, and topping slabs does not require inspection. Special Inspector need not be present during entire reinforcing installation, but must observe all required reinforcing prior to concrete placement. 3. Personnel Qualifications: a. Special Inspector $ Structural I: ICBO certified concrete inspector or a graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the structural Engineer of Record (SER), with experience in the design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. 4. The Owner will provide the following inspections: a. Inspect reinforcement in all cast in place concrete. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following: 1) Reinforcing bar grade. 2) Reinforcing bars are free of oil, dirt, excessive rust, and damage. 3) Reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent displacement during concrete placement.
032000 3 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4)
Proper chair and tie wire materials are used. 5) Proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete. 6) Reinforcing bar size and placement. 7) Bar laps for proper length and stagger. 8) Bar bends for minimum diameter, slope and length. 9) Mechanical splices are placed in accordance with the plans, specifications and reviewed shop drawings. 10) Epoxy coating is presented at locations noted in the plans and specifications. include tie wires, chairs, bolsters, etc. Verify coating damaged is repaired in accordance with the contract requirements.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000 4 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 033000 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
C. ACI 302.1R $ Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007).
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
F. ACI 306R $ Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. G. ACI 306.1 $ Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, American Concrete Institute; 1990
B. Concrete footings
I. ACI 308.1 $ Standard Specification for Curing Concrete, American Concrete Institute; 1998
D. Concrete foundation walls. E. Concrete fill for masonry lintels, bond beams and cores. F. Concrete fill for steel pan stairs. G. Concrete topping. H. Joint devices associated with concrete work. I. Concrete curing. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
H. ACI 308R $ Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).
J. ACI 309R $ Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, American Concrete Institute; 1996 K. ACI 318 $ Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. L. ASTM A615/A615M $ Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet$Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. M. ASTM C 31 $ Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2003
A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspection
N. ASTM C33/C33M $ Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
B. Section 031000 $ Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
O. ASTM C150/C150M $ Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
C. Section 032000 $ Concrete Reinforcing.
P. ASTM C 157 $ Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic$Cement Mortar and Concrete; 2006.
D. Section 051200 $ Embedded Structural Steel, Anchor Bolts 1.4
E. ACI 305R $ Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
A. Section Includes: Providing all items, articles and materials listed, mentioned, or scheduled on the Drawings or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary and required for the installation of all cast$in$place concrete indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
C. Floors and slabs on grade.
1.3
D. ACI 304R $ Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 $ Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 $ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Q. ASTM C 231 $ Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1997 R. ASTM C260 $ Standard Specification for Air$Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. S. ASTM C 494/C 494M $ Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012. T. ASTM C618 $ Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012.
033000 1 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
marked with the product name, manufacturer's name, batch number, component designation, and ratio of component mixtures.
U. ASTM C 1116 $ Standard Specification for Fiber$Reinforced Concrete; 2006. V. ASTM C 1399 $ Standard Test Method for Obtaining Average Residual Strength of Fiber$Reinforced Concrete; 1998.
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials by methods that prevent damage. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that materials comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and materials are undamaged.
W. ASTM C 1609 $ Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber$Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam With Third$Point Loading); 2005.
D. Store materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, with seals and label intact and legible. Maintain temperatures within the Manufacturer's recommended ranges.
X. ICC Evaluation Service AC32 $ Acceptance Criteria for Concrete with Synthetic Fibers; 2003 1.5
SUBMITTALS
E. Furnish delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered to the Project. Information on each ticket shall be as required by ASTM C94 and shall also include: type of concrete (mix number), weights of all ingredients, maximum aggregate size, type, brand, and amount of admixture, total water in the batch, maximum amount of water that can be added at the site without exceeding design mix proportions, and amount of water added at site and initials of person adding water. Retain tickets until substantial completion unless directed otherwise.
A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Concrete mix designs for each mix used. On request, include field test data used to determine required average strength (if that method was used) and field test or trial mix data used to document required average compressive strength. C. Product data for admixtures, curing materials and compounds, joint fillers, fiber reinforcing, vapor retarders, non$shrink grout, and slab construction joint devices. D. Cold weather concreting procedures.
1.8
E. Drawings showing construction and control joint locations and details for interior supported floor slabs and slabs on grade.
A. All products shall comply with the E.P.A. rulings establishing national v.o.c. emission standards for architectural coatings as listed in the Federal Register: September 11,1998 (Volume 63, Number 176), [Rules and Regulations] [Page 48848$48887].
F. Certification of admixture conformance to chloride ion requirements. G. Field quality control test results. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. D. Fiber reinforcing supplier shall have no less than five (5) years of satisfactory product performance experience with the approved product.
1.7
MATERIAL DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be delivered in the Manufacturer's undamaged, unopened containers. Each container shall be clearly
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
NATIONAL VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) EMISSION STANDARDS
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 031000.
2.2
REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 032000.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I $ Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Maximum aggregate size is specified in mix design schedule. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
033000 2 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
E. Synthetic Micro Fiber Reinforcing: 100% virgin polyolefin (polypropylene or polyethylene), fibrillated, graded or minimum ¾" uniform length, ICC approved, ASTM C1116, Type III. Fibermesh 300: Propex Concrete Systems, Grace Fibers: W.R. Grace, Ultra$Net: Forta Fibers, and approved equal. F. Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcing: 100% virgin polyolefin (polypropylene or polyethylene), monofillament, non$fibrillated, 1.5$2" long, L/D aspect ratio 50$100, ASTM C1116, Type III. Enduro 600: Propex Concrete Systems, Strux 90/40: W.R. Grace, and approved equal.
2.6
A. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/4 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. B. Semi$Rigid Joint Filler: Two$component, semi$rigid, 100 % solids, minimum Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D2240. 2.7
B. Moisture$Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, white polyethylene film at temperatures above 60 degrees F., black polyethylene film at temperatures below 80 degrees F., clear polyethylene, or white burlap$polyethylene sheet at temperatures above 60 degrees F.
2. Tested in concrete to meet requirements of ICC AC32. Tests for concrete over steel deck and fire$resistance only required for concrete used over steel deck. CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260. C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. D. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. F. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than .05% chloride ions. G. Do not use accelerating or retarding admixtures without written approval of the Architect. 2.5
ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Non$Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107 Grade B; Premixed compound consisting of non$metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Conformance to ASTM C1107 shall occur with a minimum temperature range of 45 degrees F to 90 degrees F, a fluid consistency, and a minimum 30 minute working time.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
CURING MATERIALS A. All curing agents and sealers shall have no adverse affect on finishes, traffic topping, or other sealers. Coordinate with the appropriate finish manufacturer and receive written confirmation before applying.
1. Blended synthetic macro fiber and micro fiber reinforcing with macro fibers meeting the above may be used. Novomesh 950: Propex Concrete Systems.
2.4
BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
C. Exterior Concrete Curing Compound: Wax base, membrane forming curing compound, ASTM C309, Type II, white pigmented. 2.8
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Submit concrete mix design for each type of concrete at least 30 days prior to the proposed start of placement. Mix designs must be reviewed prior to pouring concrete. Review is for conformance with specification requirements only. Contractor is responsible for performance. B. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94 (Option A) unless other requirements of this project specification are more stringent. C. Provide concrete with workability such that it will fill the forms, without voids or honeycombs, when properly vibrated, without permitting materials to separate or excess water to collect on the surface. D. Slump at point of discharge: 5" max. for concrete without superplasticizer and 9" max. for concrete with superplasticizer. E. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: ACI 301. Establish proportions based on the standard practices contained in ACI 211.1. F. Determine required average strength as required by ACI 301.
033000 3 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
G. Concrete Strength: Document that mixes produce required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect/Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. H. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 2.9
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SCHEDULE A. Normal Weight Concrete: Footings 1. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi. 2. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.62 by weight. 3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1$1/2" Class 1S. 4. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: 0.30 percent by weight of cement. B. Normal Weight Concrete: Walls exposed to view and columns integral with those walls
4. Synthetic Micro Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. Minimum rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard. Minimum residual strength per ASTM C1399 or C1609: 45 psi. Required at slabs only. 5. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.40 by weight. 6. Total Air Content: 4$1/2% to 7$1/2% percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C231. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4" Class 4S. 8. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Normal Weight Concrete: Slabs on grade and supported slabs over tunnels 1. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4,000 psi. 2. Synthetic Micro Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. Minimum rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard. Minimum residual strength per ASTM C1399 or C1609: 45 psi.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4,000 psi.
3. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.45 by weight.
2. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.52 by weight.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4" Class 2S, well graded to achieve shrinkage limits specified.
3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4" Class 1S, well graded to achieve shrinkage limits specified.
5. Maximum 28$day shrinkage per ASTM C157: 0.05%
4. Maximum 28$day shrinkage per ASTM C157: 0.05%
6. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: .30 percent by weight of cement.
5. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: 0.30 percent by weight of cement.
E. Normal Weight Concrete: Topping and Fill for Steel Pan Stairs
C. Normal Weight Concrete: Exterior Concrete
1. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi.
1. Exterior concrete includes: exterior aprons and stoop slabs, exterior sidewalks, slabs at overhead doors and loading docks, exterior walls, piers, and columns, and other similar conditions. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4,500 psi. 3. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
2. Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. Minimum rate of 4 pounds per cubic yard. Minimum residual strength per ASTM C1399 or C1609: 80 psi. 3. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.50 by weight. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/8" Class 2S, well graded to achieve shrinkage limits 033000 4 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
compounds and other items that would be detrimental to bonding. Saturate existing surface with clean water (8 hours minimum), remove excess water, and slush with a neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete.
specified, not to exceed 1/3 of the minimum actual topping thickness. 5. Maximum 28$day shrinkage per ASTM C157: 0.05%, topping slabs only. 6. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
D. Protect existing concrete work to be exposed to view and other finished materials from damage and staining resulting from concreting operations. Cover sills, ledges and other surfaces with protective coverings as necessary to protect the work.
F. Normal Weight Concrete: Masonry Core Fill, Bond Beams, Lintels, and Pilasters 1. Minimum Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi.
E. Slabs on Grade:
2. Water$Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.60 by weight.
1. Verify subgrade compaction tests have been performed and are accepted.
3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/8" Class 1S.
2. Verify subgrade is level and within acceptable tolerances.
4. Maximum Chloride Ion Content: .15 percent by weight of cement.
3. Verify subgrade is substantially dry with no freestanding water, muddy spots, or soft spots and is free from snow or ice.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
4. Verify completion of all underfloor mechanical and electrical work.
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.2
5. Provide 3 inch minimum cover bottom and 3 inch minimum cover sides at electrical conduits and other embedded items.
PREPARATION A. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.3
A. Clean existing surface to remove dust, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds and other items that would be detrimental to bonding.
B. Do not embed pipes other than non$aluminum electrical conduit or snow melting pipes in any structural concrete. 1. Any pipes embedded in concrete, even those meeting the guidelines given herein, are subject to acceptance by Architect. Remove any unacceptable pipes. 2. Outside diameter of pipes placed in slabs and walls shall not exceed 25% of the thickness of the slab or wall and shall be placed in groups of not more than 3. Space pipes within a group at not less than 4 diameters clear. Space groups of pipes at not less than 48 diameters clear. 3. Maximum total dimension or area of pipes and their fittings embedded in concrete beams and columns shall not exceed, at any location, 15% of least section dimension or 4% of the gross cross sectional area.
NON$COMPOSITE (UNBONDED) TOPPING
B. Saturate existing surface with clean water (8 hours minimum), remove excess water. 3.4
CONCRETE MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. B. Use cooled or heated water in accordance with ACI 306 and 305. C. Air$entraining and chemical admixtures, if approved, shall be charged into mixer as a solution and dispensed by an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Powdered admixtures shall be weighted or measured by volume as recommended by the manufacturer. Superplasticizer may be added at the job site to maintain slump.
C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to existing or previously placed concrete, clean existing surface to remove dust, dirt, grease, oil, curing
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
033000 5 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
impossible to secure concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished by the Vendor, the Architect may order such changes in the proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the desired properties, subject to the stated requirements. Make any changes so ordered without extra compensation.
D. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided such admixtures are added separately during batching sequence. Admixtures used in combination shall retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. E. Ready mixed concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of rated capacities. Schedule and dispatch trucks from the batching point so that they shall arrive at the site of the work just before the concrete is required to avoid excessive mixing of concrete while waiting.
3.5
PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Follow recommended practice of ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs following recommended practices of ACI 302.1R.
F. Do not add water after the initial introduction of the mixing water for the batch, except at the start of discharge, subject to the conditions below. In this case, the producer may add water in an amount not exceeding that allowed to achieve the design water/cement ratio. The drum blades shall then be turned an additional 30 revolutions minimum at mixing speed. Water shall not be added to the batch at any later time. Reject concrete if water is added and these conditions are not met.
C. Do not place in rain, sleet or snow unless exposed concrete surface is protected from moisture. D. If, for any reason, the concrete pour is delayed for more than 45 minutes, bulkhead pour at last acceptable construction joint. Immediately remove excess concrete and clean all forms and in situ concrete surfaces. E. Do not permit concrete to drop more than 4 feet from its point of release to mixers, hoppers, or conveyances. Use tremmies, chutes, or pumps as necessary to place columns and walls.
1. The measured slump of the concrete is less than that specified in the mix design.
F. Deposit concrete in wall forms in layers not greater than 24 inches in depth. Consolidate each layer before the succeeding layer is placed.
2. No more than 60 minutes have elapsed from the time of batching. 3. The ready$mix plant is notified and approves. 4. Truck tickets indicate maximum amount of water to be added.
G. Place concrete as near as possible to its final position to prevent segregation. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete.
5. Water is added in a manner to control volume.
H. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
6. Special Inspector is notified, if concrete placement requires inspection.
I. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
G. Maximum concrete temperature delivered to Project site shall be 85 degrees F. H. To use materials other than those accepted originally, or if the materials from the source originally accepted change in characteristics, make additional tests with proposed new materials that will verify production of concrete meeting with the stated requirements without causing objectionable change in the color or appearance of the structure. Pay the testing agency for these additional tests. Do not use concrete made from such different materials until the Architect has given his approval. I. If, during the progress of the work, it is
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
J. Immediately remove concrete spilled on existing surfaces. K. Concrete at tops of forms: Strike concrete at top of wall, footing, and pier forms. Smooth and float to texture comparable to adjacent formed surfaces. L. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.6
JOINTS A. Vertical construction joints in walls shall be a maximum of 80 feet on center and shall be located as shown on structural drawings.
033000 6 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
Vertical control joints in wall shall be a maximum of 20 feet on center between construction joints and shall be located as shown on the structural drawings. If locations are not shown, locate joints at edges of piers integral with wall and near corners and in concealed locations where possible. B. Horizontal joints in walls and columns shall be at underside of slabs, beams and girders and at top of footings. At least 24 hours shall elapse between placing concrete in a wall or column and placing concrete in an area supported by the wall or column. C. Reinforcing shall be continuous across construction joints. Provide dowels where detailed or requested. Joints in walls shall be keyed with longitudinal keys at least 1$1/2 inches deep unless detailed otherwise. 3.7
SLAB JOINTING A. Locate slab on grade construction and control joints as given on Drawings and submit drawings showing proposed locations. Cut joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregate dislodgement. Use a "Soff Cut" saw to cut to a depth of 1 1/4" immediately after final finishing. Use a conventional saw to cut to a depth of one$fourth the slab thickness or as shown on the drawings. Complete sawing within 12 hours of placement. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.
3.8
CONSOLIDATION A. Consolidation of concrete shall conform to ACI 301, unless modified herein. B. Follow recommended practices of ACI 309, unless modified herein. C. Consolidate concrete using internal vibrators. D. Maintain a spare vibrator at the Project Site during all placing operations.
3.9
CONCRETE FINISHING
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
A. Concrete Finish Schedule 1. Concealed walls, columns, and slabs: As$cast rough form finish. 2. Exposed walls, columns, beams, and wall caps: Smooth form finish. 3. Exposed interior concrete floors and floors to receive carpeting: Troweled finish. 4. Exterior platforms, aprons, and loading docks: Broom finish. 5. Floors to receive thin$set ceramic tile, resilient flooring, and vinyl tile: Flat troweled finish. B. Formed Surfaces 1. Repair surface defects, immediately after removing formwork. 2. Provide finishes per ACI 301 as scheduled and to the following tolerances. 3. Rough Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/2 inch or more in height. Rough form finish per ACI 301. Class C surface per ACI 117. 4. Smooth Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/8 inch or more in height. Smooth form finish per ACI 301. Class B surface per ACI 117. C. Unformed Surfaces 1. Provide finishes per ACI 301 as scheduled herein or noted on Drawings and to the following tolerances. a. Troweled Finish: Moderately flat tolerance per ACI 117. Slope slab to floor drains. b. Flat Troweled Finish: Flat tolerance per ACI 117 c. Broom Finish: Moderately flat tolerance per ACI 117. 2. Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains. 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308.1 as amended by this section. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature above 55° F for the period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete as follows: 033000 7 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Curing may be terminated earlier than the minimum time above if at least one of the following conditions is met: 1. At least 4 field cylinders for each pour, prepared and cured according to ASTM C31 alongside the concrete they represent, reach 70% of the specified 28$day strength. 2. The concrete temperature is maintained above 50°F and laboratory cylinders reach 85% of the specified 28$day strength. D. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. If forms are removed during the curing period, cure by one of the methods specified for unformed surfaces. 1. Keep steel forms heated by the sun and all wood forms wet during the curing period. E. Unformed Surfaces: Apply curing materials as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete's sufficiently hard to be undamaged by the curing process. 1. Waterproof paper or polyethylene film: Use appropriate color of film based on ambient temperature. Sprinkle concrete with water as necessary during application of covering. Lap edges and ends at least 6 inches, and seal laps. Weight down covering to prevent movement. Patch holes and tears that occur during the curing period. 2. Curing Compounds: Apply strictly according to the manufacturer's instructions using low pressure spray equipment. 3. Use the following methods: a. Interior surfaces receiving adhesive applied finishes: Cure using wet curing methods or by covering with waterproof paper or polyethylene film. b. Exterior concrete: Cure using exterior concrete curing compound. c. All other unformed surfaces: Cure using a strippable curing compound, by wet curing methods, or by covering with waterproof paper or polyethylene film.
4. Protect concrete from excessive changes in temperature during the curing period and at the termination of the curing process. Changes in the temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one hour or 50° F in any 24 hour period. 3.11 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Apply recommended practices of ACI 305R when wind, temperature and humidity conditions cause evaporation rates (using Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R) exceeding the following: 1. 0.2 lb/sq ft/hr for concrete with Portland cement only. 2. 0.1 lb/sq ft/hr for concrete with Portland cement and fly ash. 3. 0.05 lb/sq ft/hr for concrete with Portland cement and silica fume. B. Determine and document expected evaporation rate for the duration of concrete pour. C. Wet or fog forms and reinforcing immediately prior to placement to bring temperature to ambient conditions. D. Maintain surface moisture during the period immediately after placement and before final finishing by using wind breaks, fog sprayers, evaporation retarders, or shade (individually or in combination) to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking. 1. Use evaporation retarders according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not use as a finishing aid. 3.12 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Concrete placed during cold weather shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.1. B. Cold weather is defined as 3 or more successive days when the average daily outdoor temperature is less than 40 degrees F. C. All surfaces, including subgrade and reinforcing shall be above 35 degrees F. prior to placing concrete. Surfaces shall not be more than 10 degrees warmer than the minimum concrete temperatures required by ACI 306.1. D. Maintain cold weather protection for the following duration but not less than the duration specified in "Curing and Protection" above:
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
033000 8 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1. Maintain protection for a minimum of 48 hours after placement of concrete. 2. Maintain protection for columns and supported slabs until at least 4 field cylinders, prepared and cured in accordance with ASTM C31, reach 85 percent of the specified 28$day strength, or, laboratory cured cylinders reach the specified 28$day strength. E. Submit detailed procedures for cold weather concreting for engineer's information only. F. Follow recommended practices of ACI 306R. Subject to other requirements of this section, a non$chloride accelerator may be used to normalize initial set and for early strength gain. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Testing and Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provisions of Section 014533. 2. Personnel Qualifications a. Testing Technician: Technical I $ ACI Certified Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I, employed by a testing laboratory with C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of Standards, under the direct supervision of a licensed civil/structural engineer. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all reports. b. Special Inspector – Structural I: ICBO Certified Concrete Inspector, ACI Concrete Construction Inspector, or a graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the Structural Engineer of Record (SER), with experience in the design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
3. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Tests for cast in place concrete. Qualifications: Technical I. 1) Compression test specimens: ASTM C31. One set of four standard cylinders of concrete for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured specimens. 2) Compressive strength tests: ASTM C39. One set of four cylinders for each day's pour between one and 25 cubic yards. If a day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, one set of four cylinders for each additional 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof. One specimen tested at 7 days for information, two at 28 days for acceptance, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. (When frequency of testing will provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct at least five strength tests from randomly selected batches. If fewer than five batches are used, conduct one test from each batch.) 3) Slump: ASTM C143. One test at point of discharge for each set of compression test specimens; additional tests when concrete consistency appears to have changed. 4) Air entrainment: ASTM C231. Test the first batch of air entrained concrete and one additional test for each set of compression test specimens. 5) Concrete temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is below 40°F or above 80°F and each time a set of compression test specimens is made.
033000 9 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
b.
c.
d.
Concrete mix verification. Qualifications: Technical I. Verify the following: 1) Mixer truck trip ticket conforms to approved mix design. 2) Total water added to mix on site does not exceed that allowed by concrete mix design. 3) Concrete quality is indicative of adequate mixing time, consistency, and relevant time limits. Observe preparation for and placement of all concrete, excluding slabs on grade, strip footings without transverse reinforcement, and unbonded topping slabs. Additional exclusions may be noted on the structural drawings. Special Inspector must be present during entire concrete pour. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following: 1) Acceptable general condition of concrete base prior to placement. 2) Concrete conveyance and depositing avoids segregation and contamination. 3) Concrete is properly consolidated. 4) Reinforcement remains at proper location. Observe protection and curing methods for all concrete, excluding slabs on grade, strip footings without transverse reinforcement, and unbonded topping slabs Additional exclusions may be noted on the structural drawings. Observations to be made periodically during the curing period. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following: 1) Specified curing procedures are followed. 2) Specified hot and cold weather procedures are followed.
e.
Observe all bolts installed in concrete. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following: 1) Specified size, type, spacing, configuration, embedment, and quantity. 2) Proper concrete placement and consolidation around all bolts.
C. Contractor Requirements: 1. Provide services of an independent laboratory to perform the following: a. Make and test additional cylinders to determine time for form removal. b. Make and test additional cylinders to determine termination of curing procedures. c. Make and test additional cylinders to determine termination of cold weather practices. 2. Provide the services of a qualified technical representative to instruct the construction team in proper batching, mixing, placement, and finishing of fiber reinforced concrete. 3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect/Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Acceptance criteria for concrete strength tests shall be as outlined in section 5.6 of ACI 318. If concrete does not meet acceptance criteria, investigation generally following the provisions of section 5.6.5 of ACI 318 will be used at the discretion of the Structural Engineer of Record. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all costs associated with this investigation. If, in the judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record, the structural adequacy cannot be shown by this investigation, the Contractor shall remove and replace the concrete in question. 3.15 CLEAN$UP A. Perform concrete washout only in designated area as required by either Division 31 section Erosion Control or the project NPDES permit.
END OF SECTION
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
033000 10 of 10 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
K. PCI MNL$126 $ Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1998.
SECTION 034113 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
L. PCI MNL$135 $ Tolerance Manual For Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2000.
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
M. Minnesota State Building Code (MSBC); 2007
SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast floor planks.
N. International Building Code (IBC); 2006 1.4
B. Connection plates with brackets and hangers, steel headers.
A. Design planks in accordance with the requirements of MSBC, PCI MNL$120, PCI MNL 126, ACI 318, and ACI 301.
C. Grouting plank joint keys. 1.3
B. Design connections in accordance with PCI MNL$123.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 $ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.
C. Design components to withstand dead loads and design loads in the configuration indicated on the drawings and as follows:
B. ACI 318 $ Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.
1. Maximum Allowable LL Deflection of Floor Planks: 1/360 span. 2. Design components to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building structural members and clearances of intended openings.
C. ASTM A36/A36M $ Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. D. ASTM A615/A615M $ Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet$Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
3. Design loadings shall include initial handling and erection conditions and all dead and live loads specified on the contract documents including partition weights given on the drawings. Precast supplier shall review architectural and structural drawings to verify adequacy of precast members supporting partitions and other non$structural elements near openings, at edges, etc.
E. ASTM C881 $ Standard Specification for Epoxy$Resin$Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002 F. AWS B2.1 $ Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; American Welding Society; 2009. G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M $ Structural Welding Code $ Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. H. AWS D1.4/D1.4M $ Structural Welding Code $ Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011. I. PCI MNL$116 $ Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1999, Fourth Edition. J. PCI MNL$123 $ Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1988, Second Edition. PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4. Grouted Keys: Capable of transmitting horizontal shear force of 2,000 lb/ft. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 $ Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, openings intended to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials. 1. Erection drawings: Include member piece 034113 " 1 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Minnesota.
marks with size and shape of each member; plans/elevations showing all products furnished by supplier; sections/details showing connections and cast in items; joints and openings between members and structure; description of all loose cast$in field hardware; locations of field installed anchors, fire ratings of all members; and all dead, live and other applicable design loads. Include anticipated camber and deflection of precast members where camber or deflection exceeds L/360 or 1/2", and where camber and deflection vary more than 1/4" between adjacent units. 2. Production drawings on request. Include elevation view of each member, sections/details to show quantity and position of reinforcing, anchors, and inserts, handling devices, dimensions and finishes, strand prestress, concrete strength, and estimated camber. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. D. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of experience. E. Welder Qualifications: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS B2.1. 1.7
A. Convene at least one week before starting work of this section. B. Discuss anchor and weld plate locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling. 1.8
1. Submit calculations for headers and connections.
B. Storage:
2. Submit calculations for plank on request.
1. Store all units off ground. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernible.
3. Review of calculations will be for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Contractor remains responsible for correctness and completeness of submitted calculations.
2. Separate stacked members by battens across full width of each bearing point. 3. Stack so that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. Do not use upper member of stacked tier as storage area for shorter member or heavy equipment. 1.9
B. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, in categories C2 or C2A at the time of bidding. B. Designer Qualifications: Under direct
PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate with framing components directly associated with the work of this section.
F. Precast plant certification on request. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection.
D. Calculations
E. Submit sufficient evidence to the Structural Engineer, on request, that all persons performing shop and field welding are currently certified by AWS for the procedures they are performing.
PRE$INSTALLATION MEETING
C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 034113 " 2 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
as needed for plank openings
033000. B. Tensioning Steel Tendons: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250, Grade 270; seven$wire stranded steel cable; stress relieved, or low$ relaxation type; full length without splices; uncoated.
2.4
A. Conform to PCI MNL$116 and PCI MNL$ 135. 2.5
A. See Section 033000 for testing of concrete and grout, materials, and mix designs.
D. Cement Grout: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.
B. Produce planks in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL$116. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast planks. Make records available upon request.
ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: Plates, angles, items connected to steel framing members, and inserts: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel; prime painted.
C. Inspect stressing tendons before delivery for compliance with specified standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
B. Bearing Pads: High density plastic, 1/8 inch thick, smooth on both sides. Korolath or approved equal. 2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420) deformed steel bars.
E. Epoxy$Resin Grout: Two components mineral$filled epoxy$resin: ASTM C881. 2.2
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Verify supporting structure is ready to receive work including all bearing surfaces and location and alignment of inserts and anchorage items cast in the structure.
FABRICATION
B. Notify the General Contractor in writing of required corrections, if unsatisfactory conditions or deficiencies are observed. Do not begin work until corrections are made.
A. Planks: Plant cast, prestressed, hollow core. 1. Dimensions as indicated on drawings. B. Manufacture in general compliance with PCI MNL 116 C. Weld reinforcing in accordance with AWS D1.4. Provide AWS certified welders for all shop welding. D. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated. E. Provide openings required by other sections, at locations indicated. Provide openings larger than 8" square or 8" round. F. Cut exposed ends flush. G. Plant Finish: PCI MNL$116. 1. Floor Members: Commercial Grade. H. Connecting and Supporting Steel Devices: Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or surfaces requiring field welding. I. Accurately place prestressing strands and reinforcing steel. Keep strands or wires clean of substances harmful to bonding of strand to concrete. J. Provide and fabricate structural steel headers PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing.
3.3
ERECTION A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. B. Install bearing pads at bearing ends of planks as indicated. C. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints, as erection progresses. D. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from staining. E. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and grouting. F. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment, as work progresses. 034113 " 3 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
Receive written approval of opening locations by the precast prestressed manufacturer and Architect before cutting. Repair all unsightly spalls or chips caused by cutting.
G. Secure units in place as work progresses. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. H. Cooperate with other trades in permitting insertion of anchors, hangers, electrical outlets, etc.
B. Receive approval of type and location of field installed fasteners from precast prestressed manufacturer and Architect. Anchors shall not contact prestressing steel.
I. Install steel headers as indicated on the Contract Drawings or required for openings. J. Prior to placing non$structural topping, thoroughly clean surface removing all dirt and excess laitance, saturate the precast surfaces, remove excess water, and slush with a neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete. 3.4
3.7
A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations. B. Provide non$combustible shields during welding operations. C. Protect cores of plank from collection of water during construction, and drain any moisture that accumulates.
GROUT A. Grout all keyways full and strike off flush with top surface. Before it hardens, remove any grout that seeps to bottom of plank.
3.8
D. Place grout at temperatures above 32 degrees Fahrenheit (and rising). Maintain grout above freezing until it reaches its design strength. E. Grout may be placed at temperatures below 32 degrees Fahrenheit if special precautions are taken to prevent grout from freezing prior to its initial set, to limit grout to a single freeze thaw cycle, and to maintain heat, once applied, until the grout reaches its design strength. Do not load plank under these conditions until grout reaches its design strength. Provide outline of procedures to be used and obtain approval of Architect/Engineer prior to placing grout at temperatures below 32 degrees Fahrenheit. 3.5
CLEANING A. Clean weld marks, dirt, and blemishes from surface of exposed members.
B. Make plank$to$plank joints smooth using grout, troweled smooth. Transition differential elevation of adjoining planks with grout to a maximum slope of 1:12. C. Grout cores of plank as required for anchorage of structural steel and miscellaneous metal items as shown on drawings.
PROTECTION
B. Clean and prime exposed steel and welds immediately after erection. 3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 051200 $ Structural Metal Framing 2. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following: a. Visually inspect welds connecting embeds to structural steel supporting members. b. Visually inspect welds at all connections between precast members.
END OF SECTION
TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to non$ cumulative tolerances of PCI MNL$135.
3.6
FIELD OPENINGS AND ANCHORS BY OTHER TRADES A. Field cut openings smaller than 8" in all directions using power saws or core drills.
PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
034113 " 4 of 4 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS D. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions o f th e C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Exterior Natural Mortar for Unit Masonry Systems to Match Existing. C. Interior N atural M ortar a nd G rout for U nit Masonry Systems to Match Existing. D. Unit Masonry Systems; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; I ncluding A ll R elated Reinforcements, Anchorage and Accessories. E. Clay Unit Masonry Work Includes: F. Cavity Wall Accessories.
G. Section 072726 – Weather Resistant Barrier: Weather resistant barrier at unit masonry walls where floor slab is below grade, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. H. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping: Sealing penetrations through f ire-rated m asonry w alls, an d f ire-stopping sealant a t a ll c onstruction j oints in fire-rated w alls and partitions.
J. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: F finishing of unit masonry wall surfaces.
G. Masonry Anchor Systems. H. Masonry Through-Wall Flashing. PRODUCT INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
F. Section 072100 - Building Insulation: Rigid perimeter insulation, cavity wall insulation, loose fill insulation f or m asonry u nit co res, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings.
I. Section 079200 - Joint S ealers: S ealant a nd j oint backing at control joints, and other areas indicated on the Drawings.
1. Face Brick.
1.2
E. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: T reated w ood blocking and shims.
NOT
1.4
ield
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
Framing:
B. Product Date: S ubmit manufacturer’s d ata f or masonry u nit ch aracteristics f abricated wire reinforcement, mortar and grout design mix, and mortar and grout admixture limitations.
C. Section 052100 - Steel J oist Framing: P lacement of steel bearing pads for joists.
C. Samples: S ubmit s amples o f each t ype of masonry unit specified to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.
A. Section 042731 Reinforced Unit Masonry: CMU and mortar. B. Section 051200 - Structural S teel Placement of steel anchors.
D. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels. E. Section 072100 – Building I nsulation: C avity w all insulation. F. Section 076200 - Sheet M etal F lashing a nd Trim: Placement of reglets for flashing. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 032000 - Concrete R einforcement: S teel reinforcing for cores of unit masonry systems. C. Section 03300 0 - Cast-in-Place C oncrete: Concrete for cores of unit masonry systems.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
D. Certification: Provide m anufacturer’s w ritten certification th at masonry tie s, anchors a nd joint reinforcement comply with specified requirements. 1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Work of this Section w ith minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Installer: C ompany s pecializing in performing the Work o f th is S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) years documented experience. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes: Comply with the International Building Code and the applicable r equirements o f g overning authorities and codes o f t he t ypes o f m asonry 042000 - 1 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
construction s hown, e xcept w here m ore s tringent requirements are shown.
3. Prism Test: T est each t ype o f co nstruction provided, per ASTM C1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
B. Coordination: R eview in stallation p rocedures a nd coordinate with other w ork th at m ust b e in tegrated with m asonry. C oordinate m asonry flashing with flashing w ork s pecified el sewhere t o insure a complete, watertight flashing system designed to shed water to the building exterior. C oordinate conduit in walls with v ertical r einforcement lo cations to a void conflicts. C. Fire P erformance C haracteristics: W here i ndicated, provide materials and co nstruction w hich ar e identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has b een d etermined b y t esting i n co mpliance w ith ASTM E119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization o r b y an other m eans, as accep table t o authority having jurisdiction. D. Single S ource R esponsibility f or M asonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a u niform blend within the ranges accepted for t hese c haracteristics, f rom o ne m anufacturer f or each d ifferent p roduct r equired f or each co ntinuous surface or visually related surfaces.
4. Seven ( 7) d ay co mpressive strength t est o f the laboratory mix d esign s hall meet o r ex ceed t he specified tw enty-eight ( 28) d ay d esign compressive strength. 5. Prepare m ortar t est cubes i n acco rdance w ith ASTM C270 for laboratory tests. 1.7
A. Provide m ock-up panel u nder pr ovisions of S ection 014500. B. Mock-Up P anel: P rior to s tarting m asonry work, construct a s ample w all p anel, including cavity wall system with face brick, masonry unit back-up, mortar, and all ties and accessories. 1. Sample P anel: F our ( 4) f eet l ong by f our (4) feet high in size an d r epresenting t he p roposed face brick color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship. 2. Locate sample panel on site at location mutually agreed upon by the Architect and Contractor.
E. Design Prescriptive Masonry C onstruction i n H ighWind Areas in accordance with the International Building Code. F. Fire-Rated C oncrete M asonry U nits: Note requirements indicated on the Drawings for wall and partition ty pes w ith v arious h ourly f ire ratings. Provide written certification by U L, o r a n independent laboratory to the Architect that fire-rated masonry m aterials h ave b een m anufactured i n compliance with the governing c odes i n r egard t o face s hell an d ag gregate f or t he r atings indicated. Units stamped with UL certification seal shall also be accompanied by certificates. G. Protect construction joints in stalled in f ire-resistive walls r equired t o h ave p rotected o penings w ith an approved material d esigned t o p rovide t he s ame degree o f f ire-resistance as the wall in w hich it is installed when tested in accordance with International Building Code, Section 713. H. Testing CMU and Brick Masonry Mortar: 1. Test Mortar mixes, as specified, by Independent Testing Laboratory ( 014523) i n acco rdance with ASTM C780, for each type of mortar specified. 2. Test mix designs prior to beginning construction of CMU and brick masonry walls.
042000 - 2 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
MOCK-UP
3. Maintain sample panel in place until the exterior masonry work h as b een co mpleted, t hen demolish and remove panel from the site. 1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect P roducts to s ite under provisions of Section 016000. B. Accept delivery of m aterials o nly i n u nopened an d undamaged containers; handle and s tore ab ove an d under weather-tight covers. C. Accept concrete masonry units on s ite. I nspect f or damage. D. Store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from ex cessive t emperature ch anges. Stockpile aggregates to prevent c ontamination f rom f oreign materials. Remove damaged or otherwise unsuitable materials immediately from the site. E. Store masonry units on p allets an d k eep co vered t o protect from moisture damage. F. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry and protected against moisture, freezing and foreign matter. G. In storage, segregate pallets of various fire-rated units from each o ther, an d f rom o ther n on-rated u nits;
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School maintain c lear in dication o f th e r ating o f th e s tored units for easy identification and selection. 1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials an d s urrounding ai r t emperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during and fortyeight (48) hours after completion of masonry work. B. Cold Weather P rotection: When t emperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F, pre-condition materials and finish work i n acco rdance w ith “Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Masonry Construction” a s p ublished b y the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council. C. Hot W eather P rotection: P rotect masonry construction from direct exposure t o w ind a nd s un when erected i n am bient ai r t emperature o f 9 9 degrees F in shade w ith r elative h umidity le ss th an 50%. 1.10
SEQUENCING
A. Do n ot a pply u niform f loor or r oof l oading for at least t welve ( 12) h ours af ter erecting masonry walls or columns. B. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least three (3) days after erecting masonry walls or columns. 1.11
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate th e m asonry w ork w ith in stallation of window and door anchors, and a ll ot her r elated trades.
Addition and Remodeling
2.3
A. Single W ythe J oint R einforcement: P refabricated truss type reinforcement for horizontal mortar joints; hot-dipped galvanized to A STM A 153, C lass B -2 (1.50 oz . ps f) a fter f abrication. C old-drawn s teel conforming to ANSI/ASTM A82, No. 9 side rods and No. 9 cross ties; as f abricated i n acco rdance w ith ASCE/ACI 5 30; an d as m anufactured b y Dur-OWall, Inc., Hohmann and B arnard, Inc., or approved equal. B. Multiple W ythe J oint R einforcement: Prefabricated ladder type with adjustable rectangular wall ties with moisture dip; hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM A153, Class B -2 ( 1.50 oz . ps f) a fter fabrication. Cold drawn s teel c onforming t o ANSI/ASTM A82, No. 9 side r ods a nd N o. 9 cross t ies; f abricated in accordance with ASCE/ACI 530; and as manufactured b y D ur-O-Wall, I nc., H ohmann a nd Barnard, Inc., or approved equal. C. Reinforcing Steel: T ypes s pecified in S ection 032000; unprotected finish. D. Cavity Wall Ties: P refabricated adjustable assembly reinforcing of 3/16-inch thick steel wire with two (2) inch legs b y le ngths r equired w ith m oisture d rips; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Veneer Wall Anchors an d T ies: P refabricated D W10 hot-dipped g alvanized ad justable w all an chors with 3 /16 in ch d iameter V ee w all ties a s manufactured b y H ohmann & B arnard, I nc., or approved equal. 2.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 042731. 2.2
FACE BRICK UNITS
A. Face B rick U nits: ANSI/ASTM C 216, T ype FB S, Grade SW, modular 3-5/8 x 2-1/4 x 7-5/8 inches; as manufactured by W atsontown B rick and supplied by Tiger S tone a nd B rick L LC (No Substitutions Allowed). B. Profiles, s izes an d s hapes ar e as i ndicated on the Drawings. 1. Face Brick 1: St. Michael’s Blend; 45% Empire KT Type 8; 55% Tidewater Matt Type 5.
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
CAVITY WALL ACCESSORIES
A. Masonry Mat: F luid c onducting, no n-absorbent, mold a nd m ildew r esistant, odor less pol ymer mesh consisting of 1 00% r ecycled p olyester w ith P VC binder; 1 .0 i nch thickness; “CavClear”, o r approved equal. B. Air-spaces exceeding one (1) inch, use two (2) sheets of mat at the bottom o f th e c avity to a dequately protect weep system. 2.5
MASONRY ANCHOR SYSTEMS
A. Masonry A nchor S ystems: H ilti, I nc., I TW Ramset/Read H ead, The Rawlplug C ompany, o r approved equal by the Architect/Engineer. Masonry anchor systems require prior approval by the Architect/Engineer for type, size, location and finish.
2. Face Brick 2: 75% Tidewater Matt type 5; 25% Arlington type 5. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
042000 - 3 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
2.6
THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
A. Through-Wall F lashing: F ully s elf-adhering, s elfhealing, composite flexible flashing, total 40 mil membrane consisting of 3 2 m ils o f p liable, h ighly adhesive rubberized asphalt, co mpletely an d integrally b onded to a 8 mil, high-density, c rosslaminated polyethylene f ilm; “ Perm-A-Barrier” W all Membrane by W. R. Grace, Inc., “CCW-705 T WF” by Carlisle Coating and Waterproofing; “Air-Shield” by W. R . Meadows, “ Polyguard 401” by Polyguard Products, Inc., or approved equal. 1. Flashing Joints: Lapped a minimum of four (4) inches, flashing adhered with a suitable product as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Prefinished sheet metal termination strip; color selected b y A rchitect. R efer to Specification Section 076200. 2.7
ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Filler: ASTM D 994; W .R. M eadows "Sealtight" asphalt expansion joint filler, 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick by maximum lengths, waterproof, flexible, permanent and self-sealing, or approved equal. B. Column Wrap: C oated cellulose material, sheets 1/4 inch thick, used c ontinuously a round s tructural columns and frames to keep separation from masonry units; “Column B oxboard” as m anufactured b y Williams Products, Inc., or approved equal. C. Nailing Strips: S oftwood, p reservative tr eated f or moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. D. Weeps: N on-organic c otton r ope w ick, minimum twelve (12) inches long. E. Cell V ent W eep-Hole V entilator: C ellular composition, manufactured from pol ypropylene c opolymer m aterials, 3 /8” w ide x 2-1/2” hi gh x 4 ”, color as selected by Architect; manufactured by U. S. Wire, or approved equal. F. Cleaning Solutions: G eneral purpose cleaning agent, not ha rmful t o m asonry w ork or adjacent materials; “Sure-Klean No. 600, P ro/So/Co, I nc., or approved equal. G. Compressible Joint Material: Urethane open-cell foam, 1/2 inch thick by width of masonry unit, adhesive on one (1) side only. H. Cavity W all V entilators: A luminum, 2 -1/4 i nches high b y 3 /8 inches wide; field p aint to match mortar color.
042000 - 4 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School I. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D226, T ype 1 ( No. 15 lb. asphalt felt).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that all treated wood blocking is in place, and properly installed. C. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. D. Verify th at b uilt-in ite ms a re in p roper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. E. Beginning o f in stallation m eans in staller accep ts existing conditions. 3.2
MORTAR AND GROUT INSTALLATION
A. Install m ortar an d g rout i n acco rdance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Work grout into m asonry c ores a nd c avities t o eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. E. Grout fill a ll s teel d oor f rames in m asonry w alls which have the following conditions; solid core wood doors at tached, s teel d oors at tached, an d al doors over thirty-two (32) inches wide attached. F. Exterior mortar joints: mechanically tooled, concave joints. 3.3
PREPARATION
A. Direct an d co ordinate p lacement o f metal anchors supplied to other Sections. B. Provide te mporary b racing d uring in stallation o f masonry work. Maintain in p lace u ntil b uilding structure provides permanent bracing. 3.4
GENERAL ERECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all masonry construction aligned, plumb, and true in required layout, making straight level courses, unless otherwise indicated. Construct masonry to full thickness as shown with masonry units of sizes noted UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School and specified, us ing w hole uni ts w herever p ossible. When r equired, cut masonry neatly b y p ower-saw t o obtain sharp edges without d amage t o t he uni t, a s approved for pr oviding r equired bon d pa ttern a nd proper f it a t a ll a djoining ite ms. Build-in ite ms furnished by other trades, and leave accurate openings ne cessary f or s ubsequent i nstallation o f other work, in a manner to maintain required strength and appearance of masonry construction. 1. Fill solidly with mortar around conduit and sleeves passing through masonry work. 2. Build-in a ll lo ose a ngle s teel lin tels, p rovide bearing specified and bed lintels in mortar. 3. Provide threaded s teel an chors where i ndicated on the Drawings to b e b uilt in to m asonry construction for attachment o f w ork b y o ther trades. C onform to r equirements o f ASTM A307, and i nclude nuts w ith ha rdened washers where required, as approved. Provide minimum 1/2-inch shank diameter by ten (10) inch length with pigtail end, where size an d t ype ar e n ot indicated on the Drawings. P rovide hot-dipped galvanized anchors w here u sed i n ex terior exposed construction. 4. Grout steel frames in masonry walls solidly with mortar. P erform gr outing w ithout c logging holes, boxes, and spaces required for the proper installation, and operation of hardware. 5. Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining the face o f m asonry t o b e left exposed or painted. Remove g rout an d m ortar f rom t hese s urfaces immediately. 6. Protect base o f m asonry w alls f rom r ain splashed mud and mortar splatters b y means o f coverings spread o n gr ound or ov er w all surfaces. 3.5
COURSING
A. Establish lines, le vels, a nd c oursing indicated o n the Drawings. Protect from displacement.
Addition and Remodeling
3.6
PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay s olid m asonry u nits in f ull b ed o f m ortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of j oints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do n ot s hift o r ta p m asonry u nits a fter mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job-site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to pr ovide s traight, c lean, u nchipped e dges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where ceramic or quarry wall tile is s cheduled, r esilient b ase is s cheduled, o r bitumen dampproofing is applied. 3.7
COMPRESSIBLE JOINT MATERIAL
A. Install the compressible joint material horizontally on top o f th e m asonry u nit b elow s teel s helf a ngles to provide an expansion joint to allow deflection of the angle. Fill this j oint with b acker r od a nd sealant o n the weather side. 3.8
WEEPS AND VENTILATORS
A. Install w eep h oles i n v eneer masonry at maximum sixteen ( 16) i nches o n cen ter horizontally above through-wall flashing, above s helf a ngles, lin tels, bottom o f w alls, an d el sewhere as i ndicated on the Drawings. B. Install c avity v entilators in m asonry a t m aximum forty-eight (48) inches on center horizontally, at two (2) c ourses a bove t hrough-wall b ase f lashing an d three (3) courses below top of wall. 3.9
CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form v ertical a nd h orizontal j oints of uniform thickness.
A. Do not pe rmit m ortar t o dr op or a ccumulate i nto cavity a ir space or to plug weep holes. N o bridging of solid material between the wythes is allowed.
C. Lay f ace brick units i n running b ond. C ourse three brick units a nd three mortar j oints to e qual e ight ( 8) inches. Form concave mortar joints.
B. Install masonry mat in cavity wall in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. I nstall f ull w all h eight unless o therwise in dicated o n the Drawings. Install first layer to fill width of cavity wall.
D. Exterior face brick shall match existing coursing and should duplicate existing header and soldier courses.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
C. To avoid dropping mortar into the cavity, the mason should follow the following techniques: 042000 - 5 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. After spreading t he mortar bed, back bevel cavity edge with the flat of the trowel.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joints below top of walls.
2. Lay the units with a r oll w hich s queezes t he mortar toward the outside face of the unit.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum six (6) inches. Extend m inimum s ixteen ( 16) i nches e ach s ide of opening.
3. Flatten any fins that do occur by smearing with the trowel. Never cut fins. D. Build inner wythe ahead of o uter w ythe t o r eceive cavity insulation air/vapor barrier adhesive. 3.10
CAVITY WALL INSTALLATION
ACCESSORIES
3.14
B. Install in s tructural w all s ystems to maintain proper movement i solation, an d i n acco rdance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Column wrap to maintain proper movement isolation, and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. CAVITY WALL INSTALLATION
INSULATION
–
A. Install insulation according to Manufacturer’s written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. 3.12
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement sixteen (16) inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum sixteen (16) inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum six (6) inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings. E. Reinforce j oint c orners a nd in tersections w ith strap anchors sixteen (16) inches on center. 3.13
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE CAVITY WALL MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement sixteen (16) inches on center maximum. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. E xtend minimum sixteen (16) inches each side of opening.
042000 - 6 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
F. Reinforce j oint c orners a nd in tersections w ith strap anchors sixteen (16) inches on center.
-
A. Install c ontinuously in a ir s pace o f e xterior cavity walls with or w ithout in sulation, a nd in a ccordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.11
E. Embed anchors at tached t o s tructural m embers. Embed anchorages in every second block.
MASONRY ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install all masonry anchor systems in accordance with anchor manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.15
MASONRY THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
A. Install T hrough-wall f lashing o ver a ll e xterior windows, relieving angles, doors, tops of walls, at the inside base of all cavity walls, and also flash under all sills, monolithic or not. E xtend both ends of the sill flashing beyond the jamb line a nd t urned up a t l east one (1) inch i nto the wall cr eating an "end dam" to divert moisture toward the wall face. B. Where t he u nderside o f t he s ill d oes n ot slope away from the wall or where a drip is not provided, extend flashing 1 /2 in ch o ut f rom th e o utside f ace o f wall and bend down to form a drip. C. Extend flashing o ver ve neer, t urn up minimum e ight (8) i nches a nd be d i nto m ortar j oint of m asonry, or seal to sheathing over steel stud back-up. D. Use flashing m anufacturer's r ecommended ad hesive and sealer. 3.16
LINTELS
A. Install loose s teel lintels f urnished under section 055000, over window openings and door openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lin tels o ver o penings where steel lintels are not scheduled. C. Openings up to 42 inches wide: Place two (2), No. 4 reinforcing bars one (1) inch from bottom web. D. Openings from 42 inches up to 78 inches wide: Place two ( 2), N o. 5 r einforcing ba rs on e ( 1) inch from bottom web. E. Openings o ver 7 8 i nches: R einforce o penings as detailed. F. Use single piece reinforcing bars only.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School G. Support an d s ecure r einforcing b ars from displacement. M aintain p osition w ithin 1 /2 in ch o f dimensioned position. H. Place and consolidate grout f ill w ithout d isplacing reinforcing. I. Allow m asonry lin tels to a ttain s pecified strength before removing temporary supports. J. Maintain m inimum e ight ( 8) i nch b earing o n e ach side of opening. 3.17
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam with two (2), No. 5 bars, placed top and bottom. B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. C. Support an d s ecure r einforcing b ars from displacement. M aintain p osition w ithin 1 /2 in ch o f dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout f ill w ithout d isplacing reinforcing. E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum eight (8) inches either side of opening. 3.18
C. Bed an chors o f m etal d oor an d g lazed f rames i n adjacent m ortar j oints. F ill f rame voids s olid w ith grout. F ill a djacent m asonry cores with grout minimum eight (8) inches from framed openings. D. Do n ot b uild in o rganic m aterials s ubject to deterioration. 3.20
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From A lignment o f C olumns: Pilasters: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum V ariation F rom U nit to A djacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 /4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; and 1/2 inch in 30 feet. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. G. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do n ot c ontinue h orizontal j oint r einforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control j oint d evice in c ontinuous lengths. S eal b utt a nd c orner j oints in acco rdance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 079200 for sealant performance. D. Provide fire-stopping sealant under section 078400 at all c onstruction j oints in f ire-rated walls and partitions. E. Install c ontrol joints a t th e j ambs o f a ll m asonry doors or ope nings, a nd a t a ll l ocations i ndicated on the Drawings, and a t m aximum t hirty ( 30) f eet o n center. F. Form expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings. 3.19
Addition and Remodeling
BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal f rames, w indow f rames, wood n ailing s trips, a nchor b olts, plates and other items furnished by other Sections. B. Build in items plumb and level.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
3.21
CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut a nd f it f or ch ases, p ipes, co nduit, sleeves, grounds a nd o ther p enetrations. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain Architect written approval p rior to c utting o r fitting masonry w ork n ot in dicated o r w here appearance o r s trength o f m asonry w ork may be impaired. 3.22
CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units d o no t m atch a djoining uni ts a s intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in f resh m ortar o r g rout, p ointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: D uring t he t ooling o f j oints, e nlarge a ny voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with m ortar. P oint-up a ll j oints i ncluding c orners, openings a nd adjacent work to p rovide a n eat, uniform appearance, prepared f or ap plication o f sealant.
042000 - 7 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Final Cleaning: after m ortar is th oroughly s et a nd cured, cl ean m asonry as p er m ethods recommended by SCPI and NCMA and as follows:
supported by e xisting br ick. P erform I nspection t o verify the existing material c ondition a nd s upport condition for new masonry work.
1. Remove l arge m ortar p articles b y ha nd w ith wooden pa ddles a nd n on-metallic s crape h oes or chisels
E. If any test indicates Work d oes n ot m eet s pecified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Test cleaning methods on s ample w all p anel; leave 1/2 panel u ncleaned f or co mparison purposed. O btain A rchitect's a pproval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
F. Submit pr oposed m ortar a nd g rout mix designs to inspection and te sting f irm f or r eview p rior to commencement of Work.
3. Clean concrete u nit m asonry t o co mply w ith masonry manufacturer's d irections an d applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins. 3.23
PROTECTION
A. Without da maging c ompleted w ork, pr ovide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. B. Provide w eather-tight p rotective c over o ver all masonry w alls ex posed t o t he elements during construction to k eep m oisture o ut o f all cores and cavities. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable t o I nstaller, w hich en sures unit masonry w ork b eing w ithout damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3.24
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing a nd I nspecting: O wner w ill e ngage a qualified te sting a nd in specting a gency to p erform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports in accordance with the provisions of Section 014523. B. Conventional testing a nd i nspection s ervices he rein describe those items not s pecifically r equired b y the 2006 International Building Code as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. C. Special structural te sting a nd in spection s ervices herein described include items required by the 2006 International Building Code as amended by the 2007 Minnesota S tate B uilding Code, and o ther i tems which in the p rofessional j udgment o f t he S tructural Engineer of Record are critical to the integrity of the building structure. D. Provide s pecial i nspection f or al l new brick facade walls supported by the e xisting f oundation w all o r footings, and at lo cations w here n ew b rick is 042000 - 8 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
G. Grout Tests: 1. Seven (7) day test and a twenty-eight (28) day strength test will be required for every 30 or less cubic y ards o f each t ype o f g rout placed each day. A s trength t est s hall b e t aken as t he average of the strengths of two (2) 3” x 3” x 6” rectangular grout specimen made from the same sample of grout. 2. Prepare and test rectangular grout specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019. O ne ( 1) s lump test in accordance with A STM C 143 w ill b e taken for each set of test specimens. H. Strength level of grout will be considered satisfactory if t he av erages o f al l s ets o f t hree ( 3) co nsecutive twenty-eight ( 28) d ay s trength te st r esults e qual or exceed specified strength and n o i ndividual t wentyeight ( 28) d ay s trength te st r esult is less than 2,400 psi. I. Mortar Testing: 1. Take O ne ( 1) m ortar t est s pecimen f or each 5,000 s quare f eet of m asonry wall constructed and take a minimum of one (1) set of mortar test specimens f or each d ay t hat m asonry construction i s acco mplished. T ake t est specimens f or s even ( 7) d ay test and twentyeight (28) day test. 2. Prepare an d t est m ortar s pecimens in accordance w ith the International B uilding Code. 3. Take One (1) slump t est i n acco rdance w ith ASTM C143 for each set of test specimens. J. Strength level of m ortar w ill b e c onsidered satisfactory if n o in dividual tw enty-eight (28) da y mortar te st specimen r esult is less than 2,200 psi for Type M mortar and 1,500 psi for Type S mortar. K. Test t he w ater-soluble a lkali c ontent o f th e c ement used i n t he mortar i n acco rdance with ASTM C114, or furnish suitable certification b y th e m anufacturer of th e c ement, to e stablish th at to tal water-soluble UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School alkali content does n ot ex ceed 0 .1 p ercent o f t he alkali present. L. Prism Tests: Perform o n T ype I - moisture cu red concrete m asonry u nits i n acco rdance w ith A STM C1314. 1. Perform tests on two (2) s ets o f th ree ( 3) u nits each as directed by the Architect.
Addition and Remodeling 2. Verify proper application of dry packing. 3. Verify p roper gr outing t echnique, i ncluding consolidation to approved height of grout space, reconsolidation and vibration.
END OF SECTION
2. Conduct tests t hrough a n I ndependent T esting Laboratory (014523). M. Masonry Preparation and Placement: 1. Verify masonry b earing s urfaces ar e cl ean and free of debris. 2. Verify masonry units are clean, sound and dry. 3. Inspect l aying o f m asonry units for the following: nominal unit w idths, s tack o r running b ond, p roper t hickness a nd tooling of mortar joints, acceptable depth of furrowing of bed j oints. N ote te mperature a t tim e of inspection. 4. Inspect construction, expansion and contraction joints for lo cation a nd c ontinuity o f reinforcement. 5. Verify h ot an d co ld w eather p rocedures ar e followed. 6. Verify wall cavities are protected against entry of moisture and precipitation. N. Masonry Reinforcement: 1. Inspect placement and alignment of vertical bars and dowels for size, grade and spacing. Inspect length o f l ap s plices, cl earances b etween bars, clearances to masonry units and outside face of walls, and positioning of steel. 2. Inspect h orizontal j oint r einforcement an d masonry reinforcement bars f or s ize, l ength o f lap s plices, d owels, cl earances b etween bars, clearances to masonry units and outside face of walls, and alignment. 3. Inspect tie s in m asonry u nits f or ty pe, straightness, embedment, spacing and size. 4. Inspect the installation of masonry anchor bolts, joist anchors, inserts, straps and dowels. O. Masonry Grouting and Capping: 1. Verify grout s paces ar e co rrectly s ized an d clean, cleanouts are closed after inspection and grout barriers are in place before grouting.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
042000 - 9 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
042000 - 10 of 10 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\042000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
H. ASTM C150/C150M ' Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
I. ASTM C207 ' Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Details of Construction, and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division ' 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
J. ASTM C270 ' Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. K. ASTM C 387 ' Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete; 2006.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block.
L. ASTM C404 ' Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
B. Mortar and Grout.
M. ASTM C476 ' Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Accessories. 1.3
N. ASTM C1019 ' Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2011.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
O. ASTM D226 ' Standard Specification for Asphalt'Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009.
A. Section 014533 ' Structural Testing and Special Inspection B. Section 032000 ' Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
SUBMITTALS
C. Section 031510 ' Post'Installed Anchors.
A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.
D. Section 033000 ' Cast'in'Place Concrete.
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar and grout.
E. Section 051200 ' Structural Steel Framing: Bearing plates embedded in masonry. F. Section 054000 ' Cold Formed Metal Framing:. 1.4
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 ' Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ASTM A82/A82M ' Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. C. ASTM A153/A153M ' Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot'Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. D. ASTM C90 ' Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2012. E. ASTM C94/C94M ' Standard Specification for Ready'Mixed Concrete; 2012. F. ASTM C140 ' Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2012. G. ASTM C144 ' Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
C. Product Data: Include mortar and grout design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C 270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. Provide mix designs not less than 14 days prior to beginning masonry work. D. Reports: Submit reports of masonry unit strength tests prior to starting work. E. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C 270. F. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C 476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C 1019. G. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories. H. Shop Drawings: Provide drawing showing location of all proposed block control joints.
042731 $ 1 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
a.
I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions.
b.
J. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
4. Special Shapes: Provide non'standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers, control joint edges, and other locations as specified in Section 04 20 00.
A. Comply with provisions of IBC and ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.7
1.8
5. Load'Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
MOCK'UP A. If plain block shapes are used for reinforced walls, construct a masonry wall mock'up as a grout demonstration panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high, which includes mortar and accessories, reinforcement, and grout, to demonstrate proper grouting can be achieved. Destructive testing of this panel may be necessary to demonstrate compliance.
2.2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
B. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type as given below for location in structure, using gray color cement. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. E. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. F. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
FIELD CONDITIONS
G. Water: Clean and potable.
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 this section or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Strength: Minimum unit strength as required by ACI 530.1 to achieve prism strengths shown on drawings. 3. Shapes: Provide double end or open core shapes for reinforced masonry walls excluding lintel, cap, and sill block units.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Materials Not Permitted: Masonry cement, anti'freeze, salts.
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials.
1.9
Plain shapes may be used in non'reinforced areas. Plain shapes may be substituted for the above subject to grout demonstration panel and additional grouting requirements of this section.
H. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. Obtain Architect's approval prior to use. 2.3
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 032000; size as indicated on drawings; uncoated finish. B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. C. Adjustable Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type with adjustable ties or tabs spaced at 16 in on center ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B;
042731 $ 2 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
0.1875 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods and adjustable components of 0.1875 inch wire; width of components as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from each masonry face.
D. Do not use anti'freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re'temper only within two hours of mixing.
1. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches. D. Rigid Anchors for Intersecting Bearing Walls: 1'1/2" wide by 24" long by 1/4" thick with ends turned up 2". Hot'dip galvanized, ASTM A153, Class B. 2.4
2.7
A. Bond Beams, Lintels, and Grouted Cores: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8'10 inches slump; provide premixed type according to ASTM C94/C94M, or mix according to ASTM C476.
ACCESSORIES
1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less.
A. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Adequate to hold reinforcing bars in specified locations without displacement during grouting operations. B. Post'installed anchors and reinforcing: See Section 031510
2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.8
C. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinyl chloride material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. Minimum Shore Durometer hardness of 80, 5/8" thick shear section with 5/16" thick flanges, total width not less than 2'3/8".
B. Thoroughly mix site mixed grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 476 for fine and coarse grout. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E. Cleaning Solution: Non'acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
D. Do not use anti'freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
MORTAR MIXES 2.9 A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Engineered masonry: Type S. 2. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M. 3. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S. 4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.
2.6
GROUT MIXING A. Mix premixed grout in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt.
2.5
GROUT MIXES
MORTAR MIXING A. Control and accurately maintain specified proportions of the mortar materials during the entire progress of the work. B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. 1. Mix prepackaged dry mortar in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section 014533. B. Concrete Masonry: Test each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit in accordance with ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this specification. 1. Provide test for each different masonry unit width, face shell thickness, and concrete unit weight. 2. Supplier production test results may be used if tests are not more than 90 days old and supplier furnishes a certification that the units meet the requirements of this section. C. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 780 recommendations for preconstruction testing. 1. Preconstruction tests will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and
042731 $ 3 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1. Bond: Running.
establish quality control values for construction testing. Preconstruction tests are not required to meet the compressive strength requirements of ASTM C270.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: As specified in section 04 20 00.
D. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures. 1. Test results will be used to establish optimum grout proportions and establish quality control values for construction testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that preconstruction testing has been completed. B. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. Resolve out'of'tolerance conditions prior to starting work. C. Verify that reinforcing dowels are positioned in accordance with the drawings. D. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. E. Verify that built'in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust. C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. D. For areas where high'lift grouting will be employed and grout pour height exceeds 5 feet, provide cleanout openings as follows: 1. Hollow Masonry: Not less than 8 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted, formed by cutting out face shell of masonry unit.
3.3
COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units:
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
3.4
PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. Provide full mortar bed at footings, grouted cores, foundations, and slabs. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled. I. Build all chases and recesses as shown on the Drawings or required by all trades. Cut all masonry units to fit neatly around conduit or piping, outlet boxes, etc. Set grilles and other equipment furnished by others as required in masonry. J. Provide cleanouts in the bottom course of each grout pour at each grouted core when the grout pour height exceeds 5 feet.. K. Do not enclose mechanical, electrical or work specified in other sections until such work has been inspected and approved by the proper local code authority and by the Engineer if required. L. Install loose lintels, anchors, bolts, dowels, grounds, angles, plates, grilles, or similar items required for anchorage of other work. Refer to Drawings for specific bearing conditions. M. Discard all mortar that has begun to stiffen or is not used within 2'1/2 hours of initial mixing. Maintain workability of mortar within the 2'1/2 hour period by retempering or remixing. 042731 $ 4 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3.5
1. Provide reinforced concrete block lintels and bond beams as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Use reinforced concrete block lintels at all openings in concrete block walls, including openings for mechanical and electrical work not specifically indicated to have other types of lintels. Do not use concrete block bond beams with breakout webs as lintel beams at masonry wall openings.
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcement Bars: Secure at locations indicated and to avoid displacement during grouting. Minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be one bar diameter. 1. Place reinforcing bar positioners at top course and bottom course of grout lift and not more than 200 bar diameters on center. B. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
2. Support and tie reinforcing in place with a minimum clearance of 3/4" between reinforcing and block shells. Build in anchors and other accessories.
1. Place masonry joint reinforcing in first joint above bottom of wall. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Provide prefabricated corner or tee sections at intersecting walls. C. Anchors: Reinforce intersections between interior and exterior walls with rigid wall anchors 16 inches on center. D. Anchors: Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 16 inches horizontally and 16 inches vertically.
3.6
GROUTING A. Definitions 1. Grout Pour: The total height of masonry to be grouted prior to the construction of additional masonry. A grout pour consists of one or more grout lifts. 2. Grout Lift: An increment of grout height within a total grout pour. If a lift of grout is permitted to set prior to placing the subsequent lift, then the constructed grout height is the pour height. B. Use either high'lift or low'lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of contract documents. C. If plain block are used at grouted wall locations, fill cores with grout to provide a vertically continuous section of solid masonry wall a minimum of 8" and a maximum of 12" long. D. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration.
E. Wall Ties: Install wall ties at locations indicated, spaced at not more than 16 inches on center horizontally and 16 inches on center vertically, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. F. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Keep vertical cores to be grouted clear of mortar, including bed area of first course.
E. Low'Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of lifts to 16 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Limit grout pours to maximum 5 feet.
1. Grouted Cores: Construct masonry walls to provide continuous vertical cores with a clear area not less than 3"x4" and sufficient to provide a minimum 8" long solid section.
4. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.
2. Plain Block at Grouted Core Locations: Place block to provide a continuous vertical section of grouted wall, minimum 8" and maximum 12" long.
5. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1'1/2 hours. F. High'Lift Grouting:
G. Concrete Block Lintels and Bond Beams
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
042731 $ 5 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1. When mean daily temperatures are between 40° F and 32° F protect completed masonry from rain or snow by covering with a weather resistive membrane for 24 hours after construction.
1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Clean out masonry cells and other cavities to be grouted by high pressure water spray or compressed air. Remove debris, allow to dry, and inspect before sealing cleanout openings.
2. When mean daily temperatures are between 32° F, and 25° F completely cover completed masonry with a weather resistive membrane for 24 hours after construction.
3. Hollow Masonry: Limit lifts to maximum 5 feet and pours to maximum height of 24 feet.
3. When mean daily temperatures are between 25° F and 20° F, completely cover completed masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 48 hours after construction. Protection time may be reduced to 24 hours for ungrouted masonry.
4. Reconsolidate grout between lifts by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. 5. If plain masonry unit shapes are used at grouted locations, limit pour heights to 4 feet.
4. When mean daily temperatures are below 20° F, maintain masonry temperature above 32° F for 48 hours after construction by enclosure with supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, by infrared heat lamps, or by other acceptable methods. Protection time may be reduced to 24 hours for ungrouted masonry.
6. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. G. Concrete Block Lintels and Bond Beams: Fill block lintels and bond beams with grout and consolidate. 1. Fill lintels and bond beams more than one course high in a single continuous pour. 3.7
3.8
HOT WEATHER CONSTRUCTION A. Employ the requirements of this section when the ambient temperature exceeds 100°F or exceeds 90°F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph.
COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION A. These procedures apply when the ambient temperature falls below 40° F, or the temperature of masonry units is below 40° F.
B. Construction
B. Construction
1. Maintain the temperature of mortar and grout below 120°F.
1. Minimum masonry unit temperature of 20° F when laid in the wall. Remove visible ice on masonry units before the unit is laid in the masonry.
2. Flush mixers, mortar transport containers and mortar boards with cool water before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar.
2. Heat mortar sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40° F and 120° F at the time of mixing. Maintain mortar above freezing until installed.
3. Maintain mortar consistency by retempering with cool water. 4. Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing.
3. When ambient temperatures are between 25° F and 20° F, use heat sources on both sides of the masonry under construction and install windbreaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph. 4. When ambient temperatures are below 20° F, provide an enclosure for the masonry under construction and use heat sources to maintain temperatures above 32° F within the enclosure. C. Protection
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
C. Protection: Fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old. 3.9
CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints as indicated on drawings, but not to exceed 24 feet on center. B. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. C. Top of wall bond beam reinforcement extends
042731 $ 6 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
through control joints.
a.
D. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. 3.10 BUILT'IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built'in anchor bolts and plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built'in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Erection tolerances for masonry work shall be as specified in ACI 530.1. 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Testing and Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provisions of Section 014533. 2. For items indicated below to be performed on a periodic basis, provide inspections at least once per 500 square feet, and for 100% of all shear walls noted on plans, masonry beams, and masonry columns. 3. Personnel Qualifications
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
b.
Testing Technician: Technical I ' NCMA Concrete Masonry Testing Technician (or equivalent), employed by a testing laboratory with C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of Standards, under the direct supervision of a licensed civil/structural engineer. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all reports. Special Inspector ' Structural I: ICBO certified masonry inspector, or a graduate civil/structural engineer or other personnel acceptable to the Structural Engineer of Record (SER) with experience in the design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports
4. The Owner will provide the following tests: a. Concrete masonry unit compressive strength according to ASTM C140. One set of tests of each size block for the first 500 square feet installed and for each additional 5,000 square feet or portion thereof. b. Test mortar for consistency, water content, mortar aggregate ratio, and compressive strength according to ASTM C780. Conduct one test for each 2,500 square feet of wall area. Qualifications: Technical I. c. Test and evaluate grout according to ASTM C 1019 procedures. Test with same frequency as specified for masonry units. Qualifications: Technical I d. Observe preparation of masonry wall prisms or selection of masonry units for strength tests and preparation of grout specimens and mortar specimens. Qualifications: Structural I.
042731 $ 7 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
e.
f.
g.
h.
At the beginning of masonry construction, observe proportions of site'prepared mortar, construction of mortar joints, and location of reinforcement and connectors. Qualifications: Structural I. On a periodic basis, verify size and location of structural elements; type, size and location of anchors including anchors to structural members or other construction, grade, size, and type of reinforcing; welding of reinforcing bars; and hot and cold weather protection. Qualifications: Structural I. On a periodic basis prior to grouting, verify that grout space is clean, placement of reinforcing and connectors, proportions of site'prepared grout, and construction of mortar joints. Qualifications: Structural I. On a periodic basis, observe grout placement to verify compliance with code and construction documents. Grouting of shear walls, columns, and beams deeper than 24" to be performed on a continuous basis. Qualifications: Structural I.
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. B. Adequately brace all work to prevent damage of any kind. Mask, barricade or similarly protect work as required from damage during building operations. Protect installed material as necessary to prevent staining or damage from the elements. C. Provide temporary bracing of masonry during erection. Do not remove bracing until building structure provides permanent bracing. D. During erection, keep all walls dry by covering the top with a strong, waterproof membrane at each shutdown and the end of each day. Cover partially completed walls at all times when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 2 feet down both sides, and securely hold in place.
END OF SECTION
3.14 MORTAR ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA A. Mortar aggregate ratio tests shall show component proportions within requirements of ASTM C270 where mortar mix proportions are determined by ASTM C270 proportion specification. 3.15 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. At completion clean all exposed masonry surfaces. Remove all excess mortar, mortar stains, efflorescence, etc., to provide a uniform appearance. Materials and methods of cleaning shall be as recommended by masonry material manufacturer. Cut out and repoint defective joints. Protect other work to prevent staining and damage. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non'metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.16 PROTECTION
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
042731 $ 8 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
I. ASTM A325M $ Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
J. ASTM A500/A500M $ Standard Specification for Cold$Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
K. ASTM A563 $ Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.
SECTION INCLUDES
L. ASTM A563M $ Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.
A. Structural steel framing members.
M. ASTM A992/A992M $ Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
B. Base plates and headed studs. 1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
N. ASTM F436 $ Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2011.
A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspection.
O. ASTM F959 $ Standard Specification for Compressible$Washer$Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2009.
B. Section 031510 $ Post$Installed Anchors. C. Section 052100 $ Steel Joist Framing. D. Section 053100 $ Steel Decking.
P. ASTM F1554 $ Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105$ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.
E. Section 055000 $ Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.4
Q. ASTM F1852 $ Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2002
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) $ Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
R. AWS A2.4 $ Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.
B. AISC 360 $ Specification for Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S303 $ Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. D. AISC S348 (Research Council on Structural Connections) $ Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. E. ASTM A36/A36M $ Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. F. ASTM A53/A53M $ Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot$Dipped, Zinc$Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. G. ASTM A307 $ Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010.
S. AWS D1.1/D1.1M $ Structural Welding Code $ Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Review the Contract Documents prior to preparing shop drawings to determine if the structure is in conflict with OSHA requirements or any other safety regulation. Notify the Architect if any conflicts are noted. Do not prepare shop drawings affected by the conflict until the conflict is resolved. 2. Prepare complete shop and setting drawings based on referenced AISC Specifications.
H. ASTM A325 $ Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 ! 1 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
E. Codes and Standards:
3. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.
1. AISC $ Manual of Steel Construction.
4. Indicate type and location of shop and field connections. Detail all required field welds.
2. AISC 360 $ Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
5. Indicate cambers.
3. AISC $ Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
6. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
4. AWS D1.1. 5. AISC S348 $ Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
7. If shop drawings are resubmitted after the original review, identify all changes made to the shop drawings after the original submittal with clouds or similar markings. C. Submit AISC Quality Certification Program certificates (for reduction in shop special inspections only if the fabricator is so certified) and welder qualifications to the Special Inspector$Technical.
6. SSPC $ SSPC Painting Manual $ Volume 2 F. Provide personnel qualified according to AWS D1.1 for all shop and field welding. 1.7
A. Verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and make such field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work properly and assure proper elevations. Be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and laying out of the work.
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Manual of Steel Construction". B. Fabrication plant shall be certified in category I or II according to the requirements of the AISC Quality Certification Program and shall be acceptable to the structural engineer, Architect, and building official. C. A fabricator without AISC certification may be acceptable subject to the following. 1. The fabrication plant shall be acceptable to the Structural Engineer, Architect, and Building Official. 2. The fabrication plant shall maintain written, detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and for the fabricator's ability to conform to the construction documents. 3. The Contractor shall pay for inspection during steel fabrication. This inspection shall be conducted by the Owner's inspection company at the fabrication plant. D. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Minnesota.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
2.1
MATERIALS A. Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. C. Cold$Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black. E. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A. F. High$Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, plain. 1. Tension control bolts meeting ASTM F1852 are also acceptable. G. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A 563 or A 563M nuts and ASTM F 436 Type 1 washers. Hot dip galvanize where noted. H. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections requiring high$strength bolts. Not required if tension control bolts are used. I. Welding Materials: AISC Specification A35 and referenced AWS specifications, type required
051200 ! 2 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
A. If Fabricator is not a Category I AISC certified fabricator, see field quality control section of Part 3 for special inspection requirements of shop fabricated work.
for materials being welded, E70 electrodes. J. Shop and Touch$Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, compatible with finish coatings, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Post$installed anchors: See Section 031510 2.2
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
FABRICATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.
A. Fabricate according to referenced AISC publications. B. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. C. Do not substitute sections or modify details without written approval of the Structural Engineer. Provide full$length pieces between connections or splices indicated on the drawings. Do not permit built$up lengths. Do not use warped or damaged sections. D. Design shop and field connections unless detailed on the Drawings. Use standard connections as shown in Part 9 of the AISC Manual where possible. Bolt field connections, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Perform bracing, blocking, cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, welding, punching, etc., as required to complete work and to join work of others. Weld clip angles and plates to beams and punch holes for fastening work of other trades as shown on the Drawings. F. Furnish anchor bolts of size and type shown on the drawings for all field connections to be permanently bolted to concrete or masonry. 2.3
FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop prime structural steel members to a DFT of 2.0 $ 3.5 mils. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed or field welded. C. Galvanize structural steel exposed to weather and lintels in exterior masonry walls to comply with ASTM A123/A123M 1. Prepare items to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A385. 2. Close and seal weld vent holes in pipes, tubes, and other closed members. Touch up damaged areas using procedures and products from ASTM A780.
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
EXAMINATION
3.2
ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Exercise care in handling structural steel during unloading, storage, and erection to prevent bends, twists, or other damage. D. Place structural steel stored at the site on substantial shores or blocking. Provide shores or blocking of sufficient size and strength to prevent any part of the steel from touching the ground. E. Remove dirt, oil, loose scale, burrs, pits, paint and other defects that would prevent solid seating of parts. F. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. G. Where A307 bolts are used, tighten to a snug tight fit as obtained with the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. Verify that all parts are in contact. Use self$locking nuts or upset bolt threads to prevent nuts from bracing off. H. Where A325 bolts are used, tighten bolts and provide washers in accordance with "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Use tension control bolts or direct tension indicators for slip$critical (SC) and fully tensioned bolts (FT). I. Pre$heat material to be welded and maintain interpass temperatures as required. Do not weld below 0 degrees F. J. Do not cut steel or enlarge holes without written approval of the Structural Engineer.
051200 ! 3 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
K. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer and Structural Engineer.
c.
L. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete or specified to be unprimed. M. Repair or replace structural steel damaged during shipment, unloading, or erection at no cost to the Owner. 3.3
CLEANING AND REPAIR A. After erection and welding of steel, remove clay, mud or other foreign materials from all members. B. Apply a field touch$up coat of paint on all welded connections and damaged areas using the same color and type of paint used on the shop coat.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. If special inspection of Fabricator's work is required, special inspector may test and inspect structural steel at plant before shipment. 3. Definitions: a. ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing b. CAWI $ American Welding Society Certified Associate Weld Inspector c. CWI $ American Welding Society Certified Weld Inspector 4. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical I: CAWI or ASNT Level I, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Special Inspector Technical II: CAWI with minimum 3 years experience or ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
d.
Special Inspector – Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the SER, with experience in design of structural systems of the project type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. Individuals performing welding inspection must be AWS certified.
5. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Perform tests and inspections required below. Bolt and welding inspections for shop fabricated work may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program $ Category I, or more stringent criteria. Any reduction in tests or inspections is subject to approval of Building Official and SER. b. Test high strength bolted connections according to the requirements of RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts", and as follows: 1) Preparation: Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all bolted connections for general conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting. Qualifications: Technical II. 2) Slip Critical Bolts and Fully Tensioned Bolts: Visually observe all connections. Verify that all plies of connected elements have been brought into contact. Verify all tips are removed from "twist$off" bolts or direct tension indicators show fully tensioned bolts. Qualifications: Technical II. 3) Bearing Bolts: Visually observe all connections to confirm all plies of connected elements have been brought into contact.
051200 ! 4 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
c.
d.
(Applies only to bolts designed with threads included in failure plane; all other bolts require testing as for fully tensioned bolts.) Qualifications: Technical II. Welding Procedures and Preparation: Qualifications: Technical II. Verify the following: 1) Qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. 2) Proposed welding procedures and materials. 3) Adequate preparation of fraying surfaces. 4) Preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning and number of passes. Test and inspect welding as follows 1) Fillet Welds: Visually inspect 100% of all fillet welds, for size, length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. Qualifications: Technical II. 2) Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1, Section 6. Visually inspect 100 % and test 25% of all penetration welds less than 5/16 inch using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on finished weld. Qualifications: Technical II. 3) Full Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all full penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1 Section 6. Visually inspect 100% and test 25% of all full penetration welds less that 5/16 inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on finished weld. Qualifications: Technical II.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
e.
f.
g.
Submittals: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation for compliance with contract documents. Qualifications: Structural I Materials: Verify materials delivered to site comply with contract documents and approved shop drawings. Qualifications: Technical I Detail Compatibility: On a periodic basis, inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details indicated on the contract documents and shop drawings. Qualifications: Structural I. 1) Permanent bracing and stiffening members. 2) Proper applications of joint details and conditions. Observations need not exceed 25% at standard connections. 3) Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure.
END OF SECTION
051200 ! 5 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
J. SJI $ Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders, 2002.
SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
K. SSPC$Paint 15 $ Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
L. SSPC$SP 2 $ Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.5
A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.
SECTION INCLUDES
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, attachments, loadings for design of "special" joists, and chord splices and splice details, if any.
A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors. B. Supplementary framing for joist chord extensions. 1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.6
A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspections.
B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
C. Section 053100 $ Steel Decking: Deck attachments to joists. REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. AISC "Specification for the Structural Steel Buildings".
A. AISC $ Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, 1989
2. AWS, D1.1, "Structural Welding Code$Steel".
B. ASTM A36/A36M $ Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
3. SJI, "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K$Series"
C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M $ Structural Welding Code $ Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
4. SJI, "Standard Specifications for Long Span Steel Joists LH$Series, and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH$Series"
D. AWS D1.1: 2002 $ Structural Welding Code$Steel
5. SJI, "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders"
E. SJI (SPEC) $ Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2011.
6. SJI, "Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders"
F. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 $ Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2008.
C. Fabricator shall be a member of SJI. D. Fabricator shall inspect material and welding prior to painting. Fabricator shall verify materials and workmanship conform to the project requirements prior to shipping to the site.
G. SJI $ Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K$Series, 41st Edition, 2002. H. SJI $ Standard Specifications for Long Span Steel Joists, LH$Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH$Series, 2002. I. SJI $ Standard Specifications for Joist Girders, 2002.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9.
B. Section 051200 $ Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.
052100 ! 1 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
C. After fabrication, thoroughly clean joists and accessories.
B. Exercise care in handling joists during unloading, storage, and erection to prevent bends, twists or other damage.
D. Extend chords of joists where necessary for support of roof deck and for attachment of ceiling hangers or furring.
C. Place joists stored at the site on substantial shores or blocking. Provide shores or blocking of sufficient size and strength to prevent any part of the joist from touching the ground.
E. See Drawings for joists bolted to supports. Provide oversized bearing plates where required.
D. Replace joists damaged during shipment, unloading, or erection at no cost to Owner. 1.8
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
F. Provide bridging and bridging anchors to conform to SJI specifications. 2.3
A. Verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and make such field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work properly and assure proper fit and proper elevations. Be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and laying out of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Shop prime joists as specified. B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC$SP 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment.
1. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: 2$1/2 inches. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Concrete or Masonry Supports: 4 inches.
C. Brace joists during erection, and install bridging immediately as joists are set. Fasten bridging to top and bottom chords in a manner that will not damage joist members. Anchor ends of bridging lines to walls and beams at both top and bottom chords.
3. Finish: Shop primed. 4. Extend chords of joists where required for support of roof deck and for attachment of ceiling hangers or furring.
D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld, bolt joist seats to bearing plates per SJI requirements and AWS D1.1.
C. Structural Steel for joist leg extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
F. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.
F. Shop and Touch$Up Primer: SSPC$Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate in accordance with the requirements of SJI and AISC.
H. Avoid excessive concentrated loads to the joists and insure that construction loads do not exceed the load carrying capacity of the joists.
B. Where steel joists are sloped, fabricate with beveled ends or sloped shoes to provide a level, full bearing surface when erected. 3.3
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
ERECTION A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.
B. Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists:
2.2
EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
MATERIALS A. Minimum thickness of material for joist chords shall be 1/8 inch.
FINISH
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
052100 ! 2 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Definitions: a. ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing b. CAWI $ American Welding Society Certified Associate Weld Inspector c. CWI $ American Welding Society Certified Weld Inspector 3. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical II: CAWI with minimum 3 years experience or ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Individuals performing welding inspection must be AWS certified. 4. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Visually inspect all field welds for size, length, and quality per AWS D1.1. Qualifications: Technical II. b. Visually inspect all installed joists for bent or damaged members and for adequate bearing length. Qualifications: Technical II.
END OF SECTION
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 ! 3 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 053100
1. SDI, "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck"
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code $ Sheet Steel"
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
C. Provide personnel qualified according to AWS D1.3 for all shop and field welding. D. Manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Deck Institute.
SECTION INCLUDES 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Roof deck. A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. 1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspection
B. Store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Section 051200 $ Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 6 inches.
C. Deliver, unload, store and erect deck in a manner to completely protect the deck from damage. 1.8
PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
C. Section 052100 $ Steel Joist Framing. 1.4
A. Verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and make such field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work properly and assure proper fit and proper elevations. Be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and laying out of the work.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWS D1.3 $ Structural Welding Code $ Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008. B. SDI $ Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck; 2000 C. SSPC$Paint 25 $ Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004).
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 3 years of experience. B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
STEEL DECKING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
STEEL DECK A. Roof Deck: Non$composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. a. Deck to be fireproofed: Left unpainted on the side to be fireproofed or painted with a primer compatible with the fireproofing to achieve the required UL rating. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 3. Nominal Height: 1$1/2 inch. a. Profile: Fluted; SDI WR. b. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. c. Structural Properties: Meet or exceed Vulcraft type Vulcraft Type 1.5B 1) Span Design: Multiple. 4. Side Joints: Fastened per drawings. 5. End Joints: Fastened per drawings.
053100 ! 1 of 2 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2.2
welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch$up primer after inspections are completed.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and D1.3, E70xx electrodes.
G. Install deck with major flat surface on top (normal position).
B. Power Driven Fasteners: Hilti EDNK22 for bar joists 1/8" to 1/4" thick, EDN19 for bar joists and steel 3/16" to 3/8" thick, and ENPH2 for structural steel greater than 1/4" thick.
H. Protect the completed deck from construction loads in excess of 30 psf. Move all loads across the deck on wood planking (or similar means) to distribute loads.
C. Screw Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping, TEKS. D. Shop and Touch$Up Primer: SSPC$Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3
FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips and cover plates, 20 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
2.4
FABRICATION A. Fabricate in accordance with SDI Specifications. B. Fabricate deck to span over a minimum of 3 supports wherever possible. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Specifications and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. Fasten deck in accordance with deck fastening detail shown on drawings or manufacturer's standard requirements, whichever is greater. C. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. Do not weld when temperature is below 0 degrees F. Protect metal being welded from rain and snow. D. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Definitions: a. ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing b. CAWI $ American Welding Society Certified Associate Weld Inspector c. CWI $ American Welding Society Certified Weld Inspector 3. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical II: CAWI with minimum 3 years experience or ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Individuals performing welding inspection must be AWS certified. 4. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections. Qualifications: Technical II a. Verify qualifications of welders prior to the start of welding. b. Observe welding procedures at the start of welding. Verify that appropriate welds are being obtained. c. Verify quality, size, location, and spacing of all welds and mechanical fasteners.
END OF SECTION E. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. F. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, clean welds and coat
STEEL DECKING
053100 ! 2 of 2 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 054000 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING components due to th ermal v ariations w ithout damage, failure, or excessive stress on components.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
B. Design exterior wall system for wind exposure "B" as outlined in the I nternational B uilding Code a nd to pr ovide f or m ovement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
C. Design system to acco mmodate co nstruction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
B. Cold F ormed S tructural S teel, L oad Bearing Vertical W all F raming a nd B ridging; as Indicated on the Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Attachments and Accessories.
D. Calculate al l s tructural p roperties i n acco rdance with AISI - Specifications for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members.
1. Exterior wall framing. 2. Interior wall framing.
E. Vertical Assemblies:
C. Cold F ormed S tructural S teel, L oad Bearing Horizontal Framing and Bridging; as Indicated o n the Drawings, Specified Herein; I ncluding Related Attachments and Accessories.
1. Withstand Loads as Follows: a. Positive Wind Pressure: 25 PSF. b. Negative Wind Pressure 25 PSF.
1. Exterior roof and soffit framing. 1.2
2. Maximum Allowable Deflection:
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services.
a. Gypsum Board: L/120th of span under total design loads.
B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete substrate for metal framing.
Concrete:
b. Exterior I nsulation F inish System: L /240th of span under total design loads.
C. Section 051200 - Structural S teel: S tructural building framing.
c. Plaster or S tucco: L /360th of s pan u nder total design loads.
D. Section 053100 - Steel Decking: M etal r oof [ and floor] decking.
d. Brick V eneer: L /600th o f s pan under to tal design loads. F. Horizontal Assemblies:
E. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications. F. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking.
1. Withstand 25 PSF of s pan und er t otal d esign loads.
G. Section 061643 - Exterior Sheathing Board: Exterior sheathing board.
2. Maximum Allowable Deflection: span under total design loads.
H. Section 072100 - Building I nsulation: I nsulation within framing members. I. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and joint backing. J. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design system components i n acco rdance w ith AISI reference; p rovide f or m ovement o f
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
1.4
1/120th of
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product D ata: S ubmit m anufacturer’s d escriptive literature for products specified in this Section. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate lo cations o f cold-formed f raming assemblies. 2. Indicate s izes an d s pacing components.
of
framing
054000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
3. Indicate fastening m ethods b etween f raming members and to adjacent products/materials. 4. Indicate bearings, anchors, an d o ther p roducts required for construction a ctivities o f this section; indicate p roducts n ot s upplied b y manufacturer of products of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: P rinted in stallation instructions for products specified in this section.
1. Clark/Dietrich Building Products.
E. Design Data: Calculations for loading and stresses, bearing seal and signature of Professional Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota. F. Provide design c alculations f or a ll e xterior w alls, canopies, soffit systems an d l ateral b racing w alls. Design w ind l oads an d l ateral b racing l oads are indicated o n th e s tructural drawings. ( Note: Contractor is r esponsible f or calculating loading requirements an d s atisfying s tandards es tablished by the structural drawings.)
B. Substitutions: U 016000.
nder p rovisions o f S ection
C. Supply all products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2
FRAMING MATERIALS
G. Mill C ertificates f or e ach ty pe s tructural framing member, indicating the following information: 1. Bare m etal t hickness o f s teel, m easured t o 1/1000 inch (0.025 mm).
1. Steel studs up to 12’-0”: 2 0 gauge, six (6) inch in depth at 16 inches on center.
2. Yield strength of steel.
2. Steel s tuds be tween 12’ 0” and 13’ -0”: 18 gauge, six (6) inch in d epth a t 1 6 i nches o n center.
4. Total e longation o f s teel in tw o ( 2) in ch (50 mm) gauge length. 5. Chemical analysis of steel. 6. Thickness o f g alvanized co ating, measured to 1/1000 (0.025 mm). QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience. B. Installer: C ompany specializing in p erforming the Work of this Section with minimum five ( 5) years documented experience. 1.6
2. Marino Ware
A. Structural Steel Studs a nd C omponents: “ C” shaped 3-5/8, 4, 6 and 8 inches in depth, sized and spaced as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Tensile strength of steel.
1.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations o f c old-formed m etal framing a nd o ther c onstruction t o w hich the framing m ust f it, b y accu rate f ield measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final s hop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
054000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
3. Steel s tuds b etween 1 3’-0” a nd 15’ -0”: 16 gauge, eight (8) i nch i n d epth a t 1 6 inches on center. B. Structural Steel J oists a nd C omponents: “ C” shaped sized and s paced as i ndicated o n t he Drawings, minimum 2 0 ga uge t hick m etal w ith a maximum spacing of 16 inches on center. C. System C omponents: W ith e ach ty pe o f metal framing r equired, provide m anufacturer’s standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, r einforcements, f asteners, b racing, and accessories as recommended b y t he m anufacturer for application i ndicated, as n eeded t o p rovide a complete metal framing system. D. Design s tructural m embers i n acco rdance with American Iro n a nd S teel In stitute (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", current Edition. E. Form structural members f rom c orrosion-resistant steel, corresponding to the r equirements o f ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 40 ksi for S J s tuds a nd G rade A , 33 k si, f or CR runners.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
F. Coat s tructural m embers i n co nformance with ASTM A924/A924M. 2.3
B. Plates, G ussets, C lips: F ormed s heet steel, thickness d etermined f or co nditions e ncountered, manufacturer's standard shapes, s ame f inish as framing members. C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: S SPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. D. Metal slide clips for expansion. FASTENERS A. Self-drilling, S elf-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: A STM A90/A90M, h ot di p g alvanized to G60. B. Anchorage Devices: P ower act uated, t ype recommended b y manufacturer f or specific installation. C. Welding: I n c onformance w ith AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 2.5
FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of f ramed s ections o f s izes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit an d as semble i n l argest p ractical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. C. Cut framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular m embers o r as r equired for an angular fit against abutting members. D. Fasten co mponents b y s elf-drilling s crews o r welding. Provide screws of sufficient size to insure the strength of the connection. W ire t ying o f components i s n ot pe rmitted. T ouched-up we lds with a zinc-rich paint.
2.6
E. Plates, G ussets, Cl ips: S ame finish a s f raming members.
ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, F urring, B ridging: F ormed sheet steel, thickness d etermined f or co nditions en countered, manufacturer's standard shapes, s ame f inish as framing members.
2.4
D. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Same finish as framing members.
FINISHES A. Studs: Galvanize to G60 coating class. B. Tracks and Headers: G alvanize t o G 60 co ating class. C. Joists: Galvanize to G60 coating class.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
2.7
COMPONENTS A. Studs: C onforming t o A STM C 955, and as follows: 1. Material: M ill c ertified s teel c onforming to ASTM A 653/A653M, G 60/Z180 c oating, and as follows: a. 18 gauge and lighter; Minimum yield strength 33,000 PSI. b. 16 ga uge a nd h eavier; M inimum yield strength 50,000 PSI. 2. Shape: Cold formed C-channel section. 3. Thickness: As required f or s pecified d esign requirements. 4. Sizes: A s r equired f or s pecified requirements.
design
B. Track: 1. Material: Steel; matching material, gauge, and finish of studs. 2. Shape: Cold formed channel section. 3. Size: Web depth matching studs. C. Bridging: 1. Material: Steel; matching material and finish of studs, 16 gauge. 2. Shape: Cold formed channel section. 3. Size: 1-1/2 inches web depth. D. Joists: C onforming to A STM C955, a nd a s follows: 1. Material: M ill c ertified s teel c onforming to ASTM A 653/A653M, G 60/Z180 c oating, and as follows: a. 18 gauge and lighter; Minimum yield strength 33,000 PSI. b. 16 ga uge a nd he avier; M inimum yield strength 50,000 PSI. 2. Shape: Cold formed C-channel section. 3. Thickness: As required f or s pecified d esign requirements.
054000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 4. Sizes: A s r equired f or s pecified requirements.
Farmington Elementary School design
B. Fit, r einforce, and b race framing members to meet design requirements.
E. Joist Headers:
C. Touch u p d amaged co ating s urfaces; u se specified primer for primed steel surfaces, and use zinc rich primer for galvanized steel surfaces.
1. Material: S teel; m atching m aterial, g auge an d finish of joists. 2. Shape: Cold formed channel section.
2.9
A. Fabrication Tolerances:
3. Size: Web depth matching joists.
1. Nominal 20 gauge members:
F. Joist Bridging: 1. Material: Steel; matching material and finish of joists, 16 gauge.
a. Minimum B are Met al T hickness: 0 .0329 inch (0.83 mm).
2. Shape: Cold formed channel section.
b. Maximum Design Thickness: 0 .0346 i nch (0.88 mm)
3. Size: 1-1/2 inches web depth. G. Purlins: follows:
2. Nominal 18 gauge members:
Conforming to ASTM C955, and a s
a. Minimum B are Met al T hickness: 0 .0428 inch (1.09 mm).
1. Material: M ill c ertified s teel conforming t o ASTM A 653/A653M, G 60/Z180 c oating, and as follows:
b. Maximum Design Thickness: 0 .0451 i nch (1.15 mm) 3. Nominal 16 gauge members:
a. 18 gauge and lighter; Minimum yield strength 33,000 PSI.
a. Minimum B are Met al T hickness: 0 .0538 inch (1.37 mm).
b. 16 ga uge a nd he avier; M inimum yield strength 50,000 PSI.
b. Maximum Design Thickness: 0 .0566 i nch (1.44 mm).
2. Shape: Cold formed C-channel section.
4. Nominal 14 gauge members:
3. Thickness: A s r equired for specified d esign requirements. 4. Sizes: A s r equired f or s pecified requirements.
a. Minimum B are Met al T hickness: 0 .0677 inch (1.72 mm).
design
b. Maximum Design Thickness: 0 .0713 i nch (1.81 mm).
H. Miscellaneous F raming C omponents: Provide required or indicated items matching material and finish of major steel components.
5. Nominal 12 gauge members: a. Minimum B are Met al T hickness: 0 .0966 inch (2.45 mm).
1. 7/8” Furriing. 2. 2-1/2” Z framing.
b. Maximum Design Thickness: 0 .1017 i nch (2.58 mm).
I. Anchors a nd F asteners: P rovide re quired o r indicated items; p rovide g alvanized f asteners f or assemblies h aving g alvanized m ajor steel components.
B. Perform tests f or m ill cer tificates i n acco rdance with ASTM A370.
J. Primer for Galvanized S urfaces: Z inc r ich p rimer conforming to FS TT-P-645. 2.8
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing as semblies t o ex tend p ractical for final assembly in field; conform to requirements specified in I nstallation A rticle o f P art 3 o f th is section.
054000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.2
Addition and Remodeling
B. Verify that bearing surfaces and substrates are ready for construction activities of this Section.
B. Make p rovisions f or er ection s tresses. P rovide temporary alignment and bracing.
C. Verify t hat co ncealed t reated w ood blocking (Section 061000) h as be en pr ovided a nd is in th e proper locations.
C. Place joists at maximum 1 2 i nches o .c.; n ot more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using mechanical fastener method. D. Set ceiling joists p arallel a nd le vel, w ith la teral bracing and bridging.
ERECTION OF STUDDING A. Install co mponents i n acco manufacturer's instructions.
rdance
with
E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure i n p lace w ith f asteners at m aximum 16 inches (407 mm) o. c. C oordinate i nstallation o f sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Place studs at maximum 1 6 inches ( 407 mm) o .c.; not more than 2 i nches ( 51 m m) f rom a butting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using mechanical fastener method.
F. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points. G. Touch-up fi eld welds an d d amaged g alvanized surfaces with primer. 3.4
A. Maximum Variation from True P osition: 1 /16 inch.
D. Construct c orners using minimum t hree s tuds. Double s tud w all ope nings, door and window jambs. E. Erect load bearing studs o ne p iece f ull l ength. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Erect l oad-bearing studs, b race, an d r einforce t o develop f ull s trength, t o achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install in termediate s tuds a bove a nd b elow openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below h orizontal building f raming a t no n-load bearing framing. J. Attach cross s tuds o r f urring c hannels t o s tuds f or attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install f raming b etween s tuds f or a ttachment o f mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds an d d amaged g alvanized surfaces with primer. M. Provide bridging (horizontal stiffeners) at 4'-0" o.c. maximum vertical spacing f or a ll e xterior a nd a ll load bearing metal stud walls. 3.3
ERECTION OF JOISTS A. Install framing co mponents i n accordance w ith manufacturer's instructions.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
ERECTION TOLERANCES
B. Maximum Variation of an y M ember f rom P lane: 1/16 inch. 3.5
INSTALLATION A. Field Welding: In acco rdance w ith A WS D 1.3, and the following: 1. Stud-to-Track C onnections: 1 /2-inch f illet weld, f ull le ngth o f in side f lange dimension, inside each flange of stud onto track web. 2. All Other Connections: Flat, plug, butt or seam. 3. Minimum S teel T hickness f Connections: 18 gauge.
or
Welded
B. Field F astening: U se m inimum tw o ( 2) s elftapping m etal s crews per connection, unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing: I nstall co mponents i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s i nstructions, s hop d rawings, and requirements of ASTM C1007. 1. Provide for erection stresses; provide temporary bracing as construction activities progress. 2. Erect l oad b earing co mponents i n single piece full length; splicing of load bearing components is prohibited. 3. Brace and reinforce load-bearing as semblies as indicated or required for full design strength. D. Vertical Framing: 1. Align top and bottom tracks; locate as indicated, and secure t rack t o s ubstrate at m aximum 16 054000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling inches on c enter, us ing f astening m ethods specified in m anufacturer’s p rinted installation instructions for project substrate types. 2. Place studs at spacing i ndicated o n s hop drawings, m aximum t wo ( 2) inches from abutting w alls; c onstruct c orners us ing minimum three (3) studs. 3. Install dou ble s tuds a t j ambs of ope nings f or doors, cased openings, and windows; install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. 4. Seat studs in track square with track flange, with stud e nd m aximum 1 /16 i nch f rom s urface o f track web. 5. Attach c ross s tuds f or a ttachment of fixtures; install f raming b etween s tuds f or a ttachment of mechanical an d el ectrical i tems, an d t o p revent stud rotation. 6. Placement of insulation b etween s tuds af ter erection is specified under provisions of Section 072100. E. Horizontal Framing: 1. Place components at spacing i ndicated o n t he shop drawings; m inimum t wo ( 2) inches f rom abutting walls. 2. Set c omponents p arallel a nd le vel, w ith lateral bracing and bridging. 3. Locate en ds o f l oad b earing components directly over support points.
Farmington Elementary School
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and in specting a gency to p erform field tests and i nspections an d p repare t est r eports in acco rdance w ith th e p rovisions o f S ection 014523 B. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe t hose i tems n ot s pecifically required by the 200 6 International Building C ode as am ended by t he 200 7 Minnesota S tate B uilding C ode, b ut are co nsidered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. C. Special structural te sting a nd in spection s ervices herein described include items required by the 2006 International B uilding C ode as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, and other items which in t he p rofessional j udgement o f t he Structural E ngineer o f R ecord ar e cr itical t o t he integrity of the building structure. D. If t ests i ndicate W ork d oes n ot meet specified requirements, r emove W ork, r eplace an d r etest at no cost to Owner. E. Visually inspect 100% of w elds f or s pecified length, s ize an d co ntinuity i n accordance with AWS D1.3 f or metal less th an 1/8-inch thickness, for Work designed as a structural element. Provide testing a nd in spection f or f ield w elds previously specified under provisions of Section 051200.
END OF SECTION
4. Provide web stiffeners a t lo cations indicated o r required. F. Touch up d amaged c oating s urfaces; sue specified primer. G. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from P lumb: M aximum 1 /8 in ch in ten (10) feet. 2. Variation from Level: Maximum 1/8 inch in ten (10) feet. 3. Variation from True Plane: M aximum 1 /8 in ch in ten (10) feet. 4. Variation f rom T rue P osition: M aximum 1 /4 inch. 5. Variation o f M ember f rom P lane: Max imum 1/8 inch.
054000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\054000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS C. Section 051200 - Structural S teel: S tructural steel anchor bolts.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions o f th e C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Shop Fabricated Ferrous M etal F abrications Manufactured to Conventional Details From Standard Metal Shapes and Plates; as I ndicated o n t he Drawings, Specified Herein; I ncluding A ll R elated Fittings, Connections, Attachments a nd A ccessories; Prime Painted and Galvanized. C. Metal F abrications, in cluding but not lim ited to th e following: 1. Exterior Roof Ladder (with Cage).
D. Section 052100 - Steel Joists: Structural joist bearing plates, including anchorage. E. Section 053100 - Steel Decking: Bearing p lates o r angles for metal d eck b earing, i ncluding an chorage. Perimeter closures for steel decking. F. Section 054000 - Cold Rolled Metal Framing. G. Section 055100 - Metal S tairs a nd R ailings: S teel stairs w ith o pen r isers a nd s teel w elded bar grating treads and landings and associated steel railings. H. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: T reated w ood blocking. I. Section 099000 - Paints a nd C oatings: P aint to uchup and finish. 1.4
2. Exterior Pipe Bollards. 3. Angles, C hannels an d P lates N ot A ttached to Structural Framing. 4. Steel framing a nd s upports for overhead doors, mechanical an d el ectrical equipment and for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Steel Lintels.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural P erformance o f L adders: P rovide l adders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. B. Fabricate stair a ssembly t o support live l oad of 100 lb./sq. f t. m inimum; c oncentrated l oad of 300 lb. minimum; w ith d eflection o f s tringer o r landing framing not to exceed L/240 of span.
D. Schedule of Items at End of This Section.
C. Railing a ssembly d esigned to w ithstand a minimum concentrated load of 250 lb. applied in any direction at a ny p oint o n th e to p r ail, o r 50 lb./lin. ft., whichever is greater.
E. [Architecturally E xposed Met al F abrications, Classified a s “ Architecturally Exposed S tructural Steel” (AESS) as Defined by AISC.]
D. Design r equirements s pecified h erein ar e i n ad dition to applicable building c ode r equirements; th e m ore stringent requirements shall govern.
6. Railings and Handrails. 7. Strut System Components.
1.2
PRODUCT FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
NOT
A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry S ystem: P lacement of metal fabrications in masonry. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 034113 - Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks: Precast concrete plank t o receive bolts and steel welding plates.
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
E. Structural calculations p repared an d cer tified f or t he entire s tair as sembly, l adders an d r ailings b y a Professional E ngineer r egistered i n t he S tate o f Minnesota. 1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate d etailed f abrication an d erection of each metal f abrication; I nclude p rofiles, sizes, plans, elevations, co nnection at tachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size an d t ype o f f asteners, and accessories.
055000 - 1 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. Design Calculations: S ubmit s hop d rawings showing d esign c alculations a nd d ata w ith structural engineers certification.
must fit, by accu rate f ield m easurements b efore fabrication; s how r ecorded m easurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
C. Indicate w elded co nnections u sing s tandard A WS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
1. Where f ield m easurements can not b e m ade without delaying the w ork, gua rantee dimensions a nd pr oceed w ith f abrication of products w ithout f ield m easurements. Coordinate construction to e nsure th at a ctual opening di mensions c orrespond t o guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
D. Welder's Certificates: S ubmit u nder p rovisions o f Section 0 14300. Man ufacturer's cer tificates, certifying welders em ployed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and lic ensed in th e S tate o f Minnesota. B. Perform W ork i n acco rdance with AISC Specifications for Architectural E xposed S tructural Steel. C. Perform a ll w elding ope rations u nder pr ovisions of AWS, D1.1 - "Structural Welding Code Steel"; AWS D1.2, " Structural W elding C ode--Aluminum"; A WS D1.3, " Structural W elding C ode--Sheet S teel" an d AWS D1.6, "Structural W elding C ode--Stainless Steel" as applicable D. Welders’ Certificates: S ubmit u nder p rovision o f Section 014300, certifying welders e mployed on t he Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. E. SSPC, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, "Steel Structures Painting Manual". 1. Metal p rimers shall b e chromate free and VOC compliant. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to the site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver an chor b olts an d o ther an chorage d evices to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction to site in time for installation. C. Store steel members above ground on platforms, skids or other acceptable supports. Protect steel from corrosion. D. Store o ther m aterials i n a w atertight and dry place until ready for incorporation into the Work. 1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and o ther c onstruction to w hich m etal fabrications 055000 - 2 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FERROUS METAL MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For m etal fabrications exposed t o v iew u pon c ompletion of the work, provide n ew m aterials s elected f or t heir s urface flatness, s moothness, an d f reedom from surface blemishes. D o n ot u se m aterials w hose ex posed surfaces e xhibit p itting, s eam m arks, r oller m arks, rolled trade names, roughness, an d, f or s teel s heet, variation in f latness e xceeding th ose p ermitted b y reference standards f or s tretcher-leveled s heet. A ll steel tubing and plate shall have sharp edging, unless shown otherwise. B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing: Cold-Formed, ASTM A500, Grade C. D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. 1. Galvanized: Exterior locations, and other areas where indicated. 2. Interior Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless indicated otherwise. F. Anchors-Inserts: 1. Threaded Type: ASTM A27; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 2. Slotted Type: ASTM A283; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 3. Cast-in-Place Anchors i n C oncrete: A nchors capable o f s ustaining, without f ailure, a lo ad equal to four times t he l oad i mposed, a s determined b y t esting acco rding t o A STM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
iron o r A STM A27/A27M cas t s teel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip g alvanized p er ASTM A153/A153M. 4. Expansion A nchors: A nchor b olt and sleeve assembly w ith c apability to s ustain, w ithout failure, a lo ad e qual to s ix tim es th e lo ad imposed w hen i nstalled in unit m asonry a nd four tim es th e lo ad im posed w hen installed in concrete, as d etermined b y testing acco rding to ASTM E 488, c onducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Material for Anchors in I nterior L ocations: Carbon-steel co mponents zi nc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn5. b. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy G roup 1 or 2 stainless-steel b olts complying w ith ASTM F5 93 and nut s complying with ASTM F594. G. Fasteners: Zinc coated, galvanized for exterior use or when used in exterior walls, in accordance with ASTM A153. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class r equired f or th e in stallation of miscellaneous metal items.
C. Interior A nchoring C ement: P remixed, f actorypackaged, n on-shrink, no n-staining, hy draulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project s ite t o cr eate p ourable anchoring, p atching, a nd gr outing c ompound. U se for interior applications only. D. Erosion-Resistant A nchoring C ement: P remixed, factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project s ite t o cr eate p ourable anchoring, p atching, a nd gr outing compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water e xposure w ithout ne ed for pr otection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. 2.3
FABRICATION - GENERAL
3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FFS-92.
A. Form metal fabrications f rom m aterials o f s ize, thickness, and shapes indicated on the Drawings, but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements in dicated. W ork to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials i ndicated o r s pecified for various components of each metal fabrication.
4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S111.
B. Fit and s hop as semble i n l argest p ractical s ections, for delivery to site.
5. Plain Washers: R ound, general assembly grade carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
C. Form exposed work true to lin e and le vel w ith accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
6. Lock Washers: Helical spring t ype car bon steel, FS FF-W-84.
D. Allow f or th ermal m ovement r esulting f rom the following maximum change ( range) i n ambient temperature in the design, fabrication and installation of metal a ssemblies t o p revent b uckling, opening up of j oints, a nd ov er-stressing o f w elds a nd fasteners. Base d esign cal culations o n actual surface temperatures of m etals d ue t o b oth s olar h eat g ain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Standard Bolts a nd N uts: R egular he xagon type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
7. Other Fastener Types: application.
As r equired to suit
H. Welding Electrodes: Appropriate type for the metal to b e w elded; c omply w ith A WS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.2
B. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Premixed, factorypackaged, n on-staining, no n-corrosive, n on-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically r ecommended b y m anufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Non-Shrink M etallic G rout: Premixed, factorypackaged, ferrous aggregate grout c omplying w ith CE CRD -C 6 21, s pecifically r ecommended b y manufacturer for heavy duty l oading applications o f type specified in this section.
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
E. Welding: 1. Weld all s hop c onnections a nd all field connections, u nless n oted o r s pecified otherwise. 2. Weld corners and s eams, c ontinuously a nd i n accordance with the requirements o f t he A WS Code. 055000 - 3 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
3. Employ w elders q ualified in acco rdance w ith the requirements of the AWS Code. F. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and h airline. E ase ex posed ed ges t o s mall uniform radius. G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws o r bolts; u nobtrusively lo cated; consistent with d esign o f co mponent, except where specifically noted otherwise. H. Supply c omponents r equired f or anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components o f s ame m aterial and finish a s fabrication, ex cept w here s pecifically noted otherwise. I. Ease exposed edges to a radius of 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. F orm bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work, J. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble u nits o nly as n ecessary f or shipping and ha ndling l imitations. U se c onnections that maintain structural value o f j oined p ieces. Clearly mark u nits f or r e-assembly an d co ordinate installation. 2.4
FINISHES
A. Clean s urfaces o f r ust, s cale, g rease, an d foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Shop P rimer for Ferrous Metals: M anufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, l ead-free, u niversal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish p aint s ystems in dicated, a nd f or c apability to provide a sound foundation for field applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. D. Galvanizing R epair P aint: H igh z inc d ust c ontent paint f or r e-galvanizing w elds i n g alvanized s teel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. E. Exterior Exposed F errous M etal: Commercial blast clean all surfaces to be exposed to conform to SSPCSP6. S hop pr ime s urfaces with TNEMEC No. 1611211, “ TNEME-FASCURE” P rimer, o r approved equivalent by the Architect. D ry film thickness shall 055000 - 4 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
be minimum 4.0 mils. Thickness shall be verified by an Independent Inspection Firm und er provisions o f Section 014523. 1. Finish coats: S pecified u nder p rovisions o f Section 099000. F. Bituminous Paint: C old-applied as phalt e mulsion complying with ASTM D1187. 2.5
ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide be nt or ot herwise c ustom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, h angers, dowels, an d other miscellaneous steel an d i ron s hapes as r equired f or framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring and securing w oodwork t o c oncrete or ot her structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6. B. Fabricate i tems t o s izes, s hapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable i ron w ashers for h eads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.6
MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS
FRAMING
AND
A. General: P rovide s teel f raming an d s upports for applications indicated on the Drawings, or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete the work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on t he D rawings, an d r equired t o r eceive adjacent other c onstruction r etained b y f raming and supports. Fabricate f rom s tructural s teel s hapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, d rill a nd ta p u nits to receive hardware, hangers and similar items. 1. Equip units with in tegrally w elded a nchors f or casting in to c oncrete o r building into masonry. Furnish i nserts i f uni ts m ust be installed a fter concrete is placed. 2.7
STRUT SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. All Strut S ystem C omponents m anufactured b y UNISTRUT Corporation, or approved equal. B. Provide UNI STRUT P1000 S eries ch annels an d accessories as i ndicated o n t he D rawings. Fabricate channel m embers from structural g rade s teel conforming to ASTM A1011. C. Fittings, f abricated f rom s teel c onforming to one of the following: 1. ASTM A36. METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School D. Strut S ystem C omponents s hall b e f inished in accordance with the following standards: 1. UNISTRUT P ERMA-GREEN II (GR); Rust inhibiting a crylic e namel p aint f actory applied by el ectro-deposition, after cl eaning an d phosphating, and t horoughly b aked. C olor i s per Federal Standard 595a color number 14109 (dark lim it V ). F inish to w ithstand m inimum 400 hours salt spray when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
Addition and Remodeling C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to m aintain tr ue a lignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to f orm hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded due to shipping s ize lim itations. D o n ot w eld, c ut o r abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field W elding: C omply w ith AWS Code for procedures o f m anual s hielded m etal-arc w elding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use m aterials a nd m ethods that minimize distortion a nd de velop s trength a nd c orrosion resistance of base metals.
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be p erformed. C orrect c onditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At e xposed c onnections, f inish e xposed w elds and s urfaces s mooth a nd bl ended s o t hat n o roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent and ha s the ap pearance o f a w eld free butt jointed connection at inside and outside corners, or the appearance of a continuous piece at straight butt joints.
PREPARATION
A. Clean a nd s trip p rimed s teel ite ms to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cas t i nto co ncrete o r embedded in m asonry w ith s etting te mplates, to appropriate sections. C. Coordinate and furnish anchorage; setting d rawings, diagrams, te mplates, in structions a nd d irections for installation of anchorage, including c oncrete in serts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.3
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Fastening t o I n-Place Construction: P rovide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, F itting a nd P lacement: P erform c utting, drilling and f itting r equired f or in stallation o f miscellaneous m etal f abrications. S et metal fabrication accu rately i n l ocation, al ignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
F. Corrosion P rotection: C oat co ncealed s urfaces of aluminum th at w ill c ome in to c ontact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy co at o f b ituminous p aint o r zi nc chromate primer. G. Obtain A rchitects w ritten a pproval p rior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. H. Install Strut S ystem C omponents in to f inal p osition true to line, level and p lumb, i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing a nd I nspecting: O wner w ill en gage a qualified te sting a nd in specting a gency to p erform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports in accordance with the provisions of Section 014523. 055000 - 5 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling B. Conventional testing a nd i nspection s ervices he rein describe those i tems not s pecifically r equired b y th e 2006 International Building Code as amended by the 2007 Minnesota S tate B uilding C ode, b ut are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. C. Special structural te sting a nd in spection s ervices herein described include items required b y t he 2 006 IBC as am ended b y t he 2 007 Minnesota S tate Building Code, and o ther i tems w hich i n t he professional j udgment o f t he S tructural E ngineer of Record a re c ritical to th e in tegrity o f th e building structure. D. If te sts indicate W ork d oes n ot meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Inspect and test special finish primer outlined above. 3.6
CLEANING
A. Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections an d ab raded ar eas o f the shop p aint o n miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 099000 Painting and Coatings. B. For g alvanized s urfaces, cl ean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. 3.7
SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. R efer to D rawing d etails f or ite ms not specifically scheduled. B. Exterior Roof Ladder: S teel, g alvanized t o G 90 requirements, s traight b ar s tock 3 /8 i nch b y 3 inch continuous on both sides and curved over the top to provide support, height a nd pr ofile a s i ndicated on the Drawings, 3 /4 i nch d iameter b ar r ungs a t 1 2 inches o n cen ter, l et r ungs i nto s ide b ars an d weld, complete with all mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish. 1. Fabricate safety cages in accordance with ANSI A14.3 and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Bollards: Steel pipe seven ( 7) f eet l ong, co ncrete filled, crowned cap, prime p aint f inish o nly th e exposed top 3'-6". D. Ledge an d S helf A ngles, C hannels an d P lates Not Attached to Structural Framing: S teel for support of metal decking, joists, masonry and miscellaneous items; g alvanized t o G 90 r equirements, an d prime paint finish. 055000 - 6 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School E. Steel F raming a nd S upports: F abricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless o therwise in dicated. Fabricate t o s izes, shapes, and profiles i ndicated an d as n ecessary t o receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. C ut, d rill, a nd ta p u nits to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate s upports f or operable partitions from continuous s teel b eams o f s izes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and b races as indicated. D rill b ottom f langes o f beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where i ndicated on ope rable pa rtition Shop Drawings. F. Lintels: Steel a s d etailed; g alvanized to G 90 requirements, and prime paint finish. G. Backing Plates: Steel plates in connection with studs and furring ne cessary f or e ngaging a nd f astening o f wall-hung ite ms s hall b e p rovided a t lo cations indicated on the Drawings, or as necessary. 1. Backing plates shall be securely welded, heavier than 20 gauge; self-drilling screwed or bolted to 20 ga uge a nd l ighter s teel stud supporting members i n t he r equired pos ition; s hop pr ime finished. H. Railings and Handrails: Steel pipe as detailed; insure that runs of horizontal pipe on opposite sides of posts are in t he s ame p lane, b oth v ertically an d horizontally. M ake j oints f lush w ith c oncealed seamless f ittings. A ccurately c ut, m iter, w eld and grind smooth to flush surfaces. Make bends t o preserve t he c ontour of t he pi pe. S hop pr ime finish at in terior r ails, a nd h ot-dip g alvanize f inish after fabrication for exterior rails. 1. Secured t o W alls: P rovide cas t b rackets o f stock d esign providing 1 -1/2 inch m inimum clearance b etween r ailing an d w all. Secure to wall w ith m achine b olts an d s teel b acker p late secured to metal studs. A ttach to co ncrete and masonry with expansion shields and galvanized bolts. 2. Pipe S leeves S et i n C oncrete: F abricate pipe sleeves from minimum 1 6 gauge galvanized steel with welded, closed bottoms. Deliver pipe sleeves to P roject S ite f or in stallation in concrete forms. P ipe s tandards s et i n m etal sleeves wedged true and plumb and cemented in place w ith n on-shrink grout. F inish surface of grout smooth and flush with concrete surface. I. Strut S ystem C omponents a s in dicated o n th e Drawings. METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
J. All other m iscellaneous m etal f abrications s upplied on a project o f t his t ype, and i ndicated on t he Drawings.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055000CGA.doc
055000 - 7 of 7
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS Professional Engineer registered in t he S tate o f Minnesota.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
A. Conditions of th eC ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One), and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, r einforcing, an chorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
B. Steel Stair Frame of Structural Sections with Open Risers; Steel Welded B ar G rating w ith S afety Nosings at Stair Treads and Landings.
1. Design Calculations: S ubmit s hop d rawings showing d esign c alculations a nd d ata w ith structural engineers certification.
C. Steel S tair F rame o f S tructural Sections, with Closed Risers; Formed Metal Pans to Receive Concrete Fill at Stair Treads and Landings. D. Associated S teel P ipe R ailings, P osts, B rackets, Fittings and All Related Accessories. 1.2
C. Indicate w elded co nnections u sing s tandard A WS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.5
A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete fill at stair pans for treads and landings; mesh reinforcing at landings.
B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural E ngineer ex perienced i n design of t his w ork a nd l icensed i n t he State o f Minnesota.
C. Section 051200 - Structural Steel: B earing plates, angles and channels for metal stairs, including anchorage.
C. Welders' C ertificates: S ubmit u nder provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS q ualification w ithin th e previous 12 months.
Tread
E. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: T reated wood blocking and shims.
D. SSPC, V olume 2 , S ystems an d Specifications, “Steel Structures Painting Manual”.
F. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: F ield paint finish. 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Metal primers: Chromate free and low VOC. 1.6
A. Fabricate stair assembly to support live load of 100 lb./sq. f t. m inimum; c oncentrated l oad of 300 l b. minimum; with deflection o f s tringer o r la nding framing not to exceed L/240 of span. B. Railing assembly designed to withstand a minimum concentrated l oad of 250 l b. applied in a ny direction at any point on the top rail, or 50 lb./lin. ft., whichever is greater. C. Design r equirements s pecified h erein are in addition to a pplicable building co de r equirements; the more stringent requirements shall govern. D. Structural calculations prepared an d cer tified f or the entire s tair a ssembly a nd r ailings b y a METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS S:\11\0122\div2to33\055100CGA.doc
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NAAMM S tair S tandard: C omply w ith "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for metal pan stairs and NAAMM MBG 531, Metal B ar G rating M anual for m etalbar-grating stairs.
RELATED SECTIONS
D. Section 055000 - Metal F abrications: support angles and anchorage.
SUBMITTALS
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f metal s tairs a nd railings and o ther c onstruction to which s tairs and railings must f it, b y accu rate f ield m easurements before fabrication; s how r ecorded m easurements o n final shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts t o t he site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Store m aterials on s ite in a lo cation a nd in a manner to avoid damage. Stack in a manner which prevents bending. 055100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School 1/4 i nch s teel a ngle r einforcing under landings to meet structural requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
L. Concrete F ill f or T reads a nd L andings: Portland Cement Type 1, 4000 psi at 28 days compressive strength, 2 to 3 inch slump.
MATERIALS A. Metal S urfaces, G eneral: F or m etal f abrications exposed t o v iew u pon c ompletion of t he work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemished. Do n ot u se m aterials w hose ex posed s urfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, r oller m arks, r olled trade n ames, r oughness an d f or steel sheet, variation in f latness e xceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. All steel t ubing and p late shall have sharp edges, unless shown otherwise.
M. Landing Concrete Reinforcement: W elded w ire mesh i n acco rdance w ith Section 032000, unfinished. N. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. O. Exposed Mech anical F astenings: F lush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of stair structure. P. Welding Materials: AWS D 1.1; type r equired for materials being welded.
B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
Q. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501; c old f ormed, G rade C; sized as indicated on the Drawings.
R. Safety S tair N osing: A t a ll c oncrete filled stairs, provide no sing 1 -7/8 in ch w ide, 1 /4 in ch th ick, nose 1 -1/8 i nch underside, a nd bol ted to steel pan return a t tw elve ( 12) in ches o n c enter w ith b olt maximum t hree ( 3) i nches from ends; S upergrit Type 122 as m anufactured b y W OOSTER Products, Inc., or approved equal.
D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Steel P ipe R ailings: 1 -1/2 in ch o utside d iameter (O.D.) by 13 gauge and profiles as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Interior Type F, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless indicated otherwise. F. Fittings: E lbows, T -shapes, w all b rackets, escutcheons; machined steel. G. Mountings: A djustable b rackets a nd flanges with steel inserts f or cas ting i nto co ncrete. P repare backing plate for mounting in wall construction. H. Grating Stair Treads: S teel w elded s tandard b ar grating with integral s afety no sing, # 19W4 a s manufactured by B rown-Campbell C ompany or approved equivalent by the Architect. Treads sized as i ndicated o n t he D rawings, and complete with all anchor clips, saddle anchors and attachments. I. Grating Stair Landings: S teel welded standard bar grating w ith in tegral s afety n osing, #19W 4 a s manufactured by B rown-Campbell C ompany or approved equal. Landing sized as indicated on the Drawings, and complete w ith a ll anchor clips, saddle anchors and at tachments, i ncluding s teel angle reinforcing under landings to meet structural requirements. J. Pan Stair Treads: M inimum 1 0 g auge s teel p an, two (2) inches deep, concrete filled. K. Pan Stair Landings: Minimum 10 gauge steel pan, three (3) inches deep, concrete f illed; with 3 x 3-
055100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.2
FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Form m etal f abrications f rom m aterials o f size, thickness, and shapes i ndicated o n t he D rawings, but n ot le ss than th at needed to comply with performance r equirements i ndicated. W ork t o dimensions i ndicated or a ccepted on shop drawings, using proven details o f f abrication a nd support. U se t ype o f m aterials s pecified f or various components of each metal fabrication. B. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Continuously seal jointed p ieces b y in termittent welds and plastic filler. E. Grind exposed joints flush a nd s mooth w ith adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and ha irline. E ase e xposed e dges t o small uniform radius. F. Exposed Mech anical F astenings: F lush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School G. Supply c omponents r equired f or anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate an chors an d r elated components of same material and finish as fabrication, ex cept w here s pecifically n oted otherwise.
Addition and Remodeling
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine the areas and c onditions und er w hich Work of this Section will b e p erformed. Correct conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of the Work. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
H. Accurately f orm co mponents r equired f or anchorage of stairs and landings to each other and to building structure. 2.3
B. Verify treated wood blocking is in place, and properly installed, including stair railings at metal stud partitions.
FABRICATION - TREADS AND LANDINGS A. Fabricate stair welded bar grate treads and landings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Verify th at d imensional to lerances, s upports and anchors are correctly positioned.
1. Secure tread bar g rates to s tringers w ith c lip angles, bolted or welded in place 2. Form stringers w ith r olled s teel channels minimum twelve (12) inches deep. 3. Form landing bar grate with clips angles, bolted or w elded i n p lace. Reinforce underside w ith steel angles to attain design load requirements. B. Fabricate stair m etal pan treads and landings with closed r isers o f m etal p an co nstruction, r eady to receive concrete. 1. Form treads and risers o f m inimum 1 0 ga uge thick steel stock. 2. Secure tread pans to stringers with cl ip angles, bolted or welded in place. 3. Form stringers w ith r olled steel channels minimum 12 inches deep. 4. Form landings w ith m inimum 1 0 ga uge t hick steel stock. Reinforce underside w ith steel angles to attain design load requirements. 2.4
SHOP FINISHES A. Clean surfaces o f r ust, s cale, g rease, an d f oreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do n ot p rime s urfaces in d irect c ontact w ith concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one (1) coat of fabricator’s standard low VOC primer.
2.5
FIELD FINISHES A. Touch-up p rimer an d f ield f inish i n accordance with Section 099000.
METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS S:\11\0122\div2to33\055100CGA.doc
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed s teel ite ms to b are m etal where site welding is required.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install m etal f abrication ite ms p lumb a nd le vel, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, p lates, a ngles, ha ngers a nd s truts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection l oads, an d f or s ufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion o f e rection a nd in stallation o f permanent attachments. D. Field weld c omponents i ndicated on s hop drawings. Perform f ield w elding i n acco rdance with AWS D1.1. E. Field bol t a nd w eld t o m atch s hop bolting and welding. C onceal b olts an d screws whenever possible. W here n ot co ncealed, u se flush countersunk fastenings. F. Mechanically fasten joints b utted tig ht, f lush, a nd hairline. Grind welds smooth and flush. G. Obtain Architects w ritten a pproval p rior to s ite cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. H. After er ection, p rime w elds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop p rimed, except surfaces to b e in contact with concrete. I. Install p erforated m etal an d co mponents at M etal Stair Railings as indicated on the Drawings. Install plumb an d l evel, accu rately f itted, an d f ree f rom distortions and defects.
055100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
Farmington Elementary School
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing and inspection performed by qualified testing ag ency as s pecified h erein an d i n accordance with the provisions of Section 014523. B. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe t hose i tems n ot s pecifically r equired by the 2006 International Building Code as amended by t he 200 7 Minnesota State Building C ode, b ut are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. C. If t ests i ndicate W ork d oes n ot m eet s pecified requirements, r emove W ork, r eplace an d r etest at no cost to Owner. D. Provide te sting a nd in spection o f miscellaneous metals, i nserts an d p refabricated components f or field w elds pr eviously s pecified u nder provisions of Section 051200.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum V ariation F rom P lumb: 1 /4 in ch p er story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
055100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\055100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY G. Section 062000 Finish Carpentry: Miscellaneous items requiring co ncealed b acking materials.
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
H. Section 064 000 - Architectural W oodwork: Miscellaneous items requiring co ncealed b acking materials.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
I. Section 075100 - Built-Up B ituminous Roofing: R equirements f or w ood n ailers and blocking.
B. Rough Carpentry; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including But Not Limited To:
J. Section 075310 Roofing.
1. Treated Wood B locking, Shims, Grounds, Nailers, Equipment Bases, Furring and Curbs.
K. Section 076200 - Sheet M etal Flashing a nd Trim: Requirements f or w ood n ailers a nd blocking.
2. Concealed Treated Wood Blocking for Support of Hardware, Toilet Compartments, Toilet Accessories, Base C abinets, G rab B ars, S tair Railings, Window Treatment and Miscellaneous Equipment.
L. Section 102810 - Toilet Accessories: Miscellaneous items requiring backing materials. M. Section 122000 - Window T reatment: I tems requiring concealed backing materials.
3. Concealed Sheet M etal S trap B acking f or Support of Wall Cabinets.
N. Section 123500 - Plastic Laminate Casework: Casework i tems r equiring b acking m aterials, and core material for plastic laminate construction.
4. Medium D ensity F iberboard as Core Material for Plastic Laminate Construction. 5. Treated Plywood Backing Panels for Electrical and Telephone Equipment.
1.3
B. Wood T reatment D ata: S ubmit ch emical treatment m anufacturer's instructions f or handling, storing, in stallation a nd f inishing o f tr eated materials.
7. All Related F asteners, A ttachments an d Adhesives. 8. All R elated P reservative an d F ire-Retardant Wood Treatments.
1. Preservative T reatment: F or each type specified, include certification b y tr eating p lant stating ty pe o f p reservative s olution a nd pressure process used, n et am ount o f preservative r etained an d conformance w ith applicable standards.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 031000 - Concrete F ormwork: W ood formwork. B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Wood blocking anchored into concrete.
2. Water-Borne Treatment: I nclude statement that moisture co ntent o f t reated m aterials w as reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
C. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: Wood blocking anchored into unit masonry.
3. Fire-Retardant T reatment: I nclude cer tification by tr eating p lant th at tr eated m aterials c omply with specified standard and other requirements.
D. Section 053100 - Metal D ecking: W ood blocking fastened to metal decking. E. Section 055000 - Metal F abrications: Miscellaneous item requiring backing materials. F. Section 055100 - Metal S tairs a nd R ailings: Stair railings requiring backing materials.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
6. Treated Wood Framing for Metal Locker Bases.
1.2
– Elastomeric M embrane
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of ag ency cer tified b y A merican F orest & P aper Association (AF&PA).
061000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Lumber S tandards: M anufacture lumber to comply with "PS 20"; American Softwood Lumber Standard graded i n acco rdance w ith es tablished grading rules of i nspection ag encies cer tified b y American Lumber S tandards C ommittee ( ALSC); maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2. Plywood and O SB G rading A gency: Certified by APA. C. In addition to other legal requirements, comply with the following: 1. Pressure T reated W ood: T reatment p lant and preservative accep table t o g overning building code.
B. Grade S tamps: F actory m ark each piece of lumber with g rade s tamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with gr ading r ule requirements and identifying gr ading a gency, grade, s pecies, m oisture content a t tim e of surfacing and mill.
2. Fire-Retardant T reated W ood: T esting agency UL label rating accep table t o g overning building code. 1.5
C. Nominal sizes are i ndicated, ex cept as s hown by d etail d imensions. P rovide act ual s izes as required by P S-20, for m oisture c ontent s pecified for each use.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and p rotect P roducts t o site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Do not deliver s hop fabricated car pentry i tems until s ite co nditions ar e ad equate t o receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. C. Store indoors, in ventilated a reas w ith a constant, m inimum t emperature o f 6 0 degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: F it c arpentry w ork to o ther work; s cribe an d co pe as r equired f or accurate fit. Correlate location of f urring, n ailers, b locking, grounds a nd s imilar s upports to allow attachment of other work.
1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of r ough carpentry and other construction t o w hich r ough c arpentry m ust fit, b y accu rate f ield measurements before fabrication. C oordinate f abrication s chedule w ith construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
061000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
CONCEALED WOOD BLOCKING A. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 W estern H emlock, sound and thoroughly s easoned with maximum 1 9 percent moisture content a t time roofing is installed.
D. Keep materials under co ver an d d ry. P rotect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. E. Stack lumber as well as p lywood an d o ther panels; provide for air c irculation w ithin a nd around s tacks a nd und er temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
LUMBER - GENERAL
1. Fire-Retardant Treated. 2.3
ROOF BLOCKING A. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 W estern H emlock, sound and thoroughly s easoned with maximum 1 9 percent moisture content a t time roofing is installed. 1. Preservative Treated. 2. Fire treated where exposed to concealed spaces. B. Wood S tructural P anels ( Plywood): APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, Structural 1, [untreated] and thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Fire treated where exposed to concealed spaces.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.4
2.5
Addition and Remodeling
DIMENSION LUMBER
3. Internal Bond Strength: Minimum 130 PSI.
A. Light F raming: Provide “ Stud” o r “ Standard” grade lumber for stud framing (2 - 4 inch thick, 2 6 i nch w ide, t en ( 10) f eet and shorter) and “Standard” grade for other light framing (2 - 4 inch thick, 2 - 4 i nch w ide, an d s pecies, construction grade).
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,600 PSI.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide w ood for support or attachment of other work, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping a nd s imilar m embers. Provide lumber of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and worked into shapes shown. B. Maximum 1 9 p ercent m oisture co ntent f or lumber items n ot s pecified t o r eceive w ood preservative treatment. C. Grade: S tandard g rade l ight f raming s ize lumber o f an y s pecies o r b oard s ize l umber as required. N o. 3 C ommon or Standard Grade boards per WCLIB o r W WPA ru les or N o. 3 boards per SIB rules. D. All i nterior w ood b locking and furring, including all 1x or 2x members shall be fireretardant, tr eated w ood with a maximum m oisture content of 19 percent.
2.6
CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood Backing Panels: Mounting e lectrical and t elephone e quipment, pr ovide f ire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D Plugged INT with exterior type moisture resistant glue, in thickness in dicated o n th e Drawings, o r, if n ot o therwise in dicated, not less than 5/8 inches.
2.7
MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD A. Exterior Grade, Medium D ensity F iberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, m inimum 90 pe rcent of w hich obtained f rom w ood r esiduals, bon ded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, m eeting r equirements of A NSI A208.2 Product Cl ass M D-EXTERIOR, a nd ha ving the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch: 1. Acceptable P roduct: M “MEDEX”.
5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 575,000 PSI. 6. Hardness: Minimum 1,000 lb. (4400 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material: a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N). b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0 .005 i nch ( 0.13 mm), plus or minus. B. Interior Grade, Med ium D ensity F iberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, m inimum 90 pe rcent of w hich obtained f rom w ood r esiduals, bon ded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, m eeting r equirements of A NSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and ha ving t he f ollowing properties for sheet m aterial t hickness u p t o, an d including, 3/4 inch: 1. Acceptable P roduct: “MEDITE II”.
M edite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: Minimum 115 PSI. 4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,200 PSI. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 520,000 PSI. 6. Hardness: Minimum 1,150 lb. (5115 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material: a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N). b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0 .005 i nch ( 0.13 mm), plus or minus.
edite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF. ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
061000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Fire Retardant, Medium D ensity F iberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, m inimum 90 pe rcent of w hich obtained f rom wood r esiduals, s aturated w ith fire retardant ad ditives, t hen b onded u nder h eat an d pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, m eeting r equirements of A NSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and ha ving t he f ollowing properties for sheet m aterial th ickness up t o, a nd including, 3/4 inch (19 mm): 1. Acceptable P roduct: “MEDITE-FR”.
M edite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 45 PCF (725 kg/cu m). 3. Internal Bond Strength: M inimum 1 00 P SI (689 kPa). 4. Modulus of R upture: M inimum 3, 500 P SI ( 24 Mpa). 5. Modulus of Elasticity: M inimum 375,000 P SI (2585 Mpa). 6. Hardness: Minimum 1,000 lb. (4400 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch (25 mm) long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material: a. Face: Minimum 300 lbf (1334 N). b. Edge: Minimum 225 lbf (1000 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0 .005 i nch ( 0.13 mm), plus or minus. 10. Fire R esistance: C lass 1 s urface f lame s pread when tested in accordance with UL 723. 2.8
WOOD LOCKER BASES A. Provide concealed f ire-treated, 2 by w ood framing at l ocker b ases as i ndicated o n t he Drawings. 1. Verify details with Section 105100.
2.9
LUMBER SEASONING A. Allow lu mber to a ttain a state of equilibrium with th e lo cal a tmosphere p rior to incorporating into the Work. B. If w ood tr eatment specifications s tate th e maximum p ercentage o f m oisture co ntent at the time of treatment, comply with those requirements.
061000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.10
WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: W here l umber o r plywood i s s pecified h erein t o be t reated or is indicated o n t he D rawings as " Treated W ood" or "Treated Plywood", comply w ith a pplicable requirements o f A WPA S tandards C 2 ( Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each t reated i tem w ith the AWPA Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure-Treated Above Ground Items: Provide with w ater-borne p reservatives to c omply with AWPA Standards C 2 ( Lumber) a nd C 9 (Plywood). After tr eatment, k iln-dry l umber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent respectively. T reat indicated items and the following: a. Blocking, a nd similar m embers in connection with roofing, f lashing, va por barriers and w aterproofing. Note: The following items should not be treated if using built-up roofing system, Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, treat these items only as recommended by the roofing manufacturer or roofing consultant. b. Interior w ood s ills, s leepers, b locking, furring, stripping a nd s imilar c oncealed members in co ntact w ith m asonry o r concrete. c. Wood framing members l ess t han ei ghteen (18) inches above grade. d. Wood f loor pl ates i nstalled over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. The fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and must b e r egistered f or u se as a wood preservative by the U .S. E nvironmental Protection Agency (EPA). 2. All f ire r etardant w ood m ust have a flame spread o f l ess t han 2 5 w hen t ested i n an extended 30 minute t unnel t est i n acco rdance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 3. All lu mber m ust b e k iln d ried to a m aximum moisture co ntent o f 1 9 p ercent af ter t reatment. All plywood must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment. 4. All fire retardant wood m ust c omply w ith th e requirements o f A WPA S tandard C -20 f or lumber and C-27 for plywood. ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 5. Carbon s teel, g alvanized s teel, aluminum, copper and red brass i n co ntact w ith t he f ire retardant tr eated w ood m ust exhibit corrosion rates less than one mil per year when tested in accordance with F S M IL-L-19140, P aragraph 4.6.5.2.
Addition and Remodeling
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er which Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
6. The f ire r etardant ch emicals u sed to treat the lumber mu st b e f ree of halogens, s ulfates an d ammonium phosphate.
B. Verify m echanical, el ectrical, an d b uilding items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.
7. Testing o n t he f ire p erformance, s trength a nd corrosive properties of the fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. C. All interior dressed lumber shall be S4S, unless indicated otherwise. Interior studs, blocking, shim material an d p lywood s hall b e p erformance rated and give grade and species. 2.11
EXAMINATION
C. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f substrate conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
A. Coordinate w ith a ll s pecification s ections that might require concealed wood blocking for surface mounted materials or equipment.
A. Nails, Spikes and Staples: G alvanized f or exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain f inish f or o ther in terior locations; size and type to suit applications.
B. Discard u nits o f m aterial w ith d efects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints, or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Bolts, N uts, W ashers, L ags, P ins a nd S crews: Medium c arbon s teel; s ized to s uit a pplication, galvanized f or e xterior lo cations, h igh humidity locations, an d t reated wood; p lain f inish f or o ther interior locations. C. Fasteners: E lectro-hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, a nd tr eated w ood locations; plain finish elsewhere; Toggle bolt type for a nchorage t o ho llow m asonry. E xpansion shield a nd la g b olt type for anchorage t o s olid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. D. Building Paper: #30 asphalt felt type. E. Concealed Metal Strap Backing: M inimum 18 gauge sheet metal by t welve ( 12) i nches w ide, continuous a nd f astened to metal s tuds f or le ngth indicated on the Drawings. 1. Behind all wall cabinets for support. F. Sill-Sealer G askets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, c ompressible to 1/32 i nch; se lected f rom m anufacturer's s tandard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
3.3
FRAMING, FURRING AND STRIPPING A. Erect w ood f urring, s tripping and nailing members true t o lines and levels. Do n ot deviate from true alignment more than 1/4 inch. B. Space members as indicated on Drawings. C. Construct m embers o f co ntinuous p ieces of longest possible lengths.
3.4
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Workmanship: Perform all Work in accordance with the b est S tandards of Practice r elating to th e trade an d car efully p lan an d l ay out the W ork a s required o n the Drawings. Properly accommodate the Work of other trades. B. Treated w ood s hall n ot b e in stalled in direct contact with light metal f raming o r lig ht m etal decking. P rovide r osin p aper or similar barrier material between treated wood and metal framing. C. Provide treated wood curbs at all roof openings, unless noted as p refabricated cu rbs b y eq uipment supplier. Form wood curbs corners by lapping side members alternately. No t reaqted w ood in contact with bituminous roofing. D. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side up.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
061000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
E. Provide fire retardant tr eated p lywood ( with exterior g lue) at al l el ectrical an d t elephone backing panels.
1. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber. Only end cuts, drilling ho les a nd j oining c uts are permitted unless the m aterial carries a ULI approved m illing a fter tr eatment c lassification. All cuts on plywood are considered end cuts due to the nature of the product.
F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring an d f astening as i ndicated and as required by recognized industry standards. Comply with all installation in structions a s r ecommended by manufacturers for installation of their products.
B. Application: 1. Fire r etardant t reated w ood u sed in structural applications s hall b e g raded o r span-rated material that ha s b een a pplied us ing t he d esign adjustments provided in NER-303. A corrosion resistant fastener, such as hot-dipped galvanized nails or better, shall be used.
G. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to lines and cut and fitted. H. Countersink nail h eads o n ex posed car pentry work and fill holes.
C. Fastening:
I. Wood Grounds, N ailers, B locking a nd Sleepers: Provide w herever i ndicated an d w here required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as indicated and cut as required for true lin e and level of w ork t o b e at tached. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 3.5
1. Nailing S chedules a nd P anel S pacing: I n accordance w ith t he A PA- The E ngineered Wood Association’s “ Design a nd C onstruction Guide f or R esidential an d C ommercial U ses” (E030). T he u se of pl y-clips is a lso required where specified by the APA. It should be noted that APA does not permit the use of staples for untreated pl ywood. F ire r etardant t reated plywood shall be nailed, and not stapled.
ROOF BLOCKING A. Install in straight lines, le vel p lanes a nd a t proper elevation. B. Top s urface o f h orizontal b locking is to match the surface elevation of the roof insulation.
3.8
A. Install concealed w ood b locking w ithin s tud wall s paces a t a ll lo cations in dicated on the Drawings, a nd d imensions r equired b y t he va rious specification sections.
C. Do not use warped wood members unless they can b e ad equately f astened t o permanently hold them in their required alignment.
B. Install wood blocking s tructurally s ound to carry all imposed loads.
D. At v ertical r oof e dge bl ocking, provide staggered joints for all layers and minimum twelve (12) inch laps. 3.9 3.6
SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIAL A. Brush ap ply t wo ( 2) co ats o f preservative treatment f or w ood in c ontact w ith c ementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashing. B. Apply p reservative t reatment i n accordance with m anufacturer’s i nstructions. R e-dry to 19 percent moisture content.
CONCEALED WOOD BLOCKING
CONCEALED METAL STRAP BACKING A. Attach sheet metal strap backing directly to stud framing with minimum two (2) self-tapping screws per each s tud b ehind al l casework wall cabinets, and other locations indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
C. Treat all site-sawn ends. A llow preservative to cure prior to placing members. 3.7
FIRE RETARDANT SITE TREATMENT A. Field Cuts:
061000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING C. Single Source Responsibility: O btain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
D. Fire-Resistive Rating: Where indicated on the Drawings, provide materials and c onstruction which are i dentical t o t hose as semblies whose f ire resistance rating has b een d etermined p er A STM E119 by a t esting a nd i nspecting o rganization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Sheathing M ade o f Plywood and O ther W oodBased Construction Panels.
E. Wall and ceiling as semblies s hall m eet o r ex ceed the fire r esistance r equirements o utlined u nder provisions of t he G A-600-94 F ire R esistance Design Manual.
C. Sub-Flooring Made of Plywood and Other WoodBased Construction Panels. D. Underlayment Made of Plywood and Other WoodBased Construction Panels. 1.2
F. Surface b urning ch aracteristics o f finish m aterials must m eet o r ex ceed t he f lame/fuel/smoke requirements of ASTM E84.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking, wood framing, wood studs, and shims.
1.5
Thermal
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
C. Section 016643 - Exterior Sheathing Board: Exterior sheathing over metal stud wall framing.
B. Deliver al l m aterials i n m anufacturer's unopened original p ackages s howing m anufacturer's a nd product brand names.
B. Section 072100 - Building I nsulation: insulation.
D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal wall framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
C. Store products i nside u nder co ver an d k eep t hem dry and protected ag ainst d amage f rom w eather, direct sunlight, s urface c ontamination, c orrosion, construction traffic and other causes. N eatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product D ata: P rovide da ta on w ood studs and framing, gypsum boa rd s ystems a nd c omponents, joint tape; and finish.
D. Protect adhesives from freezing o r o verheating i n accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. Samples:
E. Protect metal framing, metal studs and accessories from bending.
D. Installation I nstructions: P rovide m anufacturer’s installation instructions.
F. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
E. Maintenance Data: 1.6 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify actual locations of s heathing an d o ther construction to which sheathing m ust f it b y accurate f ield m easurements b efore i nstallation. Coordinate in stallation s chedule w ith construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
A. Applicator: C ompany s pecializing in p erforming the w ork o f th is s ection w ith minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly t rained a nd experienced in t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061600CGA.doc
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Wood Structural Panels:
061600 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. Plywood: E ither D OC P S-1 o r DOC P S-2, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS-2. 3. Thickness: As needed to c omply w ith requirements s pecified b ut n ot le ss than thickness indicated on the Drawings.
3. Use E xterior ty pe f or e xterior lo cations a nd where indicated. 2.4
A. Miscellaneous C oncealed P lywood: Exterior Exposure 1 sheathing, span rating to suit framing in each location, and th ickness a s in dicated b ut n ot less than 1/2 inch.
4. Comply w ith " Code P lus" p rovisions in A PA Form N o. E 30K, " APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
B. Plywood Underlayment: D OC PS-1, Exterior A-C Exposure 1 U nderlayment with f ully s anded f ace, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.
5. Factory mark panels acco rding t o i ndicated standard. 2.2
C. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS-1, A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative T reatment b y P ressure P rocess: AWPA C 9 ( plywood), except th at lu mber th at is not i n c ontact with t he gr ound a nd is continuously protected from liquid w ater m ay b e t reated according t o A WPA C 31 w ith i norganic boron (SBX).
D. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS-1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fireretardant treated, in thickness in dicated o r, if n ot indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.5
B. Sheathing Tape: S heathing Tape No. 8086 by 3M Contractor Products, or approved equivalent by the Architect. A crylic a dhesive with oriented polypropylene ba cking, R ed c olor, total thickness 0.0027 i nches ( 0.07 m m); te nsile s trength 22.5 lb./in., elongation of 125%:
2. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a m aximum moisture content of 15 percent for plywood. Do not u se m aterial th at is w arped o r d oes not comply w ith r equirements f or u ntreated material.
1. Width: 2-1/2 inch width.
B. Mark each t reated i tem w ith t he t reatment quality mark of an i nspection ag ency ap proved b y t he American L umber S tandards C ommittee Board of Review.
2. Breaking Strength (ASTM D882) of 28.4 lb./in. 3. Tear Resistance (ASTM D1117) of 8.6 lb. 4. Flame Spread (ASTM E84) of 0. 5. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84) of 25.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials th at c omply w ith performance r equirements i n AWPA C 27 (plywood). I dentify f ire-retardant-treated w ood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, T imber P roducts I nspection, o r another testing a nd i nspecting agency accep table t o authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of t reated w ood after ex posure t o el evated t emperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5516, for plywood.
ACCESSORIES A. Building Paper: ASTM D226, #30 asphalt felt.
1. Preservative Chemicals: A cceptable to authorities having j urisdiction a nd s uitable f or the use and type of wood treated.
2.3
MATERIALS
2.6
FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners o f s ize an d t ype i ndicated that comply w ith requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where car pentry i s ex posed t o weather, in ground contact, or in a rea o f hi gh r elative humidity, p rovide f asteners w ith h ot-dip z inc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.
2. Use t reatment t hat doe s not pr omote c orrosion of metal fasteners. 061600 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061600CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Beginning o f W ork m eans accep tance o f conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Wood S tructural P anels: C omply w ith applicable recommendations co ntained i n A PA F orm N o. E30K, " APA D esign/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structuraluse panels and applications indicated. B. Wood Structural Panel Sheathing Installation: 1. Where wood structural panel sheathing is used for d iaphrams, na il s heathing a round the perimeter o f each s heet w ith n ail s pacing as indicated on t he D rawings. P rovide b locking a t all plywood edges n ot s upported by s tuds or plates, unless noted otherwise. 2. Roof S heathing: A PA, 1 5/32 i nch t hick, minimum, 32/16 rated sheathing. 3. Wall S heathing: A PA, 1 5/32 inch thick, minimum, 32/16 rated sheathing. F ace grain to be a cross s upports f or r oof sheathing, and parallel to studs for wall sheathing. C. Install e ither a s hingled la yer o f building paper horizontally with six (6) inch edge and end laps; or housewrap applied per manufacturer’s instructions. Fasten building p aper w ith c orrosion-resistant staples or screws. C oordinate in stallation o f building paper with masonry wall flashing to insure overlap of building paper on flashing material. 1. Per Manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061600CGA.doc
061600 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
061600 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061600CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 061643 - EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING D. Fire-Resistive Rating: Where indicated on the Drawings, provide materials and c onstruction which are i dentical t o t hose as semblies whose fire resistance rating has b een d etermined p er A STM E119 by a t esting a nd i nspecting o rganization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.5
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle a nd p rotect p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
B. Exterior G ypsum S heathing-; as I ndicated o n t he Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments.
B. Deliver al l m aterials i n m anufacturer's unopened original p ackages s howing m anufacturer's a nd product brand names.
1. Exterior Fiberglass Mat Faced Sheathing Board. 1.2
C. Store products i nside u nder co ver an d k eep t hem dry and protected ag ainst d amage f rom w eather, direct sunlight, s urface c ontamination, c orrosion, construction traffic and other causes. N eatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 054000 - Cold F ormed M etal F raming: Exterior metal wall and soffit framing. B. Section 074 616 - Metal Wall P anels: M etal w all panels applied over Sheathing.
D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
C. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal framing and gypsum board finish. 1.6 1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements - General: Establish and m aintain environmental c onditions f or application to c omply w ith g ypsum s heathing manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate special details associated with fire rated wall construction, opening locations and details, and opening termination details.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.7
WARRANTY
C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata o n sheathing board systems and fasteners.
A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
D. Provide m anufacturers w instructions.
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided a re guaranteed against d efects af ter completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
ritten
installation
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: C ompany s pecializing in p erforming the w ork o f th is s ection w ith minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. C. Single Source Responsibility: O btain each type of gypsum s heathing a nd r elated j oint t reatment materials from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
(GMSG) FIBERGLASS MAT EXTERIOR SHEATHING BOARD
FACED
A. Fiberglass Mat F aced Exterior Sheathing: ASTM C1177; silicone t reated co re s urfaced w ith inorganic glass fiber mat on the front and back; UL fire r ated, 5 /8 in ch th ick, 4 ’-0” w ide x ma ximum permissible length; square cut edges and ends. 1. Georgia P acific C orporation, D ens-Glas G old Firestop Type X.
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING S:\11\0122\div2to33\061643CGA.doc
061643 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
2. United States Gypsum, USG Securock Gypsum Sheathing. 3. National G ypsum sheathing.
e2XP
3.2
A. Gypsum S heathing A pplication: Install gypsum sheathing t o c omply w ith m anufacturer’s p rinted installation instructions a nd a pplicable requirements of GA-253.
extended ex posure
4. Certainteed - GlasRoc Brand Sheathing. 5. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
B. Attach gypsum sheathing t o s teel s tuds us ing corrosion resistant fasteners spaced 3/8” from ends and ed ges an d l ocated 8 ” o /c m aximum. I nstall fasteners f lush w ith surface of s heathing. D o no t countersink.
B. Provide f iberglass m at f aced ex terior sheathing at all locations indicated to receive exterior cladding. 2.2
FRAMING MATERIALS
C. Do not install d amaged s heathing b oards. B utt boards t ogether f or a l ight co ntact at edges and ends with n ot m ore t han 1/ 16 i nch ope n s pace between boards. Do not force into place.
A. Cold Formed M etal F raming: A s s pecified in Section 054000. 2.3
ACCESSORIES
D. Attach gy psum s heathing b oard t o s upplementary framing a nd bl ocking pr ovided f or a dditional support at openings and cut-outs.
A. Fastening Devices: 1 -1/4 i nch minimum, # 6 T ype S-12 bugle head, corrosion r esistant s crews w ith self-tapping threads and self-drilling points.
E. Seal sheathing j oints a ccording t o sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Building Paper: ASTM D226, 15 lb. asphalt felt. C. Joint System:
F. Horizontal I nstallation: I nstall s heathing w ith Vgrooved edge down and tongue edge up. I nterlock tongue with gr oove t o b ring l ong e dges i n c ontact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut e nds of boa rds ov er c enters of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent b oards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at p erimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.
1. Joint Tape: Glass mesh t ape as recommended by board manufacturer. 2. Joint Compound: Georgia Pacific, “Speed Set”, or approved equivalent by the Architect. D. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the C ontractor s ubject t o t he approval of the Architect.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. G. Vertical I nstallation: I nstall b oard v ertical e dges centered over studs. A but ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine s ubstrates t o w hich s heathing b oard attaches or abuts for compliance with requirements for in stallation to lerances a nd other conditions which w ould ad versely af fect t he p erformance o f gypsum s heathing. D o no t proceed w ith installation until unsatisfactory c onditions h ave been corrected. B. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f substrate conditions.
APPLICATION GYPSUM SHEATHING GENERAL
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 3.3
METHODS OF APPLICATIONS
GYPSUM
A. Single-Layer A pplication: I sheathing as follows:
SHEATHING nstall
gypsum
1. Apply gy psum s heathing horizontally ( parallel to f raming), u nless o therwise in dicated o n Drawings, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 2. Fasten gypsum s heathing t o s upports w ith screws. 061643 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061643CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.4
Addition and Remodeling
JOINT SEALING TAPE A. Install a s hingled la yer o f joint s ealing ta pe horizontally o ver S heathing B oard joints with s ix (6) inch edge and end lap over sheathing to receive metal wall panels. C oordinate installation of joint sealing tape with wall flashing to ensure overlap of building paper on flashing material.
3.5
TOLERANCES A. Maximum V ariation o f G ypsum S heathing Board Surface f rom T rue F latness: 1 /8 i nch in ten (10) feet in any direction.
3.6
PROTECTION A. Provide f inal p rotection a nd maintain conditions, which ensure gypsum sheathing construction being without damage or d eterioration d uring construction.
3.7
CLEANING A. In addition t o o ther r equirements for c leaning, us e necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum sheathing board scraps. B. At completion of each segment of installation, promptly pick up and r emove f rom t he w orking area all scraps, debris and surplus materials of this Section.
END OF SECTION
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING S:\11\0122\div2to33\061643CGA.doc
061643 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
061643 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\061643CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate m aterials, co mponent elevations and dimensions, c omponent pr ofiles, fastening methods, j ointing d etails, a ccessories and finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
C. Product D ata: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials, wood preservative treatment materials and application instructions.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary a nd O ther C onditions), the General Requirements ( Sections o f D ivision One) a nd t he D rawings A pply t o t he W ork o f this Section. B. Finish C arpentry I tems, O ther T han Shop Prefabricated Casework; as I ndicated o n t he Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Hardware, Attachments and Accessories.
D. Samples: S ubmit s amples o f f inish w ood paneling and plastic la minate ite ms illu strating specified finish. 1.4
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standard Requirements.
1. Wood Treatment, Including Fire Retardant and Preservative Treatment.
B. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with t ype, gr ade, m ill a nd gr ading a gency identification; e xcept o mit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill c ertificate th at m aterial has b een i nspected and g raded i n acco rdance w ith r equirements it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
C. Finish Carpentry I tems; I ncluding, B ut N ot Limited To: 1. Hardwood Edge Window S tools, B ase, Trim and Wall Cap; t o R eceive Transparent Finish. 2. Hardwood Veneer P lywood P anels; t o Receive Transparent Finish.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: W here fireretardant m aterials ar e i ndicated, p rovide materials with s pecified f ire-test-response characteristics as determined b y a t esting an d inspecting agency acceptable t o au thorities having j urisdiction. I dentify m aterials with appropriate m arkings o f ap plicable testing and inspecting agency on surfaces o f m aterials t hat will be concealed from view after installation.
3. Plywood S helving w ith H ardwood Edge, and Standards and Brackets. 4. Plastic Laminate Window Stools. 5. Plastic Laminate Open Shelving with Metal Standards and Brackets. D. Closet and Utility Wood Shelving; 1.2
D. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the p roducts s pecified in th is S ection with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: U nit masonry substrate material.
1.5
B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: T reated wood blocking, g rounds a nd w ood s upport framing. C. Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork: Custom cabinets, countertops and hardware. D. Section 092116 - Gypsum B oard S ystems: Interior metal s tud f raming a nd gy psum b oard finish. E. Section 099000 – Paints a nd C oatings: F ield painting and finishing of carpentry items. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to International Building Code for fire retardant requirements for the following specific items:
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Do n ot d eliver s hop f abricated car pentry i tems until site conditions are adequate to r eceive t he Work. P rotect items f rom w eather w hile in transit.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
062000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Store finished items indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum te mperature o f 6 0 degrees F, maximum relative h umidity of 25 to 55 percent.
D. Lumber f or T ransparent F inish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. E. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with A PA S tandards; m oisture c ontent of 6 - 8 percent.
D. Keep m aterials u nder co ver an d d ry. P rotect against exposure t o w eather a nd c ontact w ith damp or wet surfaces.
F. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in acco rdance with AWI P remium S tandards; G rade I for transparent f inishes, G rade II f or opa que finishes; moisture content of 6 - 8 percent; sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings, unless indicated o therwise b elow; a nd q uality suitable for transparent finish under provisions of Section 09900, for the following items:
E. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide f or a ir c irculation w ithin a nd around s tacks a nd und er temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations o f f inish c arpentry ite ms and other construction to which carpentry items must fit, by accu rate f ield measurements b efore fabrication; s how r ecorded m easurements on final shop d rawings. C oordinate f abrication schedule w ith construction p rogress to a void delay of Work.
1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the w ork w ith p lumbing a nd electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
LUMBER MATERIALS A. General: Nominal sizes as i ndicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed, or worked and d ressed l umber, as ap plicable, manufactured to the actual s izes as r equired by Department o f C ommerce ( DOC) P S-20 or t o actual sizes and p attern as s hown, u nless otherwise indicated. B. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacturer until time of installation not greater than values r equired b y t he ap plicable grading r ules o f t he r espective gr ading a nd inspecting ag ency f or t he s pecies and product indicated. C. Moisture Content of H ardwood Lumber: Provide k iln-dried l umber ha ving a m oisture content from tim e of m anufacturer until time of installation within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking standard.
062000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
1. Hardwood Window Stools, Base, Trim and Wall Caps: Plain s liced r ed o ak, f ield transparent f inish und er provisions of Section 099000. 2.2
SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: H PVA, H P-1 G rade i n accordance with A WI S tandards; veneer co re; type of adhesive recommended for application. 1. Hardwood veneer plywood pa neling, pl ain sliced M aple v eneer g rade in accordance with AWI Premium Standards, thickness as indicated on the Drawings, hardwood edge, and field transparent f inish und er provisions of Section 099000. B. Interior G rade, M edium D ensity F iberboard: Wood based panel pr oduct, m anufactured f rom softwood f ibers, m inimum 90 pe rcent of which obtained from wood residuals, bonded under heat an d p ressure w ith f ormaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting r equirements o f ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and having the following p roperties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch: 1. Acceptable P roduct: Med ite C orporation; “MEDITE II”. 2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: PSI.
Minimum 115
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,200 PSI. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 520,000 PSI. 6. Hardness: M inimum 1, 150 l b. ( 5115 N), Janka modified.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
7. Screw-Holding Capacity: F orce r equired to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material:
2. Laminart 3. Nevamar 4. Pionite
a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N).
5. Wilson Art
b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N). 8. Moisture C ontent: M percent.
6. No Substitutions Allowed.
aximum s ix (6)
B. Plastic L aminate: N EMA L D-3; H igh pressure plastic la minate, 0 .050 in ch thickness, color, pattern an d g loss as s elected b y t he Architect from manufacturer’s full color range.
9. Panel Thickness T olerance: 0 .005 i nch (0.13 mm), plus or minus. C. Fire Retardant, Medium D ensity F iberboard: Wood based panel pr oduct, m anufactured f rom softwood f ibers, m inimum 9 0 p ercent o f which obtained from wood residuals, saturated with fire retardant additives, then bonded under heat and pressure w ith f ormaldehyde f ree s ynthetic resin binders, m eeting r equirements of A NSI A208.2 Product Class M D, a nd ha ving t he following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch:
C. Laminate B acking S heet: N EMA L D-3, B K20 unfinished backing sheet, 0.020 inch thick. 1. Plastic Laminate Shelving with Metal Standards and Supports: M edium D ensity Fiberboard, 16 inches wide by 1 inch thick, by length i ndicated o n t he D rawings. A ll surfaces covered with p lastic l aminate finish. Provide heavy-duty adjustable metal wall standards, flush d esign. B rackets designed for width of shelving, and include slots for ability to mechanically attach shelf to c lips. B racket lo ad r ating: 300 l b. minimum for each support without failure.
1. Acceptable P roduct: M edite C orporation; “MEDITE-FR”. 2. Density: Minimum 45 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: PSI.
Minimum 100
2. Plastic Laminate Window Stools: M edium Density F iberboard o f w idth a nd le ngth indicated on the Drawings, 3 /4 inch thick, 1-1/2 x 3/4 in ch v ertical n osing. A ll exposed surfaces co vered w ith p lastic laminate finish, and all other surfaces shall receive laminate backing sheet.
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 3,500 PSI. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 375,000 PSI. 6. Hardness: M inimum 1, 000 l b. ( 4400 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: F orce r equired to pull one (1) inch (25 mm) long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material: a. Face: Minimum 300 lbf (1334 N).
2.4
A. Adhesive: N on-solvent; t ype r ecommended b y laminate manufacturer to suit application. 2.5
aximum s ix (6)
9. Panel Thickness T olerance: 0 .005 i nch (0.13 mm), plus or minus. 10. Fire Resistance: Class 1 s urface f lame spread when tested in acco rdance with UL 723. 2.3
PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Plastic Laminate:
FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; Galvanized finish in concealed locations and Plain finish in exposed locations.
b. Edge: Minimum 225 lbf (1000 N). 8. Moisture C ontent: M percent.
ADHESIVE
B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.6
ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, and Blocking: Softwood lumber. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. C. Wood F iller: N on-solvent base, tin ted to m atch surface finish color.
1. Formica FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
062000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
D. Open Medium Density Fiberboard Shelving with Standards a nd S upports: S helving shall be 12 inches wide by 1 inch thick, by length indicated on the Drawings. P rovide heavy-duty adjustable metal wall standards, flush d esign. B rackets shall b e d esigned for w idth o f s helving, a nd include slots for a bility to m echanically a ttach shelf to clips. B rackets shall have a l oad r ating of m inimum 300 l b. f or e ach s upport w ithout failure. D o n ot u se p articleboard o r MD F that contains urea formaldehyde. 2.7
WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES
E. When necessary to cu t an d f it o n s ite, p rovide materials w ith a mple a llowance f or c utting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets c onsistent w ith manufactured s izes. F it co rners and joints hairline; secure w ith co ncealed f asteners. Slightly bevel arises. G. Apply laminate backing s heet t o r everse s ide o f plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2.10
A. Sand work smooth a nd s et e xposed n ails a nd screws.
A. Fire Retardant (FR-S Type): C hemically treated and pressure impregnated; providing a maximum flame s pread/smoke d evelopment r ating o f l ess than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Apply wood filler in e xposed n ail a nd s crew indentations.
B. Wood P reservative b y P ressure T reatment (PT Type): A WPA Treatment C 2 (L umber) o r C 9 (Plywood) us ing w ater b orne p reservative w ith 0.25 percent retainage. C. Wood Repellent P reservative T reatment b y Dipping M ethod: N WWDA I .S.4, with 0.25 percent retainage.
C. On items to r eceive t ransparent f inishes, u se wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work to meet A WI P remium Q uality standards. 2.11
D. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear type, manufacturer’s standard to suit application. 2.8
SHOP TREATMENT MATERIALS
OF
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine t he a reas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Provide UL a pproved i dentification on f ire retardant treated material. C. Deliver f ire r etardant tr eated materials cu t t o required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.9
FIELD FINISHING A. Painting or tr ansparent f inishes s hall b e a s specified in Section 099000.
WOOD
A. Shop p ressure t reatment t o w ood m aterials requiring preservatives to co ncealed w ood blocking.
SHOP FINISHING
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
A. Fabricate to AWI Premium Quality Standards.
C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of t his s ection ar e p laced an d ready to receive this work.
B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
D. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f substrate conditions.
FABRICATION
C. Fit ex posed s heet m aterial edges with matching veneer e dging. U se o ne p iece for full length only. D. Cap exposed plastic laminate f inish e dges w ith material of same finish and pattern.
062000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
3.2
PREPARATION A. Condition w ood m aterials to a verage prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.3
INSTALLATION
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
A. Install w ork i n acco rdance w ith AWI Premium Quality S tandards, in p articular, c omply w ith AWI section 1700 for woodwork installation. B. Discard uni ts o f m aterial w hich are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, n ot adequately s easoned, o r t oo s mall t o fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum joining arrangements, or w hich ar e o f d efective manufacturer w ith r espect t o s urfaces, s izes or patterns. C. Install the work p lumb, le vel, tr ue a nd s traight with no d istortions. S him a s r equired us ing concealed shims. Install t o a t olerance o f 1 /8 inch i n 8 ’-0” f or pl umb a nd l evel c ountertops; and w ith 1 /16 i nch m aximum off-set i n f lush adjoining 1/8 inch maximum off-sets in revealed adjoining surfaces. D. Carefully scribe w ork a butting o ther components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (2 mm). D o n ot u se a dditional o verlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Brush apply one (1) co at o f p reservative treatment o n wood in contact w ith c ementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashing. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to d ry p rior to e recting members. 3.5
G. Install running woodwork i n s ingle l engths whenever material is o btainable i n r equired lengths; o therwise in stall in a s lo ng lengths as obtainable with joints between adjacent members staggered. M ake j oints o nly w here s olid fastening can be provided.
PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set ex posed f asteners. A pply w ood f iller in exposed fastener i ndentations. S and w ork smooth. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials.
3.6
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation f rom T rue P osition: 1 /16 inch.
E. Install c omponents a nd tr im w ith f asteners o f type and size to suit application. F. Avoid ex posed n ailing as f ar as possible; when necessary t o na il, us e b lind na iling methods and set all nail heads.
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
B. Maximum O ffset f rom T rue A lignment w ith Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.7
CLEANING A. Clean an d r emove al l t emporary co verings an d stickers f rom f inish m aterials. Clean a nd p olish all glass materials and surfaces.
END OF SECTION
H. Cope m olded W ork a t r eturns a nd i nterior angles. Miter at corners. I. Kerf backs at wide flat members. J. Anchor f inish c arpentry w ork t o anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to s ubstrates. S ecure t o grounds, stripping and blocking w ith c ountersunk, c oncealed fasteners and blind n ailing as r equired f or a co mplete installation. K. Except w here pre-finished matching fasteners heads a re r equired, us e f ine f inishing nail f or exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and m atching f inal f inish where transparent is indicated.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
062000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
062000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0122\div2to33\062000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK profiles and ed ge t reatment, as sembly m ethods, joint d etails, fastening methods, a ccessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata o n material description and installation instructions for each t ype o f p roduct, f ire r etardant t reatment materials and finish instructions.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
D. Certificates: P rovide p roduct c ertificates b y woodwork provider certifying that products comply with specified requirements.
B. Pre-Finished Custom F abricated T ransparent Finish, Architectural Woodwork C abinets; a s Indicated o n t he D rawings, S pecified Herein; Including R elated H ardware, A ttachments and Accessories. C. Plastic L aminate and Wood C ountertops, BackSplashes and End-Splashes.
E. Fire-Retardant Treatment Data: S ubmit d ata f or material impregnated by pressure process to reduce combustibility. Include c ertification b y treating plant s tating th at tr eated materials comply with all Federal, State and Local requirements.
D. Preparation for Installing Utilities.
F. Samples: 1. Submit samples illustrating cabinet finish.
E. Standing and Running Trim:
1.2
1. Wood Aprons.
2. Submit samples illustrating counter top finish.
2. Wood Stops, Stools and Sills.
3. Submit one sample for each type of p ull, hinge, drawer support, lock and other exposed cabinet h ardware an d acces sories illustrating hardware finish.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: C ountertop brackets for support of open Computer countertops. B. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: W blocking, grounds and support framing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform ar chitectural w oodwork i n accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standards.
C. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: R elated wood trim not specified in this Section.
B. Fabricator: F irm ex perienced in s uccessfully producing a rchitectural w oodwork s imilar to that indicated on th e Drawing, with minimum ten (10) years documented ex perience, an d w ith s ufficient production capability to produce required units without delay in the Work.
D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. E. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Vinyl base at cabinet toe spaces. F. Section 099000 finishing.
- Paints and Coatings: F ield
G. Division 2 2 - Mechanical: P lumbing utilities a nd fixtures. H. Division 2 6 - Electrical: Conduit a nd e lectrical power to eq uipment, f ire an d s moke d etection devices and connection of equipment. 1.3
1.4
ood
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate co mponent el evations, dimensions an d l ocation o f each assembly; thickness, materials and core materials, component
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
C. Installer: A rrange for in stallation o f a rchitectural woodwork by a firm t hat can d emonstrate successful experience i n i nstalling ar chitectural woodwork ite ms s imilar in ty pe a nd q uality to those required of this project. D. Base Cabinets: Overall height, thirty six (36) inches. Including, four (4) inch high base; cabinet at th irty f ive ( 35) in ches a nd th e to ps at one (1) inch. E. Base C abinets ( ADA): Overall height, thirty four (34) inches. Cabinets may either be built by cutting down the base to two (2) inches or making custom cabinets two (2) inches shorter. F. Provided f ront s kirts a t th e A DA S tations for support, not exceed 4-1/2 inches. 064000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
G. Upper Cabinets: Depth, between twelve (12) and fourteen (14) inches, and the height shall be two (2) feet, l eaving t wo ( 2) f eet b etween the countertop and the bottom of the upper cabinet.
B. Field Measurements: W here w oodwork i s indicated o n th e D rawings to b e f itted to other construction, ch eck act ual d imensions o f other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; s how r ecorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing s chedule with c onstruction progress to avoid delay of Work.
H. All plastic l aminate s urfaces s hall b e en capsulated with plastic laminate, including, but not limited to, underside and ends of s helves, ba cks, bot toms of cabinets, and all cut edges. 1. Phenolic backer boards are not to be used over particleboard t o r educe f ormaldehyde fumes, as they also contribute to the problem.
1.8
A. Coordinate the W ork with p lumbing a nd e lectrical rough-in, and all adjacent and related trades.
2. The above p rocedure f or en capsulating t he formaldehyde emissions from cab inets applies to all subsequent information in this Section. I. Single Source R esponsibility: A rrange f or production b y a s ingle f irm for Architectural Woodwork with sequence matched wood veneers. 1.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2. Pioneer Custom Cabinets
C. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be s tored in other than in stallation a reas, s tore o nly in a reas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions". 1.7
3. Northland Cabinets. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
B. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and ha ndling t o p revent d amage, soiling and deterioration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: O btain a nd c omply with W oodwork M anufacturer's an d I nstaller's coordinated in structions f or o ptimum te mperature and h umidity c onditions f or woodwork du ring i ts storage a nd in stallation. D o n ot in stall woodwork until t hese co nditions h ave b een at tained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of in stallation th rough r emainder of construction period.
064000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
-
1. Aaron Carlson Millwork.
B. Coordinate all parties that have work affecting this Section.
A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
ACCEPTABLE FABRICATORS ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following fabricators:
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one (1) week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.6
COORDINATION
2.2
nder pr ovisions of S ection
WOOD MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials th at c omply w ith requirements of t he A WI W oodworking Standard for e ach t ype of w oodwork and quality grade indicated, and w here t he f ollowing p roducts ar e part of woodwork, the r equirements of t he referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. High Pressure Laminate:
NEMA LD-3
2. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 3. Softwood Plywood:
DOC PS-1.
B. Formaldehyde E mission L evels: C omply with formaldehyde emission requirements of HUD standard 24 Part 3280 and each voluntary standard referenced below: 1. Medium Density Fiberboard: FPA-987. 2. Hardwood Plywood:
HPMA-FE-86.
C. Softwood L umber: P S 20; g raded in accordance with AWI Premium quality standards; moisture content of 6 - 8 percent; species as follows: ITEM
SPECIES ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 1. Internal Construction 2.3
Addition and Remodeling Douglas Fir
SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood P lywood: P S 1; g raded i n accordance with AWI P remium q uality s tandards, c ore materials of lumber, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM
2.4
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed s teel or l ead e xpansion bol t devices f or d rilled-in-place anchors. F urnish inserts an d an chors, as r equired, t o b e set into concrete o r m asonry work f or s ubsequent woodwork anchorage.
SPECIES
CUT
1. Internal Cabinets and Drawers
Red Oak
Plain Sliced
2. Shelving
Red Oak
Plain Sliced
2.6
A. General: Where i ndicated, u se m aterials impregnated with f ire-retardant ch emical formulations indicated by a p ressure p rocess o r other m eans accep table t o au thorities h aving jurisdiction t o pr oduce pr oducts with fire-testresponse characteristics specified.
PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
1. Use fi re-retardant-treatment f ormulations th at do not bleed through or ot herwise a dversely affect finishes. D o n ot u se c olorants in solution to d istinguish tr eated m aterial f rom untreated material.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s of Plastic Laminate: 1. Plastic l aminate, m anufactured b y o ne of the following: a. Arborite,
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and P lywood by Pressure Process: Comply w ith A WPA C2 0 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), for woodwork items indicated as fire-retardant treated. Use the following treatment type:
b. Formica, c. Laminart, d. Nevamar, e. Pionite
1. Exterior T ype: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by k iln drying.
f. Wilson Art; 2. No Substitutions Allowed.
2. Mill lu mber b efore tr eatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that p revent l umber f rom w arping and de veloping di scolorations f rom dr ying sticks o r o ther cau ses, marring, a nd o ther defects af fecting ap pearance o f t reated woodwork.
B. Plastic Laminate: N EMA L D-3; H igh p ressure plastic la minate, 0 .050 in ch thickness, color, pattern and gloss as selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full color range. C. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, unfinished backing sheet, 0.020 inch thick.
3. Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material.
D. PVC Edging-3 mm. 2.5
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: T ype r ecommended b y l aminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: S elect m aterial, t ype, s ize, and finish required for each use. C omply with “Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards Illustrated”, Current Edition. 1. Provide stainless steel fasteners at exterior applications. C. Anchors: Select material, t ype, s ize, an d f inish required b y each s ubstrate f or secure anchorage. Provide n on-ferrous m etal o r h ot-dip g alvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
2.7
HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Heavy d uty, 2 -3/4 i nches, five knuckle, tempered steel, 0.072 inch minimum thickness, institutional, full wrap a round, m ill g round, hospital tip, and tight pin feature with all edges eased. 2. Provide on e pa ir pe r door t o 48 inch height. One and one-half pair over 48 inches in height. Allow 270 degree swing. 3. Brushed chrome finish.
064000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Pulls: Metal w ire pull d esign, f our ( 4) i nch projecting type. Finish: Selected by the Architect. Drawer Slides: Cold rolled steel, zinc plated, captive nylon rollers with load rating of minimum 100 pou nds, pos itive in-stop, ou t-stop a nd ou tkeeper t o m aintain drawer in 80% ope n pos ition. Provide adjuster cam to regulate body side sway.
E. Cap ex posed p lastic l aminate co untertop edges with material of same finish and pattern. F. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/ 4 inch (19 mm) thick; flush style. G. When necessary to cu t an d f it o n s ite, p rovide materials w ith a mple a llowance f or c utting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
C. Drawer Slides: Cold rolled steel, zinc plated, steel ball b earing r ollers w ith M inimum 1 00 lb. load rating, H old-in detent to p revent d rawer r oll-out and b ounce b ack, f ull e xtension, S elf Closing. Provide adjuster cam to regulate body side sway.
H. Apply p lastic la minate c ountertops in full uninterrupted s heets c onsistent w ith manufactured sizes. F it c orners a nd j oints h airline; s ecure w ith concealed fasteners.
1. Provide Accuride, Inc., model 3832S C for Drawers up to 16” wide and 7432 for Drawers 16” to 24 “ wide, or equivalent. D. Catches: Magnetic t ype, m inimum s even p ound pull. Two catches for doors over 48 inches high.
J. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 1 6 i nches ( 407 m m) o n center.
E. Adjustable S helf S upports: R ecessed, s ide mounted he avy-duty m etallic s helf s upport c lips with p ositive lo cking p in, a nti-tip-up s helf restraints, minimum 300 pound load rating.
K. Provide c utouts f or p lumbing f ixtures, i nserts, appliances, o utlet b oxes, f ixtures a nd f ittings. Verify lo cations o f c utouts f rom on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
F. Exposed Hardware F inishes: F or e xposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
L. Countertops: F abricate c ountertops, 1 -1/8” minimum t hickness, w ith e dge t reatment a nd design profile a s in dicated o n th e D rawings. Provide tops in a s lo ng a s p ractical c ontinuous lengths. P rovide f ield g lued s plines a t j oints. No joints c loser th an tw enty-four ( 24) i nches either side of sink cutout.
1. Provide specific finishes as indicated above or on the Drawings. Where no finish is indicated, provide finish as selected b y t he A rchitect from h ardware m anufacturer’s s tandard selection. G. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard f inish th at c omplies w ith p roduct class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.8
I. Apply l aminate b acking s heet t o r everse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate woodwork to di mensions, pr ofiles, a nd details indicated on the Drawings. B. Complete f abrication, in cluding assembly, finishing, a nd ha rdware a pplication, t o maximum extent possible, before s hipment to P roject s ite. Disassemble components o nly as n ecessary f or shipment and i nstallation. W here n ecessary f or fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop assemble casework f or d elivery t o s ite i n units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. D. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer ed ging. U se o ne p iece f or f ull length only.
064000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.9
FINISHING MATERIALS A. Transparent F inishing M aterials: A s s pecified in Section 099000.
2.10
FINISHING
A. Sand w ork s mooth a nd s et e xposed nails and screws. B. Apply w ood f iller i n e xposed n ail a nd screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding s urfaces a nd o f types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work i n a ccordance w ith A WI P remium Quality Standards; finish a s s elected f rom s tain samples. E. Seal, stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. F. Seal surfaces materials.
in co ntact w ith cem entitious
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed f asteners an d b lind n ailing as r equired for a co mplete i nstallation. E xcept w here p refinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing na ils f or e xposed na iling, countersunk and f illed f lush w ith w oodwork a nd matching final finish w here t ransparent f inish i s indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum num ber o f j oints p ossible, using fulllength p ieces ( from m aximum l ength of lumber available) t o the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in ad jacent an d r elated m embers. C ope at returns and miter at corners.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork humidity c onditions in installing.
F. Cabinets: Install without d istortion s o th at d oors and drawers fit o penings p roperly an d ar e accurately aligned. A djust h ardware t o cen ter doors and dr awers i n ope nings a nd t o pr ovide unencumbered o perations. C omplete t he installation o f h ardware an d acces sory i tems as indicated o n t he D rawings. M aintain v eneer sequence m atching ( if an y) o f cab inets w ith transparent finish.
to average prevailing installation areas before
B. Deliver co ncrete i nserts an d s imilar an choring devices to be built into substrates well i n ad vance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before i nstalling ar chitectural woodwork, ex amine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work a s r equired, i ncluding b ack p riming and removal of packing.
G. Countertops: A nchor s ecurely t o base units and other support systems as indicated. H. Verify size and location of openings for mechanical and electrical installed items p rior to c utting openings.
D. Coordinate with other tr ades to ensure th at ite ms supplied by others, but required to fit into casework or other fabricated items, will fit. E. Locate b acking d evices r equired for installation of wall-supported units. Verify that back-plates, extra studs, s heet m etal b acking, et c., ar e p roperly located to accept woodwork items. 3.3
3.4
A. Adjust m oving o r o perating p arts to function smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, co unters, s helves, h ardware, fittings and fixtures.
INSTALLATION
C. Remove al l car tons, d ebris, s awdust, a nd s craps, and l eave s paces cl ean an d cas ework r eady f or Owner’s use.
A. Quality Standard: I nstall a rchitectural w oodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 f or same grade specified in P art 2 o f th is s ection f or ty pe o f woodwork involved. B. Install w oodwork p lumb, le vel, tr ue a nd s traight with no distortions. S him a s r equired w ith concealed shims. Install to a t olerance of 1/8 inch in 8 '-0" for pl umb a nd l evel ( including t ops) a nd with no va riations i n f lushness o f a djoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cu t s urfaces o r r epair d amaged f inish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork t o a nchors or bl ocking built in or d irectly at tached t o s ubstrates. Secure to ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.5
PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Architect t hat ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Repair d amaged an d d efective woodwork where possible to e liminate d efects f unctionally and visually; where n ot p ossible to r epair, r eplace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION 064000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
064000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0122\div2to33\064000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 071050 - PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING D. If existing roof insulation is too wet with moisture, then th e A rchitect s hall in struct th e C ontractor to remove as much insulation as necessary to provide dry materials.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
E. If e xisting metal roof deck is r usted s lightly, w ire brush the metal down to a cl ean s urface. A pply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.
A. Conditions of th e C ontract ( General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
F. If existing metal roof deck is badly rusted or structurally uns ound, t he C ontractor s hall remove amount o f d eck d irected b y t he Architect, an d replace with a matching material under provisions of Section 053100.
B. Partial and Total Removal o f E xisting R oofing Systems and Related Components i n P reparation for a New Roof Membrane System at Locations as Indicated on the Drawings. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
1.4
A. Materials Removal Firm: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 024119 - Minor D emolition f or Remodeling: R emoval o f existing e xterior w all construction to receive new Work.
1.5
C. Section 053100 – Steel D eck: S teel d ecking t o replace structurally unsound decking.
B. Maintain c ontinuous te mporary p rotection, inside and outside, prior to and during removal of existing roofing and components.
E. Section 075310 - Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Fully Adhered: Roofing system.
C. Coordinate a ll r oofing d emolition w ith th e school Principal as t o t ime an d ar eas t o be worked on during the school hours.
F. Section 075320 - Elastomeric S heet R oofing – Loose Laid/Ballasted: Roofing system. 1.6
H. Section 099000 – Paints a nd C oatings: R ust inhibitive primer for recoating rusted steel decking. 1.3
B. Remove existing roof m ounted m echanical equipment and electrical equipment as indicated on Drawings. C. Architect w ill review an d C ontractor shall inspect existing r oofing i nsulation f or m oisture c ontent, and e xisting m etal d ecking f or rust and structural integrity.
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING S:\11\0122\div2to33\071050CGA.doc
SCHEDULING A. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system. B. Remove only existing roofing materials that can be replaced and protected with new materials the same day.
WORK SCOPE DESCRIPTION A. Existing Roof Areas: A t a reas in dicated o n th e Drawings, r emove e xisting r oofing gr avel, perimeter m etal f lashings, b ase flashings, counter flashings, vent stack f lashings, roofing m embrane, insulation, vapor retarder, and al l o ther r elated items down to the existing roof deck.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not remove e xisting r oofing m embrane w hen weather c onditions th reaten th e in tegrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy.
D. Section 07520 – Modified Bituminous Roofing and Restoration.
G. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim: Pre-finished flashings.
QUALIFICATIONS
1.7
COORDINATION A. Coordinate t he w ork w ith o ther affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Existing W arranties: P erform a ll W ork in a manner t hat s hall no t vo id e xisting r oofing system warranties. Notify Warrantor of existing roof prior to beginning Work.
071050 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School G. Repair ex isting s teel d eck s urface t o provide smooth working surface for new roof system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS
1. Wire brush slightly rusted metal down to a clean surface. Apply o ne co at o f r ust-inhibitive primer.
A. Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for the protection o f e xisting roof a nd e xposed substrate f rom i nclement w eather d uring removal and re-roofing.
2. Remove b adly r usted o r s tructurally uns ound, steel d ecking as d irected b y the Architect, and replace with matching material under provisions of Section 053100.
B. Contractor shall be responsible f or s election o f materials and design of temporary roof. 3.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Provide temporary protective s heeting o ver uncovered deck surfaces.
EXAMINATION
B. Turn sheeting up and o ver p arapets a nd c urbing. Retain sheeting in position with weights.
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
C. Provide f or s urface d rainage f rom sheeting to existing drainage facilities. D. Do not p ermit t raffic o ver u nprotected o r r epaired deck surface.
B. Verify th at existing r oof s urfaces in dicated o n the Drawings are ready for work of this Section. 3.2
E. Protect existing r oof s ystems to r emain w here construction traffic will be staged.
PREPARATION
1. Cover w alkpaths w ith 1 ” polystyrene and overlay with 3/4” plywood.
A. Protect existing m embrane r oofing s ystem as indicated on the Drawings to remain in place. B. Sweep only existing roof surfaces indicated on the Drawings, cl ean o f l oose m atter. Remove loose refuse and dispose off site. C. Coordinate w ith O wner t o s hut d own a ir i ntake equipment in th e v icinity o f th e W ork. P rior to beginning Work, Cover air intake louvers that may affect indoor air quality. 3.3
MATERIALS REMOVAL
TEMPORARY PROTECTION
2. Place s andbags on each pl ywood c orner t o prevent wind uplift and maintain placement. 3.5
DISPOSAL A. Promptly and l egally di spose of demolished materials.
END OF SECTION
A. Remove metal counter f lashings at ar eas i ndicated on Drawings. B. Scrape r oofing gravel f rom m embrane s urface without causing serious d amage to membrane felts at areas indicated on Drawings. C. Remove r oofing m embrane, p erimeter b ase flashings, flashings a round r oof p rotrusions, p itch pans and pockets, insulation ve nts, a nd o ther related items at areas indicated on Drawings. D. Cut and lay flat any membrane blisters. E. Remove i nsulation an d f asteners, can t s trips, and blocking. F. Remove v apor r etarder, s heathing paper, and underlay. 071050 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\071050CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION G. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gy psum b oard f inish. Installation of vapor retarders.
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
H. Division 22 - Mechanical: K itchen grease duct of minimum 1 6 ga uge ho t d ipped ga lvanized a ll welded steel duct.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. 1.3
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Building I nsulation; a s I ndicated o n the D rawings, Specified Herein, Including R elated A ccessories and Attachments.
B. Product D ata: S ubmit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor barrier material required.
C. Insulation Types:
C. Certified T est Reports: W ith product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including rvalues (aged v alues f or p lastic in sulation), densities, co mpression s trengths, f ire performance characteristics, p erm r atings, w ater absorption ratings and similar properties.
1. Rigid B oard I nsulation a t E xterior C avity W all Construction and at O utside F ace o f P erimeter Foundation Walls. a. Perimeter Board Insulation. b. Exterior Cavity Wall Insulation. 2. Insulation f or F illing P erimeter Window and Door Shim Spaces. 3. Thermal I nsulation a t E xterior S tructural W all Stud Framing. 4. Sound Attenuation Insulation for Sound Control Within Interior Wall Partitions. 5. Safing Insulation. 6. Mineral Wool board Insulation. 7. Refrigerator/Freezer Floor Insulation. 8. Kitchen Grease Duct Insulation. 9. Spray-Applied, Expandable Foam Insulation. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete walls to receive rigid insulation. B. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: Concrete masonry u nit foundation walls to r eceive rigid insulation, a nd c ells to r eceive g ranular f ill insulation. C. Section 054000 - Cold F ormed M etal F raming: Exterior metal wall framing. D. Section 061643 - Exterior Sheathing Board: Exterior sheathing board. E. Section 071400 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Rigid insulation over waterproofing.
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal r esistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a h omogenous material ex actly o ne ( 1) inch thick, measured by t est m ethod i nclude i n r eferenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F, between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. B. Fire P erformance C haracteristics: P rovide insulation materials w hich a re id entical to th ose whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, b y U L o r o ther te sting a nd inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136. C. Maximum Allowable Asbestos C ontent o f Inorganic Insulation: Provide insulation composed of mineral fibers or mineral ores which contain less than 0.25% by w eight o f a ny type o r m ixture o f types occurring naturally as impurities as
F. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping. BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072100CGA.doc
072100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
determined b y p olarized lig ht microscopy te st per Appendix A of 40 CFR 763.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle a nd p rotect p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
1. CertainTeed Insulation Systems. 2. Dow Chemical Company.
C. General P rotection: Protect in sulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or s now. C omply w ith manufacturer's r ecommendations f or ha ndling, storage and protection during installation.
3. DiversiFoam Products. 4. Fibrex, Inc. 5. Johns Manville Company 6. Owens-Corning Company.
D. Protection for Plastic Insulation:
7. Thermafiber, Inc.
1. Do no t e xpose t o s unlight, except to extent necessary f or p eriod o f i nstallation an d concealment.
3. Complete installation a nd c oncealment o f plastic materials as r apidly as p ossible in each area of work. 1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install in sulation a dhesives w hen temperature or w eather co nditions ar e d etrimental to successful installation.
1.7
COORDINATION A. Coordinate th e W ork w ith a ll related sections for placement of insulation materials.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
072100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
B. Deliver materials to th e s ite in m anufacturer’s original packages, unopened, and correctly labeled.
2. Protect a gainst ig nition a t a ll tim es. D o n ot deliver plastic in sulating m aterials to p roject site ahead of installation time.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS BUILDING INSULATION
B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
nder p rovisions o f S ection
INSULATION - RIGID BOARD A. Perimeter B oard I nsulation: A STM C 578; T ype IV, ex truded p olystyrene cl osed-cell in sulation board, square edge, compressive strength minimum 25 psi, board size of 48 i nches w ide by t wo ( 2) inches t hick, t hermal r esistance "R-5.0" pe r i nch, and flame spread/smoke developed of 75/450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Provide a p olystyrene co mpatible ad hesive f or below grade application. 2. Protect subgrade applications w ith in stallation of a sphaltic pr otection boa rd under Section 071400. B. Exterior C avity W all I nsulation: A STM C578, Type I V; ex truded p olystyrene cl osed cell foam type with continuous skin o n f ace a nd b ack surfaces; s quare ed ge; co mpressive strength minimum 25 ps i, board size of 48 inches wide by thickness specified herein; Thermal Resistance " R5.0" per inch. 1. Two ( 2) i nch t hickness at U nit Mas onry backup. 2. Two (2) inch thickness at Metal Stud back-up.
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.3
1. Material must be applied to the duct using three (3) inch impaling pins s paced tw elve ( 12) inches on center longitudinally, a nd ni ne ( 9) inches on center in the traverse direction.
INSULATION - NON-FACED THERMAL A. Thermal I nsulation: A STM C 665, T ype I and ASTM E136; n on-faced g lass f iber t hermal insulation, f riction f it, in sulation th ickness a s indicated on th e D rawings b y w idth to f ill s tud space; and flame spread/smoke developed of 25/50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.4
Addition and Remodeling
2.9
2.10
INSULATION - SAFING
2.7
D. Insulation Fasteners: I mpale cl ip o f g alvanized steel, t o b e m echanically f astened t o s urface to receive b oard in sulation, le ngth to s uit in sulation thickness and substrate, cap able o f s ecurely an d rigidly fastening insulation in place.
MINERAL WOOL BOARD INSULATION FOR WALL APPLICATION
INSULATION - REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER FLOOR A. Floor Insulation: A STM C 578; e xtruded polystyrene in sulation, m inimum 3 0 P SI compressive strength, minimum 5 0 P SI f lexural strength, R -Value o f 5 .0 p er i nch; thickness indicated on the Kitchen Consultant Drawings.
2.8
KITCHEN GREASE DUCT INSULATION
–
C. Adhesives: Type r ecommended b y i nsulation manufacturer for specific application.
1. Provide g alvanized s teel s afing cl ips, UL labeled.
A. Thermal I nsulation: T hermafiber E xterior Thermal/Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I a nd A STM E136; mineral wool board; 2” thick; non-asbestos; non-combustible per NFPA Standard 220; galvanized steel anchors.
ACCESSORIES
B. Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber c omposition boa rd, 1/4 in ch thick, formed under heat and pressure, of standard sizes.
A. Safing Insulation: USG Thermafiber Mineral Fiber Safing i nsulation; no n-combustible, n on-asbestos, regular color, non-faced.
2.6
FOAM
A. Vapor Retarders: Refer t o S ection 092116 Gypsum Board Systems.
1. Type E-over 16” air space; STC: 50. 2.5
EXPANDABLE
A. Spray-Applied, Expandable Foam Insulation: Class A fire rating p er A STM E 84, M inimum R value of 3.8. “Sealection 5 00” b y D emilec, LLC. Or approved equal.
INSULATION - SOUND ATTENUATION A. Sound Attenuation Insulation: A STM C665, Type I and ASTM E136; non-faced glass fiber acoustical insulation, panel width to fit stud space by three (3) inch thickness, and flame spread/smoke d eveloped of 25/50 when tested i n acco rdance w ith A STM E84. Sound absorption per ASTM C423:
SPRAY-APPLIED, INSULATION.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify t hat s ubstrate, ad jacent m aterials, an d insulation boards are d ry an d r eady t o r eceive insulation. C. Verify su bstrate s urface i s f lat, f ree o f irregularities.
A. Kitchen Grease Duct I nsulation: S emi-rigid b att insulation, composed of a pre-formed mineral fiber felt f or th ermal c ontrol, two-hour f ire r ating, minimum 2-1/2 inches thick, density of 8 lb./cu, ft., faced with foil s crim p oly, U L l abeled p er ASTM E84; USG THERMAFIBER Felt with FSK Facing; or approved equivalent by the Architect.
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072100CGA.doc
072100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.2
B. Seal j oints b etween cl osed-cell (non-breathing insulation units b y a pplying m astic o r s ealant o n edges of each unit to form a t ight seal as units are shoved into p lace. F ill v oids in c ompleted installation with mastic or sealant.
PREPARATION A. Require Installer t o ex amine s ubstrates an d conditions und er w hich i nsulation w ork i s t o be performed. A s atisfactory s ubstrate i s o ne that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and r elated w ork i s s pecified. O btain Installer's w ritten r eport lis ting conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor barriers, including removal of projections which might puncture vapor barriers.
3.3
Farmington Elementary School
C. Install r efrigerator/freezer f loor in sulation between concrete slabs as indicated on the Drawings. 3.6
PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful weather ex posures from possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of c oncealing work or, where th at is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply w ith m anufacturer's in structions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not a vailable o r d o n ot apply to p roject c onditions, consult manufacturer's technical r epresentative f or specific recommendations before proceeding with work.
END OF SECTION
B. Install insulation that is u ndamaged, d ry, a nd unsoiled and that ha s no t b een left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire a rea to b e in sulated. C ut a nd f it tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which i nterfere w ith placement. D. Apply a s ingle layer of in sulation of required thickness, unl ess o therwise s hown o r r equired t o make up total thickness. E. Protect b elow-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection b oard. S et i n adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4
INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CAVITYWALL INSULATION A. Installation of unit masonry c avity w all in sulation is specified in Section 042000.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply in sulation u nits to s ubstrate by m ethod indicated, c omplying w ith manufacturer's recommendations. I f n o s pecific m ethod i s indicated, bond units to substrate with a dhesive o r use mechanical an chorage t o p rovide p ermanent placement and support of units.
072100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
SECTION INCLUDES
B. Product D ata: I nclude m anufacturer's written instructions for e valuating, p reparing, and treating substrate; te chnical d ata; a nd t ested p hysical an d performance properties of air barrier.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
C. Shop D rawings: I ndicate lo cations and extent of weather barrier. I nclude details for substrate joints and cr acks, co unterflashing s trip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
B. Fluid-Applied Exterior Weather Resistant Barriers and S elf-Adhering F lashing A pplied S eparately in Wall a nd R oof Assemblies; as I ndicated o n t he Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments. 1.2
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of the weather barrier.
RELATED SECTIONS
2. Include details of mockups.
A. Section 04200 0 - Unit M asonry S ystems: Embedding flashings.
D. Product C ertificates: F or weather barriers, certifying c ompatibilities of weather barrier an d accessory materials with P roject m aterials t hat connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer.
B. Section 044100 – Stone: Weather barrier over underlayment behind stone. C. Section 061 643 – Exterior Sheathing: Installation of weather r esistant b arriers an d s elf-adhered flashing.
E. Samples: Submit one s ample o f each t ype o f weather resistant barrier and self-adhering flashing.
D. Section 05400 0 - Cold F ormed M etal F raming: Structural metal wall framing. E. Section 07210 0 - Building I nsulation: wall insulation.
G. Section 07620 0 - Sheet M etal F lashing a nd Trim: Sheet metal flashings. H. Section 079 200 - Joint S ealers: J oint-sealant materials and installation. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Weather barrier shall b e cap able of performing a s a c ontinuous a ir barrier an d as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the ex terior i ncidental co ndensation o r water penetration. Weather barrier as semblies s hall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of s ealing s ubstrate e xpansion a nd control joints, construction m aterial c hanges, a nd tr ansitions at perimeter c onditions w ithout d eterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Weather Barrier A ssembly A ir L eakage: N ot t o exceed 1. 0.04 cfm x sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. per ASTM E283. Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
F. Installation I nstructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions f or e ach ty pe o f w eather resistant barriers and self-adhering flashing
Thermal
F. Section 074 616 - Metal Wall Panels: I nstallation of Metal Wall Panels.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: F or assembles with f ire-resistance r atings, p rovide m aterials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: I ndicated b y d esign designations from U L's " Fire R esistance Directory." B. Applicator Qualifications: A f irm experienced in applying weather barrier materials s imilar in material, d esign, a nd e xtent to th ose indicated for this P roject, w hose w ork ha s r esulted i n applications with a r ecord of successful in-service performance. C. Preinstallation C onference: I nclude i nstallers o f other c onstruction c onnecting t o weather barrier, including r oofing, w aterproofing, a rchitectural precast co ncrete, m asonry, s ealants, windows, glazed curtain walls, and door frames.
072726 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. Review weather barrier r equirements i ncluding surface preparation, s ubstrate co ndition an d pretreatment, minimum substrate c uring p eriod, forecasted w eather co nditions, s pecial d etails and s heet f lashings, m ockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation, testing and inspecting p rocedures, an d p rotection an d repairs. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. GRACE Co nstruction P roducts – “Perm-ABarrier.” b. Carlisle c. Tremco. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
B. TYPE 2: Perm-A-Barrier: 1. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm x sq. ft. o f s urface ar ea at 1 .57-lbf/sq. f t. pressure difference; ASTM E2178.
A. Provide m anufacturer’s s tandard w ritten w arranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2. Vapor Permeance not to exceed 0.1 perm.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
WARRANTY
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS– LIQUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
072726 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PERFORMANCE
2. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Between 1.0 and 10.0 perm; ASTM E96, vapor semi-permeable.
D. Store rolls acco rding t o m anufacturer's written instructions.
1.8
AND
1. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm x sq. ft. o f s urface ar ea at 1 .57-lbf/sq. f t. pressure difference; ASTM E2178.
C. Store liquid materials in th eir o riginal undamaged packages i n a cl ean, d ry, protected location and within t emperature r ange r equired b y air barrier manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: A pply weather barrier within t he r ange o f a mbient and substrate temperatures r ecommended b y weather barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental c onditions th at a ffect p erformance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:
A. TYPE 1: PermaBarrier VP:
B. Store materials p rotected ag ainst d amage f rom weather, d irect s unlight, s urface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes.
1.7
Under pr ovisions o f S ection
2.3
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary m aterials recommended b y weather barrier manufacturer for i ntended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: L iquid waterborne p rimer r ecommended for substrate by m anufacturer o f ai r b arrier material. C. Counterflashing Strip: M odified b ituminous, 40mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils of r ubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- thick, cross laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing. D. Butyl Strip: V apor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self-adhering; p olyethylene-film-reinforced t op surface laminated to l ayer o f b utyl ad hesive w ith release liner backing. E. Modified B ituminous S trip: V apor-retarding, 40mil thick, s mooth-surfaced, s elf-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick p olyethylene f ilm w ith release liner backing. F. Joint Reinforcing Strip: A ir barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
G. Substrate P atching Mem brane: Man ufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
3. Verify t hat co ncrete i s visibly dry and f ree of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
H. Adhesive an d T ape: A ir barrier manufacturer's standard ad hesive an d p ressure-sensitive ad hesive tape. I. Stainless-Steel Sheet: A STM A240/A240M, Type 304, 0.0250 i nch thick, an d S eries 300 s tainlesssteel fasteners.
4. Verify that m asonry j oints a re f lush a nd completely filled with mortar. 3.2
A. Clean, prepare, treat, and s eal substrate according to manufacturer's w ritten in structions. P rovide clean, d ust-free, an d d ry s ubstrate f or air barrier application.
J. Sprayed P olyurethane F oam S ealant: 1 - or 2 component, f oamed-in-place, p olyurethane f oam sealant, 1.5 t o 2. 0 l b/cu. f t density; f lame s pread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer an d n oncorrosive s ubstrate cl eaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
B. Mask off adjoining s urfaces n ot co vered b y ai r barrier to prevent s pillage and overspray affecting other construction.
K. Adhesive-Coated T ransition S trip: V aporpermeable, 17-mil-thick, s elf-adhering s trip consisting of an adhesive coating over a p ermeable laminate with a permeance of 37 perms.
C. Remove g rease, o il, b itumen, f orm-release ag ents, paints, c uring c ompounds, a nd o ther p enetrating contaminants o r f ilm-forming c oatings f rom concrete.
L. Elastomeric Flashing S heet: A STM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65-mil thick, cured s heet n eoprene w ith manufacturer's recommended co ntact ad hesives an d l ap sealant with stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners.
D. Remove fins, r idges, mortar, and o ther p rojections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other v oids i n co ncrete w ith s ubstrate p atching membrane. E. Remove excess m ortar f rom m asonry t ies, s helf angles, and other obstructions.
M. Preformed S ilicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, s ized to f it opening widths, with a single-component, ne utralcuring, C lass 100/50 ( low-modulus) s ilicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates
F. At changes i n s ubstrate p lane, ap ply s ealant o r termination mastic b eads at s harp co rners an d edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane an d form a s mooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet m echanically f astened t o structural framing t o p rovide c ontinuous s upport for air barrier.
Joint Sealant: A STM C 920, s ingle-component, ne utralcuring silicone; C lass 100/50 ( low-modulus), Grade NS, Us e NT related to ex posure, an d, as applicable to j oint s ubstrates in dicated, U se O. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, d irt, ex cess m ortar, o r o ther contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete h as cu red an d ag ed f or minimum t ime p eriod r ecommended by air barrier manufacturer.
Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
3.3
JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in s ubstrate acco rding t o ASTM C 1193 and ai r b arrier m anufacturer's written in structions. R emove d ust a nd d irt f rom joints and cracks c omplying w ith A STM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime su bstrate and apply a single thickness o f preparation coat strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of j oints an d cr acks. Apply a d ouble t hickness o f ai r b arrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.
072726 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with s ealant a ccording to A STM C 1193 and with air b arrier m anufacturer's w ritten instructions. Apply first la yer o f f luid a ir b arrier membrane at joints. T ape j oints w ith j oint reinforcing s trip a fter f irst layer is dry. A pply a second l ayer o f f luid ai r b arrier m embrane o ver joint reinforcing strip. 3.4
F. Wall O penings: P rime co ncealed p erimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. A pply adhesive-coated tr ansition s trip, elastomeric f lashing s heet, o r preformed s iliconesealant extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage i s ach ieved o ver both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION
1. Adhesive-Coated T ransition Strip: R oll firmly to enhance adhesion.
A. Install strips, transition s trips, a nd a uxiliary materials acco rding t o ai r b arrier manufacturer's written instructions to f orm a s eal w ith ad jacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.
G. Fill g aps i n p erimeter frame s urfaces o f windows, curtain w alls, s torefronts, and door s, a nd miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
1. Coordinate th e in stallation o f a ir barrier with installation of roofing m embrane an d b ase flashing to e nsure c ontinuity o f a ir b arrier with roofing membrane.
H. Seal strips and tr ansition s trips a round m asonry reinforcing o r tie s a nd penetrations with termination mastic.
2. Install s trip o n r oofing m embrane o r b ase flashing so that a minimum of 3 i nches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.
I. Seal t op of t hrough-wall flashings to a ir b arrier with an a dditional 6-inch-wide, c ounterflashing strip.
B. Apply p rimer t o s ubstrates at r equired rate and allow to dry. Limit p riming to a reas that w ill b e covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
J. Seal ex posed ed ges o f s trips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and t erminations n ot co ncealed b y metal c ounterflashings o r e nding i n reglets with termination mastic.
1. Prime g lass-fiber-surfaced gy psum s heathing with n umber o f p rime co ats n eeded t o achieve required bond, w ith a dequate dr ying t ime between coats. C. Connect an d s eal ex terior w all ai r b arrier membrane c ontinuously t o r oofing membrane air barrier, concrete b elow-grade s tructures, f loor-to floor c onstruction, e xterior gl azing and window systems, g lazed cu rtain-wall s ystems, s torefront systems, e xterior lo uvers, e xterior d oor framing, and other construction used in e xterior w all openings, using accessory materials as indicated. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition s trips to s ubstrate w ith te rmination mastic. E. Apply j oint s ealants f orming part o f a ir b arrier assembly w ithin m anufacturer's r ecommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer w hen s ealant can not b e applied within these temperature ranges.
072726 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
K. Repair p unctures, v oids, an d deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 i nches beyond r epaired areas in s trip direction. 3.5
WEATHER BARRIER INSTALLATION
MEMBRANE
A. Apply air b arrier m embrane t o f orm a s eal w ith strips and tr ansition s trips a nd to a chieve a continuous air barrier acco rding t o ai r b arrier manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply air barrier membrane w ithin m anufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. C. Apply p rimer t o s ubstrates at r equired rate and allow to dry. Limit p riming to a reas that w ill b e covered by air barrier sheet in same day. R eprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime g lass-fiber-surfaced gy psum s heathing with n umber o f p rime co ats n eeded t o achieve required bond, w ith a dequate dr ying t ime between coats.
Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
D. Apply a continuous unb roken weather barrier t o substrates a ccording to the f ollowing minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.
9. Strips and transition s trips h ave b een f irmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions a t c hanges i n d irection and structural support at gaps have been provided.
1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Weather Barrier: [60-mil] [40-mil] [120-mil] [___________] dry film thickness.
12. Connections b etween as semblies (membrane and sealants) have complied w ith r equirements for cl eanliness, p reparation an d priming of surfaces, structural support, in tegrity, a nd continuity of seal.
E. Apply [ strip a nd tr ansition s trip a m inimum of 1 inch onto cured air membrane] [or] [strip and transition strip over cu red ai r m embrane overlapping 3 i nches onto each surface] acco rding to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.
C. Tests: T esting to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:
G. Correct d eficiencies i n o r r emove ai r b arrier t hat does not c omply w ith r equirements; r epair substrates and reapply air barrier components. 3.6
1. Qualitative Testing: Air b arrier assemblies will be tested f or ev idence o f ai r l eakage acco rding to A STM E 1186, s moke pe ncil w ith pressurization or depressurization.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing A gency: O wner w ill e ngage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
2. Quantitative Air Leakage T esting: Testing not to exceed the test p ressure d ifferential, positive and negative, i ndicated i n " Performance Requirements" Article f or ai r b arrier as sembly air leakage according to ASTM E283.
B. Inspections: Weather barrier m aterials an d installation are subject to inspection for compliance with r equirements. I nspections may include t he following: 1. Continuity o f weather barrier s ystem h as been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous s tructural s upport o f barrier system has been provided.
weather
3. Masonry and co ncrete s urfaces ar e s mooth, clean and free o f cav ities, p rotrusions, an d mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum ex posure t ime o f m aterials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips a nd transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has b een ap plied o n ex posed ed ges), with no fishmouths. 8. Termination m astic h as b een ap plied on cut edges.
Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
D. Remove an d r eplace d eficient ai r components and retest as specified above. 3.7
barrier
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect weather barrier system from damage during application and remainder of c onstruction pe riod, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect weather barrier f rom e xposure t o U V light and harmful weather exposure as r equired by manufacturer. R emove and r eplace weather barrier exposed for more than 60 days. 2. Protect weather barrier from c ontact w ith creosote, u ncured co al-tar pr oducts, T PO, EPDM, f lexible P VC m embranes, and s ealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer. B. Clean s pills, s tains, a nd s oiling f rom construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning ag ents an d p rocedures r ecommended by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION
072726 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
072726 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers
S:\11\0122\div2to33\072726.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 074616 - PREFORMED METAL SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General,. S upplementary and O ther C onditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Exterior P reformed M etal S iding System for Walls, Soffits and Canopy Roof Deck; Including All Liners, Related F lashings, A ttachments an d Accessory Components. C. Installation o f Sheathing.
Weather B arrier
Over G ypsum
D. Installation of Perimeter Sealant and Joint Backing. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 0 - Unit Masonry Systems: U nit masonry substrate surface. B. Section 051200 - Structural S teel: S tructural steel building frame. C. Section 054000 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Metal wall framing system. D. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels and non-structural accessories. E. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: B uilding p aper back-up. F. Section 072100 - Building Insulation: Wall insulation materials. G. Section 076200 - Sheet M etal F lashing a nd T rim: Metal flashings over panels. H. Section 078100 - Fire-Stopping: required for wall condition.
F ire-stopping
I. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: S ealant an d j oint backing. J. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: E xterior gypsum sheathing. 1.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design an d s ize co mponents t o withstand dead and live lo ads caused by p ositive an d n egative w ind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with the International Building Code. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/180.
PREFORMED METAL SIDING S:\11\0122\div2to33\074616CGA.doc
C. System to accommodate, without d amage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; m ovement b etween s ystem and perimeter components w hen s ubject t o s easonal t emperature cycling; d ynamic l oading an d r elease o f l oads; deflection of structural support framing. D. Accommodate positive drainage for moisture entering or condensation occurring w ithin p anel s ystem, t o exterior. E. Air infiltration rate not more th an 0.06 cfm/sf, tested according to ASTM E283. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for product characteristics, fastening methods, and pre-finish process. C. Shop Drawings: I ndicate dimensions, complete panel layout, j oints, c onstruction d etails, a nd methods of anchorage. D. Samples: S ubmit s amples o f siding finish illustrating finish color, sheen and texture. E. Submit manufacturer’s c instructions. 1.5
omplete in
stallation
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the products s pecified in th is S ection with minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Installer: C ompany s pecializing in p erforming t he Work o f th is S ection w ith m inimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.6
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one ( 1) week p rior t o c ommencing W ork o f this Section. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, p rotect an d h andle p roducts to s ite under provisions of Section 016000. B. Protect p anels f rom accel erated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. C. Stack p re-finished m aterial to p revent tw isting, bending, or a brasion, a nd t o pr ovide v entilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
074616 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
D. Prevent co ntact w ith m aterials w hich may cause discoloration or staining. 1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f m etal siding with other construction to which metal siding must fit by accurate field measurements b efore fabrication; show recorded measurements o n f inal s hop d rawings. Coordinate fabrication s chedule w ith c onstruction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate th e W ork o f th is S ection with all related trades and systems. 1.10
1. 7/8 inch deep c orrugations no minal co verage 16” for Type 1: corrugations spaced 5.60 inches on center wall panels and Type 2: co rrugations 1.60 inches on center. 2.3
A. After p roper p reparation, t he galvanized steel s hall accept a ch emical r esistant b ond co at t o a d ry f ilm thickness of 0.2 mils on each side. B. Exposed E xterior S urfaces F inish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating applied in the shop with a front side d ry f ilm th ickness o f 0 .90 m ils. Finish shall conform to a ll te sts f or a dhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500 finish supplier. 1. Color: As s elected b y th e A rchitect f rom th e Manufacturer’s full color range.
WARRANTY
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 01795. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including coverage for degradation of panel finish including color fading caused b y ex posure t o w eather, a fter completion a nd final accep tance o f t he W ork. D efects d ue to faulty materials o r w orkmanship d eveloped d uring the guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
C. Shop apply strippable liquid coating to the front side of panels to protect the finish during f abrication, shipping a nd f ield ha ndling. R emove strippable coating prior to installation. D. Finish: Smooth, no texture. 2.4
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Firestone – a. Type 1: Delta CFP-16C b. Type 2: Delta CFP-16F B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.2
MATERIALS
A. Substrate: Metal stud backing system as indicated on the Drawings. B. Exterior Panels wit Concealed Fasteners: 1. Metal P anel W all S ystem: 2 2 gauge G90 galvanized finish with Kynar 500.. 2. Metal P anel C anopy Soffit System: 2 gauge Galvanized finish with Kynar 500.. C. Panel Profile: 074616 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Material shall be of the same gauge, finish and color as the panels. 2.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FINISH
ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Stainless steel with 5/8 inch diameter combination n eoprene b onded m etal washers; #14 Type A f or s heet t o s heet an d T ype B f or s heet t o structural sheet support. 1. Exposed fasteners color coated to match panels. B. Closures: 1. Provide w here i ndicated o n t he D rawings p remolded flexible, c ross-linked, c lose-cell g ray polyethylene foam to fit the contour of the panel. 2. Metal closures manufactured from material that is the same f inish an d co lor o f t he ad jacent metal panels and provided w here i ndicated o n the Drawings. C. Tape Sealant: Installed in all side and end laps of all metal panels an d for all flashings, to ensure weathertightness. Non-sagging, 1/8” thick, 1” wide. D. Subgirts: Shapes and profiles to suit application. 1. Subgirts: R oll-formed from 16 gauge G 90 galvanized steel. PREFORMED METAL SIDING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\074616CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
2. Subgirts: L ocated a t e ach s tructural b uilding support and not m ore t han 6’-0” on center between supports. 2.6
FABRICATION
A. In compliance w ith d imensions, p rofile lim itations, gauges and fabrication details as set by manufacturer. B. Components shall be fabricated to the greatest extent possible in the factory ready for field assembly. C. Components shall be plumb, level and true.
2.7
OTHER SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: A STM A653/A-653M, Grade G90 zinc coating.
2.9
COMPONENTS
A. Exterior S heet: Type 1 a nd T ype 2: Minimum 20 gauge (0.912 mm) thick pre-coated steel stock; profile as in dicated; 16 inches w ide p anel; interlocking formed edges. B. Soffit P anels: Type 1: 22 gauge t hick pre-coated steel, profile in 16 inch wide panels. C. Sub G irts: Cold-formed s teel profile as i ndicated; to attach p anel s ystem t o building structural f rame and provide 1/2" drainage plane cavity. D. Internal and External C orners: S ame m aterial, thickness and finish as exterior s heets; p rofile to s uit system; shop c ut a nd factory m itered t o r equired angles.
y m aterials
E. Expansion Joints: S ame material, thickness and finish as ex terior s heets; 20 gauge thick; manufacturer's standard br ake formed t ype, of pr ofile t o suit system. Exposed fasteners same finish as panel system.]
B. Insulation: T ype r ecommended by manufacturer t o suit application.
F. Trim, C losure P ieces, C aps, F lashings, F acias Infills, and Drip Edges: S ame material, th ickness a nd f inish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
A. Gaskets: T ype r ecommended b manufacturer to suit application.
C. Internal Supports: T ype r manufacturer to suit application.
ecommended by
G. Anchors: Stainless steel.
D. Sealants: Manufacturer’s s tandard t ype s uitable f or use with installation of system; non-staining, no nskinning, non-shrinking, and non-sagging.
2.10
E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with s ystem, p ermanently r esilient; ultraviolet a nd ozone resistant; color as selected by Architect.
B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
F. Sealants: Specified in Section 079200, Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system; non-curing b utyl, non-staining and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant; color [as selected by the Architect from the Manufacturer’s full color range. G. Fasteners: Man ufacturer's s tandard t ype t o suit application; steel, h ot d ip g alvanized in acco rdance with ASTM A153; fastener cap same color as exterior panel. H. Field T ouch-up P aint: A s r ecommended by panel manufacturer. I. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt base. J. Building P aper: A STM D 226, 30 pound ( unperforated asphalt felt.
PREFORMED METAL SIDING S:\11\0122\div2to33\074616CGA.doc
FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Form panels for interlocking seams. D. Fabricate co rners i n o ne co ntinuous p iece with minimum 12 inches returns and seal. 2.11
FINISH
A. Exposed E xterior S urfaces F inish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating applied in the shop with a front side dry f ilm th ickness o f 0 .90 m ils. F inish s hall conform to a ll te sts f or a dhesion, flexibility and longevity as s pecified b y K ynar 5 00 f inish s upplier. Color shall b e s elected b y t he A rchitect f rom t he Manufacturer’s full color range. B. Shop apply strippable liquid coating to the front side of panels to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping a nd f ield ha ndling. R emove strippable coating prior to installation.
074616 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. C orrect conditions detrimental to timely and p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. D o not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify th at building framing m embers ar e r eady t o receive panel system. 3.2
PREPARATION
A. Install weather b arrier horizontally o ver gy psum sheathing panels. B. Weather lap edges and ends six (6) inches minimum. C. Stagger vertical joints of each layer. 3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install metal siding s ystem o n w alls and c anopy roof decks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Use concealed fasteners, unless otherwise approved by Architect. D. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.4
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum O ffset F rom T rue A lignment B etween Adjacent Members Butting or In Line edges 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: edges 1/4 inch. 3.5
CLEANING
A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean an d w ash p re-finished surfaces with m ild soap and water, rinse with clean water. 3.6
PROTECTION
A. Protect i nstalled p anels f rom ab use b y other trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the panels from w et cem ent, plaster, p ainting o perations, etc.
END OF SECTION 074616 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREFORMED METAL SIDING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\074616CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 07520 Modified Bituminous Roofing & Restoration PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
Section Includes A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of This Section/ B. Section B, E, E1, E2, F, F1 and New Construction Areas - Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to install the new Garland roof system over the properly prepared substrate. B. Section D - Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to restore the existing roof with the Garland Restoration system.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 7 Section “Preparation for Roofing.” 1. Division 7 Section “Roof and Deck Insulation.” 2. Division 7 Section “Flashing & Sheet Metal.” 3. Divisions 23 and 26 “Mechanical and Electrical.”
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation, mechanical fastener layout, joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials and roof walkway. C. Submit test reports or manufacturer’s certification that roofing materials conform to specified Performance requirements. D. Roofing Installer’s Warranty: Roofing manufacturer to provide to Architect one month prior to Any roof activity on the site, written certification for the roofing installer who must have a minimum five (5) years documented experience specializing in roofing work as specified in this project and certified in writing by the manufacturer. E. Provide manufacturer’s special warranties prior to beginning work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer (Roofer) must be approved by The Garland Company specializing in modified bituminous roof application with a minimum 5 years experience. A list of approved Garland installers can be obtained by calling 612-991-4651. B. Installer’s Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site during all phases of bituminous sheet roofing work and at any time roofing work is in progress, proper supervision of workmen shall be maintained. A copy of the specification shall be in the possession of the Supervisor/Foremen and on the roof at all times. C. Installer response time: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to respond immediately to correction of roof leakage during construction. If the contractor does not respond within 12 hours, the Owner has the right to hire a qualified contractor and back charge the original contractor. D. Manufacturer Inspections: The Garland Company will perform routine site inspections throughout the entire project. Inspections will include photo documentation of the roof progress and any deficiencies found during installation. E. Manufacturer Inspection Reports: Upon request, The Garland Company will provide weekly progress reports to the owner as to the progress of the project. F. Pre-application Roofing Conference: Approximately 2 weeks before scheduled commencement of
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
G.
H.
Farmington Elementary School
modified bitumen roof system installation and associated work meet at project site with installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in the around roofing must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Owner, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner’s insurers, test agencies and governing authorities. Objectives to include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required attachment. 4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, Installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not mandatory requirement). 9. Record (contractor) discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. Manufacturer Final Inspection: The Garland Company will complete a final inspection upon project completion. All punch list items must be noted and be accompanied by a condition photo. The contractor has 14 days to complete the punch list. State Energy Code: Roof assembly to meet Minnesota State Energy Requirements.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer’s original containers, dry and undamaged. B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight place to ensure no possibility of significant moisture exposure. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised surface. Stand all roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas tarpaulin or other breathable material (not polyethylene). C. Do not leave unused materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and other moisture sources. D. It is the responsibility of the contractor to secure all material and equipment on the job site. If any material or equipment is stored on the roof, the contractor must make sure that the integrity of the deck is not compromised at any time. Damage to the deck caused by the contractor will be the sole responsibility of the contractor and will be repaired or replaced at his expense.
1.6
MANUFACTURER’S INSPECTIONS A. See 1.3 Quality Assurance D-G.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when a chance of precipitation is expected. The contractor and his/her insurance company shall determine any work performed. B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
Farmington Elementary School
D.
E. F. G. 1.8
Addition and Remodeling
weatherproofed during same day. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements. All BUR applications must be done when existing school building is not occupied. Observe precautions to prevent fumes, moisture and air quality problems from entering building. Verify there are no make-up air vents open in area of roofing construction.,
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that roof assemblies including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity. B. All work must be fully completed on each day. Phased construction will not be accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A. The primary waterproofing system is by The Garland Company. Any contractor bidding on this division must be approved by The Garland Company to install their roof system. All installation methods, flashing details and sheet metal details must follow strict requirements as required by The Garland Company. Any questions should be directed to Troy Thompson of The Garland Company at 612-991-4651. Section B, E, E1, E2, F, F1 and New Construction Areas – The new roof system will include the following components in the order listed. 1. Three plies of HPR TYPE VI FELTS roofing felt bonded to the prepared substrate with Type III hot asphalt. 2. One ply of the modified field capsheet. 3. Two ply base flashings at all perimeter & projections. 3. The surfacing will be a flood coat of hot bitumen and roofing aggregate. Section D – The restoration system will include the following steps in the order listed. 1. Removal of the existing loose gravel surfacing & sheet metal throughout all areas of the roof. 2. Surface cleaning & field repairs to standards required by The Garland Company. 3. Installation of new base flashings at all perimeter & projections. 4. Prime the entire field of the roof. 5. Install the new restaurant & gravel surfacing.
2.2
BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Base Flashing Roofing Mastic: Silver in color, reflectivity of 60%, V.O.C. compliant, Minimum 5% post industrial recycled content B. Standard Roofing Mastic: Used to set drain leads and penetration cones or pitch pans. Black in color, Minimum 5% post industrial recycled content. C. Interply Adhesive 1. Shall meet ASTM Specifications D-312 Type III.
2.3
SHEET MATERIALS & RESATURANT PRODUCT – supplied by The Garland Company A.
HPR TYPE VI FELTS 1. Three plies individually set in Type III hot asphalt.
B.
MODIFIED FIELD CAPSHEET
C.
BASE FLASHING UNDERLAYMENT
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
D.
MODIFIED FLASHING MEMBRANE – white mineral surfaced
E.
RESATURANT - A rubberized, heavy bodied fibered reinforced, restoration treatment designed to restore the weathering surface of gravel surfaced BUR and modified membrane systems.
F.
PRIMER - Asphalt Primer: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D41
2.4
SURFACINGS A. Aggregate: To conform to ASTM D-1863. 1. Aggregate: #5-#8 washed dry aggregate meeting ASTM D-1863.
2.5
INSULATION MATERIALS A. Rigid Roof Insulation: ASTM C728, UL Class A construction; expanded Perlite mineral with the following characteristics: 1. Board Density: 10 lbs/cu ft 2. Board thickness: One (1) inch 3. Thermal Conductivity: K factor of 0.36 4. Board Edges: Square 5. R-Value: 2.78/inch 6. Flame Spread: 25 (ASTM E84) 7. Smoke Developed: 5 (ASTM E84) 8. Fuel Contributed: 30 (ASTM E84) 9. Compressive Resistance: 32 psi (ASTM C165) C. Tapered Roof Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, felt or glass fiber faced, UL Class A Construction, tapered foam roof insulation shall be thermally efficient polyisocyanurate core bonded between organic/glass asphalt facers on both sides. Approximate foam density of two (2) lbs/cu ft, minimum compressive strength of 16 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621, square edges, total insulation of four (4) inches installed in multiple layers; minimum total R-value of 22.2, and tapered at 1/8 inch per foot with a minimum insulation depth of 1-1/2 inches at drainas or as required to match existing roof drains. D. Non-Tapered Roof Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, felt or glass fiber faced, UL Class A Construction, tapered foam roof insulation shall be thermally efficient polyisocyanurate core bonded between organic/glass asphalt facers on both sides. Approximate foam density of two (2) lbs/cu ft, minimum compressive strength of 16 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621, square edges, total insulation of four (4) inches installed in multiple layers; minimum total R-value of 22.2, and tapered at 1/8 inch per foot with a minimum insulation depth of 1-1/2 inches at drainas or as required to match existing roof drains. E. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; perlite insulation edge strip, flame resistant, sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings.
2.6
4 of 8
RELATED MATERIALS A. Roof Insulation: Roof and Deck Insulation for requirements. B. Roof Insulation Fasteners: Roof and Deck Insulation for requirements. C. Nails and Fasteners: Non-ferrous metal or galvanized steel, except that hard copper nails shall be used with copper; aluminum or stainless steel nails shall be used with aluminum; and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless steel. Fasteners shall be self-clinching type of penetrating type as recommended by the manufacturer of the deck material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush-driven through flat metal discs of not less than 1-inch diameter. Metal discs may be omitted when one-piece composite nails or fasteners with heads not less than 1-inch diameter are used. D. Metal Discs: Flat discs or caps of zinc-coated sheet metal not lighter than 28 gauge and not less than 1-inch in diameter. Discs shall be formed to prevent dishing. Bell or cup shaped caps are not acceptable.
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.7
Addition and Remodeling
ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Sealants: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Vent Stacks: Heavy-duty, rust-resistant metal, soldered joints, sealed metal, sizes and profile as required by roof piping dimensions. C. Roof Drain Flashings: FS QQ-L-201F, Amendment 2, Grade B; 36 x 36 inch sheet metal flashing. D. Sheet Metal Splash Blocks: As located on the Drawings. Mop into roof system. E. Provide additional materials as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and as necessary for proper installation of the roofing system.
PART 3 – EXECUTION – new modified bituminous roofs 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bitumen sheet roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Roof System Manufacturer.
3.2
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS – Section B, E, E1, E2, F, F1 and New Construction Areas A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system work. D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut-offs at end of each day’s work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with two (2) plies of #15 organic roofing felt set in full moppings of bitumen and with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work. E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen according to EVT Method as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus 5°F at point of application) more than 1 hour prior to time of application. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature, EVT, and fire-safe handling temperature of bitumen either by information from manufacturer or by suitable test. Do not exceed recommended temperature limits during bitumen heating. Do not heat to a temperature higher than 25° below flash point. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature exceeding finishing blowing temperature (FBT) for more than 3 hours. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, apply bitumen at the rate of approximately 25 lb. of bitumen per roof square. For a flood coat, apply bitumen at the rate of approximately 60-70 lb. of bitumen per square (plus or minus 25 percent on a total job average basis). G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. H. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. Do not permit phased construction. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. I. Cut-Offs: At end of each day’s roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of two (2) plies of #15 organic roofing felt set in full moppings of bitumen with joints and edges sealed.
3.3
HPR TYPE VI FELTS APPLICATION A. Fiberglass Plies: Install (3) three plies of HPR TYPE VI FELTS in 25 lb. per sq. of bitumen
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
B. C. D.
Farmington Elementary School
shingled uniformly to achieve three plies throughout over the prepared substrate. Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each large area of roofing. Lap ply sheet ends eight inches. Stagger end laps twelve inches minimum. Extend plies two inches beyond top edges of cants at wall and projection bases. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projection details.
3.4
MODIFIED CAPSHEET APPLICATION A. The modified capsheeet shall then by solidly bonded to the base ply layers with specified asphalt at the rate of 25 to 30 lbs. per 100 square feet. B. The roll must push a puddle of asphalt in front of it with asphalt slightly visible at all side laps. Care should be taken to eliminate air entrapment under the membrane. C. Apply pressure to all seams to ensure that the laps are solidly bonded to substrate. D. Subsequent rolls of modified shall be installed across the roof as above with a minimum of 4” side laps and 8” end laps. The end laps shall be staggered. The modified membrane shall be laid in the same direction as the underlayers but the laps shall not coincide with the laps of the base layers. E. Apply asphalt no more than five feet ahead of each roll being embedded. F. Extend membrane 2” beyond top edge of all cants in full moppings of the specified asphalt as shown on the drawings.
3.5
BASE FLASHING APPLICATION (base flashing underlayment & modified flashing membrane) A. All curb, wall and parapet flashings shall be sealed with an application of mastic and mesh on a daily basis. No condition should exist that will permit moisture entering behind, around or under the roof or flashing membrane. B. Prepare all walls, penetrations and expansion joints to be flashed and where shown on the drawings with asphalt primer at the rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free. C. The modified membrane will be used as the flashing membrane and will be adhered to the base flashing underlayment ply with specified asphalt unless otherwise noted in these specifications and nailed off 6” O.C. at all vertical surfaces. D. The entire sheet of flashing membrane must be solidly adhered to the substrate. E. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three-course application of Flashing Bond and fiberglass mesh. F. Counter flashing, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work to be coordinated with modified bitumen roofing work are specified in other sections. G. Roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents and other devices to be coordinated with the roofing system work are in other sections. Caulk the upper edge of the band with an elastomeric sealant.
3.7
APPLICATION OF SURFACING A. Aggregate Surfacing 1. Apply surfacing materials in the quantities specified (500 lbs. per square for aggregate). Install aggregate only after felt flashings, tests, repairs, and corrective actions have been completed and approved. Uniformly embed aggregate in a flood coat of bitumen at a rate of 60 lbs. per square coverage. CLEANING A. Remove drippage of bitumen adhesive from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
3.8
3.9
6 of 8
FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Installer, installer of associated work, Owner, representatives of the roof system Manufacturer, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system.
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
Farmington Elementary School
B.
Addition and Remodeling
Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each parting attending. The roofing system Manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. The Contractor is to notify the Owner upon completion of corrections. Following the final inspection, acceptance will be made in writing by the material manufacturer.
C. D. E.
F. G.
PART 3 – EXECUTION – restoration area. 3.1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS – Section D A.
Cooperate with The Garland Company, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. B. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system. C. Coating shall be applied per manufacturer's application instructions for the type of coating used. D. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless recommended otherwise by manufacture's instructions. Keep roofing materials dry during application. Do not permit phased construction. CLEANING AND SURFACE PREPARATION A. All defects such as deteriorated roof decks, saturated insulation board, etc. must be repaired or replaced per Garland specifications prior to application of the restoration materials. B. Remove all loose roofing gravel, dirt and foreign debris from the roof surface. C. Do not damage roof membrane in cleaning process. D. All surface defects (cracks, blisters, tears) must be repaired as required by The Garland Company. E. Blister Repair 1. Spud all gravel back twelve (12) inches around the blister, clean and prime the area. 2. All blisters must be cut and opened down to the solidly adhered plies of the existing roof system. Use a roofer's knife to open the blister with an "X" or "H" cut. Fold the flaps and remove any existing moisture. Permit the area to dry before applying repair materials. 3. Apply a liberal coating of bituminous material into the blister. Firmly press the flaps into the bituminous material and trim the edges to ensure proper fit. 4. Apply a coating of bituminous material over the repaired area extending a minimum of eight (8) inches beyond the cuts. Embed a strip of fabric into the bituminous material and brush or roll firmly. Apply a second coat of bituminous material over the fabric and onto the roof surface. F. Edge Detail Repair 1. Spud back all gravel and built-up bitumen twelve (12) inches onto the roof. 2. Remove all loose dirt and debris along the edge detail and prime with an asphalt primer. Secure all loose metal to the wood nailer. 3. Install a bond breaker at moving joints. 4. Apply a liberal coat of mastic over the prepared area and embed fabric into the mastic. 5. Apply a liberal coat of mastic over the fabric. Sufficiently cover the fabric to obliterate the weave from sight. 6. Apply surfacing to the repair. G. Pitch Pocket Repair
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Fill the pitch pocket with an elastomeric roof cement. Taper the mastic at the edge of the pitch pocket to ensure water run-off. 2. Spud back all gravel and heavy built-up areas of bitumen eighteen (18) inches onto the field of the roof, clean and prime the area with an asphalt primer. 3. Apply a liberal coating of mastic around the pitch pocket extending a minimum of twelve (12) inches onto the horizontal roofing surface. 4. Cut four (4) strips of fabric. Each strip should be twelve (12) inches wide and be of sufficient length so as to extend a minimum of twelve (12) inches beyond the pitch pan. 5. Embed a strip into the mastic along each side of the pitch pocket. Brush or roll the fabric into place to ensure proper embedment. 6. Top dress the area with mastic. 7. Install rain bonnet, draw band and caulk. FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Prepare all walls, penetrations and expansion joints to be flashed and where shown on the drawings. Prime with an asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free. B. All plies will be adhered with one of the following: 1. With brush grade flashing adhesive. C. The entire sheet of flashing membrane must be solidly adhered to the substrate and nailed off using a termination bar.. D. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three-course application of Flashing Bond and fiberglass mesh and aluminize. E. Seal junction of flashing membrane and roof with a three-course application of Flashing Bond and mesh. F. Counterflashing, cap flashings, expansion joints and similar work to be coordinated with roofing work are specified in other sections. G. Roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents and other devices to be coordinate with the roofing work are in other sections. COATING APPLICATION A. Remove gravel off roof surface and make necessary repairs as specified above. B. Apply primer to roof surface at a rate of one (1) gallon per one hundred (100) square feet. C. Brush, spray or squeegee the restoration material onto the roof surface at a rate of not less than seven (8) gallons per one hundred (100) square feet. D. Immediately embed aggregate conforming to ASTM D1863 at a nominal rate of five hundred (500) pounds per one hundred (100) square feet. CLEANING A. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. FINAL INSPECTION A. Complete all items as listed in the final punch list created by The Garland Company.
END OF SECTION
8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075200modbit&restoration.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 075310 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING - FULLY ADHERED reinforced EPDM membrane. Mech anically fasten the acceptable roof insulation to the roof deck at a minimum rate of o ne ( 1) f astener an d p late ev ery two (2) square feet. The EPDM membrane is fully adhered to the i nsulation w ith m anufacturer’s recommended bonding ad hesive. Joints of E PDM membrane are sealed together using manufacturer’s recommended method.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of th e C ontract ( General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Tie-In an d R epair of Fully A dhered E lastomeric Membrane R oofing O ver E xisting S loped M etal Roof D ecks, I ncluding T apered I nsulation, Reinforced EPDM Membrane, B ase F lashing, Counter Flashing and Accessories
B. Tie in to e xisting reinforced E PDM m embrane i s utilized a t th e p erimeter of t he new m echanical curbs, and field m embrane Walkway p ads ar e to be installed at traffic concentration points. C. The fully adhered roofing system shall comply with all requirements for a UL-90 Wind Uplift Rating to meet the manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
C. Preparation of Existing Roof Deck Surfaces. D. (Sloped Substrate) E lastomeric M embrane Roofing Fully Adhered S ystem; I nsulation, Reinforced EPDM Membrane, B ase F lashing, Control Joints, Counter Flashing and Accessories.
D. BID ALTERNATE: New r oof s ystem: Fully Adhered Roofing System i ncorporating a B lack, 60 mil t hick r einforced E PDM m embrane. Mechanically fasten the acceptable roof insulation to the roof deck at a m inimum r ate o f o ne ( 1) fastener an d plate ev ery two (2) s quare feet. The EPDM membrane is fully adhered to the insulation with manufacturer’s r ecommended b onding adhesive. J oints o f E PDM m embrane ar e sealed together using m anufacturer’s r ecommended method.
E. New F ully A dhered R oof S ystem ( BID ALTERNATE): Fully A dhered E lastomeric Membrane R oofing O ver E xisting S loped M etal Roof D ecks, Including T apered I nsulation, Reinforced EPDM Membrane, B ase F lashing, Counter Flashing and Accessories F. Roof Walkway Membrane Pads. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 012300 – Alternates: Replace existing roof with fully adhered EPDM roof system. B. Section 014523 - Testing Laboratory Services. C. Wood blocking, curbs and cant strips, and plywood roof deck. D. Section 071050 - Preparation for R e-Roofing: Tearing b ack e xisting r oofing a nd related components i n pr eparation f or bl ending into new roofing. E. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Pre-finished roof m etal a nd wall flashing membrane. F. Division 2 3 - Mechanical: Flashing co llars, r oof drains and p refabricated cu rbs f or m echanical equipment. G. Division 26 - Electrical: Flashing collars.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Existing S ystem is Fully A dhered R oofing System i ncorporating a B lack, 6 0 m il th ick
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for insulation areas, j oint o r te rmination d etail conditions, conditions o f in terface w ith o ther m aterials, and roof walkway pad pattern. 1. Bid Alternate: Include layout D rawing f or tapered insulation. C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata on membrane m aterials, f lashing m aterials, insulation and walkway precast pads. D. Submit test reports or Manufacturer’s certification demonstrating roofing m aterials c onform to specified performance requirements. E. Submit s amples illu strating q uality o f in sulation, membrane, ballast and walkway material. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. G. Manufacturer's Field R eports: S ubmit u nder provision of Section 014300: 075310 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
1. Indicate p roceeding f ollowed; am bient temperatures, humidity, wind v elocity d uring application, s upplementary in structions g iven, and all other pertinent information. H. Roofing I nstaller’s C ertification: Roofing Manufacturer s hall p rovide t o t he A rchitect, one month prior to any roof activity on the site, written certification for the roof i nstaller as r eferenced below.
G. Provide f or r oofing s ystem inspection and certification by M anufacturer’s t echnical representative when roof is completed. H. Consultation: M anufacturer’s T echnical S ervice Department shall be available for consultation with respect to all d eviations f rom c urrent manufacturer’s standards and specifications. 1.7
I. Manufacturer’s W arranty: P rior to beginning Work, submit for Owner’s approval, a copy of the Manufacturer’s W arranty, i ncluding special warranties, as specified in this Section. 1.5
A. Perform Work in acco rdance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Latest E dition, Volumes 1 and 2. B. Conform t o International B uilding C ode f or roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
QUALIFICATIONS
C. Source Limitations: P rovide materials from single Manufacturer or from sources approved by roofing system manufacturer. D o n ot u se m aterials th at may prevent or void manufacturer’s warranty.
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the Work of t his S ection w ith minimum ten (10) years documented experience. B. Roofing Installer: C ompany s pecializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience, and certified in writing by the roofing system manufacturer. 1.6
D. Roof a ssembly Re quirements: To m eet State o f Minnesota State Energy Code Requirements. E. Install r oofing s ystem i n a m anner t hat roofing system s hall p ass t he r oofing system manufacturer’s w arranty i nspection. R epair or replace a ll work r equired to obtain roofing system manufacturer’s warranty at no additional cost to the Owner.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing s hall be p erformed b y q ualified parties as specified herein and i n acco rdance w ith t he provisions of Section 014523.
F. Environmental Requirements:
B. Perform testing in acco rdance w ith N RCA guidelines and ASTM D3617
1. All roofing applications must be done when the existing School Building is not occupied.
C. Take additional samples as directed by the Owner’s Roof Inspection S ervice w hen d eficiencies ar e found or to doc ument pe rformance w ith P roject specifications prior to installation of flood coat and gravel.
2. Observe precautions in tying-in new roof to the existing b uilding in o rder to p revent moisture and air quality problems. 3. Maintain a negative pressure in the construction areas to p revent f umes f rom en tering t he existing building.
D. If t ests i ndicate W ork d oes n ot meet specified requirements, r emove W ork, r eplace an d r etest at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Make certain that there are no make-up air vents open in t he a rea w here r oofing w ork i s t aking place.
E. Repair of Test Cuts: 1. Immediately repair test cuts per Manufacturer’s recommendations. F. After in stallation of the n ew r oofing s ystem, a nd prior t o t he f inal i nspection an d acceptance, perform water testing to check th e in tegrity o f th e roofing system and to check for ponded water. An infrared s can ( by O wner) m ay al so b e performed after w ater te sting. All le aks, w et in sulation, o r ponded water ar eas ( after 4 8 hour period) shall be properly and promptly repaired.
075310 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALITY ASSURANCE
5. Workers s hould t ake t he necessary precautions in handling the toxic materials used in this roofing system. 1.8
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Roofing System: M aterials th at a re c ompatible with one and other under conditions of service and application required th at r esult in a w atertight system that does not allow the passage of water and that r esists u plift p ressures, th ermally induced Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
movement, and exposure t o w eather w ithout failure. B. Conform t o a pplicable building code f or r oof assembly fire hazard requirements an d w ind l oad uplift. C. Underwriters L aboratory (U L): R oofing S ystem shall comply with UL C lass A F ire H azard Classification and U L cl ass 9 0 Wind U plift according to UL 1897 . D. Performance: P rovide r oofing s ystem th at complies w ith r equirements in F MG 4 450, FMG 4470 an d F MG L oss P revention D ata S heet 1-28 and that h as m aterials lis ted in F MG's " Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction. 1. Fire, ASTM E108:
Class A.
2. Windstorm Classification: Class 1-90. 3. Hail Resistance: Moderate Hail. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and h andle Products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver materials in m anufacturer's o riginal, unopened c ontainers, d ry, und amaged, w ith s eals and labels intact. C. Store an d p rotect m aterials i n d ry w eather protected environment, clear o f g round an d moisture. D. Store all roll materials on end. E. Store ad hesives, p rimers an d s ealant at temperatures above 40 degrees F . A dhesives and sealant a re e xtremely f lammable, a nd a ll ig nition sources should be kept aw ay from t hese materials while in use. F. Solvents i n ad hesive an d s ealant ar e h eavier t han air, an d w ill accu mulate i n l ow ar eas ( such as valleys) a nd in p laces w here ventilation is poor. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors. G. Protection: U se all necessary means to protect the materials in th is S ection b efore, d uring a nd after installation, a nd to p rotect the W ork a nd materials of all other trades. H. Replacements: I n t he ev ent o f damage, immediately m ake al l r epairs an d r eplacements as necessary f or t he ap proval o f t he Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply r oofing membrane d uring uns uitable weather, when am bient t emperature i s ab ove o r below that recommended by r oofing m embrane manufacturer or other weather conditions exist that may v iolate t he m embrane m anufacturer’s recommendations. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. C. The to tal in sulation/membrane as sembly m ust b e completed in on e ope ration. P hased r oof construction is not acceptable. 1.11
JOB SITE CONSIDERATIONS
A. Retrofit - Recover P rojects: E xisting r oofing materials m ust b e in vestigated a nd w et m aterials must be removed. B. Fresh asphalt (that which is less than 30 da ys old), coal tar base, oil base or plastic roof cements, and re-saturated r oof products ar e NOT to be u sed i n direct contact with rubber based components of the fully adhered system. C. Protect all components of the fully adhered system from discharges, such as p etroleum p roducts, greases, o ils ( mineral an d v egetable), and animal fats. D. Protect the fully adhered system from direct contact with steam or h eat s ources w hen t he i n-service temperature i s i n ex cess o f 1 80 d egrees F ( 82 degrees C). 1.12
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated counter flashings installed b y o ther sections a s the work of this Section proceeds. 1.13
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a p re-installation c onference a m inimum of one (1) week prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Require attendance of Contractor, Roofing Installer and other parties directly affecting the Work of this Section. C. Review p reparation, i nstallation p rocedures an d details, and coordination with related work.
075310 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.14
Farmington Elementary School Tear Strength Brittleness
WARRANTY
A. Provide t wo (2 ) y ear w ritten w arranty from the Roofing Installer und er p rovisions o f S ection 017836 and in c onformance w ith w arranty requirements below. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including damage to work resulting from failure to resist the penetration of m oisture w hen e xposed t o n oncatastrophic conditions, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. D efects d ue t o f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the no dollar limit guarantee p eriod shall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced, including materials and labor, at no expense to the Owner.
2.3
B. Pressure-Sensitive F lashing: A n ominal 4 0 mil black, semi-cured EPDM membrane laminated to a nominal 30 mil cured, pre-applied adhesive. C. Clean C ured F lashing: A cl ean cured 0.060 inch thick no n-reinforced ( seamless) b lack EPDM membrane used t o f lash g ravel s tops, m etal edgings, wall/curbs and Seam Fastening Plates.
3. Warranty shall not restrict other legal rights the Owner has under the law. 2.4
2.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ROOFING SYSTEM
1. Apache Products Company.
-
2. Atlas Energy Products. 3. Carlisle Roofing Systems. 4. Firestone Rubber Guard.
1. CARLISLE Sure Seal Roofing System.
5. Johns Manville Roofing Systems.
2. FIRESTONE Rubber Gard.
B. Substitutions: 016000.
3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.6 MEMBRANE & ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: E PDM 6 0 m ils thick, reinforced, which meets ASTM D4637 and ANSI/RMA IPR-2, conforming to the following minimum criteria: Properties Breaking Str. Elongation 075310 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Test ASTM D751 ASTM D751
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF INSULATION A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
2.2
FASTENING COMPONENTS A. Use Roofing Manufacturer’s recommended fastening system in co nformance w ith s pecified warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FLASHING ACCESSORIES A. EPDM Molded Pipe Flashing: A black, cured, premolded base flashing for pipes up to six (6) inches in d iameter in stalled w ith s plicing c ement a nd in seam sealant.
2. Warranty s hall no t b e p rorated during the warranty period.
C. ALTERNATE BID WARRANTY: Provide t en (10) year written Total System Warranty from the Roofing M anufacturer und er provisions o f Section 017836. P rovide wind uplift s peed coverage to 55 mph.
50 lbf -75 degrees
B. Related M aterials: B onding ad hesive, s plice cleaner, s plicing cem ent, in-seam se alant, la p sealant, uncured flashing, s eam f astening p lates, and al l o ther r elated co mponents r equired for use with this roofing system shall be as recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer.
1. Warranty shall to have a no monetary limit.
4. Warranty s hall c ontain n o jurisdictional restrictions on where the Owner may bring legal action.
ASTM D751 ASTM D2137
Results 210 lbf 500% min.
Under pr ovisions of S ection
ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS A. (Sloped S ubstrate) R oof I nsulation: ASTM C1289, T ype II, Cl ass 1, f elt or glass-fiber faced, non-tapered foam roof insulation shall be thermally efficient polyisocyanurate core b onded between organic/glass asphalt facers. UL Class A fire rating construction, a pproximate foam de nsity of t wo (2) lb./cu ft, s quare e dges, m inimum to tal R -Value of 22.2, total roof insulation thickness as indicated on Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
the D rawings, an d t apered cr ickets at 1 /2 i nch p er foot sloped where shown. B. ALTERNATE BID: (Flat S ubstrate) T apered Roof I nsulation: A STM C 1289, T ype II, Class 1 , felt o r g lass-fiber f aced, n on-tapered foam r oof insulation s hall b e th ermally efficient polyisocyanurate co re b onded b etween organic/glass asphalt facers. UL Class A fire rating construction, a pproximate foam de nsity of t wo (2) lb./cu ft, s quare e dges, m inimum to tal R -Value of 22.2, total roof insulation thickness as indicated on the D rawings, an d t apered cr ickets at 1 /2 i nch p er foot sloped where shown.
E. ALTERNATE BID: Roof Drain Flashing Grade B, 36” x 36” sheet metal flashing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine areas and conditions und er w hich W ork of th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental t o t imely a nd pr oper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify roof deck is supported and secure.
C. Roofing insulation must b e c ompatible o ther roofing materials and approved b y t he m embrane manufacturer.
C. Verify r oof d eck i s cl ean an d s mooth, f lat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, v alleys, o r l eaves, an d s uitable f or installation of roof system.
D. Top L ayer: H igh de nsity w ood f iberboard, 1/2 inch thick. 2.7
D. Verify roof deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
EDGING AND TERMINATION
E. Verify roof ope nings, c urbs, a nd pe netrations through roof are solidly s et, a nd r eglets a re in place.
A. Counter Flashing: Pre-finished m etal as specified in Section 076200. B. Control or Expansion J oint F lashing: S heet metal counter flashing and wood materials as detailed on the Drawings. C. ALTERNATE BID: Counterflashing: Prefinished metal as specified in Section 076200. 2.8
2.9
F. At no tim e s hall the Roofing Contractor leave the building open or exposed to interior damage. 3.2
B. Remove al l r ust ar eas an d prime exposed areas with rust-inhibiting primer. 3.3
B. The wood nailer must be installed so that the top of the wood nailer is relatively f lush w ith th e to p surface of the membrane u nderlayment an d t he width of the wood n ailer ex ceeds t he width o f t he metal f lange ( where ap plicable at edgings, scuppers, etc.).
A. Insulation F asteners: A ppropriate f or pu rpose intended and a pproved by r oofing m anufacturer; sufficient length t o p enetrate m etal r oof d eck b y 3/4 in ches a nd o btain a n u plift r esistance to conform to FM 1-90 requirements.
C. Vent S tacks: Heavy-duty, r ust-resistant m etal, soldered joints, sealed metal, sizes and profiles as required by roof piping dimensions. D. Provide additional m aterials as r ecommended b y the r oofing m anufacturer an d as n ecessary f or proper installation of the roofing system.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS A. Install wood nailers at all locations indicated on the Drawings.
ACCESSORIES
B. Roofing Sealant: T ype r ecommended b y membrane manufacturer.
PREPARATION OF METAL ROOF DECK A. Insulation f asteners us ed m ust ha ve a m inimum pullout of 360 pounds per fastener.
WALKWAY SURFACING A. Membrane W alkway: W alkway membrane pads, black, molded rubber with slip resistant surface and factory rounded corners, 30 x 30 i nch pa ds, 3/ 16 inch thickness.
EXAMINATION
3.4
INSULATION APPLICATION A. (Flat Metal Deck) Install one (1) layer of polyisocyanurate roof insulation, m inimum 1 -1/2 inch thick, with all joints butted and staggered.
075310 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. (Flat M etal D eck) I nstall s econd l ayer of tapered polyisocyanurate roof insulation loose laid over the first layer with joints butted and staggered from the previous layer.
2. Apply S plice T ape t o b ottom membrane sheet with the edge of the release paper along a line marked 1/2 inch out from the top sheet. Press tape o nto s heet us ing ha nd p ressure, overlapping tape roll ends a minimum of one (1) inch.
C. Secure b oth la yers o f r oof insulation to metal roof deck with mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s i nstructions; an d as sembly must b e FM 1 -90 rated and respective m anufacturer m ust verify in writing th eir r equirements m eet a ll fastening density, pattern, spacing and criteria. All joints butted and staggered.
3. Remove the r elease p aper an d p ress t op s heet onto tape using hand pressure. R oll the splice with a two (2) inch steel roller. F. Secure EPDM membrane at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, e xpansion j oint, c urb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds two ( 2) i nches i n o ne horizontal f oot, a nd a t a ll p enetrations in accordance w ith m anufacturer's recommendations. Additional membrane securement shall be provided by reinforced strips.
D. Install single layer of high-density wood fiberboard over the top layer of t apered polyisocyanurate insulation w ith ad hesive r ecommended b y the roofing manufacturer. E. Cut boards to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. F. Apply no more roof insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.5
3.6
A. Flash all penetrations and walls with cured EPDM membrane. U ncured el astofoam f lashing s hall b e limited to o verlay vertical seams o r to flash inside and o utside co rners, scuppers, p ourable s ealer pockets, prefabricated curbs, and other penetrations or u nusually s haped w alls w here t he u se o f cured membrane flashing is not practical.
MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install perimeter membrane s heet at t he p erimeter of each r oof l evel. I nstall ei ther s even (7) or ten (10) feet wide membrane sheet over the field of the roof. F ully ad here al l m embrane s heets t o t he insulation substrate with Bonding Adhesive.
B. Manufacturer's p refabricated acces sories ( premolded p ipe s eals an d p ourable sealer pockets) should b e us ed, w hen f easible, i n lieu of uncured elastofoam flashing.
B. Overlap adjacent EPDM m embrane s heets a minimum of three (3) inches. C. The membrane may b e either Adhesive Spliced o r Tape Spliced at the manufacturer’s option.
C. Terminate the f lashing i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer's termination recommendations.
D. Membrane Splicing (Adhesive Splice):
D. Coordinate i nstallation of r oof dr ains, s umps a nd related flashing.
1. Clean the splice area with Splice Cleaner. 2. Apply Splice C ement at t he r ate o f approximately 1 50 l inear f eet p er o ne ( 1) gallon, o r as o therwise r ecommended by the membrane manufacturer. 3. Roll the top m embrane s heet o nto th e m ating surface and roll th e s plice w ith a tw o ( 2) in ch steel roller. 4. After adjoining m embrane s heets have been spliced to gether, w ait a m inimum o f tw o (2) hours and clean exposed ed ge o f s plice w ith Splice Cleaner. A pply a 5 /16 i nch d iameter bead of Lap S ealant. Feather L ap S ealant t o completely cover the splice edge.
MEMBRANE FLASHING
3.7
METAL FLASHING A. Pre-finished metal flashing and counter flashing are provided under provisions of Section 076200. B. Fabricate roof c ontrol a nd e xpansion j oints t o isolate roof into areas indicated on the Drawings. C. Install pre-finished components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Membrane Splicing (Tape Splice): 1. Clean the splice area with Primer. 075310 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.8
Addition and Remodeling
TERMINATION A. Where a c ounter f lashing i s r equired, r un the flashing up behind the counter flashing and install a bead of cut-off mastic behind the membrane at the top o f t he t ermination, an d fasten the membrane using an ap propriate f astener spaced twelve ( 12) inches on center, maximum.
3.9
WALKWAYS A. Provide m anufacturer's s tandard w alkway pads adhered to the EPDM membrane with splicing cement. B. Walkway p ads ar e r equired f or al l t raffic concentration points regardless of traffic frequency.
3.10
CLEANING
A. Remove b ituminous m arkings f rom f inished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning ad vice an d co nform t o t heir documented instructions. C. Repair o r r eplace d efaced o r disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.11
PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces ag ainst d amage f rom roofing work. B. Where traffic m ust c ontinue o ver f inished r oof membrane, protect roof surfaces with minimum 1/2 inch thick ex terior g rade p lywood s et o n a minimum 3/8 inch thick extruded recovery board as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
075310 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
075310 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075310CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 075320 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING - LOOSE LAID/BALLASTED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General,. S upplementary and O ther C onditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Loose Laid/Ballasted E lastomeric Membrane Roofing Repair Over Existing Sloped Met al R oof D ecks. BASE SCOPE: Repair Base tie-In of Existing EPDM System in Locations as Shown on the Drawings. C. (Sloped and F lat Substrate) E lastomeric M embrane Roofing - Loose L aid/Ballast S ystem; I nsulation, EPDM M embrane, B ase F lashing, C ounter F lashing and Accessories. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 014523 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 053100 - Steel D ecking: S teel r oof d eck surface. C. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: T reated W ood blocking, c urbs a nd c ant strips, a nd pl ywood r oof deck. D. Section 071050 - Preparation for Re-Roofing: Tearing back existing roofing and r elated c omponents i n preparation for blending into new roofing. E. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Prefinished roof metal and wall flashing membrane. 1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The E lastomeric S heet Mem brane R oofing System incorporates a ( Black) 6 0 m il thick non-reinforced EPDM membrane. T he insulation and membrane ar e loose-laid o ver t he r oof d eck. A ll m embrane perimeters an d p rojections s hall be secured, an d adjoining sheets a re s pliced t ogether us ing manufacturer’s r ecommended s plicing m ethod an d sealant. The m embrane an d i nsulation ar e h eld i n place with an average of ten (10) pounds of ballast per one (1) square foot. B. Criteria f or B allast Membrane S ystem: SPRI - Wind Design Guide for Ballast Single Ply Roofing Systems. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate base detail for repair, joint or termination detail c onditions, c onditions o f interface with o ther materials and paver b allast co ver pattern. C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata o n membrane materials, insulation and flashing materials, and walkway materials. D. Submit te st r eports o r Manufacturer’s certification demonstrating r oofing m aterials conform t o s pecified performance requirements. E. Submit s amples illu strating q uality of insulation, pavers, membrane and ballast. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. G. Roofing I nstaller’s C ertification: R oofing Manufacturer s hall p rovide t o t he A rchitect, one month prior to a ny r oof a ctivity o n th e s ite, w ritten certification for the roof installer as referenced below. H. Manufacturer’s W arranty: P rior t o b eginning W ork, submit fo r O wner’s a pproval, a c opy of the Manufacturer’s W arranty, i ncluding special warranties, as specified in this Section. 1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the Work of this Section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. B. Roofing I nstaller: C ompany s pecializing in performing the Work o f th is S ection w ith m inimum five (5) years documented experience, and certified in writing by the roofing system manufacturer. 1.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing shall be performed b y q ualified p arties a s specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Section 014523. B. After installation of the new roofing system, and prior to the final inspection and acceptance, perform water testing to check the integrity of the roofing system and to ch eck for p onded w ater. A n i nfrared s can ( by Owner) may also be performed after water testing. All leaks, wet i nsulation, o r p onded water ar eas ( after 4 8 hour period) shall be properly and promptly repaired. C. Provide for roofing system inspection and certification by Manufacturer’s technical r epresentative when roof is completed.
075320 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling D. Consultation: M anufacturer’s Technical Service Department s hall b e a vailable f or c onsultation with respect to al l d eviations f rom cu rrent m anufacturer’s standards and specifications. 1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Latest Edition, Volumes 1 and 2. B. Conform t o International B uilding C ode f or roof assembly fire hazard requirements. C. Source L imitations: P rovide m aterials f rom s ingle Manufacturer or f rom s ources a pproved by roofing system manufacturer. Do not u se materials that m ay prevent or void manufacturer’s warranty. D. Roof a ssembly Re quirements: To m eet State o f Minnesota State Energy Code Requirements. E. Install roofing system in a manner that roofing system shall pass the roofing system manufacturer’s warranty inspection. Repair or replace al l w ork r equired t o obtain roofing s ystem m anufacturer’s w arranty at n o additional cost to the Owner. F. Environmental Requirements: 1. Observe precautions in tying-in new roof to the existing b uilding in o rder to p revent moisture and air quality problems. 2. Maintain a negative pressure in the construction areas to p revent f umes f rom en tering t he existing building. 3. Make certain that there are no make-up air vents open in t he a rea w here r oofing w ork i s t aking place. 4. Workers s hould t ake t he necessary precautions in handling the toxic materials used in this roofing system. 1.8
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roofing System: Materials th at a re c ompatible w ith one an d ot her u nder c onditions of service and application required that r esult in a watertight s ystem that does not allow the p assage o f w ater an d t hat resists u plift p ressures, th ermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Conform to applicable building code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements and wind load uplift.
Farmington Elementary School 1. Hail Resistance: Severe Hail. D. Criteria f or B allast M embrane S ystem: SPRI - Wind Design Guide for Ballast Single Ply Roofing Systems. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and h andle P roducts to s ite under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and m oisture, i n a ccordance w ith manufacturer’s instructions. D. Do not store adhesive containers with opened lids due to the loss of solvent which will occur from flash off. E. Store all roll materials on end. F. Store ad hesives, p rimers an d s ealant at temperatures above 4 0 d egrees F . A dhesives an d sealant are extremely f lammable, and all ig nition s ources s hould be kept away from these materials while in use. G. Solvents in adhesive and sealant ar e h eavier t han ai r, and will accumulate in low areas (such as valleys) and in places where ventilation is poor. A void prolonged breathing of vapors. H. Protection: U se al l necessary m eans t o p rotect t he materials in this S ection before, d uring and a fter installation, and to p rotect th e W ork a nd materials o f all other trades. I. Replacements: I n t he ev ent o f damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements as necessary for the approval of the Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply r oofing m embrane d uring uns uitable weather, when ambient temperature is above or below that recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer or o ther weather conditions e xist that may violate the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Do not apply roofing m embrane t o da mp or f rozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. C. The to tal in sulation/membrane a ssembly m ust b e completed in one operation. Phased roof construction is not acceptable.
C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): R oofing System shall comply with U L C lass A F ire H azard C lassification and UL class 90 Wind Uplift according to UL 1897. 075320 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
1.11
Addition and Remodeling 2. Warranty s hall no t b e p rorated during the warranty period.
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Retrofit - Recover Projects: Existing roofing materials must b e in vestigated a nd w et m aterials m ust b e removed. V erify s tructural cap acity o f ex isting r oof system
3. Warranty shall not restrict other legal rights the Owner has under the law. 4. Warranty s hall c ontain no jurisdictional restrictions on where the Owner may bring legal action.
B. Roofing s ystem s hall n ot b e r equired on por tions of the p roject where the slope exceeds two ( 2) inches in one horizontal foot. 1.12
A. Coordinate th e W ork w ith in stallation o f associated counter f lashings in stalled b y o ther s ections as the work of this Section proceeds. B. Avoid unnecessary rooftop traffic over sections of the roof an d t o p revent s ubsequent damage to the membrane roofing system 1.13
2.1
B. Require at tendance of Contractor, R oofing I nstaller and other parties directly affecting th e W ork o f th is Section. C. Review p reparation, i nstallation p rocedures an d details, and coordination with related work.
1. Provide Wind Uplift Speed Coverage up to 55 mph. B. Provide two (2 ) y ear w ritten w arranty f rom t he Roofing Installer under pr ovisions of S ection 017836 and i n co nformance w ith w arranty r equirements below. C. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are g uaranteed ag ainst d efects, i ncluding d amage t o work resulting from failure to resist the penetration of moisture when exposed to non-catastrophic conditions, after completion a nd f inal accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed d uring the no d ollar limit guarantee period shall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced, including materials and labor, at no expense to the Owner 1. Warranty shall to have a no monetary limit.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
-
1. CARLISLE Sure Seal Roofing System. 2. FIRESTONE Rubber Gard. 3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.2
MEMBRANE & ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane: E PDM 6 0 m ils thick, r einforced, w hich meets A STM D 4637 an d A NSI/RMA I PR-2, conforming to the following minimum criteria: Properties Breaking Str. Elongation Tear Strength Brittleness
WARRANTY
A. Provide ten (10) y ear written NDL Total System Warranty f rom t he R oofing M anufacturer und er provisions of Section 017836.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a p re-installation c onference a m inimum o f one ( 1) w eek pr ior t o c ommencing work of this Section.
1.14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COORDINATION
Test ASTM D751 ASTM D751 ASTM D751 ASTM D2137
Results 210 lbf 500% 50 lbf -75 degree F
B. Related Materials: Bonding adhesive, splice cleaner, splicing c ement, in -seam sealant, lap sealant, uncured flashing, s eam f astening p lates, an d a ll o ther r elated components r equired f or us e with t his r oofing s ystem shall be as r ecommended b y t he r oofing m embrane manufacturer. 2.3
FLASHING ACCESSORIES
A. EPDM Molded Pipe F lashing: A b lack, cu red, p remolded base flashing for pipes up to six (6) inches in diameter in stalled w ith s plicing c ement a nd in -seam sealant. B. Pourable S ealer P ocket: A b lack, p refabricated Pourable S ealer P ocket w hich co nsists o f a two (2) inch wide p lastic s upport s trip w ith p re-applied, adhesive backed uncured elastoform flashing; sizes as required.
075320 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling C. Pressure-Sensitive Flashing: A nominal 40 mil black, semi-cured EPDM membrane laminated to a nominal 30 mil cured, pre-applied adhesive. D. Clean Cured Flashing: A clean cured 0.060 inch thick non-reinforced ( seamless) b lack E PDM m embrane used to f lash g ravel s tops, metal edgings, wall/curbs and Seam Fastening Plates. 2.4
FASTENING COMPONENTS
A. Use Roofing M anufacturer’s r ecommended f astening system i n co nformance w ith s pecified warranty requirements. 2.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF INSULATION
A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Apache Products. 2. Atlas Energy Products. 3. Carlisle Roofing Systems. 4. Firestone Rubber Gard. 5. Johns Manville Roofing Systems. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.6
ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS
A. (Flat Substrate) Tapered R oof I nsulation: A STM C1289, T ype II, Class 1 , f elt o r glass-fiber f aced, tapered r oof in sulation s hall b e th ermally e fficient polyisocyanurate co re b onded b etween organic/glass asphalt f acers. Class A, approximate f oam d ensity o f two (2) lb/cu. Ft., square edges, minimum R-Value of 22.2, total in sulation th ickness a s in dicated o n th e Drawings installed in two (2) layers, and tapered crickets 1/2 inch per foot as i ndicated o n t he Drawings. 2.7
EDGING AND TERMINATION
A. Termination Bar: A one (1) inch wide and 0.098 inch thick extruded aluminum b ar p re-punched s ix ( 6) inches on center which incorporates a s ealant ledge to support Lap S ealant a nd pr ovide s tability f or membrane terminations. B. Fascias, Copings and C ounter Flashing: Pre-finished metal as specified in Section 076200. 2.8
Farmington Elementary School B. Ballast: A STM D 1863, N o. 7 S tone, smooth, sound, hard, washed; 3/8 inch minimum to ¾ inch maximum size, dirt or organic materials are not acceptable. 1. Provide at all non-nailable conditions. 2.9
ACCESSORIES
A. Roofing Sealant: Type r ecommended b y m embrane manufacturer. B. Provide additional materials as r ecommended b y t he roofing manufacturer and as necessary f or proper installation of the roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which W ork of this Section will be performed. C orrect conditions detrimental to timely and p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. D o not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify roof deck is supported and secure. C. Verify roof deck is clean an d s mooth, f lat, f ree o f depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, valleys, o r le aves, a nd s uitable f or in stallation of roof system. D. Verify roof deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and reglets are in place. F. At no time s hall th e R oofing C ontractor le ave th e building open or exposed to interior damage. 3.2
PREPARATION OF METAL ROOF DECK
A. Remove all rust ar eas and p rime exposed areas with rust-inhibiting primer. 3.3
INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS
A. Install wood nailers if r equired to c orrect the existing substrate. B. The wood nailer must be installed so that the top of the wood nailer is relatively flush with the to p surface o f the m embrane u nderlayment an d t he w idth o f t he wood n ailer ex ceeds t he w idth o f t he metal flange, where applicable.
BALLAST
A. Redistribute stone ballast after repair work.
075320 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.4
Addition and Remodeling C. Coordinate installation of related flashing.
INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Cut polyisocyanurate boards to f it n eatly to new perimeter b locking a nd a round penetrations through roof as required for EPDM base repair. B. Apply no more r oof i nsulation t han c an be c overed with membrane in same day. 3.5
MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. The E PDM m embrane s hall b e l oose l aid o ver the insulation s ubstrate. T he m embrane s plicing s ystem: Membrane Splicing (Adhesive Splice): 1. Clean the splice area with Splice Cleaner. 2. Apply Splice C ement at t he r ate o f approximately 1 50 l inear f eet p er o ne ( 1) gallon, o r as o therwise r ecommended by the membrane m anufacturer. J ust p rior to c losing the splice, apply a bead of In-Seam S ealant n o less than 1/8 inch and no more than 1/4 inch in diameter a minimum of 1/2 inch from the inside edge o f t he b ottom m embrane s heet an d a minimum of two (2) inches from the lead edge.
3.7
A. Pre-finished m etal f lashing a nd c ounter flashing as provided under provisions of Section 076200. B. Fabricate r oofing c ontrol a nd e xpansion joints to isolate roof into areas as indicated on the Drawings. C. Install p re-finished co mponents i n acco rdance with manufacturer’s instruction. 3.8
B. Manufacturer’s Termination Bar i s r equired w here a surface mounted termination is required. 1. Install a b ead o f cu t-off m astic b ehind the membrane at the top of the termination. 2. Install Termination B ar, fastening 1 2 i nches o n center, o r cl oser w here n eeded t o achieve compression, with appropriate fasteners.
4. After adjoining m embrane s heets have been spliced to gether, w ait a m inimum o f tw o (2) hours and clean exposed ed ge o f s plice w ith Splice Cleaner. A pply a 5 /16 i nch diameter bead of Lap S ealant. F eather L ap S ealant t o completely cover the splice edge.
3.6
MEMBRANE FLASHING
A. Flash a ll p enetrations a nd w alls w ith c ured EPDM membrane. Uncured elastofoam flashing shall be limited to overlay vertical seams or to flash inside and outside corners, s cuppers, p ourable s ealer p ockets, prefabricated curbs, and o ther p enetrations o r unusually s haped w alls w here the u se o f cu red membrane flashing is not practical. B. Terminate t he f lashing i n acco rdance manufacturer's termination recommendations. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
with
TERMINATION
A. Where a co unter flashing is required, run the flashing up b ehind t he c ounter f lashing a nd install a bead of cut-off mastic behind the membrane at the top of the termination, a nd f asten t he m embrane using an appropriate fastener spaced twelve (12) inches on center, maximum.
3. Roll th e to p membrane s heet o nto t he m ating surface and roll th e splice w ith a tw o ( 2) in ch steel roller.
B. The E PDM m embrane m ust b e s ecured at the perimeter of each r oof l evel, r oof s ection, ex pansion joint, curb, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds two (2) inches in one horizontal foot, and at al l p enetrations i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer's r ecommendations. Additional membrane securement shall be provided by reinforced universal securement strips.
METAL FLASHINGS
3. Do not wrap Termination B ar ar ound co rners. Cut all T ermination B ar a t c orners to accommodate expansion and contraction. 4. Install sealant at top of the Termination Bar. 3.9
BALLAST INSTALLATION
A. Redistribute e xisting gravel f or ad equate s ecurement and to provide complete co verage o f t he l oose l aid EPDM membrane. B. Ballast m ust b e a dequate to provide sufficient wind uplift p rotection a nd must b e c ontinuously distributed to m aintain a m inimum o f 10 l bs./ft2 when r ounded water-worn gravel o r interlocking co ncrete p avers are specified. C. Evenly d istribute a ggregate, a nd e xtend to bottom edge of cant strips. 3.10
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s field services under provisions of Section 014300. B. The Architect or the Owner, without prior notice, shall have the right to audit all work being performed.
075320 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Although not a standard quality control procedure for this application, the Architect may require test cuts in areas where quality is in question. T he c ost o f th ese test c uts w ill b e th e r esponsibility o f th e Roofing Contractor. D. If d efects a re d etected, it w ill be the responsibility of the R oofing C ontractor t o t ake co rrective procedures. Any co rrective procedure must have prior written approval o f t he A rchitect, and the roof m aterials manufacturers. If, in t he o pinion o f t he A rchitect, o r the materials manufacturers, the corrective procedures are not appropriate, the installation in question must be removed and r eplaced in an accep table manner at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.11
CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this section, consult manufacturer o f s urfaces f or cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.12
PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic m ust c ontinue o ver f inished r oof membrane, protect surfaces with 1 /2 i nch t hick exterior g rade pl ywood s et on a m inimum 3/ 8 inch thick ex truded r ecovery b oard as p er m anufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
075320 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted
S:\11\0122\div2to33\075320CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM F. Division 2 3 - Mechanical: R oof cu rbs f or mechanical eq uipment, a nd f lashing s leeves a nd collars for m echanical i tems p rotruding t hrough roofing membrane.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
G. Division 2 6 - Electrical: Roof curbs for electrical equipment, and f lashing s leeves an d co llars f or electrical ite ms p rotruding th rough roofing membrane.
A. Conditions of th e C ontract ( General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Shop Formed Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim; PreFinished Z inc-Coated Steel Where E xposed t o View, and Zinc-Coated Steel Where Not Exposed to V iew; as I ndicated o n t he D rawings, S pecified Herein; Including Related A ccessories an d Attachments.
1.3
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for product ch aracteristics, j oint an d f astening requirements, and factory finishing.
1. Roof Drain Sheet Metal Fabrications:
C. Shop Drawings: I ndicate m aterial p rofile, dimensions, j ointing p attern, j ointing details, fastening m ethods, f lashing, t ermination, and installation details.
a. Downspouts. b. Scuppers. c. Conductor Heads.
D. Samples: S ubmit samples, minimum 6 x 6 inches, illustrating ty pical s eam, e xternal c orner, in ternal corner, junction to v ertical d issimilar s urface, material and finish.
2. Low-Slope Roof Sheet Metal Fabrications: a. Roof E dge F lashing ( Gravel S top) and Fascia Caps.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
b. Copings.
F. Warranty: S ubmit to th e Architect the written warranties specified i n t his S ection an d u nder provisions of Section 017836.
c. Base Flashing. d. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers. e. Roof-Penetration Flashing. C. Wall Flashing. D. Membrane Flashing. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: Masonry through-wall flashing. B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking. C. Section 075100 - Built-Up B ituminous R oofing: Roofing system, including flashing and accessories directly associated with roofing. D. Section 075310 a nd 075320 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Flashing and accessories. E. Section 079200 - Joint S ealers: S ealant in conjunction with metal reglets and counter flashing.
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate and install all sheet metal work, including flashing a nd sheet metal ite ms not particularly indicated on the Drawings, b ut required for finish work in acco rdance w ith t he “ Architectural S heet Metal Manual” published by t he S heet M etal an d Air C onditioning C ontractor’s N ational Association (SMACNA). B. Conduct w elding i n a ccordance w ith s tandard practices outlined in A merican W elding S ociety Code for Welding in Building Construction. Complete all weld by an A WS cer tified w elder. Submit c ertification, in cluding d ate q ualified, a nd the name o f th e firm and in dividual c ertifying the qualification tests. C. Factory shall have capability to show conformance with National Coil C oating A ssociation T echnical Bulletins for factory color-coated metal. 1. Provide f actory-applied protection f or f inished color-coated m etal b y m eans o f a strippable plastic film.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
076200 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling D. Roof sheet metal shall be resistant to corrosion.
Farmington Elementary School
1.8
A. Protection: Prevent damage to the new or existing roof, including protection from damage by ladders and other equipment. P otentially d amaging materials, s uch as m etal s craps, n ails an d s crews, acid flux, and other debris shall not be permitted to come into contact with the roof surface.
E. Protect all metals in contact with dissimilar metals or materials from galvanic action. F. Fabricator and Installer: Companies specializing in sheet m etal f lashing w ork w ith f ive (5) years documented experience. 1.5
B. Construction Schedule: I nstall sheet metal as soon as p ossible af ter r oof w ork h as b een completed. Sheet metal work shall be f ully c ompleted b y th e given completion date.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the wind loads in International Building Code.
1.6
B. Thermal M ovement: P rovide s heet m etal roofing that a llows for thermal movement r esulting from a temperature change of 120 deg. F., ambient with no buckling, o pening o f j oints, ho le e longation, joint sealant failure, or other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and shear stress as a result of movement.
1.9
C. Water P enetration: Sheet m etal f lashing and tr im shall not allow water into the building interior.
1.10
B. Provide ten ( 10) y ear co il-coating s upplier’s written warranty for K YNAR 500 c olor c oated metal finish covering c olor f ading, c halking a nd film integrity under provisions of Section 017836.
B. All m aterials s hall b e d elivered to the s ite in cartons with manufacturer’s identification labels in tact, including storage recommendations.
C. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst d efects, i nclude coverage for d egradation o f m etal f inish, w ater tightness and integrity o f s eals, a fter c ompletion and f inal accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to faulty materials o r workmanship d eveloped d uring the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner.
C. Stack p re-formed a nd pr e-finished material to prevent t wisting, b ending, o r a brasion, a nd t o provide v entilation. S lope m etal s heets to ensure drainage. D. Prevent co ntact with materials which m ay cau se discoloration or staining. E. Flammable m aterials s hall b e s tored in conformance with applicable f ire co des an d regulations in a manner that will not create a potential fire hazard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f sheet metal flashing and trim a nd o ther c onstruction to w hich s heet m etal flashing and trim m ust f it, b y a ccurate f ield measurements before f abrication; s how r ecorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication s chedule w ith c onstruction progress t o avoid delay of Work.
WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer’s written warranty covering al l s heet m etal w ork s pecified herein under provisions of Section 017836.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
COORDINATION A. Coordinate th e W ork o f th is S ection with interfacing a nd a djoining c onstruction f or proper sequencing o f each i nstallation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.
A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PREFINISHED METAL
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ryerson Metals– “Color-Klad” 2. Peterson Aluminum. – “Pac-Clad” 3. Metal-Era Roof Edge Systems. 4. Modern Metal Systems Corporation. 5. Firestone/Copper Sales, Inc. – “Una-Clad”
076200 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
Addition and Remodeling
nder pr ovisions of S ection
SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal Flashing and T rim ( Not E xposed to View): 1. Zinc-Coated S teel: C ommercial q uality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 hotdip ga lvanized, m inimum 2 4 gauge except as otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (Exposed to View From Grade Level or Upper Floors): 1. Pre-Finished Z inc-Coated S teel: Provide minimum 2 4 ga uge, ho t-dip g alvanized s teel, commercial qu ality A 1 S 1 G 90 extra smooth, primed on bot h sides a nd f inished on on e (1) side w ith 70% K YNAR based fluorocarbon coating of m inimum 0 .70 m ils to tal d ry f ilm thickness. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, f lexibility a nd lo ngevity as specified by KYNAR 500 finish supplier. a. Color: S elected b y th e A rchitect from manufacturer’s standard color range. b. Strippable c oating shall b e liq uid a pplied in the shop to the front side of the pre-finished metal to protect the finish during fabrication, shipment and field handling. This strippable coating shall be removed pr ior t o installation. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type D. Keeper Strips: Zinc coated steel, continuous strips, minimum 18 gauge t hickness, G 90 ho t-dip galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, slotted holes at maximum ten (10) inches on center and profiled as indicated on the Drawings.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
MATERIALS
AND
A. General: P rovide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding r ods, p rotective c oatings, separators, sealants, and o ther miscellaneous items as r equired f or co mplete sheet metal f lashing an d trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Same material as flashing on which they are used, type and size indicated on the Drawings, or specified h erein, u nless n oted o therwise. Fasteners exposed t o t he w eather s hall h ave neoprene w asher under heads t o ensure watertightness. M atch f inish o f exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Pop Rivets: Closed end t ype, u sed f or m etal-tometal connections where f uture d isassembly i s n ot required. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic ( chromate f ree), f ree o f s ulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Mastic Sealant: P olyisobutylene; n on-hardening, non-skinning, no n-drying, non-migrating sealant, for use at moving sheet metal joints. F. Elastomeric Sealant: G eneric t ype r ecommended by fabricator of sheet m etal an d f abricator o f components b eing s ealed; co mply w ith ASTM C920. G. Epoxy S eam S ealer: T wo-part, n on-corrosive, aluminum s eam c ementing c ompound, recommended by sheet m etal f abricator f or exterior/interior n on-moving joints, i ncluding riveted joints. H. Adhesive: Type recommended by sheet metal fabricator for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application. I. Sealing T ape: P ressure-sensitive, 1 00 p ercent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper b acking. P rovide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. J. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet m etal cl ips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with m aterial b eing in stalled, n oncorrosive, size and gauge r equired t o s uit application. K. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or other soft closed cel l m aterial r ecommended b y elastic flashing m anufacturer as f iller u nder flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. L. Roofing Cement: A STM D 2822, a sphalt, compatible with material being installed. M. Felt Underlayment: A STM D 226, T ype I I ( No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
076200 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
N. Paper S lip S heet: M inimum 5 lb ., r ed r osin building paper. 2.4
3. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, and sweat f ull o f s older, ex cept w here i nstalled t o permit expansion and contraction.
MEMBRANE FLASHING
a. Flat l ock s eams, an d l ap seams where soldered, shall lap according to pitch, but in no case less than t hree ( 3) i nches. M ake seams in direction of flow.
A. Membrane F lashing: F ully s elf-adhering, s elfhealing, composite flexible flashing, to tal 4 0 m il membrane consisting of 36 mils of pliable, highly adhesive r ubberized as phalt, co mpletely and integrally bonded to a 4 m il, h igh d ensity, c rosslaminated p olyethylene f ilm; “ Perm-A-Barrier” Wall M embrane b y W . R . G race, I nc., “ CCW TWF” b y C arlisle C oating a nd W aterproofing; or approved equal.
D. Sealant Joints: W here m ovable, n on-expansion type joints are i ndicated, or r equired f or pr oper performance of t he W ork, f orm m etal t o pr ovide for proper installation o f e lastomeric s ealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: P rovide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal, o r co rrosive s ubstrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or o ther p ermanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Flashing j oints s hall b e la pped a minimum of four (4) inches, and cem ented w ith a s uitable product as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Sheet metal termination of thru-wall flashings. 2.5
F. Solder: A STM B 32, 50 - 50 tin/lead s older with rosin flux.
FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent p ossible. C omply w ith d etails indicated on the D rawings, an d w ith ap plicable requirements o f S MACNA - “Architectural S heet Metal Manual” and o ther r ecognized i ndustry practices. F abricate f or w aterproof and weatherresistant performance; w ith e xpansion p rovisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration o f the Work. Form work to fit substrates. C omply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without e xcessive o il-canning, buckling a nd t ool marks, tr ue to lin e a nd le vels in dicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Clean material a nd tin p rior to s oldering. Solder with h eavy c oppers of blunt de sign, properly tinned before use. 2. Solder slowly with well heated coppers; heat the seams th oroughly a nd c ompletely fill with solder. Exposed s oldering w ith finish surfaces shall be neatly made full flowing and smooth. 3. Wash a cid flux with s oda solution after soldering and remove soldering flux on exposed and painted surfaces. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on e xposed-to-view s heet m etal f lashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with f lat-lock s eams. F or t in ed ges t o b e s eamed, form seams, and solder.
H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as acces sory b eing an chored o r from compatible, n on-corrosive m etal, an d i n t hickness not less than that of metal being secured.
C. Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction, and b uilding m ovement i n c ompleted W ork, without o ver-stressing th e m aterial, b reaking connections o r p roducing w rinkles a nd distortion in finished surfaces. M ake watertight and weather-resistive. 2. Where s ubject to thermal ex pansion an d contraction, attach members with clips to permit movement without da mage, or pr ovide s lotted or oversize holes w ith washers o nly, as acceptable by the Architect.
076200 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.6
ROOF DRAINAGE FABRICATIONS
SHEET
METAL
A. Downspouts: F abricate rectangular o pen-face downspouts complete with m itered e lbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Manufactured Hanger Style: ‘U’ strap.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. Parapet S cuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions r equired w ith c losure f lange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to in terior, a nd base e xtending 4 i nches beyond can t o r t apered strip into field of roof. F asten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. C. Conductor Heads: F abricate conductor heads with flanged b ack an d s tiffened t op e dge a nd of dimensions an d s hape i ndicated complete with outlet tu bes, e xterior f lange tr im a nd b uilt-in overflows. 2.7
LOW-SLOPE ROOF FABRICATIONS
SHEET
C. Verify r oofing te rmination a nd b ase f lashing is in place, sealed, and secure. D. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions. 3.2
A. Contact b etween d issimilar m etals s hall r eceive a protective coating of asphalt p aint f or th e prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. B. Field m easure s ite c onditions p rior to f abricating work.
METAL
C. Install s tarter a nd e dge s trips, and continuous keeper strips before starting installation.
A. Roof E dge F lashing ( Gravel S top) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. F urnish with 6inch- wide joint cover plates. B. Copings: F abricate in minimum 96-inch-long, b ut not e xceeding 10-foot-- long, s ections. Fabricate joint p lates o f s ame t hickness a s c opings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. C. Base Flashing: D. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: F. Roof-Drain Flashing: 2.8
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Openings F lashing i n F rame Construction: Fabricate h ead, s ill, j amb a nd similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. F orm head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high end dams. Drips are to be hemmed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, s leeves, ducts, or v ents th rough r oof a re s olidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
PREPARATION
D. Install flexible f lashing m embrane o ver to p o f fascia, coping areas, and other locations required in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other c omponents of the W ork s ecurely i n p lace, with p rovisions f or th ermal a nd structural movement. Use fasteners, s older, w elding r ods, protective coatings, s eparators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: W here d issimilar m etals w ill contact each other o r co rrosive s ubstrates, p rotect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with b ituminous c oating or by o ther p ermanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed s heet m etal f lashing a nd tr im without excessive oil c anning, b uckling, a nd t ool marks in conformance with SMACNA guidelines. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. P rovide uniform, neat seams with minimum e xposure of s older, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to r esult in w atertight p erformance. Verify shapes an d d imensions o f s urfaces t o be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cl eats n ot m ore than 12 i nches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
076200 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
F. Expansion P rovisions: P rovide f or thermal expansion of e xposed f lashing a nd t rim. S pace movement j oints a t a ma ximum o f 10 feet with no joints a llowed w ithin 24 i nches of corner o r intersection. W here l apped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked f langes, no t l ess t han 1 i nch deep, f illed w ith el astomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch or wood screws. 1. Galvanized o r P repainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: U se a luminum o r stainless steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper or stainless steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: C lean s urfaces t o b e s oldered, removing o ils a nd f oreign matter. P retin edges of sheets t o be s oldered t o a w idth of 1-1/2 i nches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not s older p repainted, m etallic-coated s teel sheet. 2. Pretinning is no t r equired f or z inc-tin a lloycoated stainless steel. 3.4
ROOF DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SYSTEM
A. General: I nstall sheet metal roof drainage items to produce c omplete r oof dr ainage system acco rding to SMACNA r ecommendations an d as i ndicated. Coordinate in stallation o f r oof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Downspouts: J oin s ections w ith 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. P rovide f asteners d esigned to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at t op an d b ottom an d at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. C. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to co rrect el evation, and s eal f langes to in terior wall f ace, o ver can ts o r t apered ed ge strips, and under roofing membrane. 076200 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
D. Conductor H eads: A nchor s ecurely to w all w ith elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below scupper d ischarge. Turn l eading e dge o f scupper down over conductor rim and hem. 3.5
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: I nstall sheet metal roof flashing and trim to co mply w ith p erformance r equirements and SMACNA's " Architectural S heet Met al M anual." Provide co ncealed f asteners w here possible, set units tr ue to lin e, an d l evel as i ndicated. Install work with laps, joints, and s eams th at w ill b e permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing: A nchor to r esist u plift a nd outward forces in accordance with specified Performance Requirements. 1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cl eats an chored t o s ubstrate at 24inch on centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist u plift and outward forces in acco rdance w ith s pecified P erformance Requirements. 1. Interlock exterior b ottom e dge o f c oping w ith continuous cl eats an chored t o s ubstrate at 16inch on centers. 2. Anchor i nterior l eg o f c oping with screw fasteners and washers at 18-inch on centers. D. Counterflashing: C oordinate in stallation o f counterflashing with installation o f b ase f lashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to b ase f lashing. S ecure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: C oordinate installation of r oof-penetration f lashing with installation o f roofing and other items p enetrating r oof. I nstall flashing as follows: 1. Turn l ead f lashing d own i nside vent piping, being careful not t o b lock ve nt p iping w ith flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to p ipes p enetrating r oof ex cept f or l ead flashing on vent piping.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
3.6
Addition and Remodeling
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: I nstall s heet m etal w all f lashing to intercept an d ex clude p enetrating moisture according t o S MACNA r ecommendations an d as indicated. Coordinate installation o f wall f lashing with installation of wall-opening components s uch as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.7
INSTALLATION A. Membrane: Cover parapet walls and treated nailers with roofing membrane. F ollow m embrane manufacturer’s recommendations 1. Install roofing membrane up and over the top of the wall and down outside face of wall, covering nailer completely. A llow 1 /2 in ch e xcess membrane b elow th e n ailer, tr imming membrane if necessary. 2. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams which will b e p ermanently w eathertight a nd waterproof. 3. Install m embrane f lashing i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.8
CLEANING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which m ight cau se co rrosion o f m etal o r deterioration of finishes.
3.9
PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect f lashing a nd s heet metal work during construction t o e nsure t hat W ork w ill b e without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
076200 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
076200 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0122\div2to33\076200CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING C. Fire-Rated C onstruction J oints: International Building Code, 2000 E dition, Section 713 - “FireResistant Joint Systems”.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
D. Inspections p er A STM E 2174, “ Standard P ractice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops.” 1.4
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Fire-Stopping S ystems U sed F or Sealing All Penetrations Through Fire-Rated Assemblies o r at Periphery of Fire-Rated Construction; Including Pipes, Ducts, Conduits, Cable Trays, Structural Members, Intersections Between Walls and Floors, and All Other Openings a s R equired b y the 2006 International Building C ode Minnesota Amendments.
B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate each co ndition an d location r equiring p enetration s eals, U L s ystems material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings, and methods of installation. C. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system i ndicating m anufacturer-approved modifications. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for all materials and prefabricated d evices, p roviding descriptions sufficient for id entification a t P roject Site. Provide data o n p roduct ch aracteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C. Fire-Stopping S ealant F or A ll C onstruction Joints in Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions a s R equired b y International Building Code. D. Labeling Fire-Stop Penetrations. 1.2
E. Installer Certification: P rovide c ertification b y manufacturer that installer is c ertified, tr ained and/or approved b y m anufacturer to in stall its products.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete floor openings requiring fire-stopping.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate preparation an d i nstallation p rocedures f or each type of product.
C. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: Concrete masonry units walls requiring firestopping, and fire-stopping s ealant a t a ll c onstruction joints in fire-rated walls.
G. Submit material safety data s heets ( MSDS) f or each firestop product.
D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud partitions and g ypsum b oard r equiring firestopping, and f irestopping s ealant a t a ll construction joints in fire-rated partitions.
H. Certification: S ubmit m anufacturer’s letter of certification th at th e m aterials o r c ombination of materials meet the requirements specified in ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire-Stop Systems.
E. Division 2 3-25, 27 -28 - Mechanical: Mech anical work requiring firestopping.
1. Provide directory listing number and number of each s ystem t o b e u sed acco rding to location types.
F. Division 26 - Electrical: E lectrical work requiring firestopping. 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fireproofing Materials: A STM E 119 an d A STM E814 to achieve a fire rating as noted on Drawings. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread of less then 25. 2. Smoke Development Rating of less then 450.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
SUBMITTALS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and T emperature ( T) r atings as r equired b y the International Building C ode and as t ested b y nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or U L 1 479 f ire te sts. T he F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance r ating o f the assembly b eing p enetrated. T rating, when required by code authority, shall be based on measurement of t he t emperature r ise o n 078400 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
the p enetrating ite m(s). T he f ire te st shall be conducted with a m inimum p ositive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.
1.8
A. Sequence work to permit f irestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.
B. Fire-stopping material shall be as bestos f ree, f ree of any PCB’s, and lead free. C. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal.
1.9
1.10
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst d efects, i nclude coverage f or f irestopping t o r emain f ree from cracking, c hecking, d usting, flaking, spalling, separation and blistering, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. D efects d ue t o f aulty materials or w orkmanship d eveloped d uring t he guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
G. Engineering J udgment: F or s pecial s ituations not covered b y e xisting U L systems, r equire engineering judgment to m eet f ire co de requirements. Engineering J udgment t o have approval of local code official before installation.
B. Deliver materials in th e m anufacturer’s o riginal, unopened containers or packages with manufacturer’s name, product id entification, lo t numbers, U L l abels, an d mixing a nd in stallation instructions, as applicable. C. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or p ackages, an d u nder conditions recommended by the manufacturer. D. All f ire-stop materials s hall b e in stalled p rior to expiration date of shelf life. 1.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect products under provisions of Section 016000.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not ap ply m aterials w hen t emperature o f substrate m aterial an d am bient air is b elow 6 0 degrees F.
WARRANTY
A. Provide f ive ( 5) y ear m anufacturer's w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
F. Equipment used s hall b e i n acco rdance w ith f irestopping m anufacturer’s w ritten in stallation instructions.
1.6
PROTECTION A. Where f ire-stopping is installed a t lo cations which will remain exposed in th e completed w ork, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and f inishes, an d p rotect as necessary ag ainst d amage f rom o ther construction activities.
D. Single Source Limitations: Obtain all fire-stopping systems for the Project through o ne source from a single manufacturer. E. Contractor performing Firestopping shall be trained and c ertified or a pproved by t he f irestopping manufacturer. C ontractor s hall s pecialize i n firestop a pplication, and h ave ex perience i n similar applications and projects. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation procedures.
SEQUENCING
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRESTOPPING A. Subject t o compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. RectorSeal, Inc. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products. 3. Grace Construction, Fire-Stopping Systems. 4. Johns Manville, Fire Stopping Products. 5. Nelson Fire-Stop Products. 6. Hilti Corporation, Fire-Stopping Systems. 7. TREMCO Fire-Stopping Systems. B. Substitutions: 016000.
Under pr ovisions of S ection
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for three (3) days after installation of materials. C. Provide v entilation in cured materials. 078400 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
areas t o r eceive solvent
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.2
Addition and Remodeling
MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fire-stopping m aterials s hall b e a sbestos-free an d capable of maintaining an ef fective b arrier ag ainst flame, smoke an d g ases i n co mpliance w ith requirements of ASTM E814.
3.1
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. The r ating of t he f ire-stops shall be in no case less than the rating of the time-rated floor, roof or wall assembly.
B. Verify with mechanical and el ectrical f or al l openings and penetrations required to be sealed.
B. Fire-Stopping Systems: M aterial systems r equired for sealing f ire-rated w all an d f loor p enetrations greater than one (1) inch in size.
C. Examine penetrations, all surfaces and openings to receive fire-stopping, with Installer present, for compliance w ith r equirements for c onfigurations, installation to lerances a nd o ther c onditions affecting fi re-stopping performance. D o n ot proceed with in stallation o f f ire-stopping u ntil unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Seal tops of walls, including the space between the flutes of the metal roof deck. C. Fire-Stopping Sealant: O ne-part el astomeric sealant f ormulated f or u se as p art of a throughpenetration f ire-stop s ystem f or se aling openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through rated w alls a nd f loors, T CA listed by UL. 1. Use at p enetrations t hrough f loors a nd o ther fire-rated as semblies w here v oids ar e o ne ( 1) inch or less in size. 2. Use at construction joints at fire-rated walls and partitions at concrete m asonry u nit w alls a nd gypsum board partitions. D. Primer: T ype r ecommended by f irestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. E. Intumescent F ire-Stop Sealant: One p art, acr ylic sealant, v irtually o dorless, c ontains n o v olatile solvents, no n-sag, gun gr ade, expands w hen exposed to heat a nd pr otects c ombustible penetrations. F. Provide all fire-stop mortars, caulks, sealant, putty, collars, m astic, w rap s trips an d o ther p roducts as recommended b y t he M anufacturer n ecessary t o complete the project in an approved manner. 2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Dam M aterial: M ineral f iber m atting p ermanent, or other type recommended by manufacturer. 1. Retainers: matting.
C lips to s upport m ineral f iber
B. Primer, Sealant and S olvent C leaner: T recommended by manufacturer.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
ypes
EXAMINATION
3.2
CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRE-STOP A. General: 1. Provide f ire-stopping f or c onditions specified whether or not fire-stopping is indicated, and, if indicated, whether s uch m aterial i s d esignated as insulation, safing, or otherwise. 2. Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be installed in lieu of fire-stopping material specified herein. B. Building Exterior Perimeters: 1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous p ast a s tructural f loor, and a space would otherwise remain open between the inner face o f the wall construction an d the outer perimeter edge of t he s tructural f loor, p rovide fire-stopping to e qual th e f ire resistance of the floor assembly. Mineral wool by itself is not an acceptable fire-stop, neither is mineral wool used with beads o f c aulking a pplied a long length o f m ineral wool/curtain w all o r m ineral wool/floor s lab j unctures. I f m ineral wool is part o f fi re-stop s ystem, th e mineral wool must be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL listed Fire-Stop Sealant. 2. Fire-stopping shall be pr ovided w hether or not there ar e an y c lips, angles, plates o r o ther members bridging or interconnecting the facing and f loor s ystems, a nd w hether or not such items are continuous.
078400 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 3. Where an exterior w all o f co mposite t ype construction p asses a p erimeter s tructural member, s uch as a g irder, b eam, o r s trut, a nd the f inish o n th e in terior w all f ace d oes not continue up t oo c lose with t he underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fireresistive in tegrity o f th e w all s ystem, a nd a space would otherwise remain open between the interior f ace o f the wall an d lower edge of the structural m ember, p rovide fire-stopping t o continuously fill such open space. C. Interior Walls and Partitions:
Farmington Elementary School 5. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with e scutcheons o r o ther tr im. I f penetrations are s leeved, f irestop an nular s pace - if a ny between sleeve and wall of opening. E. Provide f ire-stopping to f ill m iscellaneous v oids and openings in fire-rated construction in a manner essentially the same as specified herein before. 3.3
A. Surface Cleaning of Fire-Stopping: C lean out joints and other areas o f a pplication im mediately before in stalling f ire-stopping to c omply w ith recommendations of manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Where a w all o r p artition is c ontinuous p ast a structural f loor, s uch a s a s tairwell o r vertical shaft, and a space would otherwise remain open between the wall face and perimeter edge of the adjoining structural floor, provide fire-stopping.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint and opening s ubstrates w hich c ould i nterfere with adhesion of fire-stopping, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant ad hesion an compatibility by manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; g rease; w aterproofing; w ater repellents; water; surface dirt and frost.
2. Provide f ire-stopping w hether o r no t t here a re any cl ips, an gles, p lates, o r other members bridging o r i nterconnecting th e w all a nd f loor systems, an d w hether o r n ot s uch i tems are continuous. 3. Where the t op ed ge o f a f ire-rated w all o r partition a buts a nd is a t r ight a ngles to flutedtype metal decking, the construction is such that would otherwise leave th e f lute s paces o pen, provide fire-stopping.
2. Clean porous joint and opening substrate surfaces, by b rushing, gr inding, b last c leaning, mechanical abrading, or a co mbination of these methods t o p roduce a cl ean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. R emove lo ose p articles r emaining from above c leaning o perations b y va cuuming or b lowing o ut j oints w ith oil-free c ompressed air.
D. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations i nclude co nduit, cable, w ire, p ipe, duct, or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a f ire-rated floor, wall or partition.
3. Remove laitance an d f orm r elease ag ents f rom concrete.
2. Except for floors on grade, where a p enetration occurs t hrough a s tructural floor o r r oof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining s tructural f loor or r oof, pr ovide f irestopping to fill such spaces in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL 2079 f or dy namic movement.
3.4
3. Where penetrations o ccur at fire-rated walls or partitions of s olid ty pe c onstruction, p rovide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration in accordance with ASTM E814.
3.5
4. Where penetrations o ccur at fire-rated walls or partitions o f h ollow ty pe c onstruction, provide fire-stopping to c ompletely f ill s paces a round the p enetration, o n each s ide o f t he w all o r partition, in accordance with ASTM E814.
078400 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES A. Protect surfaces not scheduled for fire-stopping and equipment from damage by fall-out and dusting. B. Close off and s eal d uctwork i n ar eas w here f irestopping is being applied. INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Apply f ire-stops i n acco rdance w ith f ire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, an d m anufacturer’s recommendations.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 2. Coordinate w ith p lumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cab le, and o ther items which penetrate fire related construction have been permanently installed p rior to in stallation o f fire-stops, schedule and sequence the w ork t o as sure t hat partitions a nd o ther c onstruction which w ould conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of fire-stops.
Addition and Remodeling
3.6
A. Identify t hrough-penetration f irestop s ystems w ith pressure-sensitive, s elf-adhesive, preprinted v inyl labels. Attach labels p ermanently t o s urfaces o f penetrated co nstruction o n b oth s ides o f each firestop system installation w here la bels w ill b e visible to anyone s eeking t o r emove p enetrating items o r f irestop s ystems. Include the following information on labels:
3. Follow s afety p rocedures r ecommended i n the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
1. The w ords: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop S ystem--Do N ot D isturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
B. Procedures and Preparations:
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
1. Verify th at s ubstrates to r eceive f ire-stopping are prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and are free of materials which may prevent adequate adhesion.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation.
2. Manufacturer’s representative m ust m ake periodic visits to verify proper materials. 3. Certification: M anufacturer’s r epresentative must provide written report to the Architect that all materials have been installed in accordance with specification requirements.
5. Through-penetration f manufacturer's name.
3.7
2. Conventional t esting a nd i nspection s ervices herein d escribe t hose i tems n ot specifically required by the 2006 IBC as am ended b y the 2007 Minnesota S tate B uilding C ode, b ut ar e considered es sential to t he p roper performance of the building systems. 3. If tests indicate W ork d oes n ot m eet s pecified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
ystem
CLEANING A. Clean o ff ex cess f irestopping an d f irestopping smears a s w ork p rogresses b y methods and with cleaning m aterials ap proved b y m anufacturers o f products in which firestopping occurs.
1. Install dams when required to properly contain fire-stopping materials w ithin o penings a nd a s required t o ach ieve f ire-resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after ap propriate cu ring. Incombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the fire-stop system. 1. Field testing a nd in spection s hall b e p erformed by the applicable Code authorities.
irestop s
6. Installer's name.
C. Dam Construction:
D. Field Quality Control:
IDENTIFICATION
B. Leave f inished w ork i n neat, clean condition with no ev idence o f s pill-over o r d amage t o ad jacent surfaces. 3.8
PROTECTION A. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact w ith c ontaminating s ubstances o r from damage resulting f rom c onstruction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage a t tim e o f S ubstantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or d eteriorated f irestopping i mmediately an reseal joints with new m aterials to p roduce f irestopping installations w ith r epaired a reas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
078400 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
078400 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\078400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALERS G. Section 083300 – Coiling D oors a nd G rilles: Sealant used in conjunction with coiling doors and grilles.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
H. Section 084100 - Aluminum E ntrances a nd Storefront: S ealant u sed i n co njunction w ith aluminum door and window frames.
A. Conditions o f t he C ontract ( General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements ( Sections o f Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
I. Section 085113 – Aluminum W indows: S ealant used in conjunction with aluminum windows.
B. Preparing S ubstrate S urfaces t o R eceive Sealant and Joint Backing Materials.
J. Section 086250 – Tubular Skylights: S ealant used in conjunction with tubular skylights.
C. Exterior and Interior Joint Sealant and Gaskets; as Indicated o n t he D rawings, S pecified H erein; Including Joint Backing Materials and Accessories.
K. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Sealant used in conjunction with glazing.
D. Sealant Types:
L. .Section 0930 00 - Tiling: S conjunction with tile finishes.
1. Butyl Sealant.
M. Section 321313 - Exterior Concrete Pavement: Sealant used in conjunction with exterior concrete.
2. Acrylic Latex Sealant. 3. Silicone Building Sealant. 4. Silicone Glazing a Adhesive/Sealant.
nd
Curtain W
5. Silicone Elastomeric Restoration/Coating Sealant Strip.
all
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
Sealant
6. Polyurethane Sealant. 7. Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal). 8. Polyurethane Sealant (Vehicle Traffic). 9. Acoustical Sealant E. Joint Gasket Types: 1. Pre-Compressed Foam Gasket/Sealant. 1.2
ealant u sed i n
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: S ealant used in conjunction with concrete. B. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystem: S ealant used in conjunction with unit masonry. C. Section 074616- Wall Panel System - Sealant used in conjunction with building panels. D. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealant used in conjunction with metal flashing for roofing. E. Section 078400 – Firestopping: S ealants for firestopping penetrations.
B. Product D ata: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata indicating s ealant c hemical ch aracteristics, performance cr iteria, s ubstrate preparation, limitations, a nd c olor a vailability for e ach j oint sealer p roduct r equired, in cluding i nstructions f or joint preparation and joint sealer application. 1. Provide product t est r eports f or e ach t ype of joint s ealer i ndicated, ev idencing co mpliance with specified requirements. C. Samples for I nitial S election P urposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips o f a ctual p roducts s howing full r ange o f colors available, for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color o f j oint s ealer r equired. I nstall j oint sealer samples i n 1/ 2 i nch wide j oints formed be tween two (2) s ix ( 6) in ch lo ng s trips o f material matching t he ap pearance o f ex posed s urfaces adjacent to joint sealers. E. Installer Q ualifications: S ubmit d ata i ndicating compliance with r equirements s pecified b elow. Include lis t of c ompleted projects with project name a nd ad dress, n ames o f A rchitects an d Owners, plus other information specified.
F. Section 081100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Sealant used in conjunction with steel doorframes.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
079200 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling F. Compatibility a nd Adhesion Test Reports: Where sealant will b e a pplied b etween d issimilar materials, n on-typical m aterials, u nder u nusual conditions or under conditions not normally recommended b y the sealant manufacturer, submit the following: 1. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting t hat t heir p roducts c omply with specification r equirements an d ar e s uitable f or the use indicated. 2. Compatibility a nd Adhesion Test Re ports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials f orming j oint substrates a nd j oint sealant b ackings h ave b een t ested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealant. 3. Stain T est R eport f rom s ealant manufacturer indicating t hat s ealants ha ve b een t ested a nd comply with specifications a nd i ndustry standards for non-staining sealants. 4. Sealant manufacturer's i nterpretation o f t est results r elative t o s ealant performance a nd recommendations for pr imers a nd substrate preparation n eeded t o obtain a dhesion t o t he intended substrates. G. Submit p re-construction field te st r eports indicating which p roducts a nd j oint p reparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Joint sealers are required to establish and maintain waterproof co ntinuous s eals during t he s pecified warranty p eriod within r ecognized l imitations o f wear and aging indicated for each application. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer w ho h as successfully c ompleted within th e last five (5) years at least five (5) joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. C. Single S ource Responsibility for J oint S ealer Materials: Obtain each type of joint sealer material from a single manufacturer. D. Pre-Construction Co mpatibility a nd Adhesion Testing: Submit sample o f a ll materials th at will contact o r af fect j oint s ealers t o joint s ealer manufacturers for compatibility and adhesion testing, as indicated below: 1. Use manufacturer’s s tandard t est methods t o determine i f p riming an d o ther s pecific j oint preparation t echniques ar e r equired t o o btain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealers to joint substrates.
079200 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School a. Perform t ests under no rmal environmental conditions t hat will e xist during a ctual installation. 2. Submit n ot le ss t han nine ( 9) p ieces o f each type of materials, including joint substrates, shims, j oint s ealant b ackings, s econdary s eals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work. 4. Investigate materials failing c ompatibility or adhesion te sts a nd o btain j oint s ealer manufacturer's written r ecommendations f or corrective measures, including u se o f specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will n ot b e r equired w hen j oint s ealer manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data r equired ab ove w hich i s accep table t o Architect a nd is b ased o n p revious te sting o f current sealant p roducts f or a dhesion t o, a nd compatibility with, j oint s ubstrates a nd o ther materials matching those submitted. E. Product T esting: P rovide c omprehensive t est d ata for each t ype o f j oint sealer b ased o n t ests conducted b y a q ualified i ndependent t esting laboratory on current product formulations within a twenty-four ( 24) m onth pe riod pr eceding da te of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. 1. Test el astomeric s ealant for co mpliance with requirements s pecified b y r eference t o ASTM C920. I nclude t est r esults f or h ardness, st ain resistance ( per A STM C 1248), a dhesion an d cohesion un der c yclic movement ( per ASTM C719), low-temperature f lexibility, modulus of elasticity at 1 00 p ercent s train, e ffects o f h eat aging, a nd e ffects o f accel erated weathering (ASTM C793). F. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: W here elastomeric s ealants ar e s pecified t o b e n onstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and ha ve not s tained p orous j oint s ubstrates indicated for Project. G. Paintability: Where painting of sealant is required, verify with s ealant manufacturer, t hat s ealant is compatible with the specific paint. H. Suitability for I mmersion i n L iquids: W here sealants ar e i ndicated t o b e i mmersed i n l iquids, provide pr oducts t hat have be en t ested i n accordance with ASTM C1247 and are suitable for immersion in intended liquids. JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
I. At Contractors o ption, p rovide s ealants o f contrasting c olor for c oncealed j oints i n CMU for verification o f work c ompletion. O ther lo cations will b e c onsidered b y t he Architect upon written request. 1.5
C. Joint Substrate C onditions: D o not proceed w ith installation o f j oint s ealers u ntil c ontaminants capable o f i nterfering with t heir ad hesion ar e removed from joint substrates. 1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when substrates are wet.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, h andle and pr otect products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
1.7
A. Provide manufacturer's w ritten w arranty un der provisions of Section 017836.
B. Deliver materials t o site in o riginal u nopened containers of bundles with l abels i nforming a bout manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Warranty: A ll materials an d workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst d efects, include coverage for i nstalled s ealant a nd acces sories which fail to achieve air tight seal, and water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure, after completion an d final accep tance of t he Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship d eveloped d uring t he g uarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
C. Store a nd h andle materials in c ompliance with manufacturers' r ecommendations t o p revent t heir deterioration or da mage du e to moisture, h igh or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. D. Damaged or otherwise u nsuitable materials, when so ascertained, shall be immediately removed from the j ob s ite, an d r eplaced at no ad ditional co st t o the Owner. 1.6
1. Provide two (2) y ear warranty for A crylic Latex. 2. Provide t wenty ( 20) year warranty for S ilicone Sealant and Adhesive.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental C onditions: Do n ot pr oceed with installation o f j oint s ealers when a mbient a nd substrate t emperature co nditions ar e o utside t he limits recommended by joint sealer manufacturer’s published r ecommendations o r w hen j oint substrates a re wet d ue to r ain, s now, f rost, condensation o r o ther ca uses ex cept as p rovided below: 1. Installation o f j oint s ealants in temperature conditions o utside th e li mits o f th e Manufacturer’s p ublished recommendations may occur only if the Installer provides a l etter to t he Architect from t he M anufacturer authorizing i nstallation u nder r evised a mbient and s ubstrate t emperature l imits. T he l etter shall indicate the date the letter is effective, the specific accepted revised ambient and substrate temperature c onditions, a nd c ertification t hat the s ealant warranty will r emain i n ef fect i f installation i s pe rformed within t he r evised limits. B. Joint W idth C onditions: D o n ot p roceed w ith installation of j oint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
WARRANTY
3. Provide five (5) year warranty for Polyurethane Sealant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - JOINT SEALANT A. Subject to c ompliance with requirements, pr ovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. BOSTIK Sealant Systems. 2. Carlisle QSC. 3. Dow Corning Silicone Sealant. 4. General Electric Silicone Sealant. 5. PECORA Corporation. 6. SIKA Sealant Systems. 7. BASF. 8. TREMCO Sealant Systems. 9. TREMCO - VULKEM. B. Substitutions: 016000.
Under pr ovisions of S ection
079200 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
2.2
JOINT SEALANT A. Butyl Sealant: ASTM D2377 and ASTM D1311; Type S , n on-sag, no n-hardening, s olvent r elease cure, p olymerized b utyl sealant meeting FS T T-S001657 for Type I and formulated with minimum 75% s olids; n on-staining, p aintable a nd permanently t acky. [Use f or polyethylene v apor retarder s eals, wood, co ncrete, metals an d r oof drains w here m ovement is g reat and also w here acoustical s ound r eduction r equired. E xcellent i n shear walls where there is continuous movement.] 1. PECORA – BC-158 (skinning butyl) 2. PECORA – BA-98 (non-skinning butyl). 3. TREMCO-Butyl Sealant. 4. Substitutions: U nder p rovisions o f S ection 016000. B. Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834-86, non-sag, gun-grade, s ingle co mponent acr ylic l atex sealing compound, mildew-resistant. Color as selected by Architect f rom s tandard colors. [Use f or s ealing interior j oints th at a re to r eceive p aint a nd n ot subject to movement.]
Farmington Elementary School D. Silicone Glazing and Curtain Wall Adhesive/Sealant: FS T T-S-00227E; A STM C920, Type M , G rade N S; n eutral, multiple component s ilicone glazing an d c urtain wall adhesive/sealant, hi gh m odulus, no n-sag, g ungrade. Color selected by Architect from standard colors. [Use f or g lazing a nd a nodized a luminum application.] 1. DOW CORNING 983. 2. PECORA – 985. 3. TREMCO – Proglaze II 4. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000. E. Silicone Elastomeric Restoration/Coating Sealant Strip: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS; Ready t o u se, s ingle co mponent, water b ased silicone sealant. Color selected by Architect from standard c olors. [Use f or c oncrete b lock, f luted block, brick, and previously coated masonry joints. Used in conjunction with DOW 795 or 791.] 1. BASF – SONOLASTIC 150 VLM (hybrid, low VOC, non-sag, non-staining)
1. BASF - SONOLASTIC SONOLAC.
2. DOW CORNING 123.
2. BOSTIK - CHEM-CALK 600.
3. PECORA – SIL-SPAN.
3. PECORA AC-20.
4. TREMCO – Simple Seal.
4. TREMCO - TREMFLEX 834.
5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000. C. Silicone Building Sealant: A STM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; one part silicone formulation, can acco mmodate +/ - 50 pe rcent m ovement, Hardness S hore A of 30, s pecial t wenty ( 20) year limited warranty. Color selected by Architect from standard c olors. [Use for s tructural and nonstructural g lazing o f glass, metal a nd p lastic; adhering s tiffeners t o b uilding p anels, p erimeter sealing of doors and windows, etc.] 1. DOW CORNING 795. 2. PECORA 895 NST. 3. TREMCO - SPECTREM 2. 4. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
079200 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
F. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M , Grade N S, Cl ass 2 5; non-sag, gu n-grade, l ow modules, c hemical curing, no n-staining, twocomponent polyurethane s ealant with m ovement capability o f +/ - 50 p ercent. Color as s elected b y Architect from standard colors. [For exterior joints exposed t o v iew where nor mal movement is anticipated; such a s masonry c ontrol j oints, window and door perimeters, louvers, relief angles, slip joints, copings, joints in wall sheathing, etc.] 1. PECORA - DYNATROL II. 2. SIKA - SIKAFLEX 2C NS. 3. BASF - SONOLASTIC NP 2. 4. TREMCO – DyMeric 240/240FC. 5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
Farmington Elementary School G. Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal, Except for Vehicle Traffic Areas): ASTM C 920, Type M , Grade P, Class 25; one or two-component, non-sag, self leveling pourable moisture curing polyurethane sealant w ith movement c apability of +/- 25 percent. Color as selected by Architect from standard colors. [Use for horizontal surface joints; such as concrete floor and paving j oints, slab/wall junctions, etc.]
Addition and Remodeling
2.3
A. Acoustical Sealant: N on-skinning, no n-hardening, non-staining, permanently flexible sealant designed specifically f or s ealing d rywall p artitions to li mit the transmission of sound. To be used in concealed areas o nly. Products are t o have flame-spread an d smoke-developed i ndexes of l ess t han 25 pe r ASTM E84.
1. BASF- SONOLASTIC SL 2.
1. PECORA - AC-20. FTR.
2. PECORA - DYNATRED.
2. SHEETROCK A coustical S ealant – Gypsum Comp.
3. TREMCO - THC-900 (for joint slopes of 5% or less).
4. TREMCO ACOUSTICAL SEALANT. 5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000. 2.4
JOINT GASKET A. Pre-Compressed Foam Gasket: Open cel l foamed pol yurethane s trips s aturated with polybutylene waterproofing m aterial. Adhesive used to adhere sealing gaskets to surfaces approved by m anufacturers of s ealing g askets. [Use a t exterior or interior joints one (1) inch and wider in concrete or masonry.] 1. EM-SEAL - GREYFLEX.
1. BASF – Sonolastic SL-2.
2. MM SYSTEMS – EFB FOAM JOINT.
2. PECORA – NR-200, Traffic Grade.
3. SANDELL - POLYSEAL.
3. PECORA - UREXPAN NR-201 (one part, selfleveling, traffic grade)
4. TREMCO-ILLMOD 600. 5. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
4. SIKA - SIKAFLEX 2C SL. 5. TREMCO - VULKEM 45 S SL {gun grade, semi-self-leveling}. 6. TREMCO - VULKEM 4 5 {Poured, selfleveling}. 7. TREMCO - THC-900 {multi component, for joint slopes of 5% or less}. 8. TREMCO - THC-901 {multi component, for joint slopes greater than 5%}. 9. Substitutions: U nder pr ovisions of S ection 016000.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
U.S.
3. PECORA - BA-98 (for concealed joints only).
4. TREMCO - THC-901 ( for j oint s lopes g reater than 5%).
H. Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal, Vehicle Traffic Construction/Control Joints): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 12-1/2 or 25; multi-component, s elf l eveling pou rable moisture curing polyurethane sealant. Shore A Hardness 37 minimum after fourteen (14) day cure at 70 degrees F. C olor as selected b y Architect from s tandard colors. [Use for horizontal surface j oints; such a s concrete f loor an d p aving j oints, s lab/wall junctions, etc.]
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - JOINT ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
2.5
ACCESSORIES A. Generally: P rovide sealant acces sories t hat ar e non-staining and co mpatible with specific sealants as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. B. Joint C leaner: N on-corrosive and non-staining type, as r ecommended b y s ealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Primer: Non-staining type. For all Sealants, prime surfaces acco rding t o Man ufacturer’s recommendations f or s ubstrate an d sealant application.
079200 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling D. Joint B acker Rod: D esigned f or us e with c old applied jo int s ealant complying with ASTM C1330. P rovide ba cker r od of size a nd t ype as approved by joint-sealant m anufacturer for jo int design. 1. Type C: Cl osed c ell polyethylene r od, where off gassing is acceptable. 2. Type O : O pen cel l material where no o ff gassing i s a llowed. N ot s uitable for horizontal surfaces. 3. Type B: Bi-cellular material with surface skin. E. Bond B reaker: P ressure s ensitive t ape recommended b y s ealant manufacturer t o s uit application. F. Provide o ther materials as r ecommended b y t he sealant manufacturer for proper sealant installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine j oints i ndicated t o r eceive j oints s ealers, with I nstaller p resent for co mpliance with requirements for j oint c onfigurations, installation tolerances a nd o ther c onditions a ffecting j oint sealer performance. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. B. Do n ot p roceed width in stallation o f j oint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Prior to in stallation, for a ll s ealants, v erify with Sealant M anufacturer t hat sealant i s co mpatible with each substrate where sealant is to be applied. B. Surface C leaning o f J oints: C lean o ut j oints immediately b efore in stalling j oint s ealers to comply with r ecommendations o f j oints s ealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove a ll foreign material f rom j oint substrates which c ould in terfere with a dhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, p rotective co atings t ested an d approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by s ealant manufacturer; o ld j oint s ealers; o il; grease; w aterproofing; w ater repellents; w ater; surface dirt and frost.
079200 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School 2. Clean concrete, masonry, u nglazed s urfaces o f ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrates, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a co mbination of these methods t o pr oduce a c lean, s ound s ubstrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particle remaining from above c leaning ope rations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean m etal, g lass, porcelain enamel, g lazed surfaces o r cer amic t ile an d o ther n onporous surfaces b y c hemical c leaners o r o ther means which a re n ot h armful to s ubstrates o r le ave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. C. Joint P riming: P rime j oint s ubstrates where indicated o r where r ecommended b y j oint s ealer manufacturer ba sed on pr e-construction j oint sealer-substrate tests o r p rior ex perience. Apply primer to comply w ith joint s ealer m anufacturer's recommendations. C onfine primers t o ar eas o f joint s ealer b ond, d o n ot a llow spillage o r migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent co ntact of sealant with ad joining s urfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged b y s uch c ontact or by c leaning methods required t o r emove s ealant s mears. R emove t ape immediately a fter to oling without d isturbing j oint seal. E. Back-Up Material: 1. Verify c ompatibility o f back-up m aterial w ith sealant before installation. 2. Use b ack-up material 2 5 p ercent wider t han width o f j oint to p rovide s ubstantial r esistance to displacement. F. Release Agent: Apply r elease ag ent o r b ond breaker strip to joint to be sealed on top of back-up material to p revent ad hesion of sealant to b ack-up material per manufacturer’s recommendations. G. Prior to beginning i nstallation o f sealant, I nstaller shall identify all weeps and drainage ways in areas where s ealant is to b e a pplied. I nstaller s hall b e responsible to ensure that weeps and drainage ways remain o pen a fter c ompletion o f in stallation o f sealants.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
Farmington Elementary School
3.3
Addition and Remodeling 1. Provide appropriate concave joint configuration as indicated i n ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLATION A. General: C omply with j oint s ealer manufacturers' printed in stallation i nstructions a pplicable to products an d ap plications i ndicated, ex cept where more stringent requirements apply.
3.4
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials ap proved b y manufacturers o f joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealant as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant I nstallation Standard: C omply with r equirements of ASTM C804 for use of solvent-release-curing sealant. D. Installation o f S ealant B ackings: I nstall s ealant backings t o c omply with t he following requirements: 1. Install joint-fillers o f type i ndicated to pr ovide support of s ealant d uring a pplication a nd a t position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealant relative to joint w idths w hich allow o ptimum sealant movement capability a. Do n ot l eave gaps b etween ends o f j ointfillers.
CLEANING
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from c ontact with c ontaminating s ubstances o r from d amage r esulting f rom c onstruction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration o r d amage a t ti me o f s ubstantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration o ccurs, cu t out and r emove da maged or d eteriorated joint sealer i mmediately a nd r eseal joints with new materials to p roduce joint s ealer instructions with r epaired a reas in distinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
b. Do n ot stretch, twist, p uncture o r tear joint fillers. c. Remove a bsorbent j oint-fillers w hich ha ve become wet p rior to sealant ap plication and replace with dry material. 2. Install b ond b reaker t ape b etween s ealant a nd joint fillers, compression seals or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. E. Installation o f Sealant: I nstall s ealant b y p roven techniques that result in sealant directly contacting and f ully wetting j oint s ubstrates, c ompletely filling r ecesses p rovided f or each j oint configuration a nd pr oviding un iform, c rosssectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which a llow o ptimum s ealant movement capability. F. Tooling o f N on-Sag S ealant: I mmediately a fter sealant ap plication a nd pr ior t o t ime skinning or curing begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads o f co ncave co nfiguration, t o el iminate ai r pockets a nd t o en sure co ntact an ad hesion o f sealant with sides of joint. R emove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealant or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
079200 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
079200 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\079200CGA.docx
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 081100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES H. Section 099000 - Paints a nd C oatings: Field painting of steel doors and frames.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Product D ata: Submit manufacturer's technical product data s ubstantiating th at p roducts c omply with r equirements; in cluding, b ut n ot lim ited to, details o f c onstruction, m aterials, d imensions, hardware p reparation, co re, l abel compliance, sound ratings, profiles and finishes.
B. Steel D oors an d F rames; as Indicated on the Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments.
C. Shop D rawings: I ndicate f abrication an d installation o f s teel d oors a nd frames; including details of each door an d frame type, elevations of door de sign t ypes, c onditions at o penings, d etails of construction, location a nd in stallation requirements of finish h ardware an d reinforcements, and details of joints at connections. Show all anchorage and accessory items.
1. Exterior a nd In terior, Non-Rated, S eamless Standard Steel Doors. 2. Exterior a nd In terior, Non-Rated, P ressed Standard Steel Frames, Welded U nit T ype f or Doors, Transoms, S idelights, M ullions, a nd Other Openings. C. Installation o f S teel D oor a nd F rame Glazing and Door Hardware.
1. Provide s chedule of door s a nd f rames using same r eference n umbers for d etails an d openings as those on Drawings.
D. Provide Factory Primed Steel Doors and Frames to be Field Paint Finished. 1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
2. Indicate co ordination o f g lazing f rames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
NOT
D. Label C onstruction C ertification: For door assemblies r equired t o b e fire-rated and exceeding sizes o f t ested as semblies, submit m anufacturer's certification for that each door and frame assembly has b een co nstructed t o co nform t o design, materials a nd c onstruction e quivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Finish hardware templates and hardware for in stallation by this Section. B. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: G lass an d glazing for installation by this Section. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special installation instructions.
A. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: Grouting of steel door frames. B. Section 0610 00 - Rough C arpentry: W framing, partitions, blocking and shims.
D. Section 081416 - Wood Doors: F lush wood doors in steel frames. E. Section 087100 - Finish Hardware: hardware and templates.
Finish
F. Section 088100 - Glass a nd G lazing: G lazing in steel doors and frames. G. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
F. Obtain all s teel d oors an d f rames f rom a s ingle source manufacturer.
ood
C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and joint backing at steel frames.
SUBMITTALS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide standard doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel D oors an d F rames" A NSI A 250.8 (formerly ANSI/SDI-100) and as herein specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door a ssemblies a re i ndicated or r equired, provide fire-rated door and f rame as semblies t hat co mply with UL 10C. C. Fire-Rated Door an d F rame A ssemblies: Require assemblies and components t o c omply w ith positive pressure and S-Label requirements. 081100 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling D. Oversize F ire-Rated D oor A ssemblies: F or door assemblies r equired t o b e fire-rated and exceeding sizes o f t ested as semblies, p rovide certificate or label from a n a pproved i ndependent t esting a nd inspection agency, i ndication t hat d oor an d f rame assembly conforms to t he r equirements o f d esign, materials an d construction as es tablished by individual listings for tested assemblies.
Farmington Elementary School
1.9
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects; including delamination o f v eneer, w arping b eyond s pecified tolerances, d efective m aterials an d telegraphing core construction, af ter co mpletion an d f inal acceptance o f t he W ork. D efects d ue t o f aulty materials or w orkmanship d eveloped d uring t he guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
E. Temperature Rise Rating: At stair well enclosures, provide d oors t hat h ave T emperature R ise Rating of 450 de grees F m aximum i n 30 m inutes of fire exposure. 1.6
WARRANTY
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver h ollow metal w ork car ton o r cr ated t o provide protection du ring t ransit a nd j ob s torage. Provide a dditional s ealed p lastic w rapping f or factory finished doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Subject t o co mpliance with r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
C. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery from damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal i n al l r espects t o n ew work an d accep table t o Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. D. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units o n m inimum f our ( 4) i nch hi gh w ood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could cr eate humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4 inch spaces b etween s tacked d oors t o p romote air circulation. 1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify act ual l ocations o f s teel d oors an d frames with a nd o ther c onstruction to w hich s teel d oors and frames must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate W ork of t his S ection w ith door and frame opening construction, i ncluding d oor hardware installation.
081100 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. The CECO Corporation. 2. Curries Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under pr ovisions of S ection
STEEL DOORS A. General: 1. Provide door types and sizes as indicated on the Door Schedule. 2. Provide steel doors rigid a nd n eat in appearance, n o b uckles o r w arpage. All forming bends, straight with a minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Provide door s c ontinuously s eam w elded f ull height o f t he d oor w ith v ertical ed ge s eams formed by the face sheets. Edges ground, filled and sanded smooth to p rovide a s eamless ed ge surface. 4. Top and bottom edges of all steel doors, closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 1 4 ga uge, e xtending the f ull w idth o f th e door and spot w elded t o bot h f aces. P rovide exterior steel doors with a n a dditional f lush closing ch annel at t heir t op ed ge an d, where required for attachment o f w eather-stripping, a flush closure also at their bottom edge.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
5. Door T hickness: M inimum 1 -3/4 inches t hick or as indicated w ith a b eveled l ock ed ge 1 /8 inch in two (2) inches.
3. Sound deaden and i nsulate s paces b etween stiffeners th e f ull h eight o f the door with expanding p olyurethane f oam-in-place insulation.
6. Door Hardware Reinforcement: Provide doors mortised and reinforced for field application of hinges an d l ocks i n acco rdance w ith the approved h ardware schedule an d t emplates as furnished by the hardware supplier. Provide all surface m ounted h ardware w ith ap propriate internal r einforcement p lates f or f ield d rilling and tapping by the installation contractor.
4. If r equired, pr ovide door g lazing under provisions of Section 088100. D. Interior Doors (Fire-Rated): ANSI/SDI-100, Level II, M odel 2 ; minimum 18 gauge face sheets, 1-3/4 inches th ick; c old r olled steel w ith f ull f lush construction conforming to ASTM A1008. 1. Seamless composite construction.
7. After fabrication, chemically treat steel doors to insure maximum paint adhesion and paint with a rust-inhibitive p rimer in a ccordance with ANSI A224.1-87 procedures, oven dried and fully cured before packaging and shipment.
2. Core D esign E , with s tiffeners not less t han 2 2 gauge, m aximum s ix ( 6) i nches spacing, spotwelds maximum five (5) inches on center. 3. Sound deaden and i nsulate s paces b etween stiffeners f ull h eight o f th e d oor with fireresistive mineral wool.
8. Provide s teel door s of t he f ollowing t ypes pe r ANSI A250.8: a. Level II - Heavy Duty.
4. If r equired, pr ovide door g lazing under provisions of S ection 08810 w ith f ire-rated glazing s tops a nd U L la bel a s indicated in the Door Schedule.
b. Level III - Extra Heavy Duty. c. Model 2 - Seamless D esign. No visible seams on face or door edges
E. Maximum A rea o f D oor G lazing with U L Ratings per IBC, Section 714: Verify ratings and sizes with Door Manufacturer.
d. Core Design F - Vertical Steel Stiffeners. e. Core Design E - Mineral Fiber (Rated).
1. 60 Minute Rating and B L abel: 1 -1/2 hour rating, maximum 100 square inch glass per door leaf.
B. Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100; Level III, Model 2; mi nimum 1 4 gauge f ace s heets, 1 -3/4 i nches thick; hot-dipped galvanized steel, A60 zinc coating per ASTM A653.
2. 3/4 ho ur R ating: M aximum 1 296 square inch glass per door leaf. (IBC)
1. Seamless composite construction. 2. Core Design F, with s tiffeners n ot le ss th an 2 2 gauge, m aximum s ix ( 6) i nches spacing, spotwelds maximum five (5) inches on center. 3. Sound deaden and i nsulate s paces b etween stiffeners th e f ull h eight o f the door with expanding p olyurethane f oam-in-place insulation. 4. If r equired, pr ovide door g lazing under provisions of Section 088100. C. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): ANSI/SDI-100, Level II, Model 2; minimum 18 gauge face sheets, 1-3/4 inches thick; cold rolled s teel w ith f ull f lush construction conforming to ASTM A1008. 1. Seamless composite construction. 2. Core Design F, with s tiffeners n ot le ss th an 2 2 gauge, m aximum s ix ( 6) i nches spacing, s potwelds maximum five (5) inches on center. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
2.3
STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Steel f rames: J amb d epth, p rofile an d s ize as indicated on the Door Schedule. a. Typical: 5-3/4 inch by two (2) inch. 2. Rigid and neat i n ap pearance, n o b uckle o r warpage. F orming b ends: S traight and have a minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Frame co rners: S aw m itered, f ull p rofile welded and ground smooth. Double rabbet face profile a s in dicated on t he D rawings, unless noted otherwise. NO KNOCKDOWN FRAMES ALLOWED. Refer to ANSI/SDI A250.8 for further information. 4. Minimum depth of stops: 5/8 inch.
081100 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
5. Frames for m ultiple o r s pecial o penings: Provide m ullion a nd/or r ail m embers th at a re closed shapes having no visible seams or joints. Securely weld and finish smooth joints between faces of abutting members.
glazing stops; and UL labels as indicated on the Door Schedule. D. Interior Frames (N on-Rated): A NSI/SDI-100; 16 gage thick material, pressed s teel f rames, cap ped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and ground smooth.
6. Frame Hardware Reinforcement: Provide frame reinforcement f or al l h ardware. Frames mortised, reinforced, drilled an d t apped at t he factory fo r fully te mplate m ortised h ardware only, i n acco rdance w ith ap proved hardware schedule and templates p rovided b y t he hardware supplier. W here surface mounted hardware is to be ap plied, f rames s hall h ave reinforcing p lates o nly; w ith d rilling and tapping do ne in the f ield b y t he h ardware installer. 7. Floor a nchors: 14 g auge, s ecurely w elded inside each jamb, with two (2) holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.
1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames. 2. If r equired, p rovide gl ass a nd gl azing in accordance w ith S ection 088100 w ith manufacturer's standard glazing stops. 3. If r equired, p rovide gl ass a nd gl azing in accordance with Section 088100 with fire-rated glazing s tops; " UL o r W arnock-Hersey 2 0minute label". 2.4
A. Reinforce steel doors and frames adequately for all hardware; a s a m inimum p rovide the following reinforcing:
8. Provide frames with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet o f b oth j ambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
1. Cover Boxes: Provide for hardware cut-outs. 2. Lock S trike R einforcement: 1 2 g age b y template requirements.
9. After fabrication, chemically treat frames to insure maximum paint adhesion and paint with a rust-inhibitive p rimer in a ccordance with ANSI A224.1 procedures, i ncluding ov en dr ying a nd fully curing before packaging and shipment.
3. Hinge an d P ivot R einforcement (Each Location): M inimum 7 ga uge, 1 -5/8 inch x 10 inches long welded to frame.
10. Provide hi gh f requency hi nge reinforcement on all hinges.
4. Lock Edge R einforcement, F lush B olts, Concealed H olders, C oncealed o r S urface Mounted C loser: M inimum 1 2 gauge x 14 inches long x full frame width welded to frames.
11. Provide frames with continuous hinges with twelve (12) ga uge r einforcing f ull he ight o f frame.
5. Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 16 gauge.
B. Exterior Frames: ANSI/SDI-100; minimum 14 gauge thick material, pressed steel frames, capped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and gr ound s mooth; ho t-dipped g alvanized A 60 zinc coating per ASTM A653.
6. Angle Floor Clips: 16 g auge welded to frames or s hipped l oose, a nd e ach dr illed f or t wo ( 2) 3/8 inch anchors. B. Galvanized steel doors an d f rames s hall h ave galvanized hardware reinforcements.
1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames. 2. If r equired, p rovide gl ass a nd gl azing in accordance w ith S ection 088100 w ith manufacturer’s standard glazing stops. C. Interior F rames (F ire-Rated): A NSI/SDI-100; 16 gauge thick material, pressed steel frames, capped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames. 2. If re quired, p rovide gl ass a nd gl azing in accordance with Section 088100 w ith fire-rated 081100 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
HARDWARE REINFORCEMENT
2.5
FRAME ANCHORS A. Provide s teel f rames f or in stallation in masonry walls with adjustable jamb anchors of type recommended b y f rame m anufacturer. A nchors: not l ess t han 1 6 g age s teel o r 0.156 inch diameter steel wire. S tirrup straps: not less than 2 x 10 inch in size, corrugated and/or perforated. Provide anchors on each jamb as follows: 1. Frames up to 7’-6” height: Three (3) anchors. 2. Frames 7’-6” to 8’-0” height: Four (4) anchors.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
Farmington Elementary School 3. Frames o ver 8 ’-0” height: One (1) anchor f or each two (2) feet or fraction thereof in height. B. Provide s teel f rames f or in stallation in stud partitions with steel anchors of suitable design, not less than 18 gage thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows: 1. Frames up to 7’-6” height: Four (4) anchors. 2. Frames 7’-6” to 8’-0” height: Five (5) anchors. 3. Frames over 8’-0” height: Five (5) anchors plus one (1) additional anchor f or each t wo ( 2) f eet or fraction thereof over 8’-0”. C. Provide s teel frames to be anchored t o previously placed concrete, unit masonry o r s tructural s teel with a nchors o f s uitable d esign as shown on approved shop drawings. D. Steel frames f or in stallation in m asonry w all openings m ore t han 4 ’-0” i n w idth s hall ha ve an angle o r c hannel stiffener f actory w elded in to th e head of the frame. Stiffeners: not less than 12 gage steel a nd no t l onger t han t he o pening width. Do not use stiffeners as lin tels o r lo ad b earing members. E. Dust cover boxes (mortar guards) of not less than 26 gage steel, provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions. 2.6
ACCESSORIES A. Provide r emovable s teel s preaders at tached to the bottom of three-sided frames. B. Mark frame n umber o n t he j amb o f each f rame i n butt recess for identification at the job site. C. Non-Rated G lazing S tops a nd M oldings: R olled steel channel s hape, minimum 1 8 ga uge, prepared for counter sink style tamper proof screws. D. Fire-Rated Glazing Stops: R olled s teel c hannel shape, stop height 5/8 inch minimum; prepared for countersunk s tyle t amperproof s crews, and conforming to UL 10C. E. Frames Silencers: Resilient rubber, f itted into factory drilled hole. F. Mortar G uards: P rovide m inimum 2 6 g age steel mortar guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cut-outs w here m ortar o r other materials m ight obstruct hardware ope ration a nd t o c lose of f interior of openings.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
Addition and Remodeling
2.7
FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel d oor and frame u nits rigid, neat in appearance an d f ree f rom d efects, w arping o r buckling. Wherever practicable, fit an d as semble units i n m anufacturer's p lant. P rovide s tiffeners where indicated. 1. Clearly identify work th at c annot b e permanently f actory-assembled b efore shipment, to assure proper as sembly at p roject site. B. Fabricate exposed f aces o f d oors an d p anels, including s tiles a nd r ails o f n on-flush uni ts, f rom cold-rolled steel. C. Fabricate f rames, co ncealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, l ouvers an d moldings from cold-rolled steel. D. Fabricate ex terior d oors, p anels, an d f rames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior door s a s i ntegral pa rt of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels. E. Exposed Fasteners: U nless o therwise i ndicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Finish H ardware Preparation: P repare d oors an d frames t o r eceive m ortised an d co ncealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule, w ith t emplates p rovided by hardware supplier. C omply with a pplicable r equirements of ANSI A 115 s eries s pecifications for door a nd frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed ov erhead door c loser, pr ovide space, cutouts, reinforcing a nd p rovisions f or fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. 2. For magnetic locks provided under Division 16, prepare doors an d f rames w ith t emplates provided by magnetic lock supplier. G. Reinforce door and f rames t o r eceive s urfaceapplied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surfaceapplied finish hardware may be done at project site. H. Locate f inish h ardware as i ndicated on f inal s hop drawings o r, i f n ot i ndicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware:" by the Door and Hardware Institute. I. Fire-Rated Doors and Frames:
081100 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1. In addition to other requirements for steel doors and f rames s pecified h erein, c omply w ith th e label requirements o f t he U nderwriters Laboratories (UL), positive pressure and S-label requirements, an d ap proval o f ap plicable l ocal authority having jurisdiction.
Farmington Elementary School
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine the areas an d co nditions under w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
2. Fabricate steel doors and f rames i n acco rdance with the r equirements o f UL 10C for the class of door opening scheduled.
B. Verify t hat o pening s izes an d t olerances ar e acceptable.
a. Provide steel doors and frames with the appropriate U L a nd S labels indicating required fire protection rating and maximum temperature rising rating. 1) Maximum temperature r ise r ating i s required for doors and frames p rotecting exit enclosures. b. Where pairs of doors are scheduled, provide door manufacturer’s s tandard as tragal identical in performance to the astragal used in the approved test as sembly f or t he f ire rating indicated or required. 2.8
FINISH A. After fa brication, f ill a nd s and to ol marks and imperfections as r equired t o m ake face sheets, vertical edges and w eld j oints f ree f rom irregularities. B. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors a nd frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other f oreign m aterials b efore application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of rust inhibitive prime paint of even c onsistency t o p rovide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 4. Exterior D oors: H ot-dipped g alvanized i n t he 0.6 ounce coating c lass ( G60), t o c onform t o ASTM A653. C. Field Painting: Touch-up and finish painting under provisions of Section 099000.
EXAMINATION
C. Verify all h ardware r einforcing co nforms w ith templates furnished under Section 087100. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard s teel d oors an d accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Door Installation: 1. Fit steel doors a ccurately in f rames, w ithin clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 2. Place f ire-rated s teel d oors w ith clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. C. Install steel doors with u niform m argin a t j ambs and h eads. U pon co mplete er ection, v erify all items a re in p erfect o perating condition with all doors swinging free and not rattling when closed. D. Placing F rames: C omply with provisions of SDI105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except f or f rames located a t in -place co ncrete or m asonry a nd a t d rywall in stallations, place frames p rior to c onstruction a t enclosing walls and ceilings. S et frames accurately in position, plumbed, al igned, an d b raced s ecurely until permanent anchors are set. A fter w all construction is completed, r emove t emporary braces an d s preaders l eaving s urfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. In masonry construction, located three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. a. Countersink e xposed f asteners, f ill in and sand s mooth w here masonry an chor locations are visible on door frames. 3. At in -place co ncrete o r m asonry construction, set frames and secure t o ad jacent co nstruction with machine screws an d m asonry an chorage devices.
081100 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
4. Install f ire-rated f rames i n acco rdance w ith NFPA Standard No. 80. 5. In metal stud partitions, install at least three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall a nchors to s tuds w ith tapping screws. E. Hardware Installation: Refer to Section 087100 for hardware installation requirements. 3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum D iagonal D istortion: 1 /16 in ch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.4
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, fill in a nd sand s mooth a ny tool m arks, s urface imperfections, rusted or d amaged ar eas o f p rime coat and ap ply t ouch-up of c ompatible a ir-drying primer. B. Final A djustments: C heck a nd r eadjust operating finish h ardware ite ms, leaving s teel d oors an d frames undamaged and i n co mplete an d p roper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
081100 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
081100 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081100CHQ.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 081416 - WOOD DOORS E. Samples: S ubmit 12 x 12 i nch c orner sample o f door showing complete construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
F. Samples: S ubmit 12 x 12 i nch s amples of door veneer; illustrating wood species, grain and color.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special installation instructions. H. Submit m anufacturer's written certification that all labeled wood fire-rated doors have been machined under licensed inspection.
B. Wood D oors; a s I ndicated on t he D rawings a nd Door Schedule, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments.
I. Test R eports: S ubmit L aboratory te st r eports o f WDMA TM-5 Split Resistance, WDMA TM-7 Cycle/Slam T est, W DMA T M-8 H inge L oading Resistance and WDMA TM-10 Screw Holding Capacity.
1. Interior Non-Rated Flush Wood Doors. 2. Interior Fire-Rated Flush Wood Doors. C. Installation of Door Glazing and Hardware. D. Factory Finished Doors. 1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.5
A. Quality S tandards; C omply w ith the following standards:
NOT
1. WDMA Q uality S tandard: I .S.1 - "Industry Standard f or W ood F lush D oors", of Wood Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA).
A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Finish hardware templates and p roducts to b e installed b y this Section.
2. AWI Quality Standards: " Architectural Woodwork Institute" (AWI), in cluding S ection 1300 - Architectural F lush D oors f or g rade of doors, c ore c onstruction, f inish a nd other requirements exceeding those o f W DMA quality standards.
B. Section 088100 - Glass a nd G lazing: G lass products to be installed by this Section. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 081100 - Steel D oors an d F rames: Steel door frames.
B. WDMA Quality Marking: M ark each w ood d oor with WDMA W ood Flush D oor C ertification Hallmark c ertifying c ompliance w ith a pplicable requirements of WDMA I.S.1 Series.
B. Section 087100 - Door H ardware: H ardware templates and products for flush wood doors. C. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Door glass. 1.4
1. For m anufacturers n ot p articipating in WDMA Hallmark Program, am anufacturer's certification o f c ompliance m ay b e substituted for marking of individual doors.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Door Manufacturer’s L iterature: Certificate o f compliance with WDMA I.S.1A-2004. C. Shop D rawings: Submit schedules a nd e levations indicating door o pening c riteria, s izes, ty pes, construction, swing, label, cl earance, s pecial beveling, s pecial b locking f or hardware, identify cut-outs f or glazing an d ap plicable h ardware locations. D. Product Data: I ndicate m anufacturer’s d oor co re materials and construction; v eneer s pecies, t ype and characteristics; factory m achining cr iteria an d factory finishing criteria.
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
QUALITY ASSURANCE
C. Manufacturer: Obtain all wood doors from a single source manufacturer. 1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door C onstruction: C onform t o U L 10C requirements. B. Installed F ire-Rated Door Assembly: C onform to NFPA 80 f or fire-rated class as indicated on Door Schedule.
081416 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Farmington Elementary School
1.10
A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect, a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. No wood doors shall b e d elivered to th e s ite u ntil weatherproof storage space is available. C. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to p revent d amage, s oiling a nd deterioration. Comply with r equirements of referenced s tandards an d r ecommendations o f WDMA p amphlet " How to S tore, H andle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions.
A. Coordinate the w ork w ith door ope ning construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11
1. Life of Original Installation: Interior Solid Core Wood Doors. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including coverage for delamination o f v eneer, w arping beyond s pecified i nstallation t olerances, d efective materials, and telegraphing core construction, after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
E. Identify each w ood door w ith i ndividual ope ning numbers which correlate w ith d esignation s ystem used on shop drawings for wood doors, frames and hardware, using temporary, r emovable o r concealed markings.
C. Contractor’s Re sponsibilities: R eplace o r refinish flush w ood door s w here Contractor’s work contributed to r ejection o r to v oiding o f th e manufacturer’s warranty.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environment: Do not deliver or install wood doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized, and w ill be maintained in storage a nd installation a reas d uring remainder of construction pe riod t o c omply w ith the f ollowing r equirements applicable t o p roject's geographical location:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
1. ALGOMA H ardwoods, I nc. (bought o ut b y Masonite, Inc. in April, 2012) 2. EGGERS Industries, Inc.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual l ocations of w ood door s a nd other construction t o w hich w ood door s m ust f it, b y accurate field measurements b efore f abrication; show r ecorded m easurements o n f inal shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1. Where f ield m easurements can not b e m ade without delaying t he W ork, guarantee dimensions a nd pr oceed w ith f abrication of products w ithout f ield m easurements. Coordinate construction to e nsure th at a ctual opening di mensions c orrespond t o guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
081416 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
1. Referenced AWI Quality S tandard, i ncluding Section 100-S-11; "Relative H umidity a nd Moisture Content". 1.9
WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty, including replacement, r e-finishing a nd r e-hanging, und er provisions of Section 017836 t o t he f ollowing terms:
D. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in wet or damp areas; o r i n ar eas w here s unlight m ight bleach veneer. Seal top and b ottom ed ges if stored more than o ne w eek. B reak s eal o n-site to permit ventilation.
1.8
COORDINATION
3. VT Industries, Inc. B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
nder pr ovisions of S ection
DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Wood Doors (Non-Rated): Premium grade 5-ply Architectural doors, 1-3/4 inches thick; heavy duty, solid core construction of Particleboard DPC-1 ( 32 lb ./cu f t); s tiles a nd rails securely bonded to co re; f actory t ransparent f inish u nder provisions of S ection 099000; a nd 1/4 inch thick glass lights as scheduled.
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. Maximum A rea o f G lazing w ith UL Ratings: Verify ratings and sizes with Door Manufacturer.
3. Minimum test rating of 525 lb. per the WDMA TM-5 Split Resistance, 930 lb. per the WDMA TM-8 H inge Loading Resistance, and 1000 lb. per t he W DMA T M-10 Screw H olding Capacity test reports.
1. B L abel: 6 0 a nd 9 0 minutes fire rating, maximum 100 square inches glass per door leaf. 2. 20-Minute R ating: M aximum 1,296 square inches glass per door leaf. 2.3
D. Horizontal Edges (Rails):
FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI veneer grade “AA” Quality species wood, plain sliced Red Oak, book matched leaves, balance matched faces, color t o b e s elected b y A rchitect f rom manufacturers standard finish co lors. Face veneers Thickness: M inimum 1/50 inch thick prior to field sanding. B. Face v eneers s hall co mply with requirements of AWI 1300-G-13.
2.4
matching
CROSS BANDS A. Cross bands: M inimum o f 1 /16 i nch t hick engineered f iber w ith n o v oids o r defects, extending f ull w idth o f d oors w ith grain at right angles t o f ace v eneer. L aminate cross bands to core using Type I glue. B. No exposed cross bands on ends of door.
2.5
4. Fire treated stiles, edges to match face veneer, at 20-minute doors.
NON-RATED AND 20 MINUTE DOORS A. Labeled 2 0-minute doors: Tested in conformance with UL 10C conducted by Underwriters Laboratories ( UL), W arnock-Hersey, o r b y other recognized independent testing agencies. 1. Where r equired I ntumescent s eal to be concealed at v isible d oor ed ges w ith s ame species veneer B. Particleboard Core: ANSI A208 1-LD-2 Particleboard. Vertical and ho rizontal e dges must be securely bonded to the core, and then abrasively sanded as a unit before veneering. No visible joints will be permitted. 1. Blocking: P rovide w ood b locking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. C. Vertical edges (Stiles): 1. 1-3/8 in ch m inimum s tructural c omposite lumber backer or inner plies 2. Veneered to match species of visible surface.
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
1. Top a nd bot tom e dges: 5 inch minimum hardwood or structural composite lumber. 2. 5-inch midrail b locking, in d oors in dicated to have exit devices. 2.6
LABELED FIRE DOORS (45, 60 AND 90 MINUTE) A. Labeled f ire d oors: T ested i n co nformance w ith UL 10C c onducted by U nderwriters L aboratories (UL), Warnock-Hersey, or by o ther recognized independent testing agencies. 1. Intumescent seal to be concealed at visible door edges with same species veneer B. Cores: D oor m anufacturer's s tandard noncombustible mineral core. 1. Blocking: F or m ineral-core door s, pr ovide composite blocking w ith i mproved s crewholding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom-rail b locking, in indicated to have protection plates.
doors
c. 5-inch midrail b locking, in d oors indicated to have armor plates. d. 5-inch midrail b locking, in d oors indicated to have exit devices. C. Reinforcement: P rovide v ertical ed ges, top and bottom r ails p er t he m anufacturer s tandard fire door approvals. 1. Vertical ed ge v eneer: T o m atch species of visible surface. 2. Hinge ed ge: L aminated on all f ire d oors to accommodate full mortise hinges and to provide additional s crew ho lding p ower w hen hinge is installed, unless specified otherwise. D. The vertical edges on labeled d oors will r equire a minimum test rating as follows:
081416 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling WHI TEST WDMA TM-5 Split Resistance WDMA TM-7 Cycle/Slam WDMA TM-8 Hinge Loading Resistance WDMA TM-10 Screw-Holding Capacity 2.7
45 and 60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
1400 lb.
1075 lb.
200,000 min.
200,000 min.
740 lb.
660 lb.
1300 lb.
non-rated, per Article 2.5.A which would otherwise require through bolting for attachment of closer and locksets. Wood doors are to have no through bolting. 2.10
1. Factory f inish d oors i n acco rdance with AWI Division 1500-S-4 – Finish System Standards. 2. Use o nly hi gh-grade f inishing m aterial, a nd follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not intermix materials from different suppliers.
775 lb.
3. Apply s eal co at t o b oth f aces an d f our edges; allow for t horough d rying. S and l ightly w ith 120 to 180 g rit sandpaper. This seal coat will allow uniform staining of the veneers when stained or when filler stain is required.
AWI 1300-S-6; Type 1 -
4. Factory F inish t o m eet o r ex ceed p erformance standards of TR-6, Catalyzed Polyurethane.
ACCESSORIES A. Glazing S tops ( Non-Rated): Man ufacturer's standard f lush w ood m olding g lazing s tops; prepared for flush finish nails and adhesive.
5. Apply one or two coat(s) of stain or filler stain as required. Allow to dry thoroughly.
B. Glazing S tops ( Fire-Rated): R olled m etal ty pe designed to c onform to UL 10C requirements; prepared for countersunk style tamper proof screws. 2.9
6. Clean surfaces of all dust and dirt. 7. Apply two coats of t opcoat; a llow t o dr y a nd sand between coats. 8. Apply finish to bot h f aces a nd f our e dges of doors.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standard requirements. B. Fabricate fire-rated doors in accordance with AWI Premium Quality S tandard a nd to U L-10C requirements. Attach fire-rating label to door. C. Factory m achine d oors f or f inish h ardware i n accordance with hardware r equirements an d dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.
WOOD DOOR FINISHING
A. Factory Transparent Finishing:
ADHESIVE A. Interior Doors: Waterproof.
2.8
Farmington Elementary School
9. Color t o b e s elected b y A rchitect f rom manufacturers standard finish colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
D. Refer t o S ection 087100 - Finish H ardware; f or complete door hardware templates and products.
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
E. Refer t o S ection 088100 - Glazing; f or c omplete glass and glazing requirements.
B. Verify th at o pening s izes an d t olerances ar e acceptable.
F. All cutouts for vision p anels must b e minimum o f six (6) inches f rom t he e dge of t he door a nd/or other c utouts f or l ouvers, l ocks, c loser or other hardware.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
G. Use a ten (10) inch margin between the edge of the door and the edge of any cutout near the lock area.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install n on-rated doors in acco rdance w ith A WI Premium Quality Standard requirements.
H. Provide solid wood blocking a t vertical stiles, a nd top and bottom edges of a ll door s, f ire r ated a nd 081416 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School B. Install f ire-rated d oors i n acco rdance w ith A WI Premium Quality S tandards, a nd to N FPA 8 0 requirements.
Addition and Remodeling
END OF SECTION
C. Trim n on-rated d oor w idth b y c utting e qually o n both jamb edges. D. Trim fire-rated door width from lock edge only, to a maximum of 3/16 inch. E. Trim d oor he ight b y c utting b ottom e dges to a maximum o f 3 /4 in ch. T rim f ire d oor h eight a t bottom ed ge o nly, i n acco rdance w ith fire rating requirements. F. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. G. Machine cut f or h ardware. C ore f or h andsets an d cylinders. H. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of standard s teel f rames s pecified i n Section 081100, and hardware specified in Section 087100. I. Coordinate in stallation of glass a nd g lazing a s specified in Section 088100. J. Hardware Installation: Refer to Section 087100 for hardware installation requirements. 3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to AWI 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion. C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1 /8 in ch measured with straight edge or taught s tring, e dge to ed ge, o ver an i maginary 3 6 x 84 inch surface area.
3.4
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth a nd ba lanced door movement. B. Operation: R e-hang or replace wood doors which do not swing or operate freely. C. Finished D oors: R efinish o r r eplace w ood door s damaged during installation.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect w ood door s a s r ecommended by door manufacturer to assure t hat w ood d oors w ill b e without d amage o r d eterioration at tim e of Substantial Completion.
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
081416 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
081416 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
WOOD DOORS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\081416CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 083300 - COILING DOORS AND GRILLES 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1.1
B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate p ertinent d imensioning, general c onstruction, c omponent c onnections and details, electrical requirements and connections, anchorage m ethods, h ardware l ocation, and installation details.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
C. Product D ata: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata for door specifications, door and frame finish.
B. Coiling Doors and G rilles; a s I ndicated o n the Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Samples: S ubmit s ample o f d oor w ith specified finish.
1. Exterior, Electrically O perated, No n-Rated Insulated Overhead Coiling S teel D oors; Factory Primed and Pre-Coat Finished. 2. Interior, E lectrically O perated, N on-Rated Overhead Coiling Aluminum Counter S hutters; Factory Finished. 3. Interior, E lectrically O perated, N on-Rated, Overhead C oiling Aluminum Doors; F actory Finished. 1.2
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5
A. Submit m anufacturer's o peration an d m aintenance data under provisions of Section 017923. 1.6
A. Section 054000 - Cold F ormed M etal F raming: Structural metal wall framing. ood
C. Section 087100 - Door H ardware: C ylinders f or locks.
1.7
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided a re guaranteed against d efects af ter completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
- Paints and Coatings: F ield
F. Division 2 6 - Electrical: C onduit, b oxes, w iring, disconnect switches and all n ecessary f ittings an d connections to complete th e installation of the electrically operated coiling doors. 1.3
EXTERIOR DOOR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Exterior e lectrically o perated in sulated doors with overhead co unter b alance d evices. C oiling d oors shall b e d esigned to w ithstand a m inimum of twenty (20) lb. per square foot wind load. Windlocks s hall be pr ovided a s r equired f or w ind load protection.
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES S:\11\0122\div2to33\083300cga.DOC
WARRANTY A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal framing and gypsum board finish. E. Section 099000 finishing.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations o f c oiling d oors and o ther construction to which c oiling d oors m ust f it b y accurate field measurements b efore f abrication; show r ecorded m easurements o n final s hop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
RELATED WORK
B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: W blocking and shims.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: a. Cookson .
083300 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are: 1. CORNELL Iron Works, Inc. 2. Overhead Door Corporation. 3. Wayne-Dalton Door Corporation. C. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under pr ovisions of S ection
EXTERIOR INSULATED ROLLING DOOR A. General: Cookson Exterior C oiling S teel D oor Model F MWI - Insulated F lat S lat, P rimed S teel Gearhead-Vertical. B. Quality Assurance: D esigned to w ithstand 2 0 lb/sq.ft. windload. C. Curtain: Interconnected s trip s teel s lats conforming to ASTM A653. 20 Gauge exterior slat and 22 gauge interior slat separated by 13/16” rigid insulation. Slats m easure 3 ” h igh b y 7 /8” d eep. Finish s hall b e ho t-dipped g alvanized G -90 meeting ASTM A653 with bonderized coating for prime coat a dhesion, c orrosion inhibiting p rimer 2 mils per s ide a nd th ermosetting ta n p olyester topcoat with minimum th ickness o f . 6 m ils each side. D. Bottom B ar: Two 1 /8” s teel an gles m echanically joined and including F eatheredge s afety ed ge system. Finish: One co at o f b ronze r ust-inhibiting prime paint. E. Guide A ssemblies: F abricated f rom three (3) structural s teel a ngles w ith minimum 1/4-inch thickness. C ontinuous t ype, w all mounted angle, minimum 3” x 3” x 1/4”. G uide a ngles: Snap-on weatherstripping of extruded vi nyl f urnished continuously along t he e xterior l eg o f each gui de. Finish: O ne c oat o f bronze rust-inhibiting p rime paint. F. Brackets: Mo unting b racket p lates m ade f rom a minimum 1 /4-inch s teel p late an d at tached t o t he wall a ngle o f th e g uide a ssembly w ith 1/2-inch diameter Class 5 case hardened b olts. Drive side brackets fitted with sealed ball bearing. G. Barrel: Steel tu bing n ot less th an 6 ” O .D. F inish: One coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.
083300 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
H. Counter Balance: Curtain counter-balanced by means of o il tempered, helical torsion springs, grease-packed and mounted on a single continuous steel torsion shaft. Compression type spring design to facilitate any counter-balance maintenance. I. Hood: 24-gauge, prime painted, hot-dipped galvanized s teel w ith r olled ed ges and w aterproof baffle to control air infiltration.. J. Hood B affle: H ood i ncorporates a flame baffle (UL listed) activated by fusible links. K. Automatic Closure: C losure initiated by melting a 165-degree fusible link. Operation mechanism disengaged d uring a utomatic c losing o f the door with the rate of descent controlled by a governor. L. Operator: 1. Motor: Size to f it s ize of door. O pen, dr ipproof e lectric m otor w ith g ear r educer in oil bath. UL listed. 2. Reduction: F urnish V-belt drive from motor to full ball b earing p ower tr ain w ith a dditional reduction b y c hain a nd s prockets. Minimum 3/4-inch diameter power train shafts. 3. Roller Chain Drive: Door shaft driven by roller chain to provide door travel of six (6) inches to twelve (12) inches per second. 4. Adjustable Friction Clutch: P rovided to protect door a nd ope rator i f door m ovement is obstructed. 5. Limit S witches: P rovide p ositive chain d rive screw type limit s witch, e nclosed in e lectrical control b ox. L imit s witches r emain in time when emergency chain hoist is used and door is operating manually. 6. Control Wiring: 24-volt control voltage. Solidstate c ircuitry w ith b uilt-in safety ed ge t o reverse capability, external radio control hookup and maximum run timer shut-off feature. 7. Electrical Enclosure: E lectrical co mponents shall co nform t o N EMA 1 enclosure requirements. 8. Magnetic B rake: F urnish magnetic solenoid brake for positive stop. 9. Safety Edge System: A s m anufactured b y Cookson a nd i nstalled on bot tom bar of door and connected to motor operation with coil cord to au tomatically r everse d oor i f encountering obstruction.
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES S:\11\0122\div2to33\083300cga.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
M. Finish: O ne ( 1) c oat o f rust-inhibitive p rimer o n non-plated components of the door. 2.3
3. Include s afety ed ge s ystem which will automatically reverse the shutter if it encounters an obstruction in its d ownward tr avel. T o operate on air wave technology and not rely on pneumatic pressure or electrical strip contacts to operate properly. The safety edge to be connected to th e m otor o perator w ith a coil cord. Include take up reel.
INTERIOR COILING COUNTER SHUTTER A. General: COOKSON Interior N on-Rated C oiling Counter S hutters - Aluminum C lear A nodized and Face of Wall Mounted. ModelCD8-1M. B. Shutter designed to standard minimum of 10 cycles per d ay and o verall maximum of 20,000 operating cycles for life of shutter. C. Curtain: Interconnected flat slats of 0.050 extruded aluminum s lat 1 -15/16” h igh by 3/ 8” de ep w ith 204-R1 clear anodized finish. D. Bottom B ar: T ubular e xtruded a luminum 1 -15/16” deep by 2 -1/2” high w ith Safety e dge s ystem a nd 204-R1 clear anodized finish. E. Guide Assemblies: Box t ype, fabricated from extruded aluminum a nd m easures 1 -3/4” s quare. Each side o f c hannel p ortion c apturing t he c urtain to contain wool p ile w eatherstripping. G uide to have 204-R1 clear anodized finish. F. Brackets: M inimum, 1/8” th ick hot-dipped galvanized steel plate. G. Barrel: Minimum 4-inch O. D. wall structural steel tube. Deflection of tube under f ull lo ad s hall not exceed 0.03 inch per foot of span. Finish: One coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint. H. Counterbalance: O il te mpered to rsion springs to balance weight of curtain. I. Hood: Formed of 0. 040 a luminum a nd formed t o fit in th e s quare b rackets. F inish: 2 04-R1 cl ear anodized finish. J. Operation: Recessed in wall with push-button control station with flush stainless steel cover plate. 1. To ope rate a t s peed of 1/ 2 f oot per second by model 11 m otor ope rator i ncluding a n e lectric motor with gear reducer in oil bath, geared limit switch an d em ergency r elease f or p ush-up operation. 2. Operator: 115 volt single ph ase a nd h oused i n NEMA 1 ho using a nd i ncluding a 2 4 vo lt transformer a nd c omplete te rminal s trip. Activated by 3 button push-button station.
2.4
INTERIOR COILING SERVICE DOOR A. General: Cookson Model FCM – Motor Operated Service Door. B. Quality Assurance: D esigned to w ithstand 2 0 lb/sq.ft. w indload a nd d esigned to w ithstand a standard m aximum o f 2 5 cy cles p er d ay and an overall m aximum of 50, 000 o perating cy cles f or life of door. C. Curtain: C onsists o f interconnected aluminum flat slat, 0. 050 t hick a nd 2 -3/4” high by 3/ 4” de ep. Finish: 204-R1 clear anodized finish. D. Bottom B ar: Two 3/16” a luminum a ngles mechanically j oined an d i ncluding s afety edge system. Finish: 204-R1 clear anodized finish. E. Guide Assemblies: Two aluminum angles and one steel wall angle bolted together with 3/8” fasteners to f orm c hannel f or c urtain a nd i nclude extruded vinyl snap-on weatherstripping continuously along exterior leg o f th e g uide. S teel w all angle to be continuous a nd f astened t o surrounding structure with minimum 1/2“ fasteners on 36” centers. Finish on a luminum a ngles 2 04-R1 cl ear an odized and finish o n steel wall to b e a luminum p rime paint to match aluminum angles.. F. Brackets: M inimum 1 0 g auge, stainless steel mounting bracket plates f or m ounting c urtain a nd barrel assembly. Fit the inside of the bracket with a sealed ball bearing. G. Barrel: Minimum 4 in ch O . D . x 0 .120 in ch wall structural steel pipe. D eflection of pipe under full load shall not exceed 0.03 inch per foot of span. H. Counter B alance: C urtain co unter b alanced by oil tempered, helical torsion springs grease-packed and mounted on a single continuous steel torsion shaft. Springs a re of c ompression s pring d esign a nd adjusted by means o f ex terior w heel. F inish: O ne coat bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint. I. Hood: 0.040 aluminum and formed to fit curvature of the brackets. C ontains w aterproof b affle t o control air infiltration. F inish: 2 04-R1 cl ear anodized finish..
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES S:\11\0122\div2to33\083300cga.DOC
083300 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling J. Operation:
Farmington Elementary School
END OF SECTION
1. Motor: Open, drip proof electric motor with belt drive and roller chain sprocket reducer. Include geared limit s witch and e lectrically interlocked emergency ch ain o perator. UL listed. M ount to door bracket. 115 volts single phase. 2. Housing: N EMA 1 . I nclude magnetic r eversing starter size 0, a 2 4 volt control transformer and complete terminal strip. 3. Activation: P ush-button c ontrol s tation w ith flush stainless steel cover plate. 4. Safety E dge S ystem: I nclude on bot tom ba r to reverse d oor w hen d evice d etects o bstruction. Connect to motor ope rator w ith c oil c ord. Include take-up reel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to t imely a nd pr oper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that all e lectrical c ontrol s tations a nd connections are properly sized. C. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install coiling doors and grilles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit, align and adjust d oor a ssemblies le vel a nd plumb; provide smooth operation. C. Coordinate with electrical f or locations o f c ontrol stations, and connection to individual motors. D. Verify that all motors have UL listings. E. Doors and all exposed c omponents s hall be f ield painted under provisions of Section 099000.
3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Provide f inal c leaning f or th e d oor a nd a ll components. B. Adjust the door for proper operation.
083300 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES S:\11\0122\div2to33\083300cga.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 084100 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS anchorage an d at tachment d evices. Interior aluminum doors a nd frames shall not b e thermally broken.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Front glazed.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Aluminum fixed window systems; includes tubular aluminum s ections th ermally b roken w ith supplementary internal support framing as required, shop f abricated, f actory p refinished, v ision g lass, extruded break metal, r elated f lashings, an d anchorage and attachment devices.
B. Exterior Prefinished Aluminum E ntrance D oors and S torefront W ith T hermally B roken Frames; Including Attachments and Accessories. C. Interior Prefinished Aluminum Entrance Doors and Storefront W ith N on-Thermally B roken F rames; Including Attachments and Accessories. D. Installation of Vision Glass Panels. E. Installation of Entrance Door and Frame Hardware Furnished by Section 087100. 1.2
1.3
PRODUCT INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
NOT
PERFORMANCE FRAMES
REQUIREMENTS
-
A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live lo ads c aused b y p ositive and ne gative w ind pressure acting normal t o p lane o f w all as calculated in accordance w ith U niform B uilding Code, Exposure "C", and as m easured i n accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to f lexure lim it o f g lass; with full recovery of glazing materials.
A. Section 087100 - Finish H ardware: A ll en trance door and frame hardware items and templates, except as noted otherwise.
C. Structural Loads:
B. Section 088100 - Glazing: A luminum frame, door and window glass.
D. Uniform Load: Tested i n acco rdance w ith A STM E330 a t a s tatic a ir de sign l oad of 20 ps f i n the positive a nd n egative d irection. N o d eflection in excess o f L /175 o f t he s pan of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the s pecified design l oad, n o g lass b reakage o r permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: W blocking and shims.
ood
B. Section 072100 - Building I nsulation: V apor s eal and batt insulation for shim spaces. C. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping: Fire-stopping. D. Section 079200 - Joint S ealers: S ystem p erimeter sealant and back-up materials. E. Section 087100 - Finish Hardware: hardware items and templates. F. Section 088100 - Glazing: methods. 1.4
1.5
Finish
Glass and glazing
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum e ntrances and s torefront s ystem; includes tubular a luminum sections thermally broken except door j ambs at ex terior w ith supplementary internal support framing as required, shop fabricated, factory prefinished, vision glass, extruded break metal, r elated f lashings, a nd
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
E. System to accommodate, without damage to components or de terioration of s eals, m ovement within system, m ovement b etween s ystem an d peripheral construction, d ynamic l oading an d release of loads, deflection o f s tructural s upport framing. F. Air Infiltration: Tested in a ccordance w ith ASTM E 283 a t a m inimum s tatic-air-pressure difference o f 1.57 lbf/sq. f t. Maximum al lowable air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area. G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when t ested i n acco rdance w ith A STM E 331 at a static-air-pressure d ifference o f 20 pe rcent of positive w ind-load de sign pr essure, bu t not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 084100 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
H. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1 503, t hermal transmittance (U-value) shall not be more than:
B. Air infiltration: T ested in accordance with ASTM E283, a t a pr essure di fferential of 1. 57 ps f. A single 3 '-0" x 7' -0" entrance door and frame shall not ex ceed 0.50 c fm pe r l inear f oot of p erimeter crack. A p air o f 6'-0" x 7'-0" entrance doors and frame s hall n ot ex ceed 1 .0 cf m p er l inear f oot o f perimeter crack.
1. Glass to Exterior – 0.47 (low-e) or 0.61 (clear). 2. Glass to Center – 0.44 (low-e) or 0.61 (clear). 3. Glass to Interior – 0.41 (low-e) or 0.56 (clear).
C. Manufacturer shall provide written c ertification to the Architect that all performance requirements indicated above have been tested and approved by an independent testing agency. I f this certification cannot b e p roduced, t hen t he m anufacturer shall have the d oors an d f rame t ested at n o ad ditional cost to the Owner.
I. Condensation Resistance ( CRF): W hen t ested i n accordance w ith A AMA 1 503, the c ondensation resistance factor shall not be less than: 1. Glass to Exterior – 70 frame and 69 69 frame and 58 glass (clear). 2. Glass t o Ce nter – 62 frame and 68 60 frame and 58 glass (clear). 3. Glass to Interior – 56 frame and 67 54 frame and 58 glass (clear).
glass
(low-e) or
glass
(low-e) o r
glass
(low-e) or
1.7
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate s ystem el evations and dimensions, pr ofiles of door members, thicknesses of metal f or d oors an d f rames, s izes an d t ypes of fasteners, m ethods o f g lazing, framed opening requirement and tolerances, m ullion d etails, affected related Work an d ex pansion an d contraction joint location and details.
J. Maintain co ntinuous ai r an d v apor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in lin e with in side pane of glass and heal bead of glazing compound. K. System t o pr ovide f or e xpansion a nd c ontraction within s ystem c omponents cau sed b y a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components.
C. Product D ata: P rovide component specifications and characteristics; d escribe co mponents w ithin assembly, an chorage an d f asteners, g lass and glazing, d oor ha rdware r einforcing, a nd internal drainage details.
L. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing c hannels, o r m igrating m oisture occurring within s ystem, to the exterior by a w eep drainage network, an d p rovide f or p ressure equalization of these spaces. 1.6
PERFORMANCE SWING DOORS
REQUIREMENTS
D. Samples: S ubmit s amples illu strating prefinished aluminum surface, glass, and glazing materials. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
-
F. Test Reports: above.
A. Structural: Resistance to corner racking tested by the Dual Moment Load Test as follows: 1. Test s ection c onsisting o f a s tandard t op door corner assembly. 2 4 i nches l ong s ide r ail section and 12 inches long top rail section.
SUBMITTALS
1.8
Submit test reports as required
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform W ork i n acco rdance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.
2. Anchor "top rail" positively to test bench so that corner protrudes three (3) inches beyond bench edge.
B. Storefront shall conform to a ll a pplicable b uilding codes and with authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Anchor a l ever arm positively to "side rail" at a point 19 i nches from i nside e dge of " top rail". Attach weight s upport p ad a t a point 19 inches from inner edge of "side rail".
C. Provide the A rchitect w ith c urrent ( within p ast 5 years) t est reports f rom an A AMA cer tified an d accredited independent laboratory certifying t he performance requirements as specified above.
4. Test s ection s hall w ithstand a lo ad of 245 pounds on the lever ar m b efore r eaching t he point of f ailure, which is considered a rotation of the lever arm in excess of 45 degrees.
D. Test r eports s hall b e acco mpanied by the manufacturer's letter of certification stating that the tested windows m eet o r ex ceed the referenced
084100 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School criteria for t he ap propriate 101/I.S.2/NAFS window type.
Addition and Remodeling AAMA/WDMA
E. Manufacturer and Installer: C ompany specializing in manufacturing a nd i nstalling a luminum gl azing systems a s specified in this Section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. 1.9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. KAWNEER Corporation –
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. 451-T Framing System,
A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
b. #500 Entrance Doors,
B. Handle w ork o f t his s ection i n accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
C. Protect p refinished a luminum s urfaces w ith wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings w hich b ond w hen e xposed t o sunlight or weather.
1. EFCO Corporation. 2. EXCEL Aluminum Products, Inc. 3. TUBELITE, Inc.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
4. VISTAWALL Architectural Products, Inc.
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) during and 48 hours after installation. 1.11
C. Substitutions: [No Substitutions Allowed] [Under provisions of Section 016000].
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations o f aluminum entrances and storefront a nd o ther c onstruction to which entrances and storefronts must fit, by accurate field measurements before f abrication; s how r ecorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication s chedule w ith c onstruction p rogress to avoid delay of Work. 1.12
5. C.R. Laurence/U. S. Aluminum.
2.2
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet A luminum: A STM B 209; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. C. Steel Sections: ASTM A36; shaped to suit mullion sections.
COORDINATION
D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
A. Coordinate th e W ork o f th is S ection with installation of firestopping, a ir a nd v apor b arrier and all other related components or materials. 1.13
E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. F. Perimeter A nchors: S tainless s teel o r zi nc p lated steel.
WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
MATERIALS
G. Glazing Gaskets: Elastomeric or neoprene. 2.3
DOOR AND FRAME COMPONENTS A. KAWNEER 4 51-T F raming: T hermally b roken system a llows f rame to b e in stalled from unitized assemblies. F raming s ystem p rovides f or f lush glazing o n a ll s ides w ith no projecting stops. Provide en trance-framing m embers compatible with glass framing in appearance. Provide positive barrier weathering with all s ingle act ing en trance frames. Man ufacturer’s s tandard t hermal b arrier and elastomeric glazing gaskets.
084100 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1. Front glazed.
Farmington Elementary School
2.6
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearance and shim spacing ar ound p erimeter o f as sembly, y et enabling in stallation a nd dynamic m ovement o f perimeter seal.
2. Frame D imensions: 2 inch n ominal f ace dimension o f v ertical a nd ho rizontal f raming members with 4-1/2 inches overall depth. B. Interior Frames: Factory pre-finished extruded aluminum, frame with wall thickness of a minimum 0.098 i nches, s cheduled f or 1 /4 i nch t hick glass, nominal dimensions o f s ystem a s in dicated on the Drawings, f lush g lazing s tops, e lastomeric o r neoprene glazing gaskets.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components t o r eceive an chor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Design f asteners an d at tachments t o b e concealed from view.
C. Reinforced Mullion: S hape an d l ocation as required by m anufacturer; w ith in ternal reinforcement of shaped steel structural section.
E. Reinforce interior rails as required by manufacturer to meet specification requirements.
D. Swing E ntrance D oors: Factory pre-finished extruded aluminum, m inimum 0 .125 i nches t hick extrusions. Door dimensions: 1 -3/4 inches depth, [eight (8)] inch wide top rail, [five (5)] inch wide vertical stiles, [twelve (12)] inch wide bottom rail. Minimum 0.050 inch thick glazing moldings, hookin type glazing stops with EPDM glazing gaskets.
F. Prepare components for internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hardware. G. Reinforce framing members as r equired t o m eet specified performance requirements. H. Miters cut thermally broken e xtrusions a t to p corners, assemble with two h eavy d uty s errated aluminum keys p er co rner an d f asten w ith a minimum of three stainless steel screws.
1. KAWNEER #500 or approved equal. E. Break M etal, S ills a nd F lashings: F actory p refinished extruded aluminum, m inimum 0 .125 inches th ick, f inished to m atch m ullion s ections where exposed.
I. Precision machine frame sills and fit to the j ambs and f asten w ith a m inimum of th ree ( 3) s tainless steel screws per corner.
F. Door Hardware f urnished under S ection 087100 and in stalled b y th is s ection, including hardware templates for all aluminum entrance doors and frames except as noted otherwise. 2.4
J. Design weep system to allow drainage of all water from all cavities in sill clear through from inside to outside. K. Construct ho rizontal s ash m embers o f t ubular extrusions; thermally break all sash members using poured a nd de -bridged p olyurethane, s elf-adhering to adjacent aluminum surfaces.
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 088100, a nd t o s izes a s indicated o n th e Drawings.
2.5
L. Thermal B reak: M inimum, 9 /32-inch t hermal separation b etween t he ex terior an d i nterior metal surfaces.
SEALANT MATERIALS A. Framing System G askets an d S ealants: Manufacturer's s tandard, r ecommended by manufacturer for joint type.
M. Sash C orners: M illed a nd p roperly f it to assure complete sealing. N. Fasten horizontal s ash m embers t o v ertical members u sing a m inimum o f tw o stainless steel screws at each co rner, an d n on-corrosive co rner blocks to prevent thermal bridging as sash corners.
B. Window and Frame S ystem S ealant: Manufacturer's recommended types t o s uit application. C. Frame P erimeter Sealant an d B acking M aterials: For in stallation a t p erimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200.
084100 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
FABRICATION
2.7
FINISHES A. Provide exposed aluminum f raming m embers f ree of scratches and other serious blemishes. P re-treat members per paint manufacturer's requirements.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces Finish: A rchitectural Class I , C lear A nodized C oating, minimum 0.70 mils thickness, conforming to AA-M12C22A41.
H. Coordinate attachment and s eal o f p erimeter ai r and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack i nsulation i n s him s paces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
C. Concealed Steel I tems: P rimed w ith ir on o xide paint.
J. Install flashings.
D. Apply on e ( 1) c oat of bi tuminous paint to concealed al uminum an d s teel s urfaces i n co ntact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.
K. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. L. Install h ardware u sing t emplates p rovided. R efer to Section 087100 for installation requirements.
E. Provide liq uid a pplied, s trippable c oating in the shop to all pre-finished surfaces to protect finishes during fabrication, shipping and field handling.
M. Install glass i n acco rdance w ith S ection 0 88100 and in a manner to meet performance criteria. N. Install perimeter sealant an d b acking m aterials i n accordance with Section 079200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
3.3
A. Maximum Variation From P lumb: 0 .06 in ches every 3 f eet n on-cumulative or 1 /16-inch pe r 10 feet, whichever is less.
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify dimensions, t olerances an d m ethod o f attachment with other work.
B. Maximum Misalignment o f T wo A djoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32-inch. 3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust ope rating h ardware f or smooth operation, positive latching a nd c ontinuous c ontact o f perimeter weather-stripping with frames.
C. Verify w all o penings a nd a djoining air and vapor seal m aterials ar e r eady t o r eceive w ork of this Section. 3.2
TOLERANCES
B. Remove strippable coating f rom pr e-finished aluminum surfaces prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. Install a luminum d oor a nd f raming system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specification Manual.
C. Wash d own s urfaces w ith a solution of mild detergent in warm water, ap plied w ith s oft, cl ean wiping cloths. Take care t o r emove d irt f rom corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
B. Separate al uminum an d o ther co rrodible m etal surfaces f rom s ources o f c orrosion o r electrolytic action b y c omplying w ith requirements specified under " Dissimilar M aterials" in A ppendix o f ANSI/AAMA 320.9.
D. Remove excess sealant b y m ethod accep table t o sealant manufacturer.
C. Attach to s tructure to p ermit s ufficient adjustment to acco mmodate co nstruction t olerances an d other irregularities.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work from damage.
END OF SECTION
D. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. E. Align assembly plumb and l evel, f ree o f w arp o r twist. M aintain a ssembly d imensional to lerances, and aligning with adjacent work. F. Provide th ermal is olation w here components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. G. Install sill flashings. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
084100 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
084100 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\084100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS J. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: G lass an d glazing.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Windows: E xtruded a luminum A rchitectural windows, i ncluding t ubular a luminum sections thermally broken w ith s tepped f rame d esign w ith supplementary internal support framing as required, factory f abricated, f actory p refinished, f actory glazed, vision glass, related f lashings, extruded break a nd p anning m etal, prefinished extruded aluminum sills, anchorage and attachment devices, and window units conforming to the following configurations:
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Prefinished Extruded Aluminum Thermally Broken Windows with F ixed C asement; and Shop Glazed Insulated G lass U nits; I ncluding All Attachments, Accessories, O perating H ardware an d I nsect Screens. 1. Glazing: Types indicated o n the Drawings, and specified in Section 088100.
1. Fixed Glazed Units. B. Frame Depth: All windows: 4-1/2” x 2-1/2”.
C. Installation of Joint Sealant a t P erimeter J oints Provided Under Provisions of Section 079200. 1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION
C. Window classification (Grade): 1. Provide a luminum w indow units meeting or exceeding t he following te sting p erformance rating as established b y V oluntary Specifications for Aluminum P rime W indows and Sliding Glass D oors; A AMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: “AW" 70.
NOT
A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and joint backing m aterials p rovided to th is S ection fo r installation. 1.3
D. Glazing: Window Manufacturer shall provide factory i nstalled an d w arranted g lass an d g lazing types as i ndicated o n t he D rawings, and specified in Section 088100.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 024119 - Minor D emolition f or Remodeling: D emolition o f e xisting exterior windows and temporary covering of openings. B. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: Preparation o f ad jacent w ork t o r eceive work of this section. C. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels. D. Section 061000 perimeter shims.
- Rough C arpentry: W
ood
E. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: P lastic laminate window stools for the new windows. F. Section 072100 - Building I nsulation: B insulation at window shim spaces.
att
G. Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing a nd T rim: Installation of flashing a ssociated w ith window installation. H. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials and installation criteria. I. Section 084100 – Aluminum E ntrances a nd Storefront: Installation o f o perable w indows in storefront framing system. ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
E. Insect Screens: Provide for all windows. 1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live l oads cau sed b y p ositive an d n egative w ind pressure act ing normal to p lane o f w all a s calculated in accordance with the Exposure "C" of the International Building Code, 2006 Edition, and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Standards: E xcept as o therwise indicated, requirements for a luminum w indows, t erminology and s tandards o f p erformance, an d fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA. C. Performance: E xcept as otherwise indicated, comply w ith a ir in filtration te sts, w ater r esistance tests and a pplicable lo ad te sts s pecified in AAMA/WDMA 101/ I.S.2/NAFS f or t ype a nd
085113 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
classification o f w indow u nits r equired in each case.
any w indow, s ash o r ve ntilator member shall not exceed 0.2% of its span.
D. Testing: W here m anufacturer's s tandard w indow units comply with requirements and have been tested i n acco rdance w ith s pecified t ests, provide certification b y m anufacturer s howing compliance with s uch te sts; o therwise, p erform r equired te sts through a r ecognized t esting a gency a pproved i n advance by the Architect and provide certified test results.
b. Uniform Load Deflection Test: 1) No deflection in excess of L /175 of any unsupported span ( meeting r ails, muntins, m ullions, f rames, e tc.) of test unit, at both p ositive and negative pressure 4. Condensation Resistance Factor: Test in accordance with AAMA 1503 standards.
1. Test reports: No more than two years (2) old.
a. Thermal p erformance s hall h ave a condensation resistance factor o f n ot l ess than 78 (glass) and 57 (frame).
2. No “Downsize” testing allowed. E. Specific P erformance R equirements – Fixed Windows: W indows s hall c onform t o s pecified standards an d t he f ollowing, w hichever ar e t he more stringent:
5. Thermal T ransmission ( Conductive U -Value): Test in acco rdance w ith A AMA 1 503 us ing same test unit size and configuration as used for the Condensation Resistance Factor test.
1. Air I nfiltration T est: T est in accordance with ASTM E 283 w ith t he s ash i n a cl osed an d locked position.
a. Conductive th ermal tr ansmission ( U-Value) shall not b e m ore t han 0 .58 BTU/Hr/SF/0 degrees F.
a. Air in filtration s hall n ot e xceed 0 .10 cubic feet per minute per foot of crack length for operable u nits an d 0.06 cfm/sq.ft. fo r fi xed units w hen t ested a t 6. 24 ps f pr essure differential. 2. Water R esistance T est: W ith the window ventilators closed and locked, te st u nit in accordance w ith A STM E 547 an d at static air pressure d ifference o f m inimum 12.00 psf, apply f ive g allons o f w ater per square foot of window area to the exterior face of the unit for a period of 15 minutes. No leakage shall occur. 3. Structural T est P erformance R equirements: Test unit in a ccordance with ASTM E 330 with the p rimary s et o f t he s ash i n t he cl osed and locked pos ition, a nd the secondary s et o f t he sash in the full open position. Test at a static air pressure difference of 70 psf. with high pressure applied first on one side of the unit and then on the other side. a. Uniform Load Structural Test: 1) Test s tatic a ir p ressure d ifference at 1 .5 times the design wind class. 2) Test R esults: N o g lass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support a rms o r a ctuating mechanisms, n or an y o ther d amage that would c ause t he w indow to be inoperable. Permanent d eformation o f
085113 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
6. Life C ycle T esting: T est i n accordance with AAMA 910 a nd a s r equired f or AW window rating. 1.6
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate o pening e levations a nd dimensions, c onfigurations, f astening types, methods of gl azing, f ramed o pening r equirements and tolerances, mullion d etails, flashing a nd drainage details, thermal break d etails, window system o perators, w eatherstripping d etails, expansion provisions, af fected r elated w ork; installation requirements; and termination details. C. Product D ata: P rovide w indow c omponent specifications an d ch aracteristics, fabrication methods, anchorage and fasteners, glass and glazing specifications, and internal drainage details. D. Samples: S ubmit s amples illustrating window frame section, s creen an d f rame, p refinished aluminum surfaces and glazing materials. 1. Submit samples of operating hardware. E. Certification: W here m anufacturer’s s tandard window u nits c omply w ith s pecified requirements and h ave b een t ested, p rovide cer tification b y window manufacturer s howing compliance with such tests; otherwise, p erform required tests through a r ecognized i ndependent t esting ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
laboratory o r ag ency an d p rovide cer tified t est t o the Architect.
3. Window S upplier s hall pa y for all te sts a nd retests.
F. Manufacturer’s products f ailing t o m eet certification, d esign a nd/or te sting requirements will constitute grounds for bid or product rejection.
4. Independent Testing Agency as approved by the Architect.
1.7
5. If any one test fails, one additional test shall be made above and beyond t he o riginal s pecified quantity of tests.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer: C ompany specializing in manufacturing a nd i nstalling c ommercial a nd institutional aluminum windows with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
1.12
A. Coordinate th e W ork o f th is S ection w ith a ir and vapor barrier and all other related trades. 1.13
WARRANTY
A. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Protect p re-finished a luminum s urfaces w ith wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings t hat b ond w hen e xposed to sunlight or weather.
B. Warranty: The window manufacturer/installer shall guarantee t heir w ork ag ainst m aterial and workmanship d efects after completion a nd f inal acceptance of the Work. D efects d ue t o f aulty materials or w orkmanship d eveloped d uring t he guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
C. Handle w ork o f t his S ection i n accordance with AAMA Curtain Wall Manual #10. 1.9
COORDINATION
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f a luminum w indows and other c onstruction to w hich w indows m ust f it, b y accurate field measurements b efore f abrication; show r ecorded m easurements o n f inal shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.11
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1. Wausau Windows. 2. EFCO Aluminum Windows. 3. TRACO Aluminum Windows. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
nder p rovisions o f S ection
WINDOW FIELD TESTING
A. On-Site Tests - Installed Operable Windows: 1. Conduct O n-site te sts f or a ir a nd water infiltration as specified in T his S ection b y a Certified Testing Laboratory u nder p rovisions of Section 01460. Architect s hall s elect a t random a minimum of three (3) window units at the job site to be tested. 2. Repair o r r eplace an y w indow f ailing t o m eet the p erformance r equirements s pecified herein until u nit c omplies w ith a ll performance requirements, without any additional costs to the Owner. ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
2.2
MATERIALS A. Aluminum E xtrusions: ASTM B221; 6063 -T5 or T6 a luminum a lloy, w ith n ot le ss th an 0.125 inch wall thickness. Alloy and temper recommended by window m anufacturer f or s trength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, s tainless s teel o r o ther materials warranted b y m anufacturer t o b e n oncorrosive and compatible w ith a luminum w indow members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units.
085113 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1. Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior, except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. 2. Provide non-magnetic s tainless s teel Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, where required, o r special tamper-proof fasteners. 3. Locate al l f asteners i n a m anner not to disturb the thermal break construction of window units. C. Anchors, Clips and A ccessories: D epending o n strength and corrosion-inhibiting r equirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A123. D. Window Glazing: F actory g lazed with minimum one inch i nsulated g lass pe r S ection 088100. Minimum air space in insulated glass, 1/2 inch. Set glass o n t wo 1 /4 i nch t hick, 1 i nch wide, 3 inches long neoprene s etting blocks a nd against a minimum 1/8 inch thick glazing tape, b edded i n a sealant compatible t o t he ed ge s ealant o n t he insulated glass. G lass h eld i n p lace b y ex truded aluminum gl azing s tops c ontaining a m inimum o f 1/8-inch thick ne oprene ga skets. P rovide a perimeter b ead o f s ilicone at t he ex terior, sealing glass to g lazing le g. G lazing le g a nd b eads; 3 /4inch minimum in height. G lass shall have nominal 1/4-inch edge clearance from metal frame. E. Sealant: Provide elastomeric type as recommended by w indow manufacturer for joint size and movement, t o remain p ermanently el astic, nonshrinking a nd no n-migrating. P rovide product complying with AAMA Specification #800. 2.3
FABRICATION A. General: P rovide m anufacturer's s tandard fabrication and accessories t hat co mply w ith specified standards, except to extent more specific or m ore s tringent r equirements are indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage o f w indow uni ts a nd prepare co mplete p re-glazing at f actory o f approved manufacturer. B. Window Mem bers: M anufactured Aluminum, all window members. S econdary m embers, s uch as friction tabs, shoes, w eatherstripping g uides, e tc. shall be of aluminum or a material compatible with aluminum. 1. Mainframe and S ash Mem bers: N ominal w all thickness no t l ess t han [0.062] [ 0.125] inches, either in tegral o r a pplied. F rame s ill member:
085113 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School nominal t hickness o f no t less than [0.125] [0.092] inches. 2. The M aster F rame D epth: N ot l ess t han [4] inches and not more than [4-1/2] inches in depth. C. Thermal B reak: P rovide a continuous uninterrupted t hermal break ar ound t he en tire perimeter of the f rame an d al l s ashes u sing manufactures standard construction t hat m eets specified performance requirements. N o b ridging by any metal conductors at any point. D. Construction: 1. Assembly: A ssemble windows i n a s ecure and workmanlike manner to perform as specified. 2. Mainframe Joints: B utt type, coped and joined neatly and secured by means of screws anchored in integral ports. S eal the main frame at the sill on th e o utside w ith a n arrow j oint sealant meeting AAMA #800. 3. Sash: All sash construction screwed together to facilitate eas y r epair. T op an d b ottom s ash meeting r ails s hall in terlock in th e closed position. The m eeting r ail in terlock s hall consist o f tw o s eparate a nd d istinct m etal interlocks c ontaining a fin-seal as an i ntegral part of both metal interlocks. E. Mullions - Other Structural Members: W hen mullion uni ts o ccur, w hether t hey a re jointed by integral mullions, in dependent m ullions o r b y a combination o f f rame m embers, t he resulting members must be capable of withstanding the load outlined under th e U niform L oad D eflection T est requirements, as specified, without deflecting more than 1/175th of its span. 1. Construct independent or integral mullions with a thermal break, as specified, when used to join windows. P rovide ev idence o f co mpliance by mathematical calculations. F. Glazing: A ll u nits, f actory glazed as indicated above. Test and certify all insulated glass units and apply the r espective I GCC-CBA level certification number on the glass spacer. G. Weather Protection: 1. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages o r means o f d rainage to c onduct condensation and infiltrating water to exterior. H. Screens: Provide screens o n o perating v ents as indicated on the Drawings. ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 1. Screen frames: Extruded aluminum w ith corners mitered and crimped with corner gussets.
Addition and Remodeling
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Screening Fabric: 18 x 1 6 a luminum m esh retained in screen frames with vinyl splines that permit easy replacement. P rovide a m inimum of four spring loaded plungers from the inside to hold screens firmly in Place.
A. Examine areas and conditions und er w hich W ork of th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
I. Aluminum S ills a nd tw o-piece thermally b roken head starters: P recision machine and fit the Frame Sill to th e j ambs a nd f asten w ith a minimum of three s tainless s teel s crews p er co rner. Provide frame sill with a minimum slope o f 1 5 percent for proper drainage. P rovide a luminum s ill s ections with a minimum n ominal w all th ickness o f 0 .125 inches; include all cleats and fasteners.
B. Verify w all o penings a nd a djoining air and vapor seal m aterials ar e r eady t o r eceive w ork of this Section. C. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions. 3.2
B. Remove ex isting w ork car efully, av oid damage to existing work to remain. C. Perform al l o ther o perations as necessary to prepare ope nings f or proper installation and operation of new units.
FINISHES A. General: C omply w ith t he NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative t o application and designations of finishes.
3.3
B. Preparation: P rovide cl eaning, degreasing a nd chromate conversion co ating as standard s ubstrate preparation. C. Exposed A luminum S urfaces: Man ufacturer's standard 2 -coat t hermocured system, complying with AAMA 2605, c omposed of s pecially formulated in hibitive p rimer a nd fluorocarbon color topcoat with 0.25 mil and 1.0 mil minimum respective t hickness’ c ontaining no t l ess t han 7 0 percent polyvinyldene fluoride resin by weight, PPG "Duranar" or approved equal. 1. Color s elected b y t he A rchitect f rom manufacturer’s full color range. D. Provide a liquid applied, strippable c oating in th e shop to all prefinished surfaces to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. E. Apply coat of bi tuminous pa int t o c oncealed aluminum and steel s urfaces i n co ntact w ith cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PREPARATION A. Do no t l eave a ny o penings unc overed a t e nd of working d ay, d uring w ind-driven p recipitation o r during excessively cold weather.
J. Panning an d B reak Met al: Provide with a minimum nominal wall thickness of 0.125 inches; include al l cl eats, fasteners and acces sories as recommended b y t he m anufacturer f or proper installation. 2.4
EXAMINATION
DISPOSAL A. Existing windows and o ther te mporary m aterials removed from site become t he p roperty o f t he Contractor who s hall p romptly r emove s ame an d legally dispose of at n o a dditional c ost to th e Owner. B. Comply with all applicable laws, rules, regulations and codes.
3.4
INSTALLATION A. Install w indow f rames, gl ass a nd glazing and hardware i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s instructions. B. Attach w indow f rame an d s hims to perimeter opening t o acco mmodate co nstruction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align windows plumb, le vel a nd tr ue to lin e, without warp o r r ack o f f rames o r s ash. Maintain dimensional to lerances, a ligning w ith adjacent work. A nchor s ecurely i n p lace. Separate aluminum an d o ther co rrodible s urfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. D. Set s ill m embers an d o ther m embers i n bed of compound over flashing m embrane t hrough
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
085113 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
openings to provide weather tight c onstruction. Seal units following in stallation as r equired to provide weather tight system. E. Provide th ermal is olation where co mponents penetrate or d isrupt b uilding in sulation. P ack fibrous insulation in s him s paces a t p erimeter o f assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Coordinate attachment and s eal o f p erimeter ai r and vapor barrier materials. G. Install p erimeter s ealant, b acking m aterials, an d installation c riteria in a ccordance w ith S ection 079200. 3.5
TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level o r P lumb: 0 .06 inches every 3 ft no n-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating sash and h ardware t o pr ovide tight f it a t c ontact p oints a nd a t w eatherstripping, for smooth operation and weather tight closure. B. Remove strippable coating. C. Clean al uminum s urfaces p romptly after installation o f w indows, e xercising c are to avoid damage t o p rotection co atings an d finishes. Remove ex cess g lazing an d s ealant co mpounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. D. Clean glass promptly after installation of windows. Remove g lazing an d s ealant co mpounds, d irt a nd other substances.
3.7
PROTECTION A. Initiate all protection a nd o ther p recautions required to p revent damage or deterioration to windows prior to time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
085113 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\085113CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 086250 - TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 1. With Dome Edge Protection Band, domes must meet fire rating r equirements o f 2 006 International Building Code.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
2. Self-Ignition Temperature: Greater t han 6 50 degrees F per ASTM D1929.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and O ther C onditions), G eneral Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
3. Smoke Density: No greater than 450 per ASTM E84 in way intended for use. Classification C. 4. Rate of B urn M aximum: 2 .5 i nches/min Classification CC-2 per ASTM D635.
B. Tubular S kylights a nd F rames; I ncluding Roof dome, R eflective T ubing, D aylight D immer and Diffuser; Including Accessories and Attachments.
5. Rate of Burn E xtent M aximum: O ne ( 1) i nch. Classification CC-1 per ASTM D635.
C. Flashing Curbs. 1.2
6. Impact R esistance: M eets A STM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996 f or m issle an d cy clic pressure differential tests.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: F abricated steel framed opening.
F. Allow for expansion and contraction within system components caused b y a cy cling s urface temperature r ange o f 1 70 d egrees F w ithout causing detrimental ef fects t o s ystem o r components.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood curbs and blocking. C. Section 075310 - Bituminous B uilt-Up Roofing: Roofing system.
G. The tubular skylight manufacturer s hall b e responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the skylight system.
D. Section 076200 - Sheet M etal F lashing a nd Trim: Prefinished counter flashing. 1.3
H. System to accommodate, without damage to system or co mponents, o r d eterioration o f perimeter seal; movement with system; movement between system and perimeter framing co mponents; d ynamic loading a nd r elease of loads; an d d eflection o f structural support framing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Complete tubular skylight assemblies shall meet the following performance requirements: 1. Uniform Load T est: N o b reakage, d amage t o fasteners or hardware parts that would make the skylight i noperable o r cau se excessive permanent delfection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf or Negiative Load of 70 psf. B. Safety F actor: All units to be tested with a Safety Factor of three (3) for positive pressure and two (2) for negative pressure, acting n ormal t o p lane o f roof in accordance with ASTM E330. C. Air Infiltration T est: N ot to e xceed 0 .30 c fm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when testing in accordance with ASTM E283. D. Water R esistance T est: No u ncontrolled w ater leakage at 10.5 psf pressure differential with water rate o f 5 g allons/hr/sf w hen tested in accordance with ASTM E547. E. Fire Testing:
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\086250CGA.DOC
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate d etailed plans, profiles and c onfigurations, d imensions, gl azing materials, fastening methods, sealants, anchors, and t ypes of formed flashings and closures. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, use limitations and recommendations for the entire system, c haracteristics o f lig ht admitted, and insulation value of unit. D. Samples: S ubmit a verification sample of acr ylic plastic glazing material in specified color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special p rocedures, p erimeter co nditions r equiring special attention.
086250 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.5
Farmington Elementary School B. Skylight W arranty: S tate th at all materials and workmanship, including c overage f or weather and water tightness of a ssembly and s eal w ith r oofing system, p rovided ar e guaranteed ag ainst d efects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Installer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing and installing the products specified in this S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) y ears documented experience. B. Materials: For each type of materials required for the Work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the products of one (1) manufacturer.
1.6
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Project Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
C. Finish W arranty: S tate th at a ll m aterials and workmanship, including finish p eeling, c hipping, chalking, fading, abnormal a ging o r d eterioration, and f ailure t o p erform as r equired, p rovided ar e guaranteed ag ainst d efects af ter co mpletion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or w orkmanship d eveloped d uring t he guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
B. Deliver materials and products to the site in clearly labeled packages and containers. C. Store and handle materials and products at the site in strict compliance w ith m anufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. D. Protect materials and products a t th e s ite f rom damage d ue t o s unlight, w eather, ex cessive temperatures and construction operations.
1. Warranty P eriod: F ive (5) y ears f rom d ate o f Project Substantial Completion.
E. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual lo cations o f tubular skylights a nd other construction to w hich th e s kylights m ust f it by accurate field measurements b efore fabrication; show r ecorded m easurements o n f inal shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.8
B. Coordinate this section with dimensions, tolerances, and method of at tachment w ith o ther adjacent work. WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s w ritten w arranty u nder provisions of Section 017836.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Solatube International, Inc. – “Model 330 DS-O Curb Cap Open Ceiling.” B. Substitutions: U 016000.
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the installation of roofing system.
1.9
2.1
2.2
nder p rovisions o f S ection
MATERIALS A. Tubular Skylights – General: Transparent roofmounted s kylight d ome a nd s elf-flashing c urb, reflective tu be a nd c eiling le vel d iffuser a ssembly to transfer sunlight to in terior s paces; c omplying with ICC AC-16. 1. Tubular Skylight Model: M odel S 330 D S-O SolaMaster Series Solatube . B. Dome: CC2 Acrylic, 0 .143 i nches t hick w ith visible lig ht tr ansmission o f 9 2% a nd UV light transmission of 0.03%.; UV and impact resistant..
086250 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\086250CGA.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
C. Reflector: SpectraLight Infinity f abricated f ro aluminum sheet meeting ASTM B209 requirements, alloy and t emper as r equired by manufacturer t o s uit f orming o perations a nd finish requirements. a. Interior F inish: H igh r eflectance s pecular finish o n ex posed r eflective s urface. Specular r eflectance f or v isible s pectrum greater than 9 9% an d t otal s olar s pectrum reflectance less than 93%.
L. Fasteners: N on-magnetic s tainless s teel o r o ther non-corrosive metal as r ecommended b y t he manufacturer. M atch f inish o f exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weather strip locking out dust but allowing moisture to escape. E. Tube R ing: I njection m olded P VC with butyl glazing rope to seal. . F. Roof B ase F lashing: O ne-piece, s eamless, leakproof f lashing a s ba se s upport for dome and top of tube. Curb cap with inside dimensions 27” x 27” to cover curb.
3.2
3.3
J. Daylight D immer a nd C ontrols: Used t o ch ange amount of light allowed in through lighting system. Provide with switch control. 1. Daylight Dimmer: Type D Electro-mechanically actuated d aylight v alve; f or u niversal in put voltages ranging between 90 and 277 V at 50 or 60 H z; m aximum c urrent d raw of 50 m a per unit; controlled b y lo w v oltage, s eries T ype T02: ci rcuited, 4 co nductor, s ize 2 2 cable; providing da ylight ou tput be tween 2 a nd 100 percent. Provided w ith d immer s witch a nd cable.
B. Isolation: W here metal surfaces o f units are to be installed in c ontact w idth n oncompatible m etal o r corrosive s ubstances, i ncluding w ood, a pply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Cap Flashing: Where cap f lashing i s r equired as component of a ccessory, i nstall t o pr ovide adequate w aterproof ov erlap w ith r oofing or roof flashing (as counter flashing). Seal with thick bead of sealant, except where o verlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation.
2. Switch: T ype S W, Man ufacturer-specific lo w voltage D C D P/DT switch ( white) r equired to operate D aylight D immer. N ote: only one switch is r equired p er s et of synchronously controlled dimmers.
K. 117V P ower s upply a nd s witch c ontrols v ariable Butterfly Valve.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\086250CGA.DOC
INSTALLATION A. General: Comply w ith manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation or roof deck and other substrates to receive skylight units, and roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required t o en sure t hat each el ement o f t he work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. A nchor uni ts securely t o s upporting s tructural s ubstrates, adequate t o w ithstand l ateral an d thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures.
I. Extension Tubes: As required to fit design.
3. Cable: T ype C A, T wo c onductor l ow voltage cable (500 foot) for m ultiple u nit D C connection.
PREPARATION A. Contact between al uminum an d d issimilar m etals shall receive a p rotective coating of asphaltic paint for the prevention o f e lectrolytic a ction a nd corrosion.
G. Flashing: FCM Curb Cap. H. Diffuser Assembly: D iffuser to a ttach d irectly to bottom of 24” e xtension t ube. D iffuser r ing injection m olded w hite a crylic. S eal: O pen c ell foam diffuser seal to keep out dust and bugs.
EXAMINATION
3.4
CLEANING A. Cleaning under provisions of Section 017400. B. Clean ex posed m etal an d p lastic s urfaces in accordance w ith m anufacturer's i nstructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.
086250 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Clean tubular skylight units, inside a nd o ut, no t more than five (5) days prior to date of Substantial Completion. 3.5
PROTECTION A. Protection of finished work u nder pr ovision of Section 017300.
3.6
MAINTENANCE A. Present O wner’s R epresentative w ith maintenance manual and instructions for cleaning tubular skylight.
END OF SECTION
086250 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\086250CGA.DOC
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE B. Maintenance D ata: I nclude d ata o n operating hardware, l ubrication r equirements, an d inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Provide special wrenches an d t ools ap plicable to each d ifferent o r special hardware component.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and O ther C onditions), G eneral Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Door Hardware; as Indicated on the Drawings and Door Schedule, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments.
2. Provide m aintenance t ools an d acces sories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.5
A. Provide under provisions of Section 014300.
1. Steel Doors an d F rames, Wood Doors, and Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.
B. Perform Work in accordance w ith t he f ollowing requirements:
C. Cylinders for A ccess D oors an d P anels and Operable Partitions.
1.2
D. Thresholds, W eather-Striping, S eals a nd D oor Gaskets.
1. ADA - Requirements for Making Buildings and Facilities A ccessible to and U sable by Physically Disabled People.
E. Hardware Schedule at End of Section.
2. NFPA 80.
PRODUCT FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
3. UL 10C.
NOT
A. Furnish hardware t emplates t o S ections 062000, 081100, 081416, and 084100 f or door a nd f rame preparation.
C. Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies, Including Hardware: A ssemblies and components to comply with positive pressure and B-Label requirements. 1.6
B. Furnish cylinders to Sections 083100, 083300 and 083613. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
B. Hardware S upplier: C ompany s pecializing i n supplying commercial and in stitutional d oor hardware with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate l ocations a nd m ounting heights o f each t ype o f hardware, electrical characteristics and connection r equirements, an d schedule for all hardware groups.
C. Hardware S upplier P ersonnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the Work of this Section.
C. Hardware Schedule: Hardware submittal shall be in the recognized DHI vertical format. H orizontal schedules will be rejected. D. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. E. Samples: S ubmit o ne s ample o f h inge, la tch-set, and closer illustrating style, color, and finish. F. Samples: Will be returned to supplier. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special p rocedures, an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submittals under provisions of Section 017823. DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience.
A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to I nternational B uilding C ode, L atest Edition for r equirements a pplicable to f ire-rated doors, frames and hardware. B. Products R equiring E lectrical C onnection: Listed and classified b y U nderwriters' L aboratories, I nc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Handicap Requirements: D oors to s tairs ( other than e xit s tairs), lo ading p latforms, b oiler ro oms, stages, and doors serving other hazardous locations shall ha ve knur led o r o ther similar approved 087100 - 1 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling marking on door lever handles o r c ross b ars i n accordance with local building codes.
Farmington Elementary School
2.1
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
D. Fire Rated D oor an d Frame Assemblies: Require assemblies an d c omponents t o c omply w ith positive pressure and S-Label requirements. 1.8
1. Bommer. 2. Hager.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
3. Ives.
A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
4. Stanley. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each p ackage with door ope ning c ode t o match hardware schedule.
C. Acceptable manufacturers with t heir r espective catalog numbers are as follows: Hager BB1279 BB1191 BB1168 BB1199
C. Deliver k eys to O wner b y c ertified mail or direct hand carry direct from hardware supplier. D. Deliver h ardware r equired t o b e i nstalled d uring fabrication of h ollow m etal, w ood, a luminum o r stainless steel doors prepaid to manufacturer. 1.9
Bommer BB5000 BB5002 BB5004 BB5006
Ives 5BB1 5BB1ss 5BB1HW 5BB1HWss
1. Two (2) hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high.
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with other directly affected Sections i nvolving m anufacturer o f an y internal r einforcement for d oor hardware. Furnish a copy of t he ap proved h ardware s chedule an d al l pertinent templates or template information to each fabricator of m aterial f actory-prepared f or t he installation of hardware.
2. One (l) additional h inge p er l eaf f or each additional 30 in ches in h eight, o r f raction thereof. 3. Standard weight, ball b earing hi nge 5 BB1 f or interior openings through 36 inches wide. 4. Heavy w eight, f our b all b earing hi nge 5BB1HW for interior openings over 36 i nches wide.
WARRANTY
A. Provide f ive ( 5) y ear m anufacturer's w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
5. Heavy w eight, f our b all b earing hi nge 5BB1HWss x N RP f or e xterior o ut s winging openings.
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including coverage for o peration o f al l h ardware s pecified, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
6. Size: Thickness
2-1/4” Doors 1-3/4” Doors 1-3/8” Doors
Size
5 inch by 5 inch 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch 3-1/3 inch by 3-1/2 inch
7. Provide NRP ( Non-Removable P ins) f or ou tswinging lockable doors.
C. Replace shortages and incorrect items with correct materials at no additional cost to the Owner. D. At c ompletion o f p roject, q ualified f actory representative s hall i nspect d oor cl oser installations. After this inspection, a certified letter shall be sent to th e A rchitect r eporting o n conditions, verifying that c loser h as b een p roperly installed and adjusted.
Stanley FBB179 FBB191 FBB168 FBB199
D. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows:
COORDINATION
1.10
BUTT HINGES
2.2
CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: Ives
Stanley
Hager
112HD
661HD
780-112HD
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
087100 - 2 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
C. Provide one of t he a bove t hree m odels of continuous hinges as appropriate for the type, inset, DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
and thickness of door where specified. Coordinate hinge t ypes w ith t he d oor s upplier. W hen edge guard is called out, use hi nge s uch a s H G305 t o wrap hinge edge of door. 2.3
FLUSH BOLTS STRIKES
AND
DUST
2.5
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Von Duprin, Inc. – 99/33 Series.
PROOF
2. Precision Hardware, Inc. - Apex Series (2000) B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
A. Subject t o co mpliance with r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
C. Furnish exit device series and function specified in the H ardware G roups. V on D uprin numbers are referenced in the hardware groups.
1. Door Controls. 2. Hager
D. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. E xit devices for labeled doors s hall b e U L l isted as “Fire Exit Hardware.”
3. Ives. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
E. Where a vailable o ption a llows, p deadlocking latches on all devices.
C. Acceptable manufacturers with t heir r espective catalog numbers are as follows: Ives FB458 FB31P FB41P DP-2
Door Controls 780F 842 942 80
G. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim or cylinder dogging. H. Provide cylinder dogging feature for non-rated exit devices. I. Provide k eyed r emovable m ullions w ith IC cylinders, as specified in the hardware groups J. If hardware groups call out wide style devices and the s tyle w idth d oes n ot p ermit th e u se o f th is device, then use the narrow style device.
CYLINDERS AND LOCKS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Schlage
2.6
2. Corbin/Russwin.
1. Von Duprin - 6000 Series.
4. Best B. Provide cylinders for Sections 083300 and 083613. C. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. Series 93K Series
Design 14D
D. Cylinders: M anufacturer’s s tandard r emovable core, 7-pin. E. Back-Sets: 2-3/4 inches. F. Strikes: P rovide w rought b oxes a nd s trikes w ith proper lip length to protect tr im b ut not to p roject more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame, or inactive leaf. Where required, provide o pen b ack s trike, protected to allow practical and secure operation.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith requirements provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
3. Sargent
Manufacturer Best
rovide
F. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lock-set levers.
Hager 282D 292D 291D 280X
D. Labeled openings, furnish automatic flush bolt set as applicable, for the inactive leaf of pairs of doors. Furnish dust proof strike DP-2 for the bottom bolt. 2.4
EXIT DEVICES
2. Folger Adam – 310 Series B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Acceptable manufacturers with t heir r espective catalog numbers are as noted above. D. Provide electric s trikes d esigned f or u se w ith th e type of l ocks s hown at each o pening w here specified. E. Electric Strikes shall be U L lis ted a s B urglaryResistant Electric Door Strikes and where required shall be UL listed as Electric Strikes for Fire Doors and F rames. P rovide non fail-safe t ype el ectric strikes, unless otherwise specified.
087100 - 3 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
F. Provide t ransformers an d r ectifiers f or each strike as r equired. Verify v oltage w ith e lectrical contractor. 2.7
7. Closer shall have all weather fluid, powder coat finish, and a ten (10) year warranty. 8. All p arallel a rm m ounted c loser s hall b e installed with 5th hole s pacer b lock w ith f ifth screw. Shoe support must be used where frames are 5-3/4 inch or less.
COORDINATORS A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith requirements provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
9. Pressure relief valve operation is not acceptable in any condition.
1. Ives; Model No. COR. 2. Door Control; Model No. 600 3. Hager; Model No. 297D B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Acceptable manufacturers with t heir r espective catalog numbers are as noted above. D. Furnish a c oordinator f or l abeled pa irs of doors equipped with automatic flush bolts. E. Furnish f iller b ars f or to tal o pening w idth, closer mounting b rackets, carry bars, an d s pecial preparation for top latches where applicable. 2.8
CLOSER A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
2.9
PROTECTIVE PLATES A. Where protective kick-plates ( KP) ar e specified in the Hardware Schedule, furnish plates 2 inches less than d oor w idth a nd 1 0 i nches in height. Where bottom r ail d imension o f th e d oor is too small to accommodate 10 inch height, p rovide ki ck-plate one (1) inch less than rail height. B. Provide 0 .050 i nch t hick material, c ountersunk for screws, and beveled four edges.
2.10
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Glynn-Johnson. 2. Rixson Firemark
1. LCN - 4010/4110-EDA Series. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. General Requirements: 1. Closer f or E xterior D oors: Equip closer for exterior doors, a nd a ll door s ov er 36 i nches wide w ith c oil s pring p ower a djustment and reversible f oot t o i ncrease l atching p ower an d 70 degrees adjustable back check. 2. Furnish no n-sized door closer, adjustable to meet m aximum o pening f orce r equirements of ADA. 3. Closer Accessories: P rovide p arallel ar ms, corner brackets, and drop plates as r equired to suit details. 4. Closer f or L abeled D oors: Provide closer for all l abeled an d 20-minute d oors, in cluding inactive leaf and pair of doors. 5. Door Swing: W here a ll c onditions p ermit, a ll doors shall swing 180 degrees. 6. Closer Location: Mount closer on room side of corridor doors, unless otherwise noted in hardware groups.
087100 - 4 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
OVERHEAD STOPS
3. Sargent. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Glynn Johnson products are l isted i n H ardware Schedule. O ther accep table m anufacturers with their respective catalog numbers are as follows: Glynn-Johnson GJ100 GJ900 2.11
Rixson 1 Series 9 Series
Sargent 690 590
WALL AND FLOOR STOPS
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Burns 2. Hager. 3. Ives. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Where w all s tops ar e n ot a pplicable, f urnish overhead stops. D. Ives p roducts ar e l isted i n H ardware Schedule. Other accep table m anufacturers w ith t heir respective catalog numbers are as follows: DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School Ives WS406CCV WS406CCV 2.12
Hager 232W 236W
Addition and Remodeling Burns 570 575
THRESHOLDS, WEATHER AND JAMB GASKETS
2.13
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: STRIPPING
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. National Guard.
B. Exterior and Vestibule Doors: 1. Builders Brass: 290-2. 2. Burns: 26C. 3. Hiawatha: 536B. 4. Ives: 8103-0
2. Pemko.
C. Offset Pulls:
3. Reese.
1. Burns: 39C
4. Zero B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Zero p roducts ar e l isted i n Hardware Schedule. Other accep table m anufacturers w ith t heir respective catalog numbers are as follows: National Guard 425 700NA 9605 C627A 5050 16 423N
PULLS AND PUSH PLATES/BARS
Pemko 171 2891_PK 18041CP 345A(brush) S88 346C 434_RL
Reese S205 755 959 354A F797 R201C 430
Zero 8655 429 8193 8198 188 142 360
D. Where thresholds are specified in hardware groups, provide 8655 thresholds, unless detailed otherwise. Where t hresholds o ccur a t o penings w ith o ne o r more m ullions, th ey s hall b e c ut f or th e m ullions and extended continuously for the entire opening. E. Where w eather-stripping is s pecified in h ardware groups, provide 429, unless detailed otherwise. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weather-stripping being applied to hollow metal frames. F. Where sweeps ar e s pecified i n h ardware g roups, provide 8198, unless detailed otherwise. G. Where d rip/sweeps ar e s pecified i n h ardware groups provide 8198, unless detailed otherwise.
2. Hager 12J 3. Ives: 8190 D. Interior Doors: 1. Builders Brass: 290A. 2. Burns: 25B. 3. Hiawatha: 523A. 4. Ives: 8102-8 E. Flush Doors: 1. Builders Brass: 47-8 x 16. 2. Burns: 57. 3. Hiawatha: 200K. 4. Ives: 8200 8 x 16 F. Doors with 6 Inch Stiles: 1. Builders Brass: 47-4 x 16. 2. Burns: 54. 3. Hiawatha: 200F. 4. Ives: 8200 4 x 16 G. Push Bar (where required, mount back to back with pulls): 1. Builders Brass: 290-2P.
H. Where s moke g asket i s s pecified i n hardware groups, provide 188, unless detailed otherwise.
2. Burns: 422.
I. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide 16 x full frame width, unless detailed otherwise.
4. Ives: 9100
J. Provide Zero 188, National Guard 5050B, Pemko S88D, or R eese F -797 gasket for 20 -minute door s and doors designated for smoke control.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
3. Hiawatha: 108lLBP. H. Push/Pull: 1. Builders Brass: 5050. 2. Burns: 89. 3. Hiawatha: 1457. 087100 - 5 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
I. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.14
ACCESSORIES & ATTACHMENTS
C. Voltage shall be verified with Electrical. 2.18
A. Furnish all necessary hardware accessories such as wood o r machine s crews, b olts, n uts, an chors, toggle bolts, an d o ther f asteners, each o f t he t ype, size, material and finish f or its in tended p urpose and each acco rding t o t he m aterial t o w hich the hardware is being applied. 2.15
A. Provide co mplete el ectrical w iring d iagrams for each opening r eceiving el ectrified h ardware i tems. Show w here and h ow each item of electrified hardware is to be connected. B. Provide wiring diagrams with hardware submission for approval by th e A rchitect, a nd a lso w ith hardware items being delivered to the site.
KEYING
A. Master key or Grand master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory master-key with m anufacturer r etaining p ermanent keying records.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
B. Provide s ix ( 6) m aster-keys f or each master-key set. Provide three (3) change keys for each lock. Provide t wo ( 2) co ntrol k eys f or co re r emoval. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
B. Verify t hat d oors an d f rames ar e r eady to receive Work a nd di mensions a re a s i ndicated on shop drawings.
D. Provide removable core cylinders f or each l ock with construction master-keying. Permanent co res shall be installed upon completion of the project. KEY CABINETS
C. Verify that electric power i s av ailable t o p ower operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 2. Key Control; M228-2480. 3. Telkee; RWC-AWC. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. C. Furnish o ne k ey cab inet w ith a cap acity o f 1 .5 times the number of key sets; prepare the numerical alphabetical and key change index record book; tag all keys; and numerically place permanent file keys in the cabinet. MAGNETIC HOLDERS
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. LCN - SEM-7800 Series. 2. Dor-O-Matic 62100 Series. 3. Edwards 1500 Series. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 087100 - 6 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION A. Prior to h ardware in stallation, C ontractor s hall coordinate a h ardware i nstallation s eminar with a minimum of tw o ( 2) w eeks n otice to a ll p arties involved. T he s eminar i s t o b e c onducted on the installation, s pecifically lo ck-sets, c loser, continuous hinges, exit devices and overhead stops. Manufacturer’s r epresentative f or t he ab ove listed products w ill b e p resent at t he s eminar. Seminar will b e h eld a t th e j ob-site and at tended b y hardware i nstallers (including l ow vo ltage hardware) f or al uminum, s teel d oors an d frames, and w ood door s. T raining t o include use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical product samples.
1. Lund; 1200-1205AA.
2.17
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
C. Submit proposed keying schedule to Architect. If requested, m eet w ith O wner an d A rchitect t o review schedule.
2.16
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use t emplates p rovided b y manufacturer.
hardware
item
C. Mortise an d cu t t o cl ose t olerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished Work.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
D. Remove, cover or p rotect h ardware af ter f itting until paint or other f inish is a pplied; p ermanently install h ardware a fter f inishing o perations are complete.
3. Exit Devices
Von Duprin
4. Cylinders/Locks
Schlage
5. Closer
LCN
E. Mounting Heights:
6. Flush Bolts
Ives
7. Pulls, Push Plates/Bars
Ives
8. Overhead Controls
Glynn Johnson
9. Stops
Ives
10. Thresholds
NGP
11. Weather Stripping
NGP
12. Jamb Gasket
NGP
1. Install hardware at m ounting he ights conforming t o t he r ecommended mounting locations of t he B uilders' H ardware Manufacturers Association. 2. Install wall s tops to e ngage k nobs, levers o r pulls. 3. Install w all a nd m agnetic h olders n ear to p o f doors, bu t n ot m ore t han 78 i nches f rom the finish floor line. F. Set t hresholds f or e xterior door s i n full bed of butyl-rubber or pol yiso-butylene m astic s ealant, forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Secure and permanently anchor thresholds, us ing c ountersunk no n-ferrous s crews to m atch c olor o f th reshold ( stainless steel screws at aluminum thresholds). 3.4
3.8
A. Hardware finishes shall be as follows:
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architectural H ardware C onsultant to in spect installation and certify that hardware and installation has b een furnished a nd installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and this s pecification. L etter s tating compliance shall be s ent to th e A rchitect u pon c ompletion o f the project.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. B. Clean al l h ardware an d r emove al l t ags an d wrappings from the site. C. Instruct O wner's p ersonnel i n p roper a djustment and m aintenance o f d oor h ardware and hardware finishes.
3.6
PROTECTION A. Do not p ermit a djacent Work to damage hardware or finish.
3.7
HARDWARE SCHEDULES A. The f ollowing m anufacturers cat alog n umbers are listed in finish hardware groups:
FINISHES
3.9
1. Exterior Hinges
US32D
2. Interior Hinges
US26D
3. Pulls
US32D
4. Coordinators
USP
5. Locks
US26D
6. Exit Devices
US26D
7. Door Closer
Powder Coat Alum.
8. Overhead Controls
US32D
9. Thresholds
US28 Aluminum
10. Weather Stripping
Anodized Alum.
11. Protective Plates
US32D
12. Miscellaneous Items
US26D
FINISHES AT ALUMINUM ENTRY DOORS A. Hardware finishes shall be as follows: 1. Exterior Hinges
US10B
2. Continuous Hinges
DKBRZ
3. Pulls
US10B
4. Coordinators
USP
5. Locks
US10B
6. Exit Devices
US10B
7. Door Closer
Powder Coat Dk Brz.
8. Overhead Controls
US10B
1. Hinges
Ives
9. Thresholds
US28 Aluminum
2. Continuous Hinges
Ives
10. Weather Stripping
Anodized DK Brz.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
087100 - 7 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.10
Farmington Elementary School
11. Protective Plates
US10B
12. Miscellaneous Items
US10B
HARDWARE GROUPS AND SUFFIXES
A. The following s chedule o f ha rdware gr oups s hall be co nsidered a g uide o nly, an d t he supplier is cautioned t o r efer t o g eneral co nditions, s pecial conditions, a nd th e p reamble to th is S ection. I t shall b e t he hardware s upplier's r esponsibility to furnish all required hardware. B. Refer t o t he d oor s chedule f or h ardware g roup required at each d oor o pening. I gnore hardware groups not used on the door schedule. GROUP 004A
Hinges Passage set Wall stop Kick Plate
Hinges Passage set Hd overhead stop Kick plate
Hinges Privacy set Hd overhead stop Kick plate
GROUP 012
087100 - 8 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Hinges Entrance lock Hd overhead stop Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED 93K0N 900S 8400 10” X 2” LDW
AS SPECIFIED 93K0L 900S 8400 10” X 2” LDW
AS SPECIFIED 93K7AB 900S 8400 10” X 2” LDW
GROUP 014 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Wall stop Kick plate
GROUP 016
GROUP 011F 1 1 1
1 1 1
RE-USE REMAINING EXISTING HARDWARE
AS SPECIFIED 93K0N WS406 8400 10” X 2” LDW
AS SPECIFIED 93K7AB WS406 8400 10”X 2” LDW
GROUP 012F
GROUP 014F
GROUP 010F 1 1 1
Hinges Entrance lock Wall stop Kick Plate
REINSTALL EXISTING HARDWARE AND DOOR IN NEW FRAME
GROUP 010 1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D WS406 8400 10” X 2” LDW
Hinges AS SPECIFIED Storeroom lock 93K7D Hd overhead stop 900S Kick plate 8400 10” x 2” LDW 8400 10" X 2" LDW
Hinges Communicating lock Wall stop Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED 93K7S WS406 8400 10” X 2” LDW
GROUP 024 1 1 1 2 1
Hinges Flushbolts Dust proof strike Storeroom lock Wall stop Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED MANUAL DP2 93K7D WS406 8400 10” X 2” LDW
GROUP 024F98 4 2 2 1
Hinges Flushbolts Dust proof strike Hd overhead stop Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED MANUAL DP2 900S 8400 10” X 2” LDW
MOUNT MANUAL BOLTS ON INSDIE FACE OF EACH LEAF
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
GROUP 024F99 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
Hinges Flushbolts Dust proof strike Storeroom lock Astragal Hd overhead stop Seals Door bottom Threshold Bracket
AS SPECIFIED MANUAL DP2 93K7D 557AA X 56AA 900S 475AA 369A 566A MSLA-10 CUSTOM (MTG FOR OH STOP)
GROUP 030A01 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Passage set Surface closer Kick plate Magnetic hold-open Seals
AS SPECIFIED 93K0N 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW SEM 7800 188S
GROUP 032A 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Entrance lock Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Seals
AS SPECIFIED 93K7AB 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 188S
GROUP 034 1 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
GROUP 034A 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Seals
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 188S
Hinges Storeroom lock Surface closer Kick plate
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Magnetic hold-open Seals
SEM 7800 188S
GROUP 034C 1 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Surface closer Kick plate Seals
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW 188S
GROUP 034E01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Electric strike Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Power supply Relay board Wire diagram Card reader
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 6211 FSE 24VDC 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 510-ULAC DCM1 X CMR By hardware supplier BY OTHERS
GROUP 034S 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Storeroom lock Surface closer Kick plate Seals Door bottom Threshold
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW 475AA 369A 566A MSLA-10
GROUP 040A01 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
Hinges Flushbolts Passage set Coordinator Meeting stile seal Surface closer Kick plate Magnetic hold-open Seals
AS SPECIFIED AUTOMATIC LBB 93K0N COR COMPLETE 8193 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 1" LDW SEM 7800 188S
GROUP 040H
GROUP 034A01 1 1 1
1 1
AS SPECIFIED 93K7D 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW
1 1 1
Hinges Flushbolts Passage set Coordinator
AS SPECIFIED AUTOMATIC LBB 93K0N COR COMPLETE 087100 - 9 of 12
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1 1 2 1
Surface closer Surface closer Kick plate Stop & holder
Farmington Elementary School 4011/4111-E 4111 SHCUSH 8400 10" X 1" LDW WS40
GROUP 050A 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Seals
AS SPECIFIED 99L-BE-F 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 188S
GROUP 050C 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Surface closer Kick plate Seals
AS SPECIFIED 99L-BE-F 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW 188S
GROUP 051 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic device Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
AS SPECIFIED LD99EO 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
GROUP 053C99 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Ic cylinder Rim cyl thumbturn Surface closer Kick plate Seals
AS SPECIFIED 99L-F-2 As required XB11-979 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW 188S
GROUP 054 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic hardware Ic cylinder Rim cyl thumbturn Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
AS SPECIFIED CD99NL As required XB11-979 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
GROUP 054A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Seals
AS SPECIFIED 99NL-F As required 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 188S
GROUP 054B GROUP 051B 1 1 1
Hinges Panic device Surface closer Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED LD99EO 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW
1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic hardware Cylinder turn Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED CD99NL 09-900 NON HANDED As required 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW
GROUP 054C GROUP 053A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Ic cylinder Rim cyl thumbturn Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop Seals
087100 - 10 of 12 Printed on 1/16/2013
AS SPECIFIED 99L-F-2 As required XB11-979 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406 188S
1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Fire exit device Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate Seals
AS SPECIFIED 99NL-F As required 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW 188S
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling 1 Seals GROUP 161
GROUP 054H 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic hardware Cylinder turn Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate Stop & holder
AS SPECIFIED CD99NL 09-900 NON HANDED As required 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS40
1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Push plate Pull plate Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
188S AS SPECIFIED 8200 6" X 16" 8302-0 4" X 16" 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
GROUP 252 GROUP 054H03 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic hardware Cylinder turn Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate
AS SPECIFIED CD99NL 09-900 NON HANDED As required 4111 SHCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW
GROUP 054Z01 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Panic hardware Cylinder turn Ic cylinder Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
Hinges Keyed mullion Fire exit device Fire exit device Ic cylinder Meeting stile seal Mullion seal Surface closer Kick plate Seals
AS SPECIFIED CD99NL 09-900 NON HANDED As required 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
AS SPECIFIED KR9954 99EO-F X 499F 99NL-F X 499F As required 8193 8780 4111 SCUSH 8400 10" X 1" LDW 188S
GROUP 110A01 2 1 2 2 2
Hinges Fire exit device Meeting stile seal Surface closer Kick plate Magnetic hold-open
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Continuous hinge Panic hardware Ic cylinder Pull Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
112HD CD99EO As required 8103-0 4021 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
GROUP 252X
GROUP 064C 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AS SPECIFIED 9927L-BE-F LBR 8193 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 1" LDW SEM 7800
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Continuous hinge Panic hardware Ic cylinder Pull Surface closer Hd overhead stop Kick plate Weatherstrip Rain drip Door sweep Threshold
112HD CD99EO As required 8103-0 4021 100S 8400 10" X 2" LDW BY DR/FR SUPPLIER 142 8198 8655A
1 1
Dps mtg bracket Time delay relay
BY OTHERS DELAY ON MAKE BY OTHERS
GROUP 254 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Continuous hinge Panic hardware Cylinder turn Ic cylinder Pull Surface closer Hd overhead stop
112HD CD99NL-OP 09-900 NON HANDED As required 8103-0 4021 100S
GROUP 254X 1
Continuous hinge
112HD 087100 - 11 of 12 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Panic hardware Ic cylinder Pull Surface closer Hd overhead stop Weatherstrip Rain drip Door sweep Threshold
Farmington Elementary School CD99NL-OP As required 8103-0 4021 100S BY DR/FR SUPPLIER 142 8198 8655A
END OF SECTION
087100 - 12 of 12 Printed on 1/16/2013
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\087100kbcd.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 088100 - GLASS AND GLAZING 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
3. Maintain continuous ai r an d v apor b arrier throughout glazed a ssembly f rom gl ass p ane t o heel bead of glazing sealant.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as cal culated i n acco rdance with International Building Code, Exposure “C”.
B. Glass an d G lazing; as I ndicated o n the Drawings, Specified Herein; for th e F ollowing B uilding Systems:
C. Limit glass deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of g lazing m aterials, w hichever i s less.
1. Steel Doors and Frames, Wood Doors,
D. Provide glass an d g lazing t hat h as b een p roduced, fabricated a nd in stalled to withstand normal thermal mo vement, w ind l oading a nd impact loading (where a pplicable), w ithout f ailure including l oss or breakage o f gl ass, failure o f sealant or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and g lazing m aterials, an d other defects in the Work.
2. Aluminum Entrances and Storefront, 3. Aluminum Windows. C. Provide the following glass types 1. Flat Glass Types: a. GL-01: Float Glass. b. GL-02: Safety (Tempered) Glass.
1. Normal Thermal Movement is d efined as t hat resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 d egrees F an d f rom a co nsequent temperature r ange w ithin g lass an d g lass framing members of 180 degrees F.
2. Sealed Insulating Glass Types: a. GL-13: Insulated Low E Safety Glass Units. D. Sealant f or G lass an d G lazing S hall Be a P art o f This Section.
2. Deterioration o f I nsulating G lass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage w hich r esults i n i ntrusion o f dirt or moisture, internal condensation o r f ogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.
E. Mirrors. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and backup material. B. Section 081100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and frames.
3. Deterioration of Laminated G lass i s d efined as the development o f m anufacturing d efects including edge separation o r d elamination th at materially obstructs vision through glass.
C. Section 0821416- Wood Doors: Glazed doors. D. Section 084100 - Aluminum E ntrances a nd Storefront: Glazed doors and frames.
4. Deterioration o f C oated G lass i s defined as the development of manufacturing defects including peeling, c racking o r o ther i ndications o f deterioration in metallic coating d ue to normal conditions of use.
E. Section 085113 - Aluminum W indows: G lazed windows. 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass a nd gl azing m aterials o f th is S ection shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction w ith m aterials d escribed in Section 079200.
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product D ata o n G lass T ypes S pecified: P rovide structural, p hysical a nd e nvironmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 088100 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Product Data on G lazing C ompounds: P rovide chemical, f unctional, an d en vironmental characteristics, lim itations, s pecial application requirements. Identify available colors.
necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
D. Samples: Submit minimum tw elve ( 12) in ch square samples o f each t ype o f g lass i ndicated (including assembled in sulating g lass ty pes) illustrating color and finish.
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Glass Association of N orth A merica ( GANA) "Glazing Manual" and " Sealant M anual", ex cept where more stringent r equirements ar e i ndicated. Refer to th ose p ublications f or definitions of glass and glazing terms n ot o therwise d efined in th is Section or other referenced standards.
E. Samples: S ubmit minimum twelve (12) inch lo ng bead of glazing sealant a nd/or g asket, illu strating color as selected.
C. Safety G lazing S tandard: W here s afety g lass is indicated o r r equired b y authorities having jurisdiction, pr ovide t ype of pr oducts indicated which c omply w ith A NSI Z 97.1 and testing requirements of 16 C FR Part 1201 f or Category II materials.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special precautions required. G. Certification: S ubmit c ertificates f rom r espective manufacturers a ttesting t hat gl ass and glazing materials pr ovided f or pr oject c omply w ith requirements.
D. Fire-Resistance R ated W ire G lass: P rovide wire glass products identical to th ose te sted p er A STM E2010 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other t esting an d i nspecting ag ency accep table to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Separate C ertification ar e n ot r equired f or glazing m aterials b earing m anufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels r epresent a q uality control p rogram i nvolving a recognized certification ag ency o r i ndependent t esting laboratory acceptable to the Architect.
E. Insulating G lass C ertification P rogram: P rovide insulating glass units p ermanently m arked, e ither on spacers or at least one component pane of units with a ppropriate c ertification la bel o f inspecting and testing organization indicated below:
H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit written s tatement f rom s ealant manufacturer indicating th at g lass a nd g lazing materials have been t ested f or co mpatibility a nd a dhesion w ith glazing sealant and interpreting test results relative to material p erformance, i ncluding recommendations for p rimers an d s ubstrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.5
1. Insulating G lass C ertification Council ( IGCC), or Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). F. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: T o ensure consistent quality o f ap pearance and performance, provide materials produced b y a s ingle manufacturer o r f abricator f or each k ind an d condition of g lass i ndicated a nd c omposed of primary g lass o btained f rom a s ingle s ource f or each type and class required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d protect products to s ite under provisions of Section 016000. B. During storage and handling o f gl ass p roducts, provide cu shions at ed ges t o p revent i mpact damage. C. Protect glass and glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to g lass, an d d amage t o g lass an d glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature ch anges, o f d irect exposure to sun, and from other causes.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he
088100 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing o r g lazing m aterials w hen ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum a mbient temperature before, during a nd 2 4 ho urs a fter i nstallation o f glazing compounds.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify act ual l ocations o f g lazing and other construction to which glazing must fit, by accurate field measurements before f abrication; s how recorded m easurements o n f inal s ubmittal.
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
Coordinate f abrication s chedule w ith construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9
COORDINATION A. Coordinate th e W ork w ith g lazing f rames, wall openings, and p erimeter ai r an d vapor s eal to adjacent Work.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects; including coverage f or s ealed g lass u nits f rom s eal f ailure, inter-pane dusting or m isting, a nd r eplacement o f same, after co mpletion and final accep tance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OR FABRICATORS - GLASS AND GLAZING A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Advanced Glass Systems. 2. AFG 3. Arch Glass
2.3
SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide pr e-assembled u nits c onsisting of organically s ealed p anes o f g lass en closing a hermetically sealed dehydrated ai r s pace an d complying w ith A STM E 774 for performance classification indicated a s w ell a s w ith o ther requirements specified for glass characteristics, air s pace, s ealing s ystem, s ealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. 2. Provide h eat-treated p anes o f k ind an d at locations in dicated o n th e D rawings, o r if not indicated, provide h eat-strengthened p anes where recommended by g lass m anufacturer for application indicated, and tempered where indicated, or where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance ch aracteristics d esignated or coated insulating glass are nominal values based on m anufacturer’s p ublished performance values for units with 1/4 inch panes of glass and 1/2 inch thick air space. 4. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of B tu’s pe r h our/per s q. f t./per de gree F difference.
4. Guardian Industries.
5. Sealing S ystem: D ual S eal; p rimary sealant polyisobutylene, secondary sealant - silicone.
5. Oldcastle Glass Pilkington
6. Spacer Material: Aluminum.
6. PPG Architectural Glass.
7. Desiccant: Low Nitrogen Absorbing.
7. Nippon Electric Glass Company.
8. Corner Construction: Bent/Soldered.
8. SAFTI - Superlite. 9. VIRACON, Inc. 10. Visteon B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
B. Safety Glass (GL-2): A STM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (non-coated), Type 1 (transparent f lat), q uality q 3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; and minimum 1/4 inch thick.
nder p rovisions o f S ection
FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass (GL-1): A STM C 1036, T ype 1 (transparent flat), Class 1 ( Clear), q uality q 3 glazing select; and minimum 1/4 inch thick.
B. Insulated Low E Safety Glass Units (GL-13): Performance C lassification p er A STM E774, ASTM C1048, ANSI Z97.1 and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Class CBA; thickness of each pane 1/4 inch, air space thickness 1/2 i nch, o verall uni t t hickness one ( 1) i nch; ex terior p ane f ully t empered C lear float glass with VIRACON VE-2M Low Emissivity coating on #2 s urface, or a pproved equal; interior pane Clear float glass, fully tempered: 1. Glass Performance: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 70% b. Shading Coefficient: 0.43
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
088100 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
c. Winter U-Value: 0.29 BTU/hr./sq. ft.
D412 after 14 da ys at 77 de grees F (21 degrees C) and 50 percent relative humidity.
d. Summer U-Value: 0.28 BTU/hr./sq. ft. 2.4
2. Additional Capability: W hen tested per ASTM C719 for adhesion a nd c ohesion u nder maximum cyclic movement, to w ithstand th e maximum 40 percent i ncrease an d d ecrease o f joint width, a s measured a t time of application, and r emain in compliance w ith o ther requirements of ASTM C920.
MIRRORS A. No. 1 quality, minimum 1 /4 in ch thick f loat g lass mirror, b eveled edges, guaranteed for t en ( 10) years against silver spoilage; sizes and locations as indicated on Drawings. 1. Backing: S hatter-proof mirror ba cking t ape, ASTM D1709, ANSI Z97.1; applied full width of mirror without gaps.
C. Preformed B utyl-Polyisobutylene G lazing T ape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-free butylpolyisobutylene f ormulation w ith a s olids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A-804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous s urfaces; p ackaged o n rolls with a release paper o n o ne s ide; w ith o r without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape an d g lass f or ap plication indicated.
2. Mounting: Full length mechanically fastened Jtracks, top and bottom, and adhesive. 2.5
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT AND GLAZING TAPES A. General: P rovide p roducts o f t ype i ndicated an d complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealant and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including gl ass p roducts, s eals o f insulating glass uni ts, a nd gl azing c hannel s ubstrates, under c onditions o f in stallation a nd s ervice, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2.6
GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Compatibility: P rovide m aterials w ith p roven record of c ompatibility w ith s urfaces c ontacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: E xtruded T ype I I silicone r ubber, ASTM D2240, Type A, 80-90 Shore A Durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum four (4) inch x width of glazing rabbet space m inus 1 /16 i nch x he ight t o suit glazing m ethod an d p ane w eight an d ar ea; color black.
2. Suitability: C omply w ith r ecommendations o f sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing s ealant an d t apes w hich have performance ch aracteristics s uitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric S ealant S tandard: P rovide manufacturer's standard ch emically cu ring, elastomeric s ealant o f b ase p olymer i ndicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for type, grade, class and uses.
D. Spacer S hims: S ilicone, 5 0 - 60 S hore A Durometer hardness, minimum t hree ( 3) i nch l ong x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
4. Colors: P rovide c olor of e xposed sealant indicated, o r if n ot otherwise i ndicated, as selected b y t he A rchitect f rom manufacturer's standard colors.
E. Edge B locks: Silicone blocks as required for compatibility w ith g lazing s ealant, o f s ize an d hardness r equired to lim it la teral movement (sidewalking) of glass.
B. One-Part N on-Acid C uring S ilicone G lazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to uses indicated, and O; and complying w ith th e f ollowing r equirements f or modulus and additional joint movement capability. 1. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength o f not le ss than 45 nor more than 75 psi (0.5 M Pa) at 100 percent el ongation w hen t ested p er A STM
088100 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely and pr oper
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances except where ga skets o r gl azing t apes with continuous spacer r ods u sed f or g lazing. P rovide 1/ 8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Clean glazing ch annels, s tops an d r abbets t o receive t he g lazing m aterials, making free fr om obstructions and d eleterious s ubstances w hich might impair the Work.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of r eferenced g lazing s tandard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealant.
D. Provide c ompressible f iller r ods o r equivalent back-up material, as r ecommended by sealant an d glass manufacturers.
2. Comply w ith m anufacturer's in structions for final w iping o f s urfaces im mediately prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3.2
E. Force s ealant i nto g lazing ch annels t o eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
F. Tool exposed surface of s ealant t o p rovide a substantial "wash" away from g lass. I nstall pressurized ta pes a nd g askets to p rotrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
B. Seal porous glazing channels o r r ecesses w ith substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces t o r eceive g lazing co mpounds i n accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3
GLAZING - GENERAL
3.5
A. Glass and glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the in stallation o f th eir products under provisions of Section 014300.
A. Comply with c ombined pr inted r ecommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealant, gaskets and other glazing materials, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Protect g lass f rom e dge d amage d uring ha ndling and installation; use a foiling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to gl ass c orners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. U se suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift g lass with a p ry b ar. R emove f rom p roject and dispose o f g lass u nits w ith ed ge d amage o r other im perfections o f k ind th at, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures, unacceptable conditions an d al l o ther f ield problems encountered. 3.6
GLAZING A. Install setting blocks o f p roper s ize in s ill r abbet, located o ne q uarter o f g lass w idth f rom each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than six (6) inches from c orner unl ess o therwise required. Set blocks in this coarse of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.
MIRRORS A. Install mirrors i n acco rdance w ith m anufacturer's instructions.
3.7
CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealant. 3.4
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
C. Clean glass. 3.8
PROTECTION A. Protect g lass f rom b reakage af ter i nstallation b y promptly in stalling s treamers o r ribbons, suitably attached to t he f raming an d h eld f ree f rom g lass. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons or other items directly to the glass, except as specifically directed in writing by the Architect.
END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
088100 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
088100 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\088100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 089100 - WALL LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacture o f A MCA cer tified lo uvers w ith minimum five (5) years documented experience.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.5
1.6
2. Insect Screening and Blank-Out Sheeting. 1.2
1.7
WARRANTY
B. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: U nit masonry wall surfaces.
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
C. Section 076200 –Sheet Metal Flashing a nd T rim: Membrane flashing at rough openings.
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
D. Section 079200 - Joint S ealers: P erimeter f rame sealant and joint backing. E. Division 2 3 - Mechanical Ductwork: D uctwork attachment to louver and install blank-out sheeting. 1.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate th e W ork w ith in stallation of masonry flashing, and with installation of mechanical ductwork.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: E xisting concrete wall surfaces.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of e xterior m etal w all louvers a nd o ther c onstruction t o which louvers must f it, b y accu rate f ield measurements before fabrication; s how r ecorded m easurements o n f inal shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
B. Exterior Louvers; as Indicated o n t he D rawings; Including Accessories an d A ttachments, and as Follows: 1. Exterior F ixed E xtruded Aluminum 6” Drainable L ouver an d F rame; F actory P rimed and Finished.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and location of all exterior w all lo uvers, e levations, d imensions and tolerances, head, jamb, and s ill d etails; b lade configuration, s creening, b lank-out s heeting ar eas required and attachments. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on preassembled louvers d escribing d esign characteristics, m aximum r ecommended air velocity, free area, materials, and finishes. D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating metal finish and color selections available. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS EXTERIOR METAL WALL LOUVERS
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. The Airolite Company. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are: 1. American Warming and Ventilating. 2. Arrow United Industries. 3. Industrial Louvers, Inc. 4. C/S Louver Systems. 5. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Reliable Products, Inc.
WALL LOUVERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\089100CGA.doc
089100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
7. Ruskin Manufacturing, Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of section 016000. 2.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: A STM B 209, a luminum a lloy sheet, mill finish.
2.3
SCREENS A. Aluminum B ird S creens: 1/2" 0. 060-5005 expanded aluminum mesh, s et i n a luminum U shaped frame, reinforced corner construction, finish to match louver, and shop installed to louver.
2.4
B. Verify that prepared openings and flashing are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel type.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
B. Primer: T ype r ecommended b y m anufacturer t o suit application.
C. Secure louvers in opening f raming with c oncealed fasteners, removable for maintenance purposes.
Same m aterial a nd finish as louver
D. Install flashing and align louver assembly to ensure moisture s hed f rom f lashing and d iversion o f moisture to exterior.
D. Sealant: Type specified in Section 079200. E. Bituminous Paint: C old-applied a sphalt e mulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Provide bl ank-out sheeting t Contractor for his installation.
F. Korolath Shims. 2.5
o Mech anical
F. Install perimeter s ealant an d b acking r od i n accordance with Section 079200.
FABRICATION A. Exterior Fixed Extruded A luminum T hin-Line Louvers: Airolite or a pproved e qual, bl ade a nd frame 0 .081 inch thick extruded a luminum, a llwelded construction, six (6) inches deep, 40 degree blade s lope with s torm r esistant w ater baffle, channel shaped frame, co ncealed i ntermediate mullion as required, head a nd s ill f lashing r oll formed to required shapes, louvers bearing the AMCA C ertified R ating S eal f or both air performance and water penetration.
INSTALLATION A. Install l ouver as sembly an d components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
ACCESSORIES
C. Flashing: frame.
EXAMINATION
3.3
CLEANING A. Clean all exposed surfaces as per recommendations by the louver manufacturer. B. Remove all packaging and debris from the site.
END OF SECTION
1. Sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Finish: Louvers and frames mill finish. 2.6
BLANK-OUT SHEETING A. Blank-Out S heeting o n I nterior o f L ouver: Same material as louver and frame: 1. Configuration: Composite panel. 2. Face Mat erial: Aluminum finished to m atch louver frame. Refer to Mechanical Drawings.
089100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
WALL LOUVERS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\089100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions o f th e C ontract (General, Supplementary and O ther C onditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Interior, N on-Load B earing, M etal F raming and Gypsum Board Systems; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified H erein; I ncluding R elated A ccessories an d Attachments. C. Interior Gypsum Board Types:
H. Section 083100 - Access D oors an d P anels: Access panels in gypsum board. I. Section 093000 - Tiling: Cement board substrate. J. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Surface finish. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on metal framing, gypsum board systems and components, joint tape; and finish.
1. (GB-1) Non-Rated Gypsum Board.
C. Provide manufacturers written installation instructions.
2. (GB-2) Fire-Rated Gypsum Board.
1.4
3. (GB-3) Fire-Rated, A buse-Resistant G ypsum Board. 4. (GB-7) Gypsum Ceiling Board. 5. (GB-9) Fire-Rated Cement Board – substrate for Ceramic Tile and Closure Overlay of tunnel Openings. D. Vapor Retarders: 1. (VR-3) Interior Wall Plastic. E. Taped and Sanded Joint Treatment. F. Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Gypsum Board Area Separation Walls. 2. Shaft Wall Assemblies. 1.2
G. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping: S ealing penetrations through fire-rated partitions.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place C oncrete: Concrete wall surfaces to receive work of this Section. B. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: M asonry wall surfaces to receive work of this Section. C. Section 054000 - Cold F ormed M etal F raming: Exterior structural steel wall framing to receive work of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: C ompany s pecializing in p erforming th e work o f th is s ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) y ears documented experience. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, thoroughly trained an d ex perienced i n t he n ecessary cr afts an d completely f amiliar w ith th e s pecified requirements and methods needed f or pr oper pe rformance of t he Work of this Section. C. Single S ource R esponsibility: O btain each type of gypsum board an d r elated j oint t reatment m aterials from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Resistive R ating: W here in dicated on the Drawings, provide materials and construction identical to t hose as semblies w hose f ire resistance rating has been d etermined p er A STM E 119 b y a testing and inspecting o rganization a cceptable to a uthorities having jurisdiction. E. Wall and ceiling as semblies shall meet or exceed the fire r esistance r equirements o utlined u nder provisions of the GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual. 1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
D. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: C oncealed wood blocking.
A. Non-load bearing s teel s tud p artitions, 2 0 g auge minimum required, with deflections conforming to L/360 at 15 psf for veneer plaster walls, and L/240 at 5 psf typical.
E. Section 061643 - Exterior Sheathing Boards.
1.6
F. Section 072100 - Building I nsulation: T hermal a nd sound insulation.
A. Deliver, store, h andle a nd p rotect p roducts to s ite under provisions of Section 016000.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
092116 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Deliver all materials in m anufacturer's uno pened original packages showing manufacturer's and product brand names. C. Store products inside under cover an d k eep t hem d ry and p rotected ag ainst d amage f rom w eather, d irect sunlight, surface c ontamination, c orrosion, construction tr affic a nd o ther cau ses. N eatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. D. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. E. Protect m etal f raming, m etal s tuds an d acces sories from bending. F. Handle g ypsum boa rds t o prevent d amage t o ed ges, ends and surfaces. 1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General E nvironmental R equirements: E stablish a nd maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840, and with gypsum b oard manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum R oom T emperatures: For non-adhesive attachment o f gypsum b oard t o f raming, maintain not less t han 4 0 d egrees F . F or ad hesive attachment of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 degrees F for forty-eight (48) hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for d rying j oint tr eatment m aterials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to p revent m aterials f rom drying too rapidly. 1.8
1. Clark /Dietrich Building Systems. 2. National Gypsum. 3. Marino Ware. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.2
A. Studs an d T racks: A STM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 2 0 ga uge t hick ( 0.0341 i nches ( minimum thickness galvanized), C shape s tuds w ith knur led faces; widths as indicated on Drawings. B. Main Runner C hannels: 1 -1/2 in ch c old r olled s teel channel, 475 lb ./linear f oot w ith m inimum b ase s teel of 0.054 inches; galvanized. C. Cross Furring Channels: 3 /4 i nch c old r olled steel channel, 300 lb ./linear f oot w ith m inimum b ase s teel of 0.054 inches; galvanized. D. Rigid Furring Channels: 7/8 inch hat shaped channels, 287 lb./linear foot with minimum base steel of 0.0179 inches; galvanized and complying with ASTM C645. E. Furring Channels: 1 -1/2 inch Z shaped channels, 236 lb./linear f oot w ith m inimum b ase s teel o f 0 .0179 inches; galvanized and complying with ASTM C645. F. Resilient F urring C hannels: 7 /16 inch thick, base metal thickness 25 gauge, ga lvanized a nd c omplying with ASTM C645. 2.3
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are g uaranteed ag ainst d efects af ter completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. D efects d ue to faulty materials o r w orkmanship developed during t he guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Printed on 1/16/2013
2. CertainTeed Gypsum. 3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National G ypsum - Gold B ond B uilding Products. 6. United States Gypsum Company (USG). B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.4
-
A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 092116 - 2 of 8
-
1. American Gypsum Co.
WARRANTY
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS INTERIOR METAL FRAMING
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS GYPSUM MATERIALS
A. Subject t o co mpliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
2.1
FRAMING MATERIALS
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. (GB-1) Standard G ypsum B oard: A STM C1396/C1396M; gypsum core wall panel surfaced with paper on front, ba ck a nd l ong e dges; [1/4] [3 /8] [1/2] inch t hickness, m aximum p ermissible l engths, ends square cut, tapered edges. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School B. (GB-2) Fire-Rated Gypsum B oard: A STM C1396/C1396M; g ypsum c ore w all pa nel w ith additives to enhance f ire r esistance o f t he co re; surfaced w ith p aper o n f ront, back a nd l ong e dges; Type X , UL r ated; 5/8 inch thickness, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. C. (GB-3) Fire-Rated, A buse-Resistant G ypsum B oard: ASTM C1396/C1396M; Fire r esistive g ypsum C ore surfaced w ith h eavy, s mooth, ab rasion resistant, mold/mildew r esistant f ace paper to p roduce g reater resistance t o s urface i ndentation, through-penetration and abrasion, surfaced with heavy natural finish paper on back and long edges; Type X, UL rated; 5/8 i nch thickness, maximum p ossible l ength; ends s quare c ut, tapered edges. 1. CertainTeed G ypsum – Extra A buse w ith M 2 Tech. 2. National Gypsum Gold Bond - Hi Abuse XP Fire Shield. 3. USG – Mold Tough AR. D. (GB-7) Gypsum Ceiling Board: A STM C 1395 or C1396/C1396M; gypsum c ore c eiling pa nel w ith additives to en hance t he s ag r esistance o f t he core; surfaced with paper on the front, back and long edges; 1/2 inch thickness; maximum permissible lengths, ends square cut, tapered edges. E. (GB-9) Fire-Rated C ement B oard: A NSI A118.9; Cement b oard formed in a continuous process of aggregated P ortland cem ent s lurry with polymer coated glass fiber m esh co mpletely en compassing edges, back and front surfaces; UL fire-rated; 1/2 and 5/8 inch thickness, e dges c ut s quare. Note: U se w ith vapor retarder. 1. USG - DUROCK (SA932). 2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 3. FinPan, I nc.; U til-A-Crete C oncrete B acker Board. 4. National G ypsum – “Permaflex” and “Permabase.” good for curved wall applications. 5. Maximum framing spacing is sixteen (16) inches on center. F. Joint Treatment and Compound: Types recommended by manufacturer to suit applications. 2.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
Addition and Remodeling 1. Seal a ll j oints w ith p ressure sensitive tape as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to suit application. 2.6
ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants. N on-hardening, no n-drying, no nskinning, no n-staining, no n-bleeding, gun gr ade, capable o f s panning 1 /2” wide x 3 /8” d eep g aps, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use with gypsum board. B. Corner B eads: U SG S heetrock B rand Paper Faced Beads and Trim. C. Casing Bead: A STM C1047; formed galvanized steel trim, minimum base steel 0. 014 i nch ( 0.355 m m) thick, sizes as required to suit substrate. D. Control Joints: ASTM C1047; extruded vinyl formed with V shaped slot c overed w ith r emovable f lexible vinyl strip. E. Jointing System: 1. Provide a j ointing system, i ncluding reinforcing tape a nd c ompound, de signed a s a s ystem t o b e used together and as r ecommended f or t his u se by the manufacturer of t he gy psum b oard approved for use on this Work. 2. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer. F. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws c omplying w ith A STM C 954 f or fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For f astening c ementitious b acker uni ts, use screws of type and s ize recommended by p anel manufacturer. 3. For fastening gy psum boa rd i n pl ace on w ood, use 1-1/4 inch type W bugle-head screws, or use annular ring t ype na ils c omplying w ith A STM C514, and of lengths required to suit substrate. G. Laminating A dhesive: C ompound specifically recommended by gypsum b oard m anufacturer f or laminating gypsum board to concrete and unit masonry substrates. H. Hangers for Suspended a nd F urred C eilings: P er ASTM C754.
A. (VR-3) Interior W all P lastic V apor R etarder: Polyethylene vapor r etarder, m inimum te n ( 10) m ils thick, interior above grade application. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
092116 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
I. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a co mplete an d p roper i nstallation, as selected b y t he C ontractor subject t o the approval o f the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
Handbook" published by U nited States G ypsum Company. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated b elow to c omply w ith d etails indicated on Drawings: 1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at c eiling p erimeters o r penetrations of structural elements.
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. C orrect conditions detrimental to timely and p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. D o not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Examine s ubstrates t o w hich gy psum b oard construction at taches o r ab uts, pre-set h ollow m etal frames, cas t-in a nchors, a nd s tructural f raming, for compliance with requirements f or in stallation tolerances and o ther co nditions affecting performance of gypsum board construction. C. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. D. Beginning o f i nstallation m eans accep tance o f substrate conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorage: C oordinate installation of ceiling suspension with installation o f o verhead s tructural systems to ensure that in serts a nd o ther s tructural anchorage p rovisions h ave b een i nstalled to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling. 1. Provide co ncrete i nserts, s teel d eck d evices indicated, to o ther tr ades f or in stallation well in advance o f t ime n eeded f or coordination with other construction. 3.3
METAL FRAMING GENERAL
INSTALLATION
-
A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with A STM C 840 r equirements th at a pply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at termination i n t he W ork a nd f or support of fixtures, equipment s ervices, h eavy t rim, g rab b ars, to ilet accessories, f urnishings, a nd s imilar c onstruction to comply w ith d etails in dicated o n th e Drawings, and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if n one a vailable, w ith " Gypsum C onstruction
092116 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
2. Where p artitions a nd w all f raming a buts overhead structure. 3. Provide slip type joint as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. D. Provide r osen pa per or s imilar material to p revent pressure treated wood from b eing i n d irect co ntact with light metal framing or light metal decking. E. Do n ot br idge bu ilding e xpansion and control joints with s teel f raming o r f urring members; in dependently frame bot h s ides of j oints with framing o r f urring members. 3.4
METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION WALLS AND PARTITIONS
-
A. Install runners (track) at floors, ceilings and structural walls a nd c olumns w here gy psum board stud system abuts other construction. 1. Where s tuds a re in stalled d irectly against exterior walls, install a sphalt felt s trips between studs and wall. B. Metal Stud Spacing: Maximum 16 inches on center, unless noted otherwise. C. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring m ember s o t hat f astening surface d o no t vary more than 1 /8 i nch f rom p lane o f f aces o f ad jacent framing. D. Extend partition f raming f ull h eight to s tructural supports or s ubstrates a bove suspended ceilings, except where partitions ar e i ndicated t o t erminate at suspended ceilings. C ontinue framing over frames for doors and openings and f rame a round du cts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. E. Terminate p artition f raming a t s uspended ceilings where indicated on the Drawings. F. Install steel studs in sizes and spacing indicated on the Drawings, but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standards.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
G. Install s teel s tuds s o th at f langes p oint in th e s ame direction and gypsum boards can b e i nstalled i n t he direction opposite to that of the flanges.
4. Repair any t ears o r p unctures i n v apor r etarder immediately b efore co ncealment b y ap plication of gypsum board or other construction.
H. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated on t he D rawings, w ith G A-216 a nd w ith a pplicable published r ecommendations of g ypsum boa rd manufacturer. A ttach v ertical s tuds at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
5. Use fi re-resistive type v apor r etarder in a ll locations where vapor r etarder i s n ot co vered with g ypsum b oard. A ttach as p er manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend ve rtical j amb s tuds t hrough suspended ceilings a nd a ttach t o underside of floor or roof structure above. I. Frame o penings o ther t han d oor openings to comply with d etails in dicated o n th e D rawings, or if none is indicated, i n s ame m anner as r equired f or door openings; and in stall framing b elow s ills o f openings to match framing required above door heads. J. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to metal studs. Install c oncealed w ood bl ocking f or support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and all o ther r elated items that require backing for support u nder pr ovisions of Section 061000. 3.5
INSTALLATION - VAPOR RETARDERS
A. (VR-3): I nstall c ontinuously f rom f loor to structure above, over m etal w all studs a t in terior partitions where insulation is indicated to be encapsulated. B. Install vapor r etarders o n f raming m embers o f al l exterior walls and soffits o r in terior f ace o f a ll masonry wall construction as shown on Drawings, and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Extend v apor r etarder t o extremities o f exterior insulated walls, and to cover miscellaneous voids in i nsulated s ubstrates, i ncluding t hose which have been stuffed with loose thermal insulation. 2. Seal v ertical j oints i n v apor r etarders over framing b y la pping n ot le ss th an two (2) wall studs. F asten v apor r etarders t o f raming at t op, end an d b ottom ed ges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners at 16 inches on center. 3. Seal j oints i n v apor r etarders caused by pipes, conduits, e lectrical b oxes a nd s imilar items penetrating vapor r etarders w ith c loth o r aluminized tape which b onds permanently to vapor retarder.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
6. Use no n-resistive type vapor r etarder w here vapor retarder is covered with gypsum board. 3.6
METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
-
A. Secure ha ngers t o s tructural s upport by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast-in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck 3. Do not attach h angers t o u nderside o f co ncrete slabs with power-actuated fasteners. B. Install m etal c eiling f raming in a ccordance with ASTM C754, and s pace m ain r unners at 4 ’-0” on center maximum. C. Do not connect or s uspend s teel framing f rom ducts, pipes or conduit. D. Keep hangers and braces two (2) inches clear of ducts, pipes or conduits. E. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. 3.7
APPLICATION AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD - GENERAL
OF
A. Gypsum B oard A pplication a nd Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation in sulation ( 072100) w here indicated on t he D rawings, pr ior t o g ypsum boa rd unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate ex posed en d-butt joints as far f rom c enter o f walls a nd c eilings a s p ossible, a nd s tagger no t l ess than t wenty-four (24) i nches i n al ternate co urses o f board. D. Install ceiling b oards acr oss f raming i n t he m anner which m inimizes t he num ber o f e nd-butt j oints, a nd which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. S tagger e nd joints a t le ast tw enty-four (2 4) inches. 092116 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling E. Install wall and partition boards vertically. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. D o not install imperfect, damaged or da mp boa rds. B utt boards together f or a light co ntact at edges an d en ds with n ot more t han 1 /16 i nch o pen s pace b etween boards. Do not force into place. G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications o r w here in termediate supports or g ypsum boa rd ba ck-blocking i s pr ovided behind end j oints. P osition boards s o t hat l ike ed ges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered ed ges ag ainst cu t ed ges o r en ds. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to s teel s tuds s o th at le ading edge o r en d o f each b oard i s at tached t o open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
Farmington Elementary School M. Where s ound-rated d rywall c onstruction is in dicated on t he D rawings, s eal co nstruction at perimeters, control a nd e xpansion j oints, openings and penetrations with a continuous b ead o f aco ustical sealant i ncluding a b ead at b oth faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 an d m anufacturer's recommendations for location o f ed ge trim, and close off s ound-flanking paths a round o r t hrough construction, including s ealing o f p artitions a bove acoustical ceilings. 1. For dou ble-layer p artition systems, construction above acoustical plaster ceilings may be installed with base layer only. N. Space f asteners i n g ypsum b oards in accordance with referenced gypsum board ap plication an d f inishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. O. Curved Gypsum Partitions and Surfaces: 1. Install g ypsum b oard p anels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to metal framing in accordance with m anufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Attach gypsum b oard t o s upplementary f raming a nd blocking pr ovided f or a dditional s upport a t ope nings and cut-outs. J. Form control j oints a nd e xpansion j oints at locations indicated o n the Drawings, o r as r equired, with space between edges of boards, p repared t o r eceive t rim accessories. M aximum d istance b etween co ntrol joints shall be 30 linear feet. K. Cover both f aces o f s teel s tud p artition f raming with gypsum board in concealed s paces ( above cei lings, etc.), except in chase walls which are properly braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated, or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage m ay b e acco mplished w ith s craps of not less t han 8 s quare f eet ar ea, an d m ay b e limited to not less th an 7 5 p ercent o f f ull coverage. 2. Fit g ypsum boa rd a round du cts, pi pes and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum boa rd t o f it pr ofile of c offers a nd allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant. L. Isolate perimeter o f n on-load b earing d rywall partitions at structural abutments. P rovide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
092116 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
3.8
APPLICATION OF CEMENT BOARD GENERAL
A. Install in terior c ement b oard, a nd treat joints to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of application indicated on the Drawings. 3.9
METHODS OF APPLICATIONS
GYPSUM
DRYWALL
A. Single-Layer Application: I nstall g ypsum b oard a s follows: 1. On ceilings apply g ypsum boa rd pr ior t o wall/partition b oard application to th e g reatest extent possible. 2. On walls/partitions a pply g ypsum b oard vertically (parallel to f raming), u nless o therwise indicated on Drawings, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. B. Wall T ile B ase: W here drywall is base for th in-set ceramic tile a nd s imilar r igid a pplied wall finishes, install cement board. 1. In "dry areas" install gypsum backing board finished to produce a flat surface. C. Double-Layer Application:
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 1. On w alls/partitions ap ply b ase l ayer an d f ace layers v ertically or h orizontally ( parallel) w ith joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints off-set a minimum of ten (10) inches with base layer joints. a. For fire rated s ystems, in stall b oards vertically o r h orizontally a nd as otherwise required by the approved UL rating. 2. On ceilings apply base layer prior to application of b ase la yer o n w alls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. O ff-set joints between layers a minimum of ten (10) inches. Apply base layers a t r ight a ngles to s upports, u nless otherwise indicated. D. Single-Layer F astening M ethods: F asten g ypsum board to supports with screws. E. Double-Layer Fastening Methods: F asten b oth b ase and face layers to supports with screws. 3.10
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. General: W here f easible, u se t he s ame fasteners t o anchor t rim acces sory f langes as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to co mply w ith m anufacturer's recommendations. B. Install metal corner beads at external corners. C. Install m etal ed ge t rim w henever ed ge of gy psum board w ould ot herwise be e xposed or semi-exposed, and except where p lastic t rim i s i ndicated o n t he Drawings. P rovide t ype w ith f ace flange to receive joint compound except where " U" b ead ( semifinishing type) is indicated. D. Install control joints at lo cations in dicated o n th e Drawings, or if not indicated, at spacing and locations required b y r eferenced g ypsum b oard ap plication and finish s tandard, an d ap proved b y t he A rchitect for visual effect. 3.11
JOINT TREATMENT
A. General: 1. Apply J oint tr eatment p er ASTM C840 a nd Manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Inspect areas to b e j oint t reated, v erifying t hat the gypsum b oard f its s nugly a gainst supporting framework.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
Addition and Remodeling 3. In areas where j oint t reatment an d co mpound finishing will be p erformed, m aintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F for 24 hours p rior t o c ommencing t he t reatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. 4. Apply th e j oint tr eatment and compound by machine or hand tool.
finishing
5. Apply a dditional c oats of compound, as required, after previous coat has set but before it dries. B. Embedding Compounds: 1. Apply to gypsum board joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. 2. Spread the co mpound n ot l ess t han t hree ( 3) inches wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in t he j oint, a nd embed the t ape i n t he compound. T hen, s pread a t hin l ayer o f compound over the tape. 3. After this treatment h as d ried, ap ply a s econd coat of e mbedding c ompound t o joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than six (6) inches wide at joints, and feather edges. 4. Sandpaper between coats as required. 5. When thoroughly d ry, s andpaper t o e liminate ridges and high points. C. Finishing Compounds: 1. After e mbedding c ompound i s thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a co at of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads. 2. Feather the finishing compound t o no t l ess t han twelve (12) inches wide. 3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper t o obt ain a uniform smooth surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the board. 4. Finish gy psum b oard in accordance w ith G A214to the following criteria: a. Level 1: C oncealed ar eas o nly; s uch as attics, plenums above ceiling spaces. Tape a ll j oints a nd in terior a ngles in joint compound. Surface to be free of excess joint compound. b. Level 3: A reas to receive heavy or medium grade textured surfaces before final painting or where heavy grade wall coverings will be applied in a non-light heavy area. 092116 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling Embed tape in joint c ompound in a ll j oints and in terior a ngles a nd immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories to be covered with two separate coats of j oint c ompound. A ll j oints t o be smooth a nd f ree of t ool m arks and ridges. Coat p repared s urface w ith d rywall primer prior to application of final finishes. c. Level 4: All areas to receive flat paints, light textures, not to be used for high sheen level paint surfaces. Embed tape in joint c ompound in a ll j oints and in terior a ngles a nd immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints and in terior a ngles. F lat j oints to b e covered with two s eparate co ats o f j oint compound, and fastener h eads an d accessories to be covered with three separate coats of j oint c ompound. A ll j oints t o be smooth a nd f ree of t ool m arks and ridges. Coat p repared s urface w ith d rywall primer prior to application of final finishes.
Farmington Elementary School
3.13
PROTECTION
A. Provide final p rotection a nd m aintain c onditions, which e nsure gypsum b oard construction b eing without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.14
CLEANING
A. In a ddition t o o ther r equirements for cleaning, use necessary care to p revent s cattering g ypsum b oard scraps and dust, and to p revent t racking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. B. At c ompletion o f e ach s egment o f in stallation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris and surplus materials of this Section.
END OF SECTION
d. Level 5: All areas to receive wall coverings and paint f inishes. Includes a ll w alls in heavily lit areas, such as t hose n ear windows, s kylights, w ell-lit a tria o r strong light fixtures. Embed tape in joint c ompound in a ll j oints and in terior a ngles a nd immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints a nd in terior a ngles. Two s eparate coats of j ont c ompound t o be applied over all flat j oints and one separate coat of joint compound to be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories to be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All j oints t o be s mooth a nd f ree of tool marks a nd r idges. Trowel a pply to e ntire surface a t hin skim coat of j oint compound, or apply a m aterial r ecommended and applied i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer’s recommendation f or h igh q uality prepared surface. Then coat prepared s urface w ith drywall p rimer p rior to a pplication o f f inal finishes. 3.12
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of F inished G ypsum B oard Surface from T rue Flatness: 1 /8 inch in ten (10) feet in any direction.
092116 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\092116CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 093000 - TILING F. Submit manufacturer's written certification that all ADAAG Requirements have been met for this project.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
G. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Interior C eramic T ile Floor, Wall and Base Using the Thin-Set Application Method. C. Interior Porcelain Tile Floor and Base Finish Using the Thin-Set Application Method.
1.4
A. Conform to T ile C ouncil o f North America (TCNA) H andbook, cu rrent ed ition, for Ceramic Tile Installation.
D. Related W aterproof M embrane, Mo rtar, Grout, Trim and Accessories.
B. Conform to " Americans w ith D isabilities A ct Accessibility Guidelines" (ADAAG) criteria for the following:
E. Tile and Grout Sealer. F. Chemical Cleaning of Existing W all a nd floor Tile/Grout Where Noted on Drawings. 1.2
1. Static Coefficient of Friction: A ppendix to the ADAAG, in Section A4.5 defines slip-resistant as a static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for floor areas an d 0 .8 f or r amps. A STM C1028 ( The Slip Meter), t est p rocedures s hall b e u sed f or both wet an d d ry r eadings, an d al l manufacturers s hall c ertify th at their products meet or exceed these requirements.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place C oncrete: Trowelling of floor slab for tile application. B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at control joints. C. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud w all f raming and gy psum board finish. Cement Board and tile backer board installation.
1.3
C. Single-Source Responsibility: O btain e ach c olor, grade, f inish, ty pe composition and v ariety o f ceramic tile from a single source with resources to provide products of c onsistent q uality in appearance an d p hysical p roperties without delaying progress of the Work. O btain ingredients for setting and gr outing m aterials o f a uni form quality f rom o ne m anufacturer f or each cementitious and admixture co mponent an d f rom one s ource o r p roducer f or each aggregate. When ordering tile for patterns, order tiles from the same caliber for the patterned installations.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit d ata in dicating m aterial specifications and characteristics, for each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: I ndicate locations of each type of tile and tile p attern. S how w idths, d etails, a nd locations of e xpansion, c ontraction, c ontrol, and isolation joints in tile s ubstrates a nd f inished tile surfaces.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in th e m anufacture o f p roducts s pecified in this Section with minimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience.
D. Samples: M ount tile a nd a pply grout on one 12 x 12 inch plywood pa nel, t o i ndicate pa ttern, c olor variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Submit maintenance data, i ncluding recommendations f or cl eaning an d s tain r emoval methods, a nd c leaning m aterials under provisions of Section 017823.
TILING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
QUALITY ASSURANCE
E. Installer Qualifications: Company s pecializing in applying th e w ork o f th is S ection with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle a nd p rotect p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
093000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling B. Deliver an d s tore p ackaged m aterials i n o riginal containers w ith s eals u nbroken an d l abels i ntact until time of u se. C omply w ith r equirements o f ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
Farmington Elementary School
1.9
A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided a re gua ranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing o r o verheating i n accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Prevent damage or co ntamination t o m aterials b y water, foreign matter and other causes. E. Handle cer amic tile w ith te mporary p rotective coating on exposed s urfaces t o p revent coated surfaces f rom co ntacting b acks o r ed ges o f other units. 1.6
MAINTENANCE A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2. Dal-Tile Corporation. 3. Laufen International, Inc.
C. Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F or more in tiled areas during installation a nd s even ( 7) d ays after c ompletion, unl ess hi gher temperatures ar e required by r eferenced i nstallation s tandard o r manufacturer's instructions. 1.8
4. Lone Star Ceramics Company. 5. U.S. Ceramic Tile Company. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of tile finish and other construction to w hich tile f inish m ust f it by accurate f ield m easurements b efore i nstallation. Coordinate in stallation s chedule w ith construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
093000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
nder p rovisions o f S ection
C. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as indicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
B. Vent temporary heaters t o t he ex terior t o p revent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide build-up.
-
1. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
1. Provide cer amic and porcelain tile manufacturer’s an d s upplier’s n ame, address and telephone numbers. I nclude f or each product; t he pr oduct n ame, s erial or m odel numbers and colors.
A. Maintain e nvironmental c onditions a nd p rotect Work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and m anufacturer's w ritten recommendations.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
B. Provide t wo ( 2) c opies o f the m anufacturer’s Maintenance M anual f or t he co mplete car e o f the ceramic and porcelain tile u nits. S ubmit to th e Owner, through t he A rchitect, f or r eview a nd approval.
1.7
WARRANTY
2.2
CERAMIC WALL TILE MATERIAL A. Ceramic W all T ile: A NSI/TCNA A 137.1-1992; conforming to the following: 1. Moisture Absorption:
0 to 0.5 percent
2. Size:
6 X 6 x 1/4 inch thick
3. Edge:
Square
4. Surface Finish:
Matte glazed
5. Colors: Architect from
Provide colors selected b y t he manufacturer's full color range.
B. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as i ndicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings.
TILING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.3
Addition and Remodeling 4. Mapei Corporation.
CERAMIC BASE TILE MATERIAL A. Ceramic B ase T ile: A NSI/TCNA A 137.1-1992; match floor tile f or s ize, m oisture a bsorption, surface finish, and color, c onforming t o t he following:
5. TEC by H.B. Fuller Company. 6. W.R. Bonsal Company. 7. C-Cure Corp.
1. Internal Corner: Coved.
8. Custom Building Products.
2. External Corner: Coved.
B. Substitutions: U 016000.
B. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as i ndicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings. 2.4
nder p rovisions o f S ection
C. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as indicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings.
PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE MATERIAL A. Porcelain F loor T ile: A NSI/TCNA A 137.1-1992; unglazed a nd no n-slip, f rost pr oof a nd s tain resistant, al kali an d aci d r esistant; c onforming to the following: 1. Moisture Absorption:
2.7
A. Waterproof Membrane: T hin, l oad-bearing waterproofing s ystem, c omplying w ith AN SI A118.10. Cold-applied, s elf c uring, liq uid rubber polymer, and an integral r einforcing f abric w hich, together, form a s eamless w aterproof m embrane with a m inimum uni form t hickness of 1/16 inch, non-flammable, n on-toxic, and c ompatible w ith thin-set o r m ortar-set a pplication m ethods. UltraCure 971, or approved equal.
0 to 0.5 percent.
2. Breaking Strength: 250 lbs. 3. Bond Strength:
Minimum 50 psi.
4. Size:
12 x 12 inch x 5/16inch thick.
5. Edges:
Square.
6. Colors: Architect
Provide colors selected b y t he from manufacturer's full c olor range.
2.8
B. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as indicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings. 2.5
PORCELAIN BASE TILE MATERIAL A. Porcelain B ase T ile: A NSI/TCNA A 137.1-1992; match w all tile f or m oisture a bsorption, s urface finish, and color, conforming to the following: 1. Internal Corner:
Coved.
2. Top Edge:
Bull Nosed.
3. Height:
4 inches.
B. Provide p roducts f rom m anufacturers as indicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings. 2.6
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS MEMBRANE, MORTAR, AND GROUT
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. DAP, Inc. 2. Hydroment from Bostik. 3. Laticrete International, Inc. TILING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
SETTING MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of North America, current Edition, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): 1. Provide a commercially p repared p repackaged dry-mortar mix containing d ry, r edispersible, ethylene v inyl a cetate a dditive to w hich only water must be added, for use as a bond coat for setting tile. Comply with ANSI A118.4 2. Comply w ith ANSI A 118.1; ex cept w here specifically in dicated o n th e Drawings, or approved in writing in advance by the Architect. a. For wall applications, pr ovide n on-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in a ddition to th e o ther r equirements in ANSI A118.4. C. Epoxy Mortar: 1. Provide a co mmercially prepared mortar system employing epoxy r esin a nd e poxy ha rdener portions. 2. Comply with ANSI A118.3. D. Special tile s etting m ortars w ill be considered by the Architect when complete t echnical d ata i s submitted in advance. 093000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
2.9
Farmington Elementary School B. Beginning o f in stallation m eans in staller accepts condition of existing surfaces.
GROUT MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of North America, current Edition, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", in colors s elected b y t he A rchitect f rom s tandard colors available from the approved manufacturers.
3.2
A. Protect s urrounding w ork f rom d amage disfiguration.
B. Polymer Modified Unsanded Tile Grout: for joints of 1/8” wide or less.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks w ith f iller. L evel existing surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.3
C. Epoxy Grout:
WATERPROOFING SUPPRESSION INSTALLATION
AND
CRACKMEMBRANE
1. Provide a grout s ystem e mploying e poxy r esin and h ardener p ortions, w ith c oarse s ilica filler permitted, e specially f ormulated f or industrial and co mmercial u se w here chemical resistance is of paramount importance.
A. Install waterproofing to c omply w ith ANSI A108.13 a nd w aterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to p roduce w aterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
2. Provide a p roduct lic ensed b y th e T ile C ouncil of America ( TCNA), a nd b earing t hat license symbol.
B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's w ritten in structions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
D. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the C ontractor s ubject t o t he approval of the Architect. 2.10
or
B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.
1. Provide a commercially prepared mixture. 2. Secure t he A rchitect's w ritten ap proval of the proposed material prior to use.
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
A. Sealants: As indicated under Section 079200. B. (TEP 1, TEP-2, TEP-3, TEP-4) Transition Edges: See Color and Finish Schedule. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for s ealing g rout j oints th at d oes n ot change color or appearance of grout. D. Tile C leaner: A n eutral cl eaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout s urfaces, s pecifically ap proved for materials and in stallations in dicated b y tile a nd g rout manufacturers.
C. Do not install tile over w aterproofing until waterproofing has cured an d b een t ested t o determine that it is watertight. 3.4
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with A NSI A 108.1, ANSI A108.2 a nd the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of North America, current Edition, except as o therwise d irected b y t he Architect. 2. Install a dhesive, tile , a nd g rout to TCNA Handbook for C eramic T ile I nstallation, Handbook Number a. Floor Tile installations: b. F-115, F-116; F-131 and F-132 c. Wall Tile Installations:
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill be pe rformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
093000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
d. W-244 3. Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended by materials manufacturers. 4. Do n ot in stall tile f loors o ver membrane until the membrane has been tested and approved.
TILING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Finish schedules o r as d irected b y t he A rchitect, provide la tex m odified P ortland cement m ortar applications for walls and floors
F. Sound tile a fter s etting. R eplace h ollow s ounding units. G. Allow tile to set for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to grouting. Grout tile joints.
1. Provide e poxy m ortar a nd gr out i n kitchen applications unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide w aterproof m embranes i n ba throoms and kitchens where there is finished space in the floor below.
H. Apply s ealant to j unction o f tile a nd dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. 3.5
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 017400.
C. Limits of Tile:
B. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the Work of t his S ection i n acco rdance w ith recommendations of t he m anufacturers o r t he materials used.
1. Extend t ile i nto r ecesses an d under equipment and fixtures to f orm a co mplete co vering without interruptions. 2. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of p attern o r j oint alignment.
C. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous items from effects of acid cleaning. D. Flush s urfaces w ith cl ean w ater b efore an d af ter cleaning.
D. Joining Pattern: 1. Lay tile in g rid p attern, u nless o therwise indicated on the Drawings o r d irected b y t he Architect. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim and walls are the same size. 3. Lay tile w ork, a nd c enter th e tile f ields b oth directions in each space or on each wall area. 4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 5. Provide uniform joint widths.
CLEANING
E. Provide t ile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded and otherwise defective units. 3.6
PROTECTION A. Protection of f inished w ork u nder pr ovisions of Section 017000. B. Provide r equired p rotection to tile surfaces t o prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the Work at Substantial Completion.
E. Provide e xpansion a nd control j oints where shown on t he D rawings, a nd w here o therwise recommended by the " Handbook for Ceramic T ile Installation" o f th e TCNA, s ealing i n acco rdance with Section 079200 of these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
TILING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
093000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
093013 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0122
CERAMIC TILE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\093000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 095100 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS G. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
H. Provide t wo ( 2) co pies o f t he manufacturer’s Maintenance M anual f or t he co mplete car e o f the acoustical tile c eilings a nd tr im. S ubmit to th e Owner, t hrough t he A rchitect, f or r eview a nd approval.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1. Provide aco ustical s uspension s ystem an d acoustical p anel m anufacturer’s an d s upplier’s names, address and telephone numbers. Include for each product: t he p roduct n ame, s erial o r model number and colors.
B. Non-Rated A coustical P anel Assemblies; Suspended Exposed Metal G rid C eiling S ystems and Perimeter Trim. C. Salvage and Reuse Acoustical Ceiling Panels. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 034113 - Precast C oncrete H ollow C ore Plank: Precast floor structure. B. Section 052100 members.
- Steel Joists: R oof s upport
C. Section 053100 - Steel D ecking: R oof s upport deck. D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board System: I nterior metal framing and gypsum board systems. E. Division 22 a nd 23 - Mechanical: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system, air outlets a nd in lets, a nd a ir diffusion devices in ceiling system. F. Division 2 6 - Electrical: lig ht f ixtures a nd f ire alarm components in ceiling system. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspended G rid M anufacturer: Company specializing in m anufacturing t he P roducts specified in th is S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) years documented experience. B. Acoustical Panel Man ufacturer: C ompany specializing in m anufacturing t he P roducts specified in th is S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) years documented experience. C. Installer: C ompany s pecializing in the installation of products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are t horoughly t rained an d ex perienced in the necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for pr oper pe rformance of the Work of this Section.
C. Product Data: P rovide d ata o n metal grid s ystem components and acoustical units.
D. Acoustical Testing Agency Q ualifications: A n independent testing laboratory, o r an N VLAPaccredited l aboratory, w ith t he ex perience an d capability to c onduct th e te sting in dicated. NVLAP-accredited l aboratories m ust document accreditation, based on a " Certificate o f Accreditation" an d a " Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.
D. Samples: Submit two ( 2) s amples f ull s ize illustrating m aterial , c olor, p attern, te xture and finish for each type acoustical tile specified.
E. Suspended acoustical panel ceiling systems shall be installed in acco rdance w ith A STM C 635 an d ASTM C636.
E. Samples: S ubmit t wo ( 2) samples each of suspension system main r unner, c ross r unner a nd edge trim.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile a nd s upporting s uspension s ystem through one source from a single manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special p rocedures, p erimeter co nditions r equiring special attention.
G. Fire-Test-Response C haracteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings th at c omply w ith th e following requirements:
B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate g rid la yout a nd r elated dimensioning, j unctions with other work or ceiling finishes, i nterrelation o f m echanical an d electrical items related to system.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS S:\11\0122\div2to33\095100CGA.doc
095100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: W here indicated, provide acoustical tile c eilings identical to those of as semblies t ested f or f ire resistance p er A STM E119 by U L or a nother testing an d i nspecting ag ency accep table to authorities having jurisdiction.
Farmington Elementary School B. Install a coustical u nits a fter in terior wet work is dry. 1.8
A. Verify actual locations of suspended acoustical ceilings and o ther construction to which finish suspended aco ustical cei lings m ust f it by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress t o avoid delay of Work.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: I ndicated b y design designations f rom U L's " Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.9
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. General: ASTM 635 and ASTM 636. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.10
B. Deliver a coustical tile s, s uspension s ystem components, and acces sories t o P roject s ite i n original, unopened packages and s tore t hem i n a fully en closed, co nditioned s pace w here t hey will be protected ag ainst damage f rom m oisture, humidity, temperature extremes, d irect s unlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
1. Acoustical C eiling U nits: F ull-size tile s e qual to 2.0 cartons of ten tiles of quantity installed. 2. Suspension S ystem C omponents: Quantity of each co ncealed g rid an d ex posed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
C. Before in stalling a coustical tile s, p ermit th em to reach room temperature an d a s tabilized m oisture content.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature o f m inimum 6 0 degrees F , an d m aximum h umidity of 40 percent prior to , d uring, a nd a fter a coustical u nit installation.
1.7
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed u ntil b uilding is e nclosed, s ufficient h eat is provided, du st-generating act ivities h ave terminated, and o verhead w ork i s co mpleted, tested, and approved.
095100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products i nstalled an d t hat ar e p ackaged w ith protective c overing f or s torage a nd id entified with labels describing contents.
A. Deliver, s tore, handle and protect P roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
D. Handle a coustical tile s c arefully to a void c hipping edges or damaging units in any way.
WARRANTY A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
2. Surface-Burning C haracteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with th e f ollowing s urfaceburning c haracteristics c omplying w ith ASTM E1264 f or C lass A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84:
1.5
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS SUSPENSION SYSTEM
-
A. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Chicago Metallic Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\095100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ACOUSTIC UNITS
Addition and Remodeling 1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic No. 2 00 S nap-Grid S ystem; color of a ll e xposed g rids a nd t rim - "White"; install grid in a 2 x 4 foot module.
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
2. Lay-In A coustical B oards: U SG “ Premier Nubby ClimaPlus” #70036; square lay-in e dge; NRC of 0.90 anti-mold and mildew; Class A per ASTM E1264; 24 x 48 x 1 i nch u nits; c olor“White.”
1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corporation. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.4 2.3
MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
A. Prefinished S heet M etal T ransitions for Off-Set ACT Systems: White, 24 gauge.
A. CEILING TYPE 1
B. Provide other m aterials, not s pecifically d escribed but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to approval of the Architect.
1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic No. 2 00 S nap-Grid S ystem; color of a ll e xposed g rids a nd tr im - "White"; install grid in a 2 x 4 foot module. 2. Lay-In Acoustical B oards: U SG “ Radar ClimaPlus” #22541, s quare lay-in e dge; N RC range of 0. 55; C AC of 35; C lass A pe r ASTM E1264, 24 x 48 x 3/ 4 i nch u nits; color “White”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Lay-In Acoustical B oards: U SG In teriors, In c. Gypsum Vinyl Coated C eiling P anels #3270, "Stipple White"; square e dge, 24 x 48 x 5/ 8 inch panels. C. CEILING TYPE 3 1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic N o. 2 00 S nap G rid S ystem; material and color for all exposed grid and trim to be aluminum, hung with stainless steel wires; install grid in a 2 x 4 f oot ( 600 x 1200 m m) module. 2. Lay-In Acoustical B oards: USG “Frost” #450, beveled tegular ed ge; m inimum NRC 0.70 and CAC of 38; color - "White"; 24 x 48 x 3/4 inch panels. D. CEILING TYPE 4
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS S:\11\0122\div2to33\095100CGA.doc
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. CEILING TYPE 2 1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic N o. 2 00 S nap G rid S ystem; material and color for all exposed grid and trim to be aluminum, hung with stainless steel wires; install grid in a 2 x 4 f oot ( 600 x 1200 m m) module.
ACCESSORIES
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2
INSTALLATION SYSTEM
-
GRID
SUSPENSION
A. Install suspension s ystem i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Provide hanger clips d uring s teel d eck er ection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. F. Hang s uspension s ystem i ndependent o f walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
095100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce t he n earest af fected hangers an d r elated car rying ch annels t o span the extra distance.
3.5
A. Clean exposed surfaces o f aco ustical tile cei lings, including tr im a nd e dge m oldings. C omply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
H. Do n ot s upport c omponents on m ain runners or cross runners if weight cau ses t otal d ead l oad t o exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located w ithin 6 inches of e ach c orner; or s upport c omponents independently. I. Do n ot eccen trically l oad s ystem, o r p roduce rotation of runners. J. Install e dge molding a t in tersection of ceiling and vertical s urfaces, u sing l ongest practical lengths. Miter corners. P rovide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
CLEANING
B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot b e s uccessfully cl eaned and r epaired t o p ermanently el iminate ev idence o f damage. 3.6
PROTECTION A. Protection of f inished w ork s hall b e und er provisions of Section 017300.
END OF SECTION
K. Form e xpansion j oints a s de tailed. Form to accommodate plus or m inus 1 inch m ovement. Maintain visual closure. 3.3
INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install a coustical u nits in manufacturer's instructions.
a ccordance
with
B. Fit acoustical units in p lace, f ree f rom d amaged edges o r o ther d efects d etrimental t o ap pearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units o ne w ay w ith pattern parallel to lo ngest r oom a xis. F it b order trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut tile to f it ir regular g rid a nd p erimeter e dge trim. D ouble cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. G. Where bullnose co ncrete b lock co rners o ccur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. H. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 feet of an exterior door. 3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation f rom Flat an d L evel Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
095100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\095100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE B. Provide t wo ( 2) co pies o f t he manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual for the complete care of each type of resilient flooring a nd base. Submit to the Owner, through t he A rchitect, for r eview an d approval.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1. Provide r esilient f looring a nd b ase manufacturer’s an d s upplier’s n ame, address and telephone numbers. I nclude f or each product; t he pr oduct n ame, s erial or m odel number and colors.
B. Concrete Floor P reparation an d L eveling f or Resilient Flooring. C. Resilient Flooring, a s I ndicated o n th e D rawings, Specified H erein; I ncluding A ll Related Accessories and Adhesives.
1.5
A. Manufacturer/Installer: C ompany s pecializing in the manufacture and installation o f products specified in this Section with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience.
D. Types of Resilient Flooring: Vinyl Tile Flooring. E. Resilient Vinyl Base. 1.2
B. Conform to " Americans w ith D isabilities A ct Accessibility Guidelines" (ADAAG) criteria for the following:
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: F loor substrate surface.
1. Static Coefficient of Friction: A ppendix to the ADAAG, in Section A4.5 defines slip resistant as a static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for floor areas a nd 0. 8 f or r amps. A STM C1028 (The Slip Meter), t est p rocedures s hall b e u sed f or both wet a nd dr y r eadings, a nd a ll manufacturers s hall c ertify th at their products meet or exceed these requirements.
B. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: W all material to receive application of base. C. Section 092116 - Gypsum B oard S ystems: W all materials to receive application of base. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product D ata: S ubmit m anufacturer’s d ata on specified products describing p hysical an d performance ch aracteristics; s izes, acces sories, patterns and colors a vailable. I nclude in stallation recommendations f or each t ype o f substrate required
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
C. All primers, adhesives, sealers an d w ax s hall b e VOC compliant. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, p rotect a nd h andle p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000.
C. Samples: S ubmit two s amples, 12 x 12 inches in size illu strating c olor a nd p attern f or e ach f loor material for each color specified.
B. Deliver an d s tore m aterials in manufacturer's original unopened containers w ith b rands, na mes and production lot numbers clearly marked thereon.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special procedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
C. Areas where materials are t o b e s tored s hould b e maintained at 5 5 d egrees F w ith a maximum relative humidity of 50 percent.
E. Submit manufacturer's written certification that all ADAAG Requirements have been met for this project.
D. Protect roll materials f rom d amage b y s toring o n end.
MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017923.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE S:\11\0122\div2to33\096500CGA.doc
E. Resilient f loor c overings shall not b e d elivered or installed at the job site until all masonry, plastering, and other finish operations including painting have been completed.
096500 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.7
Farmington Elementary School 2. AZROCK Commercial Flooring.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store the resilient flooring materials, adhesives and accessories in areas where they ar e t o b e i nstalled for a minimum of 4 8 h ours p rior to in stallation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain temperature and humidity in areas to receive the resilient flooring with a b alance HVAC system in permanent operating condition. Maintain conditions at 65 degrees F minimum to 80 de grees F m aximum w ith th e r elative h umidity not to exceed 75 percent for a t l east 72 h ours pr ior t o, during and after the installation.
3. MANNINGTON, Inc. 4. TARKETT, Inc. B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
1.8
B. Colors: Three colors as selected by the Architect. 1. Colors a s O utlined o n th e Color and Finish Schedule. C. Adhesive: V OC compliant, manufacturer’s type to suit application. 2.3
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1. ARMSTRONG World Industries. 2. AZROCK Commercial Flooring. 3. JOHNSONITE, Inc. 4. VINYL PLASTICS, Inc. 5. ROPPE, Inc. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
WARRANTY A. Provide t wo ( 2) y ear m anufacturer's w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
2.4
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - VINYL TILE FLOORING A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. ARMSTRONG World Industries.
096500 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
nder p rovisions o f S ection
MATERIALS A. Vinyl Base (VB): ASTM F-1861, Type TV, vinyl; continuous, four (4) inches high; 1/8 inch thick; top set cove; pre-molded external corners. B. Colors: Two colors as selected by the Architect. 1. Colors a s O utlined o n th e Color and Finish Schedule. C. Adhesive: V OC co mpliant, base manufacturer’s type to suit application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFATURERS - BASE MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f r esilient flooring and base a nd o ther c onstruction t o w hich r esilient flooring and base must f it b y accu rate f ield measurements b efore i nstallation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9
MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition T ile ( VCT): F S S S-T-312, Type I V, C omposition 1; 12” x 12” x 1/8 inch thick.
C. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs or to pping u ntil th e la tter h as b een cured and is sufficiently d ry t o ach ieve b ond with adhesive as determined by m anufacturer's r ecommended b ond and moisture test. D. The e xtended t emperature r ange af ter the installation shall be from 50 degrees F minimum to 85 degrees F maximum to maintain manufacturer's product warranty.
nder p rovisions o f S ection
2.5
MATERIALS A. (TEP-1) Transition Between Carpet a nd R esilient Flooring: 1. See Color and Finish Schedule. 2. Adhesive: VOC compliant, manufacturer’s type to suit application. RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096500CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling B. Independent t esting ag ency t o t est an d inspect floors for pot ential m oisture a nd c uring pr oblems prior to installation of Flooring materials. Prepare All Sub-Floors as Follows:
B. (TEP-2) Transition Between Carpet and Tile: 1. See the Color and Finish Schedule. 2. Adhesive: VOC compliant, manufacturer’s type to suit application.
1. Prepare subfloor i n accordance w ith ASTM F710.
C. (TEP-3) Nosing: see Color and Finish Schedule. 2.6
2. Leveling and Patching C ompounds: I n a reas where s uch products are required, the underlayment m ust b e c ompatible with the resilient floor covering. Where a floor has been previously in stalled, o ld f looring a nd adhesive shall b e r emoved in acco rdance w ith E PA standards. T hen i nstall und erlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor F iller: W hite p remix la tex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to be compatible with adhesive, and VOC compliant. B. Sealer and Wax: T ypes recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit a pplication, a nd V OC compliant.
3. Remove existing coatings f rom s ub-floor surfaces that would prevent n ew ad hesive t o bond, s uch a s c uring c ompounds, paints, oils, waxes, sealers or other materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Installer is required to inspect sub-floor surfaces to determine that they ar e s atisfactory t o r eceive resilient f looring. S ub-floors sh all be cl ean, d ry, free from dust, grease, wax, soap and other foreign materials. C oncrete s ub-floors s hall be dr y, c ured and free f rom c razing, d usting, s palling a nd s hall not be coated with any curing compound, hardener or s ealer. E nsure that sub-floor is free fr om hydrostatic water pressure. B. Installer shall perform bond and moisture tests on sub-floors to d etermine if th ey a re sufficiently cured and dry. A moisture test must be performed by u sing th e C M M oisture M eter o r s imilar apparatus a pproved i n a dvance by t he A rchitect. Acceptable range is f rom 0 to 2 .5 p ercent. B ond test(s) must also be performed in accordance with the m oisture t est. R efer t o manufacturer's installation instructions for additional information. C. Verify f loor an d l ower w all s urfaces ar e f ree o f substances t hat m ay i mpair ad hesion of new adhesive and finish materials.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Existing Concrete Floors: Perform Calcium Chloride test o n e xisting s labs where f looring will be in stalled. V erify v apor e mission is within an acceptable range p er f looring m anufacturer’s recommendations.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE S:\11\0122\div2to33\096500CGA.doc
C. Broom cl ean an d v acuum s urfaces t o be covered, and i nspect s ub-floor. D o no t us e a ny sweeping compounds that contain oil. 3.3
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install r esilient f looring, b ase, a dhesives and compounds in accordance w ith m anufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Where movable p artitions are indicated on the Drawings, install resilient flooring before partitions are erected. C. Install r esilient f looring a nd b ase u sing method indicated in s trict c ompliance w ith manufacturer's printed instructions. E xtend r esilient f looring in to toe s paces, d oor r eveals, an d i nto cl osets and similar openings. D. Scribe, cut a nd f it r esilient f looring to p ermanent fixtures, b uilt-in furniture a nd c abinets, p ipes, outlets an d p ermanent co lumns, w alls and partitions. E. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on sub-floor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking devices. F. Tightly cement resilient f looring to sub-base without open c racks, vo ids, r aising a nd p uckering at j oints, t elegraphing o f ad hesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections.
096500 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
Farmington Elementary School 2. Do not w ash floor until tim e p eriod recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well sealed in adhesive. Wait a minimum of 72 hours after the seams have been heat welded for all resilient sheet flooring.
INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A. Mix floor tile f rom co ntainers t o en sure s hade variations are consistent. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
3. Scrub floor with m echanical s crubber b eing careful to r emove b lack m arks an d ex cessive soil.
C. Install floor tile with p attern grain a lternating with adjacent u nits t o p roduce b asket w eave p attern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
4. Remove any ex cess ad hesive o r o ther s urface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
D. Terminate t ile flooring a t c enterline o f d oor openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
B. Clean resilient flooring and b ase n ot m ore th an 4 days p rior to d ate o f Substantial Completion Inspection in each area of t he p roject. C lean resilient f looring a nd b ase by methods recommended b y r esilient flooring an d base manufacturers.
F. Scribe tile flooring to w alls, c olumns, c abinets, floor outlets, and ot her a ppurtenances t o p roduce tight joints. 3.5
INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Install b ase an d co mponents i n acco rdance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit joints tig ht a nd v ertical. M aintain m inimum measurement o f t wenty f our ( 24) i nches b etween joints. C. Miter in ternal c orners. A t ex ternal co rners, use pre-molded units. A t e xposed e nds, u se pr emolded units. D. Install base on solid backing. B ond tig ht to w all and floor surfaces. E. Scribe and f it t o door interruptions.
3.6
f rames a nd ot her
INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES A. Install a ll accessories in acco rdance manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8
PROTECTION A. Protect r esilient flooring and base against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring and base manufacturer's directions. 1. Protect resilient flooring a gainst d amage f rom rolling lo ads f or in itial period following installation b y c overing with p lywood or hardboard. U se dol lies t o m ove stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. Do not move an y h eavy l oads acr oss t he new floor areas for a minimum period of 72 hours. 2. Cover resilient flooring a nd base w ith und yed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
with END OF SECTION
B. Install resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with ad hesive. I nstall ed ge s trips at edges of f looring w hich w ould ot herwise be exposed. 3.7
CLEANING A. Perform th e f ollowing c leaning o perations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 1. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
096500 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096500CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 096800 - CARPETING C. Product D ata: Submit m anufacturer’s d ata on specified products describing p hysical an d performance ch aracteristics; d urability, r esistance to fading an d f lame r esistance ch aracteristics. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
D. Samples: Submit s amples 1 2 x 1 2 in ch in s ize illustrating co lor an d p attern f or each carpet material specified.
B. New and Existing C oncrete F loor L eveling a nd Preparation to Receive Carpeting.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special procedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
C. Commercial Carpeting Installed w ith th e G lued Down Application Method.
F. Certification: S ubmit manufacturer’s cer tification as outlined under Article 1.7 below.
1. Adhesives and Accessories. 1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
NOT
1.6
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing s pecified c arpet with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
A. Division 2 2 - Mechanical: P lumbing f loor co ver plate with recess for carpet. B. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical and telephone floor cover plate with recess for carpet. 1.3
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing carpet with m inimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience.
RELATED SECTIONS
1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are t horoughly t rained an d ex perienced in the necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for pr oper performance of t he Work of this Section.
A. Section 017419 Construction W aste Management: R emoval an d d isposal o f ex isting carpeting materials. B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete floor substrate surface.
Concrete:
C. Single Source R esponsibility: P rovide m aterials produced b y a s ingle manufacturer for each carpet type.
C. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Vinyl base at carpeting areas. 1.4
DEFINITIONS A. Commercial Carpet: Carpet i ntended f or u se i n commercial an d p ublic s paces, w ith co nstruction, fire-ratings, s tatic c ontrol an d ap pearance appropriate for this use.
1.5
D. Carpet m aterial s hall b e o ff-gassed, o ff-site a s much as possible. 1.7
TESTING A. Certification: S ubmit manufacturer’s c ertification stating that m aterials p rovided c omply w ith specified requirements. I nclude s upporting certified la boratory te sting d ata in dicating that materials meet specified test requirements.
SUBMITTALS A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate carpeting layout a nd seaming diagrams, show car pet d irection, m ethod of joining seams and types of edge strips.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to International Building Code for flame rating requirements of 25 o r l ess i n acco rdance with ASTM E84. B. Conform to ASTM D2859 for surface flammability ignition test.
CARPETING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096800CGA.doc
096800 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
C. Conform to Carpet and Rug Institute Green L abel Plus standard. 1.9
C. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than two percent (2%) of each type, color and pattern of carpeting, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Provide accessory components as required, and replacement materials from s ame p roduction r un as m aterials installed. P ackage r eplacement m aterials w ith protective coverings, identified w ith a ppropriate labels.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three (3) days prior to installation in a rea o f in stallation to a chieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 7 0 d egrees F am bient temperature t hree ( 3) d ays p rior to, during and twenty four (24) hours after installation.
1.10
1.12
A. Provide ten (10) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle a nd pr otect pr oducts to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including carpet ed ge r aveling, d elamination a nd r esiliency, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
B. Deliver m aterials to th e s ite in original factory wrappings an d co ntainers, cl early l abeled an d unopened with identification o f m anufacturer, brand n ame, q uality o r g rade, fire h azard classification, and lot number. C. Store materials i n o riginal u ndamaged p ackages and containers, inside well-ventilated areas protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures and humidity. D. Lay goods flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. M aintain t emperature i n storage areas above 68 degrees F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
B. Maintenance I nstructions: S ubmit manufacturer’s printed instructions f or m aintenance o f in stalled work, including methods a nd f requency recommended f or m aintaining o ptimum c ondition under an ticipated traffic a nd us e conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which m ay b e d etrimental to f inishes and performance.
MANUFACTURERS
-
1. Interface Flor. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823.
ACCEPTABLE CARPETING
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer:
E. Comply with in structions a nd r ecommendations of manufacturer for s pecial d elivery, s torage, an d handling requirements. 1.11
WARRANTY
2.2
nder p rovisions o f S ection
CARPET MATERIALS A. Carpet: "Commercial Carpet" - Broadloom Carpet; Antimicrobial, contains no arsenic or heavy metals, non-halogenated. B. See color and Finish S chedule f or pr oduct, c olor and pattern and size as well as location
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor F iller: W hite p remix la tex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to suit application. B. Installation A dhesive: W ater-resistant, n onstaining t ype as r ecommended b y car pet manufacturer, compatible with carpet material, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.
096800 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
CARPETING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096800CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
C. Seaming Cement: H ot-melt s eaming a dhesive o r similar p roduct r ecommended b y carpet manufacturer, for taping s eams a nd b uttering c ut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams.
B. Make substrata level and free of irregularities. Assure one constant floor h eight af ter car pet i s installed, f illing l ow s pots a nd gr inding high spots as required. C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local lo w s pots, c racks, j oints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.
D. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-Metallic: 1. Transition Between C arpet a nd V inyl T ile: Roppe #1 77, or a pproved e quivalent by the Architect from manufacturer’s full color range.
D. Apply, trowel and float f iller to a chieve s mooth, flat, hard s urface. P rohibit tr affic u ntil f iller is cured.
2. Transition Between Carpet an d C oncrete: Roppe #174, or a pproved e quivalent by the Architect from manufacturer’ full color range. E. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the C ontractor s ubject t o t he approval of the Architect. 2.4
CARPET MATS A. Collins and Aikman, Inc., “ Infinity”; serged edges,locations and s izes as i ndicated o n t he Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that s urfaces ar e s mooth an d f lat w ith maximum variation of 1 /4 inch in 1 0 feet, and ar e ready to receive Work. C. Verify concrete floors are d ry t o m aximum moisture content of seven (7) percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. D. Verify w ith a dhesive m anufacturer, p h requirements and u nderlayment o r s ealer requirements for concrete substrates. E. Beginning o f W ork means accep tance o f s ubstrate conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Immediately prior to in stallation o f th e W ork o f this Section, thoroughly clean substrata and remove oil, g rease, p aint, v arnish, h ardeners, an d o ther foreign matter which w ould ad versely af fect t he bond of adhesive.
CARPETING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096800CGA.doc
E. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Comply w ith m anufacturers' i nstructions a nd recommendations f or c arpet tile installation, and direction o f c arpet. M aintain u niformity o f carpet direction and lay of pile. B. Verify carpet m atch b efore cu tting t o en sure minimal variation between dye lots. C. Double cu t car pet, t o al low i ntended s eam and pattern match. Mak e cu ts s traight, t rue an d unfrayed. D. Extend carpet u nder o pen-bottomed obs tructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, a nd into alcoves and closets of each space. E. Join s eams b y h ot ad hesive t ape method. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. F. Lay carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at ed ges, w ith a u niform ap pearance. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is c ontinuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. I. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. K. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet tight to walls. F it c arpet tig ht to v ertical in terruptions, leaving no gaps. L. Install carpet edge guard at the termination of carpet to dissimilar materials, secure guards to substrate.
096800 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
3.4
Farmington Elementary School
CLEANING A. Remove ex cess ad hesive w ithout damage from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps from the site. C. Vacuum carpet surfaces using commercial machine with f ace-beater el ements. R emove spots and replace car pet w here s pots can not b e r emoved. Remove a ny p rotruding f ace y arn us ing s harp scissors.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Provide a he avy non-staining p aper o r p lastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of traffic, maintaining intact until time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
096800 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
CARPETING
S:\11\0122\div2to33\096800CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 097750 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS D. Samples: Submit line of samples illustrating color, texture and sheen.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
E. Installation Instructions: S ubmit manufacturer's installation instructions.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
F. Certification: Submit m anufacturer’s w ritten certification th at th e p roducts a nd components specified and supplied meet or exceed all required test for the r equirements o f A STM E 84 an d h ave the written approval of USDA.
B. Preparation of Substrate Surfaces. C. Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels, as Indicated on the D rawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding A ll Related Accessories and Attachments. 1.2
1.5
A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: W blocking and grounds.
B. Provide t wo ( 2) co pies o f t he manufacturer’s Maintenance M anual f or t he co mplete car e o f the fiberglass r einforced w all p anels. S ubmit to th e Owner, through t he A rchitect, f or r eview a nd approval.
ood
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal stud wall framing a nd gypsum b oard substrate construction.
1. Provide fiberglass r einforced w all p anel manufacturer’s an d s upplier’s n ames, address and telephone numbers. I nclude f or each product; t he pr oduct n ame, s erial or m odel number and colors.
C. Divisions 22 and 23 - Mechanical: Equipment cutouts and penetrations through finish panels. D. Division 2 6 - Electrical: E quipment c ut-outs a nd penetrations through finish panels. 1.6 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Panels an d co mponents s hall b e USDA approved and certified. 1.7
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product D ata: S ubmit m anufacturer’s data on product characteristics, fasteners and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: I ndicate w all e levations, dimensions, joint and termination details.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS S:\11\0122\div2to33\097750CGA.doc
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary cr afts an d w ho ar e completely familiar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4
REGULATORY REGUIREMENTS A. Conform t o a pplicable bu ilding c ode f or smoke/flame rating requirements of less than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing p roducts s pecified in this Section with m inimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience. B. Applicator: Company s pecializing in th e installation of products s pecified in th is S ection with m inimum f ive ( 5) y ears documented experience.
MAINTENANCE
B. Inspect products upon delivery to site, and replace all broken or damaged panels C. Store products in a dry place free of moisture. D. Store p anels f lat o n s upported s urfaces f ree o f warpage. 1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual lo cations o f f iberglass w all p anels and o ther c onstruction to w hich f iberglass wall panels m ust f it, b y accu rate f ield measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop dr awings. C oordinate f abrication a nd
097750 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: As recommended by the panel manufacturer to suit ap plication and co ntaining no volatile organic compounds (VOC).
WARRANTY A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Molding s hall b e m anufacturer’s s tandard, one piece, specifically designed to accommodate 0.090 inch thick p anels. P rovide d ivision b ars, cap moldings, inside and outside corner moldings, and other moldings required for a complete installation.
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
1. Color: Match panel finish. C. Provide o ther m aterials, not s pecifically d escribed but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the C ontractor s ubject t o t he approval of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE FIBERGLASS PANELS (FRP)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
MANUFACTURERS REINFORCED WALL 3.1
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer:
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich work o f th is S ection w ill b e performed. Correct conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n o pr oceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Crane Composites. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
B. Verify that treated wood blocking is in place, and properly installed.
1. BP Chemicals, Inc.
C. Verify that substrate is sound and ready to receive work of this section.
2. LASCO Panel Products.
D. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions.
3. Sequentia, Inc. C. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under pr ovisions of S ection 3.2
B. Ensure wall surfaces are smooth and flat.
A. Fiberglass Reinforced Wall P anels ( FRP): Moisture resistant, impervious to not support mold or mildew, and will not rust or corrode.
C. Remove ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, holes, e tc. with filler that is compatible with panel adhesive.
B. Panels: 0.090 inches thick, weight of 0.7 lb./sq. ft., custom c ut f rom b ulk c oils to heights appropriate for the spaces scheduled to receive FRP. 2. Flame Spread Rating: UL Class A. 3. Smoke Developed: 200 max. 4. Water A bsorption - 24 h ours a t 77 de grees F 0.4%. C. Color and Pattern: White Pebbled with Transitions.
097750 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION A. Clean all substrate surfaces.
MATERIALS
1. Width of panels shall be 4'-0".
EXAMINATION
D. Float and trowel filler to smooth, flat, hard surface. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install fiberglass r einforced w all p anels an d al l components i n acco rdance w ith m anufacturer's instructions. 1. Use products acceptable to panel manufacturer. B. Layout s ymmetrically in r ooms, w ith w all joints vertical. Verify wall la yout p attern with Architect prior to start of installation. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\097750CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
C. Use t he l argest practical p anel s izes; av oid splices and joints between corners. 1. Cut and drill panels w ith c arbide tip ped s aw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips. 2. Install p anels w ith manufacturer’s recommended g ap f or p anel f ield an d corner joints. 3. Pre-drill f astener holes in p anels w ith 1/8 inch oversize. 4. For t rowel t ype an d ap plication o f adhesive, follow ad hesive m anufacturer’s recommendations. D. Install straight, level and plumb. E. Scribe and fit panels tightly to frames, trim, etc. F. Finish b utt j oints, w all j uncture, wall/ceiling a nd wall/curb joints with th e specified s ealant, to oling to a smooth finish. 3.4
CLEANING A. Clean p anels t o uni form, unb lemished, uns tained, and unmarked condition. B. Replace al l p anels t hat ar e d amaged in any way during installation.
END OF SECTION
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS S:\11\0122\div2to33\097750CGA.doc
097750 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
097750 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\097750CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 098000 - ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT D. Cover bottom of pa nels w ith m oisture pr oof materials, an d al low f or ai r ci rculation u nder cover material to prevent condensation.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions o f th e C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), t he G eneral R equirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Preparation of Substrate Conditions.
1.6
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify act ual l ocations o f a coustical tr eatment a nd other construction to which acoustical treatment must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
C. (AWC-1) Acoustical Wall Covering. D. Premixed Adhesive As recommended b y W all Covering Manufacturer for This Application. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board S ystems: I nterior metal wall framing and gypsum board systems. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1.7
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials a nd workmanship p rovided are guaranteed against d efects af ter co mpletion an d final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to faulty materials and w orkmanship d eveloped during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate s caled el evations, dimensions and mounting hardware. C. Product Data: Submit m anufacturer’s d ata o n product ch aracteristics, f ire cl assifications, an d installation details. D. Samples: S ubmit Samples o f wall coverings illustrating surface color and finish. E. Installation Instructions: S installation instructions. 1.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Gilford F abric a nd F inish – “Walls o f Tranquility V #407D C138 Decipher, Translate.”
ubmit m anufacturer's
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance C haracteristics: T accordance with ASTM E84:
ested i n
1. Flame spread: (25) or less 2. Smoke Developed: (450) or less B. Acoustical Performance: NRC .20 per ASTM C423. 1.5
WARRANTY
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to the site under provisions of Section 016000.
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Acoustical W all T reatment ( AWC-1): A coustical Wall Covering; C lass “ A” c onstruction, 54” w ide; color an d p attern as shown on C olor a nd F inish Schedule. To be direct attached to the wall substrate without a s eam b eing v isible, a t lo cations indicated on the Drawings, and installed as per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s s tandard adhesive to suit application.
B. Store products in a dry place with no contact to either floors or walls. C. Products shall be protected a gainst m arring, s oil o r damage during storage and erection.
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
S:\11\0122\div2to33\098000CGA.doc
098000 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be p erformed. C orrect c onditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper c ompletion o f th e Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Commencement o f W ork s ignifies accep tance o f al l conditions. 3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Acoustical wall coverings shall be of size and profile as indicated on the Drawings. B. Locations are as indicated on the Drawings. 3.3
CLEANING
A. Clean all Work under provisions of Section 017400. B. Clean excess ad hesive f rom b oth co verings an d adjacent surfaces. 3.4
PROTECTION
A. Protection of f inished w ork u nder pr ovisions of Section 015000.
END OF SECTION
098000 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
S:\11\0122\div2to33\098000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 099000 - PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
B. Paint: As used herein, shall mean coating system materials, in cluding primers, e mulsions, e poxy, enamels, sealers, fillers and other applied materials whether u sed as p rimer, i ntermediate or finished coats.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Surface Preparation and Field Application of Paints and Coatings; as i ndicated o n t he D rawings, Specified H erein; I ncluding S urface Finish Schedule.
1.4
A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing quality paint and finish products as specified in th is S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) years documented experience.
C. New Construction: P aint a ll n ew c onstruction, including, but n ot lim ited to , e xposed s prinkler piping, d uctwork, c onduit a nd miscellaneous mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Existing C onstruction: N o p ainting required, except as indicated on the Drawings. Where new construction interfaces with e xisting c onstruction on the same plane, such as the installation of a new opening in an e xisting w all; th e C ontractor s hall paint t he e xisting s urfaces o the extent o f the wall plane and terminate at inside co rner o r co ntrol joint. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place C oncrete: F ield finish work. B. Section 042 731 - Unit M asonry S ystems: Field finish Work. C. Section 051200 primer.
- Structural Steel: T ouch u p
D. Section 055000 finishing.
- Metal F abrications:
Field
E. Section 081100 - Steel D oors an d F rames: F ield finishing. F. Section 081416 – Existing Wood D oors: F ield finishing. G. Section 083100 - Access Doors: Field finishing. H. Section 092116 - Gypsum B oard S ystem: F ield finishing. 1.3
DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\099000CGA.doc
QUALIFICATIONS
B. Applicator: C ompany s pecializing in commercial painting a nd finishing p roducts a s specified in this Section with minimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform t o 2006 International B uilding Code f or flame rating requirements o f l ess t han 2 5 f or finishes in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and e xperienced i n t he necessary crafts, an d w ho ar e co mpletely f amiliar with the specified requirements an d t he m ethods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. C. Paint Coordination: 1. Provide f inish c oats w hich a re c ompatible w ith the prime coats actually used. 2. Review o ther s ections o f these Specifications a s required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility o f the to tal c oating system for the various substrata. 3. Upon r equest b y t he Architect, provide information o n t he ch aracteristics o f t he specific finish m aterials to a ssure th at compatible p rime coats are used. 4. Provide barrier coats o ver n on-compatible primers, previously p ainted s urfaces or r emove the primer and re-prime as required. 5. Notify the Architect in w riting of a nticipated problems in using the s pecified c oating s ystems over prime co atings s upplied u nder o ther Sections.
099000 - 1 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
D. When p ainting o ver t he top o f a ny existing paint, the p ainter s hall b e r esponsible f or an alyzing the existing p aint f or ty pe a nd c omposition to determine t he ex act p reparation an d p rimer to be used with the new paint product specified.
primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for r eview. Resubmit until r equired s heen, c olor a nd texture is achieved and approved by the Architect. 2) Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application.
E. Provide Low VOC p aint to th e g reatest e xtent possible, consistent with color and sheen indicated in the Color and Finish Schedule. 1.6
d. If s o d irected b y th e A rchitect, s ubmit samples during t he p rogress o f t he W ork i n the form of actual application of the approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Submittal T iming: P rovide a ll p roduct data an d samples to th e A rchitect n o la ter th an sixty (60) days b efore a ny o perations o f th is S ection w ill commence.
2. Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested by the A rchitect u ntil th e r equired g loss, c olor and texture i s ach ieved. S uch s amples, w hen approved by the Architect, will become standards of co lor and finish f or accep ting o r rejecting the Work of this Section.
C. Product Data: Submit f or e ach p aint s ystem specified, including block fillers and primers: 1. Provide the manufacturer’s technical information, including la bel a nalysis a nd instructions for handling, s torage, an d ap plication of each materials proposed for use. 2. Provide material safety data s heets to the Architect, Owner and Contractor.
3. Do not commence finish p ainting until a pproved samples are on file at the job site. E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions. 1.7
A. Deliver, s tore, h andle an d p rotect p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016600.
3. List each material an d cr oss-reference to specific coating, f inish s ystem, a nd a pplication. Identify each m aterial b y t he m anufacturer’s cat alog number and general classification.
B. Deliver products to s ite i n sealed an d labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
4. Certification by the m anufacturer th at p roducts supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).
C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type o f p aint, b rand n ame, b rand co de, co verage, surface p reparation, d rying time, cleanup, co lor designation, and instructions f or mixing and reducing.
D. Samples: 1. Following th e s election of c olors and glosses b y the Architect, and provide s amples f or t he Architect’s review and approval.
D. Store p aint m aterials a t m inimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a m aximum of 90 degrees F, in well v entilated ar ea, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
a. Provide two (2) s amples of e ach c olor a nd each gloss f or each m aterial o n w hich t he finish is specified to be applied.
E. Take p recautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
b. Except as otherwise d irected b y t he Architect, provide sample s ize o f 8 x 1 0 inches. c. Verification P urposes: P rovide s amples o f each co lor an d m aterial t o b e applied, with texture to s imulate a ctual conditions, on representative s amples o f t he act ual substrate. 1) Provide stepped samples, d efining each separate co at, including b lock fillers and
I DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
F. Provide lighting level of minimum 80 foot-candles measured mid-height of substrate surface. 1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply p aint acco rding t o Manufacturer’s recommendations. P rovide c ontinuous ve ntilation and heating facilities t o m aintain s urface an d ambient temperatures according to Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or w hen r elative h umidity ex ceeds M anufacturer's recommendations. 1.9
1. Benjamin Moore Company. 2. Pittsburgh Paint Company. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company.
MAINTENANCE DATA
4. IdeaPaint – “Dry Erase Coatings.”
A. Provide manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017800. B. Provide t wo ( 2) co pies o f t he manufacturer’s Maintenance M anual f or t he co mplete car e o f the painted a reas. S ubmit t o t he O wner, through the Architect, for review and approval. 1. Provide paint manufacturer’s and supplier’s name, address and telephone numbers. I nclude for each product; t he pr oduct n ame, s erial or m odel number, an d co lors, cl early l abel each w ith content and locations where used. 1.10
WARRANTY
A. Provide o ne ( 1) year m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty. B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed du ring the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. 1.11
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra materials under provisions of Section 017800. B. Provide a one gallon container o f each co lor an d surface texture to Owner. C. Label each container with color. texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer’s label. D. Store in Owner’s designated storage area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products f rom t he f ollowing m anufacturer a s Scheduled at the End of this Section: 1. ICI DuLux DeVoe. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
C. Substitutions: 012500.
Under pr ovisions of S ection
D. Substitutions m ust be pr ior a pproved by specific paint formula in the bidding phase. 2.2
MATERIALS A. Material C ompatibility: P rovide b lock fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that ar e co mpatible w ith o ne an other an d t he substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated b y t he m anufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: P rovide th e m anufacturer’s b est quality tr ade s ale p aint m aterials o f th e various coating types specified. P aint material co ntainers not d isplaying p aint m anufacturer’s p roduct identification will NOT be accepted. C. Proprietary N ames: U se of manufacturer’s proprietary product n ames t o d esignate co lors o r materials is n ot in tended to imply that products named are required to be u sed t o t he ex clusion o f equivalent products o f o ther m anufacturers. Provide the manufacturer’s m aterial d ata an d certificates of performance f or p roposed substitutions. D. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide u ndercoat p aint p roduced b y t he same manufacturer as the finish coat. 2. Use only the thinners recommended by the p aint manufacturer, an d u se o nly t o the recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, f inish c oat, and thinner material as p arts of a unified system of paint finish. E. Coatings: Ready mixed, ex cept f ield cat alyzed coatings. Process p igments t o a s oft p aste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 1. Good flow and br ushing pr operties; c apable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
F. Accessory M aterials: L inseed o il, shellac, turpentine, p aint th inners a nd o ther m aterials not specifically i ndicated b ut r equired t o ach ieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
1. Veneer Plaster an d G ypsum W allboard: 1 2 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, an d C oncrete U nit Masonry: 12 percent.
G. All coatings and materials s hall c onform to applicable Federal, State an d L ocal R egulations, including V OC/VOS r ules a t th e tim e of application. 2.3
3. Interior Wood: 15 pe rcent, m easured i n accordance with ASTM D2016. F. Review o ther S ections i n w hich primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request by the Architect, furnish in formation o n c haracteristics o f f inish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
FINISHES A. Refer to Schedule at E nd o f S ection f or S urface Finish Schedule.
2.4
1. Notify the Architect a bout a nticipated p roblems using t he m aterials s pecified over substrates primed by others.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For a pplication of t he a pproved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular p aint b y t he m anufacturer o f t he particular paint, and as approved by the Architect.
3.2
A. General:
B. Prior to th e u se o f a pplication e quipment, v erify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish wall will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment. 2.5
1. Mix a nd p repare p aint m aterials in strict accordance w ith t he manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Architect. 2. When m aterials a re n ot in u se, s tore in tig htly covered container. 3. Maintain containers us ed i n s torage, m ixing a nd application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide o ther m aterials, not s pecifically d escribed but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor an d s ubject t o t he approval of the Architect.
B. Stirring: 1. Stir m aterials b efore a pplication, producing a mixture of uniform density.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Do not s tir in to th e material a ny f ilm which may form o n t he s urface, b ut r emove t he film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that surfaces are r eady t o r eceive w ork as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop a pplied p rimer f or c ompatibility w ith subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic m oisture m eter. Do n ot a pply f inishes unless m oisture co ntent o f s urfaces ar e b elow t he following maximums:
MATERIALS PREPARATION
3. Use only thinners approved by Paint Manufacturer and o nly w ithin r ecommended limits. 3.3
SURFACE PREPARATION A. Exterior and Interior Surfaces - New C onstruction and Previously Painted Surfaces: 1. Follow a ll r ecommended pr ocedures ou tlined by the paint manufacturer for surface preparation of applicable specified surfaces and substrates. B. Remove electrical plates, h ardware, l ight f ixture trim, escutcheons, fittings and other items installed but are not to be painted prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
C. Correct defects an d cl ean s urfaces w hich af fect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.
O. Shop Primed S teel S urfaces: S and an d s crape to remove l oose p rimer an d r ust. Feather edges to make t ouch-up patches inconspicuous. C lean surfaces with s olvent. P rime b are s teel s urfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.
D. Set nails, staples and putty holes after prime coat or sealer is applied.
P. Interior Wood I tems S cheduled t o R eceive P aint Finish: W ipe off d ust a nd g rit p rior to p riming. Seal k nots, p itch s treaks, a nd s appy s ections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.
E. Seal marks that may bleed through surface finishes with shellac. F. Impervious S urfaces: R emove m ildew by scrubbing w ith s olution o f tri-sodium ph osphate and bleach. R inse w ith cl ean w ater an d al low surface to dry.
Q. Interior Wood I tems S cheduled t o R eceive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, s eal k nots, p itch s treaks, an d s appy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.
G. Aluminum S urfaces S cheduled f or P aint F inish: Remove s urface co ntamination b y s team o r high pressure water. Remove o xidation w ith aci d et ch and s olvent w ashing. Apply etching p rimer immediately following cleaning. H. Insulated Coverings: R emove d irt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
R. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: S eal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.4
A. Protect el ements s urrounding t he w ork of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
I. Concrete F loors: R emove contamination, acid etch, and rinse f loors w ith cl ear w ater. V erify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. A llow to cure and dry.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
J. Gypsum Board S urfaces: F ill m inor d efects w ith filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
C. Furnish d rop c loths, s hields, and protective methods to prevent s pray or dr oppings f rom disfiguring other surfaces.
K. Galvanized Surfaces: R emove s urface contamination and o ils a nd wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. L. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove d irt, lo ose mortar, scale, salt or al kali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium p hosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of c orroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. M. Plaster and G ypsum W allboard Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. W ash and neutralize high alkali surfaces t o m eet p H value requirements recommended by paint manufacturer. N. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are ev ident, r emove by w ire b rushing o r sandblasting; c lean b y w ashing w ith s olvent. Apply a t reatment of ph osphoric a cid s olution, ensuring w eld j oints, b olts, a nd n uts a re s imilarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
PROTECTION
D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.5
PAINT APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply p aint co atings i n accordance with manufacturer’s written i nstructions a nd recommendations. Use applicators and techniques b est s uited f or s ubstrate an d type of materials being applied. 2. Touch-up s hop ap plied p rime co ats w hich h ave been damaged, an d t ouch-up b are ar eas p rior t o start of finish coats application. 3. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. 4. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat h as b een i nspected and approved by t he Architect. 5. Only t he i nspected an d ap proved co ats of paint will b e c onsidered in d etermining the number of coats applied.
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
6. Sand and dust between co ats t o r emove d efects visible to the u naided ey e f rom t he d istance o f five feet.
b. Paint vi sible d uct s urfaces behind vents, registers and grilles “Flat Black”. c. Wash m etal w ith s olvent, p rime and apply two coats of alkyd enamel.
7. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed sides.
2. Exposed Pipe and Duct Insulation:
B. Drying:
a. Apply one c oat o f la tex p aint o n insulation which has been sized or primed under other Sections; apply two ( 2) c oats on s uch surfaces when unprepared.
1. Allow sufficient d rying tim e b etween c oats, modifying the period a s r ecommended by t he material m anufacturer t o s uit adverse w eather conditions.
b. Match color of adjacent surfaces.
2. Consider oi l-base an d o leo-resinous s olvent ty pe paint a s d ry f or re -coating when the p aint f eels firm, doe s n ot de form or f eel s ticky u nder moderate pressure o f t he t humb, an d w hen t he application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
c. Remove band before p ainting, an d r eplace after painting. 3. Hardware: a. Paint p rime co ated h ardware t o match adjacent surfaces.
C. Brush Applications:
b. Paint m etal p ortions of h ead s eals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the door frame unless o therwise d irected b y the Architect.
1. Brush o ut a nd w ork t he b rush c oats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, r opiness, a nd o ther s urface imperfections will not be acceptable.
G. All ex posed i nterior s teel an d co ncrete s urfaces i n areas of new construction shall be prepped, primed and finish painted.
D. Spray Applications: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by t he Architect in writing, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 2. Where spray application is used, ap ply each co at to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. 3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in one pass. E. For completed w ork, m atch t he approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove, refinish or r epaint w ork n ot in c ompliance w ith the specified requirements. F. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures: 1. Exposed Mechanical Items: a. Finish electric p anels, acces s d oors, conduits, p ipes, d ucts, g rilles, registers, vents a nd ite ms o f s imilar n ature to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed by the Architect.
3.6
CLEANING A. As Work pr oceeds, pr omptly r emove pa int w here spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accu mulation o f t ools, eq uipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect c otton w aste, c loths, a nd material which may co nstitute a f ire hazard, p lace in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Upon completion of the job, the painting contractor shall r emove al l s urplus m aterials, s caffolds, et c. that relate to his trade, from the premises. He shall clean al l w indow g lass f ree o f ex cess p aint and splatters, and remove paint that has been misplaced on other surfaces.
Farmington Elementary School
Paint Material FINISH 1 Primer: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 2 Primer: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
FINISH 3 Primer: 3010 Prep and Prime Block Filler Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 4 Primer: 3210 Prep and Prime Gripper M ulti-Purpose P rimer Sealer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
Addition and Remodeling
Dry Film Thickness (mils) 2.5
Application Location
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Exterior galvanized hollow metal doors and frames. (Omit primer on factory primed items). All new ferrous exterior metal including items of mechanical and electrical work, (roof, ventilators, etc.) if ferrous or aluminum.
Brush or Roller
Interior exposed metals, including exposed structure, decking, diffusers, registers, grilles, steel plates and shapes, exposed mechanical and electrical items, including ducts. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. (Omit primer on factory primed items).
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Concrete masonry units where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Brick where “paint” is indicated.
5.0
2.5
3.4
8.0
3.6
3.0
3.6
Farmington Elementary School
Paint Material
FINISH 5 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Interior Primer Sealer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 6 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 7 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 1210 Ultra-Hide Latex Flat
FINISH 8 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 4508 Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy
Addition and Remodeling
Dry Film Thickness (mils)
2.0
Application Location
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Plaster where "paint" is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum wallboard where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum and plaster ceilings where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum wallboard where “epoxy” is indicated.
3.6
1.1
3.6
1.1
4.0
1.1
8.0
Farmington Elementary School
Paint Material
FINISH 9 Filler: 3010 Prep and Prime Block Filler Finish: 4508 Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy FINISH 10 1700 Woodpride Oil Finishing Stain
Addition and Remodeling
Dry Film Thickness (mils) 10.0-12.0
Application Location
Spray, Brush, or Roller
8.0
NA
Brush
1916 Woodpride Quick Dry Sanding Sealer
2.0
Brush
Glidden Professional Q uick D ry Varnish
1.0
Brush
6.0
Spray, Brush, or Roller
FINISH 11 Primer: Devoe C oatings D evflex 4020P F Direct to Metal Primer Finish: 1280-1200 W aterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall FINISH 12
Concrete masonry units where "epoxy" is indicated.
Interior hardwood including doors, millwork, etc.
Prime only metal surfaces where rust has been removed.
2.0
Ceiling Areas: Roof deck, Airless Spray joists, beams, conduit, piping, ductwork, and where indicated.
5.0
Wet Roller
Primer: 1000 P rep a nd P rime HiHide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: “Create” by IdeaPaint
3.7
COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Architect shall provide Color Schedule on a separate Document outlined in the Drawings.
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
END OF SECTION
099000 - 10 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
PAINTS AND COATINGS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\099000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS B. Conform t o I nternational B uilding C ode, 200 6 Edition, for s afety g lazing r equirements f or hazardous locations.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Visual D isplay S ystems; a s I ndicated o n th e Drawings, Specified Herein; Including All Related Trim, Accessories and Attachments.
1.6
A. Manufacturer and Installer: C ompany specializing in manufacturing and installing t he P roducts specified in th is S ection w ith m inimum f ive ( 5) years documented experience. 1.7
2. Sealed Composition Cork Tackboards. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: W blocking and grounds.
ood
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
1.8
SUBMITTALS
B. Warranty o n P orcelain E namel Mar kerboards: Provide w ritten w arranty f rom manufacturer that for lifetime of in stallation, s urface f inish u nder normal conditions of use shall not e xhibit c razing, flaking, or fading. W arranty is lim ited to replacement of material only.\
B. Shop Drawings: I ndicate w all e levations, dimensions, j oint lo cations, a nd s pecial anchor details. C. Product D ata: P rovide d ata on markerboards, corkboards, trim and accessories.
C. Warranty on T ackboard U nits: S tate th at a ll materials an d w orkmanship p rovided ar e guaranteed f or five (5) years after co mpletion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or w orkmanship de veloped du ring the guarantee p eriod s hall b e s atisfactorily r epaired o r replaced at no expense to the Owner.
D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, co lor an d t exture o f m arkerboards, tackboards and trim. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. MAINTENANCE DATA
D. Warranty o n A ssembled U nits: P rovide five (5) year written w arranty f rom s upplier/installer providing labor and material coverage on any units found to have manufacturing or installation defects.
A. Submit data under provisions of Section 017823. B. Maintenance D ata: P rovide manufacturer’s complete maintenance recommendations, including data on regular cleaning and stain removal. 1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to I nternational B uilding C ode, L atest Edition, f or f lame s pread r ating and s moke development for wall finish materials in accordance with ASTM E84.
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s w ritten w arranty u nder provisions of Section 017836.
A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
1.4
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f v isual d isplay systems and other construction to which visual display systems m ust f it, b y accurate f ield m easurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards.
1.2
QUALIFICATIONS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS MARKERBOARDS
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101100CGA.doc
101100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
2. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
2.4
A. Particleboard: N PA A208.1, wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.
3. Polyvision. 4. Lake Country Resources, Inc.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, G rade 1-M-1 made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
5. W.E. Neal Slate Company. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.2
MARKERBOARD MATERIAL A. Porcelain E namel M arkerboards: M aximum four (4) feet height, minimum 28 gauge enameling steel with porcelain/ceramic finish fused to steel sheet at a temperature of 1500 d egrees F. F inish shall be Type A acid resistant, no seams allowed, and color as selected b y A rchitect f rom m anufacturer's f ull color range.
C. Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, foil faced type. 2.5
B. Board Tray: C halk T ray s hall b e p rovided f ull length of the board. Ends of tray shall have rounded edges. C. Magnetic Marker Holder: 1 8 i nches l ong, N eal Slate N o. M -11. P rovide on e u nit for each markerboard. D. Map R ail: S tandard t wo ( 2) i nch w ide an odized aluminum map rail with cork insert and map hooks.
2. Backing S heet: 0 .001 i nch aluminum foil for gypsum board, and 0.015 inch aluminum sheet for particleboard.
1. Map Rail with Cork Insert: Neal Slate MT-2. E. Adhesives: T manufacturer.
3. Markerboard s izes, p rofiles an d l ocation from finished floor s hall b e a s in dicated o n th e Drawings.
1. Core M aterial: Manufacturer’s s tandard 1 /4 inch thick gypsum board co re. L aminate gypsum board core to cork using manufacturer’s standard moisture resistant th ermoplastic ty pe adhesive. 2. Tackboard Height: 4’-0”. 3. Tackboard Width: Indicated on the Drawings. 4. Distance From Floor: Drawings.
As indicated on the
ype as
r
ecommended
by
F. Temporary Protective C over: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick.
COMPOSITION TACKBOARD MATERIAL A. Sealed C omposition C ork T ackboards: Nairn Cork; F lame s pread i ndex of 65 m aximum in accordance w ith A STM E 84, 1 /4 i nch thick material co nsisting o f h omogeneous co lored, burlap-backed composition cork, not sanded, with a vinyl sealed, fully washable, stain resistant surface. Color as s elected b y t he Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
BOARD TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Board Trim: Extruded aluminum (6063-T5 Alloy), heavily anodized on all ex posed s urfaces, w ith natural s atin f inish. S eries " C" tr im 0 .060 inches thick anodized aluminum "J" trim #25.
1. Core Material: U nits up to 16 x 4 feet shall be one single piece of 1/2 inch thick gypsum board core. Larger u nits r equiring s pline joints shall have 1 /2 i nch t hick p articleboard core, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.3
CORE MATERIALS
G. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for chalkboard cleaning. 2.6
FABRICATION - FRAME AND TRIM A. Aluminum Frame: E xtruded o f s lip-trim p rofile with concealed fasteners; map rail with cork insert over marker-board and tack-board surfaces. B. Aluminum Chalkrail: J -11 low profile with closed ends by Neal Slate, one piece full length of markerboard, and concealed fasteners.
2.7
FINISHES A. Porcelain Enamel: G lass f iber en amel, b aked t o vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel Institute, Type A, low gloss; White. B. Aluminum F rame, C halkrail, an d A ccessories: Heavily anodized on all exposed surfaces w ith natural satin finish, “Clear”. C. Map Rail with Cork Insert (Tack-Strip): Neal Slate J-2, or ap proved eq uivalent b y t he A rchitect. Provide over al l m arker-boards an d t ack-board
101100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
surfaces, and at all other locations indicated on the Drawings. D. Magnetic Tacks: Provide full set of magnetic tacks for each marker-board.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that internal wall b locking is r eady to receive work and positioning d imensions ar e as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Establish bottom of p erimeter f rame at dimension indicated on Drawings above finished floor. C. Install individual sections of m ap r ail w ith c ork insert as indicated on Drawings. D. Secure units level and plumb.
3.3
CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 017423. B. Clean b oard s urfaces i n manufacturer's instructions.
accordance
with
C. Cover surfaces w ith protective cover, taped to frame. D. Remove t emporary protective cover at d ate of Substantial Completion. 3.4
PROTECTION A. Protection o f f inished w ork s hall b e the responsibility o f th e C ontractor u ntil th e date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101100CGA.doc
101100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
101100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101100CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 101400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES 1.6
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. All interior plastic signs shall comply w ith a ll requirements o f th e A mericans w ith D isabilities Act (ADA).
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and O ther C onditions), G eneral Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.7
B. Warranty: S tate that a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
C. Interior Signage: 1. Plastic Engraved Signage. 2. Door Signs. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: U nit masonry wall substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud wall framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
stallation
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, s tore, h andle a nd p rotect p roducts to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. C. Store adhesive tape at ambient room temperatures.
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install plastic s igns w hen a mbient temperature is b elow 70 degrees F. M aintain th is minimum during and after installation of signs.
-
2. Braille-Tac by Advance Corporation. 3. Northland Identification Products. 4. Serigraphics.
C. Samples: Submit samples illustrating full size sign, of type, style and color specified including method of attachment. ritten in
MANUFACTURERS
1. ASI Sign Systems.
B. Shop D rawings: L isting s ign s tyles, lettering a nd locations, and overall d imensions o f each p lastic engraved sign.
D. Submit manufacturer's w instructions.
ACCEPTABLE PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1.4
WARRANTY A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Identifying Devices; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein, Including R elated A ccessories and Attachments.
1.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
B. Substitutions: U 0016000. 2.2
nder p rovisions o f S ection
INTERIOR PLASTIC SIGNS A. Tactile L etters a nd S ymbols: Raised 1/32 inch from t he s urface an d acco mpanied w ith G rade I I Braille. Provide raised characters a minimum 5/8 inch and no higher than two (2) inches. B. Pictograms: M anufactured to comply with Section 4.30.4 in Title I II o f th e A mericans w ith Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. C. Provide co lor o f characters and b ackground o f the highest co ntrast p ossible, an d as s elected b y th e Architect from the manufacturer’s full color range. D. Total p lastic s ign th ickness o f 0.125 inches, beveled edges; characters f ormed t o H elvetica Medium Style. 1. Plastic Sign Height: Eight (8) inches. 2. Plastic Sign Width: Message plus one (1) inch.
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101400CGA.doc
101400 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
3. Background Color: Match existing (Teal). 4. Character Color: Match existing (Off-White). E. Perimeter Frame: (Off-White).
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Beginning o f in stallation m eans in staller accepts existing surfaces.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install a ll id entifying d evices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate in terior plastic id entification s igns o n w all surface at s trike s ide o f d oor, and 5’-6” to top of sign from finish floor. C. Install id entification s igns le vel a nd secure to substrate.
3.3
CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 017400. B. Clean and polish all finished surfaces.
3.4
SCHEDULE A. Interior Plastic Signs: QUANTITY 1. MESSAGE MEN (HC Pictogram) 3 WOMEN (HC Pictogram) 3 RESTROOM 6 RESTROOM (HCPictogram) 2 WORKROOM 1 RECEIVING 1 MUSIC 2 MECHANICAL 2 ELECTRICAL 2 KITCHEN 1
END OF SECTION
101400 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\101400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 102113.19 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS recorded f ield m easurements o n f inal s hop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.6
B. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments; Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced; as I ndicated o n t he D rawings, Specified Herein; I ncluding A ccessories, F ittings and Attachments.
1.7
A. Coordinate the work with p lacement o f co ncealed support framing and anchors in wall construction.
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects, including breakage, co rrosion an d delamination, after completion and final acceptance of the W ork. D efects d ue t o faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: Concealed wood framing a nd p lates within walls for p artition panel support. B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. C. Section 0930 00 - Tiling: C eramic tile f loor a nd wall finish materials.
1.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1. Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capitol).
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details o f w all a nd f loor supports, and door swings.
B. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements for access for the disabled. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f s olid p lastic to ilet compartments and other construction to which solid plastic toilet compartments m ust f it, b y a ccurate field measurements before f abrication; s how
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS S:\11\0122\div2to33\102113.19CGA.doc
MATERIALS
B. Panels, Doors and Pilasters: Fabricated from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) c ontaining a minimum of 50% r ecycled m aterial m anufactured under high pressure forming a s ingle c omponent section which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a s elf-lubricating surface. P rovide p rotective plastic covering on all panels, doors and pilasters.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special procedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
1.5
nder p rovisions o f S ection
A. Toilet Compartments: F loor m ounted, ov erhead braced w ith n on-corrosive door s, pa nels and pilasters.
D. Samples: S ubmit s amples o f partition p anels illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.
1.4
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
SUBMITTALS
C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata o n panel an d d oor co nstruction, hardware, and accessories.
WARRANTY A. Provide t en ( 10) year m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
RELATED SECTIONS
D. Section 102810 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.
COORDINATION
C. Aluminum Extrusions: 6463-T5 alloy. 2.3
CHARACTERISTICS A. Dual c omponent c ompression m olded H igh Density P olyethylene ( HDPE) o f solid virgin resin materials in c olors th at extend t hroughout t he
102113.19 - 1 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
surface; t he p anels, d oors an d p ilasters s hall h ave recycled material (HDPE) as the core material.
1. Hinges: 8” aluminum wrap-around hinge on door openings of 30” or larger.
B. Doors, Panels a nd P ilasters: M inimum o ne ( 1) inch thick, all edges machined to a r adius of 0.250 inch an d al l ex posed s urfaces to be free o f s aw marks. 2.4
2.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate p artitions, p ilasters a nd d oors o f s ingle component construction of solid pol ymer r esin i n colors t hat e xtend f rom t he s urface t hroughout the entire thickness of the panels.
3. Provide two (2) door pulls 9inside and outside), and o ne ( 1) w all s top w ith each handicapped door.
C. Dividing Panels: 55 inches high and mounted at 14 inches above finished floor.
4. Fabricate d oor s trike an d k eeper from heavy aluminum e xtrusion w ith clear anodized f inish with wrap around flange s urface m ounted a nd thru-bolted to p ilaster w ith o ne-way sex bolts. Strike: heavy duty six (6) inch plate.
D. Pilasters: 82 inches high, m ounted w ithin a o ne piece p lastic s hoe w ith o ne-way t heft-proof, stainless steel sex bolts.
5. Provide doors with one (1) coat hook/bumper of heavy ch rome p lated Z amack with rubber bumper.
E. Aluminum e dging s trips t o be fastened to the bottom e dge of a ll door s a nd panels using vandal proof stainless steel fasteners.
6. Fabricate door latch ho using f rom he avy aluminum extrusion w ith c lear anodized finish, surface m ounted a nd t hru-bolted t o door with one-way s ex b olts. S lide b olt and button: heavy aluminum.
B. Doors: 55 inches h igh and m ounted a t 14 inches above finished floor.
2.5
Door c losures t o be f actory s et to accommodate all c onditions a nd a llow f or a positive o pening a nd c losing a ction f ree o f impediment.
ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: S olid color plastic shoes anchored to finished floor with plastic anchors and No. 14 x 1-1/2 inch stainless steel Phillips head screws. B. Wall Brackets: Full le ngth c ontinuous p lastic brackets, s olid c olor w eighing n ot less than 0.822 lb. p er lineal foot. Provide b rackets for all p anels to pilasters, pilaster to w all a nd p anel to w all connections. T hru-bolt w all b rackets p anels and pilasters w ith o ne-way sex bolts. Attach brackets to adjacent wall construction with N o. 1 4 x 1-1/2 inch s tainless s teel P hillips h ead screws anchored directly b ehind t he v ertical ed ge o f p anels and pilasters at 12 inch intervals along the full length of bracket and at each 1 2 i nch i nterval al ternately spaced between anchor connections.
2.6
A. Doors, P anels a nd P ilasters F inish: Equal to Santana - "Plastic-Glaze 2 80"; co lors s elected b y the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
E. Hardware:
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify correct spacing o f an d b etween p lumbing fixtures.
C. Headrails: Heavy a luminum e xtrusion w ith m ill finish in a nti-grip c onfiguration w eighing no t l ess than 1. 188 l b. pe r l ineal foot. F asten h eadrail t o tops of p ilasters and h eadrail b rackets b y t hrubolting with one-way stainless steel sex bolts. D. Headrail Brackets: 18 gauge stainless steel.
FINISHING
C. Verify c orrect lo cation o f b uilt-in f raming, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, p lumb, a nd l evel i n accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 t o 1 /2 i nch s pace b etween w all an d panels and between wall and end pilasters.
102113.19 - 2 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\102113.19CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
C. Attached p anel b rackets s ecurely t o w alls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels to b rackets w ith tamper pr oof through bolts and nuts. E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through s teel s addles in tegral w ith p ilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. G. Install accessories per manufacturer's instructions. H. Field to uch-up o f scratches o r d amaged finish will not be permitted. I. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. J. No e vidence o f d rilling, c utting, or p atching shall be visible in the finished work. K. Clearance of v ertical ed ges o f d oors s hall b e uniform t op t o bot tom a nd s hall n ot e xceed 3/ 16 inch. 3.3
CLEANING A. Cleaning work under provisions of Section 017423. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust h inges to position doors in partial opening position when unl atched. R eturn o ut-swinging handicapped doors to closed position. D. Clean al l f inished s urfaces t o b e f ree o f imperfections.
3.4
PROTECTION A. Protect finished W ork until the date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS S:\11\0122\div2to33\102113.19CGA.doc
102113.19 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
102113.19 - 4 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\102113.19CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.5
A. Verify actual locations of corner guards and other construction t o w hich c orner gua rds m ust fit, by accurate field measurements b efore f abrication; show r ecorded m easurements o n f inal shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Stainless Steel C orner G uards; I ncluding A ll Related Attachments.
1.2
1.6
1.7
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner Guards: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs. at any point without damage or permanent set.
1.4
WARRANTY A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board wall substrate construction. 1.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for in stallation o f c oncealed b locking o r anchor devices.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: Concealed wood support blocking for corner guard anchors.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate al l co rner guard locations, dimensions, and anchorage details. C. Product Data: S ubmit da ta f or pr oduct characteristics, special f eatures, f ire r esistive requirements, special anchoring r equirements, an d product limitations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
1. InPro Corporation (IPC). B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special procedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
1. Balco, Inc. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc.
F. Submit recent (Within One Year) system performance t esting d ata f rom an I ndependent Testing Agency for the following items:
3. Koroseal Wallcoverings – RJF International 4. Pawling Corporation.
1. Fire Performance Characteristics. 3. Impact Strength.
-
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, pr ovide products from the following manufacturer:
D. Samples: Submit two (2) sections of corner guard, 24 inches l ong, i llustrating c omponent design, configuration, color and finish.
2. Flammability.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS CORNER GUARDS
C. Substitutions: Under Provisions of section 016000. 2.2
STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS A. Stainless Steel Corner Guards: T ype 304 Stainless Steel with #4 Satin finish. 1. Thickness: 0.05" (16 gauge).
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS S:\11\0122\div2to33\102600CGA.doc
102600 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
2. Radius: 1/8”. 3. Sizes/Weights: 2" x 2" (3 lbs). B. Corner Guard H eight: Height, measured f rom t he top of the base 48". C. Provide al l m ounting s ystems accessories appropriate f or s ubstrates i ndicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas an d co nditions u nder w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that r ough-in f or co mponents ar e co rrectly sized and located.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. General: Locate corner guards as indicated on the Drawings, using mounting methods as indicated on approved s hop dr awings f or the appropriate substrate, a nd in c ompliance w ith the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install corner guards level, plumb and at the height indicated on the Drawings, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. C. Provide co rner guards an d co mponents at locations indicated on the Drawings.
all
D. Corner Guard Installation: 3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean and adjust corner guards under provisions of Section 017300. B. Clean all corner guards, and clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Adjust all corner guards as necessary.
3.4
PROTECTION A. Protection of f inished w ork u nder pr ovisions of Section 017300.
END OF SECTION
102600 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
S:\11\0122\div2to33\102600CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 102810 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all toilets accessories; including lo cations, m ounting heights, method o f f astening, a nd b ack-up requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
C. Product Data: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata o n accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each component, illustrating color and finish.
B. Commercial T oilet an d B ath A ccessories; as Indicated o n t he D rawings, S pecified H erein; an d Including Hardware and Attachments.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special p rocedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
C. Contractor to Provide and Install Items as Follows:
F. Schedule: S ubmit s chedule lis ting a ll toilet accessory items, model n umbers, f inish, an d cu t sheets showing particular items.
1. Handicap Grab Bars. 2. Framed Mirrors. 3. Toilet Paper Roll Dispensers. 4. Napkin/Tampon D isposal Mounted.
–
Wall/Partition
1.4
A. Conform to ADA s afety s tandards f or acces s requirements for the disabled.
5. Utility Shelf. 6. Electric Hair/Hand Dryers.
1.5
D. Owner to Provide a nd C ontractor to I nstall th e Following Items: 1. Soap Dispensers.
1.2
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the w ork w ith th e p lacement o f concealed wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.
1.7
WARRANTY
B. Section 088100 - Glass and G lazing: U nframed mirror glass.
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
C. Section 093000 - Tiling: Ceramic tile wall finish.
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal stud w all framing a nd gy psum b oard substrate construction. E. Division 26 - Electrical: C onnections to hand/hair dryers. 1.3
1.6
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: Concealed wood blocking and pl ates f or s upport of accessories.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify act ual l ocations o f t oilet acces sories and other c onstruction to which to ilet accessories must fit b y accu rate f ield m easurements before installation. C oordinate installation s chedule w ith construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
7. Mop/Broom Holders.
2. Paper Towel Dispenser.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES S:\11\0122\div2to33\102810CGA.doc
1. Provide minimum ten (10) year manufacturer’s written w arranty f or s ilver s poilage o n all mirrors.
102810 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School E. Provide steel anchor p lates, ad apters, an d an chor components for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TOILET ACCESSORIES
2.4
A. Supply four (4) keys for each accessory to Owner.
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer:
B. Master key all accessories.
1. BOBRICK Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
2.5
B. Shop Primed Ferrous M etals: P re-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
2. Bradley Corporation.
C. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
ufacturing C
C. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, satin finish.
o.
D. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
nder pr ovisions of S ection
MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
3.1
D. Projecting Parts: Virgin zinc alloy conforming to ASTM B86. E. Adhesive: waterproof.
Two c omponent e poxy t ype,
F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: H ot dip galvanized, tamper-proof.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.2
B. Provide templates an d r ough-in m easurements as required.
H. Grab B ars: S tainless s teel s atin f inish w ith p een gripping surface. 3.3 FABRICATION
INSTALLATION A. Install bath toilet accessories i n acco rdance w ith manufacturers' instructions and ADA requirements.
A. Weld a nd g rind j oints of fabricated components, smooth.
C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges.
PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in f rames to s ite f or timely installation.
G. Expansion S hields: F iber, l ead, or r ubber as recommended b y acces sory m anufacturer f or component and substrate.
B. Form ex posed s urfaces f rom s ingle sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas an d co nditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
2.3
FINISHES A. Galvanizing: A STM A 123 to 1.25 oz /sq y d. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.
1. American Specialties, Inc. 3. General A ccessory Man (GAMCO).
KEYING
B. Install p lumb and level, s ecurely an d r igidly anchored to substrate. 3.4
SCHEDULE (Items On Schedule are Bobrick unless noted otherwise) A. Contractor s hall f urnish a nd in stall th e f ollowing items:
D. Shop assemble components an d p ackage co mplete with anchors and fittings.
102810 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\102810CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
ITEM
MODEL
FINISH
Grab Bars (1-1/2 Dia.)
B-6806.99 Peened Grip
Stainless Steel
Grab Bars (1-1/4 Dia.)
B-5806
Stainless Steel
Framed Mirrors Series B-165 (Sizes Noted On Drwgs) Channel frame
Stainless Steel
Toilet Paper Dispensers Double roll
Stainless Steel
B-6867
Napkin/Tampon Disposal B-270 Surfaced Mounted
Stainless Steel
Utility Shelf
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
B-298-36” B-298 - 8"
Electric Hair/Hand Excel Dryer [White] Dryers, Xlerator [Stainless Steel] Note: The Xlerator drys in 15 sec. Cost app 100.00 higher than normal hand driers. Mitsubishi has the Jet Towel hand dryer that drys hands in 6 seconds but cost is much more, near 2000.00. Mop & Broom Holder
B-239-44”
Stainless Steel
B. The Owner shall Provide and the Contractor shall install the following items: Soap Dispensers
Stainless Steel
Paper Towel Dispensers
Stainless Steel
END OF SECTION
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES S:\11\0122\div2to33\102810CGA.doc
102810 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
102810 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\102810CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.7
WARRANTY A. Provide o ne ( 1) y ear m anufacturer’s w ritten warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Warranty: A ll m aterials a nd w orkmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final accep tance o f t he W ork. Defects due to f aulty m aterials o r w orkmanship developed during the guarantee p eriod s hall b e satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
B. Fire P rotection S pecialties; a s I ndicated o n the Drawings, S pecified H erein; I ncluding Related Accessories and Attachments. 1. Fire Extinguishers. 1.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
2.1
B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate cab inet p hysical dimensions, r ough-in m easurements f or recessed cabinets, w all b racket m ounted measurements and locations. Shop Drawings must b e cer tified b y a qualified engineer.
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. AMEREX Fire Extinguishers. 2. J.L. Industries, Inc.
C. Product D ata: P rovide m anufacturer’s d ata for extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details.
3. KIDDE Fire Extinguisher Company. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special criteria a nd w all o pening c oordination requirements. 1.3
5. SENTRY Fire Extinguishers. 6. NYSTROM Product Company. B. Substitutions: U 016000.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 017823. B. Maintenance Data: I nclude t est, r efill o r r echarge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.4
2.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
2. Provide fire extinguishers at all Kitchens (Type K), J anitor Cl osets, S cience Classrooms, Art Rooms, M echanical R ooms an d Electrical Rooms, and all other locations indicated on the Drawings.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of fire protection specialties and other construction to w hich f ire p rotection specialties must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. C oordinate in stallation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES S:\11\0122\div2to33\104400CGA.doc
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. Provide fire extinguishers at all areas noted on Drawings, but as a minimum provide 10 lb.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do no t i nstall e xtinguishers w hen ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
1.6
nder p rovisions o f S ection
A. Dry C hemical T ype: U L 2 99; H eavy d uty s teel tank w ith p ressure ga uge; m etal valve and siphon tube; corrosion and impact resistant epoxy finish; 5 lb. ( UL 3-A:40-B:C) a nd 10 l b. (UL 4-A:60-B:C) capacities.
A. Conform t o t he International Fire C ode, la test edition, for requirements for fire extinguishers. 1.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher B rackets: F ormed s teel, “White” enamel finish.
104400 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify r ough o penings f or c abinet are co rrectly sized and located.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Install fire extinguishers an d acces sories i n accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place ex tinguishers an d acces sories on wall brackets.
3.3
CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Clean all cabinet and glass surfaces. B. Adjust cabinet doors to operate smoothly.
END OF SECTION
104400 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
S:\11\0122\div2to33\104400CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 111300 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT F. Operating Manuals: Provide and ad vise O wner o n use and maintenance of units.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.4
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Single S ource R esponsibility: P rovide s cissor lif ts as c omplete u nits p rovided b y a s ingle manufacturer i ncluding al l n ecessary acces sories and fittings.
1. Stationary Hydraulic Scissor Dock Lift.
1.2
1.5 Concrete:
B. Section 042000 - Unit M asonry S ystems: U nit masonry wall surfaces. C. Section 055000 - Metal F abrications: P erimeter channel framing at door opening.
1.6
1.7
B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to f aulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop D rawings: I ndicate fabrication an d erection of d ock e quipment i ncluding p lans, elevations and large-scale drawings. C. Product D ata: P rovide m anufacturer’s m aterials and f inish, in stallation d etails, roughing-in measurements, and operation of unit. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special requirements. E. Maintenance an d S ervice D ata: Submit manufacturer’s m aintenance an d s ervice d ata including address and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative.
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT S:\11\0122\div2to33\111300CGA.doc
WARRANTY A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
F. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: F ield painting of exposed steel members. 1.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate w ith el ectrical an d w ith co ncrete contractor for pr oper di mensions of pi t a nd electrical requirements.
D. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood plates and blocking at exterior openings. E. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and joint backing for perimeter joints.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f lo ading d ock e quipment and other construction to w hich l oading d ock equipment must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. C oordinate in stallation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete pit construction.
PERFORMANCE
A. The ma nufacturer s hall b e r esponsible for the configuration a nd f abrication o f t he stationary hydraulic scissor dock lift.
B. Loading Dock Equipment; a s Indicated o n the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including All Related Accessories and Attachments. 2. Bumper Posts.
DOCK LEVELER REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE STATIONARY DOCK LIFT
MANUFACTURERS – HYDRAULIC SCISSOR
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer: 1. 4Front E ngineered S olutions-Kelley- “Model KDL 48-4.” 111300 - 1 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are: 1. Frommelt Docks. 2. RiteHite Corporation. C. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under pr ovisions of S ection
SCISSOR LIFT COMPONENTS: A. General: Provide standard scissor lifts of capacity, size and construction indicated including a non-slip platform with beveled toe guards on all four sides, steel scissor legs, h ydraulic o perating s ystem complete w ith co ntrols, s afety d evices and accessories. D esign f or p ermanent r ecessed installation in p reformed c oncrete p it a t lo cation indicated on Drawings. B. Rated C apacity: L ifting c apacity o f n ot le ss th an 4,000 lb. C. Vertical T ravel: M aximum v ertical t ravel of 60 inches from a lowered height of 0 inches to a raised height of 40 inches. D. Travel Speed: Raising speed of 15 fpm. E. Platform Size: 48 inches wide by 96 inches long.
I. Cylinders: T wo he avy-duty, hi gh-pressure hydraulic, r am-style cylinders w ith d irectdisplacement –plunger with positive internal stops. Rods t o be chrome-plated a nd pol ished t o pr event rusting. J. Bearings: P ivot p oints w ith s elf-lubricating with lifetime self-lubricating brushings . 1. Operation: Man ufacturer’s s tandard, selfcontained, remotely located p ower u nit o f s ize, type an d o peration n eeded f or capacity of lift indicated. Control f rom r emote pu sh-button station. 2. Power Unit: TEFC motor, hi gh p ressure ge ar pump, valve manifold and oil reservoir. a. Manifold: Contains relief valve, check valve, pressure-compensated f low-control va lve and solenoid valve. b. Speed C ontrol: S tandard pressurecompensated flow to m aintain r ated s peed when lift is loaded or unloaded. c. Free-Fall Protection: Hydraulic velocity fuse at each cy linder t o p revent p latform f rom free-falling i n t he ev ent o f a severed hydraulic hose or broken fitting. d. Oil S ight G auge: G auge i n reservoir to provide oil level.
F. Platform: F abricate f rom h eavy s teel p late rigidly welded and r einforced f or m aximum s trength, safety a nd s tability. D esign to w ithstand deformation du ring bot h ope rating a nd s tored phases o f s ervice. P rovide m ounting b rackets an d removable lifting eyes for e ase o f in stallation. Platform surface to be non-skid, safety tread deck plate. Meet requirements of MH29.1.
3. Remote Control S tation: W eatherproof, m ultibutton control s tation o f c onstant p ressure type with NEMA 4X r ated u p a nd dow n pu sh buttons.
G. Bridge: P rovide hi nged, throw-over bridge, heavyduty, piano-type hinge welded t o t oe g uard at en d of platform. Bridge to be complete with heavy-duty lifting chains. Chamfer edge of bridge to minimize obstructing wheels of material-handling vehicles.
a. Controller to c onsist o f m agnetic motor starter w ith th ree p ole-adjustable o verloads and 115 VAC control transformer with fused secondary p rewired to te rminal s trips. Enclose in NEMA type 12 box.
1. Bridge M aterial: N on-skid, safety tr ead s teel plate.
b. Upper-Level L imit S witch: E quip with manufacturer’s standard u pper l imit t ravel switch
2. Bridge Size: 18 inches long by 72 inches wide. 3. Aid: Ergonomic spring assist. H. Scissor Mech anism: Leg m embers f rom h eavy, steel formed tube members.
111300 - 2 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
e. Manual Lowering Device: Locate on power pack to lower in case of power loss.
K. Safety Devices: 1. Removable Handrails: P rovide on two sides of platform w ith s ingle, r emovable ch ain across each end. Handrails to be 42 inches high with a mid-rail a nd 4 inch kickplate a t b ottom. M ount rail sockets flush with platform surface.
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT S:\11\0122\div2to33\111300CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School 2. Maintenance L eg: P rovide m anufacturer’s standard. 3. Toe P rotection: Man ufacturer’s s tandard toe protection along entire unprotected sides of lift. 4. Bumper P osts: 8” diameter b y 4 8 in ch h igh concrete-filled steel pipes. 2.3
Addition and Remodeling 3.4
ADJUSTING A. Adjust i nstalled u nit f or s mooth an d b alanced operation.
END OF SECTION
FINISH AND COLOR A. Manufacturer’s standard paint ap plied t o f actoryassembled a nd te sted lif ts p rior to shipping. Provide toe guards with yellow and blck stripes to comply with A NSI Z 535.1. P aint r emainder o f surfaces in manufacturer’s standard color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to p roper a nd tim ely completion of t he W ork. D o n ot p roceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Coordinate and v erify r ecessed p it f or lif ts to b e adequate to acco mmodate lift in p roper r elation to loading platform. C. Clean recessed pits of debris. D. Beginning of installation m eans accep tance o f existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Coordinate s ize an d location of scissor lift indicated to be recessed into co ncrete, and furnish anchoring d evices w ith t emplates, d iagrams, an d instructions for their installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install all loading dock equipment and components in p repared o pening i n acco rdance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rough-in electrical co nnections acco rding t o requirements specified in Division 26. C. Set square and level. D. Anchor unit securely, flush with dock.
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT S:\11\0122\div2to33\111300CGA.doc
111300 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
111300 - 4 of 4
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0122\div2to33\111300CGA.doc
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED: Provide labor, equipment, appliances and materials, and perform all operations in connection with the execution of the Work as stated and as represented in the drawings and specifications including that which is reasonably inferred; install and coordinate all equipment in Section 11 4000.
A.
Equipment: Fabricate, deliver, unload, uncrate, assemble, set in place and level ready for final connection by mechanical and electrical trades.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate mechanical and electrical rough in services, manufactured equipment and fabricated equipment construction, equipment bases, curbs, ceiling heights, depressed areas, sleeves, wall openings, refrigeration lines, service access, existing building conditions that affect equipment, and all other building conditions required to accommodate the Section 11 4000 equipment including new, existing, Owner furnished and future equipment with other trades; cut holes in equipment to accommodate pipes, drains, electrical conduit and outlets as required.
C.
Schedule: Perform work in a timely manner consistent with the construction schedule, submit written notice of any manufacturer or construction related problems that are causing a delay in the equipment delivery or installation; substitutions for failure to order equipment in a timely manner are not acceptable.
D.
Permits, Licenses and Inspections: Secure and pay for tests, permits and inspections required by authorized regulatory agencies and directly related to the construction and installation of the Section 11 4000 foodservice equipment work.
E.
Document Inconsistencies: When drawings and specifications contain conflicting requirements, request written clarification; provide the better quality or greater quantity of work or material; costs incurred by failure to clarify conflicting requirements are the equipment contractor's responsibility.
F.
Model Number Changes and Manufacturer Sales or Bankruptcies: When equipment specified is no longer available, the Owner reserves the right to accept the manufacturer's replacement or equipment from a manufacturer specified as equal; the Owner reserves the right to reject equipment when a specified manufacturer is sold, when sale is pending, when filing for Chapter 7 or 11 status, and receive equipment from a specified equal manufacturer.
G.
FSEC Qualifications: Must be able to provide references for two projects of similar size and complexity within the past five years. These must be consultant specified projects successfully completed to the Owner’s satisfaction.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SECTIONS:
A.
Services and Connections: Extending utility lines from rough in locations to connection points on the equipment and final connections, including indirect wastes to floor drains and installation of faucets and backflow prevention devices, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Interconnections: Between equipment and remote components.
C.
Disconnection: Existing equipment that is relocated or removed.
1 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1.03
100% DOCUMENTS
DEFINITIONS
A.
Equal: Must be comparable in critical dimensions, capacity, features, utilities and operation; if equal is submitted, pay all costs required to modify work of any trade affected to accommodate equal.
B.
Exposed: All visible surfaces — includes surfaces behind cabinet doors when the doors are open.
C.
Foodservice Equipment Contractor (FSEC): Person or organization identified as such in the Agreement as providing the Section 11 4000 equipment
D.
Fabricated Equipment: Equipment that is not a standard catalog item and must be constructed by a singular authorized fabricator from Article 2.01, Paragraph B at their shop or on the job site to conform to the Contract Documents.
E.
Manufactured Equipment: Equipment offered as a catalog item but which is built to size for each project and generally requires a shop drawing
F.
Buy-out Equipment: Equipment offered as a catalog item by a manufacturer, including items requiring minor modifications.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Laws and Ordinances: Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, codes and regulations relating to the performance of the Work; rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies are considered a part of the regulations; no extra charge will be paid for furnishing items required by the enforcing agency.
B.
Minimum Standards: Notify the Owner's Representative prior to equipment purchase and/or installation of any item that does not comply with the applicable regulations, including but not limited to the following: 1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Equipment and installation; affix the NSF label to each equipment item 2. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): Electrical equipment and/or components 3. American Gas Association (AGA): Gas fired equipment and installation 4. American Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: Electrical wiring and devices included with the equipment 5. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): Refrigeration systems 6. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boilers 7. National Electrical Code (NEC): Electrical wiring and devices included with the equipment 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Exhaust hood and fire protection systems 9. American Society of Tested Materials (ASTM): Metals 10. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Materials 11. Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA): Equipment and installation 12. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Equipment and installation where required 13. American Disabilities Act (ADA): Equipment and installation where required 14. International Building Code (IBC) and Standard Building Code (SBCC): Equipment and installation where required 15. Intertek Testing Services (ETL)
2 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
16. Safe Drinking Water Act: Lead-free plumbing fittings, faucets and fixtures or more stringent state/local codes where applicable 17. US Energy Independence Act 2007: Walk-in Refrigerator and Freezers and Refrigeration Systems 1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Manufacturer or fabricator changes are not acceptable after submittal review and acceptance without written authorization from Owner's Representative.
B.
Schedule: Submit within thirty (30) days from award of Contract; identify key dates and tasks that must be completed by others in order to meet the equipment installation schedule.
C.
Review: Stamp and sign each submittal indicating it has been checked for conformance to the specifications, field dimensions, compatibility with other equipment, and coordination with other trades and services.
D.
Revisions: Incorporate corrections noted by the Owner's Representative and resubmit new sets for review; repeat until corrections are incorporated.
E.
Routing: Submit one (1) complete package, copies as listed below, to the designated Owner's Representative; after final review, furnish revised copies as required up to 10 sets.
F.
Drawings 1. General a. Match the contract drawings sheet size b. Submit in roll form, not folded c. Leave a 3” x 8” space for review stamps d. Submit one (1) set of black and white prints e. Lettering not less than 1/8” high 2. Floor Plan and Schedule a. Scale: ¼” = 1’ 0” b. Number equipment and include a schedule on the same sheet c. Use Architect's dimensioned plans to prepare plan drawing; verify field dimensions 3. Rough in Plan a. General: Provide a utility symbol legend; list the utility requirements, along with the equipment item number on a line extending from the symbol; show exact rough in locations and heights; stub out of walls wherever possible; make allowances for valves, fittings and other required components specified under Mechanical and Electrical Sections; if utilities are already installed, field measure locations and indicate on plan, noting any objection to installed location. b. Scale: ¼” = 1’ 0” c. Equipment Included: Show requirements for specified, Owner furnished, existing and future equipment; include equipment layout on drawing d. Format: Provide separate drawings for mechanical and electrical rough-in plans and schedules. e. Dimensioning: Dimension utility rough ins installed under floor from either existing walls, exterior walls or from column line centers; dimension other rough ins from new walls f. Code Compliance: See Article 1.04 g. Coordination: Refer to the architectural, electrical and mechanical engineering drawings for this submission; verify that the correct utility services are available 3 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
for equipment ordered; verify existing building conditions; coordinate any changes required to accommodate equipment provided h. Interconnections: Include connection diagrams for equipment where one or more items are interconnected by Mechanical and Electrical Trades i. Sleeves and Conduits: Include requirements for beverage lines, refrigeration lines and any other equipment interconnections 4. Special Conditions (building details): Show finished dimensions of bases, depressions, curbs, special height walls and wall openings for equipment; ¼” = 1’ 0” scale; coordinate with other trades; include equipment layout on drawing 5. Equipment Shop Drawings a. Scale: Detail fabricated and manufactured equipment in plan, elevation and end view at ¾” = 1’ 0” or larger; show sections at 1 ½” = 1’ 0” or larger b. Detail: Show fabricated equipment dimensions and materials, manufacturer and type of hardware, and other pertinent data as specified and as required for construction; where fabricated equipment adjoins other equipment, indicate partial plans and elevations to illustrate the junction condition; show quartz surfacing dimensions, locations, dimensions of cutouts, and countertop seam locations, required locations of support and blocking members, edge profiles, and installation details and methods; identify colors and finishes c. Organization: Indicate equipment by item number and arrange on sheets in numerical sequence d. Built-in and Counter-mounted Equipment: Show on fabricated equipment elevation and section drawings; dot in countertop equipment on plans; detail built-in/drop-in equipment supports and relationship to quartz top e. Field Dimensions: Equipment dimensions are subject to adjustments required by field dimensions and understructure components; take measurements and coordinate with finished building conditions; circle any dimensional changes on initial and subsequent submissions f. Hood Fire Protection System: Submit complete detailed shop drawings including system description, configuration and system component locations; after review by design team, incorporate comments and submit to fire authorities having jurisdiction for system approval prior to fabrication g. Walk-ins: Show ceiling panel lay-outs and all control and switch locations G.
Written Materials 1. Itemized Bid: If not required during bid submittal, provide itemized bid within 10 days of bid award date; include freight and installation within each item. 2. General: Submit two (2) bound copies for review; if submitted electronically, they are to follow the same format as the hard copy. 3. Equipment Brochure a. Equipment List: Include item number, quantity and manufacturer b. Cover Sheet: Submit a typewritten sheet — copies of project specification are not acceptable — for each item with item number and equipment description to include: model number, quantity, optional features, special construction, installation and utility service requirements for manufacturer provided; include Owner furnished, existing and future equipment c. Manufacturer's Catalog Sheet: Circle relevant utility requirements, dimensions and accessories for each item; do not include advertising or sales sheets; mark item number and quantity required; mark out equipment not being supplied d. Organization: Arrange sheets in numerical sequence; tab every 25th item 4. Operation and Maintenance Manual – submit prior to equipment demonstrations a. Service Agents: List manufacturers alphabetically with tabs; list equipment type; identify local service agent; list the name, address and telephone number authorized to service the equipment; list FSEC when there is no other service agent
4 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
b. Parts Catalog, Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include manufacturer’s original instructions for buy-out and manufactured equipment; organize alphabetically by manufacturer c. Certificate of Warranty: Provide for each piece of refrigeration equipment per Article 1.07 C & D 1.06
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Procedure: Submit a written request to the Owner's Representative for approval not less than ten (10) days prior to the bid date; include a description of the proposed substitute, drawings, equipment cutsheets, performance test data and any other data or information necessary for complete evaluation; list separately construction and performance features that do not meet or exceed the specified item.
B.
Approval: Approval or rejection of a proposed substitution is vested in the Owner's Representative whose decision is final and binding; determination may or may not express the reason for the decision; approval by Addendum or Change Order only; verbal approval is not binding.
C.
Responsibility: If proposed substitution is approved, pay all costs required to modify work of any trade affected to accommodate substitution.
1.07
WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
A.
General: Warranty equipment and installation with full parts and labor for one (1) calendar year from date of acceptance by Owner’s Representative; Owner’s acceptance is defined by first date of foodservice facility operation; inoperable equipment is not considered “accepted”; inoperable equipment includes, but is not limited to, inadequate training and demonstration, defective materials and improper installation.
B.
Replacement Parts: Provide one calendar year warranty for equipment and installation on any warranty replaced part.
C.
Walk-in Refrigeration and Freezer Systems: One year full system parts and labor warranty to cover all components and installation; five (5) year compressor/condenser and coil warranty to cover parts and materials only; service available 24 hours per day, seven (7) days per week; contract begins on date of acceptance by Owner's Representative.
D.
Other Equipment: Compressors/Condensers and Coils: Five (5) year warranty; first year to include labor and materials without charge to Owner.
E.
Fire Protection System: Warranty and required inspections for one (1) year; provide materials without charge to Owner.
F.
Correction Period: When the complete breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs, perform service within 24 hours; make other repairs within one week.
G.
Service Agreement: Service agents listed in the Operation and Maintenance Manual must perform service as described above; repairs and/or replacements not made within the specified time will be corrected by other means and the Section 11 4000 contractor is responsible for reasonable costs incurred.
5 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT H.
100% DOCUMENTS
Defective Equipment: If within the first year of operation the piece of equipment has not been fully operational for 6 continuous months, the manufacturer will replace the unit at their expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
QUALIFIED FABRICATORS
A.
Qualifications: Minimum (five) 5 years experience in similar work; produce custom fabricated equipment in one shop.
B.
Authorized Equipment Fabricators: The following companies are approved custom stainless steel equipment fabricators; request for substitutions can be made per Article 1.06. Albers Commercial Kitchen Services (651) 265-0603 Florida Stainless Fabricators, Inc. (407) 971-8280 Keas Stainless Steel Fabricators, Inc. (405) 232-0869 Russco (816) 241-8787 Two Rivers Enterprises (320) 746-3156
C.
2.02
Authorized Quartz Surface Fabricators: Minimum five years experience fabricating quartz surface materials or granite using water-cooled cutting tools; certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer. MATERIALS
A.
General: Furnish new materials free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship
B.
Metals 1. Gauges: U.S. Standard Gauge; not more than 5% plus or minus from thickness indicated below: Gauge Thickness Gauge Thickness 10 0.1406 16 0.0625 12 0.1094 18 0.0500 14 0.0781 20 0.0375 2. Stainless Steel: ANSI Type 304, number 4 finish, 180 grit, extra low carbon, non magnetic, 18% chrome, 8% nickel, corrosion resistant alloy steel; flat, first grade and free of buckles and surface imperfections 3. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Zinc coating, smooth, free of runs, blisters, excess spelter and uncoated spots or patches; recoat welded or damaged members; finish with two coats of epoxy based gray Hammertone paint 4. Aluminum Sheet Metal: ASTM sheet and plate; ASTM extrusions; 0.40 mil clear anodized finish unless otherwise specified
6 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
5. Stainless Steel Tubing: Type 304, number 4 finish 180 grit; seamless or welded; 16 gauge; annealed, ground smooth and polished; heat treated and properly quenched to eliminate precipitation; drawn true to size and roundness and polished with concentric grain 6. Black Iron Angle: Ductile in quality; free of hard spots, runs, checks, cracks and other surface defects; clean and properly prime with rust inhibiting primer; finish with two coats of epoxy based gray Hammertone paint C.
Sealant: 1. General: Dow Corning, Silastic or G.E. RTV 108 silver color; Type S Grade NS, Class 25; comply with Food and Drug Administration Regulation 21 CFR 177.2600 for food contact areas or equal by Kason 3700 Series Rubbaseal silicone 2. Walk-in Penetrations: Low expansion, closed cell polyurethane foam
D.
Glass: Tempered 3/8” thick, unless noted otherwise
E.
Plastics: Polycarbonate or acrylic as specified; ¼” thick
F.
Cutting Board: Richlite, ½” thick; size as specified; 1” diameter finger hole when used below drawers
G.
Bolts, Screws and Nuts: Unacceptable on exposed surfaces; use same composition as the metal to which they are applied; space to insure suitable fastening and to prevent bulging of the metals fastened; cap threads with a zinc plated combination hexnut-lockwasher; cap screw threads that are not visible or readily accessible with a standard lock washer and nut; wherever bolts or screws are welded to the underside of trim or tops, neatly finish the reverse side; depressions at these points are not acceptable
H.
Rivets: Unacceptable as a method of fastening
I.
Sound Deadening 1. Tape Sealant: Schnee Morehead, Inc., Model S-M 5196; install between all tops and underbracing members before mounting the underbracing; trim flush with bracing 2. Spray- On: Sink bottoms only; do not coat beyond sink front cove
2.03
FABRICATION - GENERAL
A.
Final Coordination: After approved shop drawings are issued, communicate subsequent changes to the Owner's representative before fabrication begins.
B.
Quality Standards: Include necessary reinforcing, bracing, welding, number and spacing of uprights and crossmembers for adequate strength; construct tops, shelves, exterior panels, doors and drainboards of a single metal sheet when possible; except where removable, secure flat surfaces to vertical and horizontal bracing members by welding or other approved means to eliminate buckle, warp, rattle and wobble; equipment subject to rattle or wobble is not acceptable; overlapping materials are not acceptable; unless specified, exposed joints on countertops, cabinet bases and overshelves are not acceptable.
C.
Welding: Heliarc method; same composition as materials welded; complete welds, strong and ductile, with excess metal ground off and joints finished smooth to match adjoining surfaces; free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, runs and cracks; same finish as adjoining surfaces. 1. Spot Welds: 3” maximum spacing 2. Tack Welds: Minimum ¼” welding material at 3” maximum spacing 7 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
D.
Butt Joints: Unacceptable as a method of fastening on fabricated and manufactured equipment
E.
Tops: 14 gauge seamless stainless steel; fully weld with edges as specified; pitch drainboards ¼”per foot; 1” maximum pitch 1. Edges: Detail SD-1 and as specified 2. Backsplash: Detail SD-2; form of same piece as the top; secure to wall with stainless steel "Z" clips; seal top to wall or adjacent equipment; continuously weld rolled edges abutting splashes; close exposed ends
F.
Sinks: Detail SD-9 & SD-10; 14 gauge stainless steel fully coved and continuously welded, ground and polished; pitch sink bottoms to drain openings; die form drain opening and depress below the sink bottom; provide holes for faucets and overflows; continuously weld sinks to draintables or fixture tops; measure sink depth from adjoining work surface; 16 gauge stainless steel twist handle waste support. 1. Standard Construction: Construct multiple compartment sinks from one large sink; weld in double wall partitions; 1” separation between partitions to form fully coved sink; fully welded flush front with no indentations 2. When Specified: Construct multiple compartment sinks from individually formed bowls; close off front, bottom and rear of spaces between with 18 gauge stainless steel sink banding.
G.
Grain of Polishing: Run in the same direction on all horizontal and on all vertical surfaces; where table or sink tops join at right angles, terminate the finish in a mitered edge; polish grain consistent in direction throughout the length of the backsplash and sink compartment.
H.
Framework 1. Draintables and Worktables: Detail SD-3, 14 gauge stainless steel; stud bolt to the underside of tabletops at the following spacing: a. Angles: 30” maximum spacing b. Channels: "U" and hat channels 5’ 0” maximum spacing; weld exposed ends closed 2. Serving Counters and Cabinet Bases: Detail SD7a & 8 and SD-71 or 72; stud bolt to underside of countertop with either method below: a. Angle: Perimeter angles with crossmembers 30” on center b. Uni Body: Form cabinet body into perimeter channels; crossmembers 30” on center
I.
Counter/Table Construction 1. Legs: Detail SD-4; 1 5/8” O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel tubing; fit at the top to stainless steel gussets; weld gussets to underside of table framework 2. Feet: Component Hardware Model A10-0851-C; stainless steel; hex foot 3. Flange Foot: Component Hardware Model A10-0854-C; stainless steel with screw holes 4. Gusset: Component Hardware Model A18 0206; stainless steel with set screw 5. Crossrails: Detail SD-4; same material as legs; fully weld, grind and polish; mount at 10” above finished floor 6. Undershelves: 16 gauge stainless steel a. Welded: Detail SD-5 b. Removable: Detail SD-6
J.
Cabinet Construction: Flush 18 gauge stainless steel construction; inaccessible open areas are not acceptable; solid metal partitions furnished at all mullions; conceal utility lines; dual wall construction at exposed ends; no exposed shelf standard screws 8 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
1. Standard Construction: Detail SD-7, 26 & 28; continuously weld joints on cabinet faces for one piece construction 2. Piece Construction: When specified, Detail SD-7a, 8 & 27; form cabinet face by returning mullion rails and tack weld unexposed returned edges 3. General a. Legs: Component Hardware, Model A72 0811; stainless steel, adjustable foot b. Shelving: 16 gauge stainless steel; turn down front edge as detailed; turn up rear and ends a minimum of 1 ½” with a ¼” cove; weld corners, grind and polish; tack welds and paint are not acceptable c. Sink Enclosure: Per detail SD-12 & 13; coordinate and cut openings in stainless steel back panel or bottom shelf with utility rough ins; chrome escutcheon at water and waste lines; visible holes cut in back panel or bottom shelf for access to plumbing are not acceptable d. Utility Curb: Per detail SD-30; conceal utility lines; provide service access e. Channel Base: Detail SD-77; 14 gauge galvanized channel set in place and secured to floor slab prior to installation of finished floor; sand fill and concrete not in Section 11 4000; set equipment into bed of sealant and level; coordinate channel base with height of specified base covering; coordinate recessed areas in bases; inaccessible open areas are not acceptable f. Access Panels: Detail SD-29; locate as shown on drawings and where service access is required K.
Doors 1. Hinged Solid: Detail SD-17 or 18; door face flush with cabinet body; rigid polystyrene insulation a. Hinges: Component Hardware, Model M75-1002; stainless steel; lift off lag type; weld in place b. Catches: Either of below is acceptable (1) Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M30-2400; heavy duty; self aligning (2) Non Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M22-2420; adjustable tension c. Pulls: As detailed (1) Recessed stainless steel: Component Hardware Model P62-1010 (2) Surface mounted stainless steel: Component Hardware Model P46-1012 2. Sliding: Per detail SD-21; 18 gauge stainless steel front; rigid polystyrene insulation; 20 gauge stainless steel back; weld corner joints; removable for cleaning a. Track and Sheaves (1) Track: Component Hardware Model B57 Series aluminum, length as required (2) Front Door Sheave: Component Hardware Model B58-5513 (3) Rear Door Sheave: Component Hardware Model B58-5523 b. Guides: Component Hardware Model B56-1096 c. Pulls: Component Hardware Model P62-1010 3. Hinged Louvered: Detail SD-19 or 20; door face flush with cabinet body. a. Hinges: Component Hardware, Model M75-1002; stainless steel; lift-off lag type; weld in place b. Catches: The following are acceptable (1) Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M30-2400; heavy duty; selfaligning (2) Non-Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M22-2420; adjustable tension 4. Hinged Perforated Panel: Detail SD-19-ALT; door flush with cabinet body; fully welded frame; width of door not to exceed height; maximum height 24” a. Hinges: Component Hardware, Model M75-1002; stainless steel; lift-off lag type; weld in place b. Catches: The following are acceptable
9 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
(1) Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M30-2400; heavy duty; self aligning (2) Non-Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M22-2420; adjustable tension c. Perforated Stainless Steel Panel: Brown Campbell Company (800/356-3636); Type 304 stainless steel; 16 gauge minimum; #4 satin finish; 1/4” round hole at 3/8” O.C. in a 60° staggered pattern; 40% open; align horizontal holes on adjacent panels; powdercoat finish on all sides if indicated on drawings L.
Drawers: Detail SD 14, 15 or 16; mount slides so that drawer is self closing 1. Pan a. Stainless Steel: 15”x20”x 5” Component Hardware Model S81-1520 b. Stainless Steel: 20”x20”x 5” Component Hardware Model S81-2020 c. Stainless Steel: 12”x20”x 4” Vollrath, Model 2004 0 d. Thermoplastic: 15”x20”x 5” Component Hardware Model S80-1520 e. Thermoplastic: 20”x20”x 5” Component Hardware Model S80-2020 2. Slides: Refer to drawer detail a. Heavy Duty: Component Hardware Model 52 Series, 200 lb load capacity, stainless steel; length as required b. Medium Duty: Knape Vogt, Model 16000 3. Pulls: When detailed, Component Hardware Model P63-1012 4. Cash Drawer Assembly without tray: Component Hardware Model S95-Y001
M.
Elevated Shelves: 16 gauge stainless steel; edge as specified; close free ends; stud bolt stainless steel reinforcing members to the underside of shelves. 1. Wall Shelves: Detail SD-25; stud bolt 14 gauge stainless steel cantilever brackets to reinforcing members and secure to the wall on not more than 5’ 0” centers; coordinate wall backing requirements 2. Table Mounted Shelves: Detail SD-22, 23 and 24
N.
Protector Shelves: Custom fabricate per elevations, sections and details; provide shop drawings showing location of uprights on countertops. 1. Features: a. Stainless steel finish unless otherwise specified. b. Secure to counter framework; seal at countertop; fully weld, grind and polish at joints. c. Slide out glass on top heat lamps to facilitate cleaning. d. Enclose open ends of sneezeguard with glass. e. Construct per NSF standards or per health department approval. 2. Powder Coating (When Specified): All stainless steel or brass coated with minimum 2 mil NSF listed, high temperature, thermoset powder coating; coating free of bubbles, dust, flux and orange peel, coating must be clean and maintain color; parent material buffed to high polish and treated for proper adhesion prior to coating; finish to be resistant to fingerprints; color per Architect; provide sample to Architect for approval. 3. Lights and Food Warmers: Provide covers with finish to match uprights for lights and food warmers; for stainless steel uprights, provide satin aluminum light cover; all wiring concealed in uprights; fluorescent lights with remote ballast and shatterproof lamp per Article 2.11C; conceal light so customer cannot see from any angle; maximize length of fixtures between uprights.
O.
Built In Equipment: Install per manufacturer's recommendations, Article 2.11 and project details. 1. General: Coordinate to provide adequate ventilation, service access and support structure; submit written notification of any design conditions that are likely to prevent proper operation or that void equipment warranty; provide supplemental fans 10 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
if required for proper operation; equipment contractor is responsible for proper operation of equipment 2. Food Wells: Connect drainlines to ¾” diameter manifold and extend to a ball valve; provide chrome plated handle for drain valve and locate in stainless steel recessed cup in counter mullion; countertop temperature greater than 175°F within 2”of well opening is not acceptable P.
Counter Mounted Equipment: Ferrule openings to accommodate cords, wiring, and/or piping.
2.04
FABRICATION – REFRIGERATION
2.05
HARDWARE COMPONENTS
A.
Cap Nuts: Component Hardware Model Q32-1024; zinc plated steel; combination hexnut lockwasher
B.
Casters: 5” diameter polyurethane tire swivel casters; grey tire; 300# capacity; NSF approved; Jarvis & Jarvis models as follows. 1. Stem Caster: Model 5-40-213G-19A 2. Stem Caster with Brake: Model 5-40-213G-VL-19A with Vertilok brake 3. Plate Caster: Model 5-30-213G-PLT2 4. Plate Caster with Brake: Model 5-30-213G-VL-PTL2 with Vertilok brake
C.
Drain Valve Recessed Cup: Vollrath, Model 47536.
D.
Drain Valve Handle: Chicago, Model 634; 3” diameter, four arm metal cross handle.
E.
Glass Capping: Component Hardware Model B70-1001; stainless steel.
F.
Kick Plate Spring Clamp: Component Hardware Model A76-4460; zinc plated steel.
G.
Locks: Component Hardware Model P30 Series; stainless steel faced; master keyed as specified.
H.
Pot Rack Hooks: Component Hardware, Model J79-4115, single prong; Model J774401, double prong; stainless steel.
I.
Shelf Standards and Supports: 1. Standards: Component Hardware Model T22, length as required; stainless steel; thumbscrew mounting; NSF listed 2. Supports: Component Hardware Model T30-5030; Type A, snap in stainless steel
J.
Switch/Receptacle Housing 1. Recessed: Component Hardware Model R73 1210; stainless steel 2. Pedestal: Chicago series 1300; polished aluminum or equal by Component Hardware
2.06 A.
MILLWORK Materials 1. Core Material: Medex exterior resin medium density fiberboard; conform to ANSI A208.2.3.3.4, as manufactured by MEDITE Corporation (Ph: 503/773-2522) or equal by Norbord MDF-MR (Ph: 800/367-6338) 2. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3 1/16” Type I general purpose, Grade 10, colorthrough and high pressure; color, pattern, and finish as specified 11 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
3. Backing Sheets: NEMA LD .020” thick, Type V, Grade 91 plastic laminate; apply on all surfaces not covered with plastic laminate; coordinate color with exposed surface color; comply with NSF Standard 35 4. Adhesive: Formica 100 or 150 5. Grain/Pattern: Coordinate on all equipment furnished under this section so that grain/pattern runs in same direction throughout project 6. Wood Frames and Counter Edges a. Exposed: Species, grade and finish per item specification or detail b. Unexposed: Solid, choice white pine free from knots and defects 7. Edge Banding: 3mm thickness with beveled edge. B.
Construction: Detail SD 171,172,173 and 174; 1977 AWI Premium Grade Standards; factory assemble parts and prefinish; flush type fronts and overlapping ends; ¾” core material base cabinet, ends and dividers with corner joints between frame members fully lock jointed, glued and screwed; dado and glue cabinet backs into sides and bottom; scribe countertops and backsplashes; secure countertops to base cabinet from underside; fully cure surfaces prior to installation.
C.
Hardware 1. Hinges a. Standard: Grass Institutional Series MB8000, 180°-270° opening, concealed casework hinges or approved equal by Blum; utilize doweled cup and hinge screws when installed on MDF b. When Specified: Component Hardware Model M75-5003 2. Catches: Only required with Component Hardware hinge, either is acceptable a. Non Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M22-2420; adjustable tension b. Magnetic: Component Hardware Model M30-2400; heavy duty; self aligning 3. Pulls: Hafele, Model 124.02.920, anodized silver finish, Component Hardware Group, Model P46-1010, brushed stainless or as specified 4. Locks: Component Hardware Model P30 Series; stainless faced; master keyed as specified
D.
Trayslide and Counterfront: See project detail. 1. Panels: Easily removable without the use of tools; finish edges to match front surface 2. Louvered Panel and Door: Horizontal hardwood slats mounted inside panel frame; slats canted at 45° angle; space slats ¾” apart; cover front and exposed top with finish material; cover unexposed areas with the specified backing sheet 3. Hinged Access Door: Locate where shown; finish edges to match front surface
2.07 A.
REFRIGERATION Walk In Refrigerator & Freezer Construction 1. Size: Per plan; 8’-10” minimum finished interior height; interior dimensions must accommodate shelving shown on plan 2. General: a. Wall and Ceiling Panels: 4” thick modular panels joined by not less than three (3), cam lock devices; cam locks accessed from inside walk in; cover access holes with gray plastic caps or white plastic to match white walls or ceiling; gasket to seal between panels; foamed in place CFC reduced urethane insulation, self extinguishing UL classified according to ASTM and U B C 52.3 with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 450 or less; R 25 or greater for refrigerators; R 32 or greater for freezers. b. Ceiling Panels: Span shortest distance; utilize over-partition joined panels to minimize suspended ceilings; use 5” thick ceiling panels on spans greater than 15’-0”; maximum unsupported span of 17’-4”; suspended ceiling seams siliconed and tar taped. 12 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
100% DOCUMENTS
c. Finishes: (1) Exterior Finishes: 22 gauge, Type 304 smooth stainless steel per Article 2.02B, where exposed; vertical grooves in panels are not acceptable; 22 gauge galvanized steel on unexposed surfaces (2) Interior Finishes (a) Wall Panels: .04” (before embossing) stucco embossed aluminum (b) Ceiling Panels: .032” smooth aluminum with two coats of white, baked polyester enamel Wall Protectors (If Specified): 1-1/2” wide extruded aluminum rail with vinyl insert; field positioned; secure with unexposed sheet metal screws; end caps Diamond Tread Wall Overlay (If Specified): Provide 1/8” thick, 48" diamond-tread plate aluminum on exposed exterior; secure with oval countersunk head stainless steel screws and seal joints with silicone; install after stainless steel coved base and overlap stainless steel coved by 1/2". Floor: See item specifications for conditions that apply to this project; prefabricated freezer floor panels must have R-28 rating or greater; verify that building is transit level prior to installing walk ins; notify Owner and Architect if sub floor ventilation or heating is required for walk in freezers; FSEC to verify that sub-floor installation conditions are acceptable prior to installing floor and box; identify any discrepancy in writing to Owner’s Representative prior to installation a. Floorless with High Screeds: Per Detail SD-184, install extra high foam screeds in building floor recess; size screeds to extend above finished floor; coordinate height of wall panel with recess Stainless Steel Coved Base: 22 gauge stainless steel; 4" minimum height, 8'0" minimum length; 3/4" diameter cove; secure without exposed fasteners; overlap seams 1", miter joints at corners Door: R-25 or greater for refrigerators; R-32 or greater for freezers; In fitting, flush mounted, not less than 34” x 78” clear opening; 22 gauge smooth stainless steel with no exposed fasteners; replaceable magnetic gasketing on top and sides; replaceable double sweep gasket at bottom; door jamb with replaceable heater wires; stainless steel reinforced heated threshold flush with finished floor; frame-mounted door heater control switch, label control switch as “door heater adjustment” with incremental temperature level indicator control markings (high, medium, low) a. Vision Panel: Not less than 150 square inches; heated; triple pane glass b. Hinges: Three, Kason 1256, or equal by Dent, cam-lift spring- assisted selfclosing hinges with 7-9/16” long strap; use Kason load chart to verify hinge model selection for specific door weight and width c. Handle: Kason 1236 with steel reinforced plate inside door panel or equal by Dent, lever action door handle with cylinder lock, padlock hole and interior safety release; provide common key for all walk-in doors d. Door Closer: Kason 1092 e. Kickplate: 1/8” thick diamond tread plate aluminum on both sides of door and frame; extend from door bottom to door handle; secure with counter sunk oval head stainless steel screws; seal perimeter with silicone f. Incandescent Light: Delete lamp holder, bulb and shield entirely from door panel g. Electrical: Wire in conduit concealed in door panel to junction box top of ceiling per Detail SD-191 Thermometer: See item specification for thermometers required for this project; 40°F to 99°F; flush-mount in door panel on latch side, 60” above floor; conceal wire through door panel to junction box on top of walk-in; provide 24 volt transformer; wire from display through door panel, and extend sensor a minimum of 6’-0” from the door, in multiple walk-in compartment application with interior door, locate display for inner compartment in outer compartment door panel below display for outer compartment a. Digital Thermometer: Control Products, Inc. #TI-200-24
13 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
9. 10.
11.
12.
13. 14. 15.
16. 17. B.
100% DOCUMENTS
b. Digital Thermometer with Alarm: Control Products, Inc. TAI-2000D-24; audible and visible alarm; adjustable high and low set points; reset switch c. Digital Thermometer with Alarm and Building Alarm Interface: Control Products, Inc. #TAL-2000D-24 Pressure Relief Port: Provide heated relief port in freezers and non-heated in refrigerators; locate in exposed wall Lights: See item specification for lights required for this project a. Fluorescent: Provide American Fluorescent or equal by Kason, Model VTP-240 in refrigerators; Model VTP-248 HO in freezers; 48” long vapor proof fixture with light spreading lens; two lamps per fixture; locate as shown on plan, not less than one fixture per 100 square feet ceiling area b. Incandescent: 40 lumens per watt minimum; locater per plan, not less than one fixture per 100 square feet ceiling area c. LED: Kason Model 1810L21248LB; 48" long vapor proof fixture; two lamps per fixture; 67 lumen per watt; locate as shown on plan; lighting intensity shall be 10 foot candles. Enclosure Panels & Trim Strips: Secure with no exposed fasteners; close space between walk in and ceiling with enclosure panels, maximize panel width and minimize panel height; if access is required, supply only two 36” wide removable panels; close vertical space between walk in panels and building walls with trim strips; enclosure and trim same material as wall panels per Detail SD-193. Exterior Bumpers: See item specification for bumpers required for this project a. Stainless steel with sloped top; install on exposed exterior surfaces; 14 gauge stainless steel construction; 8” high x 2” deep with 45° angle slanted top; miter ends at 45°; apply with "Z" clip at top and stainless steel screws at bottom; center bumper 12” above finished floor; fully weld, grind and polish seams per Detail SD-189 Penetrations and Seams: Penetrations sealed with closed cell minimum expanding spray foam; seams sealed completely with Dow Corning 999A silicone glazing sealant to prevent condensation; tar tape on ceiling joints Receptacle for Heater Tape: Provide weather tight receptacle for freezer coil drainline heater Electrical: Prewire lights, alarm, door, window and port heaters, and receptacle for heater tape in ½” OD PVC conduit above walk in to junction box; ready for final connection by Electrical Trades per Detail SD-191; conduit within walk in is not acceptable Sprinkler Heads: When required, cut holes for sprinkler heads; provide stainless steel trim cap and seal holes per Article 2.07, para. 10 Installation: Factory representative supervision
Refrigeration System: Complete operating system consisting of a Copeland semihermetic compressor and a Heatcraft or Carrier Commercial Refrigeration evaporator coil charged with R-404a refrigerant; 1. Condensing Unit: See item specification for condensing unit types required for this project. a. General: Hermetic compressor for units ¾ h.p. and under, semi-hermetic for units above ¾ h.p. to 2 h.p. and scroll compressor for units 2 h.p. and above (3 h.p. and above for water-cooled units) with internal starting contactors and thermal overload protection; condenser fan motors of under 1 h.p. must use electronically commutated (EC) motors or permanent split capacitator-type (PSP) motors; splash lubrication system using Mobil EAL Arctic 22 polyolester synthetic refrigeration oil; oil sight glass; removable oil drain plug; label indicating oil used; high/low pressure control; suction line filter; suction and discharge service valves and copper/brass vibration isolators; receiver with fusible plug or relief valve; liquid line shut off valve; sight glass; molecular sieve filter dryer; main power supply fused disconnect switch 14 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
b. Air-Cooled: Air-cooled condenser with ball bearing permanently lubricated fan motor c. Outdoor: Galvanized steel housing; crankcase heater and low ambient temperature controls required to insure proper and efficient operation; fan cycling controls where ambient temperatures do not fall below 15° F; head master valve and oversized, heated, insulated receiver and lines where ambient temperatures fall below 15° F 2. Evaporator: Forced convection style; match to condensing unit and suspend with air discharged parallel to the ceiling; lifetime sealed motors with inherent motor protection; evaporator fan motors of under 1 h.p. and less than 460 volts must use electronically commutated (EC) motors; enclose coil section and fans within aluminum housing a. Refrigerator: Air defrost b. Freezer and Low Temperature Refrigerator: Electric heater and controls for positive automatic defrost c. Installation: Hang coils per manufacturer's recommendations using plastic or nylon threaded rod; spread coil weight evenly over ceiling panels; support long span ceiling panels as required d. Refrigerator Drainline: Run copper drainline from evaporator to building floor drain; exit walk in as close to floor as possible; trap below coil inside of walk in; paint drainline with non toxic paint, color to match wall panels; secure to walk-in wall e. Freezer and Low Temperature Refrigerator Drainline: Trap outside of walk in; wrap with Froxtex heater tape, manufactured by Chemlex and wired for continuous "on" operation; insulate with ½” thick Armaflex, Type AP insulation; secure to walk-in wall 3. Refrigeration Lines: Interconnect evaporator to condensing unit; pipe between components as required with refrigeration grade, degreased, sealed, Type L-ACR, hard drawn copper tubing; slope horizontal runs toward condensing unit one-half inch per 10’-0” of length so that refrigerant or oil cannot drain back into evaporator from suction line; trap suction line as it exits evaporator coil; trap bottom of vertical runs of 5’ 0” or more; if vertical run is 15’-0” or more, provide additional trap every 10’-0”; isolate refrigerant piping connected to compressors using copper/brass vibration isolators properly mounted at both ends; entire system cannot be exposed to atmosphere for more than (15) minutes; remove piping end caps just prior to soldering; braze all connections with Sil-Fos-15 solder; pass a continuous flow of nitrogen gas through the area being brazed or soldered; dismantle valves during soldering; clean pipe by pulling a clean cloth through its entire length; blow out piping prior to testing and insulating using dry nitrogen gas and pull a vacuum through the lines; insulate refrigeration lines with Armaflex, Type AP insulation or equal by Rubatex, ½” thick for refrigerators and ¾” thick for freezers and low temperature refrigerators; verify acceptability of Armaflex or Rubatex with local codes; if refrigeration lines pass through a return air plenum, use Pittsburgh Corning Foamglass, 2” thick insulation when Armaflex is unacceptable; install sections of insulation with 10”long metal guards at hanger points; support piping at intervals of 8’-0” or less based on pipe size and code requirements, using Uni-Strut channel hangers; secure piping to channel hangers using galvanized clamps with neoprene grommets separating the piping from the clamps; seal all joints and seams with Armstrong 520 adhesive; for outdoor use, cover insulation with VentureClad, 1577CW-W, white, VentureClad tape (www.venturetape.com) insulate and heat trace outdoor lines where temperatures fall below -15°F 4. Refrigeration Controls a. Walk-in Refrigerator: Provide off-cycle defrost with time clock for refrigerator evaporators, time clock mounted on back of coil without exposed conduit, label as “defrost time clock”; liquid line solenoid valve and thermostatic expansion valve for each evaporator 15 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
b. Walk-in Freezer and Low Temperature Refrigerator: Provide time clock for evaporator electric defrost heaters; time clock mounted on exterior face of walkin near an exterior door without exposed conduit, label as “defrost time clock”; heater block-out relay to prevent heater from operating while compressor is running; heat exchanger and accumulator c. Remote Reach-in and Roll-in Refrigerator and Freezer Systems: Provide time clock for positive "off" cycle air defrost 5. System Operation: Complete system capable of maintaining the interior temperature specified a. Refrigerators: 35° F operating temperature ± 2° with a 16 18 hour running time; design to operate at 100° F ambient temperature; size evaporator for 10° TD maximum b. Freezers: 10° F operating temperature + 2° with an 18 hour running time; design to operate at 100° F ambient temperature; size evaporator for 10° TD maximum c. Low Temperature Refrigerators: 28° F. operating temperature ± 2° with a 16-18 hour running time; design to operate at 100° F ambient temperature; size evaporator for 10° TD maximum 6. Installation - see item specification condition that applies to this project a. Interior: Mount on 1 ½” x 1 ½” x 1/8” angle iron rack; locate racks on floor or wall as specified in manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative; paint racks with two coats of rust inhibiting paint; provide two color etched plastic nameplate identifying equipment served by each refrigeration system b. Exterior: Install and bolt down condensing units in location specified; coordinate requirements for mounting with Owner's Representative; roof curbs and penetrations are not in Section 11 4000 c. Ventilation: Notify the Owner's Representative prior to installation if ventilation is not adequate d. Diagrams: Furnish four (4) copies of refrigeration system control wiring and piping diagrams; frame one copy in plexiglass and mount near refrigeration system location; chain one copy of operational maintenance manuals to system rack C.
2.08
Buyout Equipment: 1. General: Coordinate adequate ventilation around all refrigeration/freezer compressors; submit written notification of any design conditions that prevent proper operation or void equipment warranty; provide supplemental fans if required for proper operation; Equipment Contractor is responsible for proper operation of equipment 2. Remote Compressor: All components, interconnections and controls to provide complete operating system; condensing unit and lines per Article 2.07, para. B; coordinate refrigerant with buyout equipment; operator accessible on/off switch with pilot light; counter mounted compressor on slide-out channel frame; system to maintain code approved temperatures EXHAUST HOODS
A.
Construction: Fully welded; all 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel per Article 2.02, para. B stainless steel; #4 finish including exposed rear; exterior corners fully welded, ground and polished; length and depth per plan; provide duct collar; conceal plumbing and wiring; heat sensors installed at each hood duct collar to automatically activate the exhaust fan whenever cooking operations occur.
B.
Exhaust and Supply Requirements: Design for use and function at project engineered volume. Manufacturer's approved representative to measure volumes at each hood duct collar and provide documentation to the consultant indicating both the measured air volumes and the design air volume at each duct collar. 16 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
C.
Code Compliance: See Article 1.04.
D.
Fire Damper (When Specified): Fusible link activated; Underwriters Laboratories listed; microswitch on duct collar for interwiring by Electrical Trades to shut down exhaust fan when damper is closed
E.
Lights: Prewire in conduit to junction box on top of exhaust hood; recessed vapor proof fixtures; tempered glass diffuser; wall mounted light and fan switches provided by others. 1. Fluorescent: 2’-0” or 4’ 0” long fixture; two, T-8 lamps with electronic ballast per fixture; not less than one 4’-0” fixture per six feet of hood; maximize number of lights per hood section 2. Incandescent: 150 watt frosted lamp; not less than one fixture per four feet of hood 3. LED: By hood manufacturer; suitable for grease hood; must provide minimum 50 foot candles of illumination at cooking surface.
F.
Design: See item specification for designs required for this project. 1. Filter Hoods: Underwriters Laboratory classified stainless steel self draining removable baffle filters; full length concealed self draining trough pitched to built in recessed stainless steel grease cup; one filter removal tool per project
G.
Hood Installation 1. Mounting: Height as shown, not to exceed 7’ 0” above finished floor; free from vibration and distortion; coordinate with ceiling construction and ceiling heights; provide stainless steel hanger brackets, mounting angles and steel hanger rods 2. Trim: Conceal fasten 18 gauge stainless steel trim or enclosure panels from top of hood to ceiling 3. Interconnections: Make all plumbing and electric interconnections between adjacent sections, ready for singular final electrical and plumbing connections by respective trades
H.
Performance Guarantee: Hood manufacturer guarantees that the exhaust hood will capture grease, smoke and vapor from the cooking equipment shown on the plan at the specified air volumes without the addition of end panels, extensions to the hoods or other appurtenances. If after installation, testing and balancing the hood cannot effectively capture grease, smoke and vapor, it is the responsibility of the hood manufacturer to determine the reason the hood does not capture. If the manufacturer believes it is due to a defect in the building ventilation system, the hood manufacturer must identify the defect and prove it exists to the satisfaction of the General Contractor and Consultant. If the hood manufacturer cannot prove that a defect exists, the manufacturer will pay for all costs associated with modifying the exhaust hood, ductwork, fan, controls, make-up air system, wiring and all associated work required for the exhaust hood to capture grease, smoke and vapor from the cooking equipment.
2.09
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A.
General: The piping and detection lines built into the hood at time of fabrication include all piping, elbows, tee’s, U.L. grease seals, conduit and corner pulleys for the protection of the hood plenum(s) and exhaust duct(s); fire system and components supplied by a local authorized fire protection company.
B.
Code Compliance: See Article 1.04; comply with NFPA 13, 17 and 96, local codes and Underwriters Laboratory; submit shop drawings to code authorities and secure approval prior to system fabrication.
C.
Systems: See item specification for system required for this project. 17 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
1. Wet Chemical: Automatic and remote manual actuation; stainless steel control cabinet; cable and conduit; manual reset relay when applicable; installation and certification by factory trained personnel; mount control cabinets at the ceiling where shown on plan without exposed piping and conduit; minimum of one remote flush mounted manual pull station per system; coordinate location with local fire authorities and Electrical Trades D.
Piping: Schedule 40 black pipe and fittings; all exposed under the hood piping chrome plated with no exposed threads.
E.
Nozzles at Fire Dampers: On wet chemical and dual agent systems, if hoods have fire dampers at duct collars, provide nozzles above and below fire damper; provide welded 3/8” diameter schedule 40 black iron sleeve in ductwork for nozzle above damper.
F.
Nozzles at Tilt Skillet/Braising Pans: On wet chemical systems, if hoods have Tilt Skillet, provide four 230 S(swivel) nozzles branched from two nozzle drops per manufacturer's listing; mount nozzles 46" above appliance; align front nozzle with front edge of Tilt Skillet and direct towards hazard zone; provide additional nozzles if required per listing.
G.
Gas Shut-off Valve: Automatic electrically or mechanically activated per item specifications; installed by Mechanical Trades; equip electrical gas shut-off valve with 15-second power interruption.
H.
Follow-up Inspection: Include two semi-annual maintenance checkouts of the system by factory authorized personnel conforming to the recommendations as outlined in the manufacturer’s specifications and manuals; include permits, drawings, and testing by authorized fire protection company as required by authority having jurisdiction
I.
Warranty: See Article 1.07, para. E.
2.10
CONVEYORS - Not Used
2.11
UTILITY SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General 1. Interconnections: Interconnect equipment utility lines between equipment sections to single connection point; materials consistent with specifications 2. Performance: Install heated and motor operated equipment as required for efficient and stable operation; provide additional vents, guards, deflectors and other accessories as necessary whether or not such items are called for on the drawings or specifications; show additional modifications on the Shop Drawings; notify the Owner's representative in writing if design prevents proper operation prior to installation 3. All plumbing components must be lead-free to conform to Safe Water Drinking Act or more stringent state/local codes where applicable 4. Coordination: Verify incoming water pressure and temperature prior to equipment installation; provide written communication to Owner’s Representative if conditions will inadversely affect equipment operation
B.
Plumbing 1. Fabricated/Manufactured Equipment a. Connection Access: Provide access openings for mechanical connections b. Piping: Install horizontal piping at the highest possible elevation and not less than 6” above floor; conceal piping; no tool marks or more than one visible
18 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g. h. i. j. k.
C.
100% DOCUMENTS
thread at exposed fittings; bright polished chrome plate exposed piping and fittings Faucets: Available through Standard Plumbing Suppliers (1) Vegetable prep sink: Chicago 540-LDL8E1CP (2) General use sink - backsplash: Chicago 540-LD-GN8-E3CP (3) General use sink - deck: Chicago 201-ACP (4) Hand sink (Splash Mounted): Chicago 631CP (5) Hand sink (Deck Mounted Elkay): Chicago 786-E3CP (6) Disposer spray rinse: Chicago 510-GCLCP with wall bracket or equal by T&S Model B-0133-CR-BC (7) Food well fill faucet: Chicago 349 E1HOT, with “hot” water handle (8) Pot and Pan Sink: Chicago 540LDL12-1-159-3/4CP Wastes: Adjust handle length when required (1) 14” and 16” Deep sinks: Rotary handle commercial waste drain; Chicago 1367-NF, 2” waste or equal by Fisher or Component Hardware (2) Other sinks: Rotary handle commercial waste drain; Chicago 1367-NF, 1-½” waste or equal by Fisher or Component Hardware (3) All sink wastes except mobile soak sink to have drain overflow: Chicago 1344-001KJKRCF head with Chicago 1344-002JKRCF elbow tube or equal by Fisher or Component Hardware Accessories/Components: Chrome plate exposed fittings (1) Water Inlets: Locate above the positive water level to prevent siphoning (2) Backflow Prevention: Where conditions require a submerged inlet, provide a code approved check valve or backflow prevention device with the fixture to prevent siphoning; provide with T & S B-0461 angle flanges where plumbing penetrates backsplash; set flanges so top of vacuum breaker is 4” above splash Water Filters: Furnish Everpure or Cuno complete filter assemblies for new and existing beverage and ice making equipment, steamers, combi ovens and rack ovens; individual filters for vendor furnished equipment provided by vendor; furnish one additional set of filter cartridges with each filter system; install in accessible location and indicate on rough in drawings; meet peak water flow requirements of equipment being furnished; test water quality at site and adjust filter system to meet the equipment manufacturer requirements; if manufacturers quality requirement cannot be met, provide documentation to foodservice consultant; provide permanent label on filter system, indicating equipment name of item served. Gas Quick Disconnect: Dormont, Series BPQ-2SR or equal by T&S Brass; 5’-0” long with suitable length restraint to facilitate cleaning; mount restraint to prevent it lying on floor; sized to accommodate connection on equipment Water Quick Disconnect: Dormont, Series BP or equal by T&S Brass Series HW; 5'-0" long or required length; sized to accommodate connection on equipment; one hose per connection. Gas Pressure Reducing Valves: Furnish appropriate models in 5” to 15” water column pressure limits for installation by Mechanical Trades if not factory installed Gas Fired Ranges: Provide rear gas connection and stainless steel manifold end caps unless otherwise specified Indirect Wastes: Extend the following indirect wastes/drainline: condensate hood, hot and/or cold well, fabricated counter/equipment, countertop ice machines, and specified beverage equipment
Electrical 1. General: Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed and comply with National Electrical Code, Standards of National Electrical Manufacturers' Association and American Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers; wire, wind or construct equipment 19 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
to conform to available electrical services; furnish wiring and connection diagrams with equipment; provide equipment rigid and free from objectionable vibration and noise 2. Plug in Equipment: Furnish with cords attached; match plugs to receptacles; coordinating cords and plugs are the FSEC's responsibility; modify cord to a suitable length; on mobile equipment; provide suitable length restraint to facilitate cleaning; mount restraint to prevent it lying on floor. 3. Fabricated Equipment: Wire internally; furnish and install electric outlets and receptacles; run lines to a junction box, load center panel, starter, or disconnect switch; neatly tag wires showing item number, voltage characteristics and load information; furnish transformers for equipment unavailable in building electrical characteristics a. Built In Equipment: Install and interconnect electric controls, switches, receptacles or other units furnished separately; wire in concealed conduit to accessible junction point b. Motor Driven Appliances and Electric Heating Units: UL listed control switch or starter; exposed fused disconnect at motors larger than ½ hp or per code requirements; furnish line switches, fittings and connections when not part of the equipment for installation by Electrical Trades c. Motors: Drip-proof, splash-proof or totally enclosed type, having a continuousduty cycle; ball bearings except small motors which may have sleeve bearings; windings impregnated to resist moisture; enclose when exposed to dust, lint, water or other matter; mount on vibration elimination pads d. Conduit: Code approved; conceal from view e. Switches and Controls: Internally wire equipment to a thermostatic control and/or on/off switch with red indicator light; locate where shown; label function with plastic nameplates with not less than ¼” high white recessed lettering, and glue to adjacent surface f. Cover Plates: Stainless steel g. Outlets and Receptacles: Hubbell GF-15 and GF-20 ground fault interrupt outlets mounted where shown; wire to separate j-box; Hubbell #5251S and #5252S blue colored, surge suppression receptacles for point of sale equipment h. Fluorescent Light Fixtures: Provide ballasts and 3500° Kelvin lamps at 82 CRI (Color Rendering Index); install non breakable sleeves or coated lamps over food areas (1) Protector Shelves: Bartco Lighting Model BFL917; "TG" tube guards to cover entire length of fixture; EC921 solid end caps; lens cover; remote ballast and enclosure, finish on all components to match protector shelf uprights; must function properly in damp location (2) Wall Cabinet: Alkco, Series SS HP-100/200 Series/RSW i. Load Center: Locate in a separate compartment; prewire electrical components built into or set on the counter to panel; conceal conduit; UL listed, three phase, four-wire with grounded copper buss; individual ground fault interrupt breakers for each service load; identify equipment serviced on each breaker; snap-in type circuit breakers with thermo magnetic quick make/quick break trip; size each breaker for 125% of the connected load; minimum of two spare 20 amp circuits; balance the loads on each phase; shunt trip breakers for items under hood; install panel in accordance with electrical codes and regulatory requirements; provide nomex wrap around panel to protect from heat within counter and louver access panel/door for improved ventilation.
20 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
SITE INSPECTION
A.
Field Measurements: Field measure foodservice space prior to equipment construction; conform to finished building conditions; submit written notification to Owners Representative if building conditions prevent equipment from functioning properly.
B.
Site Conditions: Verify that surfaces, prepared openings, finished building dimensions, and roughed in utilities are ready for equipment; coordinate equipment with building openings and dimensions; construct and deliver equipment in sections sized to site limitations.
C.
Utilities: Verify that voltages, air volumes, water temperature and water, steam, and gas pressures are as required for equipment; coordinate changes to ensure that equipment operates properly
D.
Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions.
E.
Responsibility: Assume the expense of changes to equipment and/or cutting and patching walls, partitions, ceilings and floors necessary to receive and successfully operate equipment, caused by failure to coordinate with site conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Qualifications: Minimum (five) 5 years experience in similar work, including field welding.
B.
Code Compliance: Conform to current Standards and Revisions established by the National Sanitation Foundation, Ann Arbor, Michigan, and to prevailing local codes and regulations.
C.
Sealing: Seal equipment that abuts a wall or other fixed equipment with silicone sealant per Article 2.02, para. C; ¼” maximum width.
D.
Trim: Material to match equipment surface; trim equipment in wall openings, recesses or abutting a wall that cannot be effectively sealed with silicone; exposed fasteners are not acceptable; unacceptable as a substitute for accuracy and neatness.
E.
Schedule: Comply with the Owner's construction schedule; notify the Owner's Representative in writing, not less than thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled deadline if there is a reason the schedule cannot be met.
F.
Cutting and Patching: Cut and drill tops, backs, or other elements for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings; cut and patch foodservice equipment as required for equipment installation or service
G.
Protection: Protect equipment from damage.
H.
Damage and/or Loss: Replace or repair items that are lost or damaged prior to Owner acceptance
I.
Factory Supervision: Provide factory authorized service agent supervision for installation of job-site assembled conveyors, flight-type dishmachines and pulpers; include a thorough check of utility connections, pressures and overall installation. 21 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 3.03
100% DOCUMENTS
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Disconnection: By appropriate trade; specified in other sections of these specifications.
B.
Reused: Disassemble, if required, remove and store equipment until ready for installation; reassemble and set existing equipment in place ready for final connection; install in the same working order as when removed from service; prepare and submit a packing list identifying each piece of equipment removed and any attachments or accessories removed with it; equipment that is not in good working order should be noted; submit packing list signed by the Owner's Representative and the Section 11 4000 Contractor.
C.
Not Reused: Owner's Representative has the option to retain existing equipment; authorized demolition contractor will remove and dispose; obtain written authorization from Owner's Representative to remove equipment from site.
3.04 A.
3.05
CLEANING Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces; wash, clean and polish equipment; polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings prior to the inspection and acceptance of the Work. Install existing equipment in the same state as when it was removed from service. DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING
A.
Demonstration: Schedule times with the Owner's Representative to provide instruction on the maintenance and use of each item; conveyor authorized service agent to demonstrate adjustment and maintenance procedures to Owner's maintenance staff and dishroom supervisor and demonstrate pump adjustment to detergent supplier; demonstrate operation to appropriate inspectors if required; verify that copies of all instructional, operational, maintenance manuals, charts and audio and video media have been provided at least two weeks prior to demonstration as required in Article 1.05, para. G.3.
B.
Testing: Test, regulate and put into proper operating condition; calibrate controls, including thermostats; coordinate dishmachine testing with detergent supplier; properly activate water filters per manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Chart of Completion: Provide separate charts for demonstration and testing; include item number, description of equipment, date, person/firm responsible, and Owner’s initials; provide charts to Owner, Owner’s Representative, and Consultant prior to Owner’s acceptance.
3.06
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
A.
NOTE: Provide like equipment items (upright refrigeration, serving counters, display cases, kettles, and range match cooking equipment) and items that directly interface (hoods, raceways, fire protection systems/hood control panels) from same manufacturer. Provide common locks (when specified) on all equipment from same manufacturer.
B.
ALL EQUIPMENT IN TEMPORARY SERVING LINE LAYOUT TO BE PURCHASED, FABRICATED AND ON SITE FOR USE BY WINTER 2013-2014, VERIFY EXACT DATE WITH OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. PROVIDE ROUGH-INS FOR THIS TEMPORARY LOCATION.
22 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
1
DRY STORAGE SHELVING Fifteen Metro Industries Super Adjustable 2 Super Erecta Shelving or equal by Eagle Group A. Features: Shelves width and length shown on plan; five chrome wire shelves per section; 74" high chrome posts; no common posts. B. Installation: Verify that units fit within finished wall dimensions; assemble with bottom shelf 10" above floor or per local health code requirements
2
WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER COMPLEX One Thermo-Kool or equal by Thermalrite or Imperial A. Features: Hard rail construction only; complex size and shape as shown on plan, constructed and equipped per Article 2.07; slope top exterior bumpers, located per plan; digital thermometer with alarm and building alarm interface; fluorescent lights per plan. B. Floor: SD-184; FSEC to verify that floor conditions are approved prior to installing floor and box; provide any discrepancy in writing to Owner's Representative. C. Finishes: White stucco-embossed aluminum exposed exterior; white baked enamel over smooth aluminum ceiling; stucco-embossed aluminum interior walls; galvanized steel on unexposed exterior surfaces. D. Installation: Manufacturer Authorized Installer to install walk-in compartment. E. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase.
3
FREEZER SYSTEM One RDT or equal by Cold Zone or Omni Temp w/Copeland compressor; Heatcraft evaporator coil or equal by Carrier Commercial Refrigeration A. Features: Properly-sized, outdoor air-cooled condensing unit, located on the loading dock, verify exact location with Architect/Engineer; properly-sized evaporator coil; system equipped and installed per Article 2.07B; locate defrost time clock on front face of exterior door plug, centered above door at ceiling. B. Electrical: 208V, 1 phase (Evaporator Coil) 208V, 3 phase (Condensing Unit)
4
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER SHELVING Fourteen (11-EXISTING) Metro Industries MetroMax Q Shelving A. Features: Shelves width and length shown on plan; four reinforced polypropylene shelves per section; 63" high MetroMax i polymer posts; 5" diameter polyurethane casters, delete donut bumpers. B. Installation: Verify that units fit within finished wall dimension; assemble with bottom shelf 10" above floor or per local health code requirements.
5
OPEN NUMBER
6
DUNNAGE RACK Two Existing; relocate to position shown on plan.
7
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM One RDT or equal by Cold Zone or Omni Temp w/Copeland compressor unit; Heatcraft evaporator coil or equal by HTPG A. Features: Properly sized, outdoor air cooled condensing unit, located on the loading dock, verify exact location with Architect/Engineer; properly sized 23 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B.
100% DOCUMENTS
evaporator coil; system equipped and installed per Article 2.07B; install coil as tight to ceiling as possible without affecting operation of coil. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase (Evaporator Coil) 208V, 3 phase (Condensing Unit)
8
EXHAUST HOOD One Accurex Model XBEW or equal by Halton A. Features: Filter-type hood; 24" high canopy; without fire damper; fully welded exposed seams; hem edge on filter bank; welded filter bank; one filter removal tool per project; LED lights in 4' lengths whenever possible; equipped per Article 2.08; heat sensors installed at each hood duct collar to automatically activate the exhaust fan whenever cooking operations occur (wiring to fan by Electrical Trades). B. Size: Per plan. C. Exhaust Requirements: The project was designed on the basis of the exhaust air volumes listed below: D. Exhaust: Two duct collars, one measuring 22" x 9" at 2266 CFM at 0.489" static pressure, one measuring 20" x 9" at 2063 CFM at 0.462 static pressure for a total of 4329 CFM. E. Hood must comply with code authority requirements, properly ventilate the cooking equipment beneath it and be compatible with the building ventilation systems; see mechanical engineer's drawings for further requirements; FSEC to provide stickers on all sides stating-PENETRATION WITH ANY FASTENERS VIOLATES AGENCY LISTINGS. F. Fire Protection: See Item #11. G. Installation: Mount bottom edge of hood at 6’-9” AFF. H. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase.
9
STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL One A. Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2 - Products, Elevation 1/FS200 and Standard Detail SD-38. B. Features: 18 gauge continuous stainless steel panel; stainless steel sheet to extend from 6" AFF, coordinate with height of floor covering, to bottom edge of hood; conceal fasten to wall and seal perimeter; neatly finished utility openings with escutcheon covers; maximize size of sheets used; include on side wall next to Item #12.
10
OPEN NUMBER
11
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM One Ansul R-102 System or equal by Pyro-Chem, Range Guard or Kidde A. Features: Wet chemical fire protection system per Article 2.09 to protect exhaust hood, Item #8 and the equipment below; automatic mechanically activated gas shut-off valve; remote manual pull station; coverage for Tilting Fry Pan, Item #13, refer to Article 2.09F; coordinate shape of empty J-box in wall (with empty conduit) by Electrical for remote pull by FSEC, all conduit to be inside wall; tanks and nozzles per UL 300; stainless steel cabinet; provide wet chemical tanks properly sized to fit within 24" high stainless steel cabinet. B. Testing: Provide system pre-test by factory authorized personnel to ensure proper operation prior to final test by Fire Marshal. C. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase.
24 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
12
12 GALLON KETTLES W/STAND One Cleveland Model KGT-12-T w/Equipment Stand Model ST-28 & SG-28 A. Features: Stainless steel steam-jacketed kettle; natural gas operation; manual tilt handle; electronic spark ignition; 53 MBTU, 12 gallon; double fill faucet with swing spout and mixing valve; faucet bracket; stainless steel table with sliding splash guard; drain connection, extend to floor drain with plastic tubing; 5' gas quick disconnect hose with restraining chain per Article 2.11B. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
13
TILTING FRY PAN, 40 GALLON One Cleveland Model SGL-40-T1 or equal by Groen A. Features: 40 gallon capacity tilting fry pan; natural gas operation; 9" deep stainless steel pan; electronic thermostat; electric spark ignition; spring assisted cover; high limit safety switch; hot and cold water fill faucet with swing spout and mixing valve; heavy-duty faucet mounting bracket; 2" tangent draw-off valve, position as shown on plan and Elevation; cooks in tilting position; gas pressure regulator and 5' gas quick disconnect hose with restraining chain per Article 2.11B; open base design with four stainless steel legs with leveling feet. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug
14
6-BURNER RANGE W/OVEN One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
15
OPEN NUMBER
16
FLOOR GRATE & FRAME One IMC Teddy Model FT with SG-ADA grating or equal by Gates or SteelKor A. Features: Stainless steel standard floor trough; 18" x 36" grate size not including frame, position per plan; provide optional stainless steel beehive strainer (or equal by Component Hardware); built-in pitch towards waste; SG-ADA grating, with 7/16" clearance between each bar; 304 stainless steel grating construction with 3/16" x 1" high bars and 1/2" stabilizer rods welded at each joint. B. Installation: Coordinate location of waste outlets with Mechanical; furnish trough assembly to Mechanical for installation; trough must be flush with finished floor; proper location of the trough is the responsibility of the FSEC.
17
CONVECTION OVEN, 2-SEC. One (FUTURE) Blodgett Model Zephaire 240-G PLUS DBL A. Features: Double compartment oven; natural gas operation; stainless steel front, top, and sides; dual pane thermal glass windows, stainless steel doors; porcelain enamel interior; five chrome plated racks; solid state manual infinite thermostat controls; 1/3 HP blower motor; two-speed motor; control area cooling fan; manifold gas connections; gas pressure regulator and 5' gas quick disconnect hose with restraining chain per Article 2.11B; 4" low profile casters, front with brakes. B. Electrical: (2) 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
18
CONVECTION OVEN, 2-SEC. One Blodgett Model Zephaire 240-G PLUS DBL 25 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT A.
B.
100% DOCUMENTS
Features: Double compartment oven; natural gas operation; stainless steel front, top, and sides; dual pane thermal glass windows, stainless steel doors; porcelain enamel interior; five chrome plated racks; solid state manual infinite thermostat controls; 1/3 HP blower motor; two-speed motor; control area cooling fan; manifold gas connections; gas pressure regulator and 5' gas quick disconnect hose with restraining chain per Article 2.11B; 4" low profile casters, front with brakes. Electrical: (2) 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
19
COMBI OVEN, 2-SEC. One Rational Model Combi-Duo Mobile WE SCC 62 Gas on WE SCC 62 Gas or equal by Eloma GENIUS-T 6-11 GAS on GENIUS-T 6-11 GAS A. Features: Two section combination oven/steamer; stainless steel finish; natural gas operation; capacity for twelve 18" x 26" sheet pans or twenty-four 12" x 20" x 2-1/2" steam pans; provide six additional grid shelves, 3 per section; 7, SelfCooking Control Modes; 3, Combi-Steamer modes; clear control panel with pictograms; 6 point core temperature probe; sensor controlled cabinet humidity; vapor quenching; humidifying function; 5 air speeds; rear ventilated double glass doors hinged inside pane for easy cleaning; cool down function; half power setting; integrated grease extraction system; automatic cleaning prompt noting cleaning stage and chemical volume; unsupervised cleaning and deliming care ability; integral retractable hand pressure spray gun; magnetic door switch with automatic shut-off and restart; integrated door drip pan connected to drain; automatically activated interior light; service diagnostic system; lime scale build up display; heat shield for control panel; ethernet interface; gas pressure regulator; 5' gas quick disconnect hose with restraining chain and quick disconnect water connections per Article 2.11B; pressure safety valve; water filter per Manufacturer's instructions and Article 2.11B; separate solenoid valves for normal and soft water; Combi-Duo Installation-Kit; CombiLink software package; one package each Cleaner Tabs and Care Deliming Tabs; Rational Certified Installation; heavy duty swivel casters, all with brakes. B. Electrical: (2) 208V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
20
OPEN NUMBER
21
MICROWAVE OVEN One Panasonic Model NE-1064F or equal by Amana A. Features: Stainless steel interior and exterior; 1000 watt; 0.8 cubic feet capacity; 10 programmable memory pads; 6 power levels; 2 and 3 stage cooking; digital display; interior light; capacity for one half-size, 6" deep steam table pan. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug
22
MOBILE WARMING CABINET One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
23
ROLL-IN REFRIGERATOR, 1-SEC. Two Traulsen Model ARI-132HUT-FHS or equal by Victory "RISA", True "STA" or Continental "DL" A. Features: Stainless steel exterior; aluminum interior; automatic hot gas condensate evaporator; built-in digital thermometer; self-closing door, hinged per plan; stainless steel door liner and thermal break; door lock; accommodates one 26 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B.
100% DOCUMENTS
mobile rack, Item #24; stainless steel cart ramp; automatically activated interior lights. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
24
MOBILE RACK Two New Age Model 1331 or equal by Kelmax or Channel Manufacturing Features: Aluminum construction; welded angle ledge pan slides to accommodate twenty 18" x 26" sheet pans on 3" centers; must fit in roll in refrigerator, Item #23, as specified for this project with door closed; perimeter bumper, (4) 5" diameter polyurethane swivel casters, two with brakes.
25
SLICER One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
26
HAND SINK Four Krowne Model HS-27 or equal by John Boos PBHS-W-1410-8OC or Advance Tabco Q72045 A. Features: Stainless steel construction; 7" high integral backsplash; chrome Ptrap; wall-mounting bracket; strainer type waste; stainless steel side supports; delete standard faucet; Chicago 631-E3 faucet; faucet holes on 8" centers; add side splash if required by code. B. Installation: Mount 34" above floor.
27
60 QUART MIXER One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
28
WORKCOUNTER W/SINK One Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 2 & 3/FS200 and Standard Details.
29
MOBILE TRASH BIN Five (2-EXISTING) Rubbermaid Model 2632 with 2631 Lid & 2640 Dolly Features: 32 gallon capacity; dolly; gray color; with lid
30
SLICER EQUIPMENT STAND One Piper Products Model 331-3424 or Custom Fabricate Features: Stainless steel construction; stainless steel channel slides to accommodate 18" x 26" sheet pans; polyurethane swivel casters, two with brakes; modify to 28" overall height.
31
STAINLESS STEEL WALL CAP One Fabricate; construct per plan and Part 2 Products. Features: Locate per plan; 14 gauge stainless steel construction, close at exposed ends; 2” turn-down; width and length per plan; crimp edge to wall; seal vertical edge to wall with adhesive sealant; match masonry unit radius if required. 27 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
32
DISPOSER W/SPRAY RINSE One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings; modify by providing new MRS control and Spray Rinse T & S Brass Model B0133-CR-BC, in lieu of Spray Valve Model B-0107-C provide Model B-0107.
33
WALL SHELF One Fabricate, construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 4/FS200 and SD-25b.
34
PREP COUNTER W/SINKS One Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2 - Products, Elevation 4/FS200 and Standard Details.
35
OPEN NUMBER
36
PAN STORAGE SHELVING Two Existing; relocate to position shown on plan.
37
MOBILE WARMING CABINET One Metro Industries Model C589-NDS-U or equal by FWE Model UHST-13D A. Features: Aluminum exterior and interior; insulated holding cabinet; doublehinged insulated Dutch doors; 180 degree door swing; dual magnetic door latches with mechanical release; continuous door gaskets; 1950 watt heating system; 80200 degree F operating temperature; low temperature alarm; ducted air system; adjustable thermostatic controls; indicator lights; digital thermometer; top mounted controls; corner bumpers; cord wrap; water pan; four swivel casters, front two with brakes; 18 adjustable universal angle slides to accommodate 18" x 26" sheet pans and 12" x 20" steam pans. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
38
UTILITY CART Three Existing; relocate to position shown on plan.
39
OPEN NUMBER
40
OPEN NUMBER
41
TRAY CART Two Existing; relocate to position shown on plan.
42
HOT FOOD COUNTER, 4-WELL Two Custom Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products and SD-121, SD-120 and Counter Front Detail A. Features: Size per plan; 34" height; 14 gauge stainless steel top; full plastic laminate front, color as approved by Consultant; recessed perimeter for 18 x 26 sheet pans; cutout in top to accommodate Hot Food Well, Item #43; full-depth stainless steel bottom shelf; 9" wide, flat, stainless steel lift-off/fold down trayslide, at 32” AFF; convenience duplex receptacle in apron to serve Hot Food Well, Item #43; polyurethane swivel casters, two with brakes; common 9'-0" 28 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. C. D.
100% DOCUMENTS
right-angle cord and plug set, with cord wrap, mounted below undershelf on Operator's side. Hot Food Well: Refer to Item #43. Installation: FSEC to extend drain line and elbow into floor drain. Electrical: 120/208V, 1 phase; all components wired to one cord and plug
43
HOT FOOD WELL Two Wells Model MOD-400TD A. Features: Heavy-duty modular food warmer; stainless steel construction; insulated sides and bottom; accommodate four 12" x 20" steamtable pans; suitable for wet or dry operation; individual thermostatic controls; with "on" light; individual drain valves for each well, with screens, manifold to master drain valve; FSEC to provide drain valve and extend to floor drain; flexible conduit and control panel. B. Electrical: 208V, 1 phase.
44
PROTECTOR SHELF Two BSI, LLC Z-Guard Model ZG9915 Features: 1" round diameter tubing; brushed aluminum finish; 3/8" tempered, rounded glass panels on adjustable brackets; 12" angled front glass panel; 14" horizontal top glass panel; end panels as required by code; 1" radius corners; heavy duty flange undercounter mount (SSU3); 18" post height above counter; 8" minimum undercounter mount extension, welded to cabinet framework.
45
OPEN NUMBER
46
OPEN NUMBER
47
COLD FOOD COUNTER, 3-WELL Two Custom Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products and SD-122, SD-120 and Counter Front Detail A. Features: Size per plan; 34" height; 14 gauge stainless steel top; full plastic laminate front, color as approved by Consultant; cutout in top to accommodate Drop-in Cold Pan, 3-Well, Item #48; full-depth stainless steel bottom shelf to the Operator's one left and one right; 9" wide, flat, stainless steel lift-off/fold down trayslide, at 32” AFF; louvered panels to accommodate ventilation requirements; isolated compressor compartment to the Operator's one left and one right, with hinged door; convenience duplex receptacle in cabinet base to serve Drop-in Cold Pan, Item #48; polyurethane swivel casters, two with brakes; common 9'-0" right-angle cord and plug set, with cord wrap, mounted below undershelf on Operator's side. B. Installation: FSEC to extend drain line and elbow into floor drain. C. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; all components wired to one cord and plug.
48
DROP-IN COLD PAN, 3-WELL Two Low Temp Industries Temp-est Aire Model DI-2037TAH (Modify) A. Features: Stainless steel construction; 3 well circulating cold air refrigerated drop in cold pan; removable divider bars; 1/3 HP. compressor; fully insulated; selfcontained condensing unit, one offset on left and one offset right side; one fan; stainless steel drain with strainer; FSEC to extend to floor drain; accommodates three 12" x 20" pans; standard depth model; remote on/off thermostat switch mounted in counter; provide flat flange with hugged edge. 29 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT B. C.
100% DOCUMENTS
Insert: Custom Fabricate stainless steel insert, 26" length sections, finger holes to lift out, perforated. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
49
PROTECTOR SHELF Two BSI, LLC Z-Guard Model ZG9915 Features: 1" round diameter tubing; brushed aluminum finish; 3/8" tempered, rounded glass panels on adjustable brackets; 12" angled front glass panel; 14" horizontal top glass panel; end panels as required by code; 1" radius corners; heavy duty flange undercounter mount (SSU3); 18" post height above counter; 8" minimum undercounter mount extension, welded to cabinet framework.
50
MILK CABINET TRAY SLIDE Two Fabricate; Part 2-Products and Standard Details; removable 6" wide 18 gauge stainless steel flat trayslides, mounting to fit between the folded down side and the cabinet body, one for each cabinet, Items #53 & #55.
51
UTILITY COUNTER Two Custom Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products; SD-126, SD-120 and Counter Front Detail A. Features: Size per plan; 34" height; 14 gauge stainless steel top; full plastic laminate front and end panels, color as approved by Consultant; full-depth stainless steel bottom and middle shelf; 9" wide, flat, stainless steel lift-off/fold down trayslide, at 32” AFF; polyurethane swivel casters, two with brakes; common 9'-0" right-angle cord and plug set, with cord wrap, mounted below undershelf on Operator's side. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; all components wired to one cord and plug
52
PROTECTOR SHELF Two BSI, LLC Z-Guard Model ZG9915 Features: 1" round diameter tubing; brushed aluminum finish; 3/8" tempered, rounded glass panels on adjustable brackets; 12" angled front glass panel; 14" horizontal top glass panel; end panels as required by code; 1" radius corners; heavy duty flange undercounter mount (SSU3); 18" post height above counter; 8" minimum undercounter mount extension, welded to cabinet framework.
53
MILK CABINET One Beverage Air Model SMF34 or equal by Norlake A. Features: Single access; stainless steel hinged top lid and drop-down side lid; polyurethane insulation; exterior dial thermometer; cylinder lock; four swivel casters, two with brakes; heavy-duty wire racks; stainless steel interior. B. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
54
MOBILE CASHIER STAND Two Custom Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products and SD-120, SD-123 and Counter Front Detail A. Features: Stainless steel top; plastic laminate front and end panels, color as approved by Consultant; (1) 9" wide, flat, fold down trayslides at 32" A.F.F. with 12" extensions, per plan; 120V convenience outlet to accommodate Owner's cash 30 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B.
100% DOCUMENTS
register; stainless steel lockable cash drawer; hole in countertop to accommodate cords; removable bottom shelf; 5" diameter casters, two with brakes. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug.
55
MILK CABINET One Existing; relocate to position shown on plan; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
56
CASH REGISTER Two This item is by Owner and is not in the 11 4000 Contract; include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
57
CONDIMENT COUNTER Two Custom Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products; Elevation 7/FS200 and SD-126 and Counter Front Detail Features: Size per plan; 34" height; 14 gauge stainless steel top; full plastic laminate front, back and end panels, color as approved by Consultant; full-depth stainless steel bottom and middle shelf; 9" wide, flat, stainless steel lift-off/fold down trayslide, at 32” AFF; cutout on top to accommodate Condiment Dispenser, Item #59.
58
FLATWARE DISPENSER Two Piper Products Model A-8 or equal by Steril Sil Features: Stainless steel construction; fully enclosed; canted top; cut-outs for 8 flatware cylinders; provide 12 stainless steel cylinders per dispenser.
59
CONDIMENT DISPENSER Two Server Model SE-3DI 07050 Features: Drop-in triple dispenser; stainless steel base and lid; three separate sections; capacity for 1-1/2 gallon Cryovac pouches per section; adjustable portion control; surgical quality plastic pumps (07537); spout and tube cleaning brush; drop into Item #57.
60
TRASH & RECYCLING COUNTER One A. Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 8/FS022, Standard Details and Counter Front Detail B. Name Plates: Stainless steel, 3” x 8”, rounded corners, etched names – 2 each “COMPOST”, “TRASH” AND “MILK”; silicon in place per plan.
61
SOILED DISHTABLE One Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 6/FS200 and Standard Details.
62
DISPOSER W/SPRAY RINSE One In-Sink-Erator Model SS-200-6 A. Features: Stainless steel and chrome exterior; 2 HP motor; MRS control panel; #6 collar adaptor; vacuum breaker with angle flanges per Article 2.11B; time delay relay, solenoid valve, flow control valve; T & S Spray Rinse Model B-
31 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B.
100% DOCUMENTS
0133-CR-BC with wall bracket, provide spray valve Model B-0107 in lieu of B0107-C. Electrical: 208V, 3 phase.
63
EXHAUST DUCT RISER Two A. Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products and Elevation 6/FS200. B. Features: 18 gauge stainless steel vapor-proof welded construction; extend riser to 6" above finished ceiling, include stainless steel trim flange at ceiling. C. Installation: Install on dishmachine per manufacturer's instructions.
64
DISHMACHINE W/BOOSTER HEATER One Hobart Model CL44e w/Booster Heater A. Features: Single tank conveyor type dishmachine; stainless steel front panel, frame, feet and legs; direction of operation per plan; stainless steel wash arms; automatic fill; automatic timer; stainless steel pump and impeller; door actuated drain closer; insulated hinged double doors with door interlock switches; top mounted micro-processor control module; motor overload protection; higher than standard chamber; electric tank heat; integral stainless steel pressureless electrical booster heater, properly sized to provide 180 degree F final rinse to dishmachine, FSEC to verify incoming water temperature prior to ordering; common drain manifold; common water connection; water hammer arrestor kit; single point electrical connection; stainless steel vent hoods at load and unload end; vent fan control; set of stainless steel splash shields; provide two bun pan dishracks for use with 18 x 26 sheet pans, two each 20" x 20" peg racks and 20" x 20" combination racks; table limit switch, mount per elevation; coordinate with Mechanical Trades to provide maximum 25 PSI water pressure to dishmachine; drain water tempering kit. B. Electrical: 208V, 3 phase (Controls and Tank Heat) 208V, 3 phase (Booster Heater) 120V, 1 phase (DWT)
65
MOP SINK One This item is by Mechanical and is not in the 11 4000 contract, include utility requirements on rough-in drawings.
66
CLEAN DISHTABLE One Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 6/FS200 and Standard Details.
67
EYE/FACE WASH STATION One T & S Brass Model EW-7656WC A. Features: Stainless steel swing down eye/face wash unit; two spray heads with removable ABS plastic spray cover; built in flow control; spray heads automatically activated when unit is pulled down; stainless steel drain pan; universal emergency eyewash sign. B. Installation: Install flush in wall with exterior panic bar at 48" maximum above finished floor for operation with spray heads at 34" above finished floor; hot and cold water mixing valve by Mechanical Trades; coordinate wall opening requirements with architectural trades.
32 - 11 4000 -
FARMINGTON ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ADDITION AND REMODELING FARMINGTON, MN SECTION 11 4000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
100% DOCUMENTS
68
HOSE REEL One T & S Brass Model B 7122 CO1 MOD A. Features: Retractable hose reel; stainless steel cover; EB-0107 spray rinse with 30' of rubber hose; T&S ORK-2 shut off valve; HW-4B-36, 36" flexible hose with quick disconnect; T&S B-1035 concealed in wall mixing valve; T&S BCVV 1-2 loose key check valves; code approved backflow preventer by Mechanical Trades; volume control and coupling. B. Installation: Furnish components to Mechanical for installation, coordinate plumbing requirements so that all piping is concealed in wall; mounting height per detail
69
POT & PAN SINK One Fabricate; construct per plan, Part 2-Products, Elevation 5/FS200 and Standard Details.
70
STACKED WASHER/DRYER One Speed Queen Commercial Washer/Electric Dryer Model LTSA7AWN A. Washer Features: "Big door opening", see thru; front mount supply dispenser automatically adds detergent, bleach and softener; stainless steel washtub; high speed extract; rugged steel construction, all drive components; 3/4 HP drive motor; free standing design; four wash cycles with four temperature combinations; built in anti vibration system; soft mount design; energy star rated. B. Dryer Features: Electric dryer; wide door opening; galvanized steel cylinder, gentle tumble action; quiet blower system; large capacity lint filter; cushioned drum suspension; variable timer control with three temperature selections. C. Electrical: 120V, 1 phase; cord and plug (Washer) 208V, 1 phase; cord and plug (Dryer)
71
INSULATED TRANSPORT CABINET Eight (1-EXISTING) Cambro Camcarriers Model UPC400 Features: Front loading; non-electrical; one piece, insulated polyethylene construction; (12) molded-in rails on 1-1/2” centers; accommodates a variety of pan sizes; nylon door latch; airtight gasket; 270 degree door swing; pop-up vent on outside of door; molded-in handles; provide (4) units in hot red and (3) units in cold blue; include (4) Camdolly, Model CD400 (black) and (4) Strap, Model 400STP; coordinate shape and size with existing model so they will stack. END OF SECTION 11 4000
33 - 11 4000 -
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling SECTION 11 4000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEMIZED BID FORM
100% CD Documents
Name of Bidder:
____________________________________________________________________
Address:
____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________
Telephone:
_____________________________
Date:
_____________________________
We the undersigned, will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, facilities, etc, and perform all work required for the construction and completion of the foodservices equipment work for the foodservice facilities at Farmington Elementary School in accordance with the drawings and specifications dated January 15, 2013. The following is a subdivision of our tender for the work: (A)
Equipment
$_________________________________
(B)
Installation
$_________________________________
(C)
Tax (if applicable)
$_________________________________
Total Contract Price $_________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________dollars (written amount) Addenda We include, in the above Bid the sum, the modifications to the Work described in the following Addenda received prior to the submission of the Bid. Addendum No.
___________________________
Dated ________________________________
Addendum No.
___________________________
Dated ________________________________
Bond The Bid does not include allowance for performance bond and payment bonds. If such bonds are required, said bonds will be furnished and executed for the additional sum of: $___________________________________________________________________________________
NOTE: USE OF THIS FORM IS MANDATORY
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling SECTION 11 4000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEMIZED BID FORM
100% CD Documents
Subcontractors The following subcontractors will be a. Custom Fabrication
______________________________________________________________
b. Installation
___________________________________________________________________
c. Refrigeration
___________________________________________________________________
d. Other
________________________________________________________________________
Proposal Guarantee The price stated in this Bid is guaranteed for a period of not less than sixty (60) days, nor more than _________ days from the date hereof, and if authorized to proceed within that period, we agree to complete the work covered by this Bid at said price. The undersigned _________________________________________ is licensed to do business in the State of (individual, partnership, corporation) _________________________ . License No.
___________________________________________________
By
___________________________________________________
Title ___________________________________________________ Information Required Bidder to state: 1.
If Partnership, list names of all partners: _______________________________________________________________________________
2.
If the corporation, give state of incorporation: _______________________________________________________________________________
Itemized Bid The following itemized equipment bid is an integral part of this Proposal. The Owner reserves the right to delete any item and receive full credit up until the time that the equipment contractor is authorized by the Owner's representatives to purchase or fabricate that equipment item. Include installation and tax (if applicable) within the cost of each item.
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling SECTION 11 4000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEMIZED BID FORM
Item #
Qty
Description
100% CD Documents
Remarks
Item Cost
Total Cost
1
15
DRY STORAGE SHELVING
________
________
2
1
WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER COMPLEX
________
________
3
1
FREEZER SYSTEM
________
________
4
14
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER SHELVING
________
________
5
11-EXISTING
OPEN NUMBER
6
2
DUNNAGE RACK
7
1
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
________
________
8
1
EXHAUST HOOD
________
________
9
1
STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL
________
________
10
EXISTING/RELOCATE
OPEN NUMBER
11
1
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
________
________
12
1
12 GALLON KETTLES W/STAND
________
________
13
1
TILTING FRY PAN, 40 GALLON
________
________
14
1
6-BURNER RANGE W/OVEN
________
________
________
________
15
EXISTING/RELOCATE
OPEN NUMBER
16
1
FLOOR GRATE & FRAME
17
1
CONVECTION OVEN, 2-SEC.
18
1
CONVECTION OVEN, 2-SEC.
________
________
19
1
COMBI OVEN, 2-SEC.
________
________
________
________
20
FUTURE
OPEN NUMBER
21
1
MICROWAVE OVEN
22
1
MOBILE WARMING CABINET
23
2
ROLL-IN REFRIGERATOR, 1-SEC.
________
________
24
2
MOBILE RACK
________
________
25
1
SLICER
26
4
HAND SINK
________
________
27
1
60 QUART MIXER
________
________
28
1
WORKCOUNTER W/SINK
________
________
29
5
MOBILE TRASH BIN
________
________
30
1
SLICER EQUIPMENT STAND
________
________
31
1
STAINLESS STEEL WALL CAP
________
________
32
1
DISPOSER W/SPRAY RINSE
________
________
33
1
WALL SHELF
________
________
EXISTING/RELOCATE
EXISTING/RELOCATE
EXISTING/RELOCATE
2-EXISTING
RELOCATE/MODIFY
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling SECTION 11 4000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEMIZED BID FORM
Item #
Qty
34
1
35
Description
100% CD Documents
Remarks
PREP COUNTER W/SINKS
Item Cost
Total Cost
________
________
________
________
OPEN NUMBER
36
2
PAN STORAGE SHELVING
37
1
MOBILE WARMING CABINET
38
3
UTILITY CART
39
OPEN NUMBER
40
OPEN NUMBER
EXISTING/RELOCATE
EXISTING/RELOCATE
41
2
TRAY CART
42
2
HOT FOOD COUNTER, 4-WELL
________
________
43
2
HOT FOOD WELL
________
________
44
2
PROTECTOR SHELF
________
________
45
OPEN NUMBER
46
OPEN NUMBER
EXISTING/RELOCATE
47
2
COLD FOOD COUNTER, 3-WELL
________
________
48
2
DROP-IN COLD PAN, 3-WELL
________
________
49
2
PROTECTOR SHELF
________
________
50
1
MILK CABINET TRAY SLIDE
________
________
51
2
UTILITY COUNTER
________
________
52
2
PROTECTOR SHELF
________
________
53
1
MILK CABINET
________
________
54
2
MOBILE CASHIER STAND
________
________
55
1
MILK CABINET
EXISTING/RELOCATE
56
2
CASH REGISTER
BY OWNER
57
2
CONDIMENT COUNTER
________
________
58
2
FLATWARE DISPENSER
________
________
59
2
CONDIMENT DISPENSER
________
________
60
1
TRASH & RECYCLING COUNTER
________
________
61
1
SOILED DISHTABLE
________
________
62
1
DISPOSER W/SPRAY RINSE
________
________
63
2
EXHAUST DUCT RISER
________
________
64
1
DISHMACHINE W/BOOSTER HEATER
________
________
65
1
MOP SINK
66
1
CLEAN DISHTABLE
________
________
BY MECHANICAL
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling SECTION 11 4000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEMIZED BID FORM
Description
100% CD Documents
Item #
Qty
Remarks
67
1
EYE/FACE WASH STATION
________
________
68
1
HOSE REEL
________
________
69
1
POT & PAN SINK
________
________
70
1
STACKED WASHER/DRYER
BY OWNER/NOT IN SECTION 11 4000
71
8
INSULATED TRANSPORT CABINET
1-EXISTING
Item Cost
________
Total Cost
________
TOTAL $__________
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 122000 - WINDOW TREATMENT 1.5
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. Deliver, store, handle and p rotect p roducts at t he site under provisions of Section 016000.
SECTION INCLUDES
B. Materials s hall b e d elivered to th e s ite in original, unopened packaging with proper labels intact.
A. Conditions of the C ontract ( General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division O ne) a nd t he Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
C. Materials s hall b e s tored i n a cl ean an d d ry ar ea which should be free o f c orrosive fumes, d ust a nd away from construction activities.
B. Roll-Up W indow S hades W ith Blackout Shading Fabric. 1.2
D. Materials shall be stacked horizontally using plastic or w ood s hims s uch t hat drainage and ventilation are p rovided f or, an d s uch t hat w ater can not accumulate in, about or upon the containers.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough C arpentry: wood support blocking.
Concealed
E. Stacks shall be covered w ith ta rpaulins o r p lastic such that ventilation is provided for, and such that contaminants a re p revented f rom contacting surfaces.
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board System: I nterior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.6
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Roofing m ust b e t ight, w indows a nd frames installed, and interior doors hung.
C. Product D ata: P rovide m anufacturer’s data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, and operating features.
C. Ceilings, window pockets, e lectrical a nd mechanical work above the p roduct s hall b e complete.
D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord type and color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: I ndicate special procedures an d p erimeter co nditions requiring special attention.
1.7
B. Installer: C ompany s pecializing in the installation of Products specified in the Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience, and certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Job Mock-Up: P rior to starting window treatment work, in stall o ne ( 1) c omplete v ertical b lind unit; including caulking interior p erimeter w here directed b y t he A rchitect. A rchitect’s r eview and approval w ill b e f or s elected color, installation method a nd w indow c overage. W hen approved, this unit may remain as part of the completed work. WINDOW TREATMENT
S:\11\0122\div2to33\122000CGA.doc
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify a ctual lo cations o f w indow treatment and other construction to which horizontal b linds must fit b y accu rate f ield m easurements before fabrication; s how r ecorded m easurements on final shop drawings. C oordinate f abrication s chedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: C ompany s pecializing i n manufacturing the Products s pecified in this Section with minimum f ive ( 5) y ears d ocumented experience.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Wet w ork; i ncluding co ncrete, m asonry, plaster, sheetrock, s packling, t aping a nd s anding shall be complete and dry.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method o f at tachment, cl earances, an d operation.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s w ritten w arranty u nder provisions of Section 017836. 1. Headrail Lifetime Warranty. B. Warranty: State th at a ll m aterials a nd workmanship provided ar e g uaranteed ag ainst defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or 122000 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
Farmington Elementary School
workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
H. Fabric: Blackout shading f abric s hall b e 1 4 m ils thick P VC c oated f iberglass, to tally o paque, w ith 64 t hreads p er s quare i nch, b reaking s trength of 160 x 140 pou nds a nd w eight of 14 ounces per square y ard. F abric m ust b e m ade o f o nly first quality materials with no pinholes, breaks or cracks and must be washable and colorfast.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS WINDOW SHADES
-
1. Color: A s s elected b y t he A rchitect from manufacturers full color selection.
A. Subject to compliance w ith r equirements, p rovide products from the following manufacturer:
I. Fire R esistance: T he w oven f abrics must ha ve been t ested by a n a pproved l aboratory a nd must meet the minimum requirements established by the National Fire Protection Association Test #701.
1. Ecoshade. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable m anufacturers o ffering equivalent products are:
PART 3 EXECUTION
1. Draper - Flex-Shade Systems. 2. Kirsch Roller Shades. C. Substitutions: U 016000. 2.2
3.1
A. Examine the areas a nd c onditions und er w hich Work o f th is S ection w ill b e p erformed. C orrect conditions detrimental to tim ely a nd p roper completion of t he W ork. D o n ot pr oceed u ntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
nder p rovisions o f S ection
WINDOW SHADE MATERIALS A. Roll-Up W indow S hades: T he manual shade system s hall b e a b all chain operated roller shade system utilizing a bi-directional wrap spring clutch which w ill s moothly r aise a nd lo wer the shade to any desired height with zero slippage. B. Clutch: T he bi-directional wrap spring clutch shall never require any adjustment and may be mounted on either right or left end o f th e r oller tu be w ith fabric forward or reverse rolled. The clutch shall be made of high s trength fiberglass r einforced polyester with high carbon steel springs.
EXAMINATION
B. Ensure s tructural b locking a nd s upports a re correctly placed. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install blinds an d b rackets i n acco rdance w ith manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum V ariation o f G ap at Window O pening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.
C. Control Loop: #10 nickel-plated steel ball chain.
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.
D. End R oller: T wo-piece uni t c onsisting o f a n outside s leeve an d cen ter-bearing shaft m ade o f high s trength f iberglass reinforced polyester. The outside s leeve s hall b e f ree t o r otate o n t he center shaft, providing the bearing s urfaces o n which t he roller rides.
3.4
E. Mounting Brackets: 0.060 i nch g alvanized s teel, inside m ount, w ith th e c lutch o n the right side of the roller.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. WINDOW TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Refer to plan and window elevations.
F. Roller Tube: Enameled roll-formed steel. G. Hem B ar: E ither 1 /8 x 1 inch o r 1 /8 x 1 -1/2 inch extruded aluminum bar depending on size of shade, pocketed in lower end of fabric by thermal seal.
122000 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
END OF SECTION
WINDOW TREATMENT
S:\11\0122\div2to33\122000CGA.doc
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
F. Section 321313 - Exterior Concrete Pavement.
SECTION 310000 - EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
1.3
A. MN/DOT, Minnesota Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction; 2005. Only applicable portions of construction methods and materials apply. References to methods of measurement or payment are not applicable.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Earthwork Operations:
1. MN/DOT 3149 Granular Material
1. Site clearing and grubbing.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
2. Site preparation, protection and special precautions.
1. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2006.
3. Stripping operations and stockpiling of soils to be re-used.
2. ASTM D 75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates; 2009.
4. Importing approved soils for fill. 5. Excavation and removal (off-site) of soils not to be re-used.
3. ASTM D 422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils; 2007.
6. Excavation for pavements; including roadways, parking areas and walkways.
4. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ftlbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2007e1.
7. Excavation for building foundations. 8. Building and site backfilling and soil compaction operations.
5. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2007.
9. Rough grading; including cutting, filling, compaction operations, preparing of subgrade to receive pavements.
6. ASTM D1586- Penetration Test and SplitBarrel Sampling of Soils; 2011.
10. Construction under building floor slabs.
7. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2008.
11. Free-draining, non-frost susceptible granular material for sub-base under buildings and pavement areas.
8. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011.
12. Relocation of existing soils on-site for specific uses; including topsoil, structural fill under building areas, parking lots and roads.
9. ASTM D 2488 - Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure); 2009a.
13. Finish grading; including spreading topsoil. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
10. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2010.
A. Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials. B. Section 015713 - Erosion and Sediment Controls C. Section 024113 - Selective Site Demolition. D. Section 311000 - Site Clearing.
REFERENCES
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of Division One Specifications.
E. Section 321216 - Asphalt Paving. EARTHWORK
310000 - 1 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
are of questionable bearing capacity or deemed unsuitable subsoil over and above the excavation depths indicated within the soils report.
B. Samples: Submit ten (10) pound (4.5 kg) sample of each type of fill to Independent Testing Laboratory, in airtight containers. C. The Owner will provide an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform a sieve analysis and moisture-density tests for each type and source of fill material from samples supplied by the Contractor.
1. Measurement method: By the cubic yard, in place. 2. Includes: Excavating to required elevations, loading and removing from site.
D. Test Reports: Submit Independent Testing Laboratory reports which pertain to testing services performed at the site under the provisions of Division One Specifications. 1.5
E. The Contractor shall submit with Bid a unit price for backfilling with soils which the Geotechnical Engineer deems suitable backfill material for backfilling the excavation of unsuitable subsoil over and above the excavation depths indicated within the soils report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work and disposal of debris in accordance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. All excavations and trenches shall comply with the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Sub-Part B, “Excavations and Trenches.” C. The Contractor is to employ the services of a Registered Land Surveyor, registered in the State of Minnesota, to perform the specified layout work and to prepare a grade verification survey. Refer to Field Quality Control of this section. D. After the date of Substantial Completion and prior to the release of retainage, the Record Drawings shall be transmitted to the Architect/Engineer.
1.6
UNIT PRICES A. See Section 012200 - Unit Prices, for general requirements applicable to unit prices for excavation and backfill. B. Refer to paragraph 2.04 of this Section for procedures in determining the quantities of additional subgrade correction. C. The Contractor shall include in their base bid the subgrade excavation and backfill required based on the excavation depths indicated within the Soils Investigation Report for the quantity of cubic yards of subgrade excavation and cubic yards of granular backfill required under the proposed building addition footprint, including oversizing. D. The Contractor shall submit with Bid a unit price for the excavation of unsuitable soils which the Geotechnical Engineer determines
EARTHWORK
1. Measurement method: By the cubic yard, compacted and in place. 1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall visit the site and review all Drawings, Specifications and Geotechnical report prior to bidding. No additional compensation will be allowed for items that could have been clarified prior to bidding. Requests for clarification shall be submitted two (2) weeks prior to the bid closing date. B. Protection of Persons: The Owner's activities will continue about the site during construction. Install barricade fencing (snow fence), as necessary, to provide a safe environment between construction work and student/ pedestrian circulation. C. Cold Weather Protection: Do not allow frost and snow to occur within materials beneath footings and slabs. Protect the soils to prevent freezing until after footings have been poured and until fill has been placed and compacted. Completely remove frost and snow, if present, before the footings are poured and the underslab fill is placed. D. Existing Utilities: Locate and mark all existing utilities, which are on the site where the Work is to be performed. E. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. F. Protect bench marks and survey control points from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. 310000 - 2 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
G. Protect plants, lawns, equipment, structures, and other features which are in area where Work will be performed and which are to remain. Repair or replace existing property, which is to remain that is damaged by the Work, to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction and at no cost to the Owner.
4. Stockpile topsoil separate from other excavated material. 2.2
A. Insufficient Materials: Provide necessary material from off the site, as approved by the Architect/Engineer and Geotechnical Engineer to complete the Work. The cost of these materials shall be considered part of Base Bid Contract.
H. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
B. Exterior Backfill: Clean, on-site materials obtained from the required stripping, contour cutting and excavation may be used for backfill and grading.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Engineered Fill: Sub-grade material under building, parking lots and driveways shall be granular material. The granular material shall have less than 20 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.
C. Subsoil for Site Grading: Clean, on-site materials obtained from the earthwork operations. D. Under-slab Fill: Obtain from on or off the site as approved by the Laboratory Inspector.
1. Soils with the ASTM classification symbols “SP”, “SW”, “SP-SM” and “SWSM” generally meet these criteria.
E. Fill: Obtain from on or off the site as approved by the Laboratory Inspector. F. Borrow pits: Borrow pits will not be permitted on this project.
B. Sand Cushion: A six (6”) inch sand cushion shall be placed beneath building floor slabs and exterior concrete sidewalk work. The material shall be clean sand (SP) containing less than 20 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Coordinate with Exterior Concrete Pavement Contractor.
G. Disposition of Materials 1. Surplus Earth: Unless designated elsewhere for use or disposal on the Owner's property, surplus earth becomes the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Owner's site. The cost of off-site disposal shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract.
C. Aggregate Base Course: Aggregate base, as specified in 321216, shall be placed under all exterior concrete curbs. D. Sub-Soil: Existing or imported, free of gravel larger than three (3") inches in size, free of debris and organic materials.
2. The Contractor shall not be allowed to take advantage of the stated tolerances by maintaining a consistently high or low elevation.
E. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil shall be the dark brown to black sandy material, if available, stripped from the site. If stripped topsoil is not suitable or sufficient material is not available on the site, provide topsoil from an approved off-site source.
2.3
2. Use topsoil consisting of material removed from the top three (3”) inches to six (6”) inches of soils.
2.4
3. The topsoil shall be free of rocks larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Use topsoil containing no roots, weed clumps or large clods of soil and free of foreign matter. EARTHWORK
ACQUISITION OF MATERIALS
MATERIAL BALANCE A. The Contractor is responsible for determining the quantities of material necessary for completing the Work under this Section. This includes the cost of importing approved fill or exporting excess materials. ADDITIONAL SOILS CORRECTION A. The Owner recognizes that some unforeseen conditions may be encountered during excavation and, therefore, is soliciting unit prices in order to protect the interests of both parties.
310000 - 3 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. Identify known underground, above ground and aerial utilities. Stake and flag utility locations. Protect above and below-grade utilities which are to remain.
B. Additional Soils Correction: The Contractor shall use the geotechnical report in preparing the estimate for soils correction under the building. Should the Contractor be directed by the Geotechnical Engineer to remove additional unsuitable soils under the building or paved areas, which are beyond the excavation depths indicated in the Soils Investigation Report, then the following procedure, shall be implemented. 1. Cease all work and contact the Architect who may request that a surveyor shoot the bottom of the excavation at the elevation called for in the geotechnical report. This is the “before” condition. a. Excavate until the Geotechnical Engineer indicates that suitable subgrade has been reached. b. Request that the surveyor shoot the bottom of the excavation. This is the “after” condition. c. Compensation will be made on the basis of the volume computed between the “before” and “after” surfaces. No compaction factor shall be applied to this volume. d. A unit price shall include additional excavation including disposal of unsuitable soils. e. A unit price shall include additional fill, placed and compacted as specified. f. The unsuitable soils excavated above shall be removed from the site or may be used outside of the building and pavement areas if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer with no additional compensation allowed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Refer to Specification Section 311000 - Site Clearing.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on the Drawings.
EARTHWORK
C. Verify that erosion control devices are in place. D. Verify limits of construction and accurately locate the site boundaries, building perimeter and paved areas. 3.3
PROTECTION A. Protect utilities that remain, from damage. B. Protect trees, plant growth and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, curbs and other items indicated on the Drawings to remain.
3.4
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface (ground) water from flowing into excavations and from flooding the site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 3. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 4. The cost of dewatering shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract. B. Stability of Excavations: 1. Sidewalls of all excavations shall comply with the most current OSHA regulations and applicable local building codes and ordinances. Shore and brace where adequate sloping is not feasible because of space restrictions or stability of material being excavated. 310000 - 4 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
G. Stabilizing Sides of Excavation: Slope the sides of excavations to a safe angle of repose for materials being excavated. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or the stability of the materials being excavated. Maintain the sides of the excavations in a safe condition until the completion of backfilling.
2. Maintain slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. C. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms and bearing surfaces against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit (2 degrees C). 3.5
EXCAVATIONS A. Excavate and remove all soil with organic content within areas of the proposed building and all paving areas. Remove any soft soils that are unsuitable for loads as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. No proposed building footings or slabs-on-grade shall bear on soil with questionable bearing capacity. B. Unauthorized Excavation: The Contractor shall not be permitted to fill the under footings with any other material other than concrete in cases where materials are removed beyond the indicated subgrade elevations without the specific directions of the Architect/Engineer. If excavation is made too deep, it shall be filled with foundation strength concrete to the proper footing elevation at the Contractor's expense. C. Oversize excavations at least two (2') feet plus one (1') foot horizontally from face of building for each one (1') foot of excavation below finish floor grade. D. Excavate to the lines, grades and slopes as indicated on the Drawings. E. Provide temporary drainage where construction interferes with existing drainage. F. Protect and brace existing footings before performing soil corrections within the zone of influence below the existing footings. The zone of influence is defined as the area below a line commencing three (3') feet outside the footing at footing elevation and extending down at a slope of one (1') foot vertical for each foot horizontal. The Contractor shall stop and consult the Geotechnical Engineer and Structural Engineer if it appears that soil correction is required within the zone of influence of the existing footings.
EARTHWORK
3.6
EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS A. Earthwork Procedures for Paved Roadways, Walkways and Parking Areas: 1. Remove pavement and/or strip topsoil from areas not cleared under Section 024113 or Section 311000. This Work shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract. 2. Prior to placing fill materials, proof roll subgrade using a loaded truck or similar equipment to detect soft or loose zones where additional excavation depths may be required. 3. All unsuitable material shall be excavated and removed from pavement areas as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 4. In fill areas, provide granular fill, placed in twelve 12" inch loose layers and compact each layer to 100 percent Standard Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D698, to bring grade up to underside of granular subbase for pavements. 5. Pre-compact entire area to be paved to 100 percent Standard Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D698, just prior to placing stabilized aggregate base for pavements. 6. For roadways and parking areas, refer to Section 321216 for stabilized aggregate base and asphalt pavement. B. Building Floor Slabs and Footings: 1. Remove surface topsoil from building pad areas that was not removed under Site Clearing and Grubbing. No additional compensation will be allowed for this work.
310000 - 5 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. The Contractor shall thoroughly review the Geotechnical Report, Grading Plans, Structural Plans and Specifications to determine depth of excavation and any soils correction required. No additional compensation will be given for work that could have been anticipated by reviewing the above documents. 3. The soil corrections shall conform to the requirements of the soils report and the onsite observations of actual conditions made by the Independent Testing Agency. The Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect footing excavation bottoms. The contractor shall comply with the required corrective procedures to obtain satisfactory footing excavation bottoms. 4. The exposed subgrade soils shall be tested by the Independent Testing Agency. Remove and replace unsuitable soils as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. No additional compensation will be allowed for exporting or importing of soils. 5. The compacted building pad area shall be brought to true even plane to the base of the sand cushion elevation. 3.7
BACKFILLING PROCEDURES A. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, foundation dampproofing and protective cover. B. Slope grade away from building minimum two (2") inches in ten (10') feet, unless noted otherwise.
3.8
SITE GRADING A. Rough Grading: Grade subsoil to a minimum elevation six (6") inches below finish grade. Soil most suitable for lawns shall be spread as top layer. Rough grading shall include spreading the material on the site smoothly and evenly with a dozer or equal equipment, leaving it similar to back dragging with a dozer. B. Finish Grading: Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of six (6") inches and spread seed or apply sod. Refer to Landscape Plan for seed and sod limits.
C. Compaction: Compact subsoil and topsoil as necessary to prevent settlement without inhibiting vertical drainage and subsequent turf establishment. If over-compaction occurs, the Contractor may be required to scarify soil and reblade. The depth of the topsoil shall be measured after compaction. 3.9
COMPACTED FILL A. Prior to the placement of fill, the Geotechnical Engineer must inspect and approve the bottom or bearing surface of each excavation. Once approved, the exposed surfaces shall be scarified to a depth of not less than six (6") inches and then compacted to at least 100 percent Standard Proctor Density. B. Before placing fill on a slope greater than five (5) horizontally to one (1) vertically (5:1), the Contractor shall, at their option: (a) flatten the existing slope to the extent that it will not be steeper than 5:1; or (b) construct steps in the slope, with the back surface being as nearly vertical as practicable and with the horizontal cuts being made as close together as the slope permits, but with no step being less than ten (10') feet in width. C. Fill shall not be placed on frozen ground, nor shall filling operations continue when the temperature is such as to permit the layer under placement to freeze. D. Deposit approved fill in uniform layers not exceeding eight (8") inches (loose) thickness. Compact each layer with approved methods and equipment. E. The fill material, when being compacted, shall contain the moisture content necessary for the required compaction as designated by the Geotechnical Engineer. The soil shall be moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. The moisture shall be uniform throughout each layer. F. Scarify, remove, recompact or otherwise rectify all soft or yielding areas resulting from construction operations, rain or other sources at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.10 COMPACTION DENSITY REQUIREMENTS A. Compaction of all fill and backfill shall meet or exceed the following percentages of Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698): 1. 100 percent below footings.
EARTHWORK
310000 - 6 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. 95 percent below building floor slabs. 3. 95 percent below steps and exterior slabs on grade. 4. 95 percent for backfill placed more than three (3') feet below final pavement subgrades. 5. 100 percent for backfill within upper three (3') feet of final pavement subgrades. 6. 90 percent below landscape areas. B. Tests falling below the specified density shall be cause for rejection and will require further compacting or removal and recompacting at the Contractor's expense until the Specification requirements are met. Each lift must be approved before commencing with the next succeeding lift. 3.11 ROUGH GRADING A. The grades shown on the Drawings are proposed finish grades. The Contractor shall grade to the prescribed subgrade elevations except in landscaped areas, which shall be graded to finish grade with approved topsoil. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining quantities of fill and waste materials to be handled and for amount of grading to be done in order to completely perform all work indicated on the Drawings. The costs of importing fill and/or exporting excess materials from the site shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract. C. Provide surfaces free of debris and building materials. Complete rough grading by blading to reasonably smooth contours with neat, uniform transitions and slopes. Remove stones over two (2") inches diameter, branches and other vegetation. Ease new grades into surrounding existing grades without awkward or abrupt transitions. D. All surfaces shall be finished to such contour that they will not impound surface water. 1. Rough grade tolerances are as follows: a. Unpaved areas outside buildings: Not more than twotenths (0.20') feet above or below finish grade elevations shown on the drawings.
EARTHWORK
b.
Building and paved areas: Surfaces shall not vary by more than five one-hundredths (0.05') foot above or one-tenth (0.10') foot below the subgrade elevations referenced to herein.
E. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances. 3.12 SUB-GRADE TREATMENT A. Compact and shape the subgrade for its entirety as may be necessary to produce, at the time base is placed, the specified density and stability in the top twelve (12") inches of the subgrade and the grades indicated on the Drawings. B. The subgrade shall be compacted with approved equipment to a minimum relative density of 100 percent Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). C. All building areas and areas to be paved shall be brought to within five one-hundredths (0.05) feet of subgrade elevations and cross sections. D. The required subgrade stability shall be such that during placement of the base, rutting and displacement does not occur. Maximum yield: One (1") inch (measured from the top of the constructed subgrade to the bottom of the rut). E. All proposed pavement subgrades shall be test rolled in accordance with MN/DOT 2111. immediately prior to placement of aggregate base course. F. If test rolling shows any area to be unstable, the Contractor shall, at their expense, scarify the area and aerate or add moisture to the soil as necessary, and recompact the soil to the extent it will be stable when retested by rolling. G. All pavement areas shall be test rolled in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.
310000 - 7 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. Retain the services of a Registered Land Surveyor to prepare a grade verification survey as required in Part 1 General - 1.5 Quality Assurance. This surveyor shall check the subbase elevation after the utilities are installed. 1. Centerline of streets and drives at fifty (50') foot intervals and slope change locations. 2. Parking lots on a seventy-five (75') foot grid and slope change locations. 3. Landscape areas on a seventy-five (75') foot grids and slope change locations. 4. The surveyor shall supply a letter certifying that the grades are within the specified tolerance range. C. Field-testing and inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Division One Specifications. D. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe those items not specifically required by Minnesota State Building Code, but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. E. Verify that footing bearing surfaces comply with frost depth requirements and report variances in a timely manner. F. Classification of materials used and encountered during construction will be performed in accordance with ASTM D2488 and D2487. 1. Inspect each footing and slab subgrade to determine if subgrade materials are acceptable. Perform hand auger borings, soil classifications and dynamic cone penetrometer tests to verify if designbearing capacity is achieved.
G. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall advise the Owner, Contractor and Architect/Engineer of any materials or operation that in their professional opinion will not produce the specified results. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall perform the following: 1. Observe and evaluate the soil conditions at the bottom of all excavations, determine limits of excavation where applicable and evaluate and document depth and width. 2. Perform analysis for on-site and borrow soils for suitability as backfill. 3. Observe, evaluate and report contractor's operations within context of soil limitations and project requirements. 4. Perform density tests on compacted backfill materials. 5. Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938. 6. Observe all subgrades and excavation bases below footings and slabs before further construction is performed. 7. Document presence of ground water within excavations. Verify cut and fill slopes as specified in the Contract Documents. H. If tests indicate that the Work does not meet the specified requirements, remove the Work, replace and retest at no cost to the Owner. I. Frequency of Tests:
2. Inspect, test and approve excavated soils to be used as backfill materials under buildings and site improvements.
1. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct at least one (1) test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
3. Inspect and test backfill operations to insure acceptability of materials being placed, method of placement, thickness of layers and compaction of backfill.
2. Compaction tests of subgrade shall be made at maximum horizontal intervals of fifty 50 feet in each direction, or as directed by Architect/Engineer.
4. Inspect and test backfill operations along foundation walls to insure acceptability of materials being placed and compacted so that settlement will not occur. EARTHWORK
310000 - 8 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3. Compaction tests of in-place backfill materials shall be made at a maximum vertical interval of twelve 12" inches, and maximum horizontal intervals of fifty 50' feet in each direction, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
EARTHWORK
310000 - 9 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
D. Comply with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Remove trees, underbrush, undesirable growths, stumps, roots, etc. from the area to the limits indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and as required to meet the contract documents. C. Site clearing operations:
C. Protection of Persons: The Owner's activities will continue about the site during construction. Install barricade fencing (snow fence), as necessary, to provide a safe environment between construction work and pedestrian circulation.
1. Selective site clearing and grubbing of trees and brush. 2. Selective tree removal and trimming. 3. Stripping topsoil. 4. Stockpiling of topsoil.
D. Existing Utilities: Locate and mark all existing utilities that are on the site where the Work is to be performed. Refer to Division One Specifications for other information.
5. Tree pruning and trimming. D. Special precautions. 1. Dewatering.
E. Benchmarks and Monuments: Maintain benchmarks and monuments existing on the site.
E. Clearing and protection of vegetation. F. Removal of existing debris. 1.2
F. Protection of Existing Property to Remain: Protect existing plants, equipment and structures that are in the area where the Work will be performed and which are to remain. Repair or replace existing property that is to remain that is damaged by the work, to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction and at no cost to the Owner.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 015713 - Erosion and Sediment Controls B. Section 024113 - Selective Site Demolition C. Section 310000 - Earthwork
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work and disposal of debris in accordance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this section. C. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity and number to accomplish the Work in a timely manner.
SITE CLEARING
PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on the Drawings.
3.2
EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. 311000 - 1 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
E. Remove timber, stumps, roots and other debris or by-products resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations from the site. If any wood is run through a chipping machine, the wood chips shall be immediately recovered and disposed of off the site.
B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
F. Grubbing operations shall consist of removing and disposing of the stumps, roots and other remains in the construction area in their entirety.
1. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, curbs and other items indicated on the Drawings to remain. E. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated on the Drawings or as necessary to facilitate new construction. 3.3
3.5
A. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain:
PROTECTION
B. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site.
A. Protect trees, plant growth and features designated to remain as final landscaping. 3.4
1. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surface neat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and Grubbing: The entire area within the limit lines described above shall be cleared and grubbed. Remove all vegetation, trees, brush, stumps, etc. from the area. All debris from this operation shall be disposed of off the Owner's property. B. Selective clearing shall be done in areas designated by the Architect/Engineer. Selective clearing shall consist of removing vegetation, brush, stumps, etc. from the area. Selected trees shall be left standing and care shall be taken to protect trees designated to remain. All debris from this operation shall be disposed of off the Owner's property. Grubbing will not be required in areas designated for selective clearing. C. Cutting and removing trees, shrubs, bushes, windfall and other vegetation: Cut brush within six (6") inches of the ground surface. Remove, as directed, any low hanging, unsound or unsightly branches on the trees and shrubs designated to remain. D. Remove and dispose of stumps, roots and other remains. Remove stumps completely. Except in areas to be excavated, backfill depressions resulting from the grubbing operations with suitable material and compact to the specified requirements.
VEGETATION
C. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. 3.6
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface (ground) water from flowing into excavations and from flooding the site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 3. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to legal collection or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 4. The cost of dewatering shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3.7
DEBRIS A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Burning of debris is not permitted on the Owner's property. C. Remove all waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from the Owner's property. D. The cost of disposal of waste materials is considered part of the Base Bid Contract. E. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. F. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3 of 3 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4. ASTM D 2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of NonAbsorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures; 2011.
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
5. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2010.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
C. MN/DOT, Minnesota Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction 2005. Only applicable portions of construction methods and materials apply. References to methods of measurement or payment are not applicable.
B. Asphalt concrete paving above aggregate/reclaimed base course; as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, and complete with all accessories. C. Aggregate/reclaimed base course.
1. MN/Dot 2360 - Plant Mixed Asphalt Pavement
D. Bituminous tack coat E. Asphalt concrete paving; wear course and non-wearing course surfaces.
2. MN/DOT 2357 - Bituminous Tack Coat 3. MN/DOT 3138 - Aggregate for Surface and Base Courses
1. Parking lot pavement. 2. Driveway pavement.
4. MN/DOT 3139 - Graded Aggregate for Bituminous Mixtures
F. Paint striping and logos. 1.2
5. MN/DOT 3151 - Bituminous Material
RELATED SECTIONS
D. All Materials and Products Used Shall Comply With Minnesota Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.
A. Section 024113 - Selective Site Demolition. B. Section 311000 - Site Clearing. C. Section 311111 - Earthwork. D. Section 321313 - Exterior Concrete Pavement. E. Section 329000 - Landscaping. 1.3
REFERENCES A. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types; The Asphalt Institute; 1994, Sixth Edition. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2006. 2. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2007. 3. ASTM D 2172 - Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen From Bituminous Paving Mixtures; 2011.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: In addition to other specified conditions, comply with the following minimum requirements: 1. Subcontractor's Qualifications: The construction of bituminous paving, including the stabilized aggregate base, shall be done by a responsible Paving Subcontractor having the necessary equipment, plant and experience to perform the work. B. Governing Codes: The Work of this section occurring on public property shall be constructed in accordance with the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority having jurisdiction. All work required to be constructed by regulatory authorities in a manner differing from the Contract Documents shall be considered part of the Base Bid Contract. C. Grade Verification:
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
1. Refer to Part 1.5 and 3.12 of this Section. 321216 - 1 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1.5
SUBMITTALS
4. Paving shall not take place when, in the opinion of the Independent Testing Laboratory, the weather or surface conditions are considered unfavorable.
A. Submit under the provisions of Division One Specifications. 1. Samples: Submit ten (10) pound (4.5 kg) sample of aggregate base and reclaimed course material to the Independent Testing Laboratory.
B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown and cross-slope, for each course during construction operations.
2. Samples: Submit thirty-five (35) pound (4.5 kg) sample of asphalt concrete paving materials and asphalt mix design to the Independent Testing Laboratory.
C. Traffic Control: 1. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic during paving operations as required for other construction activities.
3. Certificates: The Contractor and the Asphalt Concrete Producer shall jointly provide certificates certifying that materials comply with the specification requirements. 4. Job Mix Design: The bituminous mix plant shall have on file a report prepared by an approved testing laboratory that indicates the proportions of materials used in each type of bituminous courses being provided and the temperature of the mix. The job mix design shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance prior to placing the bituminous mix. B. The Contractor is to employ the services of a Registered Land Surveyor to perform the specified layout work and to prepare a grade verification survey. The grade verification shall be submitted prior to project close out. 1.6
SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: 1. Apply bituminous tack coat only when the ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees C), and when the temperature has not been below 35 degrees Fahrenheit (2 degrees C) for twelve (12) hours immediately prior to application. 2. Do not apply materials when the base surface is wet or contains an excess of moisture which would prevent uniform distribution and the required penetration. 3. Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees C), when the underlying base is dry and when weather is not rainy.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
2. Provide flag men, barricades, warning signs and warning lights for the movement of traffic and safety and to cause the least interruption of the Work. 3. When working in public right-of-way, the Contractor is responsible for all traffic control and permit requirements. No additional compensation will be allowed to provide these services. 1.7
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Mix Criteria: 1. Provide mix formulas to the Architect/Engineer for each required asphalt-aggregate mixture. 2. Establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size, a single percentage of asphalt cement to be added to aggregate, and a single temperature at which asphalt concrete is to be produced. 3. Comply with the mix requirements of the Minnesota Department of Transportation (MN/DOT) standards. 4. Maintain material quantities within allowable tolerances of the governing standards. B. Prepare and keep on file the mix formula for each course. C. The subgrade shall be tested and approved by the Independent Testing Laboratory immediately prior to placement of the base course.
321216 - 2 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
A. Bituminous Tack Coat: The bituminous tack coat shall be RC liquid asphalt or emulsified asphalt. The tack coat shall meet the requirements of MN/DOT Specification 2357.
D. The Contractor will be responsible for all drainage of the finish surface. Any “bird baths” will be considered unacceptable and shall be remedied by the Contractor at their expense to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. 1.8
B. Bituminous Material for mix shall meet the requirements of MN/DOT 3151, PG (Performance Grade) 58-28 for all non-wear virgin and recycled non-wear or wear and PG 64-28 for all virgin mix wearing courses.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Design Requirements: 1. Pavement section for work in public right of way: Contractor shall match existing pavement cross section. Follow all City of Farmington standards and specifications when working in public right of way.
C. Non-wear Course Mix: MN/DOT 2360, Type SP; thickness indicated on System Description 1.8. 1. Mixture shall conform to current MN/DOT requirements.
2. Heavy Duty Pavements: Design consists of minimum eight (8") inch thick aggregate base course, a minimum two (2") inch thick asphalt non-wear course, and a minimum two (2") inch thick asphalt wear course. 3. Light Duty Pavements: Design consists of minimum six (6") inch thick aggregate base course, a minimum two (2") inch thick asphalt non-wear course, and a minimum one and one-half (1-1/2") inch thick asphalt wear course.
D. Wear Course Mix: MN/DOT 2360, Type SP; thickness indicated on System Description 1.8. 1. Mixture shall conform to current MN/DOT requirements. 2.3
A. Graded aggregates shall conform to MN/DOT 2360. B. Gradation shall conform to: 1. Non-wear Course: MN/DOT 2360, Gradation #3.
4. Concrete Curb and Gutter: Refer to plan detail. 1.9
2. Wear Course: MN/DOT 2360, Gradation #4.
WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year written warranty under the provisions of Division One Specifications.
2.4
2.1
AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALS A. Stabilized Aggregate Base: Aggregate shall meet the requirements of MN/DOT Specification 3138, gradation Class 5 or Class 7, 100 percent crushed. B. Aggregate Base Material is to be placed under the bituminous parking lots and drives where applicable and concrete curb and gutter.
2.2
ASPHALT CONCRETE MATERIALS
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide mix design for asphalt under the provisions of Division One Specifications.
B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced by the Contractor at their expense. PART 2 PRODUCTS
GRADED AGGREGATES FOR BITUMINOUS MIXTURES
B. Submit proposed aggregate base and mix design of each class of mix for review and approval prior to commencement of the Work. C. Test samples in accordance with A1 MS-2. 2.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ASPHALT MARKING PAINT A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. J.E. Bauer Company - “Traffic Paint.” 2. Tnemec - “Traffic Paint.” 3. Glidden-Durkee “Romark Traffic.” 4. PPG - “Traffic & Zone Marking Paint.” 321216 - 3 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
C. Remove loose and foreign material from compacted subbase surfaces immediately before paving application. Do not disturb subbase material.
B. Substitutions: Under the provisions of Division One Specifications. 2.6
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. Provide paint striping and handicap logos as indicated on the Drawings.
3.4
A. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed portland cement concrete surfaces and similar surfaces.
B. Provide paint specifically formulated for use as exterior pavement marking paint in traffic areas, and white in color, selected by the from the manufacturer's standard color range, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Apply at rate of five-hundredths (0.05) to fifteen-hundredths (0.15) gallons per square yard of surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
C. Apply tack coat by brush to contact surfaces of concrete curbs, gutters, manholes and other structures projecting into or abutting asphalt concrete pavement.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that gradients and elevations of subgrade are correct. C. Aggregate base is to be placed under the concrete curb and gutter by the Asphaltic Concrete Paving Contractor. Coordinate all work with the Exterior Concrete Pavement Contractor.
3.2
GEOFABRIC A. Geofabric is to be placed under all light-duty and heavy-duty pavement areas. B. Geofabric shall be installed after the subgrade has been brought to grade, scarified and recompacted. C. Place geofabric on finished subgrade, overlapping seams one (1') foot (305 mm). D. Traffic shall not be allowed on the bare geofabric.
3.3
SURFACE PREPARATION A. Proof roll all prepared subgrades using a heavy, rubber-tired roller. (Amount of allowable yielding shall be one (1") inch maximum) The proof rolling must be observed by the Testing Laboratory Inspector. 1. Check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. B. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
TACK COAT:
D. Allow surfaces to dry until material is at condition of tackiness and ready to receive pavement. 3.5
AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT A. Subgrade: The area to be paved shall be graded to the elevation of the underside of the stabilized base. Pre-compact soils beneath the stabilized base to 100 percent of Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). Recompact as necessary to provide the specified density for the subgrade. B. Aggregate trucks shall not be allowed to drive on the stabilized base and geofabric until the first layer is placed and compacted as specified below. The aggregate/reclaimed material shall be pushed from previously constructed areas onto the geofabric. C. Remove all castings set by others that are within the paving area and replace with metal covers. The castings shall be reset as outlined below. D. Spread aggregate/reclaimed base over prepared base to a total compacted thickness as indicated on the System Descriptions 1.8. E. Place aggregate/reclaimed base in maximum three (3") inch layers and roller compact. F. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated on the Drawings. G. Compact placed aggregate/reclaimed materials to achieve compaction to 100 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698. 321216 - 4 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
3.6
H. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.
2. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as adjacent sections of asphalt concrete course.
I. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate/reclaimed material and aerate to reduce moisture content.
3. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt or other objectionable material and apply tack coat.
J. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
4. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than five (5') feet.
PLACING THE MIX - DOUBLE COURSE
5. Cut back edge of previously placed course to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness.
A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surfaces, spread and strike-off using paving machine.
6. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses no less than six (6") inches.
B. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand.
7. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed, or inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory section to expose as even, vertical surface for the full course thickness.
C. Place each course at thickness so that when compacted it will conform to the indicated grade, cross-section, finish thickness and density indicated. D. Pavement Placing: 1. Unless otherwise directed, begin placing non-wear course at high side of section on one-way slope. 2. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips. 3. Complete non-wear courses for a section before placing wearing courses. 4. Place mixture in continuous operation as practicable. 5. Place tack coat before placing wear course. 6. Non-wear course shall be swept as required before placing wear course. E. Hand Placed: 1. Spread, tamp and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible, as acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Place mixture at a rate that will ensure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature. F. Joints: 1. Gradually make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive day's work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
3.7
COMPACTING THE MIX A. Provide sufficient number of rollers to obtain the required pavement density of 92 percent of the maximum theoretical density. B. Begin rolling operations as soon after placing mix when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement. C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers, to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set. D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. E. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs. F. Do not roll centers of section first under any circumstances. G. Breakdown Rolling: 1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge. 2. Operate rollers as close as possible to the paving machine without causing pavement displacement. 3. Check crown, grade and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 321216 - 5 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling. H. Second Rolling: 1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction. 2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. I. Patching: 1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. 3. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 4. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 5. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. 6. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete mixture. 3.8
MANHOLE AND GATE VALVE PROTECTION A. Cover manholes, catch basins and gate valves lying within the surface to be sealed to as to prohibit the bituminous material from being placed thereon. B. Clean the surface of these structures following the application of the cover aggregate.
3.9
TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of one-fourth (1/4") inch measured with a ten (10') foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within one-fourth (1/4") inch. C. Variation from True Elevation: Within onefourth (1/4") inch.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
3.10 LANE STRIPING AND HANDICAPPED MARKINGS A. Lane and parking lot striping shall not be preformed until the excess oils in the new asphalt paving have dissipated, allowing a better bond between the paint and asphalt pavement. The Contractor shall wait a minimum of 2 weeks after the asphalt pavement has been installed before placing the striping. B. Cleaning: Sweep the surface with a power broom, supplemented by hand brooms, to remove loose material and dirt. C. Markings: The lines shall be four (4”) inches wide. The parking stalls shall be the width called for on the Drawings and a minimum of eighteen (18') feet in length. Paint the International Wheelchair Symbol of Accessibility in each handicapped parking stall. The painted symbol on the pavement shall be in accordance with the state code requirements. D. Application: Apply the paint with mechanical equipment. Provide uniform straight edges. Apply two (2) separate coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended rates. 3.11 ADJUSTING CASTINGS A. Castings shall be raised after the bituminous base course is placed and prior to installing the wear course. B. The bituminous base shall be saw cut around the cover plate. The bituminous aggregate and cover plate shall be removed. C. The casting shall be set to final grade using adjusting rings and mortar. No blocks will be allowed. D. The aggregate base shall be placed to the design depth around the casting. The bituminous patch mix shall be placed and tamped around the casting to bring the grade up to the surface of the bituminous base.
321216 - 6 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
E. The final grade of castings in paved areas shall be one-fourth (1/4") inch to one-half (1/2") inch below the top of the completed wear course. The castings shall be set to the contour of the finished surface so that the required tolerance is uniform around the circumference of the casting. The one-fourth (1/4") inch to one-half (1/2") inch tolerance shall be measured at the immediate edge of the casting and no “straightedge” measurements shall be accepted. A plywood template, one-half (1/2") inch thick, shall be fastened to the top of all non-adjustable castings during placing and rolling of the wear course to ensure that the required tolerances are met. F. All final adjustments to the adjustable castings shall be made by means of the casting adjustment bolts. G. All castings, which do not meet the required tolerances, shall be removed and re-adjusted at the Contractor's expense. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing and inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Division One Specifications.. B. An Owner hired testing laboratory shall perform tests as indicated below. 1. Perform one sieve analysis on the aggregate/reclaimed base in accordance with ASTM C136 for every 1000 tons of aggregate/reclaimed base or a minimum of one test. 2. Visually field verify by test rolling and take two field density tests in accordance to ASTM D-1556 or D2922 for every 250 tons of aggregate base placed or a minimum of four tests. 3. Perform a minimum of two bituminous mix verification tests, one for the non-wear course and one for the wear course in accordance with ASTM C136, ASTM D2172 and ASTM D2726.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
4. Perform a minimum of one field density test on the bituminous paving by taking four (4") inch diameter core samples for every 200 tons or less of bituminous pavement per course to determine the thickness and field density of cores in accordance with ASTM D2726. For larger projects, perform a minimum of two tests for every 500 tons of bituminous pavement placed plus 2 tests every 500 tons thereafter. a. Density: Minimum acceptable density of in-place material is 95 percent of the recorded laboratory specimen density Marshall Design. 1) Asphalt paving densities below 95% may be accepted by owner. A reduction in payment and an extended warranty based upon failed test results may be negotiated with owner. Owner has option of removing all failing bituminous material and replacement at no additional cost to owner or owner's representatives. b. Thickness: The in-place compacted thickness of the bituminous cores will not be acceptable and will be cause for rejection and replacement of the bituminous pavement if exceeding the following allowable variation from thickness specified herein. 1) Non-wear course: Plus or minus one-fourth (±1/4") inch. 2) Wear course: Plus or minus one-fourth (±1/4") inch. 3) The overall thickness of all lifts shall not be less than three-eighths (3/8") inch of the total thickness specified.
321216 - 7 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
Aggregate Base Course: Plus or minus one-half (±1/2") inch. 5) The bituminous pavement thickness indicated is the minimum thickness. No additional payment will be given for pavement that exceeds the indicated thickness. 6) Where the average thickness of the bituminous cores is more than or equal to one-half (1/2") inch less than the minimum indicated, the Owner may elect not to accept the bituminous pavement. If the pavement is accepted by the Owner, payment will be at a reduced price that is proportional to the core thickness placed verse the minimum plan thickness indicated and will require a negotiated Owner/Contractor extended warranty. Repair holes from test specimens as specified for patching defective work. 4)
c.
C. Surface Smoothness: 1. The Contractor shall provide final surfaces of uniform texture, conforming to the required grades and cross-sections. Visually observe surface smoothness of finished surface. The finished surface shall be free of segregated, open and torn sections and shall be smooth and true to grade and cross section as shown on the Drawings. 2. Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using a ten (10') foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles in centerline of paved areas.
b.
inch in ten (10') feet. Surface Course: Threesixteenth (3/16") inch in ten (10') feet.
D. Flood Test: 1. After completion, flood the entire asphalt concrete paved area with water by use of a tank truck or hoses. 2. If a depression is found where water ponds to a depth of more than one-eighth (1/8") inch in six (6') feet , fill areas or otherwise correct to provide proper drainage. 3. Feather and smooth the edges of fill so that the joint between the fill and the original surface is invisible. E. Grade Verification of Aggregate/Reclaimed Base: A grade verification survey shall be performed after the aggregate/reclaimed base has been installed. This should be on the same grid system as specified in Section 310000 - Earthwork Part 3.13. The surveyor shall issue a letter certifying that the grades are within the specified tolerances. F. Grade Verification of Bituminous Pavement: A grade verification survey shall be performed after the final lift of bituminous pavement has been completed. This will be on the same grid system as the grade verification of aggregate/reclaimed base. The surveyor shall issue a letter certifying that the grades are within the specified tolerances. G. If tests indicate that the Work does not meet the specified requirements, remove the Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.13 CLEANING A. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. B. When marking paint is thoroughly dry, visually inspect the entire applications, and: 1. Touch up paint as required to provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout.
3. Check surfaced areas at intervals as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 4. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following: a. Base Course: One-fourth (1/4") ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 8 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
2. Using a permanently opaque paint identical in color to the surface on which the paint was applied, block out and eliminate all traces of splashed, tracked and/or spilled pavement marking paint from the background surfaces. 3.14 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all adjacent concrete surfaces from chipping and damage during the asphalt pavement placement. B. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining or discoloration during placement of asphalt materials or vehicle trucking during construction. C. Immediately after placement of asphalt paving, provide traffic cones, barricades and other devices needed to protect pavement and marking paint from mechanical injury for a minimum of seven (7) days.
END OF SECTION
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 9 of 9 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 321313 - EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Exterior Concrete Pavement Systems Above Base Course; as Indicated on The Drawings, Specified Herein, and Complete With All Accessories. C. Granular Base Under Exterior Concrete Sidewalk Work is Specified Under the Provisions of Section 310000. D. Exterior Concrete Work: 1. Concrete curb and gutter. 2. Aprons and Driveway slabs. 3. Sidewalks. 4. Concrete pavement. 5. Pedestrian curb ramps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 310000 - Earthwork. B. Section 321216 - Asphalt Concrete Paving. C. Section 079005 - Joint Sealers.
1.3
REFERENCES A. MN/DOT, Minnesota Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction 2005 Edition. Only applicable portions of construction methods and materials apply. References to methods of measurement or payment are not applicable. 1. MN/DOT 2301 Concrete Pavement 2. MN/DOT 2521 Walks 3. MN/DOT 2531 Concrete Curbing B. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. F. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, American Concrete Institute; 1990 (Reapproved 2002). G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001(Reapproved 2008). H. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, American Concrete Institute; 2005. I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2008. J. ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2010. K. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011. L. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2012. M. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012. N. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate; 2006. O. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2010a. P. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011. Q. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. R. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 2010. S. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for AirEntraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. T. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. U. ASTM C 1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete; 2010a. 321313 - 1 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
V. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004(2008). 1.4
1.6
A. Perform the Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all Work.
SUBMITTALS
C. Work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of MN/DOT Specification Nos. 2301 Concrete Pavement, 2521 Walks, and 2531 Concrete Curbing.
A. Submit under the provisions of Division One Specifications. B. The independent testing laboratory will submit concrete compression tests, entrained air test, and slump test reports.
D. The Owner shall employ the services of an independent testing lab to perform the specified field quality control.
C. Delivery Tickets: Submit one copy to Architect indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump and time of batching for each load delivered.
E. Quality Control: 1. Do not commence placement of concrete until mix design has been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer and until copies are at the jobsite, the batch plant and the building inspection department.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on joint filler and curing compounds. E. Test Reports and Mix Designs: Contractor shall submit mix designs and aggregate test reports, directly from testing laboratory. Submit mix designs and aggregate test reports at least 14 days prior to placing. Do not place concrete until the Architect/Engineer has reviewed mix designs and aggregate test reports. Mix identification designation. 1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Protection: Place and protect concrete in accordance with ACI 306, and the following: 1. When mean daily temperature is 40ºF or lower, provide suitable protection for concrete work as required to maintain minimum concrete temperature of 50ºF for five (5) days, or 70ºF for three (3) days. a. So as to avoid thermal shock to the finished work, following protection period, do not allow concrete to cool more than 20ºF each successive day. B. Hot Weather Protection: Place and protect concrete in accordance with ACI 305. Employ suitable means to prevent too-rapid drying. Shade fresh concrete as soon as is possible without marring surface. C. Wet Weather Protection: Do not place concrete in rain, sleet, or snow, without providing adequate protection.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered to the Project. Information on each ticket shall be as follows: 1. Name of ready-mix batch plant. 2. Ticket number 3. Date. 4. Truck number. 5. Project name and location. 6. Type of concrete (mix number). 7. Amount of concrete. 8. Weights of all ingredients. 9. Time loaded or time of first mixing. 10. Maximum aggregate size. 11. Type, brand, and amount of admixtures. 12. Total water in the batch and maximum amount of water that can be added at the site without exceeding design mix proportions. 13. Amount of water added at site and initials of person adding water. B. The Contractor shall retain delivery tickets for the duration of construction. 321313 - 2 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1.8
D. An air entraining admixture, conforming to ASTM C260, shall be used for all concrete.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of exterior concrete work and other construction to which concrete work must fit, by accurate field measurements before installation. Show recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. B. The Contractor is to employ the services of a registered land surveyor to perform the specified layout work.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year written warranty under the provisions of Division One Specifications. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily required or replaced by the Contractor at their expense. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS A. Cement 1. Cement for normal weight structural concrete: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Use only one type and brand of Portland Cement for all exposed concrete. Architect's permission is required to change brands. B. Aggregates 1. Fine and coarse aggregates for normal weight structural and non-structural concrete: ASTM C33. 2. Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be ¾” for all concrete. (except exposed aggregate) 3. Limits for deleterious substances and physical properties of coarse aggregate for concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, 3/4", Class 4S. C. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
E. Reinforcement 1. Synthetic Micro Fiber Reinforcing: 100% virgin polyolefin (polypropylene or polyethylene), fibrillated, graded or minimum ¾" uniform length, ICC approved, ASTM C1116, Type III. Fibermesh 300: Propex Concrete Systems, Grace Fibers: W.R. Grace, and approved equal. 2.2
ACCESSORIES A. Curing Materials 1. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, waterproof paper or polyethylene film. 2. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B. B. Form Release Agent: Commercial product to facilitate stripping without staining or damaging concrete or impairing future concrete treatment. C. Expansion Joint and Isolation Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, performed, resilient, nonextruding, asphalt impregnated joint filler, 1/2" thick unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide granular cushion material under all other exterior concrete work as specified under the provisions of Section 310000. E. Provide stabilized aggregate base under all concrete pavements and concrete curb and gutter as specified under the provisions of Section 321216 Asphalt Concrete Paving. F. Pavement Joint Sealing Compound: 1. Sealant and Joint Backing: Types specified under the provisions of Section 079200. 2. Polyurethane based concrete joint sealer. 3. Joint Backing: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Evaporation Retardants 1. An evaporation-retarding agent may be used during the concrete finishing operation to control plastic cracking of the fresh concrete.
321313 - 3 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. Form Coating Material: Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface the surface of the concrete.
2. Acceptable materials are: a. “Confilm”, by Master Builders b. “Eucobar”, by Euclid Chemical Co. 2.3
C. Side forms shall have a height at least equal to the edge thickness of concrete being formed.
PRODUCTS A. Concrete Walks: MN/DOT Spec 2521.2, as detailed and dimensioned on the Drawings.
D. Flexible or curved forms shall be used on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less.
B. Concrete Curbs/Gutters: MN/DOT Spec 2531, as detailed and dimensioned on the Drawings.
E. Face forms for curbing shall conform to the shape and design of the curb. 2.6
C. Exterior on-grade Concrete Pavement: MN/Dot Spec 2301, as detailed and dimensioned on the Drawings. 2.4
A. Provide concrete mix design under the provisions of Division One Specifications B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work.
CONCRETE MIXES A. Provide mixes meeting the following minimum requirements. Submit concrete mix design for each type of concrete. Mix designs must be reviewed prior to pouring concrete. Review is for conformance with specification requirements only. Contractor is responsible for performance.
C. Provide an independent testing laboratory to perform the following: 1. At the beginning of the concrete operations for the project and for each 1,000 yards of concrete delivered to the project, test the fine and coarse aggregate gradation in accordance with ASTM C136 for conformance with this specification.
1. 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4" Class 4S (1/2” for exposed aggregate concrete).
2. Verify that the concrete supplied meets the mix design requirements.
3. Maximum Slump: 4".
3. Submit test results to the Architect/Engineer.
4. Air Content ASTM C231: 6% ±11/2%.(7% ±1-1/2% for exposed aggregate concrete) 5. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.40 for steel reinforced concrete and 0.45 for fiber reinforced or unreinforced concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
C. Provide concrete with workability such that it will fill the forms, without voids or honeycombs, when properly vibrated, without permitting materials to separate or excess water to collect on the surface.
B. Verify compacted granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
FORM MATERIALS A. The forms shall be of metal, wood or other suitable material, and shall be capable of sustaining the concrete in its proper position until set. Do not use aluminum materials in contact with concrete. Concrete form materials must be used in a manner to provide the surface finish specified.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94.
2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.2
AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT A. Spread aggregate base, at curb and gutter sections and all other areas indicated on the Drawings, over prepared base to a total compacted thickness as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 321216. 321313 - 4 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
B. Place aggregate or granular base in maximum three (3") inch layers and roller compact.
3.5
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated on the Drawings.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
D. Compact placed aggregate materials to achieve compaction to 100 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698.
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.
E. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.
D. Install forms to allow continuous progress of Work and so that forms can remain in place at least twenty-four (24) hours after concrete placement.
F. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.3
E. Slipform equipment may be used if the resulting curb and gutter conforms to the shape as specified on the drawings and the finish is satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer.
BASE PLACEMENT A. Spread granular cushion as specified in Section 310000 over prepared base to a total compacted thickness as indicated on the Drawings.
3.6
C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated on the Drawings. D. Compact placed aggregate materials to achieve compaction to 100 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698.
B. Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. Minimum rate of 5 pounds per cubic yard. Minimum residual strength per ASTM C1399 or C1609: 80 psi.
E. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.
3.4
PREPARATION A. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. B. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and the Independent Inspection Agency a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. C. Base Preparation: The base shall be well drained and compacted with an approved vibrator compactor to a firm, uniform bearing surface, conforming to the planned section and established grade. Granular materials shall be moistened to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. Minimum rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard. Minimum residual strength per ASTM C1399 or C1609: 45 psi. Required at slabs only.
B. Place granular cushion base in maximum three (3") inch layers and roller compact.
F. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
FORMING
3.7
JOINTING A. Expansion Joints: Joints shall be filled with one-half (1/2") inch thick pre-formed joint filler material and shall be installed in the sidewalk at the following locations: 1. At the beginning and end of all curved sections. 2. Where all new concrete surrounds, adjoins or abuts any existing fixed objects, such as fire hydrants, valve boxes, manholes, light poles, flag poles, curbs, walks or other rigid structures. 3. At sixty (60') foot maximum spacing or as indicated on the drawings. B. Contraction Joints: Curbing shall be provided with contraction joints at ten (10') feet on center or as indicated on the Drawings.
321313 - 5 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
I. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of the mix. Consolidate concrete along the face of the forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement and side forms.
C. General: All joints shall be vertical and straight. Transverse joints shall be placed at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the Work. Joints shall align with similar joints in adjoining work where practical. D. The panels shall be square where practicable and generally have not more than 36 square feet of area. E. The joints shall align with like joints in adjoining work unless the work is isolated by ½ inch isolation joints. F. All joint work shall coordinate precisely with grids, modules and radials as prescribed on the Drawings. G. All joints and edges of walk shall be rounded with a 1/8-inch radius tool. H. Contraction joints shall extend to at least 1/3 the walk thickness and shall be approximately 1/8 inch wide. I. Expansion and isolation joints shall be ½ inch wide and shall be equal in depth to the full thickness of the slab. 3.8
PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and comply with the requirements for mixing and placing concrete as herein specified. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Immediately before concrete placement, dampen base to reduce absorption. Standing water will not be permitted. D. Do not place concrete on frozen ground. E. Incorporate all concrete admixtures into the concrete at the ready-mix plant. F. Reject concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial mix. G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
J. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 3.9
CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surfaces by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. B. After floating and before final finishing, check the concrete with a ten (10') foot steel straightedge to ensure there is no variation greater than three-sixteenth (3/16") inch from the straightedge. C. Work edges of slabs, gutters top edge of back of curbs and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to one--half (1/2") inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surfaces as follows: 1. Sidewalks: Light broom, radius edges to one (1") inch and trowel joint edges. 2. Curb and Gutters: Light broom. 3. Stair Steps: Light broom. 4. Inclined Ramps: Light broom perpendicular to slope.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING A. Unformed Surfaces: Apply curing materials as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete's sufficiently hard to be undamaged by the curing process.
H. Place concrete to pattern indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 6 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
1. Waterproof paper or polyethylene film: Use appropriate color of film based on ambient temperature. Sprinkle concrete with water as necessary during application of covering. Lap edges and ends at least 6 inches, and seal laps. Weight down covering to prevent movement. Patch holes and tears that occur during the curing period. B. Compound Application: 1. Apply a membrane-curing compound to the exposed surface of the concrete within one (1) hour of finishing the concrete. 2. The compound shall be thoroughly mixed before it is applied. 3. If forms are removed in less than seventytwo (72) hours after placing the concrete, the curing compound shall be applied immediately to the exposed surfaces. 4. The curing compound shall be applied by an approved airless spraying machine at the approximate rate of one (1) gallon of compound to 150 square feet of surface curing area. 5. In all cases, the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the concrete from frost during the cure period. C. The Architect/Engineer will shut down concrete placement if the operations are not being carried out according to these specifications. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe those items not specifically required by the Minnesota State Building Code, but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. B. Field testing and inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Division One Specifications:
1. Compressive Test Specimens: a. Make one set of test cylinders (four per set), per ASTM C31, for each day's pour in excess of one cubic yard for each type of concrete. If day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, make one set of test cylinders for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured specimens. 2. Compressive Strength Tests: a. Test cylinders per ASTM C39. Testing shall be performed by independent testing lab. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days for information and two cylinders shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance. One specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. 3. Slump Tests: a. Furnish and maintain a slump cone and tamping rod. Test first batch of each type of concrete delivered for each day's pour, plus one test for each 25 cubic yards or fraction thereof, ASTM C143. 4. Entrained Air Tests: a. Furnish and maintain a properly calibrated pressure-type air meter. Test first batch of air entrained concrete delivered for each day's pour plus one test for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, ASTM C231. 5. Sidewalks, paths and walkways shall meet ADA accessibility standards. Replacement of walks is required if over 5 percent longitudinal grade, over 2 percent cross slope, over 2 percent at 90 degree changes in direction (landings) and 1 percent within 5 feet of a building entrance. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 7 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School Addition and Remodeling
D. Grade verification of exterior Walks: A grade verification survey shall be performed after all walks are installed to assure Part 3.11.4 has been satisfied. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 8 of 8 Printed on 01/15/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
SECTION 32 92 00 – LAWNS AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section Includes: 1. Turf Seeding including “No-Mow” areas 2. Site areas disturbed by construction activities, other than paved and rock maintenance surfaces, are to be finished and restored with soil preparation and seeding. DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting topsoil.
B.
Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C.
Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D.
Sub-grade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification or analysis along with shipments of bulk fertilizer.
C.
Product Certificates: For soil amendments, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil, if any.
E.
Seed Mix.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose Work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.
B.
Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil from the site for analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
B.
Fertilizers: Deliver fertilizer in original, unopened manufacturer's containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Wet, caked, or otherwise damaged fertilizer will not be acceptable. 1. Provide supplier’s certificate of analysis with bulk fertilizers.
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
32 92 00 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
1.6
Farmington Elementary School
SITE CONDITIONS A.
1.7
Existing Conditions: 1. Maintain and protect terraces, walls, daylighted storm drains, existing curbs, drive, and walks existing on site for datum points and other layout reference points. SCHEDULING
A.
Weather Limitations: permit.
B.
Planting Season: 1. Permitted seeding times are August 15 to September 15 and from April 15 to May 15. 2. Sow lawn seed during normal planting seasons for type of lawn Work required as determined by seed supplier and approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8
Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
LAWN MAINTENANCE A.
Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established.
B.
Maintain lawn maintenance program until Work of this Section has been approved and accepted by Owner, but for not less than 30 days from date Owner/Architect approval of installation. 1. Notify Architect and Owner when maintenance program begins and 48 hours before it ends. 2. Continue maintenance program during this final 48 hour period.
C.
Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.
D.
Watering: In non-irrigated areas provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of mulch and seed. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week.
E.
Mow lawn as soon as top growth is 4 inches in height. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow grass 1-1/2 to 2 inches high.
F.
Seeded Lawn Maintenance: 1. Mowing: Mow seeded areas at a height of 6 inches to 10 inches using a rotary mower. 2. Mowing Intervals: Twice and at 30 day intervals during first growing season following seeding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SEED REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide seed bagged with tags bearing name of producer and list of contents including weeds and impurities by weight and percentage.
B.
Provide seed conforming to requirements of applicable state laws.
32 92 00 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
Farmington Elementary School
2.2
Addition and Remodeling
TURF GRASS SEED MIX A.
Provide Turf grass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: 30 % Sport Turf Perennial Ryegrass 25 percent Diva Kentucky Bluegrass. 25 percent Mystere Kentucky Bluegrass 20% Guinness Kentucky bluegrass
B.
Acceptable Seed Provider: substitute.
C.
Architect to approve mix prior to placement of order
D.
Bulk Application Rate: 10 pounds per 1000 square feet at 85 percent minimum germination rate.
2.3
Peterson Specialty Turf and Ag www.specialtyturfag.com or approved
TOPSOIL A.
On-site Topsoil: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to comply with topsoil defined per Mn/DOT 3877 with testing. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
B.
Imported Topsoil: Select Topsoil Borrow per Mn/DOT 3877, free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
C.
pH range: of 5.5 to 7.
D.
Organic material content: Minimum of 5 percent and maximum of 20 percent.
2.4
PLANTING ACCESSORIES A.
Selective Herbicides: application.
B.
Acceptable products: Roundup by Monsanto or approved substitute.
C.
Rain Gauges: Provide rain gauge acceptable to Architect and install where directed by Architect.
2.5
EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for
FERTILIZER A.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer, dry and free-flowing, in the following composition. Comply with state laws and Mn/DOT Spec 3881:
B.
Composition: 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent phosphorous, and 4 percent potash, by weight.
2.6
HERBICIDE.
Roundup TM
2.7
MULCH & EROSION BLANKETS A.
Clean oat straw meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specification 3882, Type 1
B.
Curlex blankets as manufactured by American Excelsior Co or approved equal meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specification 3883.
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
32 92 00 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
2.8
Farmington Elementary School
SNOW FENCING A.
Four-foot + tall commercially–available wood snow fencing with metal stakes 4’-6’ on center
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Topsoil grades abutting paving or walks should be set 2 inches below paving elevations to allow free movement of storm water from pavement into turf areas.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
B.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3
PREPARATION OF TOPSOIL FOR SEED A.
Immediately prior to seeding, this Contractor shall prepare all topsoil areas. This preparation work includes:
B.
Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
C.
Where new sod or lawn abuts existing lawn, insure subgrades of new lawn areas and edges of existing sod are set to insure a smooth transition, vertically and horizontally, between old and new.
D.
Kill or remove all existing vegetation noted for clearing and grubbing on drawings by smothering, sodcutting, cultivation, or application of herbicide (glysophosphate type).
E.
Scarify or farm in-place topsoil using discs, harrows, tillers to a depth of 3" on all areas, except slopes steeper than 2 horizontally to 1 vertically. On slopes steeper than 2:1, use cultivating equipment in general direction at right angles to the direction of surface drainage wherever practical.
F.
0-26-26 fertilizers shall be applied to the properly prepared soil bed prior to laying seed with a mechanical spreader and thoroughly mixed in by means of a meeker harrow, or weighted chain link fence, or other approved method. Fertilizer must be dry and free flowing when applied.
G.
Raking until the soil surface is completely fine and in a mellow condition with a smooth, even finished grade. All depressions and rivulets shall be filled in to ensure no birdbaths or disruption of established drainage patterns. All rubble, sticks, branches or stones and extraneous material over 1/2" diameter which are on the topsoil surface and which will interfere with the seed, shall be picked up and removed.
32 92 00 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
Farmington Elementary School
Addition and Remodeling
H.
Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
I.
Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
3.4
MULCHING – LAWN AREAS A.
3.5
Install straw mulch at a rate of 2 tons per acre with blower equipment. SATISFACTORY LAWNS
A.
Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.
B.
Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.
3.6
CLEANUP A.
3.7
Upon completion of Work of this Section, remove soil, manure, and other debris created by lawn Work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. Remove excess soil, stones, and other debris and properly dispose of off-site. PROTECTION
A.
Erect snow fencing as required to protect newly seeded areas from traffic. throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established.
B.
Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
Maintain barricades
END OF SECTION
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
32 92 00 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Addition and Remodeling
32 92 00 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Farmington Elementary School
Lawns and Grasses
S:\11\0122\div2to33\329200-LawnsNGrasses.doc
PROJECT M ANUAL Project No.: 11-0122
I ssue Date: January 15, 2013
ARCHITECT: Cuningham Group Architecture, I nc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414
Farmington Elementary School 500 MapleStreet Farmington, Minnesota55024
Volume I I : Mechanical Plumbing & Electrical
OWNER: Farmington Area Public Schools I SD 192 421 Walnut Street Farmington, Minnesota 55024
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 21 – FIRE-SUPPRESSION SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING
21 13 00
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 05 19
GAGES AND METERS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 29
HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 19
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
22 13 19
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 13
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 23
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 34 36
GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
22 42 00
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index to Specification-1
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 29
HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 16
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
23 20 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 20 19
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 22 13
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
23 22 19
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
23 23 13
REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
23 25 31
WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
23 31 13
METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASINGS AND PLENUMS
23 33 13
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index to Specification-2
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
23 34 13
FANS
23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 37 13
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 51 16
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, STACKS AND ACCESSORIES
23 52 38
CONDENSING BOILERS
23 57 16
STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
23 64 23
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER
23 72 13
ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
23 73 13
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 74 13
PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS
23 82 16
AIR COILS
23 82 36
FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
23 82 39
UNIT HEATERS
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
25 10 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT
25 35 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC
25 95 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC END OF INDEX
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index to Specification-3
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the remodeling of existing fire protection shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 21. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 21 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 21 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 21 05 00 takes precedence. Section 21 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 21 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 21 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 21.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner and Architect/Engineer.
1.4
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Municipal Water and Sewer Regulations National Electric Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State Industrial Commission Regulations
1.6
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials AWWA - American Water Works Association EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.7
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.8
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Prime Contractor - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 21 13 00 1.9
Description Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.13 ELECTRICAL A. Control and interlock wiring provided by this Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturer’s with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.3
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping 1. All piping shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled. C. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Paint all exposed pipng and equipoment in occupied areas with one (1) prime coat and two (2) final coats. Coordinate final color with Architect. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.3
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.4
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.5
START-UP A. Before start-up, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test fire protection systems as specified in Sections governing their installation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. 3.6
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
3.7
TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed.
3.8
PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 21 for additional requirements. B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.9
ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATOIN AND MANTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD to be book marked per specification section and equipment format to be a PDF file. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of the approved as-builts. CD to be book marked per sheet and in PDF form. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 21 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression. B. Section 21 13 00 – Fire-Suppression Sprinkler System.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. UL 203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Michigan. 4. Tolco. 5. Hilti. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Conform to NFPA 13. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 to 8 inch: Carbon steel adjustable swivel hanger. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5. Vertical Support: Carbon steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, cast iron, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. F. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.4
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer: 1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479. D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications. E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. J. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. K. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers. 3.3
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.4
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe and duct through-penetrations of the following fire-resistancerated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.5
SCHEDULES A. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Provide proper hangers and spacing according to the most current adopted N.F.P.A. 13 Standard. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. B. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 21 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
1.5
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00: Procedures for submittals.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 13 requirements for labeling and identification of fire sprinkler systems and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Brady. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.
2.2
TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 53 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. 2.3
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. D. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. E. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. F. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification; Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 53 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 21 11 00 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression. B. Section 21 13 00 – Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. B. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless. D. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. E. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. F. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. G. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. H. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. J. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. K. UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers. L. Warnock Hersey - Certification Listings.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide system to NFPA 13 hazard occupancy requirements as shown in the schedule on the drawings. B. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. If not available assume latest flow test data by city. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals. C. Maximum water velocity in piping: 20 feet per second. D. Provide 5 psi or 10 percent minimum (whichever is greater) safety factor on all hydraulically calculated piping systems.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 21 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. 2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 3. Sprinkler system design documents to be prepared and signed by technician certified with N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. 4. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, hanger locations, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction, and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00 Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be responsible for designing and hydraulically calculating the piping systems, including location of all valves, devices, and sprinkler heads. The standpipes and main feed piping design shall not be revised by the Contractor except where conflicts may exist with other trades and as reviewed by the Engineer. Design sprinkler system piping based on hazard rating as determined by the most stringent of the regulating agencies responsible for this facility, for the occupancy of the areas being sprinklered, Owner insurance company requirements, requirements of the governing authorities, and as indicated on the contract documents. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. D. Design system under direct supervision of a technician certified by N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. E. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Minnesota.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey. B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey label or marking per NFPA 13. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
Provide
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ABOVE GROUND PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, ASTM A135 UL listed, threadable, light wall, ASTM A795 or ASME B36.10, Schedule 10, 40 black or galvanized. Schedule 5, 7 and copper pipe or tube are not acceptable. 1. All black steel piping must be preoxidized with a suitable protective coating. 2. Piping exposed to the weather, in high humidity areas, or used in a corrosive atmosphere, shall be galvanized. 3. Steel Fittings: Wrought steel, buttwelded, buttweld ends, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel, steel flanges and fittings, forged steel socket welded and threaded, U.L. listed and F.M approved. 4. Cast Iron Fittings: Flanges and flanged fittings, threaded fittings. 5. Malleable Iron Fittings: Threaded fittings. 6. Plain end, pressfit, and snap-let fittings are not acceptable. 7. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Ductile iron housing clamps with a protective orange enamel coating conforming to ASTM A-536, or ASTM A-153 for a galvanized coating, track head bolt conforming to ASTM A-183 a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi with a grade ‘E’ gasket. (All mechanical grooved couplings on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.) 8. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Cast of durable ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-526 with a protective coating of orange enamel, or ASTM A-153 for a galvanized coating. (All mechanical formed fittings on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.)
2.2
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with grooved couplings, flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. E. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping as high as possible, and to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports. I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use reducing fittings for changes in piping. Bushings are not acceptable. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. L. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Indicate on the drawings of sleeve locations. M. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. O. Do not install piping in any electrical equipment, transformer, elevator equipment, switch gear or telephone room, unless it is serving the sprinklers in that room. 3.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping with structural, mechanical piping and ductwork, and electrical within the building. Piping conflicts between system shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.4
TESTING A. Conduct all applicable tests as referenced in NFPA Standard 13 for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping". All necessary tests shall be conducted in conformance with requirements of NFPA, and a Contractor's Certificate covering materials and test outlined in NFPA Standard 13 shall be completed and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. D. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. G. UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System to provide coverage for entire building. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 hazard occupancy requirements as shown in the schedule on the drawings. C. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. D. Provide 5 psi or 10 percent minimum (whichever is greater) safety factor on all hydraulically calculated piping systems.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 21 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on fire protection piping, sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction, and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00 Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be responsible for designing and hydraulically calculating the piping systems, including location of all valves, devices, and sprinkler heads. The standpipes and main feed piping design shall not be revised by the Contractor except where conflicts may exist with other trades and as reviewed by the Engineer. Design sprinkler system piping based on hazard rating as determined by the most stringent of the regulating agencies responsible for this facility, for the occupancy of the areas being sprinklered, Owner insurance company requirements, requirements of the governing authorities, and as indicated on the contract documents. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. D. Design system under direct supervision of a technician certified by N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. E. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Minnesota.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey. B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey label or marking per NFPA 13. D. Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13. E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and AWS D10.9. F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
Provide
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 21 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. C. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Provide metal storage cabinet for extra sprinklers located adjacent to the valve assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Reliable Model GFR (solder type) or Model F1FR (glass bulb type), with Model FP chrome semi-recessed threaded type escutcheon or approved equal by: (all sprinklers on this project shall be of the same manufacturer): 1. Automatic Sprinkler of America. 2. Tyco (Central and Gem). 3. Viking Corporation. 4. Substitutions: None. B. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Standard, semi-recessed, concealed, pendent type with matching screw on escutcheon plate as noted in schedule on drawings. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Standard, semi-recessed, horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Dry Sprinklers: 1. Type: Standard, recessed, exposed, pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. F. Guards: Fabricated of heavy gauge wire welded to steel mounting plates complying with the latest UL Standards. G. Spray Nozzles: 1. Brass with solid cone discharge, 140 degrees of arc.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with grooved couplings, flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. The use of ½” extension coupling are not acceptable. D. Miscellaneous Appurtenances: 1. Drain and test connections for each sprinkler riser, including an angle valve, pressure gauge and inspector's test. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13. 2. Chrome plated escutcheons on all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings. 3. Sprinkler heads shall be installed at the top and under the lowest landing of each stairway. 4. Provide extra sprinkler heads of each style, enclosed in head cabinet, and one head wrench for each type. The number of extra sprinkler heads to be supplied is to be determined according to NFPA Standard 13. Cabinet shall be mounted where directed by Owner. 5. Provide guards on sprinkler heads where heads are within 7'-0" of floor or in any location where heads might be subject to mechanical injury. 6. Install sprinkler heads at the top and bottom of all shafts per NFPA Standard 13. 7. Install NFPA Standard 13 required signs on all control valves with jack chain. Install hydraulic information signs at each sprinkler system control valve. E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. F. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. G. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. H. Apply a paper covering to ensure that sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons are concealed and do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Remove and replace painted sprinklers. I. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. J. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. K. Hydrostatically test entire system. L. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall.
3.3
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping with structural, mechanical piping and ductwork, and electrical within the building. Piping conflicts between system shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.5
TESTING A. Conduct all applicable tests as referenced in NFPA Standard 13 for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping". All necessary tests shall be conducted in conformance with requirements of NFPA, and a Contractor's Certificate covering materials and test outlined in NFPA Standard 13 shall be completed and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. B. Test sprinkler system for a period of two hours at hydrostatic pressure of 200 psig (or 50 PSI above static pressure in excess of 150 psig for a period of two (2) hours.) All piping, valves, heads and other components shall be watertight. If a drop in system pressure is noted during the test, the contractor shall repair the system as required and reschedule the test as specified hereinafter. All retests of systems shall be performed at no cost to the owner.
3.6
ELECTRICAL WIRING A. Wiring for flow switches, valve supervisory switches, supervisory pressure switches, and power to air compressors will be provided under Division 26. Coordinate location of these devices with the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of new and remodel of existing plumbing shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 22. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Arrange with appropriate utility companies to provide temporary and permanent utility services as required and coordinate their installation with construction progress of this project. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility companies for utility services. F. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. G. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. H. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. I. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. J. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS: A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 22 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 22 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 22 05 00 takes precedence. Section 22 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 22 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 22 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 22.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Americans with Disabilities Act Municipal Water and Sewer Regulations National Electric Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State and Local Plumbing Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Elevator Code State Energy Code Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards AIA Guidelines
1.5
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AIA - American Institute of Architects ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials AWWA - American Water Works Association EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA - International Cable Engineers Association IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.6
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.7
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. [Requests must be submitted by a bidding Contractor]. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Construction Manager - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 22 05 19 22 05 23 22 05 29 22 05 53 22 07 19 22 11 16 22 11 19 22 11 23 22 34 46 22 42 00 1.8
Description Gages and Meters for Plumbing Piping General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Piping Insulation Domestic Water Piping Domestic Water Piping Specialties Domestic Water Pumps Gas Domestic Water Heater Commercial Plumbing Fixtures
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping and ductwork to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.12 ELECTRICAL A. Magnetic starters, disconnects, and power wiring provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. B. Control and interlock wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturer’s with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent. 2.3
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE STORED BY OWNER A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain. B. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protected from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed. C. Consult the Owner about any salvage he may wish to retain and about the salvageability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. D. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not a part of this contract. E. Relocate salvage material from the area and the site to the Owner's storage.
2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. 3. No fire sprinkler or fire alarm systems are to remain inactive at the end of the work day. Assure that the fire sprinkler or fire alarm system is operational at the end of each work day. Coordinate with the Owner. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, nor indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property during demolition, cutting, remodeling and all related new construction under this Contract. Perform all work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property or persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, properly distributed, to lower levels or to sound bearing, if necessary. E. Provide all protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials which are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from water and weather and to prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Maintain a watertight installation by scheduling the work and removals at the exterior according to weather conditions. Temporarily seal unfinished areas to the existing roof or to other exterior surfaces of the existing building. F. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate the areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to keep construction dust contained within the construction area. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Temporary and permanent doors shall be completely sealed with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work and shall remain sealed until the dust has settled. G. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. H. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. I. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. K. Abandoned services may be left in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls, providing they are disconnected from their sources and capped in place. No abandoned services, including piping, ductwork, tubing, etc., in ceilings or exposed. L. Assure no "dead end" water, sewer, or vent piping is left in the completed work. M. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed. N. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. O. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
P. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. Q. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. R. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. S. All holes created by removal of existing systems, piping, ductwork, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping 1. All piping shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled. C. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Painting: 1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Contractor may purchase copies of the mechanical drawings from the Engineer for $15.00 per sheet. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Before start-up, lubricate, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test plumbing systems as specified in Sections governing their installation. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly.
3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor shall secure on behalf of the Owner all utility rebates associated with the design. This shall include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 22 for additional requirements. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -13
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00 -14
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 05 19 GAGES AND METERS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure gages and Pressure gage taps. B. Thermometers and thermometer wells. C. Test plugs.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. B. ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi. C. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. D. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers. E. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00: Submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
1.7
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturer: Trerice No.600 Series. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Ashcroft. 2. Crosby. 3. Marsh. 4. U.S. Gauge 5. Weiss 6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. C. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393, UL 404 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Cast aluminum. 2. Bourdon Tube: Brass. 3. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter. 4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent. 5. Scale: Psi. 2.2
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturer: Trerice Model BX93000. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Palmer. 2. Taylor. 3. Weiss. 4. Wexler 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear glass. 3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT long. 4. Accuracy: plus-minus one scale division. 5. Calibration: Degrees F.
2.3
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required[, and with cap and chain]. B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.4
TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Manufacturers: a. Pete’s Plug. b. Sisco. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. 2. 1/4 inch fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: a. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. b. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. c. Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. Two 3-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. 1) Scaled for each range required b. Two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes. c. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale range: 25 to 125 degrees F. 2) Scale range: 50 to 500 degrees F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install one pressure gage per pump, with taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gage. B. Install gage taps in piping. C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. D. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. E. Provide the following thermometer temperature ranges unless noted otherwise: 1. Domestic cold water; 0-100 degrees F. 2. Domestic hot water (140 degrees F maximum); 0-160 degrees F. F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. I. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets, adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps, adjacent to control device sockets.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Pressure Gages. 1. Pumps - inlets and outlets. 2. Expansion tanks - on tank. 3. Pressure tanks - on tank. 4. Pressure reducing valves - inlet and outlet. 5. Backflow preventers. B. Stem Type Thermometers: 1. Domestic hot water supply and recirculation. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves for plumbing piping systems. 1. Ball. 2. Butterfly. 3. Check. 4. Drain. 5. Ball (fuel). 6. Plug (fuel).
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on valves, and accessories. information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.4
Provide manufacturers catalog
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BALL VALVES - (150 PSIG) A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 77-100/77-200 Series, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2. Construction: Class 150, 600 psig wog, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, brass blow-out proof stem, lever handle [with balancing stops], solder or threaded ends [with union]. Extended stems for use on insulated pipe.
2.2
BUTTERFLY VALVES - (150 PSIG) A. Manufacturer: Mueller Steam Specialties Series 65/66: 1. Centerline. 2. Crane. 3. Hammond. 4. Kitz. 5. Milwaukee. 6. Nibco. 7. Substitutions: None. B. Construction 1-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psig wog, cast or ductile iron body, lug or grooved ends, extended neck. C. Bronze disc. D. Resilient replaceable EPDM seat, bubble tight shut off. E. Valves 6 inches and smaller, used for shut off service, shall have a latch-lock handle. When used for throttling, valves shall have an infinite throttling handle with indicator disc adjustable stop.
2.3
SWING CHECK VALVES - (150 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 1/2 inches:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-309/B-319, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2. Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded ends. 2.4
BALL VALVES - NATURAL GAS A. Manufacturer: 1. Apollo. 2. Hammond. 3. Kitz. 4. Milwaukee. 5. Nibco. 6. Watts. 7. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. B. Construction 3/8” to 3”: UL Listed for valves, Class 150, 600 wog for valves installed on systems over 5 psi. AGA Standard 3-88, ANSI Z21.15, CGA9.1 and CR91-002 for valves installed on systems 5 psi and less. Bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, Virgin PTFE (Teflon) seats and stem bearing, reinforced PTFE (15% glass Teflon) stem packing, lever handle, threaded ends, one quarter turn on/off and blow-out proof stem.
2.5
PLUG VALVES - NATURAL GAS A. Manufacturer: DeZurick Series 400: 1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. 2. Construction 2-1/2 inches and Larger: UL Listed, 175 psig wog, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.3
APPLICATION A. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. B. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. C. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. D. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. E. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain. F. Provide ball valves or plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. END OF SECTIO
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Michigan. 4. Tolco. 5. Substitutions: None. B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, and split ring.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Stainless steel in areas of high humidity.
2.3
INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Anvil Figure 282 (8 inches and smaller). Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. B-Line Systems. 2. Michigan. B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.4
FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.5
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. F. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.6
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479. D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications. E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
3.3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protective shield, except that hangers may be applied directly to the pipe for domestic hot water piping. M. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. N. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers. 3.4
FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
3.5
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and caulk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.6
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe through-penetrations of the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.7
SCHEDULES A. Piping: PIPE SIZE Inches
MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet
1/2 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 3
6 8 10 END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29 -4
HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 1/2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Tags. B. Pipe Markers. C. Ceiling Tacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding proposed for plumbing identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Samples: Submit two tags, 1-1/2 inches in size. F. Samples: Submit two labels, 1.9 x 0.75 inches in size. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
H. Samples: Submit two (2) signs each, 9” x 7” and 6” x 2” size. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: numbers.
Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
C. Valve Tag Chart. 1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TAGS A. Metal Tags:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges. B. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list plastic laminated. 2.2
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
2.3
CEILING TACKS. A. Manufacturer: Moore. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. C. Description: Steel with ¾ inch diameter color coded head. D. Color code as follows: 1. Plumbing (valves): Green.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
G. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. I. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification: 1. Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. 2. Equipment: Use nomenclature as noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. D. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus and AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. 2. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 ob/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 10x10. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. J. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
K. Insulating Cement. 2.2
JACKETS A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units may be reduced to 1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the unit. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 22 05 29. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 2 inch and less, 2-1/2 inch and larger. 2) Thickness: 1 inch, 1-1/2 inch. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: all sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Storm Water Piping: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: all sizes (horizontal and vertical). 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Above Grade Floor Drain Trap and Sanitary Piping: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Thickness: 1 inch. b. Insulate entire trap and drain body assembly and piping within 4’-0” of drain. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, connections, and testing for piping systems. 1. Domestic water.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 23 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. E. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. B. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalog information.
1.5
Provide
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping. C. Piping system cleaning reports. D. Piping system testing reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of all piping systems. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX. D. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, ½” to 4”. 1. Fittings: Cast copper alloy or wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: 95/5 solder, except joints shall be brazed at expansion loops.
2.2
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 3 inches and Under: 1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 1 inch: 1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 05 29. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. I. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. J. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. K. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. L. Inserts: Refer to Section 22 05 29. M. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 22 05 29. 3.4
APPLICATION A. Provide unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Provide brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Provide flow controls in all branches of water recirculating systems.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.
3.6
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure. B. Test domestic water piping, tanks, etc. with hydraulic pressure of 125 psig for a period of 2 hours.
3.7
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Backflow preventers. B. Strainers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping. C. Section 22 42 00 – Commercial Plumbing Fixtures.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. B. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. C. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under the provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: assembly and support requirements.
1.5
Indicate
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all water piping specialties. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documeted experience.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts Model. b. Substitutions: None. 2. ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.2
STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Hayward. 3. Metra-Flex. 4. Mueller. 5. Sarco. 6. Titan. 7. Watts. 8. Substitutions: None. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 200 psig wog, Y pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel perforated screen. Application: Bronze body with copper or brass pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. C. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Domestic water pumps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 2. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 3. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Provide packaged water heating systems in-line circulator.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 22 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Provide two sets of pump seals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell and Gossett. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Taco. b. Substitutions: None. B. Type: Horizontal, oil-lubricated type, suitable for 125 psig maximum working pressure, and 225 degrees F maximum continuous temperature. C. Shaft: Ground and polished steel with hardened integral thrust collar. D. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve designed to circulate oil. E. Seal: Mechanical, carbon on ceramic. F. Casing: Bronze with flanged pump connections. G. Motor: Open drip proof, sleeve-bearing, rubber-mounted, with built-in thermal overload protectors. H. Performance: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings. I. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. B. This Contractor is to provide a strap-on aquastat installed on the domestic hot water return pipe. The Division 26 Contractor is to provide necessary power wiring to the pump and wiring from the aquastat in order to control/cycle the pump based on a return water temperature setting. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, connections, and testing for system.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 23 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. B. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). D. ASTM C564 – Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. E. ASTM C1540 – Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings for Hubless Cast Iron. F. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. G. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. H. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalog information.
1.5
Provide
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping. C. Piping system cleaning reports. D. Piping system testing reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of all piping systems. B. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, water pressure rating.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (BELOW GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, compression type with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Heavy duty joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1540. a. Manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or MG Coupling. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40. 1. Fittings: PVS, Schedule 40. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with solvent cement. 3. Install per ASTM D2321 and Minnesota Plumbing Code.
2.2
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Heavy duty joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1540. a. Manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or MG Coupling.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 05 29. G. Provide access where fittings are not exposed. H. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. M. Inserts: Refer to Section 22 05 29. N. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 22 05 29.
3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot (smaller than 3 inch pipe), and 1/8 inch per foot (3 inches and larger) minimum. Maintain gradients.
3.5
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Test sanitary and vent piping with air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes. B. Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Grease Interceptors. D. Water Hammer Arrestors E. Backflow preventers F. Water Pressure Reducing Valves G. Relief Valves H. Strainers
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 13 16 – Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping. C. Section 22 42 00 – Commercial Plumbing Fixtures.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. B. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Section.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under the provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: assembly and support requirements.
1.5
Indicate
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all sanitary specialties. C. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: Josam Model (Refer to Schedule on Drawings for model number and required option), or equivalent by: 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Mifab. 3. Wade. 4. Watts Drainage Products. 5. Zurn. 6. Substitutions: None. B. ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer and integral cleanout.
2.2
CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturer; Josam Series 56000 for floors and Series 58600 for walls, or equivalent by: a. J.R. Smith. b. Mifab. c. Wade. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Zurn. f. Substitutions: None. B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange and nikaloy top, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Interior Unfinished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange and bronze top, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: 1. Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
2.3
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Manufacturers: a. Watts. b. Hersey. c. Keckley. d. Substitutions: None. 2. ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.4
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturer: Watts. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Josam. 2. Zurn. 3. Wade. 4. J.R. Smith. 5. Watts. 6. Substitutions: None. C. ANSI A112.26.1; copper construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure.
2.5
WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Series U5, or equivalent by: a. Amtrol. b. Honeywell-Braukmann c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15010. 2. Construction: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded double union ends, with integral stainless steel strainer.
2.6
RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 174A or 740, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, sized for application. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 40, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled. 2.7
STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Hayward. 3. Metra-Flex. 4. Mueller. 5. Sarco. 6. Victaulic. 7. Watts. 8. Substitutions: None. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 175 psig wog or Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psig wog, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Application: Bronze body with copper or brass pipe. C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
2.8
GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Manufacturer: Josam, model number as scheduled on the drawings. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Wade. 3. Zurn. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Epoxy coated (white) fabricated steel Grease Interceptor, deep roughing, recessed, flush-withfloor type, no hub connections, internal air relief, internal trap, removable diffuser baffle, gasketed non-skid cover, flow control fitting, and PDI Seal of Approval and steel frame with non-skid cover and adjustable interceptor carrier brackets.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 19 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 2.9
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 19 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, connections, and testing for piping systems. 1. Storm sewer.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation. E. Section 22 05 23 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. B. ASTM C564 – Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM C1540 – Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings for Hubless Cast Iron. D. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalog information.
1.5
Provide
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping. C. Piping system cleaning reports. D. Piping system testing reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of all piping systems. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX. D. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
RAINWATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket system. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Heavy duty joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1540. a. Manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or MG Coupling.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 05 29. G. Provide access where fittings are not exposed. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than [8] ft of cover. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. M. Inserts: Refer to Section 22 05 29. N. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 22 05 29. 3.4
APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Provide unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot (smaller than 3 inch pipe), and 1/8 inch per foot (3 inches and larger) minimum. Maintain gradients.
3.6
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Test storm piping with air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof drains. B. Downspout Nozzles.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 14 13 – Facility Storm Drainage Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. B. ASME A112.21.2 - Roof Drains. C. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Section.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under the provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: assembly and support requirements.
1.5
Indicate
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all plumbing specialties. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ROOF DRAINS A. Manufacturer: Josam Model (Refer to Schedule on Drawings). B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. J.R.Smith.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 23 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Mifab. 3. Wade. 4. Watts Drainage Products. 5. Zurn. 6. Substitutions: None. C. Assembly: ANSI A112.21.2. D. Body: Cast iron with sump. E. Strainer: Removable cast aluminum dome with vandal proof screws. F. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type: 1. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. 2. Adjustable under deck clamp. 3. Roof sump receiver. 4. Waterproofing flange. 5. Controlled flow weir. 6. Levelling frame. 7. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. 8. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. 9. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension. 2.2
DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES A. Manufacturer: Josam Series 25010. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Mifab. 3. Wade. 4. Watts Drainage Products. 5. Zurn. 6. Substitutions: None. C. Cast bronze with loose wall flange and threaded inlet connection. D. Rough bronze finish.
2.3
CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturer; Josam Series 56000 for floors and Series 58600 for walls, or equivalent by: a. J.R. Smith. b. Mifab. c. Wade.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 23 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Zurn. f. Substitutions: None. B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange and nikaloy top, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Interior Unfinished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange and bronze top, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: 1. Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 14 23 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 34 36 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Domestic water heaters.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels. C. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. D. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. E. NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquified Petroleum Gases. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 2. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 3. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 34 36 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA, NSF requirements for water heaters. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters and water storage tanks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
RESIDENTIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturer: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Bradford-White. 3. Rheem. 4. State. 5. Substitutions: None. B. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. C. Performance: Refer to schedule on drawings. D. Tank: Glass lined welded steel with single flue passage, flue baffle and draft hood; thermally insulated with glass fiber and encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 34 36 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat and built-in gas pressure regulator; temperature range adjustable from 120 to 170 degrees F, cast iron or sheet metal burner, safety pilot and thermocouple. F. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. G. This Contractor to provide a complete venting and sealed combustion system to serve each heater. Installation and materials are to be in conformance with the manufacturer’s guidelines. Refer to the plumbing drawings for unit location and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA, NSF and NFPA 54 requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and electrical work to achieve operating system. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 34 36 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Safety equipment. B. Master mixing station. C. Master Mixing Valve. D. Hose Bibb. E. Wall Hydrant. F. Kitchen Equipment.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eye Wash and Shower Equipment. C. ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. D. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Fixtures shall be free from flaws and blemishes, with finished surfaces clear, smooth and bright. Surfaces coming into contact with walls, floors or surfaces of other fixtures shall be ground true. 1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 22 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Supply two sets of faucet washers and flush valve service kits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Water closets; American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler. 1. Flush valves; Sloan ‘Royal’. 2. Seats; Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite. 3. Carriers; Josam, Jonespec, J.R. Smith, Wade, Watts Drainage Products, Zurn. B. Lavatories; American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler. 1. Faucets; Chicago Faucet. 2. Carriers; Josam, Jonespec, J.R. Smith, Wade, Watts Drainage Products, Zurn. 3. Insulation kits; Truebro, Brocar, Plumberex Specialty Products, Pro Wrap. C. Sinks; Elkay, Just. 1. Faucets; Chicago Faucet. 2. Insulation kits; Truebro, Brocar, Plumberex Specialty Products, Pro Wrap. D. Mop sinks; Fiat, Mustee, Stern-Williams, Swan, Zurn.. 1. Faucets; Chicago Faucet. E. Safety equipment; Bradley, Encon, Guardian, Haws, Speakman. 1. Mixing valve; Bradley, Lawler, Leonard, Powers. F. Master Mixing Stations; Bradley, Lawler, Powers. G. Master Mixing Valve; Bradley, Lawler, Powers. H. Hydrants; Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade, Woodford, Zurn.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
I. Substitutions; None. 2.2
SAFETY EQUIPMENT A. P- 1 Water Closet - ADA: American Standard "Madera 17” EL”, No. 3043.102, low consumption 1.6 gpf, floor mounted, vitreous china, elongated bowl, siphon jet, 1-1/2 inch top spud inlet, with bolt caps. Top of bowl 17-1/4 inches above floor 1. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal No.111, low consumption 1.6 gpf. ] 2. Seat: Church No. 9500, solid plastic, extra heavy duty, 100% polypropylene, white open front, elongated, combination stainless steel self-sustaining check hinge, stainless steel nut, washers and accessories, less cover. B. P- 2 Lavatory - ADA: American Standard "Lucerne", No. 0355.012, 20-1/2 inches x 18-1/4 inches, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory with concealed arms type carrier. Refer to Architectural plans for mounting height. 1. Trim: Chicago Faucet, No. 802-317CP, 4 inch chrome plated centerset faucet, 4 inch indexed wristblade handles, 4 inch integral spout, E12 Softflo aerator and Quaturn operating cartridges. American Standard No. 7723.018, 4-1/2 inch offset 1-1/4 inch grid drain for wheelchair access. ] 2. Carrier: Josam Series 17100, floor mounted, with concealed arms. 3. Provide flexible vinyl insulation system kit, equal to Truebro, Handi-Lav Guard No. 102W with Accessory No. 105. C. P- 3 Wall Hydrant: Josam 71050 series cast bronze non-freeze wall hydrant with satin Nikaloy face, 3/4 inch H.P.T. outlet, integral vacuum breaker-backflow preventer, pressure relief valve, bronze casing, bronze operating parts convertible into service tool, 3/4 inch female and 1 inch male N.P.T. inlet connections. wall clamp and union elbow assembly. D. P- 4 Mop Sink: Fiat Model MSB-3624, "Molded Stone" mop basin 36 inches x 24 inches x 10 inches high with rim guard, 3 inch drain and stainless steel or brass strainer, and caulked deep seal "P" trap. 1. Trim: Chicago Faucet No. 897-CP chrome plated service sink fitting with 3/4 inch hose connection, vacuum breaker, wall brace and pail hook. Install 36 inches above floor. Also provide Fiat No. 832-AA hose and stainless steel hose bracket. E. P- 5 Classroom Sink: Existing unit relocated. Disconnect existing hot, cold and waste piping from unit. Sink unit will be relocated. Provide new hot, cold, waste and vent piping rough-ins and connections to relocated unit. Refer to the plans for locations. F. P- 7 Mop Sink: Fiat Model MSB-2424, "Molded Stone" mop basin 24 inches x 24 inches x 10 inches high with rim guard, 3 inch drain and stainless steel or brass strainer, and caulked deep seal "P" trap. 1. Trim: Chicago Faucet No. 897-CP chrome plated service sink fitting with 3/4 inch hose connection, vacuum breaker, wall brace and pail hook. Install 36 inches above floor. Also provide Fiat No. 832-AA hose and stainless steel hose bracket. G. P- 8 Eyewash Safety Unit: The eyewash unit will be furnished by the food service contractor to this contractor for installation. This contractor will be responsible for providing all labor and materials to make the installation complete and operable. Thermostatic mixing valve to be Lawler Model 911E/F, ½” inlet, ½”outlet, with built-in cold water bypass. The mixing valve must have a minimum cold water bypass of 4 GPM @ 20 PSI drop.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.3
MASTER MIXING STATION A. P-6 Master Mixing Station: Manifold Recirculation System Pre-Piped Hi-Low Mixing Valve with Recirculating Pump and Mounting Strut: Lawler model 802 master water mixing valve shall be of the thermostatic type with liquid-filled thermal motor. It shall have bronze body construction with replaceable corrosion-resistant components. Valve construction shall employ a sliding piston control mechanism. Sliding piston and liner shall be of stainless steel material. Valve shall come equipped with union end stop and check inlets with removable stainless steel strainers. Valve shall provide protection against hot or cold supply line failure and thermostat failure. Mixing valve shall be incorporated into a pre-piped manifold system which includes a recirculating pump (refer to CP-1 in Pump Schedule-Bell and Gossett Model PL-30B), circuit setting balancing valve, thermometers, ball valves, mounting strut, Immersion type Aquastat, Circulator power switch, test connection and 3/4 inch recirculation pipe size (from building) and 1/2 inch recirculation pipe size (return to heater). All items to be pre-packaged and assembled by Lawler Valve. Designed to flow 54 gpm at 20 psi maximum pressure drop. Wiring from aquastat to pump and circulator power switch to be factory installed to ensure single point electrical connection in field.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. B. Provide brackets, braces or reinforcing angles as required in all partitions not sufficient in themselves to support plumbing fixtures or other wall-hung equipment.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. B. Install components level, plumb and secure. C. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture. D. Provide locking style stop valves in branch lines serving safety equipment.
3.3
ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.4
CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.5
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit use of fixtures during construction.
3.6
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A. Rough-in and make final connections for Kitchen Equipment furnished and set in place by another contractor. B. Refer to Schedule on Drawings for specific rough-in requirements.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Refer to Kitchen Equipment Drawings for exact rough-in dimensions. D. Trim and accessories to be furnished by another contractor but installed by this Section. E. Provide chrome plated cast brass “P” traps with cleanouts. F. Provide chrome plated water supplies with loose key stops. G. Exposed water piping chrome plated brass. H. Provide shut off valve and regulator in gas piping to each piece of gas equipment. 3.7
SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Refer to Architectural Drawings. B. Fixture Rough-In: Refer to Plumbing Fixture Rough-in Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of new and remodel of existing heating, ventilating, and dehumidification shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 23. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 23 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 23 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 23 05 00 takes precedence. Section 23 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 23 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 23 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 23.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Construction Manager:
1.4
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Americans with Disabilities Act National Electric Code NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Energy Code Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards AIA Guidelines
1.6
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AABC - Associated Air Balance Council ADC - Air Diffusion Council AIA - American Institute of Architects AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.7
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.8
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list is considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, and name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative; include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Construction Manager - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 23 05 13 23 05 16 23 05 19 23 05 23 23 05 29 23 05 53 23 05 93 23 07 13 23 07 19 23 20 13 23 20 19 23 21 23 23 22 19 23 25 31 23 33 13 23 34 13 23 36 00 23 37 13 23 51 16 23 52 38 23 57 16 23 64 23 23 73 13 23 74 13 23 82 16 23 82 36 23 82 39 1.9
Description Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Equipment Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Duct Insulation HVAC Piping Insulation Hydronic Piping Hydronic Specialties Hydronic Pumps Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties Water Treatment for Heating Systems Ductwork Accessories Fans Air Terminal Units Air Outlets and Inlets Breechings, Chimneys, Stacks and Accessories Condensing Boilers Steam to Water Heat Exchangers Air Cooled Water Chiller Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units Packaged Outdoor Rooftop Units Air Coils Finned Tube Radiation Heaters Unit Heaters
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping and ductwork to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.13 ELECTRICAL A. Magnetic starters, disconnects, and power wiring provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. B. Control and interlock wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturers with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.3
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE STORED BY OWNER A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain. B. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protect from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed. C. Consult the Owner about any salvage he may wish to retain and about the salvageability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. D. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not a part of this contract. E. Relocate salvage material from the area and the site to the Owner's storage.
2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner. 3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, or indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements. D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property during demolition, cutting, remodeling and all related new construction under this Contract. Perform all work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property or persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, properly distributed, to lower levels or to sound bearing, if necessary. E. Provide all protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials which are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from water and weather and to prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Maintain a watertight installation by scheduling the work and removals at the exterior according to weather conditions. Temporarily seal unfinished areas to the existing roof or to other exterior surfaces of the existing building. F. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate the areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to keep construction dust contained within the construction area. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Temporary and permanent doors shall be completely sealed with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work and shall remain sealed until the dust has settled. G. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. H. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. I. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. K. No abandoned services, including piping, ductwork, tubing, etc., in ceilings or exposed. L. Assure no "dead end" water piping is left in the completed work. M. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
N. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. O. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces. P. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. Q. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. R. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. S. All holes created by removal of existing systems, piping, ductwork, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping and Ductwork 1. All piping and ductwork shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping and ductwork be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping or ductwork in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping or ductwork above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled. C. Equipment:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Painting: 1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. Paint all exposed piping and equipment in occupied areas. Provide one (1) prime coat and two (2) finish coats. Coordinate final color with Architect. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe, duct and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Before start-up, lubricate, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test hydronic systems and air systems as specified in Sections governing their installation. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly.
3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor shall secure on behalf of the Owner all utility rebates associated with the design. This shall include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 23 for additional requirements. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -13
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.13 ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATOIN AND MANTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD to be book marked per specification section and equipment format to be a PDF file. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of the approved as-builts. CD to be book marked per sheet and in PDF form. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00 -14
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
0SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Common requirements for electric motors furnished on equipment specified in other Division 23 Sections, including single phase and three phase electric motors. B. Power factor correction. C. Drives. D. Variable speed drives (VSD's).
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 34 13 - Fans
1.3
REFERENCES A. List reference standards that are included within the text of this section. Edit the following as required for project conditions. B. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. C. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL Component Recognition for appropriate sizes. B. Conform to NFPA 70 and local energy code.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include manufacturer’s product and nameplate data. 2. Include physical and performance data. 3. When used with variable frequency drive; certification that motor is compatible. 4. Include selection data for power factor correction capacitors. C. VSD: 1. Submit complete technical data sheets for each VSD showing all pertinent data including at least the following: a. Connected motor nameplate full load amperage.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
b. VSD characteristics: 1) Motor amperage capacity, power factor at full load and efficiency at full load.. 2) Electrical power input characteristics. 3) Control interface requirements. 4) Status display systems. 5) Physical dimensions and weight. 6) Options not listed in the specifications. 7) Exceptions and variations from the specifications. c. Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 23 05 00. d. Include instructions for normal operation. e. Include instructions for routine service procedures; list of major components; recommended remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list. 2. Submit complete wiring diagrams and dimensional drawings of all equipment including at least the following information: a. Monitoring and control terminals, designations and locations. b. Power circuit diagram, including the disconnect and motor. c. Control circuit diagram. d. Wiring of options and auxiliary devices. 3. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of the Product. Include equipment installation instructions, connection diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for all cabling, mounting, location, etc. 4. Provide computer analysis of total harmonic voltage distortion and line notching for all points of common coupling. The point of common coupling for this project will be the distribution panel that feeds the VSD-controlled motors. Provide the complete analysis to the engineer for review. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed the specified requirements 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the site. C. Accept controllers on site in original packing. Inspect for damage. D. Store VSDs in a clean, dry, environmentally-controlled space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Handle in accordance to the manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish. 1.7
ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not store or install unless temperature in maintained between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F, at a relative humidity less than 95 percent (non-condensing). B. Maintain conditions during and after installation of Products.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Section 23 05 00 - Warranties. B. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty on the VSD system and all related accessories, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continue for a period of two (2) years. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse, or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Baldor. 2. General Electric. 3. Marathon. 4. Reliance. 5. Substitutions: None. B. General: 1. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. 2. Single Phase Motors: PSC for low starting torque, direct drive applications. Capacitor start for high starting torque applications. 3. Electrical Service (unless noted otherwise): a. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: single phase, 60 Hz. b. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: three phase, 60 Hz. c. Refer to the Schedules on Drawings for voltage. 4. Motors to be started across-the-line, unless noted otherwise, or as noted below: a. 480 Volt: Part winding start for motors 25 HP and above. 5. Open drip-proof (ODP) type except where specifically noted otherwise. 6. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), TEAO or TENV motors when exposed to the weather. 7. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 8. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
9. Explosion-Proof Motors: Class I, Group D; and Class II, Group E, F and G. 10. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower, RPM, frame size, voltage, phase, cycles, full load amps, insulation system class, service factor, maximum ambient temperature, temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum efficiency. 11. Wiring Terminations: a. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. b. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 12. Motor Efficiencies: NEMA Premium Efficiency (1 hp and larger). Follow NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2003, in Tables 12-12 and 12-13. 13. Motors for use with Variable Speed Drives: a. NEMA Standard MG1 definite purpose inverter duty rated motors shall be used for all IGBT Pulse Width Modulated drive installations. Inverter duty motors shall be designed and manufactured to meet NEMA Standard MG1 for definite purpose inverter duty motors. The inverter duty motors shall be able to withstand voltages greater than 1600 volts peak and rise times of 0.1 microsecond. b. Insulated of isolated bearings shall be used for the inverter duty rated motors. c. The inverter duty motor insulation class shall be class F insulation and a class B temperature rise based on 40 degrees C. d. The inverter duty motor name plate shall indicate that the motor is an inverter duty motor. e. Provide shaft ground kit for field installation. C. Single Phase Power - Permanent Split Capacitor Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. 3. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. 4. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. D. Single Phase Power - Capacitor Start Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. 3. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. 4. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. 5. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. 7. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. E. Three Phase Power - Squirrel Cage Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Six times full load current. 3. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. 4. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. 5. Insulation System: NEMA Class F with Class B rise. 6. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. 7. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centre line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. 8. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. 9. Weatherproof TEFC Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure or coat windings with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. 2.2
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION A. Manufacturers: 1. Cornell-Dubelier. 2. General Electric. 3. Sprague. 4. Westinghouse. 5. Zucker. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Provide power factor correction capacitors for motors 3 horsepower or larger in accordance with the following requirements. Capacitors shall be selected so that they do not overcorrect the power factor beyond 99.99% throughout the range of operation of the motor. Reference to "full load" means the rated motor horsepower not including the service factor. 1. Motors with Constant Load: Correct to a minimum 95% power factor when operating at 65% of full load. 2. Direct Expansion Refrigeration Compressors: correct compressors to a minimum of 95% power factor when operating in its least loaded condition.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Motors connected to variable speed drives shall be excluded from the power factor correction requirements. D. If equipment is furnished with a control panel, that panel shall come with power factor correction capacitors factory installed and wired. E. For equipment that does not have a control panel, the equipment supplier shall be responsible for furnishing the capacitors and installing them at either the motor disconnect or motor control center. F. Individual capacitors shall be dry electrolytic type and enclosed in integrated dust tight enclosure. 2.3
MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. In general, motor controllers will be furnished and installed under Division 26 unless the motor controller is an integral part of a piece of equipment, or noted otherwise. B. Where control components are factory furnished, a control transformer with fused secondary shall be provided to reduce voltage to 120 volts to operate control and safety devices.
2.4
BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives for equipment with motors smaller than 3 horsepower shall be rated for 150% of rated horsepower of the driven equipment with matched pulleys and belts. V-belt drives for equipment with motors 3 horsepower and larger shall be rated for 200%. B. Variable pitch drives shall be selected so that the fan speed at the specified operating conditions is approximately centered on the sheave adjustment range. C. Exposed belt drives shall have OSHA approved guards to completely enclose sheaves and belts. Guards shall be constructed of expanded metal and reinforced with angle iron and securely fastened to floor or base. Provide openings at motor and driven equipment shafts for taking tachometer readings. D. Except as specified otherwise, provide variable sheaves for motors 15 HP and smaller and fixed sheaves for motors 20 HP and larger. E. Where motors are used with variable frequency drive systems, provide fixed sheaves. Select sheaves at an RPM which will provide 15 percent greater capacity that called out on drawings. Final capacity adjustments will be made with the variable frequency drive system. F. Belt driven equipment shall include an adjustable motor base for adjusting belt tension.
2.5
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley. 2. Asea Brown Boveri (ABB). 3. Danfoss. 4. Gerus Industrial. 5. Square D. 6. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Description: 1. Provide enclosed variable speed controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. C. Rating and operating characteristics: 1. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volt +/-10%, 3 phase. 2. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. 3. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz., plus 3 Hertz or minus 10 Hertz. 4. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and .95, lagging, over the entire range of operating speed and load. 5. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95% 6. Harmonic Distortion of Input Voltage Waveform: 3% maximum at full load 7. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Waveform: 10% maximum at full load. 8. Harmonic Attenuation: Provide line reactors as required to attenuate harmonic distortion. Refer to paragraph 1.3. 9. Current Limit Ratings: a. Slow Current Regulation: Adjustable to 125% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. b. Rapid Current Regulation: Adjustable to 170% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. c. Current Switch Off Limit: Fixed at 225% (minimum, instantaneous) of variable torque current rating. 10. Overload Rating: 110 percent of rated variable torque current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes and140% of rate torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 minutes. 11. Environmental Requirements: a. Operating Temperature: 0oC to +40oC (32oF to 104oF) without derating. b. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non-condensing. c. Elevation: 3300 ft maximum without derating. d. Acoustical Noise: Do not exceed audible noise level of 85 dBA measured a 3 feet from the VSD within the VSD entire operating range. D. Design: 1. Inverter Type: Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) with variable frequency and pulse width, transistorized-type design. Construct of modular rack assemblies to facilitate maintenance. 2. Rectifier: Six pulse, solid state, full-wave bridge rectified, sufficient to supply full load to inverter. 3. Cooling: Air cooling with replaceable filters. Exhaust air from top of unit. 4. Front Access: Provide modular design for major components accessible/replaceable from the front. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Fabrication: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 1 enclosure with dead front construction. Designed with front access for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged doors equipped with latch handle and lock. 2. Enclosure Finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with semi-gloss enamel. 3. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug. F. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard Features: a. Ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. b. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. c. Capable of starting a rotating load and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without tripping safety devices or damaging components. d. Equipped with automatic extended power ride through circuit for up to 5 cycles. e. RS-485 serial communication port standard. f. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled. 2. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate input current or KW (True RMS values), output voltage, output frequency, elapsed time meter. 3. Status Indicators: Provide separate indicators for input power on, input power fault, overcurrent fault, overvoltage & undervoltage faults, ground-fault, overtemperature fault. 4. Adjustments: a. Volt per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent. b. Minimum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 4 - 40 Hertz. c. Maximum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 40 - 90 Hertz. d. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110 percent of rated. e. Acceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, .5 - 30 seconds. f. Deceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, 1 - 30 seconds. 5. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch and digital manual speed control located on front of door. 6. Input Signals: Provide interface with any of the following control inputs: a. D.C. Analog Voltages: 0 - 5 VDC and 0 - 10 VDC. b. D.C. Analog Currents: 0 - 5 ma and 4 - 20 ma. c. Pneumatic signal: 3- 15 psi 7. Analog Output Signals: Two (2) analog outputs proportional to frequency, output voltage or output current. 8. Digital Output Signals: Two (2) digital relay outputs, form C contacts, rated 8 amps at 24 VDC and .4 amps at 250 VAC. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Transient Protection: Include integral protection on the input line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
COORDINATION A. Provide the necessary control interface that will accept and understand the input from the controlling entity. Verify the interface requirements with the temperature control contractor. B. Coordinate with the driven equipment manufacturer to obtain information about any critical speeds which must be locked out in the VSD controls to avoid problems with noise or vibration caused by harmonic resonance in mechanical systems. C. Coordinate the final location of VSD with manufacturer and Mechanical Contractor.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Motors: 1. Install motors, power factor correction capacitors, and drives in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Power factor correction capacitors to wired motor starters by Division 26. 3. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. 4. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. 5. Check rotation of motor driven equipment and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Align all drive systems and adjust belt tension. Remove pulley set screws, install thread locking substance on threads, and reinstall screws, torquing to manufacturer's specifications. 7. Check and adjust belt guards so that no parts are in contact with rotating equipment. 8. Install shaft ground kit on motors for use with variable frequency drives. 9. Wire shaft ground kit on motors for use with variable frequency drives. B. Variable Speed Drives (VSD): 1. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and NEMA ICS 3.1. 2. Provide a insulated grounding conductor from the source of power to the VSD and from the motor to the VSD. 3. Interlock the disconnect located at each of the motors with the VSD, so that the VSD will restart the motor and ramp up, rather than trying to start the motor across the line when the disconnect is turned back on. 4. Fasten cabinets and enclosures permanently to the building structure or unistrut cage adjacent to the motors.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Install VSD’s so as to not restrict maintenance access to coils, filters, belts, etc. Field verify locations with Owner and mechanical contractor. 6. Provide all control connections to the VSD from the Division 15 contractors. 7. Factory connect all internal wiring. Install all wiring between each VSD enclosure and verify that all internal wiring is complete. 8. Provide all power connections, including all power wiring associated with any isolation transformers, disconnect switches, and accessories. Include power wiring from drive to motor. 9. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. 10. All control connections outside the VSD assemblies, to sensors or other control devices are provided by the temperature control contractor. 11. Install each VSD adjacent to the motor it controls. Keep lead length as short as possible from the VSD to the motor. Provide unistrut rack secured to building structure to mount VSD if necessary. Mount VSD out from under piping. 12. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amps, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 13. Provide separate conduit and wire from power source to VSD and from VSD to motor. Do not combine power feeds for multiple VSD’s. Do not combine input and output wiring in same conduit. Do not use wireway. 3.3
TESTING AND STARTUP A. Test each VSD at the factory and again after installation as described below: 1. Certify that each VSD used on this Project has met the following factory tests: a. The factory shall perform acceptance tests of devices supplied by outside sources to assure quality in conformance with their standards. b. The complete VSD shall be subjected to a heat stress test. While subjecting it to an ambient temperature of 122° F. for no less than 48 consecutive hours, test each unit by simulated operation. The manufacturer shall provide certification that the heat stress test was performed and each unit passed. Rebuild any unit that fails and again subject it to a complete heat stress test including simulated operation. Continue testing until the unit passes or until it has failed for the fourth time. A fourth failure of the same unit makes that entire unit unacceptable for use on the Project. c. The factory shall test each VSD to determine the acceptability of its operating control section. Power up the sensors, controllers, power supply and all other control components and then cause the inverter output frequency to vary by changing the control parameter in accordance with these specifications. d. Subject each VSD to the ANSI Standard C39.90-1978, "Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Test" procedures to demonstrate that it is capable of withstanding 3000 volt transients.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Startup and Acceptance Tests: a. Perform on-site testing and initial startup using factory trained personnel for all systems connected to a VSD. Arrange the tests with the Engineer and the Mechanical Contractor. Perform them at no additional cost to the Project. b. Perform at least the following field operation tests and write a report to the Engineer that each VSD met the stated guidelines. 1) Minimum output frequency = 4 hz ± 1 hz. 2) Maximum output frequency = 90 hz ± 1 hz. 3) Acceleration rate from dead stop to full speed tested at the maximum and the minimum rate adjustment. 4) Deceleration rate from full speed to dead stop tested at the maximum and the minimum rate adjustment. 5) Current limit = 115% ± 5% (ODP) or 100% ± 5% (TEFC or TEAO) of motor nameplate ampacity. 6) Over-temperature protection = manufacturer's rating at full motor load ± 5° F. 7) Control signal setpoint ± 10% of that specified. 8) Control setpoint offset ± 10% of that specified. 9) Simulated power outage and control system reaction. 10)Attempt starting into a rotating load to determine if self protection is adequate. 11)Testing the installation to verify the harmonic distortion factor does not exceed the criteria specified. Provide a written report to the Engineer indicating all test results. 3.4
DEMONSTRATION A. Fully instruct the Owner's personnel as to the proper operation of the equipment. B. Arrange for and conduct a user training session at the Project site to explain the operation of each type of factory assembled VSD package. Allow at least four (4) hours of on-site instructions. Schedule the training sessions with the Owner and advise the Engineer of all such arrangements. C. Provide the necessary control interface that will accept and understand the input from the controlling entity. Verify the interface requirements with the temperature control contractor. D. Coordinate with the driven equipment manufacturer to obtain information about any critical speeds which must be locked out in the VSD controls to avoid problems with noise or vibration caused by harmonic resonance in mechanical systems. E. Coordinate the final location of VSD with manufacturer and Mechanical Contractor. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Flexible pipe connectors.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 22 13 – Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: 1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external controls.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage. B. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.9
WARRANTY A. Provide year warranty under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Adsco. 2. Flexonics. 3. Keflex. 4. Metra-Flex. 5. Minnesota Flexible Corp. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Steel Piping: 1. Manufacturers: Flexonics Flexon Type A. 2. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel. 3. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided stainless steel. 4. Pressure Rating for Flexon Type A, single braided: 450 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 2” pipe. 210 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 4” pipe. 150 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 10” pipe. 5. Joint: Flanged, threaded or welded as specified for pipe joints. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Length: Flange size plus 10 inches. C. Copper Piping: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flexonics Series 301. 2. Inner Hose: Bronze 3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 735 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 1/2” pipe. 460 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 1” pipe. 280 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 2” pipe. 5. Joint: Flanged, threaded or welded as specified for pipe joints. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Length: Flange size plus 10 inches.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.2
ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides. 1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for insulation thickness same as adjoining pipe, minimum 3 inch travel.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion. B. Provide flexible connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provide on pumps. C. Provide line size flexible connectors. D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermometers and thermometer wells. B. Test plugs.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturer: Trerice Model BX93000. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Palmer. 2. Taylor. 3. Weiss. 4. Wexler 5. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear glass. 3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT long. 4. Accuracy: plus-minus one scale division. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.2
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.3
TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug: 1. Manufacturers: a. Pete’s Plug. b. Sisco. c. Substitutions: None. 2. 1/4 inch fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: a. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. b. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. c. Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. Two 3-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. 1) Scaled for each range required b. Two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes. c. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale range: 25 to 125 degrees F. 2) Scale range: 50 to 500 degrees F.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install gage taps in piping. B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. C. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. D. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. E. Provide the following thermometer temperature ranges unless noted otherwise: 1. Heating hot water; 30-240 degrees F. F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. I. Locate test plugs where indicated.
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Stem Type Thermometers: 1. Headers to central equipment. 2. Coils - inlets and outlets. 3. Coil banks - inlets and outlets. 4. Boilers - inlets and outlets. B. Thermometer Socket Location: 1. Control valves 1 inch & larger - inlets and outlets. 2. Reheat coils - inlets and outlets. 3. Cabinet heaters - inlets and outlets. 4. Unit heaters - inlets and outlets. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves for hydronic and steam piping systems. 1. Gate. 2. Globe. 3. Ball. 4. Butterfly. 5. Check. 6. Drain.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on valves, and accessories. information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.4
Provide manufacturers catalog
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GATE VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model G-623, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.2
GATE VALVES - STEAM & STEAM CONDENSATE (0 - 125 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-105, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, threaded ends. B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model G-623, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.3
GLOBE VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model D-512, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 150, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.4
GLOBE VALVES - STEAM & STEAM CONDENSATE (0 - 125 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-16, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, threaded ends. B. Larger than 2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model D-512-6, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Class 150, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.5
BALL VALVES – HYDRONIC (0 - 125 PSIG) A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 77-100/77-200 Series, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Construction: Class 150, 600 psig wog, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, brass blow-out proof stem, lever handle [with balancing stops], solder or threaded ends [with union]. Extended stems for use on insulated pipe. B. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 82-100/82-200 Series, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Construction: Class 150, 600 psig wog, bronze, three piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, brass blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded ends. Extended stems for use on insulated pipe.]
2.6
BUTTERFLY VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. Manufacturer: Mueller Steam Specialties Series 65/66: 1. Centerline. 2. Crane. 3. Hammond. 4. Kitz. 5. Milwaukee. 6. Nibco. 7. Anvil Gruvlok.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. Victaulic. 9. Substitutions: None. B. Construction 1-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psig wog, cast or ductile iron body, lug or grooved ends, extended neck. C. Bronze disc. D. Resilient replaceable EPDM seat, bubble tight shut off. E. Valves 6 inches and smaller, used for shut off service, shall have a latch-lock handle. When used for throttling, valves shall have an infinite throttling handle with indicator disc adjustable stop. F. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have worm screw enclosed operator with positive indicator, and when used for throttling service shall have adjustable stop. G. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.7
SWING CHECK VALVES HYDRONIC & STEAM & STEAM CONDENSATE (150 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 1/2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-309/B-319, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Anvil Gruvlok. g. Victaulic. h. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded or grooved ends. B. 3 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model G-931, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Anvil Gruvlok. g. Victaulic. h. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Class 125, 3 percent nickel cast iron body and disc, stainless steel seat and pin, flanged or grooved connections. 2.8
NON-SLAM CHECK VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Mueller Steam Specialties Model 71AHB6-H or equivalent by: a. Mission. b. Titan. c. Anvil Gruvlok. d. Victaulic. e. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body, bronze swing disc with Buna-N insert seat, flanged connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
3.3
APPLICATION A. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. B. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. C. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. D. Use butterfly valves in heating, chilled water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves. E. Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service. F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. G. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain. H. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, ductwork, and equipment hangers and supports. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 23 22 13 – Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping. E. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork Casing and Plenums.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping B. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of hydronic, steam and steam condensate, refrigerant piping and ductwork.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Grinnell 4. Michigan. 5. Tolco. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Hydronic and Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, and split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3
INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Grinnell Figure 282 (8 inches and smaller). Grinnell Figure 282 with Figure 66 attachment (larger than 8 inches). Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. B-Line Systems. 2. Michigan.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.4
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers: Galvanized steel band iron or rolled angle and 3/8 inch diameter rods. Fastenings and hardware to be cadmium plated or stainless steel. B. Wall Supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket. C. Vertical Supports: Rolled angles at floor.
2.5
FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.6
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. G. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. H. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.7
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer: 1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications. E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
3.3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. K. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protective shield. L. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. M. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Chapter 4, Hangers and Supports.
3.5
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Provide for all floor mounted mechanical equipment. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.6
FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash, and seal. C. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.7
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.8
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe and duct through-penetrations of the following fire-resistancerated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.9
SCHEDULES A. Piping: PIPE SIZE Inches
MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet
1/2 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 3 4 to 6 8 to 12
6 8 10 10 14
HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 7/8
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP, plus connected piping and ductwork. B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated in schedule. C. Use concrete inertia bases for base mounted pumps over 10 HP.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting dimensions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators are properly installed and adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation 1. Flexonics 2. Korfund 3. Mason Industries. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. 5. Vibration Mountings and Controls. 6. Substitutions: None.
2.2
VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Open Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops. C. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance. D. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, rubber hanger with threaded insert. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. E. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum ½ inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: 1/2 inch thick waffle pads bonded each side of ¼ inch thick steel plate. F. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. G. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install isolation for motor driven equipment. C. Install spring hangers without binding. D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. F. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inch static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. G. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently to nearest flexible pipe connector. as follows: 1. Up to 4 inch Diameter: First three points of support. 2. 5 to 8 inch Diameter: First four points of support. 3. 10 inch Diameter and Over: First six points of support. 4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment. H. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
3.3
EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE A. Floor mounted fans and factory assembled air handling units: open spring isolator with 1 1/2” deflection and thrust restraint. Use concrete inertia base for fans in excess of 3.5 inch WC or motors in excess of 40 HP. B. Suspended fans 1 HP and smaller: rubber hanger. C. Suspended fans and air handling units: open spring hanger with 1 1/2 inch deflection. D. Roof mounted fans, condensers and condensing units: restrained closed spring isolators with 1 ½ inch deflection. E. Isolated piping connected to equipment: spring hanger. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
1.5
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: numbers.
Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
C. Valve Tag Chart. 1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Brady. 3. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2
TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges. C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list plastic laminated.
2.3
STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Ductwork and Equipment: 2 inch high letters. B. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.4
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify rooftop units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. I. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify with rooftop unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at rooftop unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. L. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification: 1. Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. 2. Equipment: Use nomenclature as noted on the drawings. 3. Ductwork: Use description as noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of new air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hot water heating systems. C. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of chilled water cooling systems. D. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. E. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment C. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC D. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC
1.3
REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance. B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers. C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Prior to commencing work, submit detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms. E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. F. Provide reports in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB forms, containing information indicated in Schedules. 1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Services provided by independent qualified Testing and Balancing Agency. B. Provide services to Mechanical Contractor. C. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. All work to be included under this project. B. The balancing contractor shall be certified by AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) or NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau). The air and hydronic balancing work shall be completed by the following certified contractors: 1. Air Systems Engineering 2. Bal Tech, Inc. 3. Systems Management & Balancing of Minnesota, Inc. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all mechanical systems and provide certified reports that all systems are in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. TAB Contractor shall work with mechanical, ventilation, and control contractors during final phase of construction to assure that all systems are performing to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.
1.8
WORK SEQUENCE A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Temperature Control Contractor to provide copies of point verification and sequence verification to TAB Contractor. This will serve as written notification to the TAB Contractor to begin testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.9
SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Air systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Water systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 3. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 4. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 5. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 6. Duct systems are clean of debris. 7. Fans are rotating correctly. 8. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 9. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 10. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 11. Air outlets are installed and connected. 12. Duct system leakage is minimized. 13. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 14. Pumps are rotating correctly. 15. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 16. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
3.3
Make
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. Adjust outside air to within 0 to plus 10 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
3.4
ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final field observation by the Engineer, recheck random selections of data recorded in report up to 10% of tested devices. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Engineer. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.5
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, outside air, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets with direct reading velocity meters or flow hoods in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required, including belts and pulleys. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air, return air, relief air and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. L. Verify operation of temperature control dampers to assure shut-off and proper position with controller. Make adjustments if necessary. M. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, relief and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
N. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control. 3.6
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated circuit balancing valves and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.7
EXISTING WATER SYSTEMS A. Test existing water systems to be modified prior to construction. Reset existing branches serving areas of no work to conditions prior to construction. Balance branches serving remodeled areas, to new conditions.
3.8
SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Air Coils Air Cooled Chiller Air Handling Units Air Inlets and Outlets Boilers Fans Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units Pumps - HVAC B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Pump Data: Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l. Shut off, total head pressure m. Variable flow pumps: Flow rate, pressure drop, RPM, BHP, from design flow rate to VFD minimum in 10% increments. 7. Combustion Test: a. Burner manufacturer b. Model number c. Serial number d. Firing rate e. Overfire draft f. Gas meter timing dial size g. Gas meter time per revolution h. Gas pressure at meter outlet i. Gas flow rate j. Heat input k. Burner manifold gas pressure l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO) m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2) n. Percent oxygen (O2) o. Percent excess air p. Flue gas temperature at outlet q. Ambient temperature r. Net stack temperature s. Percent stack loss
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
t. Percent combustion efficiency u. Heat output 8. Cooling Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Entering water temperature, design and actual i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual j. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual k. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual l. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual m. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual n. Air pressure drop, design and actual 9. Heating Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Entering water temperature, design and actual i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual j. Entering air temperature, design and actual k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual l. Air pressure drop, design and actual 10. Air Moving Equipment a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 11. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 12. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 13. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor 14. Duct Leak Test: a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure c. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor f. Test apparatus 1) Blower 2) Orifice, tube size 3) Orifice size 4) Calibrated g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage 15. Flow Measuring Station (CBV, Venturi, etc.): a. Identification/number b. Location c. Size d. Manufacturer e. Model number Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
f. Serial number g. Design Flow rate h. Design pressure drop i. Actual/final pressure drop j. Actual/final flow rate k. Station calibrated setting 16. Terminal Unit Data: a. Manufacturer b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct c. Identification/number d. Location e. Model number f. Size g. Minimum static pressure h. Minimum design air flow i. Maximum design air flow j. Maximum actual air flow k. Inlet static pressure 17. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow 18. Sound Level Report: a. Location b. Octave bands - equipment off c. Octave bands - equipment on 19. Vibration Test: Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Location of points: 1) Fan bearing, drive end 2) Fan bearing, opposite end 3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable) 4) Motor bearing, drive end 5) Motor bearing, opposite end 6) Casing (bottom or top) 7) Casing (side) 8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge) 9) Duct after flexible connection (suction) b. Test readings: 1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement 2) Vertical, velocity and displacement 3) Axial, velocity and displacement c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration d. Unusual conditions at time of test e. Vibration source (if non-complying) END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductwork insulation. B. Duct Liner.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork Casing and Plenums: Duct liner.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. ‘K’ value : .24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F unfaced side, 150 degrees F faced side. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: less than 5 percent by weight. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. E. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.2
GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. ‘K’ value : 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F unfaced side, 150 degrees F faced side. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: less than 1% by volume. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. E. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 2.3
GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville Permacote Linacoustic Standard. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertanTeed. 2. Knauf 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with acrylic polymer impregnated surface and edge coat. 1. ‘K’ Value: maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: 0.30 for 1/2 inch thickness, 0.45 for 1 inch thickness, 0.60 for 1-1/2 inch thickness, 0.70 for 2 inch thickness. D. Adhesive: 1. Waterproof, fire-retardant type. E. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with press-on head.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulate ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. E. Duct Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. spacing.
Refer to SMACNA Standards for
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Combustion Air Ducts: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber - external: 1 1/2 inches thick. B. Entire Plenum below Roof Fans: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber -external: 1 inch thick. C. Exhaust within 10 ft of Exterior:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Relief Air Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Return Ducts and Outdoor Air Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. F. Supply Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. G. Transfer Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner: 1/2 inch thick. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 07 16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment insulation. B. Covering.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. E. Section 23 23 13 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties: Placement of inserts.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. C. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. D. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type). E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. H. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. I. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled. C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer. Farmington Elementary School 23 07 16 -1 January 15, 2013 Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 R11-1142.000
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville 1000 Series Spin-Glas. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. [Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film] [Vinyl]. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 2.2
GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville Precipitator Spin-Glas. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by weight. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2.3
HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE A. Manufacturer: Schuller Manville Thermo-12. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Certain Teed 2. Knauf 3. Ownes-Corning 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.40 at 300 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F. 3. Density: 15 lb/cu ft. D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inches stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. E. Insulating Cement.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 16 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.4
CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturer: Armstrong AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Halstead. 2. IMCOA/Nomaco. 3. Rubatex. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric (or unicellular polyolefin), molded or sheet. 1. ‘K’ Value; 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 5 percent by weight. 5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.10 perm-inches. 6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. D. Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.5
JACKETS A. PVC Plastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Zeston. b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. 2. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.002 perm-inches. d. Thickness: 10 mil minimum (use standard stock dimensions). e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation. C. Aluminum Jacket: 1. Thickness: .025 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 16 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. D. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. E. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. F. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. G. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. H. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. I. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. J. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. K. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. L. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. M. Cover glass fiber insulation with aluminum jacket. N. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 16 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
O. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Heating Systems: 1. Pump Bodies: No Insulation 2. Heat Exchangers/Converters: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid Insulation: 3 inches thick. b. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: 4 inches thick. 3. Air Separators: a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 3 inches thick. b. Glass Fiber, Rigid Insulation: 2 inches thick. c. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: 3-1/2 inches thick. 4. Expansion Tanks: No Insulation B. Cooling Systems: 1. Pump Bodies: a. Cellular Foam Insulation: 3/4 inch thick. 2. Air Separators: a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 1 inch thick. b. Glass Fiber, Rigid Insulation: 1 inches thick. c. Cellular Foam Insulation: 3/4 inch thick. 3. Expansion Tanks: a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 1 inch thick. b. Glass Fiber, Rigid Insulation: 1 inches thick. c. Cellular Foam Insulation: 3/4 inch thick. 4. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated): a. Cellular Foam Insulation: 3/4 inch thick. 5. Equipment Exposed to Freezing with Heat Tracing: a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 3 inches thick. b. Glass Fiber, Rigid Insulation: 2 inches thick. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 16 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. E. Section 23 23 13 - Refrigerant Piping, Valves and Specialties: Placement of inserts.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. B. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus and AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. 2. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 ob/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 10x10. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. J. Outdoor Breather Mastic:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. K. Insulating Cement. 2.2
CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturer: Armstrong AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Halstead. 2. IMCOA/Nomaco. 3. Rubatex. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric (or unicellular polyolefin), molded or sheet. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 5 percent by weight. 5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.10 perm-inches. 6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. D. Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.3
JACKETS A. PVC Plastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Zeston. b. Substitutions: None. 2. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.002 perm-inches. d. Thickness: 10 mil minimum (use standard stock dimensions). e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation. C. Aluminum Jacket:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Thickness: .025 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units may be reduced to 1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the unit. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. K. Exterior Applications: Increase scheduled insulation thickness by 1/2 inch. Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Heating Systems: 1. Hot Water and Steam/Steam Condensate: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 2 inch and less, 2-1/2 inch to 6 inch, 8 inch and larger. 2) Thickness: 1-1/2 inch, 2 inch, 3-1/2 inch. (12 foot runouts 2 inch and less, 1inch thick). B. Cooling Systems: 1. Chilled Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1 inch and less, 1-1/4 inch to 2 inch, 2-1/2 inch and larger. 2) Thickness: 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, 1 inch. (12 foot runouts 2 inch and less, 1/2 inch thick) 2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: all sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. b. Cellular Foam: (not for use in air plenum ceilings). 1) Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and less. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1
DEFINITION A. The Commissioning Authority will be an independent agency (separate from this Contract) selected by the Owner to perform the Work outlined in the Contract Documents. B. The Work shall include coordination and documentation of all Verification and Functional Performance Test procedures on new and modified mechanical ventilation equipment and systems to ensure operation and performance. C. Work under this contract shall conform to requirements of Division 1, General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Supplementary Conditions. D. Commissioning work shall be a team effort to ensure that all mechanical equipment and systems have been completely and properly installed, function together correctly to meet the design intent, and document system performance parameters for fine-tuning of control sequences and operational procedures. Commissioning shall coordinate system documentation, equipment start-up, control system calibration, testing and balancing, and Verification and Functional Performance Testing. E. The commissioning team shall be made up of representatives from the Owner, design professionals, major equipment suppliers, and construction trades. The trades represented on the commissioning team shall include, but not be limited to, sheet metal, piping and fitting, controls, test and balance, and electrical. The lead person for each trade who will actually perform or supervise the work is to be designated as the representative to the commissioning team. Responsibility for various steps of the commissioning process shall be divided among the members of the commissioning team, as described in this section. F. The Commissioning Authority shall have responsibility for coordinating and directing each step of the commissioning process. G. Mechanical system installation, start-up, testing, balancing, preparation of O & M manuals, and operator training are the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractors (under this contract), with coordination, observation, verification and commissioning the responsibility of this commissioning authority. The Commissioning process does not relieve Division 23 from the obligations to complete all portions of work in a satisfactory and fully operational manner. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 08 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 20 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings for: 1. Heating water piping system. 2. Chilled water piping system. 3. Insulated buried hydronic piping system. 4. Equipment drains and overflows. 5. Unions, flanges and couplings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. D. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. E. Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. F. Section 23 25 31 - Water Treatment for Heating Systems. G. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. B. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. F. ASTM D1785 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. G. ASTM D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series). H. ASTM D2310 - Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
Provide
C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: procedures. 1.6
Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual routing of piping.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9 and AWS D1.1.
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of welders.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
HEATING WATER PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: Malleable iron or forged steel welding type fittings. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded or grooved. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Cast brass, or solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. Grooved. Expanded end methods that thins the wall thickness is not acceptable.
2.2
CHILLED WATER PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: Malleable iron or forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded or grooved. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Cast brass or solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. Grooved. Expanded end methods that thins the wall thickness is not acceptable.
2.3
BURIED HYDRONIC PIPING A. All underground lines shall be XTRU-THERM, as manufactured by PERMA-PIPE. All straight sections, fittings, anchors and other accessories shall be factory fabricated, insulated and jacketed. Field insulation of fittings will not be allowed. The piping system layout shall be analyzed by the piping system manufacturer, to determine the stresses displacements of service pipe. The piping system design and manufacture shall be in strict conformance with ASME B31.1, latest edition. Installation of the pipe system shall being accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Factory-trained field technical assistance shall be provided for critical periods of installation, unloading, field joint instruction and testing. B. Pipe: 1. The service pipe shall be standard weight ASTM A53 Gr. B, ERW carbon steel. All joints shall be butt welded for 2.5 inches and larger, and socket or butt welded for 2 inches and smaller. Where possible, straight sections shall be supplied in 40 foot random lengths, with piping exposed at each end for field joint fabrication. C. Accessories: 1. Elbows, tees, reducers, anchors, field joints and end seals shall be designed and factory fabricated to prevent the ingress of moisture into the system. D. Insulation:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. The service pipe insulation shall be polyurethane foam with 2 lb/ft3 minimum density, 90% minimum closed cell content and maximum initial thermal conductivity of 0.16 Btu-in-ft20 F. The insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the service pipe and jacket and shall be bonded to both. Systems using open cell insulation or a nonbonded design shall not be allowed. The insulation shall be provided to the minimum thickness specified below: Pipe Size (in)
Minimum Insulation Thickness (in) Chilled Water
Hot Water
1 to 8
1
1
10 to 12
1
1.5
E. Insulation Jacket: 1. The outer protective insulation jacket shall be seamless high density polyethylene (HDPE) in accordance with ASTM D1248, Type 3, Class C. PVC or tape materials are not allowed. The minimum thickness of the HDPE jacket shall be as follows: Jacket OD (in)
Minimum Jacket Thickness (in)
OD≤ 12
0.125
12 < OD ≤ 24
0.150
F. Fittings: 1. All fittings shall be factory prefabricated and preinsulated. Straight tangent lengths shall be added to all ends, so that all field joints are at straight sections of pipe. Elbow insulation jackets shall be molded HDPE. Tee insulation jackets shall be extrusion welded or butt fusion welded HDPE. Gluing, taping or hot air welding of the insulation jacket shall not be allowed. G. Field Joints: 1. The service pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 psig or 1.5 times the design pressure whichever is greater. Insulation shall then be poured in place into the field joint area. All field applied insulation shall be placed only in straight sections of pipe. Field insulation of fittings is not acceptable. The installer shall seal the field joint area with a heat shrinkable adhesive backed sleeve. Backfilling shall not begin until the heat shrink sleeve has cooled. All insulation and jacketing materials for the field joint shall be furnished by PERMA-PIPE. H. Backfill: 1. A 4 inch layer of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench, to provide a uniform bedding for the pipe. The entire trench width shall be evenly backfilled with a similar material as the bedding in 6 inch compacted layers to a minimum height of 6 inches above the top of the insulated pipe. The remaining trench shall be evenly and continuously backfilled and compacted in uniform layers with suitable excavated soil. 2.4
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 galvanized. 1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or malleable iron.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Joints: Threaded, or grooved mechanical couplings. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Cast brass, or solder wrought copper or grooved ends. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or grooved. Expanded end methods that thins the wall thickness is not acceptable. 2.5
UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 inches: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on. 2. Copper Piping: Bronze. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil Gruvlok. b. Victaulic. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock and provide rigidity use a rigid design coupling. For areas designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion, use flexible style couplings; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 3. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 4. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, or Victaulic Clearflow dielectric waterway, water impervious isolation barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 31
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install piping to ASME B31.9. C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Provide expansion loops where shown on Drawings. Anchor pipe with U-bolt or iron bar clamps secured to building structure. Provide guides to maintain position and alignment of piping. Where space does not allow space for expansion loop, provide expansion joints. I. Install runouts from mains and risers with swing joints of sufficient length to absorb vertical expansion or contraction of risers and horizontal expansion or contraction of mains. J. Provide access where valves and fittings are concealed. K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Provide manual drain at low points and bottom of risers. L. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. M. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. N. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. O. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. P. Install control valves. Run piping full size to valve, use concentric increasers at valves outlets and eccentric reducers at inlets.
3.3
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Test under hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times normal operating pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of four hours. B. Apply tests to all piping and equipment which a part of these systems, including tanks, pumps, and valves, except for items that might be damaged because of excessive pressures. C. Start systems following a procedure that will remove all air. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 20 19 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Air vents. B. Circuit balancing valves. C. Test plugs. D. Flow meters. E. Relief valves. F. Strainers. G. Glycol specialties.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 25 31 - Water Treatment for Heating Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: procedures.
1.5
Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of glycol system for one year from date of substantial completion. B. Visit four times during the first year to make glycol fluid concentration analysis on site with refractive index measurement instrument. Detail findings with maintenance personnel in writing of corrective actions needed including analysis and amounts of glycol or water added.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bell and Gossett. b. Braukmann. c. Hoffman Specialty. d. Taco. e. Substitutions: None. 2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
2.2
CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES (MULTI-TURN) A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco. 2. Tour & Andersson. 3. Substitutions: None. B. General: Balancing valves with provision for connecting portable differential pressure meter. Each meter connection for pressure and temperature probes. Provide precise flow measurement, precise flow balancing, and positive shut-off with no drip seat. Solder, threaded, flanged or grooved end connections. C. Construction: Nonferrous pressure diecast nonporous copper allow, or ductile iron conforming to ASTM Grade A535.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Calibration: Control flow within 2 percent of selected rating. E. Control Mechanism: One, four, eight, twelve, or sixteen 360 degree adjustment turns with memory feature, locking feature tamper-proof setting, and digital readout. F. Accessories: 1. Drain kit for field mounting. 2. Insulation kit - preformed rigid polyurethane insulation for complete enclosure of valve. 3. Portable meter: Carrying case containing one, 3 percent accuracy pressure gage with 0-60 feet pressure range for 500 psig maximum working pressure, color coded hoses for low and high pressure connections, and connectors suitable for connection to read-out valves. 2.3
TEST PLUGS A. 1/4 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: 1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. Two 2-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. 1) Two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes. 2) Scale to match system. b. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale to match system.
2.4
RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 174A or 740, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, sized for application. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 40, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.5
STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metra-Flex. 2. Sarco. 3. Anvil Gruvlok. 4. Victaulic. 5. Watts. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 400 psig wog or Class 250, Y pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 2 inch to 4 inch: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
2.6
GLYCOL SPECIALITES A. Mixing Tank: 55 gallon steel drum with fittings suitable for filling and hand pump for charging, rubber hose for connection of hand pump to system. B. Glycol Solution: Refer to Section 23 25 31.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. E. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. F. Provide radiator balancing valves on water outlet from terminal heating units such as radiation, unit heaters, and fan coil units. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Base mounted pumps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. E. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. F. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pumps shall operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation. B. Pumps shall be non-overloading in parallel or individual operation. C. Pumps shall operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. D. Pumps shall operate from zero flow to 50% above design flow without exceeding rated full load nameplate horsepower.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: recommendations.
Indicate hanging and support requirements and
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters’ Laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell and Gossett Model 1510. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Taco. b. Substitutions: None. B. Type: Horizontal shaft, base mounted, single stage, end suction design, radially or horizontally split casing, for 175 psig maximum working pressure. C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. E. Bearings: Grease lubricated roller or ball bearings. F. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve. G. Seal: Upgraded silicon carbide (Sic) glycol-rated seals, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. Tungsten-carbide may be substituted. Standard carbon-ceramic seals are not acceptable. H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. I. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. J. Performance: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings. K. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings. 2. Motor: 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise; refer to Section 15090. 3. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. L. Provide OSHA approved coupler guard.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Contractor to purchase system start-up from the system supplier and supplier to perform start-up and submit written report. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. recommended by manufacturer.
Provide no less than minimum as
C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. Refer to Section 23 05 48. D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and pump suction fitting on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve or combination pump discharge valve on pump discharge. E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. G. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. H. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. I. Lubricate pumps before start-up. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. C. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. D. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. E. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. F. Section 23 22 19 - Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties. G. Section 23 25 31 - Water Treatment for Heating Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. B. ASME B31.1 - Code for Power Piping. C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. When more than one piping system material is selected, ensure systems components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Use dielectric unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections. C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalogue information.
Provide
C. Welders Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with ASME/SEC 9. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: procedures. 1.6
Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9.
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 and ASME B31.1 code for installation of piping system. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of welders. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPING (15 PSIG MAXIMUM) A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, 0.375 inches wall for sizes 12 inch and over, black. 1. Fittings: Malleable iron Class 125, or forged steel Class 125. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded.
2.2
LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 80, 0.375 inches wall for sizes 12 inch and over, black. 1. Fittings: Malleable iron Class 125 or forged steel Class 125. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded.
2.3
UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, threaded. B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed non-asbestos graphite fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever work is suspended during construction protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 31.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 23 05 16. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level. H. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over trapped sections. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. J. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. K. Avoid installation of piping above or within 3’ of electrical panels or electrical equipment. L. Install control valves. Run piping full size to valve, use concentric increasers at valves outlets and eccentric reducers at inlets.
3.3
TESTING OF PIPING A. Test low pressure steam and condensate piping at 50 psig for 24 hours with water or air. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 22 19 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Steam traps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation. B. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. C. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. C. ASTM A105 - Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components. D. ASTM A126 - Grey Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. E. ASTM A216 - Steel Casings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service. F. ASTM A395 - Ferric Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Use Float and Thermostatic Traps for: 1. Unit heaters. 2. Convertors. 3. Heating coils. 4. Main headers. 5. Branch lines.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Steam Traps: 1. Select to handle minimum of three times maximum condensate load of apparatus served. 2. Pressure Differentials: a. Low Pressure Systems (15 psi maximum): 2 psi.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 19-1
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
1.6
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: 1. Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. 2. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each specialty. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application, selection, and hookup configuration. Include pipe and accessory elevations.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, servicing requirements, and recommended spare parts lists.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State or Municipality standard for installation of boilers and pressure vessels.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of steam and steam condensate piping and specialties. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose indicated. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 19-2
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
FLOAT AND THERMOSTATIC TRAPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Hoffman Specialty. 3. Sarco. 4. MEPCO. 5. Substitutions: None. B. Trap: 1. Construction: ASTM A126, cast iron body and bolted cover, stainless steel or bronze bellows type air vent, stainless steel or copper float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly 2. Rating: 15 psig WSP. 3. Features: Access to internal parts without disturbing piping, bottom drain plug. 4. Accessories: Gage glass with shut-off cocks.
2.2
SAFETY RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: Kunkle Model 252, or equivalent by: 1. Crosby. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. B. Valve: Bronze body, stainless steel valve spring, stem, and trim, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. C. Accessories: Drip pan elbow.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Steam Traps: 1. Provide minimum 3/4 inch size on steam mains and branches. 2. Install with union or flanged connections at both ends. 3. Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet, and gate valve and check valve at discharge. 4. Provide minimum 10 inch long, line size dirt pocket between apparatus and trap. C. Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during temporary and trial usage, and until system has been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale. D. Rate relief valves for pressure upstream of pressure reducing station, for full operating capacity. Set relief at maximum 20 percent above reduced pressure.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 19-3
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
E. When several relief valve vents are connected to a common header, header cross section area shall equal sum of individual vent outlet areas. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 22 19-4
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 23 13 REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping. B. Refrigerant. C. Valves. D. Moisture and liquid indicators. E. Strainers. F. Check valves. G. Pressure regulators. H. Pressure relief valves. I. Filter-driers. J. Solenoid valves. K. Expansion valves. L. Receivers. M. Flexible connections.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation. D. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. B. ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers. C. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves. D. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants. E. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. F. ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants. G. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. H. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. I. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. L. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. C. Refrigeration specialties as noted on Drawings and in this Section. D. Receivers: Use on all systems with insufficient storage capacity for pumpdown. E. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. C. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing, riser requirements, double-riser requirements. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: isolation for servicing.
Indicate support, connection requirements, and
G. Submit welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9. 1.6
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC 9. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purpose indicated.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 23 05 00. B. Provide two refrigeration oil test kits each containing everything required to conduct one test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed. 1. Fittings: Cast copper. 2. Joints: Flared. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, 0.365 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and over, black. 1. Fittings: Forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Welded.
2.2
REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34; 1. R410a.
2.3
MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco. 2. Sporlan.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Substitutions: None. B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig, and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. 2.4
VALVES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Henry. b. Mueller Brass. c. Superior. d. Substitutions: None. 2. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. B. Packed Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Henry. b. Mueller Brass. c. Superior. d. Substitutions: None. 2. Forged brass, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Henry. b. Mueller Brass. c. Superior. d. Substitutions: None. 2. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 325 degrees F. D. Service Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Henry. b. Mueller Brass.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
c. Superior. d. Substitutions: None. 2. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psig. 2.5
STRAINERS A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psig. B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen, for maximum working pressure of 430 psig.
2.6
CHECK VALVES A. Globe Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F. B. Straight Through Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 250 degrees F.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.7
PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco. 2. Sporlan. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psig range, for maximum working pressure of 500psig.
2.8
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco. 2. Sporlan. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 450 psig setting; selected to ASHRAE 15.
2.9
FILTER-DRIERS A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support, sufficient filter area. ARI 730 rating for system tons. B. Permanent Straight Through Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco. b. Sporlan. c. Substitutions: None. 2. ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of 5psig. Rating: ARI 710 flow capacity of rated system tons.
2.10 SOLENOID VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco. 2. Sporlan. 3. Substitutions: None. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. Stem shall permit manual operation in case of coil failure. C. Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light. 2.11 EXPANSION VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco. 2. Sporlan. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with capillary tube and remote sensing bulb. 1. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. percent in direction of oil return.
Slope piping one
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. I. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. L. Insulate equipment and piping; refer to Section 23 07 16 and Section 23 07 19. M. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. N. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass. O. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. P. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. Q. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. R. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. S. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. 3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 23 13-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 25 31 WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of piping systems. B. Water treatment system for: 1. Closed hot water heating system. 2. Closed chilled water cooling system. 3. Steam system. C. Chemical test kits. D. Glycol protection.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Piping Specialties. D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping. E. Section 23 22 19 - Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems, piping configuration, and connection requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations. C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Submit certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of chemicals and their proposed disposal. 1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State or Municipality of standard for addition of non-potable chemicals to building systems and for discharge to public sewers. B. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for to public sewage systems. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit. C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period. D. Include two hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start-up of systems. E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. F. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period. G. Provide from qualified service representatives, 4 service visits, complete with reports at the following times: 1. Visit one: Aid on installation, identification of installation points for equipment, and outline of program with contractor. 2. Visit two: Inspection and testing of cleaned and drained piping, scheduling tentative date for start-up. 3. Visit three: Start-up of system. 4. Visit Four: Training of operators, and beginning monthly service visits to total 4 visits over one year of operation. Each call shall include testing all systems, checking chemicals and equipment and completing field test reports. Troubleshooting and training of new operators is always included.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS-WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS A. Fremont Industries, Inc., Shakopee, MN (www.fremontind.com) 952/445-4121 B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
CLOSED HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM A. Bypass pot feeder: 6 gallon with funnel, vent cock, drain cock and shutoff valves at inlet and outlet connection, designed to meet the operating pressure requirements of the system.
2.3
CLOSED CHILLED WATER COOLING SYSTEM A. Bypass pot feeder: 6 gallon with funnel, vent cock, drain cock and shutoff valves at inlet and outlet connection, designed to meet the operating pressure requirements of the system.
2.4
CHEMICAL TEST KIT A. Furnish basic water test equipment, spare reagents for maintaining control of program standards in the chilled water, heating water, and steam systems. 1. Test kits shall include the following: a. Reagents and apparatus for determination of inhibitor level. b. Reagents and apparatus for determination of pH, "P" and "M" alkalinity and chlorides. c. Apparatus for determination of microbiological colony population and biocide effectiveness. d. A hand held conductivity meter shall also be included.
2.5
MANUFACTURERS - GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Fremont Industries, Product No. 9134 propylene glycol. B. Substitutions: None.
2.6
GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Fremont Product No. 9134-30D propylene glycol. 30% glycol solution. B. Industrially inhibited propylene glycol pre-mixed solution. C. Dyed to facilitate leak detection. Must be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level. D. Fluid must pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). E. The reserve alkalinity of the fluid shall be at least 19.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Provide all piping required for system operation. C. Provide all control wiring for system operation. D. Power wiring by Division 26.
3.3
CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Concentration: 1. Fremont Product No. 8815. 2. As recommended by manufacturer. 3. One pound of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water for hot systems and one pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons of water for cold systems. B. Hot Water Heating Systems: 1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. 2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water. 3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. 4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. C. Chilled Water Systems: 1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. 2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. 3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. D. Steam Systems: 1. Apply heat, slowly raising boiler temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. 2. Cool, then drain as quickly as possible. 3. Refill with clean water, drain, refill and check for sludge. 4. Repeat until system is free of sludge. 5. Apply heat to produce steam for piping system and maintain for 8 hours minimum. Bypass traps and waste condensate. E. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer. F. Flush open systems and glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill. G. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. H. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
CLOSED SYSTEM A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. C. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens. D. Provide feeders with shutoff valves and bypass. E. Provide sampling connection in the circulating water line including a 1/4 inch ball valve. F. Provide chemical treatment to protect closed systems from corrosion.
3.5
CHEMICALS A. After piping systems have been cleaned, treat systems with necessary chemicals to protect them from corrosion damage. Notify Owner in writing that this work has been completed and tested, with a copy to Engineer. B. Chemicals shall be acceptable to FDA, City and State PCA and shall not contain any chromates. Steam will be used for humidification. C. Water Treatment Chemicals - Closed System: 1. Provide one year's supply of the recommended formula for scale and corrosion protection for the closed recirculating system. 2. Formulation shall not contain any ingredients which are harmful to system materials of construction. D. Water Treatment Chemicals - Steam System: 1. Provide one year supply of the recommended formulas for control of scale and corrosion in the steam boiler and piping system. 2. Provide separate products for scale deposit control and steam line corrosion inhibitor. 3. The chemical formulas will be compatible with system materials of construction and operating conditions to work effectively and will comply with all applicable regulatory agencies and building requirements.
3.6
GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Both heating and chilled water systems. B. Provide sufficient quantity of anti-freeze fluid into the piping systems, where required, to provide a 30 percent glycol/70 percent water solution. C. Use water with low levels (less than 50 ppm) of chloride, sulfate and hard water ions (Ca++, Mg++) for filling systems that will contain the water/glycol fluid solution.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASING AND PLENUMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Casing and plenums.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment: Sleeves. C. Section 23 05 93- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. D. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. E. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories. F. Section 23 37 13 - Air Inlets and Outlets.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. F. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction methods including; duct materials, gages, reinforcing and sealing, fittings, hangers and supports. C. Fabrication Drawings: Actual duct fabrication drawings, indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. Indicate any deviations from applicable SMACNA Standards. Issue copies to related trades for coordination. After all coordination is complete and acceptable to all affected trades, submit to Engineer.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed recommended fabrication and installation requirements. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, unless more stringent requirements are noted herein.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 90A standards. B. Perform Work in accordance with International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments. C. Perform Work in accordance with Minnesota Energy Code. D. Perform Work in accordance with State and Local Code requirements.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flex-Aire. b. Flexmaster. c. Norflex. d. Sheet Metal Connectors. e. Thermaflex. f. Wiremold. g. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 3. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 5. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2
DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Comply with requirements of International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments, when more stringent than those contained herein. B. When operating pressures are not indicated on the drawings, construct the entire duct system for the fan outlet pressure. Variable air volume (VAV) duct systems shall be constructed for 2 inches water column or fan outlet pressure, whichever is greater. C. Duct sealing requirements: 1. SMACNA Seal Class “A”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated at (+/-) 2 inches water column or greater external static pressure, unless noted otherwise. b. Duct system with booster coils, from fan discharge to inlet of booster coil. c. Duct system enclosed in shafts or above inaccessible ceilings where fan is rated at (+/-) 1 inch water column or greater external static pressure. 2. SMACNA Seal Class “B”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated from (+/-) 1 inch to (+/-) 2 inches water column external static pressure, unless noted otherwise. b. Duct system enclosed in shafts or above inaccessible ceilings where fan is rated less than (+/-) 1 water column external static pressure. 3. SMACNA Seal Class “C”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated at less than (+/-) 1 inch water column external static pressure, except gravity transfer ducts, and exhaust ducts discharging into ceiling plenum. D. Portions of duct system with width or height dimension greater than 18 inches which are required to be constructed to SMACNA Seal Class “A” or “B”, shall utilize transverse duct connection system. E. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
F. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. H. Rigidly construct ducts with joints mechanically tight, braced and stiffened to not breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. Caulk duct joints and connections with sealant as ducts are being assembled. I. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. J. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. K. Sheet metal duct liner; Provide perforated 22 gage galvanized steel liner of interior duct insulation. Perforations to be 3/32 inch diameter on 3/16 to 1/4 inch centers. Install 6 mil mylar or polyethylene sheet between insulation and liner. Refer to Section 23 07 13 for insulation requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, unless more stringent requirements are noted herein. Comply with requirements of International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments, when more stringent than those contained herein. C. Provide short radius 90 degree elbows with turning vanes as indicated on the drawings. Short radius elbow with turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance to SMACNA 1995 standards, appendices A-41 and A-43. Construct elbow with six (6) inch inside radius. No exceptions unless approved by the engineer. D. Install duct as high as possible to maintain headroom. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. G. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. H. Install round branch duct to rectangular mains with conical, bellmouth or flared spin-in fittings. I. Make tee connections with a radius tap-in unless noted otherwise.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges of slips and drives with duct mastic in corners to leave smooth duct interior and a tight fitting corner. K. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. L. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. M. Pack space between duct and wall, ceiling or floor with glasswool. Fill with 1/2 inch sealing compound. In rated walls, ceilings or floors, use fire rated sealing compound. N. Coordinate location of duct access panels with wall or ceiling access doors. O. Duct hangers shall not attach to bottom chord of steel joist or metal roof decking. Attach to top chord of steel joist. P. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Q. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. R. Elbows and angles for spiral ductwork shall be five piece standing seam construction, 18 gauge with 1 full sweep (C.L. Radius = 1.5 x Diameter) unless physical space is not available. 3.2
FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. B. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 3 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. C. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands and additional sealing to provide air tight joint. D. Support flexible duct properly to avoid sags and crimping. E. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
3.3
PROTECTION A. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 33 13 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Duct access doors. D. Duct test holes. E. Fire dampers. F. Flexible duct connections. G. Volume control dampers. H. Pressure gages and Pressure gage taps. I. Thermometers and thermometer wells. J. Automatic control dampers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 –Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. D. Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies. E. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC: Control dampers
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. E. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. F. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. G. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. H. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes and hardware used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. E. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
1.8
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. No manufactured turning vanes in square elbows are allowed. See Section 23 31 13 for short radius elbow with turning vanes. No exceptions unless approved by engineer. B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. C. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, with push-pull operator strap, ceiling mounted rotary operator knob.
2.2
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Arrow United. 5. Nailor.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Ruskin. 7. Safe-Air. 8. Substitutions: None. B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.3
DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.4
DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.5
FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Nailor. 5. Arrow United. 6. Prefco. 7. Ruskin. 8. Safe-Air. 9. Substitutions: None. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555 (latest edition), and as indicated.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Free area 90% minimum. D. Rated for 1-1/2 hour or 3 hour protection depending on partition type. E. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper, either break-away or rigid, based on system. F. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps], with locking clip. G. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. H. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. I. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. J. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 212 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.6
AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS (OUTDOOR AIR, RETURN AIR, EXHAUST AIR AND RELIEF AIR) A. Performance: Temperature
Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
Insulated.
Low-Leakage.
Low
B. Frames: Galvanized steel or aluminum, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage. C. Blades: Low-leak, low-temperature, insulated, galvanized steel or aluminum, maximum blade size 60 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22 gage, attached to minimum ½ inch shafts with set screws. Provide parallel action. D. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl mechanically attached, field replaceable. E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel. F. Shaft Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings. G. Linkage Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon. H. Leakage: 3 CFM per square foot at 1 inch wg. I. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg for 48” damper section. J. Temperature Limits: -50 to 250 degrees F. K. Manufacturer: Ruskin Model CD50 Low Leakage with edge seals, insulated blades, control damper. Equivalent manufacturers are as follows: 1. Greenheck 2. Nailor 3. Arrow United 4. Tamco 5. Substitutions: None. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.7
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ventfabrics. 2. Substitutions: None. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 6 wide. 3. Metal: Galvanized steel. D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.087 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.
2.8
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of [single] [double] thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
2.9
DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturer: Trerice Model L800030. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Palmer. 2. Taylor. 3. Weiss. 4. Wexler 5. Substitutions: None. C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, stainless steel case, vapor or liquid actuated with brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black pointer glass lens. 1. Size: 3-1/2 inch diameter dial. 2. Lens: Clear glass. 3. Length of Capillary: Minimum 6 feet. 4. Accuracy: plus-minus one scale division. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.10 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 13 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, humidifiers, duct mounted smoke detectors, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through rated partitions. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway or rigid duct connections based on system type, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
H. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment, and supported by vibration isolators. I. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. J. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. K. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units. L. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. M. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges. N. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. Where thermometers are provided on local panels or duct mounted thermometers are not required. O. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence. P. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. Q. Provide the following thermometer temperature ranges unless noted otherwise: 1. Air supply; 0-100 degrees F. R. Install static pressure gages to measure across filters and filter banks, (inlet to outlet). On multiple banks, provide manifold and single gage. S. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. T. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. U. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. 3.2
SCHEDULES A. Dial Thermometer Location: 1. Outside air. 2. Return air. 3. Mixed air. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 34 13 FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Square Inline Centrifugal Fans. B. Vent sets. C. Power roof ventilators.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. D. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories: Backdraft dampers. E. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. E. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. F. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. G. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. H. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. J. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on axial fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at least five blade settings, including maximum. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Kitchen Range Hood Exhaust Fans: Comply with requirements of NFPA 96.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. B. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SQUARE IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: Cook Model SQN, or equivalent by: 1. Greenheck. 2. PennBarry. 3. Twin City Fan. 4. Substitutions: None. B. Performance: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. 4. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. 6. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Wheel and Inlet: 1. Backward Inclined: Aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate, backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast aluminum hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws. D. Housing: 1. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut-off. 2. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard 3. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing. E. Bearings and Drives: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings, with L-50 life at 200,000 hours. Provide extended lube lines. 2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. 3. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. F. Accessories: Belt guard, flex duct connector, outlet companion flange, insulated housing and extended lube lines. G. Electrical: provide disconnect switch. 2.2
VENT FANS A. Manufacturers: Cook Model CA, or equivalent by: 1. Greenheck. 2. PennBarry. 3. Twin City Fan. 4. Substitutions: None. B. Performance: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. 4. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. 6. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Wheel and Inlet: 1. Single width single inlet or double width double inlet. 2. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate die formed hollow airfoil shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange, and back plate; cast iron [or cast steel] hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws. D. Housing: 1. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut-off. 2. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard 3. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing. E. Bearings and Drives: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings, with L-50 life at 200,000 hours. Provide extended lube lines. 2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. 3. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. F. Accessories: shaft cooler, scroll drain, flexible duct connections, OSHA belt guard and weather cover, bolted/hinged access door. G. Electrical: Provide NEMA 3R disconnect switch. 2.3
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Cook Model ACE, or equivalent by: 1. Greenheck. 2. PennBarry. 3. Twin City Fan. 4. Substitutions: None. B. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. C. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Fan Unit: with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. E. Bearings and Drives: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings, with life at 200,000 hours. 2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. F. Roof Curb: 24 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel or aluminum with continuously welded seams, one inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip. G. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor NEMA 3R weatherproof. H. Backdraft Damper: Aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and line voltage motor drive, power open, spring return. I. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at midposition; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install according to Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with resilient mountings and with flexible electrical leads; refer to Section 23 05 48. C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and axial fan while running. D. Install fan restraining snubbers. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. E. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance. F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. H. Provide access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting. Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. I. Provide floor mounted fans with reinforced legs. Provide ceiling suspended units with support brackets bolted to casing flange. J. Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. K. Provide spring operated or counter weighted door at the inlet and outlet duct for over-pressure protection. L. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. M. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
N. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening. O. Hung Cabinet Fans: 1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 05 48. 2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 33 13 between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. P. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof exhausters. Q. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. 3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Inspect fans after installation, do initial test and startup, and submit report.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Variable volume terminal units.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils. B. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils. C. Section 23 31 13 –Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. D. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories. E. Section 23 37 13 - Air Outlets and Inlets. F. Section 25 35 00 - Automatic Controls. G. Section 23 82 16 - Air Coils.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Air Distribution and Control Device Test Code. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. D. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4
PERFORMANCE TOLERANCES A. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with ADC 1062. B. Certified according to ARI Standard 880.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings which indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 to 4 inch wg. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging details, and service clearances required.
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 36 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators. 1.7
WARRANTY A. Provide under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Enviro-Tec. B. Krueger. C. Metal Aire. D. Price. E. Titus. F. Substitutions: None.
2.2
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS WITH HEATING COILS AND DISCHARGE SOUND ATTENUATOR A. Construction: 1. Casing of 22 gage zinc coated sheet steel using mechanical locking seams to form leak resistant assembly. 2. Discharge connection slip and drive integral with box casing. 3. Internal lining: a. Foil faced thermal/acoustical fiber board with aluminum laminate facing, 1” thick, density not less than 4-1/4 pounds per cubic foot, conforming to NFPA 90A, UL 181 and ASTM C665. Aluminum facing exposed to air stream. 4. Damper: a. Single elliptical blade that requires nominal 60 degree rotation from fully opened to fully closed positions. b. Mechanically attach to shaft with threaded fasteners or welded. Shaft must be continuous, single piece running full diameter of inlet through casing. Rotate in nylon, self-lubricating bearings. c. Tear resistant neoprene lip seal around perimeter to form tight seat for full shut-off. d. Position indicated on end of shaft on outside of casing. 5. External taps separate from sensor or controller taps for flow adjustment in field. 6. Integral discharge sound attenuator. 7. Identification label, piping diagram, and flow chart mounted on unit. 8. Provide discharge sound attenuator. B. Control System:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 36 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Controls and actuators will be furnished by Temperature Control Contractor for factory or field installation. 2. Actuator to move primary damper full open, mid-positions, and full closed. Damper to fail open or closed when main air drops to 0 psi. Damper fail position field adjustable. 3. Velocity controller, set maximum and minimum flow setpoints. Externally adjustable for field setting. Control flow within +/-5 percent regardless of system static pressure. Controller air consumption not to exceed .017. Field adjustable for normally open/closed and direct/reverse acting without need for additional components. 4. Multi-point air flow sensor of automatic averaging type located in the inlet. C. Hot Water Coils: 1. Capacity as shown on the Drawing Schedules. 2. Mounted at discharge of air terminal unit with slip and drive connection for downstream ductwork. 3. 1/2” copper tubing mechanically expanded in aluminum fins. 4. Access panel, insulated, double wall construction with cam lock releases. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components. C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork. D. Provide minimum of three diameters of straight rigid duct on inlet of air terminal unit. E. Install heating coils in accordance with Section 23 82 16. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 36 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Grilles, registers and diffusers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. C. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 37 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger. 2. MetalAire. 3. Nailor. 4. Price. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle & Bailey. 7. Substitutions: None. B. Refer to Schedule on drawings for type, frame, fabrication, finish and accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Rigidly fasten grilles, registers and diffusers to duct. D. Install grilles, registers and diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. E. Adjust directional tabs in square diffusers and in linear diffusers to provide proper air distribution pattern. F. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. G. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 37 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 51 16 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, STACKS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Type B gas vents. B. Insulated positive pressure piping systems.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Induced draft fan motor. B. Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation: Breeching insulation. C. Section 23 52 38 - Condensing Boilers.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ANSI Z21.66 - Electrically Operated Automatic Vent Damper Devices for Use with Gas-Fired Appliances. B. ANSI Z21.67 - Mechanically Actuated Automatic Vent Damper Devices for Use with Gas-Fired Appliances. C. ANSI Z21.68 - Thermally Operated Automatic Vent Damper Devices for Use with Gas-Fired Appliances. D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. E. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements. F. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality. G. ASTM A569 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled Commercial Quality. H. ASTM C64 - Refractories for Incinerators and Boilers. I. ASTM C105 - Ground Fire Clay as a Refractory Mortar for Laying-up Fireclay Brick. J. ASTM C401 - Classification of Castable Refractories. K. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. L. NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment. M. NFPA 54 - The National Fuel Gas Code. N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. O. NFPA 82 - Standard on Incinerators, Waste, and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment. P. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances. Q. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 51 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
R. UL 103 - Standard for Factory Built Low Heat Chimneys. S. UL 127 - Standard for Factory Built Fireplaces. T. UL 378 - Standard for Draft Equipment. U. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents. V. UL 641 - Standard for Low Temperature Venting Systems. W. UL 959 - Medium Heat Appliance Factory Built Chimneys. 1.4
DEFINITIONS A. Breeching: Vent Connector. B. Chimney: outdoors.
Primarily vertical shaft enclosing at least one vent for conducting flue gases
C. Smoke Pipe: Round, single wall vent connector. D. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used. E. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device. 1.5
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211 and be UL listed and labeled. B. Design refractory lined metal stacks for wind loading of 110 mph.
1.6
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, dimensions, weights, support and layout of breechings. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions: connection requirements.
1.7
Indicate assembly, support details, and
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that refractory lined metal stacks meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 51 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code, NFPA 54 code for installation of natural gas and propane burning appliances and equipment. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TYPE B GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Selkirk Metalbestos Model DF. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Metal-Fab. b. Schebler. c. Van Packer. d. Substitutions: None. B. Fabrication: Inner liner of 430 stainless steel, and outer jacket of aluminized steel, with 1/2 inch air space, tested in compliance with UL 441, for negative or neutral pressure. C. Components: Include all components from vent connector to termination for complete system. D. Electrically Actuated Vent Dampers: Same size as draft hood collar, constructed of stainless steel or galvanized steel, with corrosion-resistant components, in compliance with ANSI Z21.66, ANSI Z21.67, ANSI Z21.68.
2.2
INSULATED POSITIVE PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Selkirk Metalbestos Model IPS. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Metal-Fab. b. Stack, Inc. c. Van Packer. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. B. Fabrication: Inner liner of 304 stainless steel, and outer jacket of 316 stainless steel, with 2 inches of fiber insulation, tested in compliance with UL 103, for negative neutral or positive pressure. C. Components: Include all components from vent connector to termination for complete system.
2.3
VENTING AND COMBUSTION AIR FOR CONDENSING BOILER A. Provide manufacturer required vent and combustion air piping. Refer to Section 23 52 38.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 51 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 54 and NFPA 31. C. Install breechings with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth. D. Support breechings from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings, chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot spacing, to adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size. E. Install concrete inserts for support of breechings, chimneys, and stacks in coordination with formwork. F. Pitch breechings with positive slope up from fuel-fired equipment to chimney or stack. G. Insulate breechings in accordance with Section 23 07 16. H. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as required for complete installation. I. Install vent dampers, locating close to draft hood collar, and secured to breeching. J. Assemble and install stack sections in accordance with NFPA 82, industry practices, and in compliance with UL listing. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to ASTM C105. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs. K. Level and plumb chimney and stacks. L. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris. M. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of breechings, breeching insulation, chimneys, or stacks. N. Control wiring for vent damper by Section 23 52 38. O. Provide minimum length of breeching to connect appliance to chimney. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 51 16-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 52 38 CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Boilers. B. Control System.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties B. Section 25 95 00 - Sequence of Operation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. AGA - Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories. B. AGA Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. C. ASME SEC 4 - Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers. D. ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. E. HI (Hydronics Institute) - Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating Boilers. F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). G. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. I. UL - Gas and Oil Equipment Directory.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and service connections. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and service connections. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals for project closeout. B. Test Reports: Indicate specified performance and efficiency is met or exceeded. Provide combustion test that includes boiler firing rate, overfire draft, gas flow rate, heat input, burner manifold gas pressure, percent carbon monoxide (CO), percent oxygen (O), percent excess air, flue gas temperature at outlet, ambient temperature, net stack temperature, percent stack loss, percent combustion efficiency, and heat output.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate condition of equipment after start-up including control settings and performance chart of control system. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in installing and servicing the products of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME SEC 4, SEC 8D, AGA Z21.13 Code, and UL 726 for construction of boilers. B. Units: UL labeled. C. Conform to applicable NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment. D. Conform to State of Minnesota requirements. E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect boilers from damage by leaving factory inspection openings and shipping packaging in place until final installation.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Section 23 05 00 - Warranties. B. Provide a ten (10) year warranty against thermal shock. C. Provide a five (5) year warranty for flue gas corrosion for the pressure vessel and exhaust assembly. D. Provide two (2) year parts and labor warranty entire package.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of boilers for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Boilers: 1. Hydrotherm. 2. Lochinvar ‘Knight’. 3. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Modulating, forced draft type; complete with boiler fittings and automatic controls. The boiler (with all wiring) shall be completely factory assembled as a self contained unit. Boiler design and construction shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV for hot water heating boilers with a maximum water working pressure of 30 psig. Boiler shall also comply with CSD-1 Code requirements.
2.3
BOILER DESIGN A. The boiler shall have the ability to operate with a variable flow through the boiler. The boiler shall be designed for a minimum 5:1 continuous turn down with constant CO2 over the turndown range. The boiler shall operate with natural gas and have a CSA International certified input rating as noted on the drawings, and a thermal efficiency rating up to 99% at minimum input. The boiler will use a proven pilot interrupted spark ignition system. The boiler shall use a UL approved flame safeguard ignition control system using UV detection flame sensing. The design shall provide for silent burner ignition and operation. Adequate openings shall be provided for access to the water side of the boiler. B. The condensing section of the exhaust pipes shall be constructed of SAF 2205 Deflex stainless steel. The vessel shell shall be SA-53B ERW pipe or SA-516 Grade 70 plate. The heads shall be SA-516 Grade 70 plate. The pressure vessel shall be fully insulated with 2” of high temperature insulation. C. Provide a condensate drainer and neutralizer kit as manufactured by Axiom, or equal.
2.4
BOILER SIZE AND RATINGS A. Refer to schedule on drawings for size and capacity. B. The boiler shall have a low fire efficiency of 94% at 100 degree F. return water temperature and 100 degree F. flue gas temperature. C. The boiler shall have a high fire efficiency of 84% at 160 degree F. return water temperature and 250 degree F. flue gas temperature.
2.5
BOILER FLUE VENTING A. This contractor to provide all necessary materials and labor. Exhaust venting shall be constructed of materials and installed in conformance with the manufacturers recommendations. Refer to the drawings.
2.6
COMBUSTION AIR DUCTING A. This contractor to provide all necessary materials and labor. PVC Pipe meeting ASTM D2665 requirements. Provide PVC fittings with solvent welded joints. Install per ASTM D2321 and the boiler manufacturers recommendations. Refer to the drawings.
2.7
BOILER FITTINGS A. Temperature and pressure gauge shall pre provided with the boiler.
2.8
COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT A. Provide boiler with a UL approved flame safeguard. The controller shall provide a 30 second prepurge and postpurge. The controller shall maintain a running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent six flame failures. This controller shall have the capability to be connected to an AZL Display Module, which will retrieve that information.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Each boiler shall be equipped for fully modulating operation. Turn down shall be 5:1. C. The furnace location shall be such that all furnace components are located within water-backed areas. Boiler safety controls shall be: 1. Operating temperature controller for automatic start and stop of the pulse combustor. 2. High limit temperature controller (manual reset). 3. One low water cutoff probe in boiler shell (manual reset). 4. One auxiliary low water cutoff (manual reset). 5. Air safety switch to prevent operation until sufficient prepurge air is assured. 6. Infrared scanner to prove combustion. D. All controls are to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing the boiler without disturbing the controls. All controls shall be mounted and wired according to A.G.A requirements. E. Provide single point power connection. F. Refer to schedule on drawings for electrical requirements. 2.9
CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a completely integrated Control System to control all operation and input of the multiple boiler plant. B. Controls to BACnet compatible. C. The system shall be comprised of a microprocessor based control, utilizing a 4 to 20 mA signal for modulation of header temperature and sequential firing. D. The controller shall have the ability to vary each individual modulate input throughout its full firing rage, to maximize the condensing capability of the module and the entire plant without header temperature swings. E. The controller shall be PID type for temperature control with frequency response. F. The control shall provide contact closure for automatic adjustable heat start circuit for plant activation and have contact closure for auxiliary equipment such as pumps and auxiliary loops. G. The control will operate on an adjustable inverse ratio in response to outdoor temperature to control the main header temperature outlet to +/-2 degrees F. Maximum efficiency shall be achieved at minimum firing input. H. Reset ratio shall be fully field adjustable. The controller shall have LCD display for monitoring of all sensors and percent of modulation on one screen. Real time and date. Controller will automatically balance operating time. I. Connection between the control system and individual units shall be wired to internal terminal strips for easy installation. J. Controller shall be capable of controlling four (4) boilers. The controller shall modulate the boiler burners to maintain proper loop temperature. Refer to sequence of operation, Part 3 of this section. K. Control system shall contain the following: 1. CPU Board: two (2) analog inputs and one (1) relay output.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Hand-Off-Auto Relay Output Board: Five (5) relay outputs, five (5) toggle switches, and ten (10) LED indicators. 3. Auto/Manual Analog Output Board: Five (5) analog outputs, five (5) toggle switches, five (5) control dials, and five (5) bar graphs. 4. Discrete Input Board: fifteen (15) digital inputs and fifteen LED indicators. 5. Analog Input Board: Eight (8) analog inputs (selectable) and eight (8) LED indicators. 6. Relay Output Board: Eight (8) relay outputs and eight (8) LED indicators. 7. Wall Mounted, seven (7) slot, NEMA 1 enclosure. 8. Electrical power supply connection. 9. Operator Control Panel with membrane, tactile feedback keyboard. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Provide condensate drainer/neutralization kit with drain controls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 54. C. Install boiler on concrete housekeeping pad, sized minimum 4 inches larger than boiler base. Concrete pad provided by General Contractor. D. Provide connection of natural gas service in accordance with NFPA 54. E. Provide piping connections and accessories as indicated. Refer to Section 15183. F. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain. G. Install condensate drainer. Pipe condensate drains from boiler to condensate drainer and from condensate drainer to nearest floor drain. Nonpotable water piped to condensate drainer by this Contractor. H. Provide for connection to electrical service. I. Provide wiring between boiler control panel, Control System panel, Hot water loop temperature sensor, and entering water temperature sensor. 120 volt/1 ph/60 Hz power wiring provided by electrical contractor.
3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide field representative for starting unit, training operator and programming mod sync panel.
3.3
BOILER SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Application: 1. Boilers: B-1. B. Provide package controls. This sequence will control Boilers B-1. C. Safety Devices:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Boiler Alarm: Determine boiler status. Turn boiler “off” if boilers or fail to start as commanded. Signal alarm. D. Heating Mode: 1. The heating sequence to be manually started and shut-down by the Building Operator (via the computer graphics) once ‘enabled’ by the Building Management System. 2. Spring/Summer/Fall Boiler Operation: In the Spring/Summer/Fall season, once the boilers have been enabled/started by the Building Management System, allow the sequence to maintain a supply water temperature during the ‘cooling’ change over periods. a. Enable Boiler No. 1 (small boiler) as the first priority boiler in order to maintain a set primary supply water temperature (as determined by the outdoor master reset schedule). If Boiler No. 1 cannot maintain setpoint and supply temperature falls 5F below setpoint for 30 minutes, enable Boiler No. 2(small boiler). If Boilers 1 and 2 cannot maintain setpoint and supply temperature falls 5F below setpoint for 30 minutes, enable Boiler 3 or 4(large boilers). b. When the outdoor air temperature is 40F and above (adjustable), Boiler 1 and 2 (two small boilers) are to have priority. Boiler No. 3 & 4 to have last priority. c. Provide lead/lag capability for the boilers Rotate every 500 hours. Allow boilers to operate as required to maintain a set primary supply water temperature (adjustable). 3. Winter Boiler Operation: In the Winter season, once the boilers have been enabled/started by the Building Management System, the packaged boiler controls to change over to winter operation. a. Enable Boiler No. 3 (large boiler) as the first priority boiler in order to maintain a set primary supply water temperature (as determined by the outdoor master reset schedule). If Boiler No. 3 cannot maintain setpoint and supply temperature falls 5F below setpoint for 30 minutes, enable Boiler No. 4(large boiler). If Boilers 1 and 2 cannot maintain setpoint and supply temperature falls 5F below setpoint for 30 minutes, enable Boiler 1 or 2(small boiler). b. When the outdoor air temperature is below 40F (adjustable), Boiler No. 3 and 4 (two larger boilers) are to have priority. Boiler No. 1 & 2 to have last priority. c. Provide lead/lag capability for the boilers 3 & 4. Rotate every 500 hours. Allow both boilers to operate as required to maintain a set supply water temperature (adjustable). E. Reset water temperature as follows: 190 degrees secondary loop water temperature at -20 degrees outside air temperature. 120 water temperature at 65 degrees outside air temperature (all temperatures adjustable). Outside air temperature sensor is provided by Section 23 95 00. F. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide lead/lag control of boilers. Rotate operation of boilers every 500 hours (adjustable). 2. Provide input point for outside air temperature signal from Building Management System. 3. Provide general alarm to Building Management System. G. Boiler/heating systems shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Boiler #1 start/stop (DO) • Boiler #1 setpoint (AO) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • • •
Boiler #1 status, current sensor (DI) Water temperature setpoint, per boiler (AO) Heating loop water temperature (AI) Outside air temperature (AI) General alarm (DO) END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 52 38-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 57 16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Shell and tube type heat exchangers. B. Accessories and trim.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties. D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Piping. E. Section 23 22 19 - Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Section 8D of the ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code for manufacture of tubular heat exchangers and heat exchanger shells.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Indicate dimensions, locations, and size of tappings and performance data. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that heat exchangers meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Submit design data in sufficient detail to verify that heat exchangers meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Include start up and shut down instructions, assembly drawings, and spare parts lists.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect internals from entry of foreign material by temporary caps on flanged openings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 57 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS - SHELL AND TUBE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Armstrong. B. Bell & Gossett. C. Taco. D. Substitutions: None.
2.2
SHELL AND TUBE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER A. Tubes: U-tube type with 3/4 inch OD minimum seamless copper tubes suitable for 150 psig working pressure. B. Shell: Steel with threaded or flanged piping connections and necessary tappings, steel saddle and attaching U-bolts, prime coated. C. Heads: Cast iron or fabricated steel with steel or bronze tube sheets, threaded or flanged for piping connections. D. Water Chamber and Tube Bundle: Removable for inspection and cleaning. E. Design: Heating fluid in shell and heated fluid in tubes. F. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install to permit removal of tube bundle with minimum disturbance to installed equipment and piping. C. Support heat exchangers on welded steel pipe and angle floor stand. D. Pitch shell to completely drain condensate. E. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain. F. Pipe drain valves to nearest floor drain.
3.2
STEAM TO LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGER TRIM A. Shell: Pressure gauge tapping with pigtail siphon, vacuum breaker. B. Water Inlet: Thermometer well, pressure gauge tapping, valved drain. C. Water Outlet: Thermometer well for temperature regulator sensor, ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve, thermometer well, pressure gauge tapping. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 57 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 64 23 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Chiller package. B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. C. Controls and control connections. D. Chilled water connections.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation D. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. E. Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps. F. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ARI 550 - Centrifugal or Rotary Water-Chilling Packages. B. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. D. ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. E. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. F. UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00- Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system. C. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 23 05 00- Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that components of package not furnished by manufacturer have been selected in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include trouble-shooting guide.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide certification of inspection for conforming authority having jurisdiction approval. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units from physical damage.
1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty (parts only) under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete assembly including materials and labor for one year. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of complete assembly for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. McQuay B. York. C. Dunham-Bush. D. Carrier. E. Substitutions: None.
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide factory assembled, charged, and tested outdoor air cooled liquid chillers consisting of compressors, condenser, evaporator, thermal expansion valve, refrigeration accessories, microprocessor controls, and control panel. Construction, testing, and ratings shall be in accordance with ARI 590. B. Conform to ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water chillers.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.3
COMPRESSORS A. Compressor: Rotary-scroll type (refer to schedules on drawings). Crankcase oil heater. Suction strainer. Forced-feed lubrication system with a reversible oil pump and oil charge. B. Motor: Refrigerant gas cooled. High torque. Hermetic induction type. Two pole. Inherent thermal protection on all three phases. C. Vibration isolation: Refer to Section 23 05 48.
2.4
EVAPORATOR A. Direct expansion. B. Shell-and-tube type with water on baffled shell side and refrigerant on tube side. Carbon steel shell with copper tubes roller expanded onto steel sheets. C. Two independent refrigerant circuits. D. Refrigerant heads shall be carbon steel. E. 3/8” vent and drain plugs at top and bottom of shell. F. Electric resistance heater with ambient air thermostat and ¾” vinyl nitrate polymer sheet insulation, K of 0.28 at 75 degrees F., fitted and glued in place for water protection down to -20 degrees F. G. Water side working pressure of 150 psig. H. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2.5
CONDENSERS A. Coils: 1. 3/8” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded into aluminum plate-type fins. Fins shall have full drawn collars to completely cover tubes. 2. Integral subcooling coil. B. Fans: Propeller type. Vertical discharge. Individually driven by direct drive motors. Heavy gage fan guard. C. Motors: TEAO, three phase, direct drive, 1140 rpm.
2.6
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT A. Provide refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped. B. Provide for each refrigerant circuit: 1. Charging valve. 2. Discharge line check valve. 3. Compressor discharge service valve. 4. Condenser pressure relief valve. 5. Suction line accumulator. 6. Refrigerant filter-drier. 7. Site glass with moisture indicator.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. Liquid line solenoid valve. 9. Thermal expansion valve. 10. Insulated suction line. 2.7
ENCLOSURES A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. B. Mount starters and disconnects in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened. C. Provide fully enclosed, sound insulated compressor enclosure. Access to compressor shall be a hinged lockable door. D. Provide vandal proof hail guards for exposed condenser fins. Guards to be easily removed for cleaning and maintenance. E. Provide acoustical wrap for each oil separator. F. Provide insulated sound panels for lower portion of each chiller.
2.8
OPTIONS A. Hot gas bypass to allow unit operation to 10 percent of full load. B. Chilled supply water flow switch. C. Spring vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 05 48. D. Compressor sound reduction package (compressor blankets and insulated sound panels). Refer to the schedule on the drawings.
2.9
CONTROLS A. Panel: 1. Integral controls are to be fully BACnet compatible. 2. Factory mount on chiller, mount NEMA ICS 6 weatherproof steel control panel, containing starters’ power and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection. 3. Panel shall contain the field power connection points, control interlock terminal, and microprocessor control system. 4. Factory circuit breakers of fan motors and control system. Individual contactors for each fan motor. 5. Compressor shall have a solid state three-phase motor overload protection, inherent fan motor overload protection, power factor correction, control power transformer, and unit power terminal block for connection to remote disconnect switch. Disconnect provided by Division 26. 6. Terminals for power supply to evaporator heater circuit. 7. Lockable, hinged access doors. equipment in panel.
Barrier panels or separate enclosure to high voltage
B. Controller:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. DDC microprocessor controller with a four line by 20 character LCD display. Provide BACnet interface. 2. Features: a. Equipment protection: Alarms shall shut down unit and activate an alarm signal. Limit alarms shall reduce unit operation in response to out-of-limit condition. b. Shutdown Alarms: 1) No evaporator water flow. 2) Low evaporator pressure. 3) High condenser pressure. 4) Motor protection system. 5) Sensor failures. 6) Evaporator freeze protection. 7) Outside ambient temperature. 8) Phase voltage protection. c. Limit Alarms: 1) Condenser pressure stage down: Unloads unit at high discharge pressures. 2) Low ambient lockout: shuts off unit at low ambient temperature. 3) Low evaporator pressure hold: Holds stage #1 until pressure rises. 4) Low evaporator pressure unload: Shuts off one compressor. d. Unit Enable Selection: Enable unit operation from local keypad, digital input, or BAS. e. Unit Mode Selection: Selects standard cooling, ice, glycol, or test operation mode. f. Analog Inputs: Reset of leaving water temperature, 4 to 20 mA. g. Digital Inputs: 1) Unit off switch. 2) Remote start/stop. 3) Flow switch. 4) Motor protection. h. Digital Outputs: 1) Shutdown alarm (general alarm). 2) Evaporator pump start/stop. i. Condenser fan control: Control of fans must be based on compressor discharge pressure. 2.10 PERFORMANCE A. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: Factory-provided and wired. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 13. C. Disconnect Switch: Factory-provided and wired. D. Provide single point power connection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align chiller package on steel or concrete foundations or structural slab. C. Install units on vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 05 48. D. Connect to chilled water piping. Refer to Section 23 20 13. 1. On inlet, provide: a. Thermometer well for temperature controller. b. Thermometer well for temperature limit controller. c. Flexible pipe connecter. d. Shut-off valve. e. Test plug. 2. On outlet, provide: a. Flexible pipe connecter. b. Shut-off valve. c. Test plug. E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning. F. Install factory furnished flow switch and provide wire and conduit to chiller control panel. Chiller shall not start until flow has been proven. G. Provide wire and conduit from primary chilled water pump to chiller control panel. Pump shall operate when chiller is set to start. H. Provide BACnet interface to allow monitoring by BAS. Provide terminal strips to allow fieldconnection by the Controls Contractor. I. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.
3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Supply service of factory trained representative to supervise testing, dehydration and charging of machine, start-up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner. B. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate system operation and verify specified performance. Refer to Section 23 05 93. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 64 23 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 72 13 ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Energy recovery equipment. 1. Energy recovery wheel.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 73 13 – Air Handling Units.
1.3
REFERENCES A. AMCA 210. B. CSA 22.2. C. NFPA 90 A. D. UL 1812.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Indicate dimensions and performance data. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Include start up and shut down instructions, assembly drawings, and spare parts lists.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience. B. Construct and label in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812. C. Insulation in compliance with NFPA 90A for flame spread and smoke generation. D. Air flow data in compliance with AMCA 210.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect internals from entry of foreign material by temporary protection of equipment.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 23 05 00.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 72 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Xetex. 2. Annexair. 3. Novelair. 4. Substitutions: None. B. General 1. Enthalpy wheel, wheel drive system, filters, and microprocessor controls with terminal strip for EMS interface. C. Unit Cabinet 1. Mounted in air handling unit. D. Energy Recovery Wheel 1. Aluminum wheel coated for corrosion resistance. Non-migrating desiccant coating shall be applied prior to being formed into honeycomb surface. 2. Self cleaning by opposing airflows. 3. Drive belt: Link belt system. 4. Pulley CNC machined, crowned, aluminum (anodized) pulley. 5. Installed in removable cassette and pie shaped sections. Cassette support beams galvanized steel minimum insuring wheel integrity. 6. Comply with NFPA 90A for flame spread of less than 25 and smoke generation of less than 50. 7. Purge sector shall limit cross-contamination to less than 0.04 percent of exhaust air stream. E. Operating Characteristics 1. Unit capable of providing a constant volume of air at a specified external static pressure at all fan operating speeds. 2. Unit VSD shall be capable of accepting any control signal to modulate rotor speed to prevent frost build-up, reduce heat recovery for economizer mode and to prevent overheating, and switch to maximum heat recovery when outdoor temperature is higher than indoor temperature. 3. Provide rotation detection alarm capable of interfacing with building control system. F. Motors 1. Variable speed CSCR type motor. 2. Four pole type operating at 1800 RPM at full airflow. G. Electrical Requirements
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 72 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Provide field mounted control panel with single point power connection, variable frequency drive, non-fused disconnect, transformer, defrost controls, requiring field wiring of panel to motor and field installation of remote sensing devices and wiring to unit mounted terminal strips. 2. Twenty-four (24) VAC (40VA) for field installed sensing devices, etc. H. Defrost 1. Variable wheel speed control with turndown ratio of 80:1 (20 RPM to ¼ RPM). 2. Proportional temperature controller located in the supply air stream. 3. Differential summer/winter changeover sensors mounted in the outdoor and return airstreams. 4. Frost prevention sensor located in the exhaust air stream. 5. Digital readout of the temperature readings recorded by these sensors and control setpoints. 6. Defrost cycle shall override normal occupied mode as controlled by Section 15940. I. Remote Control: Unit to be energized via the Facility Management System. J. Heat Recovery Capacity: 1. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in air handling unit or rooftop equipment. B. Install remote control components furnished by equipment manufacturer. C. Provide control wiring. D. Provide drain and trap from drain pan. E. Sections are to be factory-provided complete with variable speed drive (VSDs) and transformer. Unit dampers are to be factory-provided complete with actuators. Actuators are to be manufactured by Belimo. Provide units complete with terminal strips for fieldconnection. Field connection will be by the Controls Contractor. The Control Contractor will provide sensors and sensor wiring in-field for control.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 72 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 73 13 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Air handling units.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 72 13 – Energy Recovery Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. G. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. H. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. I. ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units. J. ARI Guideline D - Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling Units. K. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. M. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. N. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units. O. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 73 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Supply and install one extra set of filters for each unit following substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. McQuay. B. Carrier. C. Annexair. D. York. E. Substitutions: None.
2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Configuration: Refer to drawings for specific requirements and components.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 73 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Blow through or draw through supply fan section. 2. Cooling coil section. 3. Pre-heating coil. 4. Pre-filter, and final filter section. 5. Spacer/access sections. B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430. C. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings. 2.3
CASING A. Construction: Double wall. Fabricate on channel base of welded steel. Assemble sections with air-tight gaskets and bolts. 1. Outside Casing: 18 gage, G90 galvanized steel. 2. Inside Casing: 20 gage, G90 galvanized steel. 3. Floor: 22 gage (inside), 18 gage (outside) galvanized steel. 4. Fan sections to be double-wall perforated construction. B. Insulation: Neoprene coated, glass fiber, applied to internal surfaces with adhesive and weld pins with exposed edges of insulation coated with adhesive. 1. ‘K’ value at 75 degrees F: Maximum 0.26 Btuh/inch/sq ft/degrees F. 2. Density: 2 inch thick, 1-1/2 lbs/cu ft. C. Finish: Manufacturers standard finish. D. Walk-in Access Doors: Sized and located as shown on Drawings. Galvanized steel insulated sandwich construction, for flush mounting, with hinges, gasket, latch, and handle assemblies, and 12 x 12 inch inspection window of 1/4 inch thick plexiglass. E. Drain Pans: Construct from double thickness stainless steel with insulation between layers with welded corners. Cross break and pitch to drain connection. Provide drain pans under heating coil section and cooling coil section. F. Bottom Inlet Units: Provide steel or aluminum walking grate on structural supports. G. Strength: Provide structure to brace casings for suction pressure of 2.5 inch wg, with maximum deflection of 1 in 200.
2.4
FANS A. Type: Refer to schedule on drawings. B. Supply Fan Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
2.5
COILS A. Casing: Provide access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils with headers and return bends fully contained within casing. Slide coils into casing through removable end panel with blank off sheets and sealing collars at connection penetrations. B. Drain Pans: 24 inch downstream of coil and down spouts for cooling coil banks more than one coil high.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 73 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. D. Coil Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with ARI 435. C. Set unit on steel rails or stands as noted on drawings. D. Bolt sections together with gaskets. Isolate fan section with flexible duct connections. E. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. F. Install assembled unit on vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Install restraining snubbers as required. Refer to Section 23 05 48. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. G. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges. H. Hydronic Coils: 1. Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement). 2. Provide shut-off valve on supply line and lockshield balancing valve with memory stop on return line. 3. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. 4. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve. 5. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 73 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR ROOF TOP UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged roof top unit. B. Roof mounting curb and base.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment B. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment. D. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC. E. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. G. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. H. ARI 340/360 - Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning & Heat Pump Equipment. I. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. L. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units. M. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet, air handler inlet and outlet openings, and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions and lifting lug locations, weight loading and center of gravity, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, coil removal and replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Manufacturer shall operate each system at the factory before shipment to insure proper operation and balance.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., E.T.L. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers [shrink wrapped form], with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year parts and labor on entire package. B. Provide four (4) additional years parts and labor on compressor. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Supply one set for each unit of filters.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Aaon. B. Addison. C. Annexair. D. Substitutions: None.
2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, reheat coil, hot water coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls. B. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment’s literature pocket. C. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel. D. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components. E. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet. F. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit. G. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. H. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. I. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
2.3
CONSTRUCTION A. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels. B. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13. Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. C. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air leakage. Refrigerant piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage. E. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have rain break overhangs above access doors. F. Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, reheat coil, heaters, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, compressors, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors. G. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. H. Units are to include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans. I. Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in height around the opening. J. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit. 2.4
ROOF MOUNTING CURB A. Provide steel roof mounting frame for bottom discharge and return air duct connection, mating to bottom perimeter of the equipment. It shall make a unit-mounting curb and provide a weatherproof duct connection and entry into the conditioned area when flashed into the roof. B. Features: 23” tall, fully assembled, 6” counter flashing, 2” x 2” wood nailer, fully lined with insulated floor.
2.5
FANS, MOTORS, AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 13 and schedule on drawings. B. Supply Fan: 1. Fan: Supply air blower shall have backward inclined airfoil blades, ball bearings, and adjustable belt drives rated at 140% of motor nameplate. Blower wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Blower(s) shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Motor: Inverter rated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. Refer to schedule on drawings. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. C. Condenser Fan: 1. Fan: Direct drive propeller type condenser fans shall discharge vertically. 2. Condenser fans shall be high efficiency electrically commutated motor driven with multiple speeds which are controlled with a fan cycle switch based on head pressure and allow matching condenser airflow with cooling capacity steps.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Motor: Fan shall have ball bearings and be permanently lubricated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. D. Power Exhaust Fans: 1. Fan: Backward inclined or axial flow fan, factory wired to variable frequency drive, sized for 100% relief. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. Fans shall exhaust air through motorized exhaust dampers. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2. Motor: Inverter rated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. Refer to schedule on drawings. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. E. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced. F. Variable Frequency Drives: Refer to Section 23 05 13. 2.6
COILS A. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers, furnished with thermostatic expansion valve, double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pan. C. Condenser Coils: Slope at least 30 degrees to protect the coils from damage. Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Size for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling. Provide condenser hail guards. D. Hot Gas Reheat Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers. E. Hot Water Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers. Factory install coil. Pitch coil down toward pipe connections. Coils to be suitable for a glycol solution. F. Coil Performance: Refer to schedule on Drawings.
2.7
FILTERS A. Filter Media: 1. 4-inch- thick, 65% (Merv 11), pleated filters in unit and a metal mesh outside air filter to provide less turbulent airflow for factory installed airflow measuring stations. All filters shall be side loading. 2. Clogged filter switch with output to remote panel. 3. Direct dial reading Magnehelic gauge mounted inside the control compartment (not outside unit exposed to weather).
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.8
ECONOMIZER 1. Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return DDC actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, outside air hood with rain lip and barometric relief dampers. Provide a fieldinstalled extension to serve the OA intake to allow mounting space for the OA AFMS. Refer to the drawings for detail.
2.9
DAMPERS A. General: Dampers and actuators provided by this section. Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. B. Outside Air Dampers: Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Dampers shall be designed to operate from 0-100%. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2” WG air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to insure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. C. Return and Exhaust Air Dampers: Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2” WG air pressure differential across the damper. D. Actuators: 1. Electronic operators manufactured by Belimo. No substitutions. 2. UL 873 listed, CSA 4813-02 certified. 3. Direct coupled over shaft with “V” clamp, no connecting linkage. 4. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to actuator. 5. Spring return for power failure/safety application. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 6. Non-spring return with external manual gear release to allow manual positioning. 7. 0 to 10 VDC or 0 -to 20 mA control signal with 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range. 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal. 8. External built-in switch to allow reversing of direction of rotation. 9. Damper torque requirements based on information provided by damper manufacturer. 10. Factory wire dampers complete to a ‘terminal strip’ suitable for the Controls Contractor to make the connections in the field.
2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A. Refrigerant: R-410A refrigerant. B. Compressors: Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. 2. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels. 3. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor (using ‘digital-scroll’ technology) on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. 4. Isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators. C. Refrigerant Circuits: 1. Each circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 2. Each circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. 3. Lead circuit shall be provided with modulating hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal which allow the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space. 2.11 ENERGY RECOVERY A. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested ‘sensible-only’energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet. B. The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt. C. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix. D. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks. E. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
F. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI Certified Products. G. Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. H. Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel outside air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the wheels. (Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel outside air and exhaust air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the wheels.) I. Hinged service access door shall allow access to the wheel(s). J. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 2.12 CONTROLS A. Temperature controls will be provided by Division 25. Refrigeration operating and safety controls are to be provided by this section and enabled by Division 25. Energy recovery wheel defrost controls provided and enabled by this Section. Energy recovery wheel operating controls provided by Division 25. Exhaust fan variable frequency drive provided by this section. B. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal. C. 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each stage. D. 20 second between stage delay timers for each stage. E. Airflow measuring stationing: Provide factory packaged airflow measuring station. Provide ability to be controlled/monitored by the facility management system. 2.13 ELECTRICAL A. Provide control panel with all fan and compressor motor starters with thermal overload protection, control transformer, controls, and safeties. B. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and field wired 115 volt, 15 amp ground fault service receptacle C. Provide single point power connection. D. Unit disconnect is to be provided by Division 26.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with ARI 435. C. Furnish roof curb to roofing contractor. Roofing contractor shall install and flash curb to roof. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 82 16 AIR COILS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Water coils.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. B. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties. C. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork, Casings and Plenums: Installation of duct coils. D. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC. E. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequence for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ANSI/ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air- Heating Coils. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. ANSI/UL 1096 - Electric Central Air Heating Equipment. D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Submit shop drawings indicating coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures meet or exceed specified requirements and that coils are tested and rated in accordance with ANSI/ARI 410. All coils shall be certified and tagged with the ARI-410 label.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. B. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS - HYDRONIC COILS A. Bohn. B. Carrier. C. Heatcraft. D. McQuay. E. Temtrol. F. York. G. Substitutions: None.
2.2
FABRICATION A. Tubes: 1/2 inch OD seamless copper, .020 inch thick, arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into fins, silver brazed joints. B. Fins: Aluminum continuous plate type, .0075 inch thick, with full fin collars or individual helical finned tube type wound under tension. C. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage galvanized steel with 3/8 inch mounting holes on 6 inch centers. Provide tube supports for coils longer than 36 inches. D. Capacity: Refer to Schedule on Drawings. E. Limitations: 1. No more than 10 fins per inch. 2. No more than 7 feet of face length per coil section. Longer face lengths to be served by multiple coils fed from opposite ends. 3. No less than 2 rows for heating coils. 4. No less than 3 or more than 6 ft/sec fluid flow through water coils.
2.3
WATER HEATING COILS A. Headers: Seamless copper tubes with silver brazed joints. B. Testing: Air test under water to 315 psig for working pressure of 250 psig and 300 degrees F. C. Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs in headers for drain and vent; serpentine type with return bends on smaller sizes and return headers on larger sizes.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. C. Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to casings. Provide frames for maximum three coil sections. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans. Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins. E. Install coils level. Install cleanable tube coils with 1:50 pitch. F. Make connections to coils with unions and flanges. G. On water coils, provide shut-off valve on supply line and lockshield balancing valve on return line. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stopvalve. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points. H. On water heating coils, connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement). END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 82 36 FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Baseboard radiation. B. Finned tube radiation.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties. E. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping. F. Section 23 22 19 - Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties. G. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequence for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. 2. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided. 3. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements., D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access or valving. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 36-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Section 23 05 00 - Warranties.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BASEBOARD RADIATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Rittling. 2. Sigma. 3. Sterling. 4. Vulcan. 5. Substitutions: None. B. Heating Elements: 3/4 inch ID copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins, one tube end belled. C. Enclosure: Minimum 0.030 inch steel with [7 inch] [10 inch] high back and top of one piece; front panel, end panel, end caps, corners, and joiner pieces to snap together, with front panel easily removable. Provide full length damper. D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel ‘off-white’ color. E. Element Brackets: 0.0516 inch galvanized steel to support from panel and noise free element cradle. F. Heating Capacity: As scheduled, at 65 degrees F air temperature and 180 degrees F average water temperature.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage. C. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 36-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Baseboard Radiation: Locate on outside walls and run cover continuously wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Center elements under windows. Install end caps where units butt against walls. E. Hydronic Units: Provide with shut-off valve on supply and lockshield balancing valve on return piping. Provide with vent, if not easily accessible, extend vent to exterior surface of cabinet for easy servicing. For cabinet unit heaters, fan coil units, and unit heaters, provide float operated automatic air vents with stop valve. 3.2
CLEANING A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets. B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 36-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Unit heaters. B. Cabinet unit heaters.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. 2. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided. 3. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access or valving. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 39-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Section 23 05 00 - Warranties.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Provide one extra set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Airtherm. 2. Airdale. 3. Rittling. 4. Sigma. 5. Sterling. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Coils: Seamless heavy wall copper tubing, silver brazed to copper headers, and with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing. Factory tested at 250 psi and rated at 150 pounds of saturated steam pressure. C. Casing: 0.0478 inch steel with threaded pipe connections for hanger rods. D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel. E. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard; OSHA type fan guard; horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ball bearings. F. Air Outlet: Louvered cone diffuser on vertical models and double deflection louvers on horizontal throw models. G. Motor: Totally Enclosed specifically designed for unit heater service with automatic reset inherent overload protection. Motor and fan assembly resiliently mounted to eliminate vibration and minimize sound. Refer to Section 23 05 13. H. Heating Capacity: Refer to schedule on drawings. I. Electrical: Starters and disconnects by Division 26.
2.2
CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Airtherm. 2. Rittling.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 39-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Sigma. 4. Sterling. 5. Airdale. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, factory tested at 250 psig and are rated at 50 pounds of saturated steam pressure. C. Cabinet: 16 gage steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels, glass fiber insulation, integral air outlet and inlet grilles and wall seal with gasket. D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel finish, color selected by Architect on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet from factory color chart. E. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven. F. Motor: Tap wound variable speed permanent split capacitor with sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted. G. Control: Solid state fan speed controller, factory wired, located in cabinet. H. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil. I. Accessories: Return air grille, line voltage thermostat, rear perimeter gasketing, wall plate, tamper resistant fasteners, leveling leg kit. J. Heating Capacity: As scheduled, at 65 degrees F air temperature and 180 degrees F average water temperature. K. Electrical: Motor starter with thermal overload protection and disconnect switch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage. C. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction. D. Unit Heaters: Hang from building structure, with pipe hangers anchored to building, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated. E. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct recess size for recessed units. F. Hydronic Units: Provide with shut-off valve on supply and lockshield balancing valve on return piping. Provide with vent, if not easily accessible, extend vent to exterior surface of cabinet for easy servicing. For cabinet unit heaters, and unit heaters, provide float operated automatic air vents with stop valve.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 39-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.2
CLEANING A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets. B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. C. Install new filters.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 82 39-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 25 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of an extension of the existing temperature control and building automation system as shown on the drawings and as specified in Division 25. B. All work to be complete and is to be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 25 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 25 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 25 05 00 takes precedence. Section 25 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 25 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 25 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 25.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner, Architect/Engineer and Prime Contractor.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Energy Code AIA Guidelines
1.5
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AABC – Associated Air Balance Council ADC – Air Diffusion Council AIA – American Institute of Architects AMCA – Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI – American National Standards Institute ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM – American Society of Testing and Materials EPA – Environmental Protection Agency FM – Factory Mutual IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES – Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA – International Cable Engineers Association IRI – Industrial Risk Insurance NEBB – National Environmental Balancing Bureau
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
NBFU – National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS – National Bureau of Standards NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association NSC – National Safety Council OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration SMACNA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL – Underwriter’s Laboratories 1.6
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.7
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. 2. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or as requested by the Engineer. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer – One (1) copy. b. Architect – One (1) copy. c. Prime Contractor – Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 25 10 00 25 35 00 25 95 00 1.8
Description Integrated Automation Network Equipment Instrumentation, Control Valves, Valve Actuators, Damper Actuators Control Sequences
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing.
1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidder’s lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractor’s responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 3. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 4. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 5. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 6. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 7. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.12 ELECTRICAL A. All high and low voltage wiring necessary for the complete controls system installation and function is to be the entire responsibility of the controls contractor (Division 25). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. ‘Andover’ by Control Services of MN (UHL Co., Maple Grove, MN) B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM A. The District is currently controlled by an ‘Andover’ by Control Services of MN (UHL Co., Maple Grove, MN). It is the intent to extend and integrate the new systems/controls with the current system(s) in operation. B. The entire system is to be fully BACnet compatible.
2.3
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, nor indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements. D. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. E. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. F. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. H. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed. I. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. J. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
K. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. L. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. M. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. N. All holes created by removal of existing systems, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. O. Where existing wall devices are removed patch and paint wall to match or provide stainless steel coverplate. P. Remove pneumatic lines back to main and cap. Owner and Contractor are to verify typical runtime of air compressor before work is started. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. D. Painting:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. E. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. 3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of the system at the time it is put into service. Provide an application engineer to instruct Owner personnel of the systems and equipment. Training to be performed by factory-trained and authorized personnel. B. Operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of four (4) persons of the Operating Staff. C. Provide sixteen (16) total hours of on-site training. D. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. E. Provide written documentation, signed by the installing contractor and two (2) Owner’s representatives. Documentation to include dates and hours when training was completed and persons attending the training. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor will be responsible to secure, on behalf of the Owner, utility rebates associated with the controls design. This is to include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report has been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 25 for additional requirements. B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.13 ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD-ROM to be book-marked per specification section and equipment type. Format of the files are to be in PDF format. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of the approved as-built drawings. CD-ROM to be book-marked per sheet and the files are to be in PDF format.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 05 00 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 25 10 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION NETWORK EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. General product description.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00 – Common Work Results for Integrated Automation. B. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC. C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating temperature control system, utilizing, direct digital controls, as shown on the drawings and as described herein. B. All labor, material and equipment necessary to meet the functional intent of the system, as specified herein and as shown on the drawings, shall be included. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional intent shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00: Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 4. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 5. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software. D. Specification Compliance: Provide paragraph by paragraph specification compliance report. Report shall indicate for each numbered paragraph, how the proposed system meets the criteria of the paragraph. Format shall be:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Comply - without exception. 2. Qualify - meet the function intent. Identify all differences in specific functions stated and provide description of what is excluded or how the system will meet the function specified. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: manufactured components. 1.6
Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Close-out procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 2. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices. 2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. D. Application Software Documentation: AutoCad blueprint documentation of the software application for each DDC controller. Documentation provided shall include block software flowcharts, showing the interconnection between each of the control algorithms and sequences of operation. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation, supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the sole representative or local branch office of the temperature control company. Bids by wholesalers, contractors and franchised dealers of any firm whose principal business is not that of manufacturing and installing environmental control systems are not acceptable. Installer specializing and experience in DDC control system installation for not less than five years. C. System: Composed of standard products of the manufacturer to insure ongoing parts availability and trained technical support. D. Service: Furnish proof of having company -trained servicemen available to handle service calls within four (4) hours of notification. Twenty-four (24) hour service capability, 365 days per year.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products of the FMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals: 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. UL-873; Temperature Indication and Regulating Equipment 3. UL-864; Fire Signaling and Smoke Control Systems 4. CSA; Canadian Standards Association 5. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices B. Products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. C. System installation shall comply with NFPA, NEMA, Local and National codes. 1.9
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that facility management system is sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work. B. Provide copies of Point Verification and Sequence Verification to Engineer and TAB contractor. This will serve as written notification to the TAB contractor to begin testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.10 SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during Test and Balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties. B. Owner shall provide a dedicated voice grade telephone extension for remote communications during the Warranty period. Contractor shall provide and implement an auto-answer, audo-dial modem system for purposes of remote diagnostics and notification of desired expectations. C. Provide one year extended warranty and preventative maintenance agreement for the temperature control systems. Any manufacturing defects arising during this extended warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner. The preventative maintenance agreement shall include a minimum of quarterly service visits include defective parts replacement and commence upon expiration of one year warranty required by Section 25 05 00. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of facility management system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four complete inspections, one in each season for one year(s), to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. 1.13 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.14 WORK INCLUDED A. The successful contractor is to supply a totally native BACnet-Web-based system, based on a distributed control system in accordance with this specification. The operator’s workstation, all building controllers, application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and network standards communicating through BACnet MS/TP communications protocol. B. Provide all necessary hardware and software to meet the system’s functional specifications. C. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from project design data. D. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents. E. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables needed, and all associated hardware. F. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers, and input/output devices. G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section. H. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied. I. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation, startup, and commissioning. J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein. K. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system. L. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used components shall be used as any part or piece of installed system. 1.15 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall be provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1352001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, including all unitary equipment such as all air handlers, boilers, chillers, and any other listed equipment using native BACnet-compliant components. System and all software is to be web-based. B. The entire Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of two components: 1. A network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on a BACnet communication network using MS/TP PHP or PUP EIA-485 network. Refer to 2.1 for approved manufacturers. 2. A host computer running the District standard Graphic User Interface. This GUI shall communicate with the DDC components via BACnet, MS-TP, PHP, or PUP, EIA-485.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including scheduling building control strategies with optimum start and logging routines. All energy management software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on the operator’s terminal. Operator’s terminal software is to be used for access to field-based energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, runtime accumulation, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. Network controller shall have Web User Interface services to
support many simultaneous users over intranet via standard web browser. D. All application controllers for every terminal unit air handler, all central plant equipment (Boilers, Chillers) and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be fully programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller via BACnet LAN, PHP or PUP EIA-485. All building and network controllers shall be compatible with existing IT network security software. E. Room sensors shall be architecturally pleasing, sense temperature, allow operator to override system and adjust temperature setpoint, and include a jack that allows the service technician to adjust any zone parameter. Include all wiring for sensor and field service tool. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/INSTALLERS A. Andover (Uhl Company, Maple Grove, MN). B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
BUILDING AREA CONTROLLER (AC) A. The AC shall be capable of communicating to all specified Programmable Unitary Controllers (PUCs) and Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) without the addition of external components, and shall operate entirely independent of the Color Graphic Software (CGS) operator interface. B. The AC shall include seamless integration of all types of unitary controllers specified, facilitating connection of multiple networks, and providing a real-time multitasking environment for execution of high-level centralized energy management functions including: 1. Customized report generation. 2. Time-based trending 3. Maximum demand predictive algorithms 4. Central system optimization 5. Event-based trending C. Programming and database entry shall be object oriented in design, providing a uniform appearance between different types of input, output, setpoint, program and global variables D. Minimum two (2) device communication ports, permitting direct electrical connection of all specified unitary controllers and capability to operate at different communication speeds and protocols shall be provided.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Future incremental expansion of the system shall be easily accomplished by addition of networkable controllers to the proposed system architecture. The AC shall permit upgrading through the addition of software drivers, to ASHRAE BACnet protocol within one year of release of the protocol at no cost. F. Hardware Requirements shall be as follows: 1. A parallel printer port with a DB25S connector 2. Minimum one (1) EIA-232D serial port providing connection of dumb or VT100 type terminal or direct connection to the CGS operator interface or additional serial printer 3. Minimum four (4) EIA-485 dual trunk serial ports, providing maximum flexibility and future expansion potential without the owner incurring additional cost. Each port shall have a plug-in socket connection, switchable biasing resistors and be provided with both optical and magnetic isolation. Communication speed to PUCs and ASCs shall be user definable between 9600 and 38,400 baud. a. The AC shall be capable of communicating with a minimum of 256 PUCs and ASCs without the addition of external components, and shall be independent of the CGS operator interface. 4. Hard disk drive, including hard disk controller with minimum 800 MB capacity and 60,000 hour MTBF. The hard disk shall be capable of withstanding ten (10) G shock during operation. Systems proposed that do not provide an integral hard disk drive must offer a stand-alone and portable hard disk drive to backup the AC. 5. Facility to accept an Ethernet card for integration of the BAS system into a LAN network. The Ethernet card shall be supplied by the BAS system manufacturer and be fully compatible with the owner's LAN network and be provided with both a BNC Thinnet connection and a DB15S AUI Thicknet connection. The AC software must currently support Ethernet or be easily upgradeable at no additional cost to the client. 6. 32-key, keypad and backlit LCD display with contrast control, to permit local interrogation of information and modification of control parameters. G. Software Requirements shall be as follows: 1. System software shall provide a real-time, multitasking environment comprising of a minimum 32 tasks. System operation shall employ industry standard MS-DOS for the reading and writing of files to and from the floppy drive/hard disk. 2. Tasks shall sequentially access the microprocessor for task completion or a maximum amount of time defined in the operating system. 3. Each EIA-485 port shall have a user specified communication baud rate to 38,400 baud. Each port shall have a multi-protocol capability as necessary to facilitate direct communication with all types of stand-alone controllers specified. 4. The AC shall as a minimum utilize Public Host Protocol (PHP), BACnet MS/TP or Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) to communicate with PUCs and ASCs. Communication protocols that are proprietary to the manufacturer are not acceptable.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Each EIA-485 port shall include a system map of the unique identification numbers for every stand-alone controller connected on the network. The map of networked controllers shall be capable of being viewed dynamically through any of the specified operator interface devices. Any networked controllers not responding or communicating shall be easily identified and an associated scan alarm shall be generated. H. Ethernet Communications shall be as follows: 1. Communication via Ethernet shall be performed at 10 Mb/s. Ethernet physical topology shall be compatible with IEEE 802.2 or 802.3 standard. The Ethernet LAN shall be Novell or IP compatible. Systems which are not Novell or IP compatible shall be rejected. 2. Ethernet software in conjunction with the AC resident Ethernet card shall operate on all industry standard physical media and include Thinnet, Thicknet and Fiber Optic network topologies. 3. The system shall be capable of communicating on Token Ring and ARCNet networks. I. Database requirements shall be as follows: 1. The object-oriented database shall allow a privileged user to create, modify, delete, and list the following types of named objects: a. Point names shall have a 24 alpha-numeric character descriptor and a minimum 64 character alpha-numeric character description associated with the point. The address of the PUCs or ASCs shall be user specified, together with channel, applicable engineering units, alarm class, object access privilege level, alarm and return messages. b. Point groups shall be created comprising a minimum 16 named objects, allowing the user to utilize the menu penetration technique to dynamically view and modify point parameters without requiring knowledge of the individual named point descriptors. c. Programs shall be written in a high-level, BASIC-type language. Program logic shall utilize a program reference block, permitting supervision of multiple typical mechanical systems through one program logic block. The program logic blocks shall be self documenting and contain comment statements to assist the user in understanding and modifying existing program logic. d. Alarm classes shall be associated with all named objects. A minimum of 256 alarm classes shall be provided, each class shall be defined by a minimum 3 character name. 1) Classes shall specify whether the incoming alarm is to be recorded in a general or class specific log and whether the alarms will require operator acknowledgment. e. Users shall refer to named user operators. Users shall have a password and a user privilege pattern which is compared with the object privilege pattern to determine access to any other named object. 1) The AC shall provide a language independent menu penetration technique via a direct connect VT100 operator terminal or via Virtual terminal emulation mode from the color graphic station or Ethernet operator interface terminal to create, modify, list or delete named objects within the AC database. A single keystroke shall be required to select a menu option. 2) The LCD front panel keypad display shall indicate current time, date and day of week. A code word shall be entered by the user to access desired information.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3) The AC shall maintain separate logs of acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms received for each alarm class. The menu penetration system shall allow the user to list alarm class logs to archive, floppy disk or to delete alarms as required. J. The AC shall support the following types of trends: 1. Infinite trends shall commence sampling data on operator command or automatically scheduled to continuously trend data until similarly commanded to stop or when the maximum number of samples specified by the user is reached. The minimum number of trends available shall be 1000. 2. Circular trends shall continuously sample data when activated. When the last specified data entry is collected, the circular trend shall re-write over the oldest collected data entry. 3. Time anchored trends shall collect data at user specified time intervals. Anchor intervals shall vary between a minimum 1 minute, 15 minute, 30 minute, etc... through daily, weekly, monthly and yearly intervals. 4. Each trend shall have the capability of recording eight measured variables, comprising analog and/or digital values. Each trend shall have a user-specified capability of collecting average values as opposed to instantaneous values. The AC shall generate a trend alarm when trend data is not successfully retrieved. 5. Trended data shall be either displayed through a local operator interface terminal or the printer. The output format shall be user configurable between a numerical display or a strip chart display. The numerical display shall show sample reference, historical value, date and time. The strip chart display shall show the range of numerical values and all references and historical values together for each time interval and date. K. The AC shall include a job scheduler capable of performing the following functions on a scheduled time of day, day of week, month of year and yearly basis or immediately upon request: 1. Broadcast message: A user shall be able to specify the operator port number and send any alpha-numeric messages to the assigned operator port. 2. Data capture: The AC shall be capable of uploading data values in formats compatible with third party software such as Lotus 1-2-3, Excel and Quattro. Data values shall be stored on hard disk files and may be directly uploaded or downloaded to a host portable computer or desktop PC via a direct connect or Ethernet network connection. 3. Download/Upload: The AC shall upload/download individual files containing unitary controller programs and database. 4. Customized report generation: In addition to customized reports created through the applications programming language, the user may manually demand any specific report utilizing the report templates and output the report to the printer and/or the floppy/hard disk drive. 5. Import/Export database objects: All named objects, groups, engineering units and programs shall be capable of being defined on-line or off-line in a laptop or desktop PC. The import/export shall translate on-line to off-line text files and vice versa.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
L. The AC shall support the creation of data tables comprising a user-specified number of numerical data values. These tables may reference nonlinear data or be constructed entirely through the application programming language. Data tables shall be capable of being transferred to user customized reports. 2.3
COLOR GRAPHIC SYSTEM (CGS) A. General: The color graphic system shall provide an intuitive, user friendly, mouse driven, operator system permitting the system operators with the authorized privilege access to a logical sequence of dynamic color graphic screens. The logical sequence of screens shall start with a campus layout, followed by an individual building floor plan layout, with graphical links to the equipment within the facility. The graphics shall follow the current District standards B. Communication Capabilities: The CGS shall be capable of speaking multiple protocols over various means. 1. Protocols and communications parameters: The CGS shall be capable of communicating with American Auto-Matrix protocols and other protocols available in the public domain. These protocols shall be available via various hardware connections. a. Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) shall be available via an EIA-485 connection at a minimum communication baud rate of 9600. A communication EIA-232 to EIA-485 converter such as the American Auto-Matrix CC/485 will be necessary for communication. b. Public Host Protocol (PHP) shall be available for communication via an EIA-232 connection at a minimum baud rate of 19200. This protocol shall also be available for modem communications via the PC onboard modem. The CGS shall accept any Windows configured modems and allow for various ports of communication. The CGS shall support multiple modems with the only limitation being the number of ports available on the PC. c. SDP/IPX and SDP/IP shall be available over an industry standard Ethernet connection. The speed and media settings shall be configured by the operating systems settings. d. ASHRAE/ANSI standard 135P BACnet MS/TP protocol shall be available for communications. 2. The CGS shall not be limited to protocols listed above and allow additional protocol drivers to be added, as they become available. 3. The CGS will support full Windows language capabilities and allow the user to view all information in multiple languages. C. Window parameters and peripheral settings: The CGS shall conform to all settings for sound, color schemes and peripheral hardware as configured in Windows. 1. The CGS shall operate on Microsoft Windows NT operating systems. 2. Window background colors and screen background colors shall conform to operating systems settings configured in the Windows Control Panel. 3. The CGS shall support sound cards that are supported by the operating system. All sound settings shall be configured in the operating systems control panel. 4. The CGS shall allow all printing functions to occur over all operating system configured printers including network printers.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. The CGS shall accept any mouse device supported by the operating system. D. Point Database: The system shall maintain a database of all available system points via an Object Server (ObServer) 1. The ObServer shall be capable of supporting multiple host systems over various communications protocols. 2. The ObServer shall be capable of uploading point information from host panels for use in display assignment. This shall be user initiated. 3. All ObServer points shall be capable of read/write password access within each attribute of available point information. Security will also be provided for ObServer functions. 4. The CGS will allow the operator to store all point information on a single server to be accessed by multiple workstations. Multiple ObServers may be run concurrently on facility servers for distributed network traffic. Multiple ObServers will be able to access each other via the addition of the server’s IP address to the accessing ObServer. Points will not need to be duplicated within the accessing ObServer. Point information between servers will be a seamless operation and network speed shall only be limited by available bandwidth. 5. The ObServer will allow the operator to define alternate names to points within the system for familiarity with real mechanical system names. E. Graphic Screen Viewer: The graphic screen viewer will allow the operator to monitor the facility quickly via graphics that depict the facility layout and mechanical equipment. The viewer will provide real-time display of facility conditions. 1. Graphical Display Performance: The CGS will be capable of the following at a minimum a. The number of graphical screen shall only be limited by the amount of hard drive space on the workstation PC b. There shall be no limit to the amount of information fields displayed in a graphic other than the size of the monitor. c. Each graphic will be capable of refreshing up to 50 points of data within 5 seconds. d. The program will be capable of displaying multiple screens of updated information for simultaneous viewing of systems. e. The screen graphics will be capable of being stored on a single server or on multiple workstations. If stored on a single server, the CGS will allow multiple workstations to access the same graphic and view updated point information without loss of performance. 2. Graphic screens will be capable of the following display cells. Additional cells may be added, as they become available. a. Background screens will be capable of being displayed as bitmaps, GIFs or metafiles. The graphic program will allow the operator to resize the background screen without utilizing another program. b. The graphic builder will allow the operator to add text utilizing all available operating system fonts, colors and sizes. c. A scale cell will be capable of displaying scale information. The user will be able to define scaling attributes such as color, font and scale increments. The scale box size will be user defined. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
d. Binary (Digital) Cells: The user will be able to define graphical representations of digital values. The following cells will be available: 1) Button: the button will allow the user to define on off states utilizing a push button display. The user will have the option to display a depressed button or one that toggles when depressed 2) Text: the text cell will allow the user to display different text for binary displays. 3) Image cell: the image cell will allow the user to display an image based upon an input state 4) Movie play: the user will be able to play a movie based upon an input state. 5) Rotor Cell: the user will be able to display a rotor based on an input value e. Analog Cells: The user will be able to monitor and modify analog values via the following cells. 1) Numeric Cell: This will allow the user to display a numeric value 2) Level indicator: this cell will display the level of an analog value 3) Line graph: The user will be capable of displaying a line graph of an analog point. F. Alarms: The CGS shall be capable of displaying user configured alarms from field panels as well as generate alarms from the graphic screens. 1. Alarm Viewer: This will allow the user to display alarms that have been pre-configured within the field panel equipment. It will allow the user to assign colors to alarms, returns and exceptions. User definable *.wav files will be available as alarms are initiated. The alarm viewer will run in the tray and pop-up over any running application to alert the user of an alarm. The alarm viewer will also be capable of restricting alarm acknowledgement via multiple password levels. 2. Alarms configured within graphic screens: The CGS will be capable of allowing the user to configure screen alarms within the graphic screens. These alarms will be capable of launching alternate applications, launching alternate screens, playing wav, avi or ani files and full email capabilities. Alarms that are configured to initiate email shall utilize all email programs available to the operating system. G. Scheduling: The CGS shall be capable of scheduling equipment via assigned graphic screens or via Microsoft Outlook Scheduler. Scheduling shall be accomplished by dragging the point to be scheduled to the Outlook scheduler and highlighting the active days and/or times. The system will allow the operator to define occupancy information such as setpoints and start/stop times. H. Microsoft System Agent: The CGS shall be capable of utilizing the Microsoft System Agent for interface functions. The CGS will support at least the following Microsoft System Agent functions: 1. Voice recognition: the system shall be capable of utilizing the voice recognition commands available within System Agent to modify setpoints, change schedules and start/stop units. 2. Alarm reporting: The system shall be capable of utilizing the Microsoft System Agent to generate alarms to the graphical screens in multiple language formats. The user will be capable of configuring suggestions as to possible problems and probable solutions.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
I. Trends: The CGS will be capable of displaying trends uploaded from field equipment. The uploads may occur due to pre-defined schedules or be user initiated. Trend data can be uploaded into spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel for viewing. The CGS will also provide a cell that allows the user to display real-time data of a selected point. J. Help: The CGS will provide intuitive help screens with walk-through graphical displays of many common procedures. The help shall inform the user graphically via mouse cursor movement how to accomplish common tasks. All functions supported by the CGS will provide some form of at least text help screens. 2.4
CENTRAL PLANT AND AIR HANDLING CONTROLLERS A. Programmable Unitary Controllers (PUCs) 1. Each PUC shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based, unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant shown in the mechanical and electrical drawings, control sequences and point configurations detailed in this specification. a. The PUC shall utilize user programmable function modules and a user customized programming language as required to meet the functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis. The PUC shall be capable of communicating global and critical variables to other PUCs residing on the same network without the intervention of a higher level controller. 2. Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Eight (8) universal inputs per controller b. Configurable for 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, thermistor, or dry contact type input signals c. Maximum 500 millisec update time per input d. At least two (2) inputs shall be minimum 15-bit analog to digital resolution Manufacturers who cannot meet this resolution requirement shall provide Industrial grade Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). e. Capable of digital input pulse rates to 10 Hz 3. Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Eight (8) relay or four (4) triac outputs per controller b. Form C contacts rated at 120 VAC 5 A dry contact or external c. Integral Hand-Auto-Off DIP switch block for Form C contacts d. LED status indication 4. Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Three (3) analog outputs per controller b. 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA output signals c. Maximum 500 millisec update time per output d. 8-bit digital to analog resolution 5. Communication Networks:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. The PUC shall utilize 2-wire twisted shielded EIA-485 line signalling for communications to other PUCs, portable operator terminal (POT), color graphic operator station, or AC. b. PUCs shall communicate at speeds up to and including 38.4K baud and shall utilize a token passing scheme to accommodate concurrent communication with multiple network devices. c. Failure of one PUC shall not affect the operation of other PUCs on the network. 6. Nonvolatile Memory: a. All PUC's operating parameters, setpoints and schedules shall be stored in battery backed RAM, EEPROM or other nonvolatile memory. b. A minimum 6 KB RAM shall be built in to the PUC for customized control sequence programming. c. Program parameters shall be stored during a power outage for a minimum of 1 year. 7. Terminations: PUC terminations shall be plugable screw terminal blocks for connection of input and output signal wiring. Spade type connectors or insulation displacement connectors shall not be accepted. 8. Input Power: Input power requirements for the PUC shall be 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any other used for motor control coils. 9. Operating Environment: The microprocessor board shall be suitably packaged in steel for protection against electrical transients and be capable of operating within environmental conditions of 32 - 122 F and 0 - 95% Rh, non-condensing. 10. Application Programming a. Application program sequences shall be accomplished by writing the specified sequence off-line using an ASCII text editor. The same BASIC-like language used in the AC shall be used in the PUCs. Programs shall be downloaded to the PUC prior to commissioning. All application programming provided to accomplish the sequence of operations described in this section shall be provided by the BAS control system manufacturer and proven in similar applications. The application programming language used in the PUC shall be the same applications programming language used in the higher level AC. b. The program language shall permit subroutines, single data arrays, arithmetical operations, multiple comment lines and complex algorithms to be implemented in full compliance with the sequences of operation. The program shall be capable of being compiled off-line and downloaded from the AC or portable laptop computer. The program shall reside in the nonvolatile battery backed-up RAM. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -13
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. The FMS shall provide all temperature control regulation and monitoring through its network of stand-alone Direct Digital Controllers (DDC). B. Furnish & install a temperature control system consisting of direct digital control of primary mechanical equipment and pneumatic control of terminal equipment. C. Install all interconnecting cable and network communications wiring between the direct digital control panels located in the mechanical equipment rooms. D. Provide the building owner the capability to communicate with this building from the off-site maintenance office. E. The building user shall be able to monitor and control all points connected to the system. F. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration. G. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 15940. H. Provide with 120v AC, 15 amp dedicated emergency power circuit to each programmable control unit. I. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. J. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
3.3
LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from owner’s representative prior to installation. B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures. C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels. D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections—sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.
3.4
POINT VERIFICATION A. Verify end-to-end operation of the system. B. Provide hard copy of an “All Points Summary Listing” of each part or system. C. Provide print screen of the process display showing real time dynamic point information for all points on the subsystem.
3.5
INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally, in accordance with Electrical Specification and all national, state and local electrical codes.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -14
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for all communications trunks. C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative prior to rough-in.Each subsystem shall be performance verified as operational using temporary trends of each control loop. D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor. F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All thermostats wiring will be installed in metal raceway and shall be the responsibility of this contractor. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit). 3.6
DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY A. Provide all database generation. B. Displays 1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles. C. Run Time Totalization 1. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes. D. Trendlog 1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be automatically trended. E. Alarm 1. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements. F. Database Save 1. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.
3.7
START-UP /TESTING A. The Facility Management System shall be started up in phases agreed to by the Owner. B. Prior to testing and verifying proper system operation, Contractor shall furnish the Owner and Engineer, for acceptance two (2) copies each of the start-up/testing procedure proposed. Owner and Engineer will review the check-out procedure prior to start-up/testing.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -15
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. After the procedure is reviewed and after installation is complete and systems are ready to be placed into regular service, Contractor shall inform the Owner of this fact in writing. D. Contractor shall agree on a start-up date with Owner and Engineer. E. During start-up period Contractor shall have on-site qualified field technicians to place the system in operation, marking such tests, adjustments and changes as may be found necessary to insure successful operation of the installed equipment and systems. All tests shall be documented by the Contractor and certified, verifying that the tests have been performed and that all deficiencies have been corrected. All testing must be performed and all deficiencies corrected to Owner's satisfaction. 3.8
TRAINING A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment. B. Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons. C. Provide on-site training (a total of 16 hours) as part of this contract. D. Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If applicable, costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner. E. Provide written documentation, signed by the installing contractor and three (3) owner’s representatives, documentation to include dates and hours when training was completed and persons attending the training.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 25 05 00. B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative. C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation.
3.10 FIELD SERVICE A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified. D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00 -16
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 25 35 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Control Valves and Valve Operators B. Input/Output Sensors C. Thermostats
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00- Common Work Results for Integrated Automation B. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Temperature Sensor Sockets, Gauge Taps
Installation of Control Valves, Flow Switches,
D. Section 23 33 13 – Automatic Control Dampers E. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment F. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC 1.3
REFERENCES A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters B. ASME MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) D. NEMA DC 3 - Low-Voltage Room Thermostats E. NEMA EMC1 - Energy Management Systems Definitions F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems H. UL 873 – Temperature and Airflow Indicating Equipment
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide electronic and electric control systems consisting of end devices, control devices, operating devices, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. 2. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. C. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate operating conditions after detailed check of systems at Date of Substantial Completion. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that facility management system is sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work.
1.10 SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during Test and Balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties B. Provide two year warranty and preventative maintenance agreement for the temperature control systems. Any manufacturing defects arising during this extended warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner. The preventative maintenance agreement shall include a minimum of quarterly service visits include defective parts replacement and commence upon expiration of one year warranty required by Section 25 05 00.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for two years from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four complete inspections, one in each season for two years to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Section 25 10 00.
2.2
CONTROL VALVES A. Ball Pattern: 1. Bronze body, stainless steel ball and stem, blow-out proof stem, TFE seats, graphite impregnated stem seals, adjustable stem packing gland. 2. Two-way bodies up to 3” rated for 600 psi WOG, cold, non-shock service. 3. Three-way bodies up to 2” rated for 400 psi WOG, cold, non-shock service. 4. Hydronic Systems: a. Size for 3 psig to 5 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. b. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. B. Butterfly Pattern: 1. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 250° F wafer or lug ends, extended neck. 2. Hydronic Systems: a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250° F. b. Size for 1 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. C. Electronic Actuators: 1. Manufactured by Belimo. a. Substitutions: None. 2. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or temperature protection. 3. Select operator for full shut off at maximum pump differential pressure. 4. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to actuator. 5. Spring return for power failure/safety application. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 6. Non-spring return with external manual gear release to allow manual positioning. 7. 0 to10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal with 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range. 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. External built-in switch to allow reversing of direction of rotation. D. Radiation Valves: 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, 2 or 3 port as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends. 2. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250° F. 3. Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 4. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. 5. Operators (Modulating): Self contained, linear motorized actuator with approximately 3/4" stroke, 60 second full travel with transformer and SPDT contacts: 24 v DC, 6 watt maximum input. 2.3
DAMPERS A. Provided under Section 23 33 13.
2.4
DAMPER OPERATORS A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. B. Electronic Operators: 1. Manufactured by Belimo. a. Substitutions: None. 2. UL 873 listed, CSA 4813-02 certified. 3. Direct coupled over shaft with “V” clamp, no connecting linkage. 4. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to actuator. 5. Spring return for power failure/safety application. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 6. Non-spring return with external manual gear release to allow manual positioning. 7. 0 to 10 VDC or 0 -to 20 mA control signal with 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range. 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal. 8. External built-in switch to allow reversing of direction of rotation. 9. Damper torque requirements based on information provided by damper manufacturer. C. Number of actuators required for proper function: Sufficient to achieve unrestricted movement throughout damper range. Refer to the drawings for physical sizes of dampers.
2.5
INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS A. Temperature: 1. Resistance temperature detectors with resistance tolerance of plus or minus 0.1% at 70° F, interchangeability less than plus or minus 0.2%, time constant of 13 seconds maximum for fluids and 200 seconds maximum for air.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Measuring current maximum 5 mA with maximum self-heat of 0.031° F/mW in fluids and 0.014° F/mW in air. 3. Provide 3 lead wires and shield for input bridge circuit. 4. Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or smaller than one square meter. Use averaging elements where larger or prone to stratification sensor length 8’ or 16’ as required. 5. Insertion elements for liquids shall be with brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2”. 6. Room sensors: Locking cover. 7. Outside air sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct rays of sun. 8. Room security sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. B. Humidity Sensors: 1. Room Sensors: Accuracy within 3% over the range of 20% to 60% RH. With locking cover, span of 10 to 60% relative humidity. 2. Outside Air Sensors: Accuracy within 2% over the range of 20% to 90% RH. With outside weather enclosure and mounting plate. C. Static Pressure Sensors: 1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150% of maximum expected input. 2. Temperature compensates with typical thermal error or 0.06% of full scale in temperature range of 40 to 100° F. 3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3%. 4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc. D. Equipment Operation Sensors: 1. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers, adjustable and set to 175% of rated motor current. E. Carbon Dioxide Detectors: 1. Wall or duct type; non-dispersive infrared, 0-2000 ppm, accuracy of +/-5% of reading or +/75ppm, repeatability of +/-20ppm, calibration once per year, less than one minute response time, automatic electronic zero adjustment. 2. Operating temperature range of 32-112F, operating humidity range of 0-99%RH, 20-30VAC, 18-30VDC, less than 2.5W consumption at 24VAC. 3. Analog output 0-10VDC, 4-20mA. 2.6
THERMOSTATS/TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. Electric Room Thermostats: 1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control. 2. Service: Cooling only, heating only, cooling and heating, one or two step cooling, and one or two step heating, as required for each control sequence. 3. Covers: Locking with concealed setpoint, without thermometer.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Line Voltage Thermostats: 1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required. 2. Dead band: Maximum 2° F. 3. Cover: Locking with setpoint indication, with thermometer. 4. Rating: Motor load. C. Room Thermostat Accessories: 1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum. 2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 3. Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base. D. Immersion Thermostat: 1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint and adjustable throttling range. E. Airstream Thermostats: 1. Averaging service remote bulb element: Minimum 20’. 2.7
OUTSIDE AIR: AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION A. Provide Ebtron Silver Series, Air Monitor or Tek-Air probe and control panel/transmitter. Unit to be field calibrated and started up by a Manufacturers Representative. Unit to display cfm. Verify probe size and install per manufacturers recommendations.
2.8
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) A. Manufacturers 1. ABB 2. Danfoss 3. Emerson 4. Substitutions: None. B. Description 1. Provide enclosed variable frequency controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. C. Rating and operating characteristics 1. Modify the input voltage ratings for the specific project. 2. Rated Input Voltage: 460 volt +/-10%, 3 phase. 3. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts, 3 phase. 4. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz., plus 3 Hertz or minus 10 Hertz. 5. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and .95, lagging, over the entire range of operating speed and load. 6. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95% 7. Harmonic Distortion of Input Voltage Waveform: 3% maximum at full load
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Waveform: 10% maximum at full load. 9. Harmonic Attenuation: Provide line reactors as required to attenuate harmonic distortion. Refer to paragraph 1.3. 10. Current Limit Ratings: a. Slow Current Regulation: Adjustable to 125% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. b. Rapid Current Regulation: Adjustable to 170% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. c. Current Switch Off Limit: Fixed at 225% (minimum, instantaneous) of variable torque current rating. 11. Overload Rating: 110% of rated variable torque current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes and140% of rate torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 minutes. 12. Environmental Requirements: a. Operating Temperature: 0oC to +40oC (32oF to 104oF) without derating. b. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non-condensing. c. Elevation: 3300’ maximum without derating. d. Acoustical Noise: Do not exceed audible noise level of 85 dBA measured a 3’ from the VFD within the VFD entire operating range. D. Design 1. Inverter Type: Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) with variable frequency and pulse width, transistorized-type design. Construct of modular rack assemblies to facilitate maintenance. 2. Rectifier: Six pulse, solid state, full-wave bridge rectified, sufficient to supply full load to inverter. 3. Cooling: Air cooling with replaceable filters. Exhaust air from top of unit. 4. Front Access: Provide modular design for major components accessible/replaceable from the front. E. Fabrication 1. Enclosure: NEMA 1 enclosure with dead front construction. Designed with front access for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged doors equipped with latch handle and lock. 2. Enclosure Finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with semi-gloss enamel. 3. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug. F. Features and Accessories 1. Standard Features a. Ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. b. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
c. Capable of starting a rotating load and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without tripping safety devices or damaging components. d. Equipped with automatic extended power ride through circuit for up to 5 cycles. e. RS-485 serial communication port standard. f. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled. 2. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate input current or KW (True RMS values), output voltage, output frequency, elapsed time meter. 3. Status Indicators: Provide separate indicators for input power on, input power fault, overcurrent fault, overvoltage & undervoltage faults, ground-fault, overtemperature fault. 4. Adjustments: a. Volt per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10%. b. Minimum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 4 - 40 Hertz. c. Maximum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 40 - 90 Hertz. d. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110% of rated. e. Acceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, .5 - 30 seconds. f. Deceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, 1 - 30 seconds. 5. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch and digital manual speed control located on front of door. 6. Input Signals: Provide interface with any of the following control inputs: a. D.C. Analog Voltages: 0 - 5 VDC and 0 - 10 VDC. b. D.C. Analog Currents: 0 - 5 ma and 4 - 20 ma. c. Pneumatic signal: 3- 15 psi 7. Analog Output Signals: Two (2) analog outputs proportional to frequency, output voltage or output current. 8. Digital Output Signals: Two (2) digital relay outputs, form C contacts, rated 8 amps at 24 VDC and .4 amps at 250 VAC. 9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of the controller with provisions for padlocking. 12. Transient Protection: Include integral protection on the input line. G. Shaft Grounding Kit 1. Manufacturer: AEGIS. a. Substitutions: None.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. C. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. D. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such air handling unit.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Provide conduit and electrical wiring where required. Refer to Division 26. C. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls. D. Check and verify location of thermostats, humidistats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate 60” above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats E. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors with sun shield. F. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements. Refer to Section 25 10 00. G. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances and where indicated. H. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face. I. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position. J. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 25 95 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Sequence of operation for existing and new mechanical systems and components for the Farmington Elementary School building. B. Equipment: 1. Air handling units. 2. Return fans. 3. Rooftop units. 4. Variable speed drives. 5. Energy Recovery (wheel). 6. Gravity pressure relief. 7. Heating system. 8. Steam to water heat exchangers. 9. Air-cooled chillers. 10. Single duct VAV box with heating coils. 11. Split-system, air-cooled DX cooling. 12. Variable speed pumping. 13. Unit heaters. 14. Finned tube radiation. 15. Duct mounted heating coils. 16. Exhaust fans. 17. Pumps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00 – Common Work Results for Integrated Automation. B. Section 23 05 19 – Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping: Thermometer sockets, gage taps. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor sockets, gage taps. D. Section 23 22 13 – Steam and Steam Condensate Heating Piping: Installation of control valves, temperature sensor sockets, gage taps. E. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers. F. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment. G. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal devices for HVAC.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Provide all equipment, devices, and system components for control system operation. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in Section 25 35 00. B. Provide electrical work required for sequences described in this section, unless stated otherwise. Provide electrical work in compliance with Division 26 requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate HVAC system controlled and control system components. 1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence. 2. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3. Include draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and setpoints of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. Use designations which match identification tags or labels on the installed equipment.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that automatic controls and sequence of control are sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work.
1.9
SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during the testing and balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93.
1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one (1) year from the determined Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four (4) complete inspections, one in each season for one (1) year to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required. Submit written reports (four (4) reports) describing the work performed during each of the four (4) inspections. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
AIR HANDLING UNITS (SINGLEZONE, VARIABLE AIR VOLUME, COOLING, HEATING AND ENERGY RECOVERY): A. Application: 1. Air handling units: AHU-1 and 4A. 2. Variable air volume boxes. B. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply and return fans. Determine fan status by current sensors. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. C. Safety Devices: 1. Freeze Protection: Stop supply and return fans and close outside air dampers if discharge air temperature falls below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide a 180 second delay. Freeze stat is not to be energized unless fan is running. Provide a reset via the software to allow the operator to reset the system from the BAS workstation. Provide status/monitoring ability of the freezestat when the unit is in ‘occupied’ mode. D. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, start the unit(s) fan variable speed drive. Provide a damper restrictor to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper after the return air temperature reaches setpoint and the supply fan reaches running speed. (Minimum 180 seconds.) E. Morning Warm-up: 1. Start the unit fan variable speed drives and hold the return dampers fully open. Until the supply and return fans are at full operating capacity, lock-out the outdoor air dampers until the space temperature reaches 72 degrees F (adjustable). When the space temperature reaches the desired ‘occupied’ setpoint, the outdoor air dampers will be ‘enabled’ to start their respective ‘delayed damper’ sequence. 2. Cooling sequence to be locked-out. F. Economizer: 1. Economizer is to be available and have priority in both occupied heating and cooling modes. 2. Economizer ‘cooling’ and ‘heating’ mode is to have priority over CO2 control sequence. 3. When outside air temperature is below 55 degrees F:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Modulate outside air damper and return damper to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor to satisfy the space comfort. b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 4. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, provide enthalpy control, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is lower: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is higher: a. Modulate the outside air dampers open and close the return air dampers to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. G. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. Provide a duct pressure sensor two-thirds downstream of the supply blower ductwork. Sensor to ramp the supply blower VSD to maintain a set supply duct pressure. The return blower VSD is to track the supply blower VSD. 3. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. When the outside air temperature is above 79 degrees F, drive the outside air damper to minimum position (10%) and open the return damper. 5. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on and rotating. Modulate rotor speed in sequence with the cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. 6. Modulate cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. System is equipped with a chilled water cooling coil section (50/50 face-split configuration). There will be two (2) coils, stacked, each with 50% total capacity. The lower coil and the upper coil to each be equipped with a separate modulating control valve (two (2) separate control valves). The lower coil valve is to be controlled/modulated as first priority. The upper chilled water valve is not to modulate open only until the lower chilled water valve is full open to coil and the discharge temperature setting is not satisfied. As discharge temperature/conditions are met, the reverse sequence is to apply.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
7. Provide four (4) space humidity sensors (separate from the space temperature sensors) and locate the sensors in four (4) separate rooms of the area in which the unit serves. Each of the sensors are to send a signal to obtain an average humidity reading/level for the area. On a rise in humidity (50% or higher), close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum, modulate the chilled water coil valves, in sequence, to maintain a constant discharge temperature of 53F. Under this sequence, the VAV box valves are to be modulated by their respective space sensor to maintain/satisfy space temperature (heating water will be obtained from the chiller’s rejected heat). The outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open to satisfy CO2 levels. This sequence will have priority over the occupied cooling sequence. As humidity levels are lowered and the sensors are satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply and the occupied cooling sequence is to be engaged. 8. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. H. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. The Chilled water valves to be closed to coil. 3. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. Energy recovery unit to be off and bypass dampers to be open. 5. Outside air and relief/exhaust dampers to be closed, return damper to be open. I. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. Provide a duct pressure sensor two-thirds downstream of the supply blower ductwork. Sensor to ramp the supply blower VSD to maintain a set supply duct pressure. The return blower VSD is to track the supply blower VSD. 3. Drive outside air damper to minimum position (10%), open return air damper. 4. Discharge air temperature sensor to modulate the preheating coil valve. The discharge air temperature sensor set point is to be reset by the space sensor calling for the most heat. The preheat coil discharge air temperature is not to be allowed to exceed 55F. Preheat coil to be controlled in sequence with the energy wheel. 5. Energy recovery unit bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on and rotating. Ramp the rotor speed in sequence with the heating coil valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. Energy recovery unit to utilize it’s packaged controls to ramp the wheel speed for frost control. When the outdoor air temperature is 55F or above (adjustable), the energy recovery unit is to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open (full bypass). 6. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 7. Cooling coil valves to be closed to coils and locked-out. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. Outside air and relief/exhaust dampers are to be fully closed and return air dampers are to be open. 3. Energy recovery unit to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open. 4. The VAV box space sensor calling for heat (at a reduced temperature) is to cycle supply fan to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). 5. Cooling coil valve to be locked-out. K. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. Return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor to modulate open the outside air damper (to the CFM amount indicated on the schedules) and the return air damper to maintain no greater than 1000 PPM (adjustable) of carbon dioxide. In the heating and cooling modes when the sensor is satisfied at 1000 PPM, the sensor is to override the reset schedule (if temperatures are satisfied) and close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum. In this mode, satisfying space temperature using outdoor air (economizer) is to have priority. This sequence is to be locked-out in unoccupied modes. 2. Carbon dioxide sensor is to be locked out when the system is in economizer mode in either heating or cooling occupied modes. L. Variable air volume boxes: Provide all components necessary and factory or field mount components on each box as follows: 1. Each air handler to be linked on the graphics and controlled with it’s respective group of VAV boxes that service the system to allow independent graphic control for each VAV system. 2. In cooling and dehumidification mode, the designated VAV box space sensor to modulate the air volume from 100% to 30% as the sensor becomes satisfied. When the box is at 30% volume, the coil valve is be modulated to by the space temperature sensor to maintain room temperature/comfort. 3. In the heating mode, the air volume is to be maintained at 80% of design air flow (system essentially becomes constant volume). The coil valve is be modulated to by the space temperature sensor to maintain room temperature/comfort. When the space sensor is calling for heat, the coil valve is open full open to the coil, if the space temperature is still not satisfied, the air volume to be modulated open to 100% design flow. When space temperature becomes satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply. i) In unoccupied heating mode, the box damper is to remain at 80% of the design airflow and the space temperature is to modulate the coil valve to maintain a reduced temperature without overheating the space. If space temperature is satisfied, the coil valve is to be fully-closed to the coil. 4. Provide control from an occupancy sensor (occupancy sensor provided by Division 16 contractor) to each VAV box. When the sensor sends a signal of no occupancy and the space temperature is satisfied, the box damper is to close to 10% open. On a call of occupancy from the sensor, the reverse sequence is to apply. If space temperature or humidity is not satisfied, the occupied sequence is to have priority until all conditions are satisfied. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Points for each VAV box: • Space temperature (AI) • Box air flow measuring/monitoring (AI) • Box damper modulation (AO) • Box re-heat coil valve modulation (AO) • Occupancy sensor (DI) M. Building Pressure Relief: 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device. Compare the interior space pressure to the outside pressure. 2. Modulate, independently, the relief/exhaust damper based on the interior building pressure. The relief dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. N. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. 3. Provide outside air measuring capability by utilizing a flow measuring station in the outside air duct. Provide outside air quantity in cubic feet per minute. O. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status, current sensor (DI) • Supply fan VSD modulation (DI) • Return fan start/stop (DO) • Return fan status, current sensor (DI) • Return fan VSD modulation (DI) • Supply duct static pressure (AI) • Freezestat monitoring/status (DI) • Energy Recovery unit start/stop (DO) • Energy Recovery rotor status, current sensor (DI) • Energy Recovery unit VSD modulation (AO) • Energy Recovery unit bypass damper, two-position (DO) • Preheat coil valve modulation (AO) • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 1st stage • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 2nd stage • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) • Space Humidity (AI) - typical of four (4) sensors per system • Return duct carbon dioxide sensor (AI) • Outside air damper modulation (AO) • Return air damper modulation (AO) • Relief air damper modulation (AO) (independent control) • Space pressure (AI) • Freeze stat (DI) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• 3.2
Outside air CFM (AI) monitor only
AIR HANDLING UNITS (SINGLE ZONE, VARIABLE VOLUME, WATER COOLING, AND WATER HEATING) A. Application: 1. AHU-2, 6A and 7. 2. Return Fans: RF-2, 6 and 7. B. Provide DDC controls. C. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply and return fans. D. Safety Devices: 1. Freeze Protection: Provide software/programmed freeze protection. Stop supply and return fans, open heating valve and close outside air damper if discharge air temperature is below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide 180 second delay (adjustable). Provide status/monitoring ability of the freezestat when the unit is in ‘occupied’ mode. E. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, start the unit(s) fan variable speed drive. Provide a damper restrictor to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper after the return air temperature reaches setpoint and the supply fan reaches running speed. (Minimum 180 seconds.) F. Morning Warm-up: 1. When supply and return fans are running, during morning warm-up, close outside air, and open return air dampers until return air temperature reaches 72 degrees F. Provide optimal start. 2. Cooling valve is to be closed. G. Economizer Cooling: 1. Economizer shall be available in heating or cooling modes. 2. Supply and return fans shall be on. Modulate supply fan speed to maintain constant supply duct static pressure. 3. For cooling and outside air temperatures below 55 degrees F: a. Modulate outside air damper, and return damper to maintain constant discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature shall be reset by zone with most cooling requirements. 4. For cooling and outside air temperatures between 55 and 79 degrees F compare return and outside air enthalpies. If return air enthalpy is lower: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. For cooling and outside air temperatures between 55 and 79 degrees F compare return and outside air enthalpies. If return air enthalpy is higher: a. Modulate outside air damper, relief damper, return damper, and cooling valve in sequence to maintain constant discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature shall be reset by zone with most cooling requirements.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 7. Heating valve is to be closed. H. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply fan and return fans shall be on. Modulate supply fan speed to maintain constant supply duct static pressure. 2. Open outside air damper and close return air damper to minimum position. Outside air damper shall modulate to maintain ASHRAE outside air requirements based on VAV box modulation. Refer to VAV box sequence. 3. Modulate cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. System is equipped with a chilled water cooling coil section (50/50 face-split configuration). There will be two (2) coils, stacked, each with 50% total capacity. The lower coil and the upper coil to each be equipped with a separate modulating control valve (two (2) separate control valves). The lower coil valve is to be controlled/modulated as first priority. The upper chilled water valve is not to modulate open only until the lower chilled water valve is full open to coil and the discharge temperature setting is not satisfied. As discharge temperature/conditions are met, the reverse sequence is to apply. 4. Heating valve is to be closed. I. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans shall be off. 2. Cooling valve shall be closed. 3. Heating valves shall be closed. 4. Outside damper shall be closed, return damper shall be open. J. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans shall be on. Modulate supply fan speed to maintain constant supply duct static pressure. 2. Open outside air damper and close return air damper to minimum position. Outside air damper shall modulate to maintain ASHRAE outside air requirements based on VAV box modulation. Refer to VAV box sequence. 3. Modulate heating valve to maintain constant discharge air temperature of 55 degrees F. (adjustable). 4. Cooling valves shall be closed. K. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans shall be off. 2. Modulate pre-heating valve to maintain 70 degrees F (adjustable) in fan section (mixed air temperature sensor). 3. Close outside air damper and open return damper.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. On a call from any of the VAV box space sensors, cycle supply fan to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). The pre-heating coil valve is to remain closed (VAV re-heat coil is to provide necessary heating). 5. Cooling valve shall be closed. L. Building Pressure Relief: 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device. Compare the interior space pressure served to the outside pressure. 2. Modulate, independently, the relief/exhaust damper based on the building interior pressure. The relief dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. M. Air Flow Monitoring: 1. Measure outside and supply air via an airflow measuring station. Provide capability of reading the outside and supply air volume and the percent outside air. Modulate outside air damper to maintain required outside air flow. N. When one (1) VAV box humidistat detects 55% RH or higher (adjustable), the air handler will go into dehumidification sequence until space RH returns to 50% RH (adjustable). Open both cooling coil valves to maintain a 500F (adjustable) discharge air temperature , modulate VAV box reheat coil valve to maintain space temperature. When 50% RH (adjustable) is reached unit will return to normal cooling mode sequence. O. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. P. Provide non student occupied mode that sets outside air at 5% open (adjustable), remaining occupied sequences to remain. Q. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status (DI) • Return fan start/stop (DO) • Return fan status (DI) • Supply fan VFD modulation (AO) • Return fan VFD modulation (AO) • Freezestat monitoring/status (DI) • Upper cooling coil valve modulation (AO) • Lower cooling coil valve modulation (AO) • Pre-heating coil valve modulation (AO) • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) • Outside air damper modulation (AO) • Return air damper modulation (AO) • Relief damper modulation (AO) (independent control) • Supply duct static pressure (AI) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • 3.3
Space pressure (AI) Outside airflow measuring station (AI) Space Humidity (AI) - typical of four (4) sensors per system
AIR HANDLING UNITS (SINGLEZONE, CONSTANT VOLUME, COOLING, AND HEATING): A. Application: 1. Air Handling Unit: AHU-5A. 2. Return Fan: RF-5 B. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply and return fan. Determine fan status by current sensors. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. C. Safety Devices: 1. Freeze Protection: Stop supply fan and close outside air dampers if discharge air temperature falls below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide a 180 second delay. Freeze stat is not to be energized unless fan is running. Provide a reset via the software to allow the operator to reset the system from the BAS workstation. Provide status/monitoring ability of the freezestat when the unit is in ‘occupied’ mode. D. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, start the unit(s) fan variable speed drive. Provide a damper restrictor to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper after the return air temperature reaches setpoint and the supply fan reaches running speed. (Minimum 180 seconds.) E. Morning Warm-up: 1. Start the unit fan variable speed drive and hold the return dampers fully open. Until the supply blower fan is at full operating capacity, lock-out the outdoor air dampers until the space temperature reaches 72 degrees F (adjustable). When the space temperatures reaches the desired ‘occupied’ setpoint, the outdoor air dampers will be ‘enabled’ to start their respective ‘delayed damper’ sequence. 2. Cooling sequence to be locked-out. F. Economizer: 1. Economizer is to be available and have priority in both occupied heating and cooling modes. 2. Economizer ‘cooling’ and ‘heating’ mode is to have priority over CO2 control sequence. 3. When outside air temperature is below 55 degrees F: a. Modulate outside air damper and return damper to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor to satisfy the space comfort. 4. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, provide enthalpy control, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is lower: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is higher:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Modulate the outside air dampers open and close the return air dampers to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. 6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. G. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply fan to be on. 2. The Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 3. When the outside air temperature is above 79 degrees F, drive the outside air damper to minimum position (10%) and open the return damper. 4. Modulate cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. System is equipped with a chilled water cooling coil section (50/50 face-split configuration). There will be two (2) coils, stacked, each with 50% total capacity. The lower coil and the upper coil to each be equipped with a separate modulating control valve (two (2) separate control valves). The lower coil valve is to be controlled/modulated as first priority. The upper chilled water valve is not to modulate open only until the lower chilled water valve is full open to coil and the discharge temperature setting is not satisfied. As discharge temperature/conditions are met, the reverse sequence is to apply. 5. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 6. Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. H. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply fan to be off. 2. The Chilled water valves to be closed to coil. 3. The Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. Outside air dampers to be closed, return damper to be open. 5. Relief dampers to be fully closed and sequence to be locked-out. I. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply fan to be on. 2. Drive outside air damper to minimum position (10%), open return air damper. 3. Discharge air temperature sensor to modulate the heating coil valve. The discharge air temperature sensor set point is to be reset by the space sensor to maintain space temperature. 4. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 5. Cooling coil valves to be closed to coils and locked-out. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply fan to be off. 2. Outside air dampers are to be fully closed and return air dampers are to be open. 3. Cycle supply fan and modulate the heating coil valve to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). 4. Cooling coil valve to be locked-out. K. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. Return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor to modulate open the outside air damper (to the CFM amount indicated on the schedules) and the return air damper to maintain no greater than 1000 PPM (adjustable) of carbon dioxide. In the heating and cooling modes when the sensor is satisfied at 1000 PPM, the sensor is to override the reset schedule (if temperatures are satisfied) and close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum. In this mode, satisfying space temperature using outdoor air (economizer) is to have priority. This sequence is to be locked-out in unoccupied modes. 2. Carbon dioxide sensor is to be locked out when the system is in economizer mode in either heating or cooling occupied modes. L. Building Pressure Relief: 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device. Compare the interior space pressure served to the outside pressure. 2. Modulate, independently, the relief/exhaust damper based on the building interior pressure. The relief dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. M. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. 3. Provide supply and outside air measuring capability by utilizing a flow measuring station in the supply and outside air duct. Provide outside air quantity in cubic feet per minute. N. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status, current sensor (DI) • Supply fan VSD modulation (DI) • Heating coil valve modulation (AO) • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 1st stage • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 2nd stage • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) • Space temperature (AI) • Return duct carbon dioxide sensor (AI) • Outside air damper modulation (AO) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 13
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • • • • 3.4
Return air damper modulation (AO) Relief air damper modulation (AO) (independent control) Space pressure (AI) Freeze stat (DI) Outside air CFM (AI) monitor only Supply air CFM (AI) monitor only
AIR HANDLING UNITS (SINGLEZONE, CONSTANT VOLUME, COOLING, PREHEATING, HEATING AND KITCHEN MAKE-UP AIR): A. Application: 1. Air Handling Unit: AHU-3. 2. Return Fan: RF-3 3. Exhaust Fan: USF-1 (kitchen hood) B. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply fan. Determine fan status by current sensors. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. C. Safety Devices: 1. Freeze Protection: Stop supply fan and close outside air dampers if discharge air temperature falls below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide a 180 second delay. Freeze stat is not to be energized unless fan is running. Provide a reset via the software to allow the operator to reset the system from the BAS workstation. Provide status/monitoring ability of the freezestat when the unit is in ‘occupied’ mode. D. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, start the unit(s) fan variable speed drive. Provide a damper restrictor to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper until the supply fan reaches running speed. (Minimum 180 seconds.) E. Morning Warm-up: 1. Start the unit fan variable speed drive and hold the return dampers fully open. Until the supply blower fan is at full operating capacity, lock-out the outdoor air dampers until the space temperature reaches 72 degrees F (adjustable). When the space temperatures reaches the desired ‘occupied’ setpoint, the outdoor air dampers will be ‘enabled’ to start their respective ‘delayed damper’ sequence. 2. Cooling sequence to be locked-out. F. Economizer: 1. Economizer is to be available and have priority in both occupied heating and cooling modes. 2. Economizer ‘cooling’ and ‘heating’ mode is to have priority over CO2 control sequence. 3. When outside air temperature is below 55 degrees F: a. Modulate outside air damper and return damper to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor to satisfy the space comfort. 4. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, provide enthalpy control, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is lower:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 14
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is higher: a. Modulate the outside air dampers open and close the return air dampers to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. 6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. G. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply fan to be on. 2. The Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 3. When the outside air temperature is above 79 degrees F, drive the outside air damper to minimum position (10%) and open the return damper. 4. Modulate cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. System is equipped with a chilled water cooling coil section (50/50 face-split configuration). There will be two (2) coils, stacked, each with 50% total capacity. The lower coil and the upper coil to each be equipped with a separate modulating control valve (two (2) separate control valves). The lower coil valve is to be controlled/modulated as first priority. The upper chilled water valve is not to modulate open only until the lower chilled water valve is full open to coil and the discharge temperature setting is not satisfied. As discharge temperature/conditions are met, the reverse sequence is to apply. 5. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 6. Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 7. USF-1 (kitchen hood) is to be ‘enabled’. H. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply fan to be off. 2. The Chilled water valves to be closed to coil. 3. The Pre-Heating and Heating coil valves are to be closed to coil. 4. Outside air dampers to be closed, return damper to be open. 5. Relief dampers to be closed and sequence to be locked-out. 6. USF-1 (kitchen hood) is to be off and locked-out. I. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply fan to be on. 2. Drive outside air damper to minimum position (10%), open return air damper.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 15
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Discharge air temperature sensor to modulate both the pre-heat and heating coil valves in sequence. When the outside temperature is 40F or above, the pre-heat coil is to be closed to coil and locked out. The heating coil valve is to be modulated by the DAT to maintain temperature setpoint. When the outside temperature is 39F or lower, the pre-heat coil is to be controlled/modulated as first priority by the DAT. The heating coil valve is not to modulate open until the pre-heat coil valve is fully-open. The discharge air temperature sensor set point is to be reset by the space sensor to maintain space temperature sensor setpoint. 4. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 5. Cooling coil valves to be closed to coils and locked-out. 6. USF-1 (kitchen hood) is to be ‘enabled’. J. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply fan to be off. 2. Outside air dampers are to be fully closed and return air dampers are to be open. 3. Cycle supply fan (at low-speed), hold Zone 2 supply damper closed and modulate the heating coil valve to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). 4. Cooling coil valve to be locked-out. 5. USF-1 (kitchen hood) is to be off and locked-out. K. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. Return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor to modulate open the outside air damper (to the CFM amount indicated on the schedules) and the return air damper to maintain no greater than 1000 PPM (adjustable) of carbon dioxide. In the heating and cooling modes when the sensor is satisfied at 1000 PPM, the sensor is to override the reset schedule (if temperatures are satisfied) and close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum. In this mode, satisfying space temperature using outdoor air (economizer) is to have priority. This sequence is to be locked-out in unoccupied modes. 2. Carbon dioxide sensor is to be locked out when the system is in economizer mode in either heating or cooling occupied modes. L. Building Pressure Relief: 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device. Compare the interior space pressure served to the outside pressure. 2. Modulate, independently, the relief/exhaust damper based on the building interior pressure. The relief dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. M. Occupancy Sensor and variable speed drive: N. Kitchen Exhaust Mode: 1. The exhaust fan (USF-1 serving the kitchen hood) is to be interlocked with AHU-3. Provide an interlock priority to lock-out USF-1 (kitchen hood) if AHU-3 is in ‘unoccupied’ mode. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 16
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Provide a timed manual override button in the software graphics which will allow the operator to manually engage the ‘kitchen in use’ mode to allow the exhaust hood system to operate. The override is to switch AHU-3 into ‘occupied’ mode, enable the kitchen exhaust hood (USF-1). When the hood’s exhaust fan(USF-1) is started, the return fan (RF-3) is to be shut-down/turned off and AHU-3 is to modulate the outdoor air damper open to provide make up air for the kitchen hood. When the time has expired on the override, the reverse sequence is to apply. 3. Provide a temperature sensor (located in the center of the kitchen hood) which will be used for monitoring the ambient temperature in the hood. On a signal of high temperature (95°F or above (adj)), a signal is to be sent to start the kitchen hood exhaust fan (USF-1). When the hood’s exhaust fan (USF-1) is started, the return fan is be off and AHU-3 is to modulate the outdoor air damper open to provide make up air for the kitchen hood. Once this sequence has been activated and the temperature drops below 95°F(adj), the kitchen hood exhaust fan is to maintain operation for a period of 1 hour and then shut down and AHU-3 is to be put back into a normal ‘occupied’ or ‘unoccupied’ mode (whichever is applicable). 4. A start/stop switch will be provided by Division 26 to allow for a manual start of the kitchen hood exhaust fan (USF-1) within the kitchen area. When the hood’s exhaust fan (USF-1) is started, the return fan is to be off/disabled and AHU-3 is to modulate the outdoor air damper open to provide make up air for the kitchen hood. When the switch has been put into the stop mode, the return fan is to be enabled and AHU-3 is to be put back into a normal ‘occupied’ or ‘unoccupied’ mode. 5. The hood mounted temperature sensor is to have priority over the timed manual override button. O. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Hood temperature sensor (AI) (1 in the hood) • Interlock with USF-1 with AHU-3 (DI) P. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. 3. Provide supply and outside air measuring capability by utilizing a flow measuring station in the supply and outside air duct. Provide outside air quantity in cubic feet per minute. Q. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status, current sensor (DI) • Supply fan VSD modulation (DI) • Pre-Heating coil valve modulation (AO) • Heating coil valve modulation (AO) • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 1st stage • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 2nd stage • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 17
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • • • • • • • 3.5
Space temperature (AI) Return duct carbon dioxide sensor (AI) Outside air damper modulation (AO) Return air damper modulation (AO) Relief air damper modulation (AO) (independent control) Space pressure (AI) Freeze stat (DI) Outside air CFM (AI) monitor only Supply air CFM (AI) monitor only
ROOFTOP UNITS (SINGLEZONE, VARIABLE AIR VOLUME, COOLING, HEATING AND ENERGY RECOVERY): A. Application: 1. Rooftop units: RTU-4B, 5B and 6B. 2. Unit RTU-6B does not have energy recovery. 3. Variable air volume boxes. B. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply and return fans. Determine fan status by current sensors. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. C. Safety Devices: 1. Freeze Protection: Stop supply and return fans and close outside air dampers if discharge air temperature falls below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide a 180 second delay. Freeze stat is not to be energized unless fan is running. Provide a reset via the software to allow the operator to reset the system from the BAS workstation. Provide status/monitoring ability of the freezestat when the unit is in ‘occupied’ mode. D. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, start the unit(s) fan variable speed drive. Provide a damper restrictor to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper after the return air temperature reaches setpoint and the supply fan reaches running speed. (Minimum 180 seconds.) E. Morning Warm-up: 1. Start the unit fan variable speed drives and hold the return dampers fully open. Until the supply and return fans are at full operating capacity, lock-out the outdoor air dampers until the space temperature reaches 72 degrees F (adjustable). When the space temperature reaches the desired ‘occupied’ setpoint, the outdoor air dampers will be ‘enabled’ to start their respective ‘delayed damper’ sequence. 2. Cooling sequence to be locked-out. F. Economizer: 1. Economizer is to be available and have priority in both occupied heating and cooling modes. 2. Economizer ‘cooling’ and ‘heating’ mode is to have priority over CO2 control sequence. 3. When outside air temperature is below 55 degrees F:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 18
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Modulate outside air damper and return damper to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor to satisfy the space comfort. b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 4. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, provide enthalpy control, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is lower: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is higher: a. Modulate the outside air dampers open and close the return air dampers to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. G. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. Provide a duct pressure sensor two-thirds downstream of the supply blower ductwork. Sensor to ramp the supply blower VSD to maintain a set supply duct pressure. The return blower VSD is to track the supply blower VSD. 3. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. When the outside air temperature is above 79 degrees F, drive the outside air damper to minimum position (10%) and open the return damper. 5. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on and rotating. Modulate rotor speed in sequence with the cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. 6. Modulate cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor. System is equipped with a chilled water cooling coil section (50/50 face-split configuration). There will be two (2) coils, stacked, each with 50% total capacity. The lower coil and the upper coil to each be equipped with a separate modulating control valve (two (2) separate control valves). The lower coil valve is to be controlled/modulated as first priority. The upper chilled water valve is not to modulate open only until the lower chilled water valve is full open to coil and the discharge temperature setting is not satisfied. As discharge temperature/conditions are met, the reverse sequence is to apply.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 19
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
7. Provide four (4) space humidity sensors (separate from the space temperature sensors) and locate the sensors in four (4) separate rooms of the area in which the unit serves. Each of the sensors are to send a signal to obtain an average humidity reading/level for the area. On a rise in humidity (50% or higher), close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum, modulate the chilled water coil valves, in sequence, to maintain a constant discharge temperature of 53F. Under this sequence, the VAV box valves are to be modulated by their respective space sensor to maintain/satisfy space temperature (heating water will be obtained from the chiller’s rejected heat). The outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open to satisfy CO2 levels. This sequence will have priority over the occupied cooling sequence. As humidity levels are lowered and the sensors are satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply and the occupied cooling sequence is to be engaged. 8. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. H. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. The Chilled water valves to be closed to coil. 3. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. Energy recovery unit to be off and bypass dampers to be open. 5. Outside air and relief/exhaust dampers to be closed, return damper to be open. I. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. Provide a duct pressure sensor two-thirds downstream of the supply blower ductwork. Sensor to ramp the supply blower VSD to maintain a set supply duct pressure. The return blower VSD is to track the supply blower VSD. 3. Drive outside air damper to minimum position (10%), open return air damper. 4. Discharge air temperature sensor to modulate the preheating coil valve. The discharge air temperature sensor set point is to be reset by the space sensor calling for the most heat. The preheat coil discharge air temperature is not to be allowed to exceed 55F. Preheat coil to be controlled in sequence with the energy wheel. 5. Energy recovery unit bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on and rotating. Ramp the rotor speed in sequence with the heating coil valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. Energy recovery unit to utilize it’s packaged controls to ramp the wheel speed for frost control. When the outdoor air temperature is 55F or above (adjustable), the energy recovery unit is to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open (full bypass). 6. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 7. Cooling coil valves to be closed to coils and locked-out. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 20
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. Outside air and relief/exhaust dampers are to be fully closed and return air dampers are to be open. 3. Energy recovery unit to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open. 4. The VAV box space sensor calling for heat (at a reduced temperature) is to cycle supply fan to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). 5. Cooling coil valve to be locked-out. K. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. Return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor to modulate open the outside air damper (to the CFM amount indicated on the schedules) and the return air damper to maintain no greater than 1000 PPM (adjustable) of carbon dioxide. In the heating and cooling modes when the sensor is satisfied at 1000 PPM, the sensor is to override the reset schedule (if temperatures are satisfied) and close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum. In this mode, satisfying space temperature using outdoor air (economizer) is to have priority. This sequence is to be locked-out in unoccupied modes. 2. Carbon dioxide sensor is to be locked out when the system is in economizer mode in either heating or cooling occupied modes. L. Variable air volume boxes: Provide all components necessary and factory or field mount components on each box as follows: 1. Each air handler to be linked on the graphics and controlled with it’s respective group of VAV boxes that service the system to allow independent graphic control for each VAV system. 2. In cooling and dehumidification mode, the designated VAV box space sensor to modulate the air volume from 100% to 30% as the sensor becomes satisfied. When the box is at 30% volume, the coil valve is be modulated to by the space temperature sensor to maintain room temperature/comfort. 3. In the heating mode, the air volume is to be maintained at 80% of design air flow (system essentially becomes constant volume). The coil valve is be modulated to by the space temperature sensor to maintain room temperature/comfort. When the space sensor is calling for heat, the coil valve is open full open to the coil, if the space temperature is still not satisfied, the air volume to be modulated open to 100% design flow. When space temperature becomes satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply. i) In unoccupied heating mode, the box damper is to remain at 80% of the design airflow and the space temperature is to modulate the coil valve to maintain a reduced temperature without overheating the space. If space temperature is satisfied, the coil valve is to be fully-closed to the coil. 4. Provide control from an occupancy sensor (occupancy sensor provided by Division 16 contractor) to each VAV box. When the sensor sends a signal of no occupancy and the space temperature is satisfied, the box damper is to close to 10% open. On a call of occupancy from the sensor, the reverse sequence is to apply. If space temperature or humidity is not satisfied, the occupied sequence is to have priority until all conditions are satisfied. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 21
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Points for each VAV box: • Space temperature (AI) • Box air flow measuring/monitoring (AI) • Box damper modulation (AO) • Box re-heat coil valve modulation (AO) • Occupancy sensor (DI) M. Building Pressure Relief: 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device. Compare the interior space pressure to the outside pressure. 2. Modulate, independently, the relief/exhaust damper based on the interior building pressure. The relief dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. N. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. 3. Provide outside air measuring capability by utilizing a flow measuring station in the outside air duct. Provide outside air quantity in cubic feet per minute. O. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status, current sensor (DI) • Supply fan VSD modulation (DI) • Return fan start/stop (DO) • Return fan status, current sensor (DI) • Return fan VSD modulation (DI) • Supply duct static pressure (AI) • Freezestat monitoring/status (DI) • Energy Recovery unit start/stop (DO) • Energy Recovery rotor status, current sensor (DI) • Energy Recovery unit VSD modulation (AO) • Energy Recovery unit bypass damper, two-position (DO) • Preheat coil valve modulation (AO) • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 1st stage • Cooling coil valve modulation (AO) 2nd stage • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) • Space Humidity (AI) - typical of four (4) sensors per system • Return duct carbon dioxide sensor (AI) • Outside air damper modulation (AO) • Return air damper modulation (AO) • Relief air damper modulation (AO) (independent control) • Space pressure (AI) • Freeze stat (DI) Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 22
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• 3.6
Outside air CFM (AI) monitor only
EXHAUST FANS (SCHEDULE ACTIVATED) A. Application: All PRVs, utility set fans, and exhaust fans. 1. Local motor starter switch provided by Division 26 (as applicable). 2. Provide relays and wiring necessary for exhaust fan power interface. 3. ‘Enable/disable’ designated fan based on occupancy schedule (software adjustable). Units to be controlled in a ‘sweep on/sweep off’ mode. 4. Various exhaust fans are to be interlocked with VAV boxes. Refer to the VAV box schedule for interlocks with designated VAVs. 5. All PRV’s will be provided with a two-position back-draft damper located at the fan. Power wiring to the fan and damper and the interlock controls between the fan and damper will be provided under Division 26. B. Each fan unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Fan enable/disable (DO) – typical for each unit • Fan status, current sensor (DI) – typical for each unit • Interlock with VAV box (as applicable, refer to the VAV box schedule)
3.7
EXHAUST FANS (SPACE THERMOSTAT ACTIVATED) A. Application: PRV-7, 12 and 15. 1. Provide electric controls. 2. Local motor starter switch provided by Division 26 (as applicable). Refer to the schedules. 3. Provide relays and wiring necessary for exhaust fan power interface. 4. ‘Enable/disable’ designated fan based on occupancy schedule (software adjustable). Units to be controlled in a ‘sweep on/sweep off’ mode. 5. All PRV’s will be provided with a two-position back-draft damper located at the fan. Power wiring to the fan and damper and the interlock controls between the fan and damper will be provided under Division 26. 6. As applicable, provide relays and wiring necessary for exhaust fan power interface. Provide remote make-up damper operator, wiring, and control for designated exhaust unit (refer to drawings for location). Damper operators to be a Belimo 2-position spring-return/fail closed. 7. Provide localized reverse acting thermostats. On a rise in space temperature, the thermostat is to energize the fan and open the remote motorized damper. When the space temperature is satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply. This contractor to provide all necessary wiring to make system complete and operational. Signal an alarm on an elevated space temperature (adjustable). B. Each fan unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Fan enable/disable (DO) – typical for each unit • Fan status, current sensor (DI) – typical for each unit
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 23
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • 3.8
Space temperature (AI) Make-up damper operation (DO) High space temperature alarm (DO)
SECONDARY HEATING PUMPS (VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING) A. Application: SHWP-1A and 1B, 2A and 2B (two pump sets). B. Provide pump start/stop operation through the facility management system. Determine pump status by current sensing devices. Signal alarm if pump fails to start as commanded. C. Heating Mode: 1. Lead pump to be on. Lag pump to be off. 2. Provide in the software to signal an operator alert to rotate pumps after 500 hours of operation. 3. Provide a remote pressure differential sensor on the supply and return piping. Signal an alarm if pressure/flow drops below minimum setpoint (adjustable). 4. Pump variable speed drives are to receive a signal from the remote loop pressure differential pressure sensor(s). The signal is to control the pump variable speed drive to maintain a pressure setpoint. The remote pump differential pressure sensors are to be supplied by the controls contractor for installation by the piping contractor. The controls contractor will be responsible for providing the control wiring and the installation of the wiring between each remote pressure sensor and the respective pump VSD controls. Wiring to be routed through a dedicated metallic EMT conduit. D. Cooling Mode: 1. Heating pumps are to be off and locked-out. E. Units to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points List: • Pump start/stop (DO) per pump • Pump status, current sensor (DI) per pump • Pressure differential sensor (DI) per sensor
3.9
SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS (VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING) A. Application: SCWP-1 and 2 (one pump set). B. Provide pump start/stop operation through the facility management system. Determine pump status by current sensing devices. Signal alarm if pump fails to start as commanded. C. Cooling Mode: 1. Lead pump to be on. Lag pump to be off. 2. Provide in the software to signal an operator alert to rotate pumps after 500 hours of operation. 3. Provide a remote pressure differential sensor on the supply and return piping. Signal an alarm if pressure/flow drops below minimum setpoint (adjustable).
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 24
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Pump variable speed drives are to receive a signal from the remote loop pressure differential pressure sensor(s). The signal is to control the pump variable speed drive to maintain a pressure setpoint. The remote pump differential pressure sensors are to be supplied by the controls contractor for installation by the piping contractor. The controls contractor will be responsible for providing the control wiring and the installation of the wiring between each remote pressure sensor and the respective pump VSD controls. Wiring to be routed through a dedicated metallic EMT conduit. D. Heating Mode: 1. Pumps to be off and locked-out. E. Unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points List: • Pump start/stop (DO) per pump • Pump status, current sensor (DI) per pump • Pressure differential sensor (DI) 3.10
PRIMARY HEATING AND CHILLED WATER PUMPS (CONSTANT VOLUME PUMPING) A. Application: 1. PHWP-1 and 2, PCWP-1A and 1B, 2A and 2B (one pump set). 2. Condensing Boiler. B. Provide pump start/stop operation through the facility management system. Determine pump status by current sensing devices. Signal alarm if pump fails to start as commanded. C. Heating Mode: 1. Lead pump to be on. Lag pump to be off (heating pumps). 2. Provide in the software to signal an operator alert to rotate pumps after 500 hours of operation. D. Provide an interface with the packaged boiler controller. The controls contractor is to extend wiring and make connections to the boiler control panel terminal strip. Provide monitoring capabilities through the facility management system. Boiler operation will be through the manufacturers control panel. The boiler controller will be provided with an interface to allow the controls contractor to integrate the boiler monitoring points and controls with the boiler factory-mounted control panel and control sequences. Refer to Section 23 52 38 for the boiler controls. 1. Chilled water pumps to be off and locked-out. E. Cooling Mode: 1. Lead pump to be on. Lag pump to be off (cooling pumps related to respective chiller). 2. Provide in the software to signal an operator alert to rotate pumps after 500 hours of operation. 3. Heating water pumps to be off and locked-out. F. Unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points List:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 25
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
• • • •
Pump start/stop (DO) per pump Pump status, current sensor (DI) per pump Boiler status (DI) Boiler primary water temperature (AI)
3.11 AIR-COOLED CHILLER SYSTEM A. Application: ACCH-1 and 2. B. Provide monitoring capabilities through the facility management system. Chiller operation will be through the manufacturers control panel. The chiller will be provided with a BACnet interface to allow the controls contractor to integrate the chiller monitoring points and controls with the chiller factory-mounted control panel and control sequences. Refer to Section 23 64 23 for the chiller controls. C. All controls and components to interface with the chiller controls are to be DDC. D. This contractor is to furnish two (2) flow sensors, as shown on the piping schematic, to the piping contractor for installation. The flow sensor, located in the primary bridge, on a signal of low flow/gpm, is to start the lag chiller’s primary pump (regardless of primary water temperature). The flow sensor, located in the secondary piping, on a signal of a lower flow/gpm, is to signal the lag chiller’s primary pump off. All necessary wiring, control interface of the flow sensors and programming will be the responsibility of the controls contractor. E. Provide demand limiting. The chiller will be provided with a set of contacts to allow demand limiting by the Building Automation System. F. All alarms and safety listed in Section 23 64 23 are to be displayed on the facility management system. The controls contractor is to provide on-screen custom graphics to allow the Building Operator complete control of the chiller from the operation workstation. G. On a call for dehumidification from any or all air handler systems, the BAS is to provide a signal to the chiller system to drop chiller supply water temperature from the standard 45F constant down to 41F and maintain (ACCH-1 is to have priority to operate under this sequence). When the dehumidification sequence is toggled off or is satisfied, the BAS is to send a signal to the chiller to reset the supply water temperature back to the original setpoint of 45F (constant). H. Each chiller unit to be provided with the following quantity of monitoring only points (typical of 2 chillers). 1. Points List: •
Cooling enable/disable (DO)
•
Chiller status, current transformer (DI) – Each chiller unit.
•
EWT (DI) – Each chiller, provide a sensor and well in piping
•
LWT (DI) – Each chiller, provide a sensor and well in piping
•
Main/primary chilled water supply temperature (AI)
•
Main/primary chilled water return temperature (AI)
•
Primary water flow/gpm (AI)
•
Secondary water flow/gpm (AI)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 26
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
•
Chiller general alarm (DI) coordinate with unit manufacturer (each chiller)
3.12 FINNED TUBE RADIATION A. Application: Finned tube radiation. B. Provide DDC controls and valves. C. Occupied heating: Space sensor is to modulate the heating valve to maintain space temperature of 75 degrees (adjustable). When the radiation serves the same space served by a VAV box, sequence with VAV box reheat coils to have the radiation as priority. D. Unoccupied heating: Space sensor shall modulate heating valve to maintain reduced space temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). E. Unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points List: • Space temperature (AI) • Heating valve modulation (AG) 3.13 UNIT HEATERS A. Application: unit heaters (i.e.: cabinet, horizontal and vertical type) B. Provide a control valve to the piping contractor for installation. C. Provide an aquastat mounted on the coil return pipe and all necessary wiring from aquastat to unit fan. D. The wall-mounted electric thermostat, on a call for heat, is to open the two-way heating valve. On a signal from the aquastat, the aquastat is to cycle the fan on. When the space temperature reaches setpoint, the reverse sequence is to be applied. E. The controls contractor is to provide all necessary control wiring and components. 3.14 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGER(S) A. Application: 1. Heat exchangers: HX-1 and HX-2. 2. Heating pumps and condensing boiler: Refer to Heating Pumps Sequence. B. Provide DDC controls. C. Each heat exchanger/heating loop is to have an independent set of controls. D. Heating Mode: 1. On a sense of flow from the heating pumps, enable the designated heat exchanger sequence. 2. Disable the condensing boiler when the steam to water heat exchanger sequence is ‘enabled’. When the steam supply is off, the condensing boiler sequence is to be ‘enabled’. 3. Provide heating water supply and return temperature sensing capability. Signal an alarm of high priority to BAS terminal and exterior white strobe light if supply water temperature falls below setpoint (adjustable). This contractor to provide all alarms, strobe light, and wiring. Strobe light to be located on exterior wall of Boiler Room. 4. Alarms to be locked-out in the cooling mode and/or when the outdoor air temperature is 45F and above. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 27
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Provide sensor and well in supply and return piping for each heating system. 6. The supply water temperature sensor is to modulate the steam heating valves in sequence to maintain a supply water temperature. Heat exchanger will be equipped with two (2) steam control valves, one (1) sized for 1/3 capacity and the other sized for 2/3 capacity. The small capacity steam valve to modulate as first priority. The larger steam valve to modulate open as last priority and when the small steam valve is full open to heat exchanger and on a call for additional heat. 7. Modulate heating valve to maintain heat exchanger leaving water temperature. Reset leaving water temperature as follows: 200 degrees leaving water temperature at –20 degrees outside air temperature. 150 degrees leaving water temperature at 30 degrees outside air temperature. 100 degrees leaving water temperature at 45 degrees outside air temperature (all temperatures adjustable). 8. The supply water temperature sensor set-point is to be reset using an Outdoor air master reset schedule. Each independent reset schedule is to be adjustable and as follows: OA TEMP -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +45 +50 +55
HWS temperature * 195F 185F 170F 165F 150F 140F 130F 120F 100F 95F
*each schedule is to be adjustable by the Building Operator as the building heating characteristics will change through the heating season. 9. Disable and lock-out heat exchanger and pump control panel when outside air temperature is above 65 degrees. Suppress alarms. E. Cooling Mode: 1. Steam control valves are to be closed to the heat exchanger and are to be locked-out. 2. Heating pumps are to be off and pumps are to be disabled/locked-out. F. System to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Heating valve #1 (1/3rd valve) modulation (AO) • Heating valve #2 (2/3rd valve) modulation (AO) • Supply water temperature (AI) each system • Return water temperature (AI) each system • Low temperature alarm (DI) High Priority • Heating Pump enable/disable (DO) interlock with respective heat exchanger • Condensing Boiler enable/disable (DO)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 28
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.15 MISCELLANEOUS POINTS A. Provide the following general points to be used for all applicable equipment or general knowledge. Display values on BAS terminal upon demand. B. Points list: • Outside air temperature (AI) • Outside air humidity (AI) • Outside air dewpoint (AI) • Outdoor static pressure (AI) 3.16 NO OCCUPANCY/COOLING MODE: A. Sequence to be similar to ‘occupied cooling’ mode with the exception that the outdoor air (and relief/exhaust) dampers are to be 100% closed and the return dampers 100% open. This sequence would apply only when manually-activated by the system operator, the outdoor conditions are 80 degrees F or higher and the relative humidity is above 70%. Sequence is to be manually-de-activated by the system operator. B. When activated, the ‘unoccupied’ mode would follow the standard building time schedule program. The designated interior space humidity sensors are to remain in control and have priority. C. When all interior conditions (temperature and humidity) are satisfied, the system is to cycle off. 3.17 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Provide 24 VAC signal from the BAS extending to the lighting control relays. Relays will require momentary dry contact closure. B. Provide programmable on/off time of day operation for contactor. C. Provide programmable on/off/automatic for relays. D. Points list (Provide eight (8) points: • Lights on, per zone (DO) – four zones • Lights off, per zone (DO) – four zones 3.18 BUILDING ENERGY MONITORING A. Provide electric and natural gas monitoring with custom monthly energy reporting ability. The energy software is to be installed/added to the building operating workstation. B. Provide connection from the BAS and extend wiring to each of the electric and gas meters. Entire installation and connections are to be provided by this contractor. 3.19 CONTROLS UPGRADES UNDER ALTERNATE A. Provide, under a separate alternate, removing the existing pneumatic controls and replacing with electric controls, actuators, valves, control sequences, integration into the building automation system and graphics to allow complete building operator control similar to the new equipment. B. The following systems are to be upgraded under this alternate: 1. XRTU-1B (serves the Media Center area)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 29
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Unit is a single zone, variable air volume unit, no heating in the unit, with DX cooling packaged rooftop having dual compressors for capacity reduction ability. b. Existing VAV boxes are to be maintained. Controls for each box to be upgraded including replacement of the heating coil valves. 2. XRTU-2B (serves the Gymnasium) a. Unit is a single zone, constant volume unit with a duct heating coil. No cooling ability. b. Existing duct heating coil valve is to be replaced with a new electric-type valve. 3. XRTU-3B (serves the Art Room) a. Unit is a single zone, constant volume unit with a duct-mounted heating coil and a ductmounted cooling coil and a remote air-cooled condensing unit. b. Existing duct heating coil valve is to be replaced with a new electric-type valve. 4. XUV-6 and XUV-5 (floor-set unit ventilators serving a classroom and storage room) a. Units are a single zone, constant volume unit ventilator with no means of cooling. b. Existing heating coil valves are to be replaced with new electric-type valves. 5. XUV-1 and XUV-2 with wall radiation (serves the ‘North’ side of the ‘West Gym’) a. Units are a single zone, constant volume unit ventilator with no means of cooling. b. Existing heating coil valves are to be replaced with new electric-type valves. c. Existing radiation valves are to be replaced with new electric-type valves. d. Provide controls to allow independent control for ½ of the gym space. 6. XUV-3 and XUV-4 with wall radiation (serves the ‘South’ side of the ‘West Gym’) a. Units are a single zone, constant volume unit ventilator with no means of cooling. b. Existing heating coil valves are to be replaced with new electric-type valves. c. Existing radiation valves are to be replaced with new electric-type valves. d. Provide controls to allow independent control for ½ of the gym space.
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00 - 30
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
INDEX TO ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
26 01 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 01 05
SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRANING AND SPARE PARTS
26 01 10
SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
26 01 20
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 19
600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
26 05 24
CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29
SUPPORTING DEVICES
26 05 33
RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND BOXES
26 05 50
FLOORBOXES AND POKETHRUS
26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 60
CONCRETE PADS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
26 09 21
CONTACTORS
26 09 23
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 27 13
ELECTRICITY METERING CABINETS
26 27 16
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 28 13
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
26 28 16
SAFETY SWITCHES
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index -1
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
26 29 13
MOTOR CONTROL
26 43 13
TVSS
26 51 13
LIGHTING
26 52 00
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
26 53 00
EXIT SIGNS
DIVISION 27 – TECHNOLOGY SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
27 01 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
27 01 05
SUBMITTALS AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT
27 13 00
TECHNOLOGY CABLING SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
28 31 00
FIRE ALARM
END OF INDEX
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index -2
January 15, 2013
R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems
1.2
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of work shown in the Contract Documents and specified in Division 26. 2. Include all parts and labor which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include nuts, bolts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, offsets in conduit, fittings, relays, etc. 3. Some equipment and materials provided under Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. 4. Arrange with appropriate utility companies to provide temporary and permanent utility services as required and coordinate their installation with construction progress of this project. 5. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility company for installation of temporary utility services. 6. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. 7. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility companies for utility services. 8. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. 9. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. 10. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 26 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 26 01 00 takes precedence. Section 26 01 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the electrical work and applies to all electrical work of the Contract Documents.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Division 0 and 1 and Section 26 01 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 26 work. Copy these documents to all Subcontractors receiving other Sections of Division 26. 3. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on Related Sections, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.4
REFERENCES A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code State and Local Electrical Codes International Building Code International Fire Code International Mechanical Code State and Local Building Codes and Ordinances State Industrial Commission Regulations State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Elevator Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations Americans with Disabilities Act Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards State Board of Health NFPA 101 Life Safety Code State Energy Code D. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AIA: American Insurance Association AIA: American Institute of Architects ANSI: American National Standards Institute ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials EPA: Environmental Protection Agency FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Association IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
IES: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA: International Cable Engineers Association NBS: National Bureau of Standards NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA: National Fire Protection Association NSC: National Safety Council UL: Underwriter's Laboratories 1.5
DEFINITIONS A. The terms defined below apply to all work included in Division 26. 1. The work – as defined in the 1997 AIA Document A201: “The term ‘Work’ means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.” 2. Furnish – to obtain in new condition ready for installation into the work. 3. Install – to store, set in place, connect and place into operation into the work. 4. Provide – to furnish and install. 5. Connect – to bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. 6. Conduit – includes in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers and other supports and accessories related to such conduit. 7. Concealed – hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces or buried. 8. Exposed: not installed underground nor concealed as defined above. 9. Building structure or building structural members - consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists (top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking, joist bridging and bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for the purpose of support. B. The drawing and specifications constitute the Contract Documents. Any item noted in the specification or shown on the drawings is included in the Contract Documents. C. All electrical details and drawings are diagrammatic, unless specifically noted. Field-verify all dimensions and notify the Engineer of any conflicts of discrepancies, in writing, prior to installation.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Do not dispose of any PCB containing materials. Disposal of all PCB containing materials will be the responsibility of the Owner. C. Provide new, first quality material for all products specified. Do not reuse materials unless indicated or approved by the Engineer. D. Comply with the NEC as applicable to the construction and installation of equipment specified in this section. E. Provide equipment specified in this section that has been listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. F. Comply with ANSI as applicable to equipment specified in this section. G. Comply with NEMA as applicable to equipment specified in this section. 1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Conduits, pipes, ducts, lights, devices, speakers, etc., shown on the drawings as existing have been based on existing plans and casual site observations, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of of all other Divisions for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that cannot be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Install all conduit, cable tray, busduct, equipment, etc. allowing proper code and maintenance clearances and to avoid blocking passageways and access panels. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either on is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the drawings and specifications. 1.8
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide firestopping around all new penetrations, sleeves and openings through all partitions, walls and floors. B. Provide UL listed components installed by a certified and factory trained personnel.
1.9
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to General Conditions and Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TAMPERPROOF HARDWARE A. Where tamperproof hardware is called out, provide torx head with center pin reject hardware for the following electrical work: 1. Light fixture housings 2. Covers to electrical enclosures, pullboxes, cabinets, junction boxes, wireways 3. Coverplates (both maximum security and stainless steel coverplates)
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING & POWER SYSTEM - REMODELING A. Provide construction power and lighting that adheres to 2008 Article 590 – “Temporary Installations” B. See Division 1 for temporary electrical services. C. For remodeling work in the existing building, use existing building distribution systems for construction power. D. Replace all receptacles, switched, coverplates, etc., damaged by any Contractor during the course of construction. E. Materials furnished for the temporary light and power system remain Contractors property. Remove when there is no longer any need for temporary light and power or when directed by the Architect. F. Electrical energy costs shall be paid by the Owner.
3.2
CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING & POWER SYSTEM – NEW CONSTRUCTION A. Provide construction power and lighting that adheres to 2008 Article 590 – “Temporary Installations”
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Furnish, install and maintain a construction lighting and power system, as directed herein for the use of all trades. As soon as a directive to proceed is issued, arrange with the power company suitable temporary power: 1. Provide not less than ½ watt per square foot for temporary lighting with a minimum of one light per room or space. Provide 200 watt, inside frosted, incandescent lamps for each outlet. 2. Provide 20 amp, 120 volt, single phase duplex, grounding type, receptacles and 50 amp, 240 volt, single phase receptacles. Locate receptacles so no location in the building is more than 75 feet from either type of receptacle. Provide ground fault protection as required by the NEC. 3. Provide minimum #12 AWG conductors for all 120V branch circuits with total conductor length less than 75 feet, provide #10 AWG conductors for branch circuits exceeding 75 feet. C. Materials furnished for the temporary light and power system remain Contractors property. Remove when there is no longer any need for temporary light and power or when directed by the Architect. D. Electrical energy costs for the temporary separate system paid by the Contractor. E. Power company’s connect-and-disconnect charges paid by the Contractor. 3.3
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. No Division 26 systems are to remain inactive at the end of the workday. Assure that the systems are all operational at the end of each workday. Coordinate temporary outages with the Owner. 2. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 3. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
3.4
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current NECA standards.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the specifications, before or after installation. B. Excavation and Backfilling: 1. Provide all excavation and backfilling required to complete the installation of the electrical system. Conform with the provisions of Division 31 Earthwork of these specifications for all work. 2. Bed all conduit and structures on a 6" thick compacted layer of granular material. Should unsatisfactory soil conditions be discovered, the Engineer/Architect will inspect the excavation and determine the necessary additional support required. 3. Backfill around conduit and structures by hand using coarse sand, pit run gravel or the native material if it is similar to the above. Remove all large stones, frozen lumps, perishable rubbish and excessive amounts of clay. Carefully compact this material in 6" layers to a depth of 8" above the conduit, cable or duct. . Compact to not less than 90% outside the building and 95% within the building limits of maximum density given by ASTM D698-70T (Standard Proctor Density). Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require soil compaction tests in any areas which do not appear to be compacted properly with the cost of the test paid by the Contractor. 4. Replace all existing surface improvements (i.e.,-street pavement, curbs, sidewalks, finish sodding, etc.) removed or damaged in the course of the work unless such improvements are to be reconstructed under the general contract. Make all necessary arrangements to perform such repairs, pay all costs in connection therewith and include them in the bid. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to be performed under a different Division. 2. Obtain special permission from the Engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. 3. Perform all patching in a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 4. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of electrical equipment and devices. 5. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for electrical raceway. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 6. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 7. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. D. Painting: 1. Refinish all electrical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. 2. Paint all new raceway systems in exposed finished areas to match existing finish.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.5
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide firestopping around all new penetrations, sleeves and openings through all partitions, walls and floors. B. Install firestopping on both sides of each partition, completely filling the void around the opening. C. Firestopping of interior of conduits and sleeves is by the contractor providing the cabling inside the conduit or sleeve.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Refer to Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems. B. Final Inspection: 1. A final inspection of the electrical systems will be required before the Contract can be closed out. Request a final inspection by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule an inspection and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. If the Engineer is requested to make a final inspection by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that inspection, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Inspection.
3.7
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean electrical equipment and remove temporary identification. In case of dispute the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. B. After tests have been made and accepted clean light fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by the Contractor, leaving the entire work area in a clean and complete working order.
3.8
PROTECTION A. Cover openings and equipment, where set, to prevent obstruction to conduits, breakage, misuse, or disfigurement of equipment. Cover openings in equipment immediately upon uncrating or receipt at the job site and keep covered until permanent connection is made. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to electrical equipment or materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Keep all equipment clean materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. C. If a portion of the project is to be occupied by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project make arrangements with the Owner to transfer responsibilities for protection and housekeeping. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 01 05 SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRAINING AND SPARE PARTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
PRIOR APPROVALS A. Submit approval form for each request for prior approval. B. Submit hard copy, bound, written requests to use unspecified items, to the Engineer, no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment specific to the project, clearly indicating all options included in the submittal. C. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. D. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using accepted substitutions. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. E. Material and equipment not specified or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner.
1.2
PAY REQUEST COST BREAKDOWN A. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. B. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or requested by the Engineer. 1. General Conditions 2. Demolition 3. 600 V Conductors and Cables 4. Raceway, Fittings, and Boxes 5. Occupancy Sensors 6. Distribution Panelboards 7. Panelboards 8. Wiring Devices 9. Safety Switches 10. Motor Control Center 11. Power Factor Correction 12. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 13. Light Fixtures 14. Lamps & Ballasts 15. Emergency Lighting
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
16. Exit Signs 1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Submit in accordance with the Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. B. Submit separately-bound documents for each submittal listed in the table at the end of this section. Combination submittals will be returned to the contractor without review. Do not combine submittals. C. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacture, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. D. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. E. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: 1. Engineer - One (1) copy. 2. Architect - One (1) copy. 3. General Contractor - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. F. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. G. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer, with one of the following actions checked on the submittal stamp: 1. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. 4. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. H. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. I. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Refer to the end of this section for list of Shop Drawings required for this project. K. Provide all order service, commissioning, shop drawing preparation, on-site field-service and testing, etc. for all electrical equipment and materials through local representation 1.4
CAD DRAWING FILES: A. The electrical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.5
DEMONSTRATION / TRAINING A. Fully lubricate, charge, fill, etc. all equipment, per manufacture’s recommendation, prior to start-up. B. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final inspection and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. C. Fully instruct the Owner's designated operating in the operation of each electrical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory-trained personnel. D. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. E. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. F. Refer to the end of this section for training requirements for each system
1.6
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Adjustable circuit breaker and ground fault settings and field-testing procedures. 10. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
11. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 13. Refer to individual Sections in Division 26 for additional requirements. 14. Test reports. 1.7
RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide record drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0, Division 1 and this section. B. Preparation of as-built drawings does not constitute authorization to make changes unknown to or unapproved by Owner or the Owners representative. C. As work progresses, in a neat and legible manner, record the following information on the record set of plans: 1. Update the contract documents to show all modifications including but not limited to Addendums, Change Orders, approved Proposal Requests and Architect’s Supplemental Instructions. Cut and paste original documents to the as-built set. 2. Indicate exact location and depth of underground feeders to panelboards, transformers, distribution panels, generators and motor control centers, complete from each end. Indicate the routing of the conduits as accurately as possible, showing elbows, sweeps, and turns. 3. Provide plans that indicate exact routing of outside underground feeders and services, showing dimensions from structural foundation walls or columns. Indicate depth and type of conduits. 4. Provide plans that indicate routing of conduit from outlet to outlet, routing of conduit underfloor, overhead, in walls or exposed, combining of circuits into a common conduit, exact sizes of conduits and conductors, revisions to circuit breaker quantity or arrangement in panelboards. 5. Record exact location and elevation of underground conduits dedicated to technology systems including backbone fiber conduits, telephone conduits and cable TV conduits. Where spare underground conduits are terminated underground (i.e. property line), indicate exact dimensions from two different points of the foundation wall corner or structural columns. 6. Indicate exact locations and depth of spare conduits stubbed from concrete pole bases. 7. Record routing of cable tray where it varies from the plans. 8. Record changes to branch circuit numbers on the plan when they deviate from the circuit numbers shown on the Contract Documents. 9. Include the locations of the following devices on the record drawings: a. Occupancy Sensor Power Packs (Section 26 09 23) mounted above ceilings. D. The Engineer will recommend withholding payment if as-built drawings are not being maintained on-site. E. Submit record drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.8
DOCUMENT TURNOVER A. Construction Documents CD’s, Owner and Operation Manuals (O&M’s), As-Builts, Specifications and other documents turned over at the completion of the projects shall be furnished to the Owner in both paper hard copy and digital Adobe PDF. 1. Construction Documents a. PDF Creation: Each roll of drawings shall be scanned or converted to PDF to one single PDF document. 1) Scanning: i) 200DPI Grayscale ii) Cropped to original size iii) Color corrected and despeckled b. Bookmarking: Each page of the PDF shall be bookmarked with the number and name of the sheet. c. Naming: The PDF shall be labeled: “Building Name_Year_Title_Spec_Type” 1) Name = Building Name 2) Year = Date of Documents 3) Title = “Addition” “Remodel,” etc… 4) CD = Construction Document 5) Type = Arch, Mech, Electrical Communications or a combination of the above 2. Specifications a. PDF Creation: All specifications shall be scanned or converted to one single PDF file. 1) Scanning: i) 200 DPI Grayscale b. Bookmarking: Not required. c. Naming: The PDF shall be labeled: “Building Name_Year_Title_Spec_Type” 1) Name = Building Name 2) Year = Date of Documents 3) Title = “Addition” “Remodel,” etc… 4) CD = Construction Document 5) Type = Arch, Mech, Electrical Communications or a combination of the above 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. O & M’s shall be turned over by the Contractor. b. PDF Creation: All Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be scanned or converted to one single PDF file. 1) Scanning: i) 200 DPI Grayscale
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
c. Bookmarking: Bookmarking of O & M Manuals shall be extensive. 1.9
WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for. E. Refer to the end of this section for a list of specific warranty items for each system.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Wire and cable Surface Raceway Occupancy Sensors
Switchboards Distribution Panelboards Panelboards Wiring Devices Low Voltage Fuses
Safety Switches Combination Starters Motor Control Center MSS Overload Relays Phase Monitoring Relays Starters Power Factor Correction Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Equipment
Ballasts
26 05 19 26 05 33 26 09 23
26 24 13 26 24 16 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 28 13
26 28 16 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 35 33 26 43 13
26 51 13
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Equipment
Section
1.10 FORMS
10 Yrs parts & labor for Service Entrance TVSS and 5 Yrs parts and labor for TVSS Panelboards 5 Yrs
1 Yr parts &labor 5 Yrs sensor
Warranty (all 1year unless noted otherwise)
26 01 05 -7
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Shop Dwgs Req’d? Yes Yes Yes
No
No No No No No No No No No
No No No No No
No No 2 Hrs
Owner Training
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
No
No No No No No No No No No
No No No No No
AHJ Cert. Req’d? No No No
No
No No No No No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes No
System Testing and report required? Yes No Yes
-(10) T5HO ballasts -(20) 3-lamp T8 ballasts
No No -(2) DT 1000sq ft -(2) power packs No No No No (3) Spare fuses of each size and type No No No No No No No No No
Spare Parts
Lamps
Light Fixtures Emergency Lighting
Exit Signs
26 51 13
26 51 13 26 52 00
26 53 00
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Equipment
Section
No
No No
No
Owner Training
END OF SECTION
Unit Equip:3 Yrs Battery Ballasts:5 yr 5 Yrs Unit / 10 yrs Pro-rated battery, lifetime LED
Warranty (all 1year unless noted otherwise)
26 01 05 -8
Yes
Yes Yes
Shop Dwgs Req’d? Yes
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Yes
No Yes
AHJ Cert. Req’d? No
No
No No
System Testing and report required? No
No
No No
-(2) cases T5HO -(2) cases 32WT8 -(10) CF each size spec’d -(12) HID each type & size spec’d
Spare Parts
SECTION 26 01 10 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Sections 26 01 00 and all references contained therein form a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and services necessary and incidental to complete all the selective and or complete demolition and removal of electrical systems in the areas of remodeling or affected by remodeling, and the rework and extension of electrical systems indirectly affected by electrical system served “downstream” from the demolished electrical systems. C. Coordinate demolition with the Owner’s asbestos abatement contractor to ensure that all required demolition is included in the project. Any demolition work not included in the asbestos abatement contractor’s work, but required for the project shall be included under this section by the Division 26 contractor. Coordinate work with the asbestos abatement contractor closely, especially where equipment or devices are noted on the plans to be reused or protected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the building to determine actual conditions and extent of work prior to bidding the project. Refer any unclear details or conflicts to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to bidding the drawings. B. Verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. C. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Coordinate phasing of the demolition work with the construction sequence schedule. B. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. C. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. D. Identify and provide new supporting means for existing electrical equipment such as low voltage cabling, conduits, boxes, pullboxes, conduit bodies, and conduit racks that will need additional support due to the demolition of the existing supports, including ceilings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights and barricades for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees, and existing improvements to remain. F. Provide temporary emergency lighting and illuminated exit signage as required by the Building Official or AHJ. G. Electrical Service: Maintain existing system throughout construction in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. H. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. I. Perform noisy work before or after the Owner’s working hours to minimum disruption. J. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas. 3.3
DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings identified to be demolished. B. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under and this Section or as indicated on the Drawings. Remove devices, conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation. C. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction or to maintain systems downstream from demolished area. D. Provide supports for all existing electrical equipment that was supported previously by demolished walls, floors, ceiling or other structures. Provide new supports from structural members not slated for demolition, prior to any demolition. E. Owner reserves the right of first refusal to obtain material shown to be removed under this contract. Items not retained by the Owner become the property of the Contractor and must be removed from the premises. F. Demolish and remove all electrical systems indicated for demolition. No portion of these systems may be abandoned in place. G. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. H. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit in walls, floors, or columns back to a point where patching can be adequately performed and patch surfaces. I. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. J. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. K. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. L. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. M. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
N. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. O. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Relocate and reroute conduit and wiring as required for conduit concealed in walls or structure being altered as part of the remodeling. Maintain continuity to all devices in and downstream of remodeled work. P. Reroute existing raceway and wiring which is exposed due to removal of existing construction. Conceal new raceway and wiring and maintain operation. Q. If conductors are required to be removed from existing raceways, install with new conductors. R. Provide new coverplates throughout the remodeled areas. S. Dispose of fluorescent lamps, ballasts, and other hazardous materials in accordance with State and Federal regulations. 3.4
EXISTING PANELBOARDS A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuits are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Reuse breakers if possible. Provide new breakers for new equipment unless breakers are specifically noted on the plans to be reused. B. Tag unused circuits as spare and turn breakers and/or switches off. C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to verify circuits feeding Project area are not in use. D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment. E. Provide new updated directories where more than three circuits have been modified or rewired. F. Where existing panels are indicated to be demolished, extend any remaining live circuits to the nearest suitable panelboard.
3.5
CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Prior to reinstallation of used equipment, thoroughly inspect each item and report any defects to the Engineer/Architect in writing. Instructions for corrective measures will be given at the time and the Contract amount adjusted accordingly. If no defects are reported, the material will be included under the contractor's one year guarantee. B. Warranty as outlined in Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. D. Luminaries: Where existing luminaries are indicated to be re-used, remove existing luminaries for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace non-functioning ballasts, and broken electrical parts. Provide new lamps. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
3.6
INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment as indicated on the drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 01 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Testing of electrical systems. B. Submissions of reports of tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous testing equipment as detailed.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Test the equipment and systems and demonstrate their proper operation to the Engineer. 1. Do not test equipment until it has been fully prepared, connected, and made ready for normal operation. Repair any equipment damaged by improper operation or testing at no cost to the Owner, before final inspection and acceptance.
3.2
LIFE SAFETY LIGHTING SYSTEM TESTING A. Emergency Lighting Relay Testing 1. Test all emergency switching relays and the Lighting Control Equipment to ensure proper operation during a normal power outage. Coordinate with the generator testing. 2. Simulate a power outage at each emergency switching relay by turning off the normal power lighting circuit and observing the operation of the relay, and the observe the lighting be energized in the room or area. Verify that the toggle switch in the same room or area cannot turn OFF the emergency lighting as long as the normal source is not present. 3. Simulate a power outage at the lighting control panel(s), and observe that the emergency relays are forced ON, energizing the life safety light fixtures controlled by the lighting control panel(s).
3.3
FEEDER TESTING A. Megger all lighting and power circuit feeders. If insulation resistance on any circuit is less than 1 megohm, such circuits are to be considered defective and must be replaced. Submit test results for each phase of each feeder from the output report files of the tester. Document all readings and submit to the Engineer.
3.4
OVERALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Conduct voltage tests at the time of energization of the distribution system, in the presence of the Engineer and carry out such corrective measures as may be required. B. Adjust all systems and leave in proper operating condition.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 20 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. D. Balancing Three Phase Loads 1. Prior to turning the building over to the Owner turn on all equipment in the building including lighting and with an amprobe, read the current drawn on each hot leg of feeder supplying each distribution panel. If the current in any one leg varies more than 5% (plus or minus) from the arithmetic average of the current in all the hot legs, reconnect the branch circuits to obtain a balanced loading. 3.5
GROUNDING ELECTRODE TESTING A. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142 at the main service grounding electrode.
3.6
OCCUPANCY SENSOR TESTING A. Upon completion of the installation phase, test and adjust each occupancy sensor to insure proper operation. B. General rooms and offices: Set the time delay to OFF after 15 minutes of inactivity. Set the sensitivity of each device to trip the lights ON from anywhere in the room, but not so sensitive to trigger the lights on from motion outside the room. C. Corridors and hallway: Set the time delay to OFF after 20 minutes of inactivity. Set the sensitivity of each device to trip the lights ON from anywhere in the corridor/hall. D. For dual technology sensors, set the sensor to maintain an ON condition if either technology is triggered from within the room after an initial ON. Set the device to initiate an ON condition only if both technologies sense motion from within the room. E. Test all operational features of the system at this time. F. Where required, make appropriate correction(s) and adjustments.
3.7
GROUND FAULT TESTING A. Perform testing after protective device coordination study is performed, reviewed and approved by the engineer. B. Test ground fault protective devices immediately after installation. Submit settings and testing report to the Engineer. C. Include a copy of the GF test report in the O & M manuals. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 20 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 19 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. This section includes these materials as defined by the 2008 NEC: 1. Multi-Wire Branch Circuit: (NEC Article 210.4) 2. Conductors for General Wiring (NEC Article 310) 3. Metal Clad Cable: Type MC (NEC Article 330)
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WIRE A. Provide copper conductors with 90ºC insulation system, 600 volt rating, U.L. approved and listed for specific application. Aluminum conductors are not allowed B. Indoor, dry location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHN, THHW, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation. 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No. 8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. C. Underground or wet location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHW, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No. 8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. D. Provide conductors for other systems as specified in the section in which they are described. E. Provide minimum No. 12 AWG conductor size, unless noted otherwise. F. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Southwire 2. Essex 3. Pre-approved equal.
2.2
CABLE A. Provide MC cable only where specifically allowed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Provide UL Listed cable. C. Provide copper phase, neutral and ground conductors. D. Provide factory assembly of one or more conductors enclosed in a metallic sheath that consists of a continuous corrugated aluminum tube conforming to the requirements for a single conductor insulated wire. E. Provide separate insulated ground wire(s) in each cable. F. Provide oversized neutral for circuits from Technology Panelboards (TVSS-grade panelboards). G. Approved manufacturers 1. Southwire 2. Alflex 3. AFC 4. pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRE INSTALLATION A. Encase all conductors in a continuous raceway system. B. Examine all wire before installation. Do not use any wire with insulation that is damaged in any way. C. Do not pull wire into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time. D. Route one A phase conductor and one B phase conductor and one C phase conductor (and neutral and grounding conductors if applicable) within the same raceway for each of the parallel raceways. Provide identical length conductors for all phases and neutrals for each parallel feeder. E. Test all cable and wire for continuity and for shorts prior to energizing any circuits. F. Provide separate hot, neutral and ground conductors for each circuit wired to Technology Panelboards. G. Provide separate hot and neutral conductors for each multi-wire branch circuit. Do not share neutral conductors. H. Provide conductors color coded as follows: 1. 208/120 Volt Systems a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B - Red. c. Phase C - Blue. d. Neutral - White. e. Ground - Green. I. All Conductors are No. 12 AWG copper unless indicated or specified otherwise.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. All conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are based on copper conductors. Do not substitute smaller conductors with higher temperature rated insulation. K. Maximum number of conductors in raceways and boxes shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Neatly trim and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panels. 3.2
SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices to feeders and service entrance conductors are not permitted unless specifically noted on the plans. B. Provide "pigtail"type splices and taps in wire No. 8 AWG and smaller. Use "wire-nut" self insulating connectors. C. Use pressure or compression type connectors for all splices or taps in copper conductors. D. Do not splice conductors of dissimilar metals together. E. Use only compression type connectors for all splices, taps, and terminations using copper-clad aluminum or aluminum alloy conductors.
3.3
CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide MC cable only where specifically allowed. B. Use MC cable only where approved as the maximum 6’ connection to a light fixture. C. Restriction on use. MC cable (beyond NEC Restrictions). 1. Home run to panel shall consist of approved conduit and wire. (Unless otherwise noted). 2. Do not install MC cable in block, brick walls, and in or under concrete slabs. 3. Route MC cable parallel and perpendicular to building structure. 4. Do not install MC cable within or supported from a communications cable tray/ladder. 5. Do not use MC cable in areas where cable would be exposed. 6. MC cable may be used for individual cable drops from a junction box to light fixtures. A maximum of 4 drops per junction box. Direct fixture to fixture connections are not allowed.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. B. Refer Section 26 01 20: “Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems”. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 24 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and 26 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. From electrical source to motor starters. 2. From motor starters to motors. 3. To lighting fixtures. 4. To miscellaneous equipment forming part of other divisions. 5. Transformer wiring and connections. C. Make electrical connections to all motors, appliances and other equipment and the associated control devices in accordance with the schedules on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1. In each case verify connections and physical data from approved shop drawing, manufacturers' wiring diagrams and/or detail drawings provided by relevant trade subcontractor. 2. Make connections to all motors and equipment furnished and set in place by others. Provide starters, manual controls and auxiliary equipment where indicated in schedules and specified herein. Provide all disconnect switches as indicated in schedules, specified herein and required by code. D. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and 26 sections, and are work of this section. E. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. F. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 sections for connection requirements for temperature control equipment. G. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. H. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division 26 section, "Electrical Identification".
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
I. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. J. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches. B. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. C. Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are listed and labeled by nationally recognized testing laboratories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide complete assembly of materials, including but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations for each electrical connection indicated. B. Raceways and Fittings: 1. Provide raceways and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division 26 basic electrical materials and methods section "Raceways". C. Wires, Cables and Connectors: 1. Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division 26 basic electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables".
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. H. Provide flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration. Refer to Section 26 05 33: “Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes” I. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire/cable conductor in accordance with “Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems.” Affix markers on each terminal conductor, as close as possible to the point of connection. 3.3
CONNECTIONS TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Make electrical connections as indicated in the plans and specifications to temperature control devices according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. Coordinate with Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Grounding and Bonding (NEC Article 250) B. Swimming Pools Fountains and Similar Installations (NEC Article 680) C. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems
1.2
DESCRIPTION A. Grounding Electrode System B. Equipment grounding C. Transformer grounding. D. Grounding of technology, security and data rooms. E. Bonding of new building additions
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
GROUND RODS A. Provide ¾” x 10’ long solid copper electrodes, where ground rods are called out.
2.2
GROUNDING CONNECTORS A. Clamps and pressure connectors. 1. Clamps for connection to piping and conduit, OZ Gedney type ABG or equal. 2. Clamps for connection to enclosures and buswork, OZ Gedney type KGM or equal. B. Welded connections using non-reversable exothermic process. Acceptable manufacturers: Cadweld, Thermoweld.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. New Construction 1. Provide a #3/0 concrete-encased electrode installed within the foundation of the building, tied to the steel reinforcing, in accordance with NEC. 2. Bond all the following building members (if present) together to form the grounding system for the building: a. All metal underground water pipes b. Metal frame of the building or structure c. Concrete-encased conductor identified in item 1 above.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 26 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Existing Construction (as allowed by NEC 250.50): 1. Provide a #3/0 conductor bonded to the metal underground water pipe. If metal water pipe is not present, drive a system of rod electrodes on order to satisfy the NEC requirements including Articles 250.53 and 250.56. 2. Bond all the following building members (if present) together to form the grounding system for the building: a. All metal underground water pipes b. Metal frame of the building or structure c. Technology Data room grounding riser system. C. Bond the neutral bus to the grounding electrode system at the service entrance switchboard and any other electrical services. 3.2
EQUIPMENT GROUND A. Solidly ground all conduit systems, switch boxes, cabinets, motor frames, switchgear, transformers, and all other permanently installed equipment to form a continuous, permanent and effective grounding system. Bond expansion joints and metal raceway sections.
3.3
UTILITY TRANSFORMER GROUNDING A. Provide ground rods driven at the Utility transformer (and connection cabinet if included in the project). Tie ground rods together with grounding conductor.
3.4
ADDITIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING A. Bond any new building addition to the existing building’s grounding electrode system to ensure effective grounding for the entire building. Use #3/0 conductor.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide stenciled lettering on each grounding conduit per Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems”. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 26 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes C. 26 27 16: Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures D. 26 51 13: Lighting E. 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting F. 26 53 00: Exit Signs
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers 2. Riser clamps 3. C-clamps 4. I-beam clamps 5. One-hole conduit straps 6. Two-hole conduit straps 7. Round steel rods 8. Expansion anchors 9. Toggle bolts 10. Wall and floor seals B. Supports, anchors and sleeves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 26 sections.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide supporting devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required that are manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of such devices. B. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. C. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA std Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". D. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports and equipment mounting. E. Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and labeled.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installers' option. B. Provide supports and anchors constructed of stainless steel or equivalent corrosion resistant material in chemical storage rooms. C. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Provide clevis hangers for supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" dia. hole for round steel rod. 2. Provide riser clamps for supporting metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears. 3. Provide C-clamps of black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size. 4. Provide I-Beam clamps of galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 3/6" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2". 5. Provide one-hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel. 6. Provide two-hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width. 7. Provide hexagon nuts for 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel. 8. Provide round steel rod of galvanized steel; 1/2" dia. D. Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Expansion Anchors: 1/2". 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4". E. Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes, and material indicated; having the following construction features: 1. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves 1 1/2" larger than O.D. of pipe. 2. Set all sleeves true to line, grade and position and plumb or level after concrete is poured. Correct any deviation from proper position. 3. Provide minimum of three (3) concrete anchors for Schedule 40 pipe sleeves. 4. Provide factory-assembled wall and floor seals. Provide watertight seals around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete below grad floors and wall. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. 5. Caulk spaces between pipe and floor sleeves inside the building with a waterproof caulking material. Caulk spaces between pipe and exterior partition sleeves with glass fiber insulation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Furnish sealable penetration pockets compatible with the building roofing system where conduits pass through the roof. Turn pockets over to the General Contractor. 7. Provide fire barriers around conduit, pipe, tubing, bus ducts and cables passing through smoke and fire rated floors and walls. Provide CP 25, 303 and PSS7904 Series by 3M, or "Flame-Safe" system by Thomas and Betts Corp for fire seals. 8. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water-tight seals by Thunderline or preapproved equal. F. Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, or types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: 1. Fixture hangers 2. Channel hangers 3. End caps 4. Beam Clamps 5. Wiring stud 6. Thinwall conduit clamps 7. Rigid conduit clamps 8. Conduit hangers 9. U-bolts G. Roof supports 1. Pipe Pier 2.2
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Provide sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet-metal fabricated from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. Sheet metal sleeves shall not be used for cable. 2. Steel-Pipe fabricated from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron-Pipe fabricated from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. B. Provide fire barrier sleeve seals for sleeves located in floor and firewall. Provide fire barrier material as described above.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hanger, anchors and sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA. Extend sleeves 3/4" above floor surface.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Support suspended conduit runs threaded rod and galvanized conduit hangers. Attach the hanger rod to concrete structural members with malleable iron inserts, to existing or precast concrete structural members with self-drilling anchors, to structural steel with steel "C" clamps, and to wood with suitable sized lag screws and angles. Support multiple parallel conduit runs on trapeze hangers constructed of steel rod hangers and structural channel. Include three (3) nuts jam-locked, on all threaded rod hangers, to rigidly support the conduit. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Support surface mounted conduit runs with galvanized pipe straps. Fasten pipe straps to masonry surfaces with self-drilling anchors or toggle bolts. Fasten pipe straps to wood or sheetmetal surfaces with pan head sheetmetal screws. E. Support wall mounted electrical equipment on 3/4" thick C-D exterior fir plywood painted with two (2) coats of ASA-49 gray enamel. F. Provide stainless steel screws where electrical equipment is mounted on or attached to fire treated plywood. Hold equipment away from the plywood with either plastic or stainless steel washers or spacers. G. Support all ceiling mounted receptacles with a listed tile bridge spanning the suspended ceiling grid, plus a 1/4" threaded rod anchored to a structurally sound member directly above the outlet box. H. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommet have expanded to form water-tight seal. 3.2
LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Securely support all light fixtures directly from building structural members or 11/2” or larger steel ceiling framing channels. Use steel channel equivalent to Kindorf #6029 where it is necessary to span the building structural members for fixture support. Wood supporting members or wires will not be acceptable. Provide minimum ¼” diameter lag screws when anchoring into wood structural members. Penetrate wood structural members a minimum of 2” with all screws. Provide steel or lead, expandable type, anchors with minimum penetration of 11/2” when anchoring to concrete. B. DO NOT suspend any conduit, light fixtures, or ballasts from metal roof deck or from the ceiling suspension wires. Support all lay-in fixtures independent of the ceiling support system. Provide fastening clips on each corner of each fixture. C. Equip all fixtures using conduit stems with ball swivel hangers. In finished areas, provide canopies for the hangers. D. Support all surface mounted fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of one hanger per fixture plus one per row. Support individual fixtures with a minimum of two hangers. Attach fixture hangers to the ceiling grid per code. E. Support all suspended fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of two fixture hangers. Attach each
3.3
ROOF SUPPORT FOR CONDUIT RACKS A. When conduits are allowed to be routed across roofs END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, FITTING, AND BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices E. Intermediate Metal Conduit (NEC Article 342). F. Rigid Metal Conduit (NEC Article 344). G. Flexible Metal Conduit (NEC Article 348). H. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (NEC Article 350). I. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (NEC Article 352). J. Electrical Metallic Tubing (NEC Article 358). K. Surface Metal Raceways (NEC Article 386) L. Surface Non-Metallic Raceways (NEC Article 388)
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a coordinated, dimensioned plan drawing prior to installation that indicates the following information: 1. Routing of all underground feeders to-and-between all panelboards, switchboards and distribution panels. Indicate locations where feeders rise up through the floor and transition to overhead feeders. 2. Routing of all overhead feeders to panelboards, switchboards and distribution panels. Indicate locations of all pullboxes and sizes. 3. Routing of all underground conduits exterior to the building.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) and fittings. 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized or electro-galvanized (inside and outside) conduit having a bichromate finish conforming to UL standard UL-6. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. B. PVC-coated Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) and fittings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Provide hot dip galvanized or electro-galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2. 40 mil. PVC coated inside surface and outside surface. 3. Provide threaded type fittings, couplings and bushings with the same coating as the conduit. 4. Provide brush-on PVC touch-up compound. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) and fittings. 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel conduit conforming to UL Standard 1242 and Federal Specification WW-C-581E. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and fittings. 1. Provide electro-galvanized tubing conforming to UL Standard UL797, with the interior having a smooth coating of aluminum lacquer or enamel. 2. Do not thread tubing. 3. Provide concrete-tight steel compression or set-screw type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast or indentor type devices are not acceptable. E. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A., hot-dip galvanized tubing conforming to U.L. Standard ULI. 2. Provide steel or malleable iron type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast type devices are not acceptable. F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A. conduit covered with an extruded, polyvinyl chloride sheath. 2. Provide steel or malleable iron, water-tight type fittings, couplings, and bushings approved for use with liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. Cast type devices are not acceptable. G. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rigid plastic conduit conforming to NEMA Specifications TC-2. 2. Provide plastic fittings, couplings, and bushings per manufacturer's recommendations for rigid non-metallic conduit, designed for use with solvent cement. 2.2
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide galvanized code gauge metal outlet and junction boxes with screw-on covers of type, shape and size listed for each application. B. Provide gasketed covers in damp and dusty locations, and also where required to meet the listed use (i.e. wet locations). C. Provide cast metal boxes (FS and FD) for all locations where IMC and RMC is required under Section 26 05 33 under the Raceway Application Table. D. Provide 4" square minimum trade size square boxes for all outlet and junction boxes. Provide appropriate mudrings, tile rings or raised covers, depending on the application and allowable installation.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. Provide 3½” deep boxes where installed in masonry, including precast construction. Provide 2⅛” minimum deep boxes where installed in non-masonry locations. Shallower boxes (1½”, 1¼”) are allowed only at locations where the wall cavity depth does not permit deeper boxes to be installed concealed within the wall. F. Provide outlet boxes with green grounding pigtail pre-terminated to the interior of the box, to be used to ground the wiring device(s). G. Refer to other sections for additional outlet box requirements specific to other systems. H. Approved steel box manufacturers: 1. Raco 2. Steel City 3. Pre-approved equal I. Approved cast metal box manufacturers 1. Appleton 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Killark 4. Bell 5. Red Dot 6. Pre-approved equal 2.3
INTERIOR PULLBOXES A. Provide listed metal boxes with removeable screw-on covers. B. Size pullboxes boxes to adhere to the NEC. C. Provide enclosures that have a NEMA rating that meet or exceed the environment in which they are installed. D. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hoffman Enclosures 2. Electro Mechanical Industries (EMI) 3. American Midwest Power (AMP) 4. Pre-approved equal
2.4
CONDUIT BODIES A. Provide malleable cast iron or aluminum conduit bodies of type, shape and size required to suit each installation and conduit system. Do not use conduit bodies for conduits larger than 1½” unless specifically allowed on the plans. B. Approved manufacturers 1. Appleton 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Killark
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Bell 5. Red Dot 6. Pre-approved equal 2.5
SURFACE RACEWAY – SINGLE CHANNEL A. Surface Metal Raceway 1. Single-channel, metal paintable two-piece raceway. 2. Matching fittings, coverplates, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 3. Ivory-colored factory-painted raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. 4. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceway. 5. Approved Manufacturers: a. Wiremold 200/500/700 series b. Pre-approved equal
2.6
SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DIVIDER A. Surface Metal Raceway with Divider 1. Two-channel, metal paintable two-piece raceway. 2. Matching fittings, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 3. Ivory-colored factory-painted raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. 4. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceways. 5. Provide stainless steel overlapping coverplates with duplex receptacle and technology outlets at locations along the length of the surface raceway assembly. Coordinate technology outlet type with Division 27. Match coverplates specified in Section 26 27 26: “Wiring Devices”. 6. Provide full-capacity elbows and entrance end fittings to allow maximum cable capacity for the technology cabling to be installed in the low voltage section of the raceway. 7. Provide “bridge” fittings at T’s and cross connections, in order to maintain isolation of low voltage technology cabling from line voltage wiring. 8. Approved Manufacturers: a. Wiremold 4000 series raceway with 4047 overlapping device plates, 4010DFC series elbows and 4075D series bridge fittings. b. Mono Systems SMS4200 with equivalent Wiremold accessories listed above. c. Pre-approved equal B. Surface Non-metallic Raceway with Divider 1. Raceway and all system components must be UL listed and exhibit non-flammable extinguishing characteristics. 2. Two-channel, two-piece design with base and snap-on cover. 3. Manufactured of a rigid PVC compound white in color and paintable.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Matching fittings, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 5. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceways. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Panduit TG-70 series b. Wiremold 5400 series c. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices” for supporting requirements. B. Install all line voltage (120, 208, 277 and 480 volts) conductors in a continuous raceway system. Refer to individual low voltage and communications specification sections for raceway requirements for non-line voltage wiring. C. Provide pull and junction boxes as required by the NEC. D. Provide minimum 3/4” conduit size for branch circuit homeruns. Provide minimum 1/2” conduit size everywhere else. E. Verify conduit sizes indicated on the plans prior to installation. Provide proper size conduit based on the NEC maximum fill requirements, including any derating factors. Where conduit sizes are indicated on the plans, it is a minimum size allowed and it is based on based on EMT usage. If other allowable types of conduits are used, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the proper conduit size, including any grounding conductors and flexible connections to equipment. F. Do not route any conduits across rooftops, unless specifically allowed and noted on the plans to do so. If conduits are allowed to be routed across rooftops, install conductors in Rigid Metal Conduit and provide proper derating of the conductor ampacities to account for the high ambient temperature as required in NEC Art. 310-15. Mount on roof blocks specifically designed for the intended environment. G. Support all trapezes and all above-ground conduits from the building structure. Provide conduit supports, not to exceed 7’ 0”, for all conduit less than 1” in diameter. H. Route all horizontal raceway above water piping, where possible. I. Do not support conduit with wire, nylon ties, nor perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. J. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. K. Conceal all conduit work in new construction, except mechanical rooms. Conduit and boxes in mechanical spaces may be run exposed. Run all exposed conduit in a neat, workmanlike manner parallel to the building lines, tight to the wall and ceiling surfaces, and firmly support with conduit clamps or hangers. Provide one (1) hole mounting straps, minimum three (3) feet on center, for all surface conduit mounted on walls less than six (6) feet above finished floor. L. Do not run conduits in columns except to feed column mounted devices. Do not route conduit through structural slabs, beams, or columns, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Do not route any conduit in any concrete topping.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
M. Place conduits at least 8" away from all hot piping and surfaces including domestic hot water lines. Do not route conduits through the same penetrations through floors and walls as mechanical piping unless noted otherwise or if approved by the Engineer. N. Do not mount conduit on mechanical equipment except where necessary to connect electrical devices mounted on the equipment. Provide flexible conduit in all runs "bridging" vibration mountings. O. Do not run conduit on or directly in front of access doors, removable panels, equipment removal spaces, control devices or other spaces necessary for normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. P. Install all exterior underground branch circuit conduits continuous from the source to the load. Do not install in-ground boxes as pull boxes. Oversize the conduits if required. Q. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Install exterior underground conduits to drain away from the building. R. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection where conduits cross seismic, control and expansion joints. Avoid crossing expansion joints where possible. S. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. Cap or plug ends of conduit that are to remain empty and make watertight. Clean and swab conduits prior to pulling in conductors. T. Provide nylon pull string in all empty conduit with a stamped plastic label indicating future use. U. Provide watertight seal, approved by the Architect, for all roof penetrations. V. Provide air tight seals for all raceway penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to conduit penetrating vapor barriers. W. Seal all conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. X. Seal all conduits where they pass through exterior walls and where they enter exterior fixtures. Y. Seal all conduits where temperature differential between adjacent spaces is greater than 30 degrees Fahrenheit. 3.2
CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTBANKS A. Provide PVC conduit rated for underground installation in concrete encasement. B. Provide trench sufficiently deep to provide maximum depth to top of concrete of 30”, unless noted otherwise on the plans. C. Pour concrete “sidewalk base” at the bottom of the trench. D. After the sidewalk base cures sufficiently, install the forms and duct cells anchored to the base to prevent floating. E. Provide duct cell spacers distributed evenly every eight (8) feet (maximum) along the entire length of the duct, unless closer spacing is receommended by the cell spacer manufacturer. F. Maintain a minumun of 2” continuous concrete between conduits in the duct and 3” minimum between the conduits and the edges of the forms and sidewalk base. G. Provide continuous pour into (and through) footings, foundation walls, floors and structures in order to eliminate the possibility of sheering due to frost heaving and/or settling.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
H. Provide warning tape identification above ductbank per Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems 3.3
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Maintain accessibility to all outlet and junction boxes as required by the NEC. B. Provide recessed outlet boxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Outlet boxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed. C. Provide concealed junction boxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Junction boxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed. D. Mounting heights indicated on the drawings are from the center of the outlet box to the finished floor directly below the outlet. Exterior heights are from inside adjacent door, or if no door, from the first floor above grade, unless noted otherwise. E. Coordinate the location of all outlets with Architectural and Mechanical drawings before installation. Verify mounting heights and locations of all outlet boxes, including the following: 1. Outlets located on walls with baseboard radiation. Mount to the side of radiation covers. 2. Switch boxes at doors. Verify door swings. door if possible.
Install switchboxes on the latch side of the
3. Outlet boxes at casework. Mount outlet boxes above counters and above backsplashes. 4. Outlet boxes at undercounter refrigerators. Mount outlet boxes in the space reserved for the refrigerator. 5. Outlet boxes adjacent to marker boards or other wall-hung Architectural items. Verify top edge and bottom edge of wall-hung items and mount outlets on clear wallspace. F. Do not mount boxes back-to-back and nippled together. G. Do not use through-wall boxes unless specifically called out on the plans. H. Field-gangable boxes are not allowed. Provide manufactured, multi-gang boxes. I. Provide separate switch boxes for lighting dimmer switches to maintain full dimmer rating. J. Close openings in all outlet boxes during plaster and concrete work with plain paper or slip-on plastic or metal plates. K. Provide knockout closures to cap used knockout holes. L. Provide FS and FD boxes in wet, damp and exterior locations. M. Maintain vapor barriers around boxes and/or provide suitable boxes listed for use in vapor barriers. N. Provide air-tight seals for all boxes in air plenums that can allow air to pass through connecting conduit. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. O. Where boxes and concrete are installed in masonry, provide listed equipment or the means acceptable to the AHJ necessary to provide concrete-tight connections and boxes required by the NEC. 3.4
INTERIOR PULLBOX INSTALLATION A. Provide concealed pullboxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Pullboxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Terminate all conduits at cabinets and boxes with locknuts and bushings. Provide insulating bushings on all conduit 1” and larger. C. Provide pull boxes in accessible locations. Provide accessiblility to the pullbox cover. Coordinate location of pull/junction boxes with other divisions (trades) prior to installation. Do not locate pull boxes in exposed finished spaces without the specific approval of the Engineer and Architect. D. Provide ½” clear space behind boxes when mounting in wet or damp locations. 3.5
CONDUIT BODY INSTALLATION A. Provide conduit bodies in accessible locations. Provide accessiblility to the cover. Coordinate location of conduit bodies with other divisions (trades) prior to installation. Do not locate conduit bodies in exposed finished spaces without the specific approval of the Engineer and Architect.
3.6
SURFACE RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Coordinate frames with technology cabling installer, and provide the proper frame and coverplate. B. Provide surface raceway for lighting, power, low voltage systems and technology systems in finished areas of existing construction, or at other locations specifically called out on the plans. Surface raceway is not allowed in areas of new construction unless specifically called out on the plans. C. Verify routing of surface raceway with the Architect, Owner and Engineer prior to installation. Route surface raceway orthogonal to building lines. D. Provide the shortest lengths of surface raceway possible, following building lines. Route raceway into accessible ceiling space and/or accessible tunnel space. E. Unless specifically sized on the plans, use the smallest (cross-sectional area) size raceway for the use or number of conductors installed in the raceway. F. Provide bushing on raceways stubbed into ceiling spaces for technology cabling. G. Do not route surface raceway through walls or floors. H. Use manufacturer’s base and cover cutter to make field cuts to the raceway. I. Ground and bond all metal raceways.
3.7
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification of each junction box and pullbox located in accessible areas (i.e. above accessible ceilings) in accordance with Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems”
3.8
RACEWAY USAGE TABLE A. Refer to table on the following page for allowable usages of raceways and conduit. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 33 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
A
A
A A A A
Steel RMC A A A
Alum. RMC A
A A A
A A
A
A
PVCcoated RMC
A
A
A
IMC A
A
EMT A
A3
A2 A2 A2
FMC
A2 A2 A2
LFMC
A6
A4 A1 A
A1
RNMC
A5
Surface Metal Raceway
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
2
26 05 33 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Provide PVC Coated RMC elbows for all elbows installed under and/or through concrete slabs on grade. Provide conduit minimum length of 18” and a maximum length of 48”. 3 Provide maximum 6’ long whip from outlet box located at building structure. 4 Provide concrete-encased ductbank with PVC-coated Steel RMC elbows. Steel RMC elbows not required if the entire elbow is encased in concrete. 5 Provide surface raceway only in areas of existing construction where recessed conduit and boxes are not possible. 6 Install raceway in non-plenum spaces only.
1
Application ↓ Dry, concealed interior locations not listed below Exposed exterior locations Exposed unfinished interior locations installed below 46” above finished floor Exposed unfinished interior locations installed above 46” above finished floor Underground or under concrete slabs on grade Inside exterior masonry wall cavities Wet Locations Exposed inside tunnels Motor Connections – dry locations Transformer Connections – dry locations Non-Transformer Vibrating Equipment – dry locations Motor Connections – wet or damp locations Transformer Connections – wet or damp locations Vibrating Equipment – wet or damp locations Lay-in light fixture connections Service entrance feeder Floorboxes in slab on grade Floorboxes in concrete topping above grade Exposed finished areas Voltages over 600 volts Lightning Protection System downlead conduits
Raceway Type
3.9 RACEWAY APPLICATION TABLE Legend: A=Acceptable; (blank) = Not Acceptable
A5
Surface Nonmetallic Raceway
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Refer to individual Division 26 sections. B. Section 28 50 10: Security Electronics Raceways
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Minimum 1/8” thick laminated bakelite: White face with black lettering. B. Engrave characters with a minimum height of 1/4". C. Minimum plate size: 1” x 3.5”. Provide larger plate if necessary to fit all lettering on it. D. Approved manufacturers 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Cutler Hammer 4. General Electric 5. pre-approved equal
2.2
SERVICE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Provide signage per NEC Articles 110.22, 230.2(E) and 230.70(B) B. Provide nameplates on each main service disconnecting means describing what areas are served by the disconnecting means, and where the other disconnecting means are located.
2.3
EMERGENCY SOURCE IDENTIFICATION NAMPLATES A. Provide signage per NEC Article 700.8. B. Provide nameplates near each main service disconnecting means indicating that the building has an on-site generator and where it is located.
2.4
ARC FLASH WARNING SIGNS A. Provide Arc Flash warning signs on all electrical equipment as required by 2008 NEC 110-16: “Electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels,meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.” B. Minimum size: 3½”x 5”; B302 polyester or vinyl with laminate overlay.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Approved manufacturers 1. Brady 2. Seton 3. pre-approved 2.5
BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Approved manufacturers 1. Sharpie 2. Avery Marks-A-Lot 3. pre-approved equal
2.6
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide stenciling of conduits located in accessible areas. B. Provide black epoxy spray paint and 1” high stenciled lettering.
2.7
COVERPLATE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide ¼” high engraved black-infilled lettering or laser etching when engraved coverplates are specified or noted on the plans. B. Approved manufacturers 1. Cooper 2. Pass and Seymour 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. pre-approved equal
2.8
WARNING TAPE A. Provide 4” wide, detectable type yellow warning tape with black lettering “WARNING – UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL” above all underground conduits and ductbanks along the entire length.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Provide identification plates on the following electrical equipment: 1. Each panelboard, distribution panel, switchboard, motor control center and switchgear. Provide the following information on each nameplate: panel name, voltage, wire configuration, feeder conduit size, phase wire size, neutral size, ground wire. Example:
TLP-1-1 208/120V, 3P4W 2”C - 3#2/0, #350 NEUT #4 GND, THWN
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Each overcurrent device in distribution panels, switchboards, motor control center and switchgear 3. Transformers 4. Disconnect switches (engrave per the equipment served) 5. Motor starter switches, motor starters, remote motor control stations (engrave per the equipment served) 6. Power factor correction capacitors 7. TVSS equipment cabinets 8. Contactor cabinets 9. Lighting control panels B. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. C. Install nameplates inside covers in finished areas using approved contact cement. D. Install nameplates outside covers in unfinished areas by mechanical fasteners (screws or rivets). 3.2
ARC FLASH WARNING SIGNS A. Provide signs suitable for the environment in which they are located: 1. Provide engraved plates with the physical specifications called out in paragraph 2.1 above for exterior equipment. 2. Provide laminated, pressure sensitive signs adhered to the outside covers of equipment in unfinished areas. 3. Provide laminated, pressure sensitive signs adhered to the inside covers of equipment in finished areas. B. Provide signs that indicate that an arc-flash hazard exists at this location, and that proper personnel protective equipment should be worn prior to serviving the equipment. Example:
!
WARNING
Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate PPE Required 3.3
BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Provide panel and circuit number(s) identification on the cover of all junction boxes and pullboxes located in accessible areas (i.e. above accessible ceilings). B. Provide clear, hand-printed lettering using black permanent marker.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Perform stenciling after the building has been painted so that overspray from building painting does not cover up stenciling performed under this specification section. Re-label any boxes that have been painted over by the painter. 3.4
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide stenciling of conduits and pullboxes of the following: 1. Medium Voltage and High Voltage feeder conduits and pullboxes 2. Panelboard, distribution panel, switchboard, motor control center and switchgear feeder conduits and pullboxes. 3. Service entrance conduits and pullboxes at the point of accessibility for cable TV, Telephone and Fiber Optic cables. 4. Lightning Protection System downlead conduits B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. C. Perform stenciling after the building has been painted so that overspray from building painting does not cover up stenciling performed under this section. D. Perform stenciling on 50’ centers, maximum, along entire accessible length of conduits
3.5
COVERPLATE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraving or laser-etching on the plate immediately above the wiring device, unless noted otherwise.
3.6
WARNING TAPE A. Install warning tape 8” below finished grade directly above the following electrical conduits: 1. Any concrete encased ductbank 2. Medium Voltage and High Voltage feeder conduits 3. Line voltage service-entrance feeders 4. Underground conduits to exterior light poles, signs, receptacles, bollards, and and power equipment (irrigation equipment, maintenance buildings, etc). 5. Service entrance conduits for cable TV, Telephone and Fiber Optic cables. B. Identify exact locations of underground conduits on the as-built documents. Indicate critical dimensions from the corners of the building. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 05 60 CONCRETE PADS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards C. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards D. Section 26 27 13: Electricity Metering Cabinets E. Section 26 29 13: Motor Controls F. Section 26 35 33: Power Factor Correction
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
UTILITY TRANSFORMER PAD A. Provide a concrete transformer pad built to 2008 Xcel Energy standards, including the following illustrations found in Xcel Energy Standard for Electrical Installation and Use: 1. Drawing CC-10 & CC-10A – Customer Owned Secondary Connection Cabinet 2. Drawing CC-50 & CC-50A – Secondary Connection Cabinet and Transformer Poured-inPlace Pad. 3. Refer to the end of this section for copies of these drawings. B. If a connection cabinet is included in the project under Section 26 27 13: Electricity Metering Cabinets, provide a continuous pad for both the utility transformer and the connection cabinet. C. Precast pads are preferred, but a precast cable vault under pad is required.
2.2
EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide concrete pads for all floor-mounted equipment, unless already called out to be provided under Division 3, which may include the following equipment: 1. Switchboards 2. Distribution Panelboards 3. Transformers 4. Power Factor Correction Equipment 5. Engine-Generator sets 6. Electricity Metering Cabinets 7. UPS equipment and battery cabinets/battery racks 8. Theatrical Dimming Cabinets 9. Any other floor-mounted electrical equipment.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
UTILITY TRANSFORMER PAD A. Provide proper soil correction and preparation as indicated on the Xcel Energy drawings listed in section 2.1 above. B. Primary Conduits: Provide two (2) 4” conduits with 36” sweep elbows stubbed up into the primary opening of the transformer, and extended out 5 feet from the pad location for utility primary cables.
3.2
EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide minimum 4” high concrete pads for all floor mounted equipment. B. Provide 8” minimum thick concrete pads for engine-generator sets. Coordinate structural requirements of engine-generator pads with the generator manufacturer. C. Size pad to provide a minimum 2” overlap around perimeter of equipment, including future sections to switchboards. D. Provide steel reinforcement as required for load or as indicated on the drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.3
DRAWING CC-10
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
DRAWING CC-10A
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.5
DRAWING CC-50
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.6
DRAWING CC-50A
END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 60 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 09 23 OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 09 24: Daylight Sensors D. Section 26 09 43: Lighting Control Equipment E. Section 26 51 13: Lighting
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a complete shop drawing package of the proposed system. C. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. D. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binder with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. E. Submit rough-in requirements including box sizes, conduits, mounting heights, etc. F. Submit wiring diagrams indicating all system components and the wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring. G. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. H. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list, the quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. Indicate clearly the locations of additional sensors (if any) recommended by the manufacturer in order to provide adequate coverages (see paragraph 3.1.B below). I. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. J. Submit physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components or hardware. K. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. L. Submit complete mounting details and instructions for all equipment to be installed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
M. Submit complete operating description of the devices. Indicate how to make sensitivity and time delay adjustment to each type of device. N. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review. 1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where occupancy sensors are indicated on the plans or specified herein, provide all components, power packs, mounting hardware, brackets, wiring and terminations required to provide on/off control of the light fixtures in the space served by the occupancy sensors. B. Provide occupancy sensors with sufficient coverage to ensure positive detection of activity from any location within the room or space. Provide additional occupancy sensors than those shown on the plans if required or recommended by the manufacturer to ensure proper coverage of the entire space. C. Provide the proper type of occupancy sensor based on the type of space, use, and size of the room. The following chart indicates the proper type of occupancy sensor based on typical use spaces. Refer to the plans for specific types and applications. Type of space Public Restrooms Stairwells Corridors Conference Rooms Classrooms Hard Offices Open Office Areas Work Rooms Vestibules Adverse environments
Dual Technology (DT)
Ultrasonic (US)
Passive Infrared (PIR)
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
D. Dual technology occupancy sensors are identified on the plans as type “DT”. Ultrasonic motion sensors are identified on the plans as type “US”. Passive infrared motion sensors are identified on the plans as type “PIR”. 1.4
SYSTEM OPERATION A. In locations where light switches and occupancy sensors are indicated in the room or space, provide the following operation: 1. If the light switch(es) are in the OFF position, the lights shall remain OFF. Activity in the room shall not energize the lighting. 2. If the light switch(es) are in the ON position, the lights shall be controlled by the occupancy sensor(s). Activity in the room shall energize the lighting. Lack of activity (maintained for a predetermined time period) shall de-energize the lighting. B. In locations where occupancy sensors are the sole controlling unit in the room or space, provide the following operation: 1. The lights shall be controlled by the occupancy sensor(s). Activity in the room shall energize the lighting. Lack of activity (maintained for a predetermined time period) shall de-energize the lighting.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Provide occupancy sensors that fail in the energized state for occupancy sensors controlling egress lighting (i.e. corridors). D. Provide occupancy sensors with integral Form C relay to allow control of external devices including the following: 1. Thermostats 2. EMS data gathering modules 3. Ceiling fans 4. HVAC equipment such as VAV boxes, unit ventilators and fan coil units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment supplied by manufacturers as listed herein are considered approved for bidding on this project. Where specific models are referred to, the intent is to establish a minimum level of features and performance. B. Systems manufactured by the following are approved for bidding purposes on this project. Approval for installation is subject to review and approval of shop drawings. 1. Dual Technology Sensors a. Ceiling: 1) Wattstopper DT300 (for 500 sq. ft. rating and 1000 sq. foot rating only) 2) Wattstopper DT200 (for 2000 sq. ft. rating only) 3) Leviton OSC(05)(10)(20)-MOW 4) Hubbell Mytech OMNIDT series 5) Sensorswitch equal 2. Ultrasonic Sensors a. Rooms - Ceiling 1) Wattstopper WT(600)(1100)(2200) 2) Leviton OSC(05)(10)(20)-UOW 3) Hubbell Mytech OMNIUS series 4) Sensorswitch equal b. Corridors - Ceiling 1) Wattstopper WT(2250) 2) Hubbell Mytech approved equal 3) Sensorswitch equal 3. Passive Infrared Sensors a. Ceiling 1) Wattstopper CI-(200)(200-1)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2) Leviton OSC(04)(15)-IOW 3) Hubbell Mytech approved equal 4) Sensorswitch equal 2.2
OCCUPANCY SENSORS - ALL A. Provide the following specifications for all occupancy sensors 1. Solid state, operates at 24VDC supplied by a power module. 2. Load Ratings: 20 amps fluorescent, 20 amps HID and 13 amps incandescent loads. 3. Optional integral isolated Form C relay rated at 0.5 amp @24VDC. 4. High impact, injection molded plastic housing. 5. Mounting hardware designed for the particular application: wall, ceiling, corner surface, wall switch retrofit, etc. 6. Immune to RFI and EMI. 7. Adjustable time delay (8 minutes to 30 minutes). 8. Adjustable sensitivity. 9. LED activity indicators. 10. Operating temperature: +32°F to +104°F at 5% to 95% non-condensing humidity. 11. UL Listed. 12. 5 year replacement warranty.
2.3
DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSORS (TYPE DT) A. Provide dual technology occupancy sensors that adhere to the specification listed above in paragraph 2.2, plus the following specifications: 1. Utilizes passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for detection. 2. Field configurable to allow any combinations of one, either or both technologies to energize, de-energize or maintain ON status.
2.4
ULTRASONIC OCCUPANCY SENSORS (TYPE US) A. Provide ultrasonic occupancy sensors that adhere to the specification listed above in paragraph 2.2, plus the following specifications: 1. Operates at a minimum frequency of 32kHz
2.5
PASSIVE INFRARED OCCUPANCY SENSORS (TYPE PIR) A. Provide PIR occupancy sensors that adhere to the specification listed above in paragraph 2.2, plus the following specifications: 1. 360° coverage 2. Dense Fresnel lens
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.6
VANDAL GUARDS A. Where vandal guards are indicated on the plans, provide heavy duty guard over the entire device, mounted to structure using dedicated tamperproof hardware (torx head with center pin reject). B. Provide unbreakable polycarbonate guards. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. Safety Technology International 2. Pre-approved equal
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide complete and operational system including all line voltage wiring, power packs, occupancy sensors, low voltage wiring, conduit, terminations, setup, testing, calibration, etc. B. Provide occupancy sensor coverage at rooms and spaces shown on the plans. It is the intent of the plans and specifications to show all necessary occupancy sensors; however, because coverages vary from manufacturer to manufacturer and model to model, additional (or fewer) sensors may be required in each space. Coordinate locations and quantities with the manufacturer prior to installation. If additional sensors are required, they will be added using the established unit price cost in a written change order. C. Verify the practical location of each occupancy sensor prior to rough-in. Locations or applications that obviously will not provide the intended coverage or that have obstructions should be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately. Changes required after the occupancy sensors are installed because of obstacles or other detrimental conditions that were obvious when the sensor was installed shall be done at no cost to the Owner. D. Connect the power pack(s) on the line side of any local switches serving the controlled lighting. Locate the required power packs above the ceiling in the room served by the sensor(s), or in an adjacent space away from the finished area. Maintain accessibility to the power pack(s) as required by the NEC. E. Mount ultrasonic detectors away from HVAC diffusers and away from doors leading out of the space. F. Mount PIR sensors at “line of sight” locations to maximize probability of detection. G. Install and wire all equipment in accordance with this specification, project drawings and shop drawings. H. Provide all wiring, conduit, junction boxes and outlet boxes required for the system, including terminations to devices furnished by others. I. Install all wiring in concealed conduit in new construction. Provide surface raceway and boxes in finished areas of existing construction. Reuse existing conduit and boxes wherever possible. J. Provide color coded wiring throughout. Test all wiring for opens, shorts and grounds before system startup.
3.2
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.3
TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of on-site instruction and training to the person or persons so designated by the Owner.
3.4
FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the Architect/Engineer, to the Owner's representative(s). B. Verify the following before scheduling the system demonstration: 1. The installation is complete. 2. The installation is fully operational. C. Verify the following before requesting final approval: 1. Owner training is complete. 2. As-built documentation is complete and turned over to the Engineer. D. Provide a letter to the Owner certifying that the installation is complete, fully operational and successfully tested. E. Final acceptance of the system will be given upon completion of all of the above requirements.
3.5
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one (1) year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period. Provide a five (5) year replacement warranty on occupancy sensors and power packs.
3.6
SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Provide two (2) dual technology 1000 square foot rated occupancy sensors 2. Provide two (2) power packs. B. Turn spare parts over to Owner at the completion of the project. Provide written documentation signed by the Owner that the spare parts were turned over at the completion of the project. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 23 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Switchboards and Panelboards (NEC Article 408) B. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical C. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices E. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes F. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems G. Section 26 05 60: Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment H. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards I. Section 26 27 13: Electricity Metering Cabinets J. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Provide switchboards and panelboards from the same manufacturer. B. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. C. Submit "time-current data" with shop drawings for main switchboard overcurrent device, all distribution fuses, and all ground-fault interrupters. Proper trip settings will be indicated on the shop drawings during review. Adjust "trip settings" as indicated by the Engineer. D. Submit shop drawings of the utility metering provisions to the Utility Company for approval prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT – CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE MAIN A. Provide a 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire switchboard with bolt-on tin-plated aluminum bus bars braced to withstand a 85,000 ampere RMS symmetrical fault. B. Provide 100%-rated main service disconnect switch. C. Provide service section containing the following: 1. A main disconnect switch consisting of a stationary mounted, molded case circuit breaker, with solid-state trip amperes. Provide trips consisting of adjustable continuous current setting, adjustable short time and a minimum UL listed interrupting rating of 85,000 RMS symmetrical pickup, and adjustable instantaneous trip, adjustable instantaneous settings. Provide breaker with a trip button in the front cover for mechanically tripping the breaker.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Provide switchboards, panelboards and overcurrent devices with full interrupting ratings. Reducing the interrupting rating of downstream ratings through the use of series-rated equipment is not permitted. 3. Utility metering equipment (see “UTILITY METERING” paragraph below). D. Distribution Sections 1. Provide separate distribution section(s) with full height bussing and suitable for mounting 3 pole, fusible switches with quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, and capable of accepting Class R Fuses only. Provide full bussing for all space so that no additional work will be required to add devices or sections in the future. 2. Mount all of the above components as shown on the Drawings in a UL approved and labeled, NEMA Class 1 floor mounted steel cabinet constructed of finished steel cleaned, primed, and painted with a baked enamel finish prior to shipment to the job site. 3. Busing a. Provide non-tapered, 100% rated horizontal busing for all sections. b. Provide 100% rated neutral bus. c. Provide a 50% ground bus running full length of the switchboard and ground all noncurrent carrying parts of the switchboard to this ground bus. E. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D 5. EMI 6. States Electric 7. A.M.P. 8. Pre-approved equal. 2.2
GROUND FAULT PROTECTION A. Provide main circuit breaker with adjustable ground fault current and time settings and test switch. B. Provide ground-fault protection equipment consisting of a ground sensor (encircling all phase conductors and the neutral) connected to a solid-state ground relay and an electrically active shunt-trip for the main disconnect. Provide field adjustable ground-fault current pick-up from 200 to 1200 primary amperes; set at 400 amperes. Time-delay characteristics of 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and 0.5 seconds. Operate circuit interrupter shunt trip and relay from an internal 120 volt a.c. control source. Provide access to the equipment without opening up the switchboard. Provide a test panel to test the equipment both with and without tripping its related switch.
2.3
CUSTOMER METERING A. Customer Metering Panel: 1. Current transformers, 5A secondary.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Microprocessor based monitor panel to provide the following readings, voltage (L-L, L-N), amperage, power (KW), power demand, power factor, and energy consumption. Provide KWH pulse output. Provide a data port for connection to the Owner’s LAN. 3. Provide and install software on Owner’s computer to allow logging and communications off-site through the Owner’s LAN. B. Approved manufacturers 1. Cutler Hammer 2. Electro-Industries 3. Crompton Instruments 4. Square D 5. Siemens 6. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
SERVICE A. Electrical energy will be received at 120/208 volts, 60 hertz, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye. B. Transformer and primary provided by the Utility. C. Provide transformer pad per Utility requirements. Refer to Section 26 05 60: “Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment”. D. Verify that the neutral to ground bond is in place at the service entrance equipment prior to energizing.
3.2
SERVICE CONDUCTORS A. Provide the service feeder, wire in conduit, from the transformer or cable termination cabinet to the main distribution switchboard. B. Provide Type XHHW or THWN service conductors. C. Refer to Section 26 05 33: “Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes” for approved raceway system for underground service entrance conductors.
3.3
GROUNDING A. Provide grounding per Section 26 05 26: “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification nameplates on all switchboards, and on each overcurrent device in the switchboard per Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems” END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Switchboards and Panelboards (NEC Article 408) B. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical C. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices E. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes F. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems G. Section 26 05 60: Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment H. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards I. Section 26 43 13: Transient Voltage Surge Supression Equipment
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Provide switchboards and panelboards from the same manufacturer. B. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. C. Submit "time-current data" with shop drawings for all distribution panel overcurrent devices.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide distribution panelboard assemblies adhering to the following specifications: 1. Compliant to Article 408 of the NEC: “Switchboards and Panelboards”. 2. Enclosures constructed of galvanized sheet steel of thickness as required by Code, with enameled steel trim, distributed busing, hinged steel doors latches, locks and adjustable trim clamps. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures for exterior locations. 3. Provide 90” high enclosure with full busing where “full height” panels are indicated on the plans. 4. Provide welded metal frame with typed circuit directory for each panel. 5. Compliant to the following standards: UL 50, UL 67, NEMA PB-1, NFPA 70 and Fed. Spec W-P-115C 6. Provide panelboards with interrupting ratings as shown on the plans. Provide switchboards, panelboards and overcurrent devices with full interrupting ratings. Reducing the interrupting rating of downstream ratings through the use of series-rated equipment is not permitted. 7. Provide 600 volt rated panelboards.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 16 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. Provide sub feed or feed through lugs as indicated on the plans. 9. Provide tin-plated copper bus bars or tin plated aluminum bus bars. 10. Provide proper lugs (75° C. minimum temperature rating) and gutter space for cable size indicated on the plans. 11. Provide all panels by the same manufacturer. 12. Fused Distribution Family a. Provide stationary fused switches to accept Class R fuse holders. Provide quick-make, quick-break bolt-on type switches. Refer to the schedules on the plans for sizes and quantities. b. Compliant to the following standards: UL 98, NEMA KS-1 and Fed. Spec. W-C-865C. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D type QMB series 2) Siemens type P4 and P5 series 3) Cutler Hammer Pow-R-Line 4F series 4) General Electric QMR series 5) Pre-approved equal 13. Circuit Breaker Distribution Family a. Provide molded case, non-adjustable, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, bolton type circuit breakers. Refer to the schedules on the plans for sizes and quantities. b. Compliant to the following standards: UL 489, NEMA AB-1, Fed. Spec. W-C375B/GEN, IEC 157-1 and BS 4752. c. Series rating of circuit breakers is not allowed. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D type I-Line series 2) Siemens type P4 and P5 series 3) Cutler Hammer Pow-R-Line 4B series 4) General Electric CCB series 5) Pre-approved equal 2.2
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide lighting and appliance panelboard assemblies adhering to the following specifications: 1. Enclosures constructed of galvanized sheet steel of thickness as required by Code, with enameled steel trim, distributed busing, hinged steel doors latches, locks and adjustable trim clamps. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures for exterior locations. 2. Provide welded metal frame with plastic-covered typed circuit directory for each panel. Directory card must be removeable to allow updating off-site if necessary. Permanently adhered panel directories are not allowed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Compliant to the following standards: UL 50, UL 67, NEMA PB-1, NFPA 70 and Fed. Spec W-P-115C , UL 489, NEMA AB-1, Fed. Spec. W-C-375B/GEN, IEC 157-1 and BS 4752. 4. Provide panelboards with interrupting ratings as shown on the plans. Provide panelboards and overcurrent devices with full interrupting ratings. Reducing the interrupting rating of downstream ratings through the use of series-rated equipment is not permitted. 5. Provide 240 volt AC rated panelboards for 208/120 and 240 volt AC systems. Provide 480/277 volt rated panelboards for 480/277 volt systems. 6. Provide sub feed or feed through lugs as indicated on the plans. 7. Provide tin-plated copper bus bars or tin-plated aluminum bus bars. 8. Provide proper lugs (75° C. minimum temperature rating) and gutter space for cable size indicated on the plans. 9. Provide all panels by the same manufacturer. 10. Provide molded case, non-adjustable, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, bolt-on type circuit breakers. Refer to the schedules on the plans for sizes and quantities. 11. Provide muli-pole breakers where indicated on the schedules. Handle ties on single pole breakers are not acceptable. 12. Tandem breakers are not allowed. 13. Provide circuit breakers with engraved ratings on the handle that are visible without removing the panel cover. 14. Series rating of circuit breakers is not allowed. B. Provide panelboards of the same type and manufacturer as the TVSS panelboards in Section 26 43 13: “Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Equipment” C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 240 Volt a. Square D type NQOD or NF b. Siemens type P1 series c. Cutler Hammer Pow-R-line 1a series d. General Electric AQ series e. Pre-approved equal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Distribution Panelboards 1. Mount panels and cabinets to building structure or interior wall construction. Mount independent of conduit and raceways entering boxes.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 16 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Provide 1" empty conduits from each flush mounted panel. When the floor is on grade, provide three (3) conduits into the ceiling cavity above. When the floor has accessible space below, provide two (2) conduits into the ceiling space above and two (2) conduits into the accessible space below the floor. Ends shall be capped and shall be tagged at both ends with permanent tags. 3. Provide concrete pads under all floor-mounted or free-standing distribution panelboard per Section 26 05 60: “Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment”. B. Branch Circuit Panelboards 1. Mount panelboards and cabinets to building structure or interior wall construction. Mount independent of conduit and raceways entering boxes. 2. Mount panelboards with topmost overcurrent device no higher than allowed by the NEC (6’7”) above finished floor. 3. Provide 3/4" empty conduits from each flush mounted panelboard. When the floor is on grade, provide three (3) conduits into the ceiling cavity above. When the floor has accessible space below, provide two (2) conduits into the ceiling space above and two (2) conduits into the accessible space below the floor. Ends shall be capped and shall be tagged at both ends with permanent tags. 4. Provide each circuit in the panel(s) with a circuit number securely fastened to the breaker for identification purposes. 5. Provide a circuit directory completely typed on the interior of each panel door. 3.2
GROUNDING A. Provide grounding per Section 26 05 26: “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide typed circuit directories in the inside cover of each Lighting and Appliance Panelboard. B. Provide identification nameplates on all panelboards and distribution panels, and on each overcurrent device (including spares) in distribution panelboards per Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems”. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 24 16 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes C. Section 26 05 60: Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment D. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit shop drawings of the connection cabinet to Utility for approval prior to submittal to the Engineer.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
CABLE TERMINATION CABINET A. Provide UL listed cabinet that meets Utility requirements. B. Provide fully-assembled, free standing, NEMA type 3R cabinet. Provide minimum 12 gauge (min.) galvanized steel structure with 14 gauge (min.) panels. C. Provide 3-point latch, padlock hasps and wind stops on doors. D. Paint the enclosure transformer green. E. Provide 600 volt rating, 3 phase 4 wire. F. Provide electrical grade aluminum (max. 750 A/sq.in.) or copper (max 1000 A/sq.in.) busing. Support bus bars on plastic insulators with provisions for utility current transformers. G. Provide lugs in sufficient quantity and size to terminate all conductors. Provide 75 degree C rated lugs, minimum. H. Size cabinet for the service entrance conductors. Provide minimum short circuit withstand rating of 85,000 amperes RMS without cable lashing required. I. Provide busing with at least the same ampacity as the main switchboard if not specifically sized otherwise on the plans. J. Provide a metering compartment containing only Utility’s current transformers with approved means of locking and sealing. K. Locate meters per Utility requirements, following the recommended clearance requirements from Utility. L. Acceptable Manufacturers
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. American Midwest Power (AMP) 2. States Electric 3. EMI 4. pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
CABLE TERMINATION CABINET A. Install on same contiguous concrete pad as the utility transformer. Refer to Section 26 05 60: “Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment” B. Provide raceway between transformer and connection cabinet per the Utility company requirements. C. Terminate secondary service entrance conductors. D. Install the current transformers (furnished by Utility). Make line and load side bolted connections of the current transformers at the removable bolted links on the bussing. E. Provide 3/4” (minimum) conduit from connection cabinet to meter location(s). conductors between CT’s and meters.
Provide
F. Provide and make terminations to the service entrance conductors on the load side of the connection cabinet busing. Refer to the Power Riser Diagram for sizes and quantities. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes D. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
EQUIPMENT RACKS AND ENCLOSURES A. Sound System racks and enclosures – Refer to Division 27 for specifications. B. Technology equipment racks – Refer to Division 27 for specifications. C. Video Equipment racks – Refer to Division 27 for specifications.
2.2
PULLBOXES A. Refer to Section 26 05 33: “Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes” for pullbox requirements.
2.3
SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Provide 16 gauge (min.) spare fuse cabinet with spare fuse cabinet and fuse pulling tool B. Single latch, lockable handle operator C. Provide 30”H x 24”W x 12”D cabinet with two shelves. D. Approved manufacturers 1. Bussman SFC series 2. Hoffman A302412UC series 3. Littelfuse LSFC series 4. Pre-approved equal
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures where indicated on plans.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 16 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Verify mounting heights for cabinets installed in finished areas with Architect prior to installation. C. Flush-mount telephone boxes no higher than 50” above finished floor to center of cabinet. D. Provide recessed cabinets in areas of finished construction. E. Mount spare fuse cabinet(s) on wall adjacent to the main distribution switchboard or as indicated on the plans. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes D. Section 26 27 19: Multi Outlet Assemblies E. Section 26 27 23: Indoor Power Poles
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new wiring devices in each outlet indicated on the drawings. B. Provide all devices from one manufacturer. C. Provide ivory wiring devices for all receptacles connected to normal utility power. D. Provide toggle switches that adhere to the following specifications: 1. Federal Specification WS896-E. 2. Rated for 20 amperes, 120-277 volts unless noted otherwise. 3. NEMA WD1 standards. 4. UL listed. 5. Side and back wiring options. E. Approved toggle switch manufacturers/model numbers: 20A/120-277V Wall Switches Mfr.
1-pole
Cooper Hubbell P&S Leviton
2221 HBL1221 PS20AC1 1221-2
1-pole w/Pilot 2221PL HBL1221PL PS20AC1-RPL
1221-2PL
2-pole
3-way
4-way
2222 HBL1222 PS20AC2 1222-2
2223 HBL1223 PS20AC3 1223-2
2224 HBL1224 PS20AC4 1224-2
Keyed 1-pole 2221L HBL1221L PS20AC1-L
1221-2L
Mom. Contact 1995 HBL1557 1251 1257
F. Provide receptacles that adhere to the following specifications: 1. Federal Specification WC596. 2. UL listed. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Side and back wiring options. 4. One piece solid brass ground strap with integral ground, except GFI receptacles. 5. NEMA 5-20R configuration, rated for 20 amperes at 125 volts, unless noted otherwise. Provide special purpose receptacles rated for the equipment used. 6. Provide TVSS (transient voltage surge suppression) receptacles that adhere to UL 1449 (second edition), UL 498 and ANSI/IEEE 62.41-1991. G. Approved standard receptacle manufacturers/model numbers:
2.2
Manufacturer Cooper Hubbell P&S
Simplex 5361 HBL5361 5361
Leviton
5361
Duplex 5362 HBL5362 5362A or PT5362A 5362
20A/125V Standard Receptacles GFI IG TVSS XGF20 IG5362 5362S GFR5352A IG5362 HBL5360SA 2094 IG6300 8300SP
Tamper Resistant TR8300 HBL8300SGA TR63H
8899
8300-SG
5362-IG
7380
COVERPLATES A. Interior Coverplates: Provide new coverplates over all boxes with the following minimum specifications: 1. All finished areas and unfinished areas with recessed boxes: Provide type 302 stainless steel with smooth satin finish. 2. Unfinished areas over surface mounted boxes: Provide raised metal cover to match the surface metal box. 3. Provide appropriate covers over special purpose receptacles. B. Exterior Coverplates: Provide new 2-gang, “while in use”, weatherproof coverplates for outlets and switches as indicated on the Drawings. Provide weatherproof boots for all dropcords as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Weatherproof switch coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing switch; or cast aluminum with lever and weatherproof gasket. 2. Weatherproof receptacle coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing receptacle. 3. Approved manufacturers: a. Red Dot 2CKD Series b. Leviton 5977-CL series c. Pass and Seymour WIU series d. Pre-approved equal 4. Weatherproof receptacle coverplates: Stainless steel with locking cover, P&S #WPH-8L or pre-approved equal. 5. Weatherproof boots: Yellow rubber, with overlapping design to seal out water and dirt. Rubber boot shall keep weatherproof seal intact when plug is used with wall mounted receptacles.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new devices for all outlets indicated. Provide individual GFI, isolated ground and surge suppression device for each duplex receptacle in ganged outlets. B. Wire each device by wrapping the conductors around the terminals and torquing the screw terminal tight. C. Mount all receptacles with the ground lug on the top. D. Replace all receptacles and plates that have been damaged, burned or discolored during construction, prior to Substantial Completion. E. Install wall plates after all painting has been completed. F. Mount wall mounted dimmers in separate boxes from switches. G. Test all wiring devices for continuity, proper polarity connections and grounding. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 28 13 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards C. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards D. Section 26 27 16: Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures E. Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches F. Section 26 29 13: Motor Control
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit "time-current data" with shop drawings for all fuses.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
FUSES A. Provide fuses of the following types (Bussman used as reference): 1. 601 amps and larger: Time-delay type designed to hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds and clear 20 times current in 0.01 seconds or less with interrupting ratings of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak let-through current and energy letthrough values established by U.L. Standard for Class L fuses. Provide KRP-C fuses. 2. 600 amps and smaller: Dual-Element construction with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak let-thru current established by U.L. Standard for Class RK-1 fuses. Provide LPN-RK/LPS-RK. 3. Motor circuits: Protect all individual motor circuits with full load ampere rating (FLA) of 480 amperes or less with dual-element time-delay fuses. Provide LPN-RK/LPS-RK. Protect larger horsepower motors with time-delay fuses. Provide KRP-C fuses. Provide U.L. Class RK1, dual-element time-delay for all other motors. 4. Motor Controllers: Protect NEMA and IEC style motor controllers with dual-element, timedelay fuses to provide Type 2 coordination for the controller. Provide LPS-RK fuses. 5. Protect circuit breaker panels with U.L. Class RK1, Class L fuses. Provide LPN-RK, LPSRK, or KRP-C fuses. B. Class J fuses are not allowed. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. Ferraz-Shawmut
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Littelfuse 4. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.2
FUSES A. Provide fuses for all equipment utilizing fused switches or fused safety switches. B. Verify proper size fuses for all equipment prior to ordering fuses.
2.3
SPARE PARTS A. Provide spare fuse cabinet per Section 26 27 16: “Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures”. B. Provide three (3) spare fuses of each size used at each spare fuse cabinet location shown on the project. Place inside spare fuse cabinet. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 14 00 00: Conveying equipment (Elevators) B. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes D. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses F. Section 26 29 13: Motor Control
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a table (see Forms at the end of this section), listing all components by equipment tag with the following information indicated: 1. Safety Switch type, size, rating, enclosure type, switches poles, solid poles, HP rating 2. Fuse size and type (if fused) 3. Identification tag/nameplate
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SAFETY SWITCHES (DISCONNECT SWITCHES) A. General requirements 1. Provide safety switches as disconnects for all utilization equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide lockable handle with multiple hasps to allow proper lockout-tagout procedures. 3. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures when mounted outside. Provide bolt-on hub kit(s) for conduit connections in order to maintain NEMA 3R rating. 4. Provide NEMA 4X non-metallic KRYDON switch enclosure for all pool equipment. 5. Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide 3-pole with solid neutral bus for landing line and load side neutral conductors. 6. Provide proper size and quantity of lugs to terminate all phase conductors and neutral conductor. Neutral conductors may require more lugs, and a larger size. 7. Provide interior ground lug. B. Fused or unfused switch type 1. Provide heavy duty switch with quick-make, quick-break mechanism with positive interlock.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 16 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Hinged door with mechanical interlock in the ON position, with defeat mechanism. 3. Provide switch with switch mechanism suitable for the type and size fuses specified in Section 26 28 13: “Low Voltage Fuses”, whenever fused switches are required. 4. Provide horsepower rated disconnects, fully rated for load-break and load-make operation. 5. Provide service entrance rated switches where required. 6. Provide 200% neutral connection in the switch when serving a TVSS grade technology panelboard. Refer to the panelboard summary schedule on the plans, power riser diagram and/or Section 26 43 13: Transient Voltage Surge Supression Equipment. 7. Approved manufacturers: a. Cutler-Hammer DH series b. General Electric TH series c. Siemens Type VBII series d. Square-D Class 3110 series e. Allen Bradley 1494 series f. pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches with operator handle no higher than 6’-7” above finished floor in front of the safety switch unless otherwise allowed by the NEC. B. Mount safety switch as close to the equipment as possible. Provide unistrut rack if necessary. C. Do not mount safety switches on removeable panels on the equipment served. Coordinate location of safety switches with the equipment provider prior to installing the switch. D. Install safety switches with proper working clearances about the switch.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems” on all safety switches. Label per the name of the device controlled unless noted otherwise on the plans.
3.3
FORMS A. Fill out the attached form with the information for each safety switch. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 16 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SAFETY SWITCHES FORM
Tag/ID or Equipment served by Safety Switch
Volts
Ampacity
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Fused, Nonfused or Circuit breaker
NEMA Enclosure
26 28 16 -3
Location of Safety Switch (Room #)
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 60: Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses F. Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Indicate short circuit current ratings for all equipment. C. Motor Control Center Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions; conduit and entrance locations with requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of busbars per phase and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, phase, amps, AIC rating, etc. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation and start-up of the product.
1.3
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All motors will be provided by the Contractor providing the equipment to be driven.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A. Provide equipment with a short circuit current rating equal to or larger than the available fault current at the source panel.
2.2
MANUAL STARTER SWITCHES - TYPE MSS A. Provide "on-off" toggle type manual starter switch with thermal overload protection for single phase motors. B. Provide each switch with a red pilot light indicating when motor is on. C. Provide switches located outdoors in a NEMA 4 enclosure and switches located indoors in a NEMA 1 enclosure unless indicated otherwise. D. Approved Manufacturers (surface mounted): 1. Allen-Bradley bulletin 600 TAX4/TAX5, with pilot light bulletin 600 TAX216/TAX109 2. Square D equivalent 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent E. Approved manufacturers (flush mounted): 1. Allen-Bradley bulletin 600 TXQ4/TXQ5, with pilot light bulletin 600 TQX216/TQX109 2. Square D equivalent 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent 4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent 2.3
MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Provide full voltage type starters and thermal overload protection and external manual reset for all three phase motors, unless indicated otherwise. B. Provide starters located indoors in NEMA 1 enclosure, and starters located outdoors in NEMA 3R enclosure unless indicated otherwise. C. Equip each starter with 120 volt coil, control power transformer, secondary fuse block and fuses, 1 set of spare N.O and 1 set of spare N.C. auxiliary contacts, red "ON" pilot light, and "HAND-OFF-AUTO" control switch. D. Provied additional aux contacts as required to allow power factor correction capacitors to be installed properly without modifications to the starter. E. Provide phase failure relays for all three-phase motors 3 HP and larger. F. Acceptable Manufacturers for magnetic starters: 1. Allen-Bradley Bull. 509 &512 2. Square D Class 8536 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent 4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent 6. pre-approved equal.
2.4
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Provide unit with fused disconnect and magnetic starter as specified in paragraph 2.3. Provide disconnect with quick make-quick break mechanism and interlock so switch must be in off position before covers can be open. Provide disconnect handle capable of accepting padlocks. B. Provide phase failure relays for all three-phase motors 3 HP and larger. C. Acceptable manufacturers: As specified in paragraph 2.3.
2.5
PHASE FAILURE RELAYS A. Provide motor protection relay that sense phase loss, phase reversal, low voltage and voltage unbalance conditions for all three phase motors three (3) HP and larger. B. Provide auto-reset with time delay. C. Provide octal base plug-in type relays.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Verify proper voltage for all relays. E. Approved manufacturers: 1. TimeMark Model #A-258 series 2. Allen Bradley #8135 3. Square D #8430MPS 4. SymCom Model 201A 5. Cutler Hammer / Eaton D65VMLP 6. pre-approved equal. 2.6
CONTROL STATIONS A. Provide HP rated toggle switches per Section 26 27 26 where toggle switches are called out to control equipment. B. Provide standard duty control stations in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless indicated otherwise. C. Provide flush mounted devices and plates in all finished areas. D. Acceptable manufacturers (surface mounted): 1. Allen Bradley (number indicated for reference) a. Momentary start-stop - 800S-2SA. b. Maintained start-stop - 800S-2SCM. c. Momentary start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2SAP. d. Maintained start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2SBMP. e. Momentary 3 unit - 800S-3S series. f. Hand-Off-Auto - 800S-R44SX. g. Hand-Off-Auto with pilot light - 800-R3SXP. 2. Cutler Hammer equivalents 3. General Electric equivalents 4. Siemens equivalents 5. Square D equivalents 6. Pre-approved equal. E. Acceptable manufacturers (flush mounted): 1. Allen Bradley (number indicated for reference) a. Momentary start-stop - 800S-2ASQ. b. Maintained start-stop - 800S-2BSMQ. c. Momentary start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2ASPQ. d. Maintained start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2BSMPQ. 2. Cutler Hammer equivalents
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. General Electric equivalents 4. Siemens equivalents 5. Square D equivalents 6. pre-approved equal. 2.7
DISCONNECTS A. Provide disconnect switches as specified in Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches. B. Provide NEMA-3R enclosures for safety switches mounted outside. C. Provide NEMA 4X non-metallic safety switches when used in exposed unprotected exterior locations, or for pool equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRING A. Make connections to all motors and power equipment and leave equipment in working order. Check all motors for proper rotation. Tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. B. Coordinate motor location, controls, wiring, etc. with other Divisions as required for proper interface. C. Make connections to control devices as indicated in the Drawings. Install all control devices in starter covers unless indicated otherwise. For remote mounted control devices and manual starter switches, surface mount devices in unfinished areas and flush mount devices in finished areas. D. Extend power and/or control wiring for roof mounted equipment to the equipment within the unit curb. Separate roof penetrations are not allowed.
3.2
OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. Provide properly sized overcurrent and overload protection for each motor called out to have overcurrent and overload protection. B. Measure the full load current and provide motor overload elements accordingly. Indicate the overload element manufacturer, type, and size of the inside cover of each starter. C. Submit complete list of “Motor and Starter Installation Data” to the Engineer prior to final completion. Include as a minimum the following information: Motor Name, Motor Location, Starter Location, Starter Type, Starter Manufacturer, Starter Model, Overload Type, Overload Size and Control Station Type and Model.
3.3
PHASE FAILURE RELAYS A. Install phase failure relays inside the starter enclosure including manual starter enclosures, magnetic motor starter enclosures, motor control center starter tubs, and combination starter/disconnect enclosures. B. Provide all required control wiring between relay and the starter.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
SAFETY SWITCHES (DISCONNECTS) A. Provide a lockable disconnect mounted on or adjacent to each motor starter (including VFD’s) as required by NEC Article 430.102(A). B. Provide a lockable disconnect mounted on or adjacent to each motor as required by NEC Article 430.102(B).
3.5
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems” on all motor starter switches, magnetic starters, combination starters, contactors, disconnects, and control devices. Label per the name of the device controlled unless noted otherwise on the plans. Provide “SPARE” nameplates over spare equipment.
3.6
FORMS A. Fill out the attached form with the information for each motor control device. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Volts
HP
RLA
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Tag/ID or equipment served
MOTOR CONTROL SCHEDULE
• MSS • FVNR • VFD
Starter Type
26 29 13 -6
Starter Size (NEMA)
Starter Location (Room #) Yes / No
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Fused / NF
Combination Starter/Disc?
SECTION 26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices D. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes E. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems F. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards G. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards H. Switchboards and Panelboards (NEC Article 408) I. Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs) (NEC Article 285) J. ANSI/IEEE STD C62.41.1 - 2002 Categories A, B, C. K. ANSI/IEEE STD C62.41.2 - 2002 L. ANSI/IEEE STD C62.45 - 2002 M. UL 67, UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283 Listed N. MIL-STD 220B O. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publication LS1-1992, R2000 Guidelines. P. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Q. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94).
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. TVSS equipment includes the following: 1. Service entrance TVSS protection at the service switchboard panel(s) as shown on the plans.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Provide necessary component dimensions; type, size, dimensions, and weight; detailed equipment outlines, weight and dimensions; location of conduit entry and exit; single-line diagram indicating external wiring requirements. C. Submit catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 43 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1.4
TESTING A. Provide listed minimum repetitive surge current limiting capacity rating (as listed in part 2 of this specification) after all duty cycling and life tests have been performed as per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002 and C62.45-2002. B. Life cycle test each unit to protect against and survive a minimum of 6500 open circuit Category C3 surges (20kV, 1.2x50µs) and 6500 short circuit Category C3 surges (10kA, 8x20µs) at 1 minute iuntervals. C. The UL 1449 3rd Edition surge suppression rating shall not deviate by more than 10 percent between the first Category C3 test and the last Category C3 test. D. Provide UL 1449 Listed Suppression let through voltage rating (including the unit disconnect if specified) listed in part 2 of this specification. E. Provide UL 1283 Listed Electromagnetic Interference Filter with the attenuation rating obtained utilizing MIL-STD-E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology. F. Test the TVSS equipment for proper operation prior to leaving the factory. G. Provide a certified record of these tests as part of the permanent documentation package that travels with each unit.
PART 2 PRODUCT 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. The manufacturers listed below are approved for bidding on this project, provided they adhere to this specification. B. Provide TVSS equipment from the same manufacturer for panelboards and main service protection.
2.2
SERVICE ENTRANCE TVSS PROTECTION A. General Construction Features: 1. Provide all terminals for necessary power connection as determined by the model number. 2. Provide low impedance wiring for all surge current diversion connections. Circuit boards cannot be used in surge current-carrying paths. 3. Provide internally fuses rated 600 VAC or greater with a minimum interrupting capacity of 100,000 AIC. 4. Provide operating temperature range from -40 degrees F to +140 degrees F at an altitude of up to 13,000 feet. 5. Provide reliable operation in an environment with 5% to 95% non-condensing relative humidity. 6. UL listed and ISO 9001 certified. B. Enclosure: 1. Provide NEMA 1 surface mounted enclosure constructed of minimum 14 gauge steel with ANSI 61 gray paint. Provide top or bottom conduit entry into the incoming compartment of the enclosure.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 43 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Provide enclosure with front access. 3. Provide three point latch and key lock door. Provide status indicator LED’s for each phase, visible without opening the door, to indicate the protection status on all phases. C. Electrical Requirements: 1. Provide unit to operate at 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, grounded wye system. 2. Provide a minimum rating of 115% maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) for all suppression components. 3. Provide operating frequency range from 47 to 63 hertz. 4. Provide protection in the following modes for delta connected panels: Line-to-Line (each phase) and Line-to-Ground (each phase). 5. Provide protection in the following modes for wye connected panels: Line-to-Neutral (each phase), Line-to-Ground (each phase), and Neutral-to-Ground. 6. Provide surge current rating (per Testing section above) of all the following: a. 200,000 amps Phase A line to neutral and b. 200,000 amps Phase B line to neutral and c. 200,000 amps Phase C line to neutral and d. 200,000 amps Phase A line to ground and e. 200,000 amps Phase B line to ground and f. 200,000 amps Phase C line to ground and g. 200,000 amps neutral to ground. 7. Sine wave tracking electronics to protect from transients at any point on the 60 Hz power signal (±20%). 8. TVSS clamp time of less than 1 nanosecond. 9. Provide maximum UL 1449 3rd Edition listed let through voltages as follows: Voltage 208/120
L-N 400V
L-G 400V
N-G 400V
L-L 400V
10. Provide the following minimum high frequency noise attenuation (per Testing section above): 1Khz 2dB
10Khz 17dB
100Khz 40dB
1Mhz 18dB
10Mhz 6dB
100Mhz 1dB
11. Provide individual fusing to protect each MOV from overcurrent without affecting the remaining MOV’s. 12. Provide Form C dry contacts to annunciate a failure of the TVSS device. Provide contacts that indicate the status of the protection devices. Manufacturers that only monitor power to the TVSS unit are not acceptable.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 43 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
13. Provide a transient counter mounted on the front panel of the TVSS unit that indicates the quantity of transient currents suppressed by the unit. Include in the as-built documentation, a recommendation for replacement of the TVSS unit when the unit reached a maximum quantity of transients. D. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Current Technology CGP200-208/120-3GY series 2. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install TVSS equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment will fit in the allocated space in full compliance with the minimum required clearances specified in the a NEC. C. Install TVSS equipment where shown on the Drawings, per manufacturers instructions. D. Install conductors as short and straight as possible, no greater than one meter in length. Twist input conductors to reduce impedance for high frequency filtering. E. Provide all required safety labels.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify the optimal mounting location of the TVSS unit(s) prior to rough-in to minimize the lead length of the TVSS unit(s). Mount TVSS unit to the side of the incoming switchboard section or immediately adjacent on the wall. B. Verify all connections and the voltage at the connecting bus prior to energizing unit. Make corrections necessary if the voltage at the TVSS is above the MCOV specification listed elsewhere in this specification. C. Inspect installed TVSS equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. D. Check tightness of all mechanical and electrical connections. Torque all connections per manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Test equipment in the field by a factory representative after installation to meet the required specifications.
3.3
GROUNDING A. Provide grounding per Section 26 05 26: “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
3.4
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continue for a period of ten (10) years for Service Entrance TVSS protection, five (5) years for TVSS Panelboards. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse, or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide typed circuit directories in the inside cover of each TVSS panelboard.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 43 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Provide identification nameplates on all TVSS panelboards Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems”. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 43 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 51 13 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 19: 600 Volt Conductors and Cables D. Section 26 09 21: Contactors E. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices F. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fitting and Boxes G. Section 26 09 23: Occupancy Sensors H. Section 26 09 24: Daylight Sensors I. Section 26 09 26: Miscellaneous Lighting Control Devices J. Section 26 09 25: Emergency Lighting Control Relay K. Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting L. Section 26 53 00: Exit Signs
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture assembled in alphabetical order by ‘type’. Submit manufacturer’s data including dimensioned drawings and photometric data prepared by an independent nationally recognized testing lab. C. Submit shop drawings for each ballast type as specified and/or indicated on the drawings. D. Additional requirements for all indirect linear lighting: 1. Submit scaled plan of each room or areas where the above types are used. Indicate fixture lengths, anchoring locations, feed points, internal wiring diagram of each fixture that shows all switchleg wiring any all low voltage dimming ballast wiring. 2. Identify each light fixture with type and room number used. Provide shipping label that identifies the room number and installation location of each light fixture. Include the plan described above in #1, inside each fixture box shipped to the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
LIGHT FIXTURES A. Provide fixtures with lamps, for each outlet shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. See fixtures list on the plan. B. Provide U.L. approved fixtures.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. The type fixtures required are as noted by a capital letter on the Drawings. Contractor is solely responsible for the exact quantities. Due to the high quantity of linear light fixtures on this project, fixture types shown on the plans do not necessarily equate to an exact length or quantity of fixture; rather, the fixture designation shown on the plans refer to the type of fixture. It is the Contractors responsibility to provide the proper length and switching configuration in each room. D. Provide color stabilized clear virgin acrylic diffusers for interior fixtures. Provide a minimum thickness of 0.156" for all troffer lenses. E. Provide disconnects at each light fixture required to have a disconnect as required under the 2008 NEC 410.130(G). 2.2
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS – T8 AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT A. Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts with the following minimum specifications 1. Disconnecting means on the line side of the ballast to disconnect all hot and neutral conductors, as required by 2008 NEC Article 410.130(G). Provide either factory-installed disconnecting means, or provide field-installed disconnect inside the ballast channel. a. Approved field-installed disconnect 1) WAGO 873 2) Tyco/AMP Light-N-Lok CPGI series 3) T & B Sta-Kon LD2/LD3 series 2. Provide U.L. listed and labeled, C.B.M. approved ballasts. 3. Programmed Rapid Start technology to ensure longest lamp life. 4. Compact Fluorescent only: Series wired lamps for multiple lamp configurations, and plug-in lead connectors for all lamp leads 5. Class “P” rated with thermally activated automatic resetting protective devices sealed in housing. 6. Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less on 60 Hz modulated current. 7. Comply with FCC Rules Part 18 requirements governing electromagnetic and radio frequency interference 8. Complies with IEEE 587 for withstanding line transients, voltage regulation + 10 percent, light regulation + 10 percent. 9. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: greater than 95 percent 11. Sound rating: “A” 12. Minimum 5 year warranty including $10/ballast labor 13. Total Harmonic Distortion: <20% , but greater than 10%. 14. End-of-life lamp sensing for all Compact Fluorescent ballasts. B. Provide ballasts and lamps suitable for starting at a minimum starting temperature of -20 degrees F. when "cold weather" fixtures are indicated on the light fixture schedule or any fixture mounted on the exterior of the building.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Approved manufacturers – T8 electronic ballasts 1. Advance Centium Program Rapid Start series 2. Universal Lighting Technologies Triad AccuStart series 3. Osram Quicktronic ProStart series D. Approved manufacturers – Compact Fluorescent 1. Motorola Gold edition 2. Robertson 3. Osram Quicktronic series 4. Universal Lighting Technologies 2.3
HID BALLASTS A. Provide core and coil type, lead peaked, high power factor metallic halide ballasts with capacitor mounted separately from ballast and with a crest factor of 1.70 or lower. Provide ballast and fixture assembly with rated sound level not to exceed an NC-45 level. Provide ballasts with minimum starting temperature of -20 degrees F. when "cold weather ballasts" are indicated on the light fixture schedule or any fixture mounted on the exterior of the building. B. Provide core and coil type, regulated, high power factor high pressure sodium vapor ballasts with a crest factor of 1.70 or lower. Provide ballast and fixture assembly with rated sound level not to exceed an NC-45 level. Provide ballasts with minimum starting temperature of -20 degrees F. when "cold weather ballasts" are indicated on the light fixture schedule or any fixture mounted on the exterior of the building. C. Provide all H.I.D. ballasts with an in-line fuseholder and fuse. Fuse shall be Bussman KTK or FNQ with Bussman HEB, HPF, or HPS holder. Acceptable manufacturers: Bussman, GouldShawmut, or Littelfuse.
2.4
COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Provide minimum 82 CRI for all compact fluorescent lamps. Provide 4100K color lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. B. Provide 4-pin base non-amalgam lamps C. Provide lamps suitable for electronic dimming. D. Approved manufacturers: 1. GE 2. Phillips 3. Osram Sylvania
2.5
FLUORESCENT LAMPS – T8 A. Provide minimum 85 CRI for all fluorescent lamps. Provide 3500K color lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. B. Provide F032, F025 and F017 T8 lamps for all 4’, 3’ and 2’ fixtures, respectively, unless noted otherwise. C. Approved manufacturers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. GE Starcoat SPX 2. Phillips TL80 3. Osram Sylvania Octron 800XP PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide 100 hour initial burn in for all fluorescent lamps connected to dimmers or daylight sensors. Refer to Section 26 09 24: “Daylight Sensors”. B. Provide all hangers, rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, etc. for proper and safe fixture installation. Install all fixtures in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices” for approved supporting methods. C. Provide fixtures complete with all auxiliaries required for proper, safe and distortion free installation in the various ceiling constructions in which they appear. Coordinate ceiling types with the Architectural drawings and provide compatible fixtures. D. Provide felt or fiberglass gaskets on all incandescent lighting fixtures where necessary to prevent light leakage at the ceiling line. E. Where master/slave or inboard/outboard switching is indicated, provide tandem-wired ballasts between light fixtures as required by the Minnesota Energy Code.
3.2
WIRING A. Wire all recessed lay-in fixtures with 6 feet of flexible metal conduit with Type "THHN/THWN" wire to the outlet box. Provide grounding type connectors for all conduit and cable. B. Provide outlet boxes adjacent to each recessed fixture outlet in suspended ceilings to permit each fixture to be adjusted to fit ceiling pattern and to permit "Feed Through" wiring. C. Provide conduit for all wiring to parking lot fixtures.
3.3
QUALITY CONTROL A. At the time of substantial completion, all fixtures must be installed and lamped with new lamps. Install all fixtures complete with lenses, diffusers, reflectors, louvers and other required accessories. Furnish a minimum of one case of replacement lamps for each type and size lamp used. Deliver replacement stock to the Owner’s storage space as directed by the Owner. B. Replace any damaged reflectors, diffusers, louvers or other components at no expense to the Owner. C. Clean all fixtures free of dust, finger prints, paint, etc.. D. Perform aiming and adjustment of all lighting fixtures in accordance with instructions issued by the Engineer. Adjust all directional type fixtures (interior and exterior) after dark under the direction of the Architect, Engineer, and/or Owner. E. Replace all defective ballasts within the guarantee period at no cost to the Owner.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.4
LIGHTING REBATE PROGRAM A. Apply the Utility energy lighting rebate to this project. Secure on behalf of the Owner the maximum rebate. Include all negotiations and substantiation required.
3.5
SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts (NOT to be used during the warranty period, where applicable to the project): 1. Two cases of 32 watt T8 lamps (60 lamps total) 2. (10) Compact fluorescent lamps of each size specified. 3. (5) 4-Lamp T8 ballasts 4. (5) 3-Lamp T8 ballasts 5. (5) 2-Lamp T8 ballasts B. Turn spare parts over to Owner at the completion of the project. Provide written documentation signed by the Owner that the spare parts were turned over at the completion of the project. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 52 00 EMERGENCY LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 19: 600 Volt Conductors and Cables D. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices E. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fitting and Boxes F. Section 26 51 13: Lighting G. Section 26 53 00: Exit Signs H. Emergency Systems (NEC Article 700) I. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
UNIT BATTERY EQUIPMENT A. Provide unit battery equipment that adhere to the following minimum specifications: 1. 120 and 277 volt operation. 2. UL 924 listed. 3. 6 or 12 volt, long life, maintenance-free, [nickel cadmium] [lead calcium] type batteries. 4. Batteries sized to illuminate all lamps for 90 minutes. 5. Low voltage battery protection to prevent deep battery discharge during extended outages. 6. Brown out sensing to activate unit when line voltage drops below 80%. 7. Solid state load transfer relay. 8. Integral internal solid state charger. 9. Provide pilot light and test switch. [Self-testing diagnostics] 10. Designed to be wall and/or ceiling mountable. 11. Interior lamps/heads a. Thermoplastic heads with fully adjustable swivel, rotation and tilt.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 52 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
b. Interior lamps: Provide a minimum of 1.0 footcandle along the path of egress at the floor, with units spaced 40’-0” on center at 7’-6” mounting height above finished floor (refer to drawings for actual mounting heights): 1) Twin 8-watt tungsten halogen, sealed beam, PAR36 lamps OR. 2) Twin 5-watt, sealed beam MR-16 lamps. 12. Exterior lamps/heads a. UL wet label listed. b. Cast metal or milled housing and cast mounting brackets and boxes. c. Twin MR-16 flood lamps, 20 watts each, 12 volt operation. B. Performance 1. Provide emergency lighting to illuminate the egress corridors and other required areas along the or to the path of egress. Refer to the light fixture schedule on the drawings for types. 2. Provide an intensity of not less than 1.0 footcandle at the floor level along the path of egress. C. Approved manufacturers 1. Refer to the Light Fixture Schedule PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
UNIT BATTERY EQUIPMENT A. Install a complete and operational emergency lighting system in accordance with NEC article 700 and Chapter 5 of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. B. Install equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer. discrepancies.
Notify the Engineer of any
C. Support battery units directly from building structural members. Mount units to walls wherever possible. D. Route raceway down from ceiling to wall mounted devices. Minimize the use of exposed raceway routed through finished spaces. E. Connect emergency lights to the unswitched lighting branch circuit in the area served by the unit equipment. F. Install remote emergency lights where indicated. Provide wiring between the remote heads and the battery packs to maintain UL listing of system. G. Adjust emergency fixture heads for maximum effectiveness or as directed by the Engineer. 3.2
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one (1) year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period. B. Provide this additional manufacturers warranties:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 52 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Unit Battery Equipment: Provide 3 year warranty for NiCd battery type units with 5 year pro-rated warranty on NiCd batteries. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 52 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 26 53 00 EXIT SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 19: 600 Volt Conductors and Cables D. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices E. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fitting and Boxes F. Section 26 51 13: Lighting G. Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting H. Emergency Systems (NEC Article 700) I. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
EXIT SIGNS A. Provide exit signs that adhere to the following minimum specifications: 1. 120 and 277 volt operation. 2. Multiple LED lamp source. 3. NFPA 101 and EPA/DEP Energy Star Compliant. 4. Green or red stenciled letters (refer to light fixture schedule) 5. Black or white housing (refer to light fixture schedule) 6. Brushed aluminum face (refer to light fixture schedule) 7. Cast aluminum housing, snap together design. 8. Universal mounting: right side (canopy), left side (canopy), top (canopy) and back. 9. Knockouts for chevrons, right and left. 10. Snap-in wiring connections to allow replacement of components without removing housing. B. For exit signs with battery back-up, provide the following additional minimum specifications: 1. Nickel cadmium batteries sized to provide 2 hours backup. 2. Integral solid state battery charger.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 53 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Low battery voltage protection 4. Provide pilot light and test switch. [Self-testing diagnostics] 5. AC “ON” indicator 6. UL 924 listed C. Approved Manufacturers 1. Refer to the light fixture schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation of exit signs, contact the Building Official and Fire Marshal to arrange a walk-through to discuss exit sign placement, approximately at the mid-point of construction. B. Provide exit signs at each exit and along the egress path. C. Mount exit signs to walls wherever possible. Where exit signs are shown to be installed to a lay-in ceiling, provide additional support from the building structure. Refer to Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices for supporting requirements. D. Connect exit signs to an unswitched lighting circuit. Circuit can be shared with unit battery equipment provided under Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting. Provide handle lock on breaker. E. Connect exist signs to life safety circuit fed from the emergency generator. Provide handle lock on breaker.
3.2
VANDAL GUARDS A. Securely mount guards to structure using standard hardware with dedicated anchors. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices”. B. Provide a minimum of four anchors (1 per corner), or additional if recommended by the guard manufacturer.
3.3
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period. B. Provide these additional manufacturers warranties: 1. Provide a lifetime warranty on exit sign LED’s. 2. Provide 5 year warranty on the exit sign unit and electronics. 3. Provide 10 year pro-rated warranty on exit sign batteries. 4. Provide lifetime warranty on vandal wire guards. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 53 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 27 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. This section (27 01 00) is subject to all of the applicable provisions of the above-indicated sections. B. ASTM-E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
1.2
SCOPE A. The Provisions of this Section of the Specifications apply to all Sections of Division 27. B. All Conduit and sleeves are to be installed by Division 27 Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. Communications contractor is responsible for providing sleeves through fire rated walls if required but not shown on plans. D. Communications contractor will determine prior to bidding what services are to require a licensed electrician and is responsible to include the cost of any electrical work under the base bid for Division 27.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit material list in accordance with Section 27 01 00, describing all material furnished under Part 2 of this Specification. B. Submit shop drawings for materials listed in Part 2 of this specification in accordance with the requirements of Section 27 01 00.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide new, first quality material for all products specified. Do not reuse materials unless indicated or approved by the Engineer. B. Comply with the NEC as applicable to the construction and installation of equipment specified in this section. C. Provide equipment specified in this section that has been listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. D. Comply with ANSI as applicable to equipment specified in this section. E. Comply with NEMA as applicable to equipment specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Surface metal raceway and fittings. Provide Wiremold V500 one-piece steel surface metal raceway, and fittings to conceal cabling as required on existing walls. Provide Wiremold V5744S deep switch box for volume controls.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. B. Run exposed conduit in a neat, workmanlike manner parallel to the building lines, tight to the wall and ceiling surfaces, and firmly support with conduit clamps or hangers. Provide two (2) hole mounting straps, minimum three (3) feet on center, for all surface conduit mounted on walls less than six (6) feet above finished floor. C. Do not run conduits in columns except to feed column-mounted devices. Do not route conduit through structural slabs, beams, or columns, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. D. Place conduits at least 8" away from all hot piping and surfaces including domestic hot water lines. E. Do not run conduit on or directly in front of access doors, removable panels, equipment removal spaces, control devices or other spaces necessary for normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. F. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. G. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection where conduits cross seismic, control and expansion joints. Avoid crossing expansion joints where possible. H. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. Cap or plug ends of conduits that are to remain empty and make watertight. Clean and swab conduits prior to pulling in conductors. I. Provide nylon pull string in all empty conduits with a stamped plastic label indicating future use. J. Provide watertight seal, approved by the Architect, for all roof penetrations. K. Provide airtight seals for all raceway penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to conduit penetrating vapor barriers. L. Seal all conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. M. Seal all conduits where they pass through exterior walls and where they enter exterior fixtures. N. Seal all conduits where temperature differential between adjacent spaces is greater than 30 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.2
SLEEVES A. Provide all sleeves through partitions as required to route cabling from interior rooms to the existing cable tray system. Provide EMT conduit sleeves, bushed on each end. B. Caulk spaces between pipe and floor sleeves inside the building with a waterproof caulking material. C. Seal all sleeved penetrations with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal.
3.3
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide UL listed fire stopping around all sleeves.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Provide removable pillow “bag” type expanding fire stopping material at each penetration of the cable tray through a fire rated partition, and at each raceway not full to capacity. This will allow additional cables to be installed in the future. C. Seal all sleeves or conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. D. Perform fire stopping after all cabling has been installed. E. Provide firestopping pillows at cable entrance points to headend rooms located above the doorway as required to fill existing cable pathways. 3.4
WIRING A. Examine all wire before installation. Do not use any wire with insulation that is damaged in any way. B. Do not pull wire into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time. C. Maximum number of conductors in raceways and boxes shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Neatly install wiring inside cable tray, equipment, and panels. D. Provide airtight seals for all wiring penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to wiring penetrating vapor barriers. Provide plenum rated cable, where indicated on the drawings or specified herein, for all cable routed in air plenums.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. Adjust and leave in proper operating condition. B. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 27 01 05 SUBMITTALS AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Technology cabling work description. a. Work consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of technology work shown in the Contract Documents and specified in Division 27. b. Include all parts and labor that are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include nuts, bolts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, fittings, etc. c. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. d. Contractor is responsible for requesting any inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. e. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. f. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities as required. B. Related Sections: 1. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on Related Sections, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions.
1.2
REFERENCES A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code State and Local Electrical Codes
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
Uniform Building Codes State and Local Building Codes and Ordinances State Industrial Commission Regulations State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Uniform Mechanical Codes Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations Americans with Disabilities Act Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards NFPA 101 Life Safety Code State Energy Code D. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: ADA: AIA: AIA: ANSI: ASTM: CCITT: FCC: EIA: EPA: FM: IEEE: IES: ICEA: ITU: ITU-T: NBS: NEMA: NFPA: NSC: RUS: TIA: UL: 1.3
Americans with Disabilities Act American Insurance Association American Institute of Engineers American National Standards Institute American Society of Testing and Materials International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee Federal Communications Commission Electronic Industries Association Environmental Protection Agency Factory Mutual Insurance Association Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America International Cable Engineers Association International Telecommunications Union International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications National Bureau of Standards National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association National Safety Council Rural Utilities Services Telecommunications Industry Association Underwriter's Laboratories
DEFINITIONS A. The terms defined below apply to all work included in Division 27. 1. Furnish - to obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, and deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation and guarantee. 2. Install - to receive at the job site, store, set in place, connect, and place in operation. 3. Provide - to furnish and install. 4. Connect - to bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. 5. Conduit - includes, in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers and other supports and accessories related to such conduit.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Concealed - hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces or buried. 7. Exposed - neither installed underground nor concealed as defined above. 8. Building structure or building structural members - consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists (top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking, joist bridging and bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for the purpose of support. B. The drawing and specifications constitute the Contract Documents. Any item noted in the specification or shown on the drawings is included in the Contract Documents. C. All details and drawings are diagrammatic, unless specifically noted. Field verify all dimensions and notify the Engineer of any conflicts of discrepancies, in writing, prior to installation. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use unspecified items, to the Engineer, no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Requests must be submitted by a bidding Contractor only. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using accepted substitutions. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other contractors and Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not specified or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, which are proposed to work on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. Submit list on form included at the end of this section. 2. Acceptance of items on the list is considered final, unless the Engineer requires additional information or submissions. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. 2. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or requested by the Engineer. a. 27 00 00 – Materials b. 27 00 00 – Labor D. Shop Drawings and Samples
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
1. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacture, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Shop drawings will be submitted with separately engineered riser/wiring/connection oneline diagrams and equipment elevations drawings for each facility. 5. Submit a minimum of Six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer
- One (1) copy.
b. District
- One (1) copy.
c. Contractor
- Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals).
6. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 7. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer, with one of the following actions checked on the submittal stamp: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete re-submittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 8. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 9. Submit shop drawings, bound separately by section, for the following equipment: Section 27 13 00
Description TECHNOLOGY CABLING SYSTEM
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
10. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the re-submittal process. E. CADD Drawing Files: 1. The technology CADD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. service for use solely with respect to this Project. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. 2. Do not dispose of any PCB containing materials. Disposal of all PCB containing materials will be the responsibility of the Owner.
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 27 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the existing Architectural and Structural drawings to be provided by Owner. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts that cannot be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. 2. Replacement work required due to a lack of coordination must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, the Engineer may request minor changes and adjustments to the installation. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either on is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the drawings and specifications. 1.7
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to General Conditions and Requirements.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Engineer. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately corrected by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. This includes damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for.
PART 3 EXECUTION 2.1
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled installers. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current ANSI/EIA/TIA standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the specifications, before or after installation. B. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of electrical equipment and devices.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for electrical raceway. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work with new tile. C. Painting: 1. Paint all new raceway systems in exposed finished areas (e.g. gymnasiums, lunch rooms, corridors, etc.) to match existing finish in accordance with Section 09900. D. Record Drawings: 1. Provide record drawings in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. Provide complete AutoCAD-generated plans saved on CD. 2. As work progresses, in a neat and legible manner, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings as follows: a. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. b. Record exact location and elevation of underground feeders and empty conduit including changes in direction by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. c. Record routing of concealed and exposed conduit and cable tray, where it varies from the Contract Documents. d. Contractor may purchase copies of the electrical drawings from the Engineer for $15.00 per sheet. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used for recording the above information only. e. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if record drawings are not being maintained. 3. Submit record drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 2.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing - Refer to Sections: 1. 27 13 00 B. Final Inspection: 1. A final inspection of the electrical systems will be required before the Contract can be closed out. Request a final inspection by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule an inspection and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. If the Engineer is requested to make a final inspection by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that inspection, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Inspection.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2.3
CLEAN UP A. The contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean electrical equipment and remove temporary identification. In case of dispute the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. B. After tests have been made and accepted clean light fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by the Contractor, leaving the entire work area in a clean and complete working order.
2.4
DEMONSTRATION A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: a. Provide two (2) of Operating and Maintenance manuals for Sections <27 00 00>. Operating and Maintenance manuals are to be consolidated for all facilities receiving a new system. Submit to the Engineer for review and forwarding to the Owner. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1) Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriately marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2) Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3) Operating instruction for equipment. 4) Wiring and installation instructions for equipment 5) Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6) Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment 7) Equipment parts list 8) Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required 9) Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers 10)Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers 11)Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers 12)Refer to individual Sections in Division 27 for additional requirements 13)Test reports 14)Record Drawings
2.5
PROTECTION A. Cover openings and equipment, where set, to prevent obstruction to conduits, breakage, misuse, or disfigurement of equipment. Cover openings in equipment immediately upon uncrating or receipt at the job site and keep covered until permanent connection is made.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to electrical equipment or materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Keep all equipment clean materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. C. If a portion of the project is to be occupied by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project make arrangements with the Owner to transfer responsibilities for protection and housekeeping. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 27 13 00 TECHNOLOGY CABLING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Renovations at the Farmington Elementary requires installation of a new voice, data and video Category 6 horizontal distribution cabling and voice/data backbone systems as indicated on plans or specified herein. B. Provide all labor and materials necessary for a fully functional voice, data and video cabling horizontal distribution system as indicated on plans or specified elsewhere herein. C. Scheduling: The low voltage communications subcontractor is responsible for coordinating work with the General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Architect and Engineer.
1.2
REFERENCES A. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes B. Section 26 05 34: Technology Raceway System C. Sections 27 01 00 and 27 01 05 and all references contained therein form a part of this section of the specifications.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS A. Install the system in conformance to the current versions of the following standards: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (April 2000) 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and spaces (June 2001)
5. ANSI/ TIA/EIA-606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings (February 1993) 6. ANSI/ TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (August 1994) 7. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology-General Cabling Practices 8. ASTM-E 814/UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops 9. ASTM-E 119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 10. IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.4, IEEE 802.5, IEEE 802.6 and IEEE 802.12 (as applicable) B. BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) C. Federal Communications Commission D. Underwriters Laboratories Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
E. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA-70, (Especially Articles 250, 770 and 800) F. Uniform Building Code G. Uniform Fire Code H. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a system consisting of voice, data, and video cabling and devices as described herein and as shown on the plans including all outlet devices and cover plates, terminations, cabling, cable support, punch down blocks, patch panels, equipment racks, grounding, setup, labeling, testing, certification, etc. B. Provide a system that meets and exceeds the requirements of the following local area network standards: 1. IEEE 802.3 (10BaseT) 2. IEEE 802.5 (16Mbps Token Ring Networks) 3. 100Mbs TP-PMD 4. 100BaseT 5. 1000BaseT 6. 550 MHz Broadband 7. 155Mbps and 622 Mbps ATM C. Provide Category 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable for data cabling, factory tested to 350 MHz. D. Provide testing and certification by the manufacturers of the equipment as an installed system that meets Category 6 standards for structured voice, data and video cabling systems, including the terminations and outlet devices.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide an installer who is a Low Voltage/Power Limited Contractor trained in the installation of voice and extended performance data grade cable and equipment. Provide certificates of training for Voice and Data cabling per TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA/EIA-568B.3, for supervisors of installation personnel from a manufacturer of the equipment listed or an independent training company. Include a letter describing training program in the shop drawing submittals. B. Qualification of the Installer: 1. Installer must have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified system required by the contractor. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications will be rejected. Provide services of a technician certified by the system equipment manufacturer to supervise installation, adjustments and tests of the system. 2. Before commencing work, submit data showing that the contractor/subcontractor has successfully installed low voltage systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the names, locations, and the contact name and telephone number of at least four (4) similar installations. Specify type and design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has performed satisfactorily for the preceding eighteen (18) months.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. The contractor installing the structured cabling shall have a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) – a designation obtained form Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI®) functioning as project manager to oversee the communications cabling installation. The Contractor’s RCDD/project manager shall complete the following minimum tasks: a. Review and submit Contractor’s shop drawings. b. Conduct, as a minimum, bi-weekly site visits to review the installation and progress of the structured cabling during construction; attend construction meetings and coordinate work with other trades and construction schedule as required by the General Contractor. c. Review and sign completed punch-list items. d. Review and submit Contractor’s as-built documentation. 4. Provide proof of at least 25% BICSI Certified Installers in their employ, or participation in an approved low-voltage apprenticeship program. 5. Provide a copy of the contractors Minnesota Alarm and Communication or Power Limited Contractors license. a. One licensed power limited technician is required for every 3 unlicensed persons assigned to the work. C. Manufacturer’s Representative 1. Provide the services of a representative or technician, licensed in the State of Minnesota, from the manufacturer of the systems, or a factory trained technician of the manufacturer of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. Supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. Provide the required instruction to the Owner’s personnel in the system operation and maintenance. 1.6
SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete shop-drawing package of the system. B. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. C. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binders with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. D. Provide a letter describing extended performance data cabling installation training program. E. Submit 1/8” scale reproducible sepia floor plans showing all rooms, stairways, corridors, and horizontal exits. Include all telephone and data outlet locations. Indicate all wire sizes and types, wire counts, conduit sizes and proposed routing through the building. F. Submit the following riser/wiring/connection diagrams: 1. Single line riser drawing indicating all system components and the vertical wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Indicate the cable routing of each cable, and the approximate anticipated length of each cable. G. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. H. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. I. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. J. Submit physical drawings of components. K. Submit a scaled drawing of each communications closet, indicating all components including equipment racks, patch panels, termination blocks, all wiring, cable management, etc. Coordinate placement of devices with other systems that share the communications closet. L. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review M. Submit product data sheets for the test equipment used, and the training certificates for the equipment. N. Submit manufacturer’s factory test data for the Category 6 cable. Perform the test using swept frequency testing per EIA/TIA 568A. Submit the test results in the following table: Frequency (MHz) .772 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 155 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 Frequency (MHz) .772 1
Attenuation (Max) dB/100m
NEXT (dB/100m)
ELFEXT (Max) dB/100m
PS-ELFEXT (dB/100m)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
ACR (dB/100m)
27 13 00 -4
PS-NEXT (dB/100m)
PS-ACR (dB/100m)
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 155 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. One manufacturer’s brand will be used for each component type throughout the building.
2.2
HORIZONTAL CABLING A. Provide voice and data cabling with the following minimum specifications: 1. Provide plenum rated cable 2. Provide blue colored jacket for all data cabling and white colored jacket for all voice cabling 3. 23 AWG copper, 4-pair, 100 ohm, unshielded twisted pairs 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant 5. Maximum Attenuation:
33dB
@ 250MHz
6. Minimum NEXT:
38.3dB @ 250 MHz
7. Minimum ACR:
5.3dB
8. Minimum PSNEXT:
36.3dB @ 250 MHz
@ 250MHz
9. Minimum ELFEXT (worst pair): 19.8 dB @ 250 MHz 10. Minimum PSELFEXT:
16.8 dB @ 250 MHz
11. Minimum PS-ACR:
3.3 Db @ 250 MHz
12. Maximum Return Loss:
17.3dB @ 250 MHz
13. Maximum Propagation Delay:
538 ns/100 m
14. Maximum Delay Skew:
45 ns/100 m
15. Maximum Outside Diameter:
0.23 in (5.8 mm)
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hitachi, (p/n: 38891-8BL Blue or 38891-8WH White) 2. Superior Essex, CommScope/Uniprise, Mohawk/CDT or General Cable equals. 2.3
MODULAR JACKS A. Provide telephone (desk) and data outlet devices with the following specifications: 1. Plastic modular 8 pin, 8-conductor outlet jack with insulation displacement connectors (IDC) 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant (extended performance) 3. T568B pin/pair wire map 4. Provide the following color scheme for outlet devices: a. Voice Modular Jacks: White b. Data Modular Jacks: Blue 5. Approved manufacturers: a. Hubbell (Voice: p/n HXJ6OW; Data: p/n HXJ6B) b. CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals B. Provide wall telephone outlet devices with the following specifications: 1. Stainless steel plate with mounting posts for mounting telephone 2. Integral modular 6-pin jack with insulation displacement connectors 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant 4. Approved manufacturers: a. Hubbell (p/n P630SR1GJ6) b. Leviton, CommScope/Uniprise, Panduit, or pre-approved equals
2.4
MODULAR MULTIMEDIA JACKS A. Provide the outlet devices as shown on plans: 1. F-Type Modules:
Female/Female snap-in connectors.
2. RCA Modules:
110 Punch down snap-in audio connectors.
3. S-Video Modules:
110 Punch down snap-in connectors.
4. Provide the following color scheme for outlet devices: a. F-Type Couplers:
White
b. RCA Connectors:
Black Housing, Insulators: Red (Left)/White (Right)
c. S-Video Connectors: Black B. Provide category 6 cables on all IDC/110 RCA or S-Video type connectors wherever called out on plans or elsewhere within the division 16 specification. C. Approved manufacturers:
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
a. Hubbell (F-Type: p/n SFFX; RCA: p/n SFRC110R & p/n SFRC110W; S-Video: p/n SFSV110BK) b. CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals 2.5
OUTLET COVERPLATES A. Provide stainless steel cover plates to match the style and material of the cover plates described in Section 16050 for the following technology outlet devices: 1. Desk telephone outlets 2. Wall telephone outlets 3. Voice/Data outlets 4. Fiber optic data outlets 5. Combination Voice, Data and/or TV outlets 6. Television outlets 7. Multimedia, project and high/low television outlets 8. Future outlets (Provide blank cover plate) 9. Other outlets as shown on detail sheets B. Provide 3-gang inserts with technology devices indicated on detail drawings in all RFB9 floor boxes. C. Provide torx head screws with center pin reject for outlet box plates called out on the plans to be “tamperproof”. D. Provide stainless steel faceplates with label windows, or engraved, black in-filled stainless steel cover plates; for the purpose of identifying each outlet in the cable management software program described elsewhere herein. E. Provide stainless steel faceplates of the same manufacturer as the connectivity hardware. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell: (p/n: SSFL11,SSFL12,SSFL13,SSFL14) | (X indicates 1, 2, 3, 4 port etc.) 2. Hubbell, Leviton, Panduit, or pre-approved equal
2.6
WORKSTATION CABLES A. Provide workstation and telephone cables (for use between the workstation/telephones and voice/data wall outlets) with the following specifications: 1. Standard non-plenum rated jacket 2. 24 AWG, 4 pair, unshielded twisted pairs 3. 8-pin, 8-conductor factory terminated terminations at each end. 4. T568B pin/pair assignment 5. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 6 compliant, and factory tested prior to shipping. 6. Adheres to the same specifications as the voice cables specified above. 7. UL listed.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
8. Provide an equal distribution of 6-foot long and 10 foot long data patch cables. 9. Provide one cable per each voice and data drop, plus an additional 10% spare of each length. Turn cables over to Owner. 10. Approved Manufacturer: Provide cables from the same manufacturer as the connectivity hardware. 11. Hubbell (p/n PCX6GY06, PCX6GY10) 2.7
TERMINATION BLOCKS A. Provide 4-pair type 110 IDC blocks mounted to the backboards for terminating voice pairs. Provide sufficient blocks to terminate each voice cable, plus 25% spare blocks for future terminations. B. Provide sufficient additional 110 blocks for cross-connecting voice pairs, plus 25% spare blocks for future cross-connect pairs. C. Provide the following color scheme for the blocks: 1. Demarcation point (MPOP)
Orange
2. Network Connections
Green
3. Common Equipment (PBX, Host, LANs, MUX)
Purple
D. Provide the following cable management equipment: Lucent Technologies 188 Backboards with retainers with 110 blocks included: Hubbell: (p/n 6110WMK) E. Approved manufacturers: F. CommScope/Uniprise, Hubbell, Panduit, Leviton, Lucent, or Siemon equals. 2.8
CABLE MANAGEMENT HARDWARE A. Provide cable supports with the following specifications: 1. Designed to support Category 6 cables without compressing or kinking cables 2. Approved manufacturers a. Caddy CAT 21 and CAT32 b. B-Line BCH21 and BCH32 c. Mono-Systems H133A and H664A d. Pre-approved equal. B. Provide wire management at each communication closet backboard and equipment rack or cabinets consisting of at least the following components: 1. 1RU (1.75”) horizontal duct cable management (Hubbell: p/n HC119CE3H) mounted on front rails between modular patch panels at all communications relay racks, 4-post server racks and wall mounted cabinets. 2. 2RU (3.5”) horizontal duct cable management (Hubbell: p/n HC219CE3N) mounted on front rails between patch panels at all communications relay racks, 4-post server racks and wall mounted cabinets. 3. 3.25”W C-Channel Vertical Cable management (Hubbell: p/n VS76) attached to each side of equipment racks (either relay or 4-post server racks) or as shown on detail drawings.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Horizontal cable supports and organizers as required at the rear of all modular patch panels. 5. Vertical cable supports and organizers on each side of each equipment rack 6. Velcro fastening 7. Provide cable management that is the same as manufacturer of equipment cabinets. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. CPI/Chatsworth, Hubbell, Leviton, Panduit, CommScope/Uniprise, or Pre-approved equals. 2.9
CABLE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. Provide cable management software compatible with network operating software and the cable testing results produced by the testing equipment. Provide system that identifies the following: 1. Station type 2. Test data from TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 test procedures for basic link and channel testing. 3. Cable type, tested performance and length of cable. 4. Location of outlet and termination point. 5. Connection at each communications closet. 6. Remarks, testing, faults, etc. B. The cable management software will be the product of the testing equipment used for link certification.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide a system installed in accordance to these specifications, specifications of agencies listed in references and the manufacturer. B. Install terminal blocks vertically plumb and securely fastened to the backboards. Route station cables in brackets, troughs and wire ways specifically designed for category 6 applications (e.g. “J” hooks) and fasten cables securely to prevent strain at the terminations. C. Install cables without violating the minimum bend radius (static and installation) recommended by the cable manufacturer. D. Utilize existing and new cable tray as shown on overall plan sheets E0.2 and E0.3 for routing of new technology cabling to new and existing technology rooms. E. Support all cable at 48” to 60” intervals using the category 6 “J” hooks specified elsewhere herein. Adhere to the manufacturer’s maximum fill for the cable support hardware. F. Maintain at least a 12” spacing from fluorescent light fixtures and other EMI/RFI noise sources. G. Terminate all data cables at patch panels modular jack IDC’s in the equipment rack in each communications closet. H. Terminate all voice cables at 110 blocks in the communications closets.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
I. Terminate all optical fiber cables at ceramic SC connectors in the fiber optic termination kit at each communications closet. J. Unless noted otherwise, route each horizontal voice, and data cable to the nearest communications closet on the same floor of the building. Determine shortest routing from outlet device to communications closet prior to installation. K. Provide 10 feet of cable slack at each communications closets to allow future reconfiguration of the closets. Provide wire management to organize the slack. L. Provide horizontal and vertical cable management hardware as shown on plan details and as specified elsewhere herein. M. Provide following additional connections at C3 Outlets shown on plans: 1. Audio left RCA connectors between each projector technology ceiling outlet and C3 outlets wherever shown on plans using category 6 cable and snap-in IDC modules to terminate. 2. Audio right RCA connectors between each projector technology ceiling outlet and C3 outlets using category 6 cable and snap-in IDC modules to terminate N. Refer to Section 16741 for grounding requirements at each communications closet. O. Coordinate placement of devices with other systems that share the communications rooms (i.e. house phone system, MATV system, Owner LAN equipment, etc.). P. Secure all cable routed to the equipment rack, patch panels, punch down blocks, etc, utilizing the cable management hardware. 3.2
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification of the following components and locations, as outlined in EIA/TIA-606: 1. Each end of each horizontal and backbone cable 2. Each individual outlet at the workstation 3. Each individual outlet at the patch panel or termination block 4. Each cross connect termination B. Provide a permanent labeling method for each component, from PC-based software specifically designed to label the components per EIA/TIA-606. Provide room identification tags based on the final room number system provided by the Owner. 1. Provide self-adhesive black lettering on white substrate. 2. Provide a cable labeling system for each cable so designed for the purpose of labeling cables. C. Approved labeling manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady LabelMark WIN 2. Panduit Pan-Mark for Windows 3. Pre-approved equal
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3.3
COPPER CABLE TESTING A. All cables will be tested to the category indicated by the manufacturer on the jacket, and the cable specified herein for voice and data locations is category 6. The Contractor is responsible to provide testing according to the most current set of standards approved at time testing is conducted. B. Test 100% of the copper cable pairs as described in bulletin TIA/EIA-568-B.1 AND TIA/EIA568-B.2 up to 250 MHz. Record the results of the test with cable identification and provide as part of the as-built drawings and cable management software. Any cable that fails will be reterminated and retested. If the cable does not retest within specs after re-terminating, replace and retest the cable. C. Record test data records to the cable management software database. Database will be loaded with structured cabling information for each drop, room closet, general path, cable lengths and cross-connects. Provide data downloaded from the testing equipment to a PC, for all test data described below. D. Perform the following tests, as defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 AND TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1. Basic link testing which includes the horizontal cabling, outlets and connectors on both ends, and 2 meters of cabling at each end. 2. Wire Map test to verify the proper pin out at each end, plus continuity, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs, etc. 3. Physical Length, using the numbering on the cable. “Electrical” length based on propagation delay measurements is not acceptable. 4. Attenuation for the channel and basic link. 5. NEXT (worst pair-to-pair) for the channel and basic link, at both ends. 6. Return Loss 7. ELFNEXT 8. Propagation Delay 9. Delay Skew E. Perform testing using one of the following testers: 1. Agilent Scope 350 2. Wavetek LT8600 3. Fluke DSP-4000 4. Microtest OMNI-Scanner2 5. Approved equal (submit data sheets and training certificate as part of the shop drawings).
3.4
WARRANTY A. Provide a 15-year manufacturer’s warrantee for the system for proper operation of any communications protocol designed to operate over the specified cabling system. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Fire Alarm System B. Interface to HVAC Systems C. Interface to Kitchen Equipment under exhaust hood
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide modifications to, and extensions of, the existing intelligent addressable fire alarm systems consisting of the addition of new duct-smoke detectors and control modules indicated on the drawings and the associated modifications to the existing system to support the new devices, including but not limited to: communications cards, indicating zone cards, power supplies and backup batteries, communication devices, raceway system, boxes, wiring, grounding and the associated labor, programming and testing.
1.3
SYSTEM OPERATION A. Provide an adjustable alarm verification feature (as allowed in NFPA 72) to reduce the number of false alarms. Provide a system with programmable acknowledge time delay and reset time periods, within the allowable limits set by UL for the system. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute, the system shall resume normal operation. The alarm verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating device shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by zone or addressable point. Each time a detector initiates an alarm verification operation, it shall be recorded into the alarm verification historical log. B. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times (tally) a zone, or addressable point, has gone into a verification mode. Should this smoke verification tally reach a pre-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur. C. Alarm verification zones shall be able to be divided into eight separate groups whereby only verification zones from the same group will confirm the first activation and cause the alarm sequence to occur. D. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel has determined that an alarm condition exists within the building, and the alarm has been verified: 1. Sound the alarm notification signal at the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the device in alarm at the main control panel and each remote annunciator.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -1
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
3. Activate all audible and visual indicating devices in the associated indicating zone within the building. Activate all audible alarm indicating devices in a synchronous temporal pattern and all visual indicating devices in a one (1) hertz synchronous flash pattern until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel or remote annunciator. 4. Close the domestic water shutoff solenoids at the sprinkler service(s) if water flow is detected by any sprinkler flow switch. 5. Release all self closing and automatically closing devices powered by the fire alarm system within the building. 6. Shut off any monitored HVAC system if smoke is detected by the associated HVAC unit duct detector. 7. Initiate the communication/modem device to transmit the point-specific information to the off-site monitoring station. 8. Recall the elevator cab if any elevator lobby, elevator equipment room, or top of hoistway smoke detector goes into alarm according to the following sequence: a. If the alarmed detector is in the elevator equipment room, top of hoistway, or in the elevator lobby on any floor other than the main level of egress, the elevator cab shall be recalled to the main level of egress. b. If the alarmed detector is in the elevator lobby on the main egress level, the elevator cab shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. 9. Store the event in the history log. E. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel has determined that a trouble condition exists within the building: 1. Sound the trouble notification signal in the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the device in trouble at the main control panel and each remote annunciator. 3. Store the event in the history log. F. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel determined that a supervisory condition exists within the building: 1. Sound the trouble notification signal in the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the supervisory signal at the main control panel and each remote annunciator. 3. Store the event in the history log. G. Provide an interface to the building sprinkler system siamese connection indicating device on a separate indicating circuit. Provide alarm indication at the indicating circuit whenever waterflow is detected. Provide a separate keyswitch at the main control panel to silence the indicating device. H. If sprinkler waterflow is detected by the kitchen hood waterflow switch, the system shall shutoff electric power to the following: 1. Electric appliances located under the hood.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -2
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. The exhaust fans serving the hood. 3. The electric gas solenoid valve. A general building alarm shall not initiate equipment shutoff. I. The following system conditions shall initiate the communicator to transmit the point-specific information to the remote monitoring location: 1. Sprinkler waterflow alarm. 2. Sprinkler valve position switch supervisory alarm. 3. Any fire pump supervisory, trouble or alarm condition. 4. Any fire alarm condition initiated by a manual pull station. 5. Any verified automatic detector alarm. J. The following system conditions shall not initiate the communicator to transmit the alarm information to the remote monitoring location: 1. Smoke duct detectors required for HVAC unit shutdown. 2. Detectors required for the automatic release of fire doors. 3. Detectors required for the automatic release of combination fire/smoke dampers. 4. Detectors located within each dwelling unit. 5. Detectors used for elevator recall. 6. Detectors used for elevator power shutoff. 7. Detectors used for kitchen equipment power shutoff. K. Automatic detectors at the following locations shall initiate a trouble signal, not a general alarm: 1. Smoke duct detectors required for HVAC unit shutdown. 2. Detectors required for the automatic closure of fire doors and fire shutters. 3. Detectors required for the automatic closure of fire/smoke dampers. 4. Detectors located in elevator lobbies and machine rooms required for the recall of elevators. L. Provide green LED and the word NORMAL on the LCD display if the system is in its normal operating mode, and no alarms or faults exist in the system. M. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the alarm indicating appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should a true alarm occur, alarm functions would occur as described previously. N. The actuation of the "enable walk test" program at the control panel shall activate the "Walk Test" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed. 2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. 3. The control panel shall show trouble condition. 4. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to code a number of pulses to match the zone number. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -3
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. 6. Any momentary opening of an initiating or indicating appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating a trouble condition. 7. The system shall have the capacity of 8 distinctive walk test groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. O. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. Photoelectric smoke detector smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0.2% of either limit of the UL window (0.2% to 4.0%) to compensate for any environment. P. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined level, a "DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. For scheduling of maintenance, the control panel shall be able to generate an "ALMOST DIRTY" indication for any sensor approaching a "DIRTY" trouble condition. This report shall generate a list of sensor approaching a "DIRTY" trouble condition. This report shall generate a list of sensors requiring cleaning in advance of any trouble indication. Q. The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel. R. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each sensor: 1. Primary status 2. Device type 3. Present average value 4. Present sensitivity selected 5. Peak detection values 6. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) S. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following for each sensor: 1. Clear peak detection values 2. Enable or disable the point 3. Clear verification tally 4. Establish alarm sensitivity Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -4
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
5. Control a sensor's relay driver output T. It shall be possible to program the control panel to automatically change the sensitivity settings of each sensor based on time-of-day and day-of-week. There shall be five (5) sensitivity settings available for each sensor. U. The control panel shall have the capability of being programmed for a pre-alarm or two-stage function. This function allows an indication to occur when, for example, a 3% sensor reaches a threshold of 1.5% smoke obscuration. V. Adjust the sensitivity of the elevator lobby smoke detectors to maximum sensitivity. W. A minimum of 1000 individually identified smoke detectors, in addition to other addressable devices, as well as conventional initiating device and notification appliance circuits, shall be supported within a single control panel. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit qualifications of the system installer as specified in this section. B. Submit a complete shop drawing package of the proposed system. C. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. D. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binder with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. E. Submit 1/8” scale reproducible sepia floor plans showing all rooms, stairways, corridors, horizontal exits, controlled HVAC units, sprinkler flow and control valves, and all fire alarm system components. The drawings shall include exact wire counts and types, and point address information for each device. Single line for walls may be used. F. Submit the following riser/wiring/connection diagrams: 1. Single line riser drawing indicating all system components and the vertical wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring. 2. Functional block diagram showing initiating device wiring, loop communications wiring, annunciator wiring, power supply wiring, indicating device wiring, power supply wiring, battery wiring, communications/modem wiring, etc. It is not necessary to show every initiating and indicating device on the riser diagram, but illustrate the wiring and connection of each type of device on each addressable loop. Indicate on the diagram the quantity of devices on each loop and the maximum allowable quantity of devices on each loop (to determine the number of spare addresses for future expansion). 3. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between HVAC fan units and the fire alarm system. 4. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between combination fire/smoke dampers and the fire alarm system. 5. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between self closing and automatically closing devices and the fire alarm system.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -5
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
6. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between sprinkler system flow switches, valve position switches, dry pipe low pressure monitoring switches, etc., and the fire alarm system. 7. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations to elevator controllers for primary and secondary recall functions. 8. Branch circuit wiring to the main control panel, sub-panels, and other devices in the system requiring 120 volt power. G. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. H. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list, the quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. I. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. J. Submit physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components or hardware. K. Submit power supply sizing and battery sizing calculations showing total fire alarm system power draw in the supervisory and alarm conditions. L. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. M. Submit voltage drop calculations for indicating devices. N. Submit complete mounting details and instructions for all equipment to be installed. O. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. P. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Only manufacturers that provide complete engineering, technical and support services to properly complete the project as designed are allowed. B. Provide the following, prepared by the manufacturer and supplier: 1. Certification of project and drawings. 2. Project management as required by Engineer and Owner. 3. Complete project testing and training to Engineers and Owners satisfaction. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Certification. 5. Service personnel to be NICET Level II Certified. 6. Maintained inventory levels to provide service parts as required by the specification. C. Provide fire alarm and detection systems conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publications including all amendments to these publications: 1. 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -6
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. 70: National Electrical Code, including Article 760. 3. 71: Protective Signaling Systems. 4. 72: National Fire Alarm Code. 5. 101: Life Safety Code. D. Construct and install all fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with the following publications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire Protection Signaling Systems. b. 268 and 268A Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. c. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. d. 464 Audible Signal Appliances. e. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. f. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. g. 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. International Fire Code (IFC). 4. International Mechanical Code (UMC). 5. International Building Code (IBC). 6. State Building Code 7. Minnesota Amendments to the IBC, IMC and IFC. 8. Local (City) Codes E. Provide components that are listed and cross listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer by Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (U.L.) and bear the “U.L.” label. Provide control equipment listed under U.L. category UOJZ as a single control unit. F. Qualifications of the Installer: 1. Before commencing work, submit data showing that the contractor/subcontractor has successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the names, locations, and the contact name and telephone number of at least six (6) such installations completed by the installer. Specify type and design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has performed satisfactorily for the preceding eighteen (18) months. 2. Provide evidence of completion of the required manufacturers’ training and experience by the contractor or have NICET Level II (or higher), Certified Fire Alarm or Special Hazard Associate Engineering Technician(s), as applicable, in their employ. 3. Installed system to be certified by Underwriter’s Laboratories for a period of five (5) years. The system must be covered by a maintenance contract, during this five (5) year term, by a U.L. certified service company. Installing contractor/subcontractor to furnish proof of qualification and listing to perform this service. Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -7
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
4. Experience of Installer: Accomplish installation by a Contractor with a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified fire alarm system. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications will be rejected. G. Manufacturer's Representative 1. Provide the services of a representative or technician licensed in the State of Minnesota from the manufacturer of the system, or a factory trained technician of the manufacturer of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. Supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. Provide the required instruction to the Owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming. 1.6
ZONING A. Initiating zones 1. Provide one initiating zone for each initiating device. 2. Provide a fire alarm control panel that supports at least 1000 automatic intelligent detectors. Provide loading of each loop card adhering to the following specifications: a. Load each loop card with the equal quantity of initiating points (e.g. if three loop cards are required for the system, load each loop card with 33% of the total number of system points, and homerun back to the main panel with the loop wiring ). b. Load each loop card to a maximum of 80% of the total number of initiating points possible for the loop card. B. Indicating zones 1. Provide one indicating zone for the interior indicating devices, and one indicating zone for the exterior sprinkler waterflow indicating device. 2. Provide 25% spare capacity on each interior indicating circuit for future indicating devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment supplied by manufacturers as listed herein are considered approved for bidding on this project. Where specific models are referred to, the intent is to establish a minimum level of features and performance. B. Systems manufactured by the following are approved for bidding purposes on this project. Approval for installation is subject to review and approval of shop drawings. 1. Existing Gamewell 7100 series
2.2
STANDBY BATTERIES A. Provide standby batteries as required for new devices in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 that are appropriately sized to operate the fire alarm system for a minimum of twentyfour (24) hours and then operating all indicating units for at least five (5) minutes after the 24 hours, plus an additional 10% spare capacity. B. Provide battery charger sized to fully charge all standby batteries within eight (8) hours after a full discharge cycle.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -8
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
C. Provide maintenance-free, sealed gel cell or sealed lead-acid batteries. Batteries which vent gases are not acceptable. D. Mount batteries inside the main control panel enclosure on the bottom. Separate battery enclosures are not acceptable. E. Provide monitoring of batteries, charger and associated wiring from the main control panel. F. Provide a voltmeter and ammeter to indicate battery voltage and charging current through the front LCD display on the fire alarm control panel. 2.3
INTELLIGENT AUTOMATIC PHOTOELECTRONIC SMOKE DETECTORS A. Provide automatic photoelectronic smoke sensors with the following specifications: 1. Utilizes light scattering principle from an internal infrared LED light source and reports the percent obscuration to the main control panel. 2. Factory set threshold at a nominal 1.5% light obscuration per foot (set via the main control panel) 3. Operates +14 to +120 degree F temperature, 10% to 93% humidity range. 4. Operates on single twisted pair cable. 5. Self-compensating drift compensation for maximum stability (set via the main control panel). 6. Integral red LED visible to the eye from below the detector to indicate an alarm condition and to indicate the polling pulse from the main control panel. 7. Mounts to base by twist locking motion. 8. U.L. 268 listed. B. Provide detector base with addressable communications module. C. Provide unique address assignment for each detector, either through DIP switches located in the communication module or assigned by the main control panel.
2.4
INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRONIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Provide automatic photoelectronic duct smoke sensors with the following specifications: 1. Utilizes light scattering principle from an internal infrared LED light source and reports the percent obscuration to the main control panel. 2. Factory set threshold at a nominal 1.5% light obscuration per foot (set via main control panel) 3. Self-compensating drift compensation for maximum stability (set via main control panel). 4. Operates at air velocities from 300-4000 ft/min, +32 to +120 degree F operating temperature, 10%-93% humidity range. 5. Operates on single twisted pair cable. 6. Smoke chamber blocks particles larger than 200 microns. 7. Integral red LED visible to the eye from outside the detector housing to indicate an alarm condition and to indicate the polling pulse from the main control panel. 8. Mounts to housing/base by twist locking motion.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -9
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
9. U.L. 268 listed. B. Provide detector base with addressable communications module. C. Provide unique address assignment for each detector, either through DIP switches located in the communication module or assigned by the main control panel. D. Provide HVAC duct-mounted housing and sampling tubes of the proper length to sample the entire width of the HVAC duct. Provide additional duct smoke detectors as required for ducts wider than the longest sampling tube recommended by the fire alarm manufacturer. E. Provide addressable control module and associated relay rated at 10 amps for connection to HVAC unit starter circuit for fan motor shutdown. Provide unique address assignment for each control module, either through DIP switches located in the control module or assigned by the main control panel. F. Provide addressable control module and associated relay for connection to combination smoke/fire dampers. Provide unique address assignment for each control module, either through DIP switches located in the control module or assigned by the main control panel. G. Provide remote test station for each duct detector in a readily accessible location near the unit. Provide engraved label on remote test station denoting the location, HVAC unit number, “RETURN” , damper location, etc. as required to identify the detector’s location and function. 2.5
ALARM INDICATING STROBES A. Provide alarm indicating strobes with the following specifications: 1. Semi-flush mounting to 4-inch square electrical box 2. 24 VDC operation powered from the main control panel. 3. In rooms larger than 1600 square feet a. Minimum 120 candela when measured on axis b. Rated for wall mount applications per UL 1971 at a minimum of 110 candela effective intensity. 4. Non-assembly rooms and corridors a. Minimum 75 candela when measured on axis b. Rated for wall mount applications per UL 1971 at a minimum of 15 candela effective intensity. 5. One to three flashes per second with a one (1) hertz synchronous flash pattern in accordance with ADA. 6. Red with white “Fire” lettering. Vandal-proof polycarbonate lens. 7. Supervised wiring 8. U.L. 1971 listed, ADA compliant
2.6
ALARM INDICATING HORN/STROBE UNIT A. Provide horn/strobe units with the following specifications: 1. Temporal sounding pattern of ½ to 1 sec ON, followed by ½ to 1 second OFF for three cycles, followed by a 1½ to 2 second OFF period for no less that 180 seconds.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -10
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
2. Semi-flush mounting to 4-inch square electrical box 3. 24 VDC operation powered from the main control panel. 4. A minimum 90 dB output at 10 feet on axis. 5. Strobe light with the specifications of the strobe unit specified elsewhere in this section. 6. Red with white “Fire” lettering. Vandal-proof polycarbonate lens. 7. Supervised wiring 8. U.L. 1971 listed , ADA compliant 2.7
SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide all conductors and cables in conformance with the National Electrical Code Section 760-30. B. Size all initiating and indicating circuit wiring as recommended by the system manufacturer. Provide minimum 14 AWG size for indicating and control circuits, and 18 AWG for initiating circuits. C. Provide shielded cable to minimize RFI if recommended by the manufacturer. D. Provide maximum individual circuit voltage drop of 15% at the most distant device; or less if necessary to meet the manufacturer’s operating voltage range for all devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete and fully operational fire alarm and detection system as described herein and as shown on the drawings. B. Install and wire all equipment in accordance with this specification, project drawings and shop drawings. C. Provide all wiring, conduit, junction boxes and outlet boxes required for the system, including terminations to initiating, indicating and control devices furnished by others. D. Install all wiring in concealed conduit in new construction. Provide surface raceway and boxes in finished areas of existing construction. Reuse existing conduit and boxes wherever possible. E. Paint all junction boxes red and label “Fire Alarm”. F. Provide plain English description of the location of each initiating device (zone). Coordinate wording of each device with the Owner. G. Provide a laminated floor plan showing all device locations, addresses and plain-English description of the location. Mount the plan adjacent to the annunciator panel in the building Engineer’s office. H. Provide color coded wiring throughout. Test all wiring for opens, shorts and grounds before system startup. I. Terminate all fire alarm wiring at terminal strips at the main control panel and all annunciator panels. Identify each cable with a number corresponding to a wiring diagram to be submitted in the O&M manuals. Neatly arrange of cabling around the sides of the cabinets to facilitate servicing of equipment and modules.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -11
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
J. Provide the required system programming. Coordinate with the Owner all plain English address points, alarm verification presets, passwords, communication dialer protocol information, etc. K. Coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system with Division 23. Verify locations of sprinkler waterflow switches and valve position switch locations with Division 23. Provide wiring and make terminations to sprinkler waterflow devices and valve position switches being installed by Division 23. L. Coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system with Division 15. Verify locations of smoke damper and EP switch locations with Division 23. Provide wiring and make terminations to EP switches being installed by Division 23. M. Provide and install power to magnetic door holders, including wiring and connections through the associated smoke detector. Wire existing magnetic door holder wiring through the associated smoke detector base for automatic closure if the smoke detector senses smoke. N. Mount end-of-line resistors in separate junction box located near the last device in the circuit or in last device. Clearly and permanently label "EOL RESISTOR" at each junction box cover plates and/or devices containing EOL resistors. O. Provide one 3/4 inch conduit and telephone cable from main fire alarm control panel to the telephone terminal board for tie-in to remote monitoring company. Verify location with Owner. P. Provide and connect wiring from the duct smoke detector control modules to associated motor controllers. Q. Install smoke detectors after the site is free from abnormal dust and dirt conditions, or provide manufacturer-approved protective cover over the device until the site is clean. R. Provide permanent labels for controls and indicators. S. Provide Form C relays where required to control line voltage equipment. T. Mount fire alarm devices to electrical boxes. U. Locate automatic detectors a minimum of 36 inches away from supply air diffusers. 3.2
PLENUM CABLE INSTALLATION A. Plenum rated conductors are to be installed above accessible, suspended ceilings. Provide conduit for all exposed areas. Where provided utilize cable trays. Do not utilize cable trays provided for voice/data cabling. B. Provide bushings on all conduit drops to outlet boxes for devices installed in walls. C. Route all cables to avoid access panels on equipment and in ceiling. D. Support all cable at 5’ intervals using “J” hooks. Fasten “J” hooks to building structure. Adhere to the manufacturer’s maximum fill for the cable support hardware. Bundle cables to eliminate sagging between “J” hooks. Install “J” hooks to eliminate sagging on ceilings, ducts, pipes, etc. E. Install cables without violating the minimum bend radius recommended by the cable manufacturer. F. Maintain at least a 12” spacing from fluorescent light fixtures and other EMI/RFI noise sources.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -12
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
G. No splices are allowed in individual runs of cables. If splices are required due to the construction schedule then splices are to be made within junction boxes. Notify engineer for inspection of junction boxes prior to installation of ceiling tiles. H. Maintain conductor shields at each connection point and tie to ground. Conductor shields are to be continuous throughout the entire run of cable. I. Provide test results indicating continuity of conductor shields. Replace all cables where shields have become nicked or cut. J. Terminate all conductors in flush outlet boxes behind devices. Provide stress relief. Provide grommets where cables enter HVAC equipment. K. Provide red plenum cable for fire alarm systems. 3.3
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Upon completion of the installation phase, test and adjust the system to insure proper operation. B. Test all operational features of the system at this time. C. Where required, make appropriate correction(s) and adjustments.
3.4
AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. Provide to the Engineer two (2) complete as-built manuals assembled in loose-leaf binders containing the following: 1. As-built system functional block diagrams. 2. Corrected copies of approved shop drawings 3. As-built system wiring diagram. 4. List indicating each device, location, address, label, etc. 5. Final operating sequence (step by step) for the system as tested and accepted by the Fire Marshal. 6. Hard copy printout of the complete fire alarm operating program, and a CD-ROM disk with programming software as written and customized for this project. 7. System operation manuals. 8. System maintenance manuals. 9. Name, address and phone number of the responsible service organization.
3.5
FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the Architect/Engineer, to the Owner's representative(s) and the Fire Marshal. B. Verify the following before scheduling the system demonstration: 1. System installation is complete. 2. System is fully operational. C. Verify the following before requesting final approval: 1. Owner training is complete. 2. As-built documentation is complete and turned over to the Engineer.
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -13
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
D. Provide a letter to the Owner certifying that the installation is complete, fully operational and successfully tested. E. Final acceptance of the system will be given upon completion of all of the above requirements. 3.6
SYSTEM GUARANTEE A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one (1) year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period.
3.7
MAINTENANCE A. Maintain a local service organization which is available to perform testing, inspection, repair and maintenance service on the system. B. Make available to the Owner a maintenance contract proposal, from the system supplier to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and test per year in compliance with NFPA-72 guidelines. END OF SECTION
Farmington Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00 -14
January 15, 2013 R11-1142.000
